Confessions of a Covert Agent

0

Psychological Operations are my specialty

Global Research

artofmentalwarfare.com

The author of the text below claims to be highly experienced in covert intelligence programmes and psychological operations – psyops. Interestingly, he charges that Robert Gates personally helped rig the presidential elections of 2000 an 2004 via massive computer fraud. Stating that this opinion is taken for granted throughout the US intelligence community, the author warns against future elections manipulated via computer fraud. He paints a vivid and disturbing picture of the levels of moral depravity now surging out of the Neocon volcano.

Worth reading and remembering.

Michael Carmichael

 

Michael Carmichael is the Director of the Planetary Movement, a nonprofit public affairs organization based in the United Kingdom and a frequent contributor to Global Research. 


The following article is excerpted from the upcoming edition of the book The Art of Mental Warfare by David Vincent.

The Art of Mental Warfare Editor’s Note

This message comes from an anonymous source believed to be within the US intelligence community. Some of the statements cannot be verified for authenticity, but the general themes and references speak for themselves. I’ve researched everything that is possible to research and it all stands up. I have no reason to believe any of this is untrue. Read it and decide for yourself.


Psychological Operations are my specialty. PsyOps

Everything I’ve done has been highly classified, all black programs and black operations. Some people I know thought I worked for the CIA, but it’s much more complicated than that. I’ve worked with people in the CIA, DIA, NSC, NSA, SAIC, Army Intel and many more lesser known agencies within the intelligence apparatus.

 

Before focusing on PsyOps I started out running covert combat missions, special operations. I was good at what I did and rose through the ranks fast. When the “War on Terror” started I was paid a lot of money to consult with private military contractors. When private paramilitary units needed to get the jobs done that paid the most money they would come to me with checkbooks filled with US taxpayer dough.

I’ve seen the worst things imaginable, hell on earth. Had friends die in my arms. Seen piles of rotten corpses. Seen men, women and children tortured. I’ve seen the eyes of terrified and confused children being sold into a vicious life of slavery and an early death.

I could get a lot more graphic, but you get the idea.

That was my life, and all along I was told that I was fighting for freedom and working for the “good guys.” What a ridiculous comment that is! In the black world, that is, in the covert world, there aren’t any “good guys” – just varying degrees of evil.

As Brigadier General Butler famously stated, “War is a racket.” It doesn’t have anything to do with freedom and democracy. It is not good fighting evil. There’s just a bunch of old greedy gangsta motherfuckers making obscene amounts of cash and breeding hatred, violence, terrorists and sex slaves.

The truth is, there is no oversight! Meaning, you can get away with anything, nothing is illegal because no one knows about it, or the few who do are either in on it or have a vested interest in keeping quiet. Whether you’re runnin’ guns, weapons, drugs, gold, diamonds, women, children, it just doesn’t matter. As long as the old guard gets their resources, it’s all good. And in the end, it’s all about power. The people who really run this planet know that natural resources (oil, water, coltan, cobalt, etc.) are the key. The “War on Terror” is just a front for a geo-strategic resource grab on a massive scale. Even the wars in Northern Africa are all about exploitation of resources. Once the good ole CIA boys at Bechtel did their NASA satellite studies of the Democratic Republic of Congo’s (DRC) mineral resources and discovered that it was the “richest patch of earth on the planet,” all hell broke loose! They figured out that the DRC has 80% of the world’s coltan, among many other vital resources. Without coltan, you can’t have any technology that requires a computer chip: computers, cell phones, satellites and weapon systems, of course. So Bechtel, the CitiBank boys, the World Bank, IMF and various covert elements have been supplying brutal regime after brutal regime in the region. Well over four million and counting have died there.

Same thing with oil in the Middle East. Do you think they really give a shit about Iraqi freedom? We worked hard to make you believe that, but c’mon, they don’t give a shit about the Iraqi people. They’ve killed about a MILLION of them! And that’s NOT an exaggeration! They sure as hell give a shit about Iraqi oil though. They also care about Saudi oil, and have a nice deal with a dictatorship that brutally oppresses their people. If freedom and democracy are the issue, how about freeing the Saudi people? Why do you think 15 of the 9/11 terrorists came from Saudi Arabia? We support a regime that oppresses those people. We support them because they cooperate on the oil front. So, why strike back at them? Let’s hit Iraq. They don’t give us any oil – let’s get’em!

If you look at the history of covert special operations, it’s all about securing a piece of land that has some valuable resource. Once the resource is identified, special ops figures out the most efficient way to suppress or extinguish the population that is unfortunate enough to live near it. Then the big companies come in, from the United Fruit Company to the Bechtels and Halliburtons of the world. That is the way it has been and still is, from John D. Rockefeller and Allen Dulles right through Kissinger, Bush Sr. and Cheney. Millions of innocent civilians have been slaughtered. Let me repeat that: Millions of innocent civilians have been slaughtered. And I’m not kidding you. These are evil motherfuckers and they are no friends of ours. These things don’t have anything to do with protecting the US people or standing up for freedom and democracy. They don’t give a shit about the average American. In this age of the global economy, the concept of nation state is obsolete. If only proud Americans could understand that. Pride in the American way is just another propaganda device for PsyOps agents – people like me – to use to manipulate you and make you think that black is white and white is black.

If you were to ask me who is a bigger threat to the people of the US, Cheney or bin Laden, or who has done more damage to the US, I would say Cheney without hesitation. Cheney, along with Bush Sr. and Kissinger, has been running the covert world for about 40 years now.

A little side note for you: I firmly believe Robert Gates, the current Secretary of Defense and Bush Sr.’s right-hand man in the covert world, used computer cryptography and software security assets to get Bush Jr. elected both times. I do not have direct knowledge of the operation, but research “Robert Gates,” “Bill Owens,” “electronic voting security,” “HAVA,” “VoteHere” and “Scientific Applications International Corp.” [We will post more on this in the near future.] The operation went so well that Gates was going to be made the first ever Director of National Intelligence. He turned down the job, but then took the Secretary of Defense position when Rumsfeld was removed from his public position. I don’t think there will ever be solid evidence linking directly to members of the administration; it’s all a tangled web of plausible deniability. But I do think it will eventually be proven that the elections were manipulated to deliver Bush the victory. Many people in the covert world take this for granted, as common sense. Please don’t confuse this as partisan propaganda. I don’t give a shit about the Democrat or Republican PsyOps mind-fuck dynamic. They’re just labels to divide a potentially powerful united US public.

It’s hard to get the average American to understand these things. Most everyone in this country has been mind-fucked since birth. For a very blatant example, you can look at the advertising industry and the way they have increased intensely their focus on the youth. It’s all about breeding impulsive emotionally driven consumers through repetition – over and over again – buy, buy, buy. You hear something enough and you internalize the message. It becomes something like the air you breathe, like gravity. It’s there, omnipresent, but you don’t realize it or consciously think about it. It becomes the spring from which your thoughts leap forth.

What it all boils down to is the exposure rate. You take a simple message and you repeat it over and over, such as mentioning Saddam and 9/11. You don’t have to say Saddam was involved in 9/11, because that is not true. You just have to mention Saddam and 9/11 in the same simple repetitive message thousands of times and people will support an attack on a country that didn’t have anything to do with 9/11 because they’ve been psychologically conditioned to link the two.

It’s psychological operations on a grand scale, mass psychology. The scientific art of manipulating public opinion is 100 years old now. PsyOps have evolved to the point, thanks to the all pervasive mass media, where we can make you believe, or at least passively accept, whatever we want you to. I secretly worked with the world’s most powerful media companies to get you to believe what “they” want you to believe. The media is the most efficient weapon of tyranny and oppression ever created. No need to physically control populations anymore when you can do it mentally – program it in, internalize the rules.

To give a little more background on publicly revealed psychological operations, in 1977, after the Congressional Church Committee investigated CIA manipulation of the news media, and right after George Bush Sr. left his post as the Director of the CIA, famed Watergate reporter Carl Bernstein searched a little deeper into what was known as Operation Mockingbird. He revealed that over 400 US journalists were actually carrying out clandestine CIA PsyOps services. Bernstein identified operations involving almost every major US news outlet, most notably The New York Times, CBS and Time magazine. The CIA responded to all of this with a “limited hangout.” A “limited hangout” is CIA speak for when classified information gets out and you have to make it seem as if you are “coming clean” with all the information on the operation, but in reality you are really just admitting part of the operation so you can cover up other deeper parts and continue the program. This worked very effectively for them, as the US public quickly moved on and this operation has largely been forgotten. Currently, I would estimate, with cable news and the Internet now, that there are well over a thousand covert operatives spread throughout the news media. They have a firm grip on television, newspapers, wire services, radio and magazines. However, with the Internet – that’s their weak spot – it’s too decentralized and difficult to control.

The Pentagon’s Information Operations Roadmap now describes the Internet as an enemy “weapons system.” The Pentagon doesn’t hide the fact that they want total control over information, or as they call it “information dominance.” They very plainly state that they seek to “control land, sea, space and information.” This is what they refer to as “full spectrum dominance.” If you don’t think they see this as a top priority, look at Iraq. The plan to “embed” journalists with the military in Iraq was a strategic operation that considered “journalism as part of psychological operations.” The journalists that weren’t “embedded” were considered “enemy combatants.” More journalists have been killed in Iraq than in any other war, and it is the US doing a large portion of the killing.

Before I go too far here, the point I want to make to the US public, the bottom line is that the most power crazed and greed addicted people are above the law and get away with everything. In the covert world rules do not apply. Democracy is a fairy tale. Nothing is what it seems, reality isn’t real. Through the looking glass Alice goes.

I’ve fought against it and got nowhere. I’ve informed people that I naively thought could do something, but nothing could be done. I took all the blood money I’ve made and donated it to humanitarian causes. Will it make a difference? No. Not in the grand scheme of things, but in the short run it may save a few people… maybe. And that’s all I can hope for at this point.

I’ve become so cynical! I live with guilt and cynicism weighing on my every move, my every thought.

When you’ve seen the things I have seen, been involved with the things I’ve been involved with, when you’ve spent the majority of your life living like I have, what do you do when you decide to give it up and get out? Can you ever get out?

I was able to get out, thus far, when no one I knew thought I could get out. But once you lived in the covert world, “normal” civilian life feels like a prison sentence. Then again, the covert world was a prison sentence.

I’ve been strongly advised to keep a very low profile and forget about things for a while. But I find it hard to just fade into the night when we are reaching an event horizon, a breaking point. Despite my cynicism, there is a part of me that knows I have to keep fighting. The stakes are just too high, higher then they’ve ever been. The human species is in serious trouble, facing a set of crises unlike anything we’ve ever faced before. Unless these covert forces are exposed, and ultimately eliminated, I don’t see how we can even begin to make the bold actions that we need to start making now – and I mean right fucking now! These covert forces are a root cause and driver, a cancer spreading through the system and planet.

As far as I can tell, you can’t change the system from within the intelligence community itself. This includes the Senate Intel Committee. If the urgently needed changes are ever to happen, it has to come from the US public. Now I know first hand how the American public has been conditioned to be apathetic and not get involved in politics and has been fed a steady diet of misinformation. But propaganda only works to the point where the population being propagandized is not feeling the direct impact and negative consequences on a personal level in their daily lives. That’s why the draft played a large role in bringing an end to Vietnam. We need another draft to push the mainstream over the edge and into action, but the façade is beginning to crack – 9/11 had some effect, the war in Iraq certainly, Katrina, massive job loses and an economic downturn that has really just begun have all factored into creating a critical mass. Even the most propagandized population in the history of civilization will have to act when their very survival and well- being is directly threatened and impacted. I just hope enough people will understand the need for bold decisive action now, before it’s too late.

So, to the people who have awareness of the problems facing us, if I could give advice, it would be this:

1. Try the Bush Administration for war crimes. If the case could ever be brought to court, the evidence to convict is definitely there. This is why the administration has been strongly against the International Criminal Court. If we are to begin repairing this country, and the world, we must begin by showing these power crazed and covert forces that they are accountable. If we can convict someone like Cheney, we will send a powerful message to the covert world. If we let them walk, we will keep having these problems. New people will follow them and take their place.

2. Investigate where all the military spending has been vanishing off to. There are literally trillions of taxpayer dollars unaccounted for. This money is fueling the covert world and terrorism in general. As part of this, I would include an investigation into war profiteering as well.

3. Make it mandatory that all electronic voting machines must have a 100% verifiable paper trail.

4. Get people into the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) who will smash the current media ownership rules. The concentration of media ownership is the foundation of the covert power structure. Without that, the whole thing is a house of cards. That’s why the FCC is currently trying to ram through rules that will further consolidate media ownership before the Bush administration leaves office. As part of this, it is pivotal that we protect the open architecture of the Internet. The media belongs to the people, as does the government, in theory anyway, but we need an information system that actually serves the public interest.

5. Declare a national and global emergency on the environmental front. We have already reached the breaking point. We need organized, governmental, policy driven, bold action now.

6. We need to address entities that now have power over the Constitution, such as the undemocratic and unelected corporate global governing structure – institutions like the World Trade Organization (WTO) and the International Monetary Fund (IMF) and “agreements” like NAFTA and DR-CAFTA, to name a few. Most Americans don’t even know what these power structures are, let alone that they have power that supersedes the Constitution. We must also address the National Security Act, that’s where the ultimate power of our country lies. The National Security Act has effectively made the Constitution meaningless and is the primary driver of the covert world. The PATRIOT Act and various other newly granted powers must also be drastically revised or eliminated completely in order to protect our civil liberties.

7. Lastly, we need to have publicly financed elections. As long as we have a system that requires candidates to raise tens of millions of dollars to even be considered for office, we will have politicians who bend over backwards for the richest one percent and the most powerful elements of society at the citizens’ expense. An important aspect of this has to be a requirement for large media companies to provide candidates with free airtime. Candidates have to spend the majority of their money on advertising in the mainstream media. That’s why the major news media spend so much time focusing on who is raising the most money, because they are the ones who end up with all that money. Once we have publicly financed elections and free airtime for candidates, we will get people in office who will work in the interests of the public because they are not beholden to the large and powerful entities. When you have politicians depending on the public instead of the private sector for survival, all the issues mentioned above could be addressed because they won’t have to fear the withdrawal of support from large corporations and the wealthy and powerful who do not want these things to happen. This will also enable us to eliminate tax breaks for the richest one percent, put an end to corporate welfare practices, and stop funding for obscene military and prison industrial companies that are profiting off of disasters and no longer serve security interests. Then we can redirect that money into environmental, education, health care and social security programs, to mention a few.

In the current political environment this may all sound like an unrealistic pipe dream, but these are the seven pivotal things that MUST happen. If all seven don’t happen within the next few years, we will have set the world on a disastrously irreversible course. This is “the unfortunate reality of our current situation.” It is not going to be easy, but you better start fighting for it now, while we still can.

It really does come down to us. You have to personally, in your daily life, do everything you can. With enough public pressure all of these things are achievable. Once we get a small portion of the population acting in this direction, it will quickly catch on and spread. Even though the overwhelming majority of the US population is incredibly propagandized on the surface, just underneath is the realization of the need for mass action. They just need leaders to point this out. The mainstream just needs a spark. Do what you can to set it off. It is a matter of unprecedented significance.

Hillary Clinton is booed at campaign event

0

By Alex Spillius

Hillary Clinton has been booed by fellow Democrats as a new poll shows she had slipped behind Barack Obama, her main opponent in the race for the party’s presidential nomination.

  • Toby Harnden: Republicans engulfed by sleaze
  • More on the US elections

    During an interview in front of 3,000 Democratic supporters, Mrs Clinton was jeered over her stance on contentious proposals to allow illegal immigrants to become citizens.

     
    Hillary Clinton: The presidential hopeful was booed by fellow Democrats as new poll shows she has fallen behind Barack Obama
    Sen Clinton addresses the meeting in Iowa

    Senator Clinton, who addressed the meeting in Des Moines, Iowa, by telephone, was asked whether, if elected President, she would “make a decision to give undocumented immigrants a path to citizenship” during her first 100 days in office.

    “I have been favouring a plan to citizenship for years,” Mrs Clinton said.

    “I voted for it in the Senate, I have spoke out about it around Iowa and the country and in my campaign. And as President, comprehensive immigration reform will be a high priority for me.”

    But illegal immigrants would not be granted amnesty and would have to “earn” citizenship, she said, sparking sporadic booing from some Left-wing activists in the audience.

  • The jeering then spread throughout the crowd, grew louder and continued even after Mrs Clinton hung up the telephone at the end of the interview.

    With just a month before the first votes are cast to determine the Democratic candidate, the reception is symptomatic of an apparent growing antipathy toward the former First Lady.

    A poll by The Des Moines Register newspaper shows Senator Obama has overtaken Mrs Clinton in Iowa, the first state to vote for its preferred presidential candidate.

    Though Mrs Clinton is still considered the leading candidate nationally, another Iowa poll, conducted by the American Research Group, shows support for her among women, the demographic underpinning her campaign, had dropped 10 points in a month.

    Mr Obama’s push to become America’s first black president is expected to receive a boost this week, when billionaire television star Oprah Winfrey joins him on the campaign trail.

    Will The 2008 Vote Be Fair?

    ‘NOW’ VIDEOS: Will The 2008 Vote Be Fair?

    PBS Explores Many Of The Ways Republicans And The DoJ Are Working To Disenfranchise Democratic Leaning Voters

    Guest Blogged by Alan Breslauer

    Will The 2008 Vote Be Fair? That was the topic addressed by host David Brancaccio and former Justice Department official David Becker on NOW last Friday. Part I (at left, 10:01) begins with a discussion of Photo ID laws to prevent the “invented problem” of voter fraud. The discussion continues at the 6:15 mark on the topics of voter caging and voter purging — when the DoJ requires jurisdictions to purge their voter rolls when they do not match census estimates.

    Part II (at right, 9:50) begins with Becker explaining how the Bush 43 Justice Department has subverted its traditional mission: “During about a five year span, not one single case was brought on behalf of African Americans in the Voting Section of the Civil Rights Division”. Becker goes on to state that policies were established that favored Republicans and disfavored Democrats in an effort to “gam[e] the system” to retain power.

    Next, Brancaccio and Becker explore how the U.S. Attorney scandal fits in to the bigger picture. Becker: “The DoJ, especially under Alberto Gonzales, was being used as an arm of the right wing of the Republican Party to effectuate partisan gains in elections”. Finally, the program concludes with a discussion on voting machines and Florida’s 13th District.

    Karl Rove spending more time with his family?

    And you thought Karl Rove was spending more time with his family

    Ok, by now, they probably don’t really need Karl Rove. I mean, what he did and sometimes still does was not exactly rocket science, and by now you’d think that everyone who is willing to become a low-down dirty rotten crook and liar would have learned how to do this stuff.

    And so they have. If I’m reading this report from Johann Hari of the Independent (via the Seattle Post Intelligencer) properly, this was probably hatched in a brainstorming session at the Giuliani campaign and has gone all feral and viral since then.

    Hari is very good at explaining to non-Merkins how sensitive the U.S. Electoral College system could be to phony attempts to democratize the system in one state alone — one strategic state, California — while maintaining the system elsewhere:

    Today, the Republicans are trying to exploit the discontent with the Electoral College among Americans in a way that would rig the system in their favor. At the moment, every state apart from Maine and Nebraska hands out its Electoral College votes according to a winner-takes-all system. This means that if 51 percent of people in California vote Democrat, the Democrats get 100 percent of California’s electoral votes; if 51 percent of people in Texas vote Republican, the Republicans get 100 percent of Texas’ electoral votes.The Republicans want to change this — but in only one Democrat-leaning state. California has gone Democratic in presidential elections since 1988, and winning the sunny state is essential if the Democrats are going to retake the White House. So the Republicans have now begun a plan to break up California’s Electoral College votes and award a huge chunk of them to their side.

    They have launched a campaign called California Counts, and they are trying to secure a statewide referendum in June to implement their plan. They want California’s electoral votes to be divvied up not on a big statewide basis, but according to the much smaller congressional districts. The practical result? Instead of all the state’s 54 Electoral College votes going to the Democratic candidate, around 20 would go to the Republicans.

    If this were being done in every state, everywhere, it would be an improvement. California’s forgotten Republicans would be represented in the Electoral College, and so would Texas’ forgotten Democrats. But by doing it in California alone, they are simply giving the Republicans a massive electoral gift. Suddenly it would be extremely hard for a Democrat ever to win the White House; they would need a landslide victory everywhere else to counter this vast structural imbalance against them on the West Coast.

    Fiendish, yes? And read on for the profiles of the particular fiends involved.

    We are facing some seriously unpleasant people in North America these days, are we not? It is still hard for me to accept that the bastards really are such bastards and do have such power. But it seems that they are, and they do.

    There are some nice North Americans, though. H/t on this story to my friend strategerie at The Little Pink Clubhouse, aka The Heartbreak Blog, who is always there with the chocolate and the kleenex.

    http://www.pogge.ca/archives/001695.shtml

    The Republic of Yorkshire?

    2

    Did you know that there is an entity called Yorkshireurope and that they have an embassy in Brussels?

    Avenue de Cortenbergh 118-1000 Brussels to be precise.

    Even more curiously they refer to themselves as an “intelligence agency”.

    They are funded by Yorkshire Forward , who’s logo is curiously close to being a swastika.

    One wonders, who exactly has voted for any of this?

    The head of Yorkshire Forward is this guy, where his biography page declares that “He is currently Chair of Magna Holdings Ltd., a property development and investment company

    hmmm… do a smell a conflict of interest?

    He of course completely unelected and yet in charge of EU regional policy in Yorkshire.
    Also from his bio:

    “He believes that continuous learning is critical to success in a fast-changing world.”
    Common Purpose?

    But I disgress. Yorkshire Forward’s accounts are available from here. On page 40 we learn of an body called the “Yorkshire and Humber Assembly” – is that the Yorkshire regional parliament? A parliament that nobody voted for?

    We learn on page of the (very glossy and very expensive to produce) report that :

    Yorkshire Forward has 431 staff
    It’s budget in 2006/07 was £354 million
    It’s work is scrutinised by the Yorkshire Regional Assembly
    note how it isn’t the House of Commons doing the scrutiny

    Total staffing costs for Yorkshire Forward amount to just under £18 million (page 85).

    Then on page 97 we get acknowledgement that from 1st October 2007 Yorkshire Forward received “delegated authority” from the DCLG.

    Common Purpose appear on page 104, under the register of board members interests

    Mr Riordan is the chief executive of Yorkshire Forward. On his bio it’s mentioned that he represented “the UK in United Nations negotiations on climate change and endangered species” despite having no qualifications in environmental science. He’s got a modern history degree from Oxford.

    He has never been elected to any political office.

    Getting back to the regional assembly, it’s website is over here. On their assembly structures page it’s mentioned that they are overseen by a “scrutiny board”.

    “The Scrutiny Board is made up of full Assembly members and is chaired by the Deputy Chair of the Assembly. If a review requires specialist knowledge there is the facility to co-opt two additional members.”

    So this regional assembley scrutinises itself. How convienient…

    The assembly membership is available over here. Members are not elected – they are “nominated”.

    And

    Wherever possible members make decisions on the basis of consensus. The membership is made up of 60% Local Authorities and 40% Social, Economic and Environmental Partners.

    consensus = common purpose?

    The assembly will cost £2.89 million to run.

    From the regional assembly meeting minutes some curious aspects are mentioned:

    2010 appears to be a deadline of sorts. And the mention of “Regional Ministers” is interesting. I wonder who’ll they’ll be reporting to.

    http://johntrenchard.blogspot.com/2007/12/republic-of-yorkshire.html

    DARPA: A world of total surveillance

    0

    DARPA: a world of total surveillance is not science fiction.

    The Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency:

    DARPA’s mission is to maintain the technological superiority of the U.S. military and prevent technological surprise from harming our national security by sponsoring revolutionary, high-payoff research that bridges the gap between fundamental discoveries and their military use.


    LiveLeak

    Cops Taser Mentally Handicap Woman

    0

    Cops Now Taser an Unarmed Scared Mentally Handicap Woman into Submission

    Mentally Disabled Unarmed Woman Tortured and Shocked repeatedly with Taser

    Officer denied using weapon, suspended after investigation

    Amanda Beets is 28 years old, but she still refers to herself as a child, even when discussing her own little girl, Ashley.

    As she recalls the events of March 21, 2005, when she was shocked repeatedly by a Knoxville Police Department Taser although she wasn’t fighting with officers, she describes the experience in the plainest of terms: “It hurt. It really hurt.”


    LiveLeak

    Beets lives in a small house on Connecticut Avenue in North Knoxville with her mother, Carol Dianna Lewis. A bout with spinal meningitis when Beets was an infant left her with a speech impediment and impaired mental functioning, problems that have kept her from striking out on her own.

    Lewis is anything but evasive when asked who started the chain of events that led up to the Tasing of her daughter: She did, by leading Knox County deputies on a car chase that began in Halls and ended a few minutes later in her driveway.

    She readily concedes that the deputies – and the two KPD officers who showed up at her house to provide backup – had every reason in the world to be scared and angry after the lengthy pursuit, which ended in her arrest on charges of evading arrest, driving on a revoked license and simple possession of marijuana.

    Lewis said she understands that what she did was wrong. What she doesn’t understand is why her daughter, who she says functions at the level of a 12- or 13-year-old girl, was hurt in the process.

    When Lewis pulled into her driveway, she was swiftly taken into custody by the numerous officers who responded to the scene. Beets was inside the house with Ashley but ran into the driveway after hearing several loud bangs that she mistook for gunshots.

    Terrified that her mother

    was dead or dying, she raced toward where Lewis was being subdued by deputies. She began screaming at the officers. She was grabbed by KPD Officer Brian Headrick, who was soon joined by KPD Officer Chad Riggs.

    What happened next is unclear, although more than a dozen people were interviewed during the ensuing Internal Affairs probe. Beets said she was kicked by someone and that Riggs used the Taser on her three times even though she wasn’t struggling with officers.

    Riggs admitted that he got out of his cruiser with the Taser in his hand, although KPD’s rules at the time prohibited officers from deploying the weapons without getting a supervisor’s approval. He said Beets seemed to be attacking Headrick and that during the melee, Beets ran into him. He said he did not know if the Taser came in contact with Beets but that it was “possible,” records show.

    “Headrick said Beets was yelling and ‘flailing her arms around’ but did not try to attack him,”

    according to the IA report filed later on the incident. “He

    described her behavior as ‘disorderly’ and also said it was obvious by this point she was mentally challenged or ‘there was something wrong with her.’ He said at one point he, Beets and Riggs were all in close proximity to each other and he ‘heard a Taser going off’… for ‘five or six seconds.’ ”

    Beets was released without being charged, and Riggs later told Headrick that he hadn’t used the Taser and therefore didn’t need to fill out a use-of-force report, records state.

    Headrick reported his suspicions to his supervisors, who quickly contacted Beets and her family to find out what

    their accounts of the incident were. Riggs’ supervisors were able to use a computer printout from Riggs’ Taser to confirm

    that the weapon had been discharged three times, and a physician who examined Beets said she had “dual Taser burns on her upper back, chest, neck and on (her) breasts,” the IA report states.

    Sgt. Keith DeBow, who heads KPD’s Taser training program, said “he felt it was ‘highly unlikely’ that Riggs’ Taser could have been activated accidentally three times,” the IA report notes.

    Riggs was later suspended for 10 days without pay after the IA investigation concluded that he’d used excessive force and failed to make a use-of-force report. He resigned about six months after the incident.

    Beets has since sued the

    police department, Headrick

    and Riggs for $1 million in

    compensatory and punitive damages in Knox County Circuit Court.

    Headrick, who is still a KPD officer, couldn’t be reached for comment, and Riggs’ attorney, Richard W. Krieg, said he’s advised his client to not discuss the case.

    KPD officials and Beets’ attorney, Herbert S. Moncier, declined to comment on the incident, citing the pending litigation.

    Beets says she was traumatized both mentally and physically by the event and wants the police department to make sure that more officers like Headrick are encouraged to turn in officers who break the rules. “I want to stop this before another kid gets hurt,” she said.

    Lewis said that she has nothing but praise for Headrick, whom she describes as “one of God’s own.” Lewis, who has a history of low-level criminal offenses, said that before the incident with her daughter, she didn’t trust police officers to be moral. But Headrick’s actions and the swift response of KPD supervisors, she said, convinced her that KPD genuinely wants to do the right thing.

    When it comes to Riggs, however, Lewis is clear that an administrative punishment isn’t satisfactory.

    “I admitted I did wrong; I pleaded guilty to what I

    was charged with,” she said.

    “He assaulted my daughter. … I would prefer that he was put in jail.”

    Revenue chief: CD loss showed systemic failure

    0

    Will Woodward
    The Guardian

    A Government mail van outside No 10 Downing Street
    A government mail van outside 10 Downing Street, with the words ‘trusted to deliver’ on the side. Photograph: Kirsty Wigglesworth/AP
     

    The loss of the child benefit CDs containing 25m names, as well as six other significant breaches since April 2005, “may well” indicate systemic failure at Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs, its acting chairman acknowledged yesterday.But Dave Hartnett told MPs he had seen no evidence that senior civil servants were complicit in the rule breach which led to the loss of the two discs on their way from the HMRC centre in Tyne and Wear to the National Audit Office.

    Yesterday the Metropolitan police offered a £20,000 reward for the return of the discs, after more than two weeks of searching, including two HMRC offices, four depots belonging to the courier firm TNT and a rubbish tip in Kent. Thirty-two detectives are still hunting for the discs.

    “The key issue around that data is that it shouldn’t have left our premises anyway,” Hartnett told the Commons Treasury sub-committee. “The National Audit Office didn’t use the procedure. We didn’t release the data through the procedure.”

    Asked whether it represented a “systemic failure”, Hartnett said: “I think that it may well do.” Hartnett replaced Paul Gray, who resigned last month.

    Other breaches included the loss of a disc with banking information in 2006. “We introduced at that stage more stringent rules. We set out to learn lessons in relation to security,” Hartnett said.

    Emails revealed by the National Audit Office showed that several officials knew about the release of the child benefit data. But Hartnett said last night: “I have seen absolutely no evidence – other than the one email that has been commented on in the media – anyone in the senior civil service, at any level, was copied into this.”

    The Star of the Magi: Old Story, New Gifts

    By Courtney Roberts
    RINF Alternative News
     
    The year having come full circle, Christmas is upon us, once again. Each Christmas, we are faced with the familiar, yet mysterious images of the star and the Magi, the three wise men bearing gifts, crossing both the desert and the sky in search of the baby Jesus. The Magi of Matthew’s Gospel are such a fixture that Christmas wouldn’t be complete without them, and yet, even after 2,000 years, they still seem shockingly out of context in the Christian gospels; and all our attempts at explaining them-or explaining them away-have only deepened the mystery.

    The inclusion of the Star of Bethlehem, with all its pagan astrological implications, in the overture to the First Gospel, has raised so many awkward questions for orthodox Christianity that one has to wonder how it ever made it into the Bible in the first place. So why would the authors (and editors) of the Christian gospels choose Zoroastrian Magi and astrology to herald the coming of Jesus Christ? Did the Magi have some special significance then that we have since lost? After all, the New Testament narrative opens with them. Why? Who were they, and why would Matthew imply that their astrology lead them to Jesus? 

    In pursuing answers to questions like these, I’ve come to believe that Matthew’s Magi have much more to offer than the traditional gifts for Jesus ascribed to them. In fact, once we begin to understand who the Magi were, how their astrology informed their beliefs, and how much those beliefs influenced their Jewish neighbors, some strikingly obvious conclusions emerge about their appearance. The priority of this story’s position within the Christian Bible, in the opening chapters of the very first book, is actually a testament to the widespread influence of the Persian Magi and their astrology in the rise of monotheism and Messianic expectations throughout the ancient world. Ultimately, Matthew’s Magi challenge our traditional understanding of how the three great monotheisms-Judaism, Christianity, and Islam-evolved, and might even be telling us something new about our future prospects together.

    Who were the Magi?

    The Magi were a hereditary order of priests and sages; wise men, if you will, who originated among the tribes of Media. The region the Magi knew as Media is now north-western Iran, bordering the southern shores of the Caspian Sea, approximately halfway between Baghdad and Tehran. The roots of their tribe extend back into the dim mists of prehistory, but from the 6th century BCE on, the Magi served as the official priesthood of the Persian religion, and of the Persian royal house. 

    In the West, where we traditionally revere the Greeks and Romans, we too often fail to acknowledge the far-reaching cultural and religious contributions of the Persians, their longstanding foes; and ours, by default. Meanwhile, Judeans living at the time of Christ were very much aware of the contributions of their Persian neighbors. Greece and Rome had not been kind to the Jews, whereas the nearby Parthian Persians and their Magi had long been their allies against these brutal foreign invaders. 

    Matthew and his contemporaries knew that the Jews were forever indebted to the Persians, who liberated them from the Babylonian captivity (ca. 538 BCE), and saved their nation from certain extinction. In repatriating the Jews, and authorizing the rebuilding of the burnt-out sites of Jerusalem and its temple, the Persians and their Magi leveraged a lot of input into the beliefs and practices of the Jewish religion.

    The arrival of Alexander in 331 BCE, and the Hellenist Empire that survived his fateful demise, marked the beginning of hard times for both the Jews and the Persians. By the time of Christ, both nations shared a common messianic dream: the advent of a saviour king who would destroy the Greeks, and the Romans after them, and restore the rightful reign of God. The Magi were the main propagandists behind this popular messianism, and their reputation as master astrologers was put to good use in this cause.

    The Magi’s Astrology

    There’s no doubt that the Persian Magi were great astrologers, and Matthew and his contemporaries would have recognized them as such. Unlike the Greeks and the Romans, the Persians had their own distinct brand of religious astrology. For them, God’s time was organized into astrological millenniums; 1,000 year periods ruled by the signs of the zodiac, wherein timely conjunctions of Jupiter and Saturn signaled the rise of new empires and dynasties, great prophets and new religions, and more rarely still, heralded the dawn of a new world age, or aeon. Their astrology was rooted in the idea of the apocalypse; the uniquely Persian belief that the universe was created with an intrinsic astrological order to serve as a staging ground for the ongoing, and ultimate battle between good and evil; the outcome of which had already been decided long before time began. Their astrology thoroughly permeated their religion, and vice versa. 

    The Sons of Zoroaster

     By the time Matthew composed his Gospel (ca. 75 CE?), the Persian religion of the Magi harbored long-standing astrological traditions about a coming world savior, or messiah, who was to be born of a virgin. Ultimately, the Magi were expecting three world saviors, or ‘sons of Zoroaster,’ over the course of consecutive millenniums, and they were all to be born of virgins at the appropriate astrological intervals. The first two sons would help defeat evil, and spread the good religion throughout the world. The coming of the third savior would trigger the apocalypse, the ultimate battle between the forces of good and evil at the end of the world.

    These ancient Persian traditions had tremendous bearing on the development of Jewish Messianic expectations, both politically and religiously. Matthew’s Judeans were inspired in their endless uprisings against their Greek and Roman overlords by the Persian religion and its astrology. Matthew’s inclusion of the Magi in his gospel reminds us that many Judeans still expected God to work through the Persians, and in concert with their astrology, to bring about their long-awaited redeemer king.

    These same Persian traditions formed a vibrant part of early Islam, and shine through the work of the 8th and 9th century astrologers of the Golden Age of Baghdad. There, scholars like Masha’allah and ‘Umar Tiberiades preserved the unique religious chronologies of the Magi; only now, their astrological millenniums, and the cycle of Jupiter and Saturn conjunctions, heralded the birth of Christ and Christianity, as well as the birth of Muhammad and Islam. For these astrologers, the first two sons of Zoroaster had come. The good religion had been spread.

    This is the astrology of the Magi. This is what the author of Matthew has been trying to tell us for two thousand years.

    Inclusive Monotheism

     In their astrology, the Magi focused on the big picture and the overarching God’s-eye view. They operated within an ‘inclusive monotheism,’ in which all who worship the one God are one and always have been. The coming of Jesus Christ and Muhammad; even the rebirth of Second Temple Judaism from the ashes of the Babylonian captivity, meant the fulfillment of their ancient Persian prophecies; prophecies which predicted the triumph and spread of the worship of the one God, the Good God, throughout the world. We lost that thread long ago, and instead, stubbornly cling to the medieval, man-made myths of ‘exclusive monotheism’- orthodox traditions that each claim their own separate origin in a special revelation, and then fight over the details. These claims are rooted in our very human failings rather than in history, for Judaism, Christianity and Islam are all branches of an old, old tree. With each passing day, and each new loss in the war on terror, the inclusive monotheism of the Magi; their most precious gift, looks more relevant than ever.

    Even if the Magi never ventured across the desert as he says, Matthew would have done well to invent them. His case for Jesus, as both the King of the Jews and as a world savior, was boosted immeasurably by their appearance, and by the implied coincidence of his birth with their astrological indicators. So it is that over 2,000 years on, Matthew’s Magi cross our horizon again, bearing new gifts this time, in the truths they reveal to us about ourselves, and in their lasting testament to the common religious heritage we all share; or at least that we could share, and better late than never.

     

    For more on this fascinating topic, read Courtney Roberts’ The Star of the Magi: The Mystery That Heralded the Coming of Christ (published in October 2007 by New Page Books).

    Courtney Roberts, M.A. is a writer, teacher, and consultant, originally from Miami, FL. Her work reflects a unique perspective: a real passion for the ‘big picture’ that combines cosmology, religious studies and history. She developed her specialization in the role of astrology in religion, particularly Persian Zoroastrianism and western monotheism, while completing a Masters degree in Cultural Astronomy at Bath Spa University in England. Courtney maintains a busy schedule, writing, teaching, and lecturing to audiences of every persuasion all around the world, and can be contacted at www.thestarofthemagi.com.

    Lost Lands, Forgotten Realms

    By Dr. Bob Curran
    RINF Alternative News
     

    Atlantis! Lemuria! Shamballha! Shangri-La! The very names conjure up images of sunken cities or forgotten lands hidden in the impenetrable jungle or amongst mountain peaks somewhere beyond the edges of civilization. They also suggest ancient and powerful cultures and technologies long vanished from the world, remnants of which-if popular imagination is to be believed-may still lie slumbering in the caverns far beneath the earth. Is there any truth in such beliefs?

     

    Allied to the names of these ancient places are further stories of legendary sites-places like the Garden of Eden in Christian lore, Ygdrassil, the World-Tree of Viking myth or even Davy Jones’ Locker, recently made famous by the film series Pirates of the Caribbean.

     

    So strong has the lure of these distant, exotic and often fabulous places proven to be that many men have gone in search of them, either as individuals or at the head of expeditions, some of which have been provided by their own countries. A good number have set out to find wealth or land, some have done so for political reasons, and a few for the sheer adventure of the enterprise. Some have returned empty-handed, a number have perished in the attempt, and some have simply vanished, thus fuelling speculation that there might be some truth in such legends.

     

    But it was not only lost explorers who fuelled the popular idea of distant realms. Television and film makers took up the challenge of actually creating these worlds and giving them some sort of immediacy. Popular films on the big screen such as The Lost World, Journey to the Centre of the Earth and even the more recent remake of King Kong, set on a forgotten island where a giant gorilla dwells, have speculated about what sort of environments these places might have. Were they, for example, swarming with prehistoric creatures or homes to advanced cultures that might fight to guard their privacy or be preparing to attack us in our own locations? Indeed the idea of some monstrous race, lurking in the depths far beneath us and armed with futuristic weapons is a common thought which has barely diminished and still stays in the public nightmares, even today. On the other hand, the possibility of a place of monastic tranquillity, shut away from a turbulent world, was also encapsulated in Frank Capra’s 1937 film Lost Horizon, sparking a popular belief that perhaps such a place might well exist tucked away somewhere in the high Eastern mountains. Such a suggestion may still remain, for although orbiting satellites have mapped most of our world for us, there is still a suggestion that in some remote region there is still someone or something-some race of men or creatures-which remains undetected and may either aid or else turn upon mankind at a future date. The possibilities of lost worlds seem endless.

     

    Lost lands have also provided inspiration for some well known writers and appear in many works of literature from Edward Bulwer-Lytton’s 1870 masterpiece The Coming Race to Jack Vance’s 1980s Lyonesse trilogy. Such books have kept these places in the public eye and have stirred the imaginations of countless readers. But why has interest in them remained so strong throughout the years? Why, for example, has the Atlantis story achieved such a hold on popular thought? And why has Shangri-La stayed at the foremost of our minds, becoming almost a cliché?

     

    For some they represent, for example, no more than our deepest hopes and desires for an ideal state of being. They may, as they did for Adolph Hitler and the Nazi Party of Germany, symbolize the home of some form of idealized beings or men whose wisdom is far beyond that of the mundane world. Or they may, as they did for Madam Blavatsky, suggest the original cradle of mysticism which surrounds our existence. They may even represent some idealized state towards which mankind can strive.

     

    And, of course, they also stand for worlds of wonder. The idea of a kingdom such as Lyonesse, drowned forever beneath the freezing waters of the ocean through the petulant whim of a spoiled daughter; of a nightmarish city like Irem, raised in the desert by unseen demonic forces; of the lost land of Bimini where gushing water confers eternal youth on all those who drink from a wonderful fountain there, all excite and entice us. The vision of the lost golden city of El Dorado, hidden deep in the South American jungle or the less material treasure of contentment to be found in the mystical monastic city of Shangri-La somewhere amongst the towering Himalayan peaks, lures something in all of us. In earlier times, those destinations were a goal that might be attained through adventure and daring. In many ways, they also represented the last great challenge of Mankind.

     

    As travel and new communications cause our perceptions of the world to shrink and become more routinely predictable, these places represent the last wild and unknown locations and may still offer a chance for exploration, excitement and danger. Because of this, the idea of lost lands, vanished places and long-disappeared civilizations will not go away.

    9/11: Irresponsible Science – POP MEC & Dr Seffen

    By J A Blacker
    RINF Alternative News 

    Popular Mechanics likes to go around telling people what makes a real MAN, but if they were real men they would admit when they have screwed up and have got their 911 theory all wrong.

    Popular Mechanics were given a fair challenge via Open letter – Prove your ludicrous 9/11 theories in public

    That published challenge was given them on Saturday, 06 October 2007 and still to date, two months later 05 December 2007 they have given every other type of advice – but have FAILED To show even one slither of evidence to back up their Physically Impossible 911 twin Towers Gravity Collapse THEORY!

    No Doubt they are waiting for the paper from Dr Keith A. Seffen in February 2008 to be published – so they can site that as their proof, but guess what, we have top notch analysis of the Seffen paper & its components, and to say it is a work of FICTION is an understatement. It defies all commons sense or scientific honesty.

    Here are but a few problems of dishonesty within the Seffen paper titled:

    K A Seffen, “Progressive Collapse of the World Trade Centre: a Simple Analysis”, (2007) ASCE Journal of Engineering Mechanics, in press

    1) The constant loading at the start of the deformation has been neglected on the basis that it is a small contribution to the deformation, yet this can not be so, that it is the longest timescale involved.

    To quote a trivial example of such a deformation, a plastic shopping bag becomes taut for most loads, but when the load gets too large, it does not snap immediately. It creeps for a while under that constant load, before giving way to a large deformation (After the creeping has happened the load required to cause this large deformation is smaller than that required to cause the creeping itself), and eventually snapping. In this case, Seffen’s P* corresponds to the AVERAGE load required to cause the large deformation AFTER creeping has happened. In other words, if you try loading the plastic bag with P* while it is UN damaged (i.e. before creeping), then you will NOT get the large deformation!

    This sort of argument applies to objects in tension, compression, and buckling. It is true for EACH floor of the WTC.

    2) Can we really make the assumption that P* is the same for every floor? – ABSOLUTELY NOT! It is much larger for the lower floors than for the upper ones. The P* value has been fiddles, because basically his fall acceleration is proportional to (mg-P*)

    3) The Seffen analysis is based on the columns being a hollow box construction. Obviously a load of bull! Check out NIST, what about all of the 300,000 tonnes of reinforced concrete and the 47 massive steel core columns “indestructible Core”?

    4) The analysis relies very heavily on an assumption of no mass-loss from the WTC during the fall. Yet, didn’t the videos show that heavy girders were laterally ejected (Not to mention the loss of concrete and other stuff)? How can the destruction eject Mass and it still be causing Collapse?

    5) When an impacted floor begins to fall, it does not go from zero to free-fall speed instantaneously! There is a delay while it accelerates up to that speed. This transition region WILL make a very large difference a massive increase in fall time.

    Last, but not least, he admits toward the end that the analysis is simplified, yet he makes the claim that free-fall speed is possible, without making any attempt whatsoever to say how these neglected assumptions are likely to affect the result. In other words, he has no right to make his claims.

    The “Seffen” is a FRAUD PAPER! – PERIOD!!! It makes no sense what so ever and even claims there is an indestructible block of upper floors left after the destruction sequence. Its like claiming a small car bashes into the back of a large bus, destroys the large bus but suffers no dints or loss of parts on the small car – how dishonest is that?

    Anyone with half a brain knows a large Bus can not be be destroyed without the car receiving significant damage & deformation if not total annihilation in the process.

    `So, “Popular Mechanics”, either Back up your Physically Impossible 911 Gravity Collapse Claims or “Shut up” giving men advice.

    You should be in the hairstyling industry giving folk tips as to what nail varnish goes with what skimpy underwear. There is nothing Popular or Mechanics about you, you are but yellow mouthpiece journalists without the proper credentials to make the Irresponsible claims you make.

    POP MEC – PUT UP or Shut UP – Back up your Ludicrous 911 Gravity collapse claims with real Science!

    WE ALL ARE WAITING!!!

    BBC to spend £500k on trust classes

    0

    Ben Dowell

    Two-hour classes to teach the BBC’s editorial staff how to avoid deceiving viewers are likely to cost around £500,000, the corporation revealed today.

    The director of the BBC’s college of journalism, Vin Ray, said that the bill included cover for some of the 17,000 employees participating in the sessions.

    “The people doing the course are being paid anyway so we estimate that the cost will not exceed £500,000,” he told journalists at a press briefing today.

    Ray is overseeing the initiative, Safeguarding Trust, which the BBC hopes all editorial staff will have completed by the spring.

    The programme was introduced to address viewer concerns after the BBC became embroiled in a number of deception rows.

    These included the so-called Crowngate affair, in which a misleading clip of the Queen was played at a press launch, and the use of a fake winner on a Blue Peter competition, which led to an unprecedented £50,000 fine from media watchdog Ofcom.

    Each Safeguarding Trust session lasts around two hours and involves 20 people participating in a “workshop situation”.

    The session begins with an introductory video, featuring a lengthy clip from Guardian columnist Charlie Brooker’s BBC4 shows Screenwipe.

    This is followed by BBC news reporter Nick Higham taking viewers through the issues and assessing the distinction between “artifice and deception”.

    The remainder of the video shows footage from workshops with members of the public discussing the issue of trust and specific programme clips.

    These include an interview involving BBC news presenter Sophie Raworth that contains a number of cutaway and so-called noddy shots as well as a controversial Newsnight film about Gordon Brown that was edited in the wrong order.

    Staff taking part in the sessions will be given feedback from the focus groups and told the BBC’s position on each of the clips.

    In most cases, the BBC was happy with the editorial conduct, although the re-editing of the Newsnight film has not been deemed acceptable.

    So far around 4,300 staff across the whole of the BBC have attended the course, with the remaining 12,700 expected to complete it by March.

    Thw BBC director general, Mark Thompson, is to attend his session on Friday, while his deputy Mark Byford has already completed the course.

    Anne Morrison, the BBC’s controller of network production, said the programme was not “an honesty course”.

    “We cannot teach people to be honest in two hours,” she said. “If they are not honest we should not be employing them.”

    Petroleum and terrorism

    0

    Beppe Grillo

    11 September 2001. Since then we have been one of the nations at risk of Islamic attacks. More than six years have passed and, as far as we can remember, not a single person has been killed or injured in Italy as a direct result of the Jihad. This must be some sort of record. We have not seen a single possessed man wearing a turban, or a bearded fanatic involved in any robbery, bloody event or domestic burglary.

    middle_east_oil_ft.jpg
    Image from the Financial Times

    Some may believe that this may be simply because Italy closes an eye (looks the other way), perhaps even both eyes and allows everyone to do their own thing. And the Country allows the setting up of logistics bases that could be used as a springboard for attacks elsewhere in Europe. There may well be some truth in this belief because, here in Italy, we are free to do whatever we wish and this Country is probably the best crossroads for all the secret services of the world. Abu Omar was kidnapped in Milan by twenty-six CIA agents. However, any terrorist wishing to blow himself up in London or Madrid is able to access local support with impunity. He need not go as far as Rome or Milan. Since 2001, there have been around 8000 people assassinated in the workplace, hundreds more have died at the hands of organised crime and there have been thousands of rapes. Entire swathes of the Campania, Calabria and Sicily Regions are beyond the rule of law, with shotguns drawn. The result is that we have sent our troops to Iraq and Afghanistan and cut our funding to the Country’s Police Services. All due to the Jihad.
    Of what use is a fear of the Muslims and the mosques? The person who prays does not normally get involved in criminal activity. In an attempt to find some sort of answer to this question, I read the recent International Energy Agency Report on the future of world energy. The report’s content is summarised in a map published by the Financial Times and entitled: “The increasing importance of Middle East petroleum”.
    In 1980, the quantity of petroleum extracted in non-Opec countries, such as the United States and Russia, amounted to 35.5 million barrels per day, while 28.1 million barrels were being extracted by Opec zone Countries. The forecast for the year 2030 is exactly the opposite, with petroleum production is expected to in the order of 60.3 million barrels per day in the Opec zone and 53.2 million barrels in the rest of the world. He who controls the Persian Gulf, which is where 30% of the entire global requirement will be extracted, controls the energy resources and, he who controls the energy resources also controls the entire planet. The rising demand for energy (China alone will go from their current 7 million barrels per day, to 16.5 million by 2030) will coincide with the concentration of petroleum in the Persian Gulf, overlooked by Iran, Iraq, Saudi Arabia and the Emirates. All of which are Muslim States. Therefore, the more petroleum you produce, the more you are a terrorist.

    Who is this technology intended for?

    Remember the 6 million dollar man 1970s sci-fi? A man barely alive, we can rebuild him, make him better, stronger, faster than he was before?

    Stacy Wagner was the Bionic Woman, crime fighter and true patriot.

    Well, what do you know, it is now a reality, but with inflation the cost of this could be a tad more than six million. But, just wait until the Chinese steel it, we’ll all have me.

    This technology has far reaching implications for those with special needs and those who have heavy jobs.

    Instead of requiring three people to load up a killing & mass murder machine such as a US Bombers, only one person would be required according to US spin. That way the BUSH regime and its murdering psychopaths wont need the help of Democrats who could get in the way.

    Does it not make you all warm inside knowing how dollars are being spent cutting out Democrat (Voters) workers of the future?

    Why, with luck this may be the beginning of domestic robots, robot chauffeurs, Robocop’s, fireproof firemen, judge dread & a new meaning to the term, “putting on my suit for work.”

    Bush adamant that Iran remains dangerous

    0

    U.S. president refuses to budge on policy despite new intelligence on Tehran’s nuclear ambitions


    WASHINGTON BUREAU

    WASHINGTON—George W. Bush has refused to soften his belief that Iran poses a global menace, even after his own intelligence experts told him Tehran has not pursued a nuclear weapon since 2003.

    The U.S. president faced questions about his credibility from opponents who charged he was hyping an Iranian threat for months even after he was presented with evidence to the contrary.

    Bush told a news conference here yesterday that American policy on Iran, which includes potential pre-emptive military strikes, has not changed and he said the report by the National Intelligence Estimate (NIE) should rally the international community to keep the pressure on the government of President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad.

    The world must use “effective diplomacy” with Iran, Bush said, adding all options remain on the table.

    “Iran was dangerous. Iran is dangerous. And Iran will be dangerous if they have the knowledge necessary to make a nuclear weapon,” Bush said. “What’s to say they couldn’t start another covert nuclear weapons program?”

    The stakes are high and go beyond his own credibility or his foreign policy in his last year in office.

    Last week’s start of Middle East peace talks in Annapolis, Md., were judged a modest success largely because of the presence of so many Arab nations, many of which attended because they’re wary of a potential Iranian threat.

    Any reversal of the Bush stance on Iran could endanger Arab support for the talks, some analysts suggest.

    The White House said yesterday that Bush would visit the Middle East in early January. Details of his itinerary were not disclosed.

    Worldwide response to the report on Iran varied, with allies France and Britain appearing to back Bush’s contention that Iran still constitutes a threat, but the report is likely to slow any progress toward a third round of tough sanctions to be imposed on Iran.

    Israeli Defence Minister Ehud Barak said he thought the U.S. got it wrong and that Iran continues to work toward a nuclear weapon.

    Mohammed ElBaradei, head of the United Nations nuclear watchdog who is often at loggerheads with the Bush administration, said the report should defuse any talk of military action against Iran and spark negotiations with Tehran. The question of the veracity of American intelligence was only one of the points on which Bush was pushed by reporters at the White House.

    He denied that the world should be again looking at U.S. intelligence and wondering about the information it provides the administration as it crafts foreign policy.

    The last NIE report on Iran, issued in 2005, concluded the country was pursuing an atomic weapon.

    “I want to compliment the intelligence community for their good work,” Bush said. “Right after the failure of intelligence in Iraq, we reformed the intelligence community.”

    The report released Monday showed that those reforms were working, he said.

    Some Democrats agreed that the U.S. intelligence community was no longer providing intelligence to serve the administration’s political needs, as it had been accused of doing leading up to the March 2003 Iraq invasion.

    Bush said the director of national intelligence, Michael McConnell, came to him in August to say there was new information to be processed, but didn’t tell him what it was — only that it would take some time to check it out.

    Between August and the release of the NIE report, Bush continued to ratchet up his rhetoric about the threat posed by Iran and its nuclear ambitions, linking their goals to a potential World War III at an October press conference.

    But many found it difficult to believe a president so intensely focused on Iran was not told — or did not ask — the nature of that fresh intelligence.

    “Are you telling me a president who’s briefed every single morning, who’s fixated on Iran, is not told back in August that the tentative conclusion of 16 intelligence agencies in the United States government is they had abandoned their effort for a nuclear weapon in ’03?” said Democratic presidential candidate Joe Biden, chair of the Senate foreign relations committee.

    “That’s not believable. If that’s true, he has the most incompetent staff in modern American history and he’s one of the most incompetent presidents in modern American history.”

    A coalition of Iraq and Afghanistan war veterans wrote to congressional leaders seeking a probe into whether Bush continued to fan the flames of war in Iran, putting American soldiers at risk in Iraq, even after he had been told of the tentative conclusions of the NIE.

    Barack Obama, the Illinois senator who now leads in many of the Democratic presidential polls in Iowa, told a debate there yesterday that Bush must now move on the diplomatic front with Iran.

    “This administration and President Bush continues to not let facts get in the way of his ideology,” Obama said.

    The intelligence estimate said Iran has left the door open to pursuing atomic weapons, but had made no moves in that regard by the end of last month and was probably incapable of building a bomb before 2015.

    Ahmadinejad said the United States and its allies must respect the right of Iranians to pursue a national civilian nuclear program.

    “There is no other way, of course,” he declared on his website.

    Greens, Democrats And Impeachment

    0

    http://portland.indymedia.org/en/2007/12/369504.shtml

    “Now the gloves are off.”

    Let me explain that statement.

    First, on the issue of Impeachment, either you get it or you don’t. Sadly, the
    Democratic Parties leadership are of the latter, they don’t and apparently won’t
    get it. Former Federal Prosecutor, Elizabeth de la Vega has done a supreme job on
    making of the case for Impeachment. Far more eloquently and concisely than I ever
    could.

    My name is Michael Cavlan, Registered Nurse, active in the group Impeach For Peace
    impeachforpeace.org and the Green Party candidate for US Senate in Minnesota 2006.
    I was also the second politician in the country to publicly call for Impeachment,
    two days after the now infamous Downing Street Memo became public. Chairman of the
    Judiciary Committee, John Conyers was the first. He later arrested Cindy Sheehan
    in his office for staging a sit down protest in his office due to his effectively
    taking it “off the table.” I can now safely say that I was the first to
    say it and actually mean it. More on Representative Conyers later.

    Fellow progressives, we need to be honest with ourselves and understand something.
    The Democratic Party and it’s corporate corrupted leadership have not simply
    been inactive on this issue of Impeachment. Democratic “leadership” have
    actually been fighting and blocking Impeachment all over the country. I base this
    statement of fact on my four years of experience in the Impeachment movement. I
    have worked with Impeach For Peace and have made the statement that on this issue,
    I have been deliberately non-partisan because it is so important. Now, with what
    happened to the Dennis Kucinich Bill HR 799 that has changed my entire perspective.
    At this time I told my local Minnesota Democratic friends in Impeach For Peace that
    my ceasefire was over and that the “gloves were indeed off.” There has
    been no argument from them on this. As I told them, it was time to look seriously
    at “Plan B” for Impeachment. More on “Plan B” and what it entails
    in a minute.

    Let me explain what the corporate media and the corporatized leadership of the Democratic
    Party will not tell you. We need to understand that their actions and lack of actions
    are actually protecting the Bush Administration and their illegal activity from
    the wrath of “We The People.” All over the country, while rank and file
    Democrats and indeed the majority of the American people want to have Bush and Cheney
    Impeached, the Democratic party leadership have done everything in their power to
    stop Impeachment. While at the same time, hyping us all up on how evil those in
    the Bush Administration are. Of course this mirrors the blatant lie on the Iraq
    war, where the Democrats tell us about needing 60 votes in the Senate to stop the
    Iraq war. That is a lie as the truth is, they only need 41 votes to block funding
    for this illegal and immoral war. Just don’t expect a Democrat politician or
    their apologists to tell us that. So it is with Impeachment. The lie being perpetrated
    on a lack of Impeachment and accountability is that “it will make the Democrats
    look bad, small and spiteful.” Just as the lie on not having enough votes
    to stop the war, so this lie must be exposed.

    The truth is that having the Congress call for Impeachment will do two very important
    things at the same time. It will begin the public investigation into the crimes
    of the Bush Administration and then the corporate media will be unable to ignore
    the issue further. They will be forced into investigating and reporting it in a
    serious and meaningful way. The second part is, in my book even more important than
    the first. With the American people awakened to the crimes being perpetrated in
    our names, the groundswell of support for Impeachment will take off immediately.

    Instead, we have seen the movement for Impeachment squashed all over the country.
    >From Vermont, to New Mexico and elsewhere all over our country it has been stifled
    and marginalized. Not by the “greater evil” Republican Party but instead
    by the “lesser evil” Democratic Party. So very often, going against the
    wishes of the rank and file Democrats. As I stated earlier I have been working with
    a primarily Democratic organization Impeach For Peace and have witnessed this phenomena
    going on all over the nation, as well as locally. Our federal government has failed
    us, all of us. Instead of standing up and protecting us, they have blocked and stalled
    the Impeachment Movement all over our nation.

    By their actions and equally important, lack of action our elected officials have
    abandoned their oath to “defend and protect the Constitution from all enemies,
    foreign and domestic.” Even more damning, they have, as stated earlier actually
    protected the Bush Administration from being held accountable by us for their criminal
    and immoral actions. In Minnesota recently Congressman John Conyers was recently
    challenged on this very point. He told us that it was more important to be re-elected
    and have a Democrat in the White House than this critical issue of accountability
    for those criminals in the White House. These are his words here, not mine. I told
    him that we have reached a point in our nation that we need to hold those people
    accountable who refuse to hold this criminal Administration itself accountable.
    Remember this term for later.

    Then we have the earlier mentioned HR 799, entered into the political record by
    Dennis Kucinich. What happened to that Bill irrefutably makes my case. When presidential
    candidate Kucinich used his position and privilege as a Congressman to introduce
    this bill, calling for the Impeachment of Dick Cheney look at what happened. It
    was the Democratic Party which attempted to table it, to effectively kill the Bill
    and all that it stood for, accountability. Yet in a stunning turn around, it was
    the Republicans who actually kept it alive, in an obvious attempt to make the Democrats
    look bad. In fact the story goes that an unnamed Republican “accidently”
    dropped his pen where he could not reach it. Then the Republicans quickly had a
    meeting and decided to keep it alive, obviously for what they perceived as short
    term political gain. At the obvious behest of House leader Nancy Pelosi, the Bill
    was then sent to the Judiciary Committee, where it currently sits. We must note
    that it now sits with it’s virtual mirror HR 333 which also calls for the Impeachment
    of Cheney. HR 333 has been languishing with no movement for over six months now
    and it appears that HR 799 will suffer the same fate, as was intended. For all intended
    purposes “Mission Accomplished” or so it would appear.

    It was at this point that I told my friends in Impeach For Peace that “the
    gloves are off.” Now we need to analyze why the Democratic Party leadership
    would make such a horrific political blunder. Some have put it down to yet another
    example of “the Dems spinelessness and cowardice again.” I disagree. I
    hold, firmly that the reason that Nancy Pelosi, Barck Obama, Hillary Clinton, yes
    even John Edwards and John Conyers have been guilty of these unbelievable acts of
    craven cowardice is not just simple lack of political will and spine. I put it to
    you all, very directly that the real reason that they are not moving and in fact
    are attempting to kill Impeachment is much deeper and troubling.

    The plain and simple reason that the Democratic Party are willing to go against
    the will of the majority, not just in their Party but indeed the general public
    is this simple and chilling. Their owners won’t let them. Their owners are,
    of course the wealthy, monied corporate interests who own the entire political system,
    media and just about everything else in our country. Those people and interests
    who fund campaigns, the ones responsible for the slick, glitzy TV adds, the fancy
    glossy brochures and parades that we often attend. The very groups and people that
    the Democratic party claims to fighting against. They own them, they are not our
    representatives, they are theirs. Years of watching good, honest people “petitioning”
    them has made that clear to me. The sooner we all come to that realization and fight
    for a true representative, grassroots government, the sooner we can actually achieve
    it. Of course that means we have to look honestly and realistically on where we
    are and just how bad and deep the mess we find ourselves is. “They” are
    not the solution, they are a manifestation of the problem we face. I base this on
    the dual understanding, the undeniable truth that corporate interests own both political
    parties. Corporations do not like instability and Impeachment would indeed create
    some short term instability in the market. So they are probably threatening to withhold
    their campaign constibutions if Impeachment is not “taken off the table.”

    Plan B

    This leads us to Plan B and all that entails, given the realities just described.
    Here in Minnesota we are starting to organize a plan, a call to action. Since the
    federal government have indeed failed us all so dramatically, we need to go local.
    The good people in Impeach For Peace have found a way to make that happen. According
    to the Thomas Jefferson Manuel On Impeachment, there is another way to institute
    the will of We The People in regards to Impeachment. Apparently Jefferson foresaw
    the situation we find ourselves in today. he gave us the blueprint for Plan B.

    It is this simple. We need to have just One State House and Senate pass, together
    a Resolution for Impeachment. That happens and the Congress which has failed us
    by refusing to even bring it to the House is forced to put all other business aside
    and deal with Impeachment. Here in Minnesota we are, even now planning for a Call
    To Impeachment Rally on the steps of the St Paul Minnesota Capitol. It is planned
    for February 15th, the first day of business for the Minnesota House and Senate.
    At the end of the rally, we in essence Storm the Bastille. The message will be clear,
    crystal clear. We are not “lobbying” or begging for Impeachment, we are
    demanding it. We will also be crystal clear in this message. If the politicians
    we talk to, do not actively do everything in their power to promote Impeachment,
    we will hold them accountable. They will face opposition in the next election and
    their oppositions message will be simple. He or she will face another candidate
    running against him with this message, “this person violated his oath of office
    to protect and defend the Constitution from all enemies, foreign and domestic.”
    We will ask them, in very plan language that do they want to face the accusation
    that “they actually protected the Bush Administration?” The simple beauty
    of this plan is that we will be afforded the opportunity of talking to people and
    potentially affecting them, on the local level where they are much less beholden
    to the corporate interests which has made our democracy “the best that money
    can buy” on the Federal level, as investigative journalist Greg Palast has
    pointed out.

    Of course it would be beautiful if Minnesota did this, which we will but can we
    imagine the impact of California, Hawaii, New York, Pennsylvania, West Virginia,
    Arizona, New Mexico and a host of other states did the same thing?

    This is your call to action. Make it happen. As is often the case, if you face a
    career politician who will use the structure of his political party and it’s
    apparatus, then this is your opportunity to use us, the Green Party. That way you
    can’t be crushed or marginalized in a primary race by those who are better funded
    than you. Get involved in your local Green Party and seek the Green endorsement
    in your run for office. If you don’t know how, contact myself at  ollamhfaery@earthlink.net
    or (612)327-6902. We can actually make this thing happen. We can and should put
    Impeachment and accountability back on the table. It is our table to set after all,
    although those in Washington Dc seem to have forgotten that.

    Like I said at the start of this piece, I had very deliberately been non-partisan
    on the issue of Impeachment because it was so critical. I am now strictly partisan
    for the same reason. Now is the time to get active on Impeachment. Let us hold the
    Bush Administration accountable for their crimes. Not just because it is the right
    thing to do but to ensure that their are no further abuses of power in the future.
    Let us all do this now, acting as though the very future of our democratic Republic
    depends on it. It just may.

    Michael Cavlan RN
    (612)327-6902
     ollamhfaery@earthlink.net

    Below is a Green Party Statement on Impeachment

    Press Release

    Home | Press | Print

    Impeach Bush and Cheney Now!

    GREEN PARTY OF THE UNITED STATES
     http://www.gp.org

    Tuesday, January 3, 2006

    Contacts:
    Scott McLarty, Media Coordinator, 202-518-5624,  mclarty@greens.org
    Starlene Rankin, Media Coordinator, 916-995-3805,  starlene@greens.org

    Congress must impeach Bush and Cheney, say Greens, citing White House lawlessness,
    growing threat to U.S. democracy, and war crimes.

    WASHINGTON, D.C. — Citing a litany of alleged high crimes and misdemeanors, abuses
    of power, and violations of the U.S. Constitution, Green Party leaders urged Congress
    to initiate impeachment proceedings against President George W. Bush and Vice President
    Cheney as soon as possible.

    “The evidence that President Bush has abused his office and betrayed the trust
    of the American people is now so overwhelming that failure to undertake impeachment
    would make Congress even more complicit in this administration’s lawlessness,”
    said Nan Garrett, Georgia Green Party co-chair and spokesperson for the National
    Women’s Caucus. “Three more years of Bush and Cheney will do lasting damage
    to the rule of law and result in even more death and destruction under Bush’s
    reckless policies.”

    “The Bush Administration blocked an independent probe into 9/11 while making
    fraudulent statements about the reasons for invading Iraq, and now admits that it
    spies on American citizens in disregard of legal limits. What more does Congress
    need before it says enough is enough?” Ms. Garrett added.

    The Green Party of the United States called for Congress to commence impeachment
    of President Bush in July, 2003, after he ordered the invasion of Iraq. The resolution
    accused the President of numerous deceptions to justify the invasion, as well as
    violations of the U.S. Constitution (restriction in Article II on the deployment
    of Armed Forces to defense of U.S. borders; required adherence to international
    treaties in Article VI) and of international law (U.N. Charter; Geneva conventions).

    “In early 2003, there already existed credible evidence that the war was based
    on White House fraud: false claims that Saddam Hussein possessed WMDs, sought nuclear
    weapons materials, and colluded with al Qaeda. But most Democrats feared accusations
    that they’d be soft on terrorism and unpatriotic if they criticized the invasion,”
    said Jody Grage Haug, co-chair of the Green Party of the United States. “Three
    years later, after more than 2,100 U.S. troop deaths, tens of thousands of dead
    Iraqi civilians, a continuing military quagmire in Iraq, and indications that the
    invasion and occupation inflamed anti-U.S. sentiment around the world, especially
    in Islamic nations, some Democrats have caught up to the Green Party.”

    In addition to White House falsehoods leading up to the war on Iraq, Greens listed
    other grounds for impeachment:

    President Bush ordered the National Security Agency to spy on American citizens
    without obtaining a warrant in accord with the Fourth Amendment and the 1978 Foreign
    Intelligence Surveillance Act (FISA). Recent FBI targets of surveillance (nonviolent
    peace and human rights organizations, Catholic Workers Group, People for the Ethical
    Treatment of Animals, Vegan Community Project) prove that his administration’s
    goals have more to do with politics than with preventing terrorism. Mr. Bush’s
    insistence that such surveillance is justified and will continue is further proof
    of his contempt for the law.

    Numerous Bush Administration policies — denial of due process, extraordinary rendition,
    secret detention centers, and torture at various sites, including Abu Ghraib and
    Guantanamo Bay — have violated U.S. and international law. Vice President Cheney
    attempted to gain a license from Congress for torture, even though it has been proven
    ineffective for gathering accurate information (e.g., Ibn Al Shaykh Al Libi’s
    testimony about links between Saddam Hussein and al Qaeda, later recanted). Greens
    noted that the agreement reached by Mr. Bush and Sen. John McCain purportedly outlawing
    torture allows a significant loophole (see “Tortured Logic: McCain-Bush deal
    has a big loophole” by James Ridgeway with Michael Roston, The Village Voice,
    December 19, 2005, < http://www.villagevoice.com/news/0551,ridgeway,71143,2.html>).

    Congress must investigate whether the White House endorsed the use of outlawed weapons
    materials such as depleted uranium, which causes radioactive contamination of humans
    (U.S. troops as well as Iraqi civilians) and the environment; white phosphorus,
    a chemical whose use in warfare is proscribed by international agreement; and cluster
    bombs, which do not distinguish between civilians and combatants. Their use in Iraq
    is a war crime for which either the President himself or the Defense Department
    must be held accountable. Other war crimes, which require impeachment if based on
    White House orders, include the military targeting of journalists, individual reporters
    as well as television stations (Al Jazeera and Abu Dhabi), and looting of hospitals,
    museums, and private homes.

    “Many Americans have realized that the Bush-Cheney ideology is about installing
    a permanent corporate elite in power, buttressed by military power and public fear
    over perceived and fabricated threats, while missing real dangers to our security,”
    said Jake Schneider, treasurer of the Green Party of the United States. “The
    response to Katrina, dismissed evidence of global warming, manipulated scientific
    research, energy policy crafted in secret with corporate lobbies, new prescription
    drug policy, attack on Social Security, 2000 and 2004 election irregularities, and
    other evidence should lay to rest any illusion about this Administration’s disregard
    for the interests of the American people.”

    MORE INFORMATION

    Green Party of the United States
     http://www.gp.org
    1711 18th Street NW
    Washington, DC 20009.
    202-319-7191, 866-41GREEN
    Fax 202-319-7193

    “Congress Must Reject Patriot Act, Ban Warrantless Spying”
    Press release from the Green Party of the United States, December 19, 2005
     http://www.gp.org/press/pr_2005_12_19.shtml

    “Greens Call for Impeachment of Bush, Withdrawal of Troops by the Winter Holidays”
    Press release from the Green Party of the United States, July 21, 200

    America is Going Fascist

    2

    Michael Nenonen
    Republic of East Vancouver

    The signs are all there for anyone to see, and time is getting short for action

    Reading Naomi Wolf’s The End of America: Letter of Warning to a Young Patriot (Chelsea Green Publishing, 2007), I realized the hour is later than I thought.

    Many of us have watched the Bush regime’s actions with a growing feeling of horror intertwined with a sense that somehow we’ve seen all of this before, but we aren’t sure where. We’re confused because what we’re seeing conflicts with unexamined and deeply held assumptions we have about American freedom. Wolf’s short but meticulously documented book shows that what is happening in America has indeed happened many times before, not in the United States, but rather in places like Chile, Italy, Russia, and Germany. In each case, people couldn’t understand why they didn’t recognize where they were heading before they passed the point of no return.

    It’s shifting fast

    Wolf argues that the United States is undergoing a “fascist shift” from an authoritarian but still relatively open society to a totalitarian society. The techniques for forcing this shift have evolved over the last century and are now studied by aspiring tyrants the world over. These methods are even part of the formal curriculum in places like the Western Hemisphere Institute for Security Cooperation, previously known as the School of the Americas, in Fort Benning, Georgia, where thousands of Latin Americans have been trained by the United States government in the most savage techniques of insurgency and counterinsurgency. Fascists use ten basic strategies to shut down open societies. They invoke an external and internal threat in order to convince the population to grant their rulers extraordinary powers. They establish secret prisons that practice torture, prisons that are initially few in number and only incarcerate social pariahs, but that quickly multiply and soon imprison “opposition leaders, outspoken clergy, union leaders, well-known performers, publishers, and journalists.” They develop a paramilitary force that operates without legal restraint. They set up a system of intense domestic surveillance that gathers information for the purposes of intimidating and blackmailing citizens. They infiltrate, monitor, and disorganize citizens’ groups. They arbitrarily detain and release citizens, especially at borders. They target key individuals like civil servants, academics, and artists in order to ensure their complicity or silence. They take control of the press. They publicly equate dissent with treason. Finally, they suspend the rule of law. All of these strategies are being employed in America today.

    Consider the evidence

    The Bush administration and its supporters have consistently portrayed the security threat posed by international terrorists as a threat to the very survival of Western civilization in order to justify permanent war and to keep the American public in a state of panic and paranoia.

    The prisons at Guantanamo and God-knows how many CIA “Black Sites” torture their inmates, even though human rights organizations have demonstrated that the majority of at least Guantanamo’s inmates are innocent victims of mass arrests. The inmates are designated as “enemy combatants” who have no rights under international or American law. And there is nothing stopping American presidents from filling these prisons with American citizens. In an April 24 2007 article for the Huffington Post, Wolf writes that thanks to the Military Commissions Act of 2006, “the president has the power to call any US citizen an ‘enemy combatant’. He has the power to define what ‘enemy combatant’ means. The president can also delegate to anyone he chooses in the executive branch the right to define ‘enemy combatant’ any way he or she wants and then seize Americans accordingly. Even if you or I are American citizens, even if we turn out to be completely innocent of what he has accused us of doing, he has the power to have us seized as we are changing planes at Newark tomorrow, or have us taken with a knock on the door; ship you or me to a navy brig; and keep you or me in isolation, possibly for months, while awaiting trial.” She points out that while currently Americans in such situations will be spared any torture except psychosis-inducing isolation and can look forward to eventual trials, these rights typically evaporate in the final stages of a fascist shift.

    They’re called “mercenaries”

    Military contractors are the regime’s paramilitary force. Blackwater’s mercenaries, many of whom were trained by Latin America’s most horrific police states, have operated in Iraq outside of Iraqi, American, and military law, and have murdered uncounted innocent Iraqis with impunity. Domestically, Blackwater was contracted to provide hundreds of armed security guards in the wake of Hurricane Katrina in New Orleans, and there’s evidence that they fired on civilians. Blackwater’s business plan calls for their use in future disasters and emergencies throughout the United States, and it’s supported by some of the biggest powerbrokers in America.

    American intelligence agencies are now bypassing court orders to wiretap citizens’ telephones, spy on their e-mails, and monitor their financial transactions, and the USA Patriot Act forces corporations, booksellers, librarians, and doctors to turn over previously confidential information about Americans to the state.

    Thousands of human rights, environmental, anti-war, and other citizens’ groups have been infiltrated by government agents, many of whom have clearly acted as agent provocateurs in order to undermine the groups’ solidarity and to legitimize police actions against them.

    Political opponents listed

    America’s Transportation Security Administration maintains a terrorist watch list of tens of thousands of Americans who are now subjected to security searches and arbitrary detention at airports. The list includes people like Democratic Senator Edward Kennedy and respected constitutional scholar Walter F Murphy.

    US Attorneys, CIA agents, military lawyers, and other civil servants who’ve disagreed with the Bush administration have been threatened and fired. David Horowitz and his colleagues have mounted a well-funded nation-wide intimidation campaign that has university students spying on their professors and that has successfully coerced regents at State Universities to discipline or fire left-leaning professors like Ward Churchill. The regime’s supporters have organized campaigns to damage the careers of artists like the Dixie Chicks for criticism of the president and his policies.

    The administration has Fox News in its pocket, it has paid journalists for positive coverage, it has disseminated misinformation through the media, and it’s ferociously attacking critical journalists. Arrests of US journalists are at an all-time high. The Bush administration’s outing of CIA operative Valerie Plame was done in retaliation against her husband, Joseph Wilson, whose New York Times op-ed piece exposed lies that the Bush administration used to lead the nation to war. Worse than this, independent journalists appear to be marked for death by American forces in Iraq. In her Huffington Post article, Wolf writes, “The Committee to Protect Journalists has documented multiple accounts of the US military in Iraq firing upon or threatening to fire upon unembedded (meaning independent) reporters and camera operators from organisations ranging from al-Jazeera to the BBC. . . . In some cases reporters have been wounded or killed, including ITN’s Terry Lloyd in 2003. Both CBS and the Associated Press in Iraq had staff members seized by the US military and taken to violent prisons; the news organisations were unable to see the evidence against their staffers.” The goal of these tactics, as she writes in The End of America, is to create “a new reality in which the truth can no longer be ascertained and no longer counts.”

    Dissent = treason

    In recent years, prominent Republicans like Ann Coulter, Melanie Morgan, and William Kristol have accused liberal journalists of treason and espionage for publishing leaked material damaging to the administration, and in February 2007, Republican Congressman Don Young said “Congressmen who wilfully take actions during wartime that damage morale and undermine the military are sabateurs, and should be hanged.” This would be amusing, were it not for the Bush administration’s revival of the draconian 1917 Espionage Act after half a century’s slumber.

    And finally, the Bush administration shows contempt for the law. In The End of America, Wolf writes that Bush has used more signing statements than any previous president, and by doing so has relegated “Congress to an advisory role. This abuse lets the President choose what laws he wishes to enforce or not, overruling Congress and the people. So Americans are living under laws their representatives never passed. Signing statements put the president above the law.” He has also gutted the Posse Comitatus Act, which was created to prevent the president from maintaining a standing army for use against American citizens. Wolf writes that the 2007 Defence Authorization Bill lets the president “expand his power to declare martial law and take charge of the National Guard troops without the permission of the governor when ‘public order’ has been lost; he can send these troops out into our streets at his direction–overriding local law enforcement authorities–during a national disaster, epidemic, serious public health emergency, terrorist attack, or ‘other condition.’” On its own, this is an incredible expansion of presidential power, but when combined with the use of military contractors like Blackwater it gives the president almost dictatorial authority.

    Wolf shows that fascist shifts don’t happen overnight, but rather over a course of years during which the fascists’ plans unfold at an accelerating pace. Germany in 1933 was further along this path than it was in 1931, and Germany in 1935 was farther along than it was in 1933. Similarly, America in 2007 is farther along the path than it was in 2005, or will be in 2009, provided that a massive pro-democracy movement, complete with impeachment proceedings, doesn’t reverse the shift while there’s still time. A simple Democratic victory in the 2008 presidential election won’t do the job unless the institutional and legal environment created by the Bush administration is thoroughly dismantled. Regardless of whether the next president is a Republican or a Democrat, he or she will inherit a legacy of centralized power that a democracy simply can’t tolerate.

    Left behind

    Unfortunately, during the shift opposition politicians and activists still tend to perceive the world through a democratic frame of reference, and this prevents them from seeing that their opponents are no longer operating within this frame. As the opposition is tying its boxing gloves, the fascists are breaking out the machetes.

    Wolf’s work has its problems. She doesn’t acknowledge that Black and Indigenous Americans have long lived under quasi-fascist rule, she doesn’t examine the role that previous administrations have played in setting the stage for the Bush regime, and she doesn’t acknowledge the roles played by corporatism, widespread social dislocation and the radical Christian right in the rise of a fascist American zeitgeist. Despite this, The End of America needs to be read by as many people as possible.

    Wolf writes about America, but Canadians don’t have any cause for comfort. Canadian and American military forces are already deeply enmeshed. Thanks to NAFTA, we’re tied at the hip to the American economy, while the Security and Prosperity Partnership is integrating our countries’ security forces and harmonizing our no-fly lists. The Harper government is eager to kowtow to the Americans, even to the point of refusing to advocate for Canadian citizens on American death rows. The powerful think tanks and lobbying groups that influence our provincial and federal governments, such as the Fraser Institute and the Canadian Council of Chief Executives, either can’t see the shift for what it is or they don’t care. More than all of this, however, is the simple reality that once the shift is complete, the American government will act even more irrationally and belligerently than before. Canada has resources like oil and water the United States is going to need, and the Canadian border is less defensible than the French border was in 1940.

    Americans and Canadians have to fight back more fiercely than ever before, to organize and lobby and fill the streets with mass protests, to raise awareness and forge alliances with anyone opposed to totalitarianism regardless of whether they’re liberals, socialists, or conservatives. We have to take all the steps that have rescued dying democracies in the past, and to take them immediately, in the desperate hope that it isn’t already too late.

    ID card opposition is growing

    0

    The majority of British voters are opposed to government plans to introduce a national identity card scheme, a new poll has revealed.

    In a YouGov poll carried out for the Daily Telegraph, 48 per cent of respondents said they were against ID cards, with 43 per cent in favour of the proposals.

    The cards will be introduced for foreign nationals from next year, before a 2009 introduction for all British citizens applying for a new passport.

    The new YouGov poll reveals the steady decline of public support for the plans – some 78 per cent of voters backed the plans when they were first mooted in 2003, and a 2005 poll – shortly after the July 7th London bombings – revealed 45 per cent favoured an identity card system.

    With recent concerns over government accountability – following the loss of 25 million people’s child benefit records – public backing for a national database of personal information has plummeted.

    While ministers are determined to proceed with the proposals despite the lack of popular approval, Whitehall has abandoned plans to build a new database for financial reasons, with a ‘piggy-back’ approach to be implemented using an existing system.

    A Home Office spokesperson said in response that “a significant number of people still support ID cards and previous research over a number of years by the Identity and Passport Service and others has shown the majority of the public support ID cards”.

    “It is natural that people will be concerned about data security in the wake of the HM Revenue and Customs [HMRC] incident,” the statement continued, “but the National Identity Register is not yet in place so we will learn from any mistakes in the HMRC incident – for example by ensuring that a failure by a single individual could not lead to data loss.

    “Biometrics however will provide additional security to protect our data – the point of the scheme is to hold basic identity information more securely and in a way that allows you to verify your identity safely and conveniently.”

    The spokesperson added: “By recording fingerprint biometrics it will be possible to link a person securely and reliably to his or her own unique identity. It will therefore become much more difficult for people to misuse another person’s identity even if full biographical information is already known.”

    © Adfero Ltd

    The NO2ID Pledge

    1

    What YOU can do to stop ID cards and the database state

    NO2ID_Pledge_banner_300.jpg

    If the Labour government was serious about trying to recover the missing CDs in the ongoing HMRC Child Benefit centralised database insecurity scandal, then why have they not offered a large financial reward and immunity from prosecution for the safe return of the discs ? That would not re-assure us that the data has not been copied, but it might indicate a change in the contemptuous attitude with which the politicians and senior civil servants treat the general public.

    Until such a change is apparent, then what can you do, personally, to try to stand up for your own rights and those of your family, against the Kafkesque, inept and secretive bureaucracy and political apparat which seems to have inflitrated our society ?

    Obviously the non-partisan NO2ID Campaign would welcome a financial donation from you (to their general campaign funds or to their ring fenced Legal Defence Fund).

    Today, the NO2ID Campaign has launched a new public Pledge, which involves asking for your commitment, common sense, in defence of your own self-interest, that of your family and of the country as a whole. Help to oppose the wretchedly mis-conceived and counter productive particular mess of a centralised national biometric database, the National Identity Register, which the Government is attempting to impose on us:

    Phil Booth, NO2ID’s National Coordinator, said:”This is not a petition. This is not a request.

    “This is real people saying: ‘No, we’ve had enough. We are sick of the government snooping into our private lives, leaking or losing our most confidential personal information, and trampling the individual liberty that made this country what it is. It has to stop.’

    NO2ID_Pledge_Certificate_300.jpg

    Note: You don’t have to download the certificate to take The NO2ID Pledge. It doesn’t have to be done online, and can be done anywhere.Please feel free to copy and distribute the text (below) by any other means. But please do not change the wording, which has been written by an expert in the National Identity Scheme. For best effect everyone should make the same undertaking.

    I, made the following pledge on , as witnessed by :

    I solemnly and publicly promise that:

    • I shall not register for a national identity card
    • I shall not supply personal details or fingerprints to a National Identity Register
    • I shall not apply for any document or service if joining the National Identity Register is a condition of obtaining it
    • I shall not co-operate with any Identity and Passport Service interview concerning my identity

    I also promise by my example to encourage others to do the same.

    Signed,

    What YOU can do to stop ID cards and the database state:

    The government thinks it is being clever. It will be registering people on the ID cards database when they apply for a passport or other official documents. You may have heard that the ID card is “voluntary”, but once your details are entered onto the ‘National Identity Register’ database they are there for life.It is not just about a card. Once the details of your life are captured the government will be sharing them with and between an ever growing list of agencies and building an ever more detailed picture of your life. The HMRC disaster with child benefit records has shown just how dangerous that can be.

    Millions of people now know that having their identity “managed” by the government is a bad idea. In just four weeks in 2005, more than 10,000 people pledged online to refuse to register for an ID card. You may have seen public figures declaring that they will go to prison rather than be registered.

    The NO2ID Pledge is your opportunity to make a personal and public declaration that you will refuse to comply with government control of your identity. Keeping this promise means you avoid registration on the National Identity Register. It is a serious commitment. Though at the moment there is little to resist, the government is going to try and make life gradually more inconvenient if you don’t comply “willingly”. But with tens of thousands of others making the same declaration, life could get pretty inconvenient for the government too.

    It is currently perfectly lawful to declare that you will not comply with the ID scheme. It is possible that refusal could be made a crime, but the government has shied away from that so far. If enough people say no, it will be impossible. There would not be enough courts to prosecute 100,000 resisters, let alone millions. Together, now, we can build a wedge of opposition that will jam the wheels of the ID scheme, and protect the personal privacy of everyone in the country.

    The more people who commit themselves to resist, the more effective it is. Say no to ID and it becomes more difficult to put pressure on you and everyone else. Get your friends to pledge too, and everyone protects one another. If you say no, then ID cards will fail.

    Information chief calls for review of ID card plans

    0

    Patrick Wintour
    The Guardian

    The government needs to review the scale of its plans for identity cards in the wake of the release of 25 million names and addresses on government child benefit records, the information commissioner, Richard Thomas, told the justice select committee yesterday.He claimed the government remained confused about the role of identity cards, and accused ministers of putting too much faith in the value of information sharing.

    Thomas said: “Any massive collection of information like the identity card carries risk … We still have some uncertainties about what the primary purpose of the identity card is … Is it to improve policing, to fight terrorism, to improve public services, to avoid identity theft? I think there is a lot of thinking still to be done on its primary purpose.”

    He added: “Keeping this massive database with records of every time the card is swiped through a terminal is distinctly unattractive and would increase the risks.”

    He also questioned whether information on ID cards needed to be kept indefinitely. He disclosed that a stream of organisations in the public and private sectors had come to his office “on a confessional basis” in recent weeks to reveal that they had problems with losing data.

    He added that Revenue and Customs’ loss of data “has been a massive wake-up call to the top of organisations”. Chief executives and permanent secretaries were now at long last asking if the proper procedures were in place.

    He disclosed he had put in a request for a substantial increase in his £10m annual budget, as well as new criminal sanctions against a data controller who knowingly or recklessly loses data .

    None of the £10m comes from government, but from fees for inspections.

    Commenting on the HMRC fiasco, he said: “Searching questions need to be answered about systems procedures and human error. I would question whether anybody should be allowed to download an entire database of this scale without going through the most rigorous pre-authorisation checks. One would want to question why software was not in place to be prevent the entire database being downloaded.”

    Thomas, who is responsible for data protection as well as freedom of information, reiterated his call for powers to allow the Information Commission to make spot checks so it could go into private companies, as well as government departments, to inspect data security arrangements without permission.

    The prime minister is reluctant to give the commissioner powers to enter private companies without permission.

    “We have been dissatisfied for some time that we only have limited powers of scrutiny,” said Thomas. “I find that a very bizarre situation, which is unlike virtually all the other data protection authorities around the world and most other regulatory bodies, such as the Financial Services Authority”.

    ‘Kill switch’ dropped from Vista

    0

    Microsoft is to withdraw an anti-piracy tool from Windows Vista, which disables the operating system when invoked, following customer complaints. The so-called “kill switch” is designed to prevent users with illegal copies of Vista from using certain features.

    But the tool has suffered from glitches since it was introduced with many Windows users claiming that legal copies of Vista had been disabled.

    Microsoft says its efforts have seen a drop in piracy of its software.

    In a statement released by the company, Microsoft corporate vice president Mike Sievert, said: “Users whose systems are identified as counterfeit will be presented with clear and recurring notices about the status of their system and how to get genuine copies.”

    ‘Take action’

    “They won’t lose access to functionality or features, but it will be very clear to them that their copy of Window Vista is not genuine and they need to take action.”

    Microsoft has described the new approach as a “change of tactics”. It said efforts to tackle piracy had seen numbers of fake copies of Vista at half the level of XP, the previous Windows operating system.

    The change will take effect with the release of Service Pack 1, a major update to Windows Vista.

    Customers who buy a copy of Windows Vista or have the operating system (OS) installed when they buy a new PC are required to validate the OS with Microsoft.

    An online tool, called Windows Genuine Advantage, checks the authenticity of the OS to determine if it was legally acquired.

    The tool can “lock” Vista from further use if it believes it is an unauthorised copy. But many users have complained that the system is not working because legally bought copies result in error messages.

    It was introduced in 2006 as a voluntary option, but became mandatory with the release of Vista, and had problems from the day it was introduced. Mr Sievert added: “It’s worth re-emphasising that our fundamental strategy has not changed.

    “All copies of Windows Vista still require activation and the system will continue to validate from time to time to verify that systems are activated properly.”

    Microsoft said it had pursued legal action against more than 1,000 dealers of counterfeit Microsoft products in the last year and taken down more than 50,000 “illegal and improper” online software auctions.

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/technology/7126902.stm

    Neocon hawk: The invasion of Iraq was illegal

    0

    War critics astonished as US hawk admits invasion was illegal

    Oliver Burkeman and Julian Borger in Washington
    The Guardian

    International lawyers and anti-war campaigners reacted with astonishment yesterday after the influential Pentagon hawk Richard Perle conceded that the invasion of Iraq had been illegal.In a startling break with the official White House and Downing Street lines, Mr Perle told an audience in London: “I think in this case international law stood in the way of doing the right thing.”

    President George Bush has consistently argued that the war was legal either because of existing UN security council resolutions on Iraq – also the British government’s publicly stated view – or as an act of self-defence permitted by international law.

    But Mr Perle, a key member of the defence policy board, which advises the US defence secretary, Donald Rumsfeld, said that “international law … would have required us to leave Saddam Hussein alone”, and this would have been morally unacceptable.

    French intransigence, he added, meant there had been “no practical mechanism consistent with the rules of the UN for dealing with Saddam Hussein”.

    Mr Perle, who was speaking at an event organised by the Institute of Contemporary Arts in London, had argued loudly for the toppling of the Iraqi dictator since the end of the 1991 Gulf war.

    “They’re just not interested in international law, are they?” said Linda Hugl, a spokeswoman for the Campaign for Nuclear Disarmament, which launched a high court challenge to the war’s legality last year. “It’s only when the law suits them that they want to use it.”

    Mr Perle’s remarks bear little resemblance to official justifications for war, according to Rabinder Singh QC, who represented CND and also participated in Tuesday’s event.

    Certainly the British government, he said, “has never advanced the suggestion that it is entitled to act, or right to act, contrary to international law in relation to Iraq”.

    The Pentagon adviser’s views, he added, underlined “a divergence of view between the British govern ment and some senior voices in American public life [who] have expressed the view that, well, if it’s the case that international law doesn’t permit unilateral pre-emptive action without the authority of the UN, then the defect is in international law”.

    Mr Perle’s view is not the official one put forward by the White House. Its main argument has been that the invasion was justified under the UN charter, which guarantees the right of each state to self-defence, including pre-emptive self-defence. On the night bombing began, in March, Mr Bush reiterated America’s “sovereign authority to use force” to defeat the threat from Baghdad.

    The UN secretary general, Kofi Annan, has questioned that justification, arguing that the security council would have to rule on whether the US and its allies were under imminent threat.

    Coalition officials countered that the security council had already approved the use of force in resolution 1441, passed a year ago, warning of “serious consequences” if Iraq failed to give a complete ac counting of its weapons programmes.

    Other council members disagreed, but American and British lawyers argued that the threat of force had been implicit since the first Gulf war, which was ended only by a ceasefire.

    “I think Perle’s statement has the virtue of honesty,” said Michael Dorf, a law professor at Columbia University who opposed the war, arguing that it was illegal.

    “And, interestingly, I suspect a majority of the American public would have supported the invasion almost exactly to the same degree that they in fact did, had the administration said that all along.”

    The controversy-prone Mr Perle resigned his chairmanship of the defence policy board earlier this year but remained a member of the advisory board.

    Meanwhile, there was a hint that the US was trying to find a way to release the Britons held at Guantanamo Bay.

    The US secretary of state, Colin Powell, said Mr Bush was “very sensitive” to British sentiment. “We also expect to be resolving this in the near future,” he told the BBC.

    Ex-Italian President: 9/11 An Inside Job

    Ex-Italian President: Intel Agencies Know 9/11 An Inside Job

    Paul Joseph Watson
    Prison Planet

    Former Italian President and the man who revealed the existence of Operation Gladio Francesco Cossiga has gone public on 9/11, telling Italy’s most respected newspaper that the attacks were run by the CIA and Mossad and that this was common knowledge amongst global intelligence agencies.

    Cossiga was elected President of the Italian Senate in July 1983 before winning a landslide 1985 election to become President of the country in 1985.

    Cossiga gained respect from opposition parties as one of a rare breed – an honest politician – and led the country for seven years until April 1992.

    Cossiga’s tendency to be outspoken upset the Italian political establishment and he was forced to resign after revealing the existence of, and his part in setting up, Operation Gladio – a rogue intelligence network under NATO auspices that carried out bombings across Europe in the 60’s, 70’s and 80’s.

    Gladio’s specialty was to carry out what they coined “false flag operations,” terror attacks that were blamed on their domestic and geopolitical opposition.

    Cossiga’s revelations contributed to an Italian parliamentary investigation of Gladio in 2000, during which evidence was unearthed that the attacks were being overseen by the U.S. intelligence apparatus.

    In March 2001, Gladio agent Vincenzo Vinciguerra stated, in sworn testimony, “You had to attack civilians, the people, women, children, innocent people, unknown people far removed from any political game. The reason was quite simple: to force … the public to turn to the state to ask for greater security.”

    Cossiga’s new revelations appeared last week in Italy’s oldest and most widely read newspaper, Corriere della Sera. Below appears a rough translation.

    “[Bin Laden supposedly confessed] to the Qaeda September [attack] to the two towers in New York [claiming to be] the author of the attack of the 11, while all the [intelligence services] of America and Europe … now know well that the disastrous attack has been planned and realized from the CIA American and the Mossad with the aid of the Zionist world in order to put under accusation the Arabic Countries and in order to induce the western powers to take part … in Iraq [and] Afghanistan.”

    Cossiga first expressed his doubts about 9/11 in 2001, and is quoted in Webster Tarpley’s book as stating that “The mastermind of the attack must have been a “sophisticated mind, provided with ample means not only to recruit fanatic kamikazes, but also highly specialized personnel. I add one thing: it could not be accomplished without infiltrations in the radar and flight security personnel.”

    Coming from a widely respected former head of state, Cossiga’s assertion that the 9/11 attacks were an inside job and that this is common knowledge amongst global intelligence agencies is highly unlikely to be mentioned by any establishment media outlets, because like the hundreds of other sober ex-government, military, air force professionals, allied to hundreds more professors and intellectuals – he can’t be sidelined as a crackpot conspiracy theorist.

    What is in Your Vaccine?

    1

    By J A Blacker, Science Correspondent with Derek Ellis
    RINF Alternative News

    Folks, you had better sit down, take a very deep breath. Merk drug company vaccines admits injecting cancer viruses into their vaccines and we have the proof on video for you to watch.

    This censored interview conducted by medical historian Edward Shorter for WGBH public television (Boston) and Blackwell Science was cut from The Health Century due to its liability–the admission that Merck drug company vaccines have traditionally been injecting cancer viruses (SV40 and others) in people worldwide.

    This segment of In Lies We Trust: The CIA, Hollywood & Terrorism, produced and freely contributed by consumer protector and public health expert, Dr. Leonard Horowitz, features the world’s leading vaccine expert, Dr. Maurice Hilleman, who explains why Merck’s vaccines have spread AIDS, leukaemia, and other horrific plagues worldwide.

    Dr. Hilleman, who developed the Mumps, Rubella and Measles vaccines, said: “Vaccines are the bargain basement technology of the 20th century.”

    In the taped interview (with about 6 Merck executives in the room, their nervous laughter audible in the tape) Dr. Hilleman explains how in his search for uninfected monkeys, Merck imported green monkeys from Africa. Those monkeys, it turned out, were carrying the AIDS virus: “I didn’t know we were importing AIDS.”

    Dr. Hilleman also acknowledged that he discovered that the Sabine polio vaccine (manufactured by Merck) was infected with the SV-40 cancer virus. In the process of developing vaccines Merck scientists are shown to blithely disregarded public safety as they conducted massive tests exposing millions of unsuspecting people to wild viruses. Dr. Hilleman acknowledged that the cancer infected polio vaccine had been tested in massive field trials in Russia, then in the U.S.

    The issues raised in this candid interview raise serious doubts about the propaganda the public has been fed about the safety of vaccines. Vaccines that have been promoted as “safe and effective” miraculous cures have been infecting (possibly) millions of people with cancer, leukaemia, and AIDS.

    The interview was conducted by Dr. Edward Shorter, Professor of the History of Medicine and Professor of Psychiatry, University of Toronto. I checked the authenticity of the tape with Dr. Shorter who informed me that he did it when preparing a PBS series called “The Health Century.” Doubleday published a companion volume of the same title in 1987.

    Dr. Shorter deposited the entire tape of the interview, including portions omitted from the book, along with other interviews in the National Library of Medicine.

    The uncovered facts should prompt a re-examination of the advisability of US mandatory vaccine policies—

    The person who posted this censored portion of the interview on Youtube is Dr. Leonard Horowitz, a controversial and prolific healthcare expert with multiple academic degrees—including 3 doctorates.

    In his forthcoming documentary film, “In Lies We Trust: The CIA, Hollywood & Bioterrorism,” Dr. Horowitz examines official directives for national preparedness against outbreaks, nuclear explosions, and other disasters. A critical examination of what officials are saying and not telling that impacts the future of public health and urgent life-saving decisions every American is currently being encouraged to make.

    In short you have been deliberately poisoned.

    VIDEO: Shell Oil – corporate criminals

    Oil company business as usual

    Blood and oil in Ireland

    We hear about a looming energy shortage and we see high fuels prices. The media talks endlessly about global warming, but when do we hear about what goes on “behind the scenes” of oil and gas extraction projects?


    http://www.brasschecktv.com/page/212.html

    Shell Oil, one of the most notorious thug corporations, routinely uses violence and threats of violence to guarantee its profits.

    Here were see a well trained group of thugs, paid for at taxpayers expense, attack unarmed demonstrators. Local politicians? Nowhere to be seen.

    Merck Vaccine Chief Brings HIV/AIDS to America

    This stunning censored interview conducted by medical historian Edward Shorter for WGBH public television (Boston) and Blackwell Science was cut from The Health Century due to its huge liability–the admission that Merck drug company vaccines have traditionally been injecting cancer viruses (SV40 and others) in people worldwide.

    This segment of In Lies We Trust: The CIA, Hollywood & Bioterrorism, produced and freely contributed by consumer protector and public health expert, Dr. Leonard Horowitz, features the world’s leading vaccine expert, Dr. Maurice Hilleman, who explains why Merck’s vaccines have spread AIDS, leukemia, and other horrific plagues worldwide.

    Please forward this clip (link) to everyone you know who thinks vaccines are “safe and effective.”

    When truth is under attack

    By JA Blacker MSc IMI, Science correspondent
    RINF Alternative News

    Bullying journalists endangers us all

    RINF has acquired first hand experience – the UK is now in the early stages of becoming a police state directed solely for the benefit of the ruling elite, but the cops on the ground doing the harassment are fairly friendly “just taking orders” – just like in 1932 NAZI Germany.
    As a science reporter it is my job to accurately report to our readers police roadblock activities, but when the officers will not even give their names or the name of the operation because they are told not to, but demand your details – then you know the Police Authority have something sinister to hide.

    “Common Purpose” is what they have to hide folks.” Common Purpose” is a well-funded EU organisation set up by the Euro political elite to undermine our British “Common LAW” democracy and the UK police; courts, judiciary and every facet of UK authorities are riddles with these characters like a spreading Cancer.

    Many good colleagues would simply not even know who or what these characters are – and what their real adgender is. But here is how to spot one: Check out this Video

    Ever wondered why our public services are becoming much more expensive, less efficient and more draconian, well now you know.

    1st of December this year is being used by “Common Purpose” infested police forces up and down the UK as another excuse to harass law abiding shoppers & motorists, and apparently law abiding Journalists who report the harassment on the ground.

    Drink Driving is unwelcome by anyone with an atom of respect for fellow motorist & general public alike, indeed it should not be understated, this is withought doubt an abhorrent activity and its potential for devastating innocent lives is very real. I personally would lock each and every Drink Driver up for a minimum of 30 days with only bread & water and those who cause fatality & Injury should be tried for MURDER or attempted MURDER.

    BUT: The simple fact is more people will die from Smoking at Christmas than die from Drink Driving; taking all the hard drugs combined, Swigging Alcohol or ANY other activity!!! Including ALL Terrorism deaths, JET CRASH deaths, TRAIN CRASH deaths & every other type of Incident/ Accident – by a factor of 10 with room to spare.

    If it really were about saving peoples lives at Christmas would the authorities not have Roadblocks about “Smoking”? How stupid would that be to most people? Yet Carbon Monoxide from Cigarettes sends folk to sleep at the wheel. Tobacco products harm those who take them & are harming those kids in the car being driven from A to B whilst having to suck it in!

    Should we not be sick to the back teeth of NAZI dressed storm troopers with skinhead style JACK boots from stopping us going about our lawful business at Roadblocks based upon what is in reality a “Common Purpose” PLOY?

    Are Roadblocks something you use to see in third world BANANA republics only –
    Apparently not, according to one relatively friendly bunch of Cops who gave me the once over on Saturday 01st December. One chap in charge (WAS NOT GIVING HIS DETAILS) says he has been doing roadblocks for over 10 years.

    Can anyone else remember roadblocks prior to “Common Purpose” riddled NEW LABOUR?

    Why are there never any Roadblocks in the pub car parks, would it not be better to stop the problem at source rather than let it get on the road to start with? How about starting at the pubs the cops frequent and then work on the Clubs Barristers & Judges get sloshed at?

    Now, as it so happens these officers were dressed like Storm troopers but it’s because they also do drug raids and respond to bar brawl punkouts, etc according to the (Anonymous) team leader. He claimed the other officers were on their TEA break. Cough Cough!

    But that is the point exactly is it not?

    If we wanted Storm troopers stomping about stopping traffic at checkpoints – we would have invited Hitler to do the job?

    WELL, as you have observed from the video that is exactly what is being foisted on the unsuspected British Public by the back door – here is how their dictatorship style patter goes:

    “Do you mind being stopped to help us with our drink drive campaign Sir/Madam?”

    If you say you DO object, you then become a SUSPECT – in turn your car is searched and all your stuff thrown about and you are given the Christmas once over.

    The Cops report back to COP HQ that most of the public do not mind being stopped to help the DD campaign. This is reported correctly, but in such a slanted way, because as one officer let slip “It keeps us in a JOB”.

    And it is all very true; the vast majority of people do indeed say they welcome the Cop Checkpoints. Indeed I got the opportunity to ask one motorist before the Storm troopers harassed and stopped me for reporting the truth, and he “the motorist” wished to remain anonymous, clearly was not happy, but felt he had no other option but to put up with the police checkpoint and the inconvenience he was subjected. In fact his facial expressions of clear stress did not match him saying he did not mind – the guy looked like he was ready to have a heart attack. What would you say to an enquiring journalist if you had a cop dressed like a storm trooper stood over?

    It was then my turn to receive the once over: the officer refused to give his name despite three separate polite requests and said he was not prepared to give his details at all. I then took the officers number L975 of which he was clearly not pleased. Well, as you can guess my scientific & journalistic curiosity questioned, why hide your name, if a public servant, and if indeed – one has nothing to hide?

    I gave the officer my RINF.COM press badge and asked, “Could you tell me the name of this harassment operation officer?” I had already introduced myself to the officer in charge as John Blacker RINF.COM Science correspondent. For public information the storm troopers were operating from Lancaster (BLACK MERIA) Police unit registration X771 JEC at 20:06 on Saturday 01 December on Morecambe Road Lancaster England.

    The officer then started to trump up charges of interfering with police duties & wasting police time because I was at the Roadblock asking questions. I then remarked, “It’s a public place; I am press reporting events live for RINF.COM.” The officer then claimed I should have followed press protocol and downloaded the official press release from the Internet.

    LET US BE Absolutely clear here, this was suppression of the PRESS media, this was a deliberate stopping of me doing a lawful activity and reporting on the ground police harassment of motorists, disguised as Christmas DD campaign on 1st December 2007.

    I was asked if I minded my vehicle being searched and I said I certainly do mind but go ahead.

    Well, what do you know; as luck would have it — an emergency ensues — In the boot of my car appeared to be a juicy stash of contraband. I wonder how they got there?

    Well, anyway, “HANDS UP!” “Step away from the vehicle!!”

    I thought the officers handled this bit really well. Now, this is what we are paying these guys for, not to stop old codgers after dark frightening heart failure.

    Anyway, after explaining the situation all was in order.

    However before departing:

    I took it upon myself to clearly inform the officers of X771 JEC that 911 was an inside job and so were the 7/7 London Bombings. They did not argue – because they already knew.

    Indeed, I went on to explain US VICE President DICK CHENEY is being impeached for High Crimes. I told those good police officers that if they wanted real information they would have to go to RINF.COM as the mainstream media is not reporting worthy news such as WAR CROOK Cheney’s impeachment for high crimes.

    Let us not forget this; it was first responders who were murdered along with ordinary civilians by Government Criminals on 911.

    As I promised the officers of X771 JEC – Here is Dick Cheney impeachment video 2007:

    Now we all know how much the UK news is being censored – and how free the UK press actually is.

    Would you not expect Dick Cs Impeachment to be reported on the BBC as top headline news?

    Surely, the best way to target & catch Road Hogs & motor offenders such as Drink Drivers is for the officers to be mobile, patrolling in groups of two or three. If that system was so inefficient – then why do police use it most of the time & the UK courts /JAILS are full?

    Isn’t the REAL TRUTH the roadblock system is used in the run up to Christmas to lighten the loads on the justice services and at the same time groom the unsuspecting public to accept “Common Purpose” EU draconian adgender?

    Canada’s role in depleted uranium weapons

    0

    By Alfred Lambremont Webre, JD, Med

    The Government of Canada is in non-compliance with the statutes and regulations of the Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission (CNSC), prohibiting the use of Canadian uranium in depleted uranium (DU) weapons. Moreover, Canada has a bilateral nuclear co-operation agreement with the US, under which uranium exports to the US may only be used for peaceful purposes, and not in weapons. This includes ‘control over the high enrichment of Canadian uranium and subsequent storage and use of the highly enriched uranium,’ a Foreign Affairs document states. The same rules that apply to uranium apply to depleted uranium, according to the CNSC.

    DU weapons are considered weapons of mass destruction under international law. Thus Canada may be complicit in the US use of weapons of mass destruction in the 1991 Iraq war I, the 1998 Balkans war, the 2001 war in Afghanistan, and the 2003 Iraq war II, where the British medical journal Lancet estimates that one million civilians have died. In each of these wars, it is likely that depleted uranium in the DU weapons used by the U.S. and the UK comes from Canadian uranium exported to the US and processed in US enrichment plants into depleted uranium and subsequently manufactured into DU weapons.

    Depleted uranium is the uranium by-product that remains after the removal of the isotope U-235 during the enrichment process. For every ton of enriched U-235 uranium for the nuclear weapons and nuclear power industries, seven tons of depleted uranium containing the U-238 isotope are made for the munitions, DU weapons, and military armor industries. ‘Depleted uranium’ is a marketing term of the nuclear industry. U-238 depleted uranium was originally discovered as a poison gas weapon of mass destruction during World War II by the Manhattan Project, at the same time as the atomic bomb and Agent Orange. Because DU is pyrophoric, it bursts into high-temperature decomposition upon impact with military armour, releasing nanoparticles of ionizing radiation that contaminate all living things and the environment with deadly radiation with a half-life of 4.5 billion years. The public military excuse for the use of DU munitions, bombs and kinetic penetrators is that DU is heavy and easily penetrates military armour and other targets. The covert strategic military use of DU munitions, smart bombs, and cruise missiles is radiation contamination of terrain, and low level nuclear war against enemy troops, civilian populations, and all unprotected military troops, for purposes of depopulation.

    DU weapons & war crimes

    After 3 years of investigation by 60 expert witnesses and jurists at a cost of $1 million raised by Japanese citizens, the International Criminal Tribunal For Afghanistan at Tokyo on March 10, 2004 found President George W. Bush guilty of the war crimes of genocide, crimes against humanity and war crimes for the use of depleted uranium (DU) weapons by US forces in the 2001 war against Afghanistan.

    Experts agree that a substantial portion of the depleted uranium in the DU weapons used by the US in Afghanistan came from Canadian uranium. Had the Tokyo Tribunal been diligent, it could have found Canadian Prime Minister Jean Chrétien, who resigned as Prime Minister on December 12, 2003, guilty as an accessory to genocide, crimes against humanity, and war crimes, for failing to enforce Canadian Nuclear Safety Commission regulations, and the Canada-US Nuclear Cooperation Agreement, both of which prohibit Canadian uranium from being used in DU weapons.

    Dr. Gordon Edwards, president of the Montreal-based Canadian Coalition for Nuclear Responsibility (CCNR) says, “Canada may have the policy, but it¹s not enforced. The Canadian government is taking directions and orders from the nuclear industry” . The uranium industry has a vested interest in ensuring its depleted uranium waste makes a profit and is not just left in storage. That¹s why some of Canada¹s depleted uranium is ending up in weapons, Edwards says. “The Canadian government can¹t even think for themselves.”

    Depleted uranium in Hawaii

    The depleted uranium that has contaminated the Hawaiian Islands with deadly radiation most probably has a Canadian uranium source. It is highly probably that the depleted uranium in DU munitions fired at bases on the Big Island and at military bases on Oahu, and in the nuclear weapons stored at Pearl Harbour is derived from Canadian uranium, exported to the US and processed into enriched uranium and DU.

    Public health effects of DU weapons

    The public health and environmental effects of the use of depleted uranium (DU) weapons can be considered per se violations of the war crime of genocide, crimes against humanity, and war crimes under the Statute of the International Criminal Court. The demonstrated public health effects of depleted uranium (DU) weapons include: diabetes, cancer, birth defects, chronic diseases caused by neurological and neuromuscular radiation damage, mitochondrial diseases (chronic fatigue syndrome, Lou Gehrig¹s, Parkinson¹s and Alzheimer¹s disease, heart and brain disorders), global DNA damage in men¹s sperm, infertility in women, learning disabilities (such as autism and dyslexia), mental illness, infant mortality and low birth weights, increase in death rates and decrease in birth rates.

    The Prime Minister stonewalls

    So far, the Conservative government and the Liberal opposition have failed to take a public position on Canada¹s failure to stop the illegal use of its uranium in DU weapons. Stephen Harper refused to allow any Conservative MPs to appear on a June 13, 2007 North American radio special programme on the Canadian DU issue. Despite repeated conversations with Stephane Dion’s personal press attaché and attempts to reach Liberal MP and Foreign Affairs critic Ujjal Dosanjh, the Liberal Party chose not to send a representative to the Canadian DU radio programme. Liberal MP Dr. Keith Martin, MD, a physician and former Parliamentary Secretary for the Minister of Defence in the Paul Martin Government, appeared on a radio programme on the Canadian DU issue and stated that in his opinion, there were no adverse public health consequences to the use of DU weapons.

    By contrast, at a May 12, 2007 Uranium-free BC Forum at the Brilliant Centre in Castlegar, BC, NDP MP Alex Atamanenko (Southern Interior) publicly stated he was opposed to the use of Canadian uranium in DU weapons. Atamanenko seeks Canadian legislation banning DU weapons, as Belgium has passed. On the June 13, 2007 Canadian DU radio programme, Atamanenko publicly committed to question the Prime Minister in the House of Commons on why Canada was not enforcing its regulations and treaty obligations against the use of its uranium in DU weapons. Connie Fogal, Leader of the Canadian Action Party, which passed a resolution in support of Canadian legislation outlawing DU weapons, committed to work against the use of Canadian DU in American weapons. Adriane Carr, Deputy Leader of the Green Party of Canada likewise committed to demand enforcement of Canada¹s prohibitions against use of its uranium in DU weapons.

    What path is Canada taking?

    Unbeknownst to the public, the Government of Canada seems to have strayed into aiding and abetting the serious war crimes of DU-induced genocide and crimes against humanity. By contrast, British Columbia has maintained a moratorium on uranium mining since the 1970s. There is substantial community support for a permanent ban on uranium exploration and mining in BC, as the recent Uranium-free BC Forum in Castlegar suggested. The detrimental impacts of uranium exploration and mining on public health and the environment is the driving force behind the ban.

    Under the guise of combating climate change, the nuclear industry, led by the Bush Administration, is now promoting nuclear power plants to the tiger economies of India, China, Japan, and South Korea. Because of ionizing radiation and the nuclear waste issue, this amounts to a low level nuclear war against these populations. NASA recently reported vast uranium deposits in Khazakhstan and Afghanistan. Khazakhstan is expected to out-produce Canada (now the world¹s top producer) in uranium production within 12 years.

    One might rationally ask: Why not ban uranium exploration and mining in BC, and organize collectively to secure a uranium exploration and mining ban in Saskatchewan, Ontario and Quebec? The public policy reasons for the ban on uranium exploration and mining in the rest of Canada public heath and environment are equally valid throughout Canada, as they are in BC.

    Let¹s sunset our Canadian uranium industry. That is a practical way to save the health of Canadians, the environment, and innocent victims worldwide.

    *************
    Alfred Lambremont Webre

    Alfred Lambremont Webre, JD, MEd is the International Director of the Institute for Cooperation in Space (ICIS), and a Judge on the Kuala Lumpur International War Crimes Tribunal. Alfred can be reached at peace@peaceinspace.org Website at www.peaceinspace.org
    For nuclear info visit www.ccnr.org

    Olmert plays down peace deal chances by end of 2008

    0

    By Ori Lewis

    Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Olmert on Sunday played down expectations for a peace deal with the Palestinians before the end of 2008 as laid out at a U.S.-sponsored peace conference last week.

    “We will make an effort to hold speedy negotiations in the hope we may conclude by the end of 2008, but certainly there is no commitment for a firm timetable for their completion,” Olmert said at the start of Sunday’s Israeli cabinet meeting.

    U.S. President George W. Bush assured Israeli and Palestinian leaders at the conference in Annapolis, Maryland, that Washington would actively engage in peacemaking, despite deep skepticism over chances for a deal before he leaves office.

    Launching the first formal peace talks in seven years at the conference, Olmert and Palestinian President Mahmoud Abbas agreed to try and reach a deal on creating a Palestinian state in Gaza and the West Bank by the end of next year.

    But skeptics say Bush’s time scale for peacemaking is too ambitious given both leaders are politically weak. Speaking at the first cabinet meeting since Annapolis, Olmert urged caution.

    In an apparent hint to right-wing coalition partners he was not planning concessions without a reciprocal move from the Palestinians, Olmert said any progress on peace would depend on adhering to commitments under a stalled U.S. peace “road map”.

    “The most important thing in the joint statement is that … any agreement that we reach in the future will be dependent on completion of all road map commitments.

    “In other words, Israel will not have to implement any commitment which emanates from the agreement before all the road map commitments have been met,” he said.

    The 2003 U.S. road map provides benchmarks that include a freeze of Jewish settlement activity in the West Bank, occupied by Israel since the 1967 Middle East war, as well as a Palestinian crackdown on militants.

    GAZA MILITANTS

    Israel will release about 430 Palestinian prisoners on Monday as part of efforts to bolster Abbas against Hamas Islamists, who seized the Gaza Strip in June and have rejected the peace drive, vowing to keep fighting the Jewish state.

    Israel regularly launches raids into Gaza to try to stop militants firing rockets onto Israeli towns and said on Sunday it had stepped up attacks in the coastal strip in the past week.

    A statement said Defense Minister Ehud Barak told ministers he had authorized more military action in Gaza, including the targeting of “manned military Hamas targets”. Barak said Israel had killed 22 militants in attacks in the past week.

    Most Gaza petrol stations have closed and traffic has almost came to a halt since Israel began reducing the amount of fuel allowed into the coastal strip last month in response to the rocket salvoes.

    “Cooking gas will run out within days and cars will stop within hours,” said Mahmoud al-Khuzundar, chairman of the society of petrol company owners, on Sunday.

    Olmert’s comments playing down hopes of a quick deal came after the United States withdrew a draft United Nations resolution endorsing action agreed at Annapolis — a document Israeli officials said they felt was inappropriate.

    Although Israel apparently had no problems with the uncontroversial text, analysts suggested it was worried a formal resolution would get the U.N. too involved in Middle East peace efforts. Israel and the United States often complain of bias in the world body against the Jewish state.

    (Additional reporting by Nidal al-Mughrabi in Gaza, Writing by Ori Lewis and Rebecca Harrison)

    Football agent slams ‘terrorist operation’

    0

    By Richard Bright

    Football agent Willie McKay has claimed that a police raid on his home earlier this week was conducted like a “terrorist operation”.

  • Redknapp rues lost England dream
  • Football fans’ forum

    McKay’s house was targeted by City of London police officers on Wednesday morning as part of their investigation into allegations of corruption in the game, although he insisted that he had done nothing wrong.

  • Speaking about the raid, McKay said: “It was 6am, all I could hear was people shouting ‘police’ – I got out of bed and there were police officers all over the place.

    “I got ready, but I was absolutely startled and amazed they actually came up into my bedroom – I think there were around 28 [officers involved]. How on earth can an inquiry for allegedly giving a player money lead to 28 officers storming my house with my family inside. It’s incredible.

    “They were looking for transfer documents and the strange thing is that twice my lawyer has contacted the police and said, ‘we’re quite happy to meet you, speak with you and show any documentation you want’.

    “I don’t blame the officers themselves. Their orders were to come up here, but it was like a terrorist operation. It was like something out of a film.”

    McKay was arrested on Wednesday along with Portsmouth chief executive Peter Storrie, former chairman Milan Mandaric, former player Amdy Faye and the Portsmouth manager, Harry Redknapp – who yesterday also protested his innocence.

    McKay continued: “They didn’t charge me, but said it was about giving Amdy Faye money. Does that warrant 28 police officers storming your house?

    “There are other things the police could be doing rather than coming up here – I could have gone down there. They see fit to do this, and it’s upset me and my family.”

    McKay has no doubt that he would be cleared of any wrongdoing.

    “I’m not confident, I know I will be,” he said.

    “The worrying thing is, how can somebody launch an attack like this on my property through lies? That’s all it’s been.”

    After his prominent involvement in the Quest inquiry conducted by Lord Stevens into alleged bungs, when he decided to publicly ‘out’ himself as one of the nine unnamed agents who were supposedly unco-operative – something he also vehemently denied – McKay felt he was being victimised.

    He claimed: “A chairman of a club in the North-West about three years ago told me ‘they’re gunning for you, it’s your head they want.”

    “I have been through everything – the Quest investigation, this investigation, that investigation – where is it all coming to?”

    Who are the doctors of torture? Why the torture?

    1

    Larisa Alexandrovna

    I cannot stop thinking about the so called “medical doctors” and “psychiatrists” who are helping to torture prisoners in US custody at camps such as Gitmo, and secret prisons around the globe. Who are these people?

    From a 2005 NYT article:

    “The accounts shed light on how interrogations were conducted and raise new questions about the boundaries of medical ethics in the nation’s fight against terrorism.

    Bryan Whitman, a senior Pentagon spokesman, declined to address the specifics in the accounts. But he suggested that the doctors advising interrogators were not covered by ethics strictures because they were not treating patients but rather were acting as behavioral scientists.

    Several ethics experts outside the military said there were serious questions involving the conduct of the doctors, especially those in units known as Behavioral Science Consultation Teams, BSCT, colloquially referred to as ”biscuit” teams, which advise interrogators.

    ”Their purpose was to help us break them,” one former interrogator told The Times earlier this year.”

    Behavioral scientists? So if they are not treating the patients, are they conducting behavioral experiments? That is what I read from that DOD statement. And then I remembered something about Dr. Ewen Cameron I had read in Naomi Klein’s monumental Shock Doctrine. I had heard of Dr. Cameron before, because believe it or not he had served on the Nuremberg Medical Tribunal. His claim to fame, however, was his horrific experiments on human subjects, funded by the CIA called MKUltra. What I remember from Klein’s book is the similarities that his methods share with those we see today in our own global torture chambers.

    Here is Klein discussing Dr. Cameron on Democracy Now:

    “McGill in Montreal. At the time, the head of psychiatry was a man named Ewen Cameron. He was actually an American citizen. He was formerly head of the American Psychiatric Association, which I think is quite relevant to the debates going on right now about complicity in the psychiatric profession with current interrogation techniques. Ewen Cameron was head of the American Psychiatric Association. He moved to McGill to be head of psychiatry and to head up a hospital called the Allan Memorial Hospital, which was a psychiatric hospital.

    He got funding from the CIA, and he turned the Allan Memorial Hospital into this extraordinary laboratory for what we now understand as alternative interrogation techniques. He dosed his patients with these odd cocktails of drugs, like LSD and PCP. He put them to sleep, sort of into a comatose state for up to a month. He put some of his patients into extreme sensory deprivation, and the point was to make them lose track of time and space.

    And what Ewen Cameron believed, or at least what he said he believed, was that all mental illness was taught later in life, that these were patterns that set in later in life. He was a behavioral psychologist. And so, rather than getting at the root of those problems and trying to understand them, he believed that the way to treat mental illness was to take adult patients and reduce them to a childlike state. And it’s been well known — it was well known at the time — that one of the side effects of electroshock therapy was memory loss. And this was something that was seen, actually, by most doctors as a problem, because patients were treated, they may have reported some positive results, but they forgot all kinds of things about their life. Ewen Cameron looked at this research and thought, “Aha, this is good,” because he believed that it was the patterns that — because he believed that it was the patterns that were set in later in life, that if he could take his patients back to an infantile state, before they even had language, before they knew who they were, then he could essentially re-mother them, and he could turn them into healthy people. So this is the idea that caught the attention of the CIA, this idea of deliberately inducing extreme regression.”

    In her book, Klein describes that the real interest for the CIA in funding the McGill experiments was to see if a ‘Manchurian Candidate’ could be recreated out of the regressed, “empty slate” that the Cameron technique made out of a victim.

    Now, I have not finished the book yet, so Klein may actually cover this. But I have long been unable to reconcile the notion that we are torturing people in order to obtain information from them with the reality of the number of people, the majority of whom were innocent of any wrongdoing, and the opinion of most experts that torture did not work for information gathering. What then, I thought, were we torturing people for?

    In Klein’s book, she describes the applications of torture as a mechanism conducted to “shock” the belief system out of the believer as simultaneous military methods are used to shock the freedom out of a nation – for example, in Chile’s bloody Pinochet coup sponsored by the CIA. Ironically, this terrorism was also a September 11 event.

    The problem, however, with applying the Cameron template to Iraq and Afghanistan and to extraordinary rendition victims from all over the world, is that unlike in Chile, the effectiveness of “shock” to individual and to his/her society by extension was successful because it was done by the light of day. It was used to both shock the individual out of their political beliefs and through example, those who witnessed the horrific tactics.

    In Iraq, Afghanistan, and any number of prisons around the world run by the Bush-Cheney cabal, the “shocks” are delivered in secret. We, the public, only know of them because of courageous whistle-blowers, and sources who leaked to courageous reporters. These things have been so secret that it took years before we knew anything and to this day, we don’t know the half of it.

    Moreover, the number of victims in unknown for sure, despite estimates, and the victims have come from a number of countries, including those we are not at war with, like Italy, Germany, and Canada. In other words, although the methods are clearly the same as Dr. Cameron’s torture methods (and also those of Nazi scientists that the US helped bring to safety post WWII in Operation Paperclip), the motive here appears to be different.

    The selection of victims is based entirely on their religion and ethnicity. Most of the victims selected by the cabal are either Muslims or resembling Middle Easterners. Yet the victims selected for the torture chambers appear from Europe as well as the Middle East, Canada, as well as the US.

    In a document leaked to me in 2005, we learned that at the very least (and these are only the ones known about and documented), the US had detained roughly 70 thousand people since the start of the Afghanistan and Iraq wars:

    “U.S. forces have held 35,000 detainees in Iraq since the onset of war. Of those, only 1,300 have been tried, and only half of those tried have been convicted, averaging roughly two percent of the detainee population.

    The combined figures of those detainee in both Iraq and Afghanistan since 2001 is upwards of 70,000.

    According to CENTCOM sources, the Central Criminal Court of Iraq has so far held 684 ‘Coalition trials’ involving 1,259 security detainees, in which a total of only 636 detainees were convicted. Sources say that in total more than 21,000 detainees have been released from Iraq internment facilities.

    The CENTCOM slide contains a graphical breakdown of each camp and its detainee population. Included in this count are Abu Ghraib, Camp Bucca, Camp Cropper, Fort Suse and Camp Ashraf. Other, less known camps are not included in this count, including Al-Kazimiyah and Al-Nasiriyah. Sources familiar with US detention camps also point to an alleged facility at Diego Garcia in the Indian Ocean, as well as an installation on the USS Baton.”

    Now, for collecting information, 70 thousand of men, women, and children are exactly why I do not believe that the torture has anything to do with intelligence gathering. Think about it, 70k people arrested and held without charge, tortured, all for identifying what? How many of these people could actually know anything of value? And even if they did, how many of these people could provides leads that the US could follow up? Where would we even get the manpower?

    But let’s also consider, that many of the detainees were held for years, long after they were broken by torture and long after any information they could have provided would have been of use to anyone. Then they were quietly let go.

    Whatever the torture is for, it does not appear to be for the shock element as described by Klein, although it has served that purpose in limited form (for example, Fallujah). The torture is also absolutely not part of intelligence gathering, because the numbers of people, their demographics in terms of age and gender, their unlikely access to actual terrorists (that would require something of a connection with Pakistani ISI and the Taliban) would make it a fruitless experiment in the already well known pointlessness horror of torture as a tool of good intelligence gathering .

    Now for the speculation, which is all this can be with the limited amount of evidence there is in any direction.

    Fake war on terror needs fake enemy soldiers?

    We are very much in real wars in Afghanistan and Iraq and with very real American casualties to prove it. What we are not, however, is in this thing called The War on Terror. That is a slogan, a label on a product line that does not exist in reality.

    Because, if we were really fighting a war on terror, then why are we in Iraq? Why are the two major nations who train terrorists and fund terrorists our allies in a war against Iraq? I am speaking obviously of Saudi Arabia and Pakistan. Indeed, we have waged a war in Iraq at expense of any real or meaningful progress towards a fight against real terrorism. The War on Terror is a lie, that is something we already know. We also know that the lie has been pushed by people who believe in endless war and creative destruction. But if the incidents of terrorism were – as we know – rather limited on the world level prior to our invasion of Iraq (in comparison with post Iraq invasion numbers), how would an endless war be justified?

    Remember, al Qaeda prior to the Iraq war was at its height maybe several hundred strong. Hezbollah had not targeted American interests in years. And all of the limited anti-American terrorism around the world pre-911, was aimed at our embassies, not at generating massive casualties of American civilians, which is what we saw on 9/11.

    The only thing that I can conclude given that the mechanisms and methods of torture are almost exactly what Cameron and others were doing in order to create the perfect robot, is that the Bush-Cheney cabal needed an enemy army, a terrorist army that could be used to justify the war on terror as an endless necessary war for the safety of our nation.

    Again, I am just speculating, so please do not take this to be anything more than a theory cobbled together out of a few shreds here and a few shreds there. But it is nevertheless an interesting possibility to consider.

    Is the dollar leading us into a depression?

    0

    A fallen greenback could mean economic turmoil, or it could trigger an economic crisis. Economists are having trouble predicting the outcome because investors are not behaving rationallyBy J. Bradford DeLong

    The falling US dollar has emerged as a source of profound global macro-economic distress. The question now is how bad that distress will become. Is the world economy at risk? There are two possibilities. If global savers and investors expect the US dollar’s depreciation to continue, they will flee the currency unless they are compensated appropriately for keeping their money in the US and its assets, implying that the gap between US and foreign interest rates will widen. As a result, the cost of capital in the US will soar, discouraging investment and reducing consumption spending as high interest rates depress the value of households’ principal assets: their houses.

    The resulting recession might fuel further pessimism and cutbacks in spending, deepening the downturn. A US in recession would no longer serve as the importer of last resort, which might send the rest of the world into recession as well. A world in which everybody expects a falling US dollar is a world in economic crisis.

    By contrast, a world in which the US dollar has already fallen is one that may see economic turmoil, but not an economic crisis. If the US dollar has already fallen — if nobody expects it to fall much more — then there is no reason to compensate global savers and investors for holding US assets.

    On the contrary, in this scenario there are opportunities: the US dollar, after all, might rise; US interest rates will be at normal levels; asset values will not be unduly depressed; and investment spending will not be affected by financial turmoil.

    Of course, there may well be turbulence: When US wage levels appear low because of a weak US dollar, it is hard to export to the US, and other countries must rely on other sources of demand to maintain full employment. The government may have to shore up the financial system if the changes in asset prices that undermined the US dollar sink risk-loving or imprudent lenders.

    But these are, or ought to be, problems that we can solve. By contrast, sky-high US interest rates produced by a general expectation of a massive ongoing US dollar decline is a macroeconomic problem without a solution.

    Yet so far there are no signs that global savers and investors expect a US dollar decline. The large gap between US and foreign long-term interest rates that should emerge from and signal expectations of a falling US dollar does not exist. And the US$65 billion needed every month to fund the US current-account deficit continues to flow in. Thus, the world economy may dodge yet another potential catastrophe.

    That may still prove to be wishful thinking. After all, the US’ still-large current-account deficit guarantees that the US dollar will continue to fall. Even so, the macroeconomic logic that large current-account deficits signal that currencies are overvalued continues to escape the world’s international financial investors and speculators.

    On one level, this is very frustrating: We economists believe that people are smart enough to understand their situation and capable enough to pursue their own interests. Yet the typical investor in US dollar-denominated assets — whether a rich private individual, a pension fund, or a central bank — has not taken the steps to protect themselves against the very likely US dollar decline in our future.

    In this case, what is bad for economists is good for the world economy: We may be facing a mere episode of financial distress in the US rather than sky-high long-term interest rates and a depression. The fact that economists can’t explain it is no reason not to be thankful.

    ENDGAME: Ron Paul

    Check out this link from the November 28th Republican YouTube debate, it’s straight out of Endgame:

    http://www.cnn.com/video/?/video/politics/2007/11/28/sot.paul.na.conspiracy.cnn

    Cooper:
    We’ve got another question from a YouTube watcher. Let’s 
    watch, please.

    YouTube question:
    Good evening, candidates. This is (inaudible) 
    from Arlington, Texas, and this question is for Ron Paul.

    I’ve met a lot of your supporters online, but I’ve noticed that a 
    good number of them seem to buy into this conspiracy theory 
    regarding the Council of Foreign Relations, and some plan to make 
    a North American union by merging the United States with Canada 
    and Mexico.

    These supporters of yours seem to think that you also believe in 
    this theory. So my question to you is: Do you really believe in 
    all this, or are people just putting words in your mouth?

    Presidential Candidate Ron Paul:
    Well, it all depends on what you mean by “all of this.” the 
    CFR exists, the Trilateral Commission exists. And it’s a, quote, 
    “conspiracy of ideas.” This is an ideological battle. Some people 
    believe in globalism. Others of us believe in national sovereignty.

    And there is a move on toward a North American union, just like 
    early on there was a move on for a European Union, and it 
    eventually ended up.

    And there is a move on toward a North American Union, just like 
    early on there was a move on for a European Union, and eventually 
    ended up. So we had NAFTA and moving toward a NAFTA highway. These 
    are real things. It’s not somebody made these up. It’s not a 
    conspiracy. They don’t talk about it, and they might not admit 
    about it, but there’s been money spent on it. There was 
    legislation passed in the Texas legislature unanimously to put a 
    halt on it. They’re planning on millions of acres taken by eminent 
    domain for an international highway from Mexico to Canada, which 
    is going to make the immigration problem that much worse.

    So it’s not so much a secretive conspiracy, it’s a contest between 
    ideologies, whether we believe in our institutions here, our 
    national sovereignty, our Constitution, or are we going to further 
    move into the direction of international government, more U.N.

    You know, this country goes to war under U.N. resolutions. I don’t 
    like big government in Washington, so I don’t like this trend 
    toward international government. We have a WTO that wants to 
    control our drug industry, our nutritional products. So, I’m 
    against all that.
     
    But it’s not so much as a sinister conspiracy. It’s just knowledge 
    is out there. If we look for it, you’ll realize that our national 
    sovereignty is under threat.

    Cooper:
    Congressman Paul, thank you.

    (Applause)

    Websites sell secret bank data and PINs

    0

    Security breaches that are allowing the financial details of tens of thousands of Britons to be sold on the internet are to be investigated by the country’s information watchdog.

    Without paying a single penny, The Times downloaded banking information belonging to 32 people, including a High Court deputy judge and a managing director. The private account numbers, PINs and security codes were offered as tasters by illegal hacking sites in the hope that purchases would follow.

    Richard Thomas, the Information Commissioner, will begin an investigation into the security breach today and Scotland Yard is also investigating. Experts said that the findings suggested that more personal data than ever before was going astray. The Times found: More than 100 websites trafficking British bank details A fraudster offering to sell 30,000 British credit card numbers for less than £1 each A British “e-passport” for sale, although the Government insists that they are unhackable.

    The discovery comes as public alarm is growing about the dangers of identity theft. HM Revenue & Customs has yet to retrieve two lost CDs containing the banking details of 25 million Britons, which ministers admitted had vanished in the post a fortnight ago. At current underworld prices, these could fetch more than £100 million if they fell into the hands of hackers.

    The News of the World disclosed yesterday that it had been handed two discs mislaid by the Department for Work and Pensions containing the national insurance numbers of 18,000 claimants.

    Last year The Times discovered internet chatrooms where the hacked credit card details of 400 British people were being sold every day.

    A spokesman for Mr Thomas said: “We will be looking at the evidence you have provided and investigating the circumstances. This looks serious and is a matter of genuine concern.

    “We can take action against UK-based organisations that flout the Data Protection Act. If some of these websites are not UK-based we will work with our counterparts in the relevant country.”

    Mr Thomas will address the Commons Justice Committee tomorrow on the addional powers that he says are needed to prevent breaches of data protection. He believes that reckless failure to protect information should result in prosecution and that his staff should have powers to raid government and business premises.

    Hacking sites act as online bazaars for stolen personal information. They are well run, hierarchical groups structured like businesses. Some even have review sections where buyers can recommend a particular fraudster.

    Geraldine Hernon, 30, of St Ives, Cambridgeshire, was shocked to hear that her credit card number, expiry date and security number were online with her address, telephone number and e-mail address. She said: “I can’t believe it. I will have to change my whole account. It is terrifying that people have the information. It is personal information. I feel really scared.”

    The bank details of Robert Seabrook, QC, a deputy judge and former chairman of the Bar Council, were also freely available. He, too, described the breach as terrifying. “I am profoundly concerned,” he said. “One reads about the anxieties of data in the public domain but it is disconcerting to hear something so personal being available. If you can get this sort of thing for free who knows what is below the water line?”

    Neil Munroe, the director of the credit reference agency Equifax and an expert on internet fraud, said that the depth of information obtained by The Times was greater than he had ever seen. “The detail you have got is very disturbing,” he said. “Normally we only see credit card numbers coming up but you have got e-mails, addresses, security and PINs. Everything. It is very scary.”

    Senior police officers are concerned that current methods of dealing with large-scale data protection breaches are unworkable. Detective Chief Inspector Charlie McMurdie, of the Metropolitan Police e-crime unit, said: “At the moment people report internet crimes to a local police station but no one locally has the resources to investigate properly.”

    Since April customers have been told to report card crimes to their banks rather than to the police. Mr McMurdie, backed by the main banks, has asked the Home Office for £1.3 million to fund a central e-crime unit.

    Stolen identities

    Criminals use three main methods to extract personal information

    – Viruses contained in e-mails that install malicious software to collect information such as login names, bank account details and credit card numbers. Make sure you use up-to-date antivirus software

    – Handheld credit card readers are used to “skim” cards and copy data that is then used to clone another one. Check your accounts regulary for unusual transactions

    – Bin raiders go through rubbish bins to find discarded bank statements and utility bills. Make sure that all personal documents are shredded before you throw them out

    They used us like rats and dogs at Guantanamo

    0

    Mamdouh Habib says he was beaten until his final days in the US detention facility at Guantanamo Bay and has accused Australian officials of having “no humanity” for failing to intervene.

    Mr Habib is suing Nationwide News over a February 2005 newspaper column that implied he made false claims about torture.

    A jury found he had been defamed by the article, and Nationwide News is now mounting a defence of truth and justification in the NSW Supreme Court.

    Mr Habib today said he was beaten from the day of his arrest in Pakistan in 2001 until his final moments in 2005 at Guantanamo Bay, where he claimed he was experimented upon.

    “People have no humanity, they have been using us for experiments,” he told the court.

    “They [were] using us like rats and dogs and animals.

    “Every single injection, I take it by force.”

    Mr Habib denied a number of claims made by an Australian team which visited Guantanamo Bay in May 2002, including statements allegedly made by him that he was being treated well and had no major complaints.

    “I say that’s not true, I never been treated well in Guantanamo Bay, or Egypt, or Pakistan,” Mr Habib said.

    “They drag me (to interrogations) maybe half a kilometre in the gravel,” he said.

    Mr Habib said he told “every single person I saw” about his torture and mistreatment and Australians were “definitely” involved.

    “Australians, they aware of my torture and they be involved, definitely, with my torture,” he said.

    Alec Leopold, acting for Nationwide News, asked Mr Habib whether he was accusing Australian officials of being inhumane.

    “If Australian team was there when I was tortured, when I was given injection, yes,” he replied.

    The hearing continues.

    AAP

    Confirmed: Ability to spy on remote calls with VoIP

    0

    In October, two security experts at hacker conference ToorCon9 in San Diego hacked into their hotel’s corporate network using a Cisco VoIP phone

    By Linda Leung Framingham

    Cisco confirmed it is possible to eavesdrop on remote conversations using Cisco VoIP phones. In its security response, Cisco says: “an attacker with valid Extension Mobility authentication credentials could cause a Cisco Unified IP Phone configured to use the Extension Mobility feature to transmit or receive a Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) audio stream.”

    Cisco adds that Extension Mobility authentication credentials are not tied to individual IP phones and that “any Extension Mobility account configured on an IP phone’s Cisco Unified Communications Manager/CallManager (CUCM) server can be used to perform an eavesdropping attack.”

    The technique was described by Telindus researcher Joffrey Czarny at HACK.LU 2007 in Luxembourg in October.

    Cisco has published some workarounds to this problem in its security response.

    Also in October, two security experts at hacker conference ToorCon9 in San Diego hacked into their hotel’s corporate network using a Cisco VoIP phone.

    The hackers, John Kindervag and Jason Ostrom said they were able to access the hotel’s financial and corporate network and recorded other phone calls, according to a blog on Wired.com.

    The hackers used penetration tests propounded by a tool called VoIP Hopper, which mimics the Cisco data packets sent at three minute intervals and then trades a new Ethernet interface, getting the PC – which the hackers switched in place of the hotel phone – into the network running the VoIP, according to the blog post.

    The Avaya configuration is superior to Cisco, according to the hackers, because you have to send requests beyond a sniffer. Although it can be breached the same way, by replacing the phone with a PC.

    MI5 accuses China of hacking businesses

    0

    Howard Dahdah

    According to reports in the weekend newspapers, the government has accused China of hacking into the computer systems of leading companies.

    According to The Times, the MI5 director-general Jonathan Evans sent a confidential letter to 300 chief executives and security chiefs at financial institutions and legal firms last week warning them that they were under attack from Chinese state organisations.

    The summary of the letter, which was posted (securely) on the website of the Centre for the Protection of the National Infrastructure, warned its recipients of the “electronic espionage attack”.

    “The contents of the letter highlight the following: the Director-General’s concerns about the possible damage to UK business resulting from electronic attack sponsored by Chinese state organisations, and the fact that the attacks are designed to defeat best-practice IT security systems.

    “The letter acknowledges the strong economic and commercial reasons to do business with China, but the need to ensure management of the risks involved.”

    According to one security expert quoted in the Times article, one of the techniques used by the Chinese groups were “custom Trojans”, software designed to hack into the network of a particular firm and feed back confidential data.

    The MI5 website already acknowledges the UK is a high priority espionage target.

    “We estimate that at least 20 foreign intelligence services are operating to some degree against UK interests. Of greatest concern are the Russians and Chinese,” it said.

    The new spy camera

    0

    Tech.co.uk

    The latest prototype product from NEC Japan has to be one of the most novel uses of alternative energy we’ve ever seen – it’s a wireless security camera that draws its power directly from fluorescent light tubes.

    As odd as it may seem, the unnamed camera simply needs to be fixed to the ceiling beside a fluorescent light and connected to it by a wire with a ring-like adapter on one end. When the light is switched on, electricity is then generated by the Sharp-created technology in the ring through electromagnetic induction.

    Key to the development is not the flicker of a fluorescent tube that we’re so familiar with, but the magnetic field created by the AC source in the light. A field frequency of 45-100kHz can be used by the ring to generate 120mW of electricity, which is enough to power the camera.

    From that point on the otherwise-standard camera – VGA resolution with shots every 10 seconds – takes over, beaming its images to a PC using an ordinary Wi-Fi chip that also draws power from the light.

    NEC suggests that its camera could be installed in office light fittings to help companies keep an eye on their staff at work or in supermarkets for analyzing shopper behavior. So, suspicious cheapskates and manipulative marketers are probably rubbing their hands in glee.

    Poll shows more people now oppose ID cards

    0

    By Philip Johnston

    More people now oppose Labour’s proposed ID cards than support them, a poll for The Daily Telegraph has found.

  • Have your say: Have data-protection fears put you off ID cards?

    Just 43 per cent of those questioned said they favoured the introduction of a national identity scheme compared with 48 per cent who were against. It is the first time YouGov has found more against than in favour.

  • When the ID scheme was first proposed by the Government in 2003, YouGov found 78 per cent supported it and just 15 per cent were opposed.

    Since then, there has been a gradual erosion in support for ID cards and the recent loss of the country’s entire child benefit records on two CDs seems to have tipped the balance.

    Yesterday, it emerged that the Department of Work and Pensions let a contractor keep two discs with thousands of benefit claimants’ details for more than a year.

    The last time the pollsters asked the same question in July 2005, shortly after the London bombings, 45 per cent were in favour and 42 per cent opposed.

    The poll findings will be another blow to ministers who have been adamant that the ID project would proceed despite the child records fiasco.

    ID cards are due to be introduced from next year for foreign nationals and from 2009 for all British citizens applying for a new passport.

    The charge for a combined ID card and passport will be more than £100 in order to fund the £550 million annual cost to the Home Office.

    Ministers have said the project should be self-financing and not a drain on taxes.

    The Government has made a number of claims for the advantages of an ID scheme, including making it easier to track terrorists and criminals, bear down on ID fraud and tackle illegal immigration.

    But the recent disclosure that illegal immigrants were licensed to work as security guards by a Government agency and the ease with which the personal data of 25 million families were lost have clearly been a blow to public confidence.

    There is also a growing number of opponents who would pay a fine or risk prison by refusing to hand over their details.

    Phil Booth, of the campaign group No2ID, said: “Clearly a majority no longer trust that the Government can secure their personal information.

    “It’s hard to say whether proceeding with an ID scheme that will log your every application for credit, or registration with a clinic and add fingerprints to the data that officials will then lose or compromise is more pig-headed or foolhardy. Either way, public opinion is against the scheme now.”

    David Cameron recently told the Prime Minister that the public would find it “bizarre” if the Government was not willing now to “stop and think” about ID cards.

    However, at the weekend Jacqui Smith, the Home Secretary, continued to defend the scheme and said the inclusion of fingerprints would ensure the data’s security.

    “I will be able to be confident that my identity… will be linked to my fingerprint so just knowing who I am, where I live and what my bank details are will not be enough to be able to take my identity,” she said in a television interview.

    “It is an increased protection even against times when people’s biographical details are stolen or lost.”

    The Government has dropped plans, on cost grounds, to build a new database for the scheme. It will instead ”piggy-back” on an existing Whitehall IT system.

    Protests force Facebook to change

    0

    Facebook founder Mark Zuckerberg, AP

    Many users resented Facebook grabbing and sharing data


    Facebook members have forced the social networking site to change the way a controversial ad system worked.More than 50,000 Facebook users signed a petition calling on the company to alter or abandon its Beacon advertising technology.

    When Facebook users shopped online, Beacon told friends and businesses what they looked at or bought.

    Many considered the data sharing to be an intrusion that exposed them to more scrutiny than was comfortable.

    Privacy please

    In response to the demands, Facebook’s 55 million members will have more control over whether data about what they do online is used for Beacon.

    Before the changes, Beacon was an “opt out” system and many complained that they missed the chance to avoid using it when it was introduced in early November.

    Now Beacon will be an “opt in” system that only tracks data if explicit permission is granted to Facebook to do so.

    More than 40 websites, including Fandango.com, Overstock.com and Blockbuster, signed up to use Beacon software on their webpages and report what Facebook users did when they visited.

    Snoozing child, AP

    Beacon embarrassed many doing Christmas shopping online

    Activist site MoveOn was at the forefront of protests against Beacon and set up the petition to gather signatures on 20 November.

    “It also says a lot about the ability of internet users to band together to make a difference,” said Adam Green, a spokesman for MoveOn.

    Facebook apologised for its actions via a letter on its website.

    “We’re sorry if we spoiled some of your holiday gift-giving plans,” read the letter. “We are really trying to provide you with new meaningful ways, like Beacon, to help you connect and share information with your friends.”

    Industry commentator Om Malik said Facebook users had to be certain to opt out completely from Beacon otherwise Facebook would still collect data from partner sites – even if that data was not shared more widely.

    The changes to Beacon may not be the last that Facebook has to make to the technology.

    Two rights groups, the Electronic Privacy Information Center and the Center for Digital Democracy, are believed to be compiling a complaint to the US Federal Trade Commission about it.

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/technology/7120916.stm

    Depleted Uranium — Far Worse Than 9/11

    0

    Depleted Uranium Dust — Public Health Disaster For The People Of Iraq and Afghanistan

    Doug Westerman

    In 1979, depleted uranium (DU) particles escaped from the National Lead Industries factory near Albany, N.Y.,which was manufacturing DU weapons for the U.S military. The particles traveled 26 miles and were discovered in a laboratory filter by Dr. Leonard Dietz, a nuclear physicist. This discovery led to a shut down of the factory in 1980, for releasing morethan 0.85 pounds of DU dust into the atmosphere every month, and involved a cleanup of contaminated properties costing over 100 million dollars.

    Imagine a far worse scenario. Terrorists acquire a million pounds of the deadly dust and scatter it in populated areas throughout the U.S. Hundreds of children report symptoms. Many acquire cancer and leukemia, suffering an early and painful death. Huge increases in severe birth defects are reported. Oncologists are overwhelmed. Soccer fields, sand lots and parks, traditional play areas for kids, are no longer safe. People lose their most basic freedom, the ability to go outside and safely breathe. Sounds worse than 9/11? Welcome to Iraq and Afghanistan.

    Dr. Jawad Al-Ali (55), director of the Oncology Center at the largest hospital in Basra, Iraq stated, at a recent (2003) conference in Japan:

    “Two strange phenomena have come about in Basra which I have never seen before. The first is double and triple cancers in one patient. For example, leukemia and cancer of the stomach. We had one patient with 2 cancers — one in his stomach and kidney. Months later, primary cancer was developing in his other kidney–he had three different cancer types. The second is the clustering of cancer in families. We have 58 families here with more than one person affected by cancer. Dr Yasin, a general Surgeon here has two uncles, a sister and cousin affected with cancer. Dr Mazen, another specialist, has six family members suffering from cancer. My wife has nine members of her family with cancer”.

    “Children in particular are susceptible to DU poisoning. They have a much higher absorption rate as their blood is being used to build and nourish their bones and they have a lot of soft tissues. Bone cancer and leukemia used to be diseases affecting them the most, however, cancer of the lymph system which can develop anywhere on the body, and has rarely been seen before the age of 12 is now also common.”,

    “We were accused of spreading propaganda for Saddam before the war. When I have gone to do talks I have had people accuse me of being pro-Saddam. Sometimes I feel afraid to even talk. Regime people have been stealing my data and calling it their own, and using it for their own agendas. The Kuwaitis banned me from entering Kuwait — we were accused of being Saddam supporters.”

    The arrogance of the Pentagon people is incredible

    John Hanchette, a journalism professor at St. Bonaventure University, and one of the founding editors of USA Today related the following to DU researcher Leuren Moret. He stated that he had prepared news breaking stories about the effects of DU on Gulf War soldiers and Iraqi citizens, but that each time he was ready to publish, he received a phone call from the Pentagon asking him not to print the story. He has since been replaced as editor of USA Today.

    Dr. Keith Baverstock, The World Health Organization’s chief expert on radiation and health for 11 years and author of an unpublished study has charged that his report “on the cancer risk to civilians in Iraq from breathing uranium contaminated dust “ was also deliberately suppressed.

    The information released by the U.S. Dept. of Defense is not reliable, according to some sources even within the military.

    In 1997, while citing experiments, by others, in which 84 percent of dogs exposed to inhaled uranium died of cancer of the lungs, Dr. Asaf Durakovic, then Professor of Radiology and Nuclear Medicine at Georgetown University in Washington was quoted as saying, “The [US government’s] Veterans Administration asked me to lie about the risks of incorporating depleted uranium in the human body.”

    At that time Dr. Durakovic was a colonel in the U.S. Army. He has since left the military, to found the Uranium Medical Research Center, a privately funded organization with headquarters in Canada.

    PFC Stuart Grainger of 23 Army Division, 34th Platoon, (names and numbers have been changed) was diagnosed with cancer after returning from Iraq. Seven other men in the Platoon also have malignancies.

    The Pentagon’s “dirty” bomb

    Doug Rokke, U.S. Army contractor who headed a clean-up of depleted uranium after the first Gulf War states:

    “Depleted uranium is a crime against God and humanity.”

    Rokke’s own crew, a hundred employees, was devastated by exposure to the fine dust. He stated: “When we went to the Gulf, we were all really healthy.” After performing clean-up operations in the desert (mistakenly without protective gear), 30 members of his staff died, and most others, “including Rokke himself”, developed serious health problems. Rokke now has reactive airway disease, neurological damage, cataracts, and kidney problems.

    “We warned the Department of Defense in 1991 after the Gulf War. Their arrogance is beyond comprehension. Yet the D.O.D still insists such ingestion is “not sufficient to make troops seriously ill in most cases.”

    Then why did it make the clean up crew seriously or terminally ill in nearly all cases?

    Particles one-tenth of a micron are dispersed into the atmosphere

    Marion Falk, a retired chemical physicist who built nuclear bombs for more than 20 years at Lawrence Livermore Lab, was asked if he thought that DU weapons operate in a similar manner as a dirty bomb.

    “That’s exactly what they are. They fit the description of a dirty bomb in every way.”

    According to Falk, more than 30 percent of the DU fired from the cannons of U.S. tanks is reduced to particles one-tenth of a micron (one millionth of a meter) in size or smaller on impact. “The larger the bang” the greater the amount of DU that is dispersed into the atmosphere, Falk said. With the larger missiles and bombs, nearly 100 percent of the DU is reduced to radioactive dust particles of the “micron size” or smaller, he said.

    Bombs with DU are the perfect weapons for killing lots of people

    When asked if the main purpose for using it was for destroying things and killing people, Falk was more specific:
    “I would say that it is the perfect weapon for killing lots of people.”

    When a DU round or bomb strikes a hard target, most of its kinetic energy is converted to heat “ sufficient heat to ignite the DU. From 40% to 70% of the DU is converted to extremely fine dust particles of ceramic uranium oxide (primarily dioxide, though other formulations also occur). Over 60% of these particles are smaller than 5 microns in diameter, about the same size as the cigarette ash particles in cigarette smoke and therefore respirable.

    Because conditions are so chaotic in Iraq, the medical infrastructure has been greatly compromised. In terms of both cancer and birth defects due to DU, only a small fraction of the cases are being reported.

    Birth defects are now commonplace

    Doctors in southern Iraq are making comparisons to the birth defects that followed the atomic bombings of Hiroshima and Nagasaki in WWII. They have numerous photos of infants born without brains, with their internal organs outside their bodies, without sexual organs, without spines, and the list of deformities goes on an on. Such birth defects were extremely rare in Iraq prior to the large scale use of DU. Weapons. Now they are commonplace. In hospitals across Iraq, the mothers are no longer asking, “Doctor, is it a boy or girl?” but rather, “Doctor, is it normal?” The photos are horrendous. They can be viewed on the website http://www.xs4all.nl/~stgvisie/VISIE/extremedeformities.html

    Ross B. Mirkarimi, a spokesman at The Arms Control Research Centre stated: “Unborn children of the region are being asked to pay the highest price, the integrity of their DNA.”

    Prior to her death from leukemia in Sept. 2004, Nuha Al Radi , an accomplished Iraqi artist and author of the “Baghdad Diaries” wrote:

    “Everyone seems to be dying of cancer. Every day one hears about another acquaintance or friend of a friend dying. How many more die in hospitals that one does not know? Apparently, over thirty percent of Iraqis have cancer, and there are lots of kids with leukemia.”

    “The depleted uranium left by the U.S. bombing campaign has turned Iraq into a cancer-infested country. For hundreds of years to come, the effects of the uranium will continue to wreak havoc on Iraq and its surrounding areas.”

    This excerpt in her diary was written in 1993, after Gulf War I (approximately 300 tons of DU ordinance, mostly in desert areas) but before Operation Iraqi Freedom, (est. 1700 tons with much more near major population centers). So, it’s 5—6 times worse now than it was when she wrote that diary entry!!

    Over one million pounds of dust scattered throughout Iraq

    Estimates of the percentage of D.U. which was ‘aerosolized’ into fine uranium oxide dust are approximately 30—40%. That works out to over one million pounds of dust scattered throughout Iraq.

    As a special advisor to the World Health Organization, the United Nations, and the Iraqi Ministry of Health, Dr. Ahmad Hardan has documented the effects of DU in Iraq between 1991 and 2002.

    “American forces admit to using over 300 tons of DU weapons in 1991. The actual figure is closer to 800. This has caused a health crisis that has affected almost a third of a million people. As if that was not enough, America went on and used 200 tons more in Bagdad alone during the recent invasion.

    I don’t know about other parts of Iraq, it will take me years to document that.

    “In Basra, it took us two years to obtain conclusive proof of what DU does, but we now know what to look for and the results are terrifying.”

    By far the most devastating effect is on unborn children. Nothing can prepare anyone for the sight of hundreds of preserved fetuses, scarcely human in appearance. Iraq is now seeing babies with terribly foreshortened limbs, with their intestines outside their bodies, with huge bulging tumors where their eyes should be, or with a single eye-like Cyclops, or without eyes, or without limbs, and even without heads. Significantly, some of the defects are almost unknown outside textbooks showing the babies born near A-bomb test sites in the Pacific.

    US prevent scientific exchange

    Dr. Hardan also states:

    “I arranged for a delegation from Japan’s Hiroshima Hospital to come and share their expertise in the radiological diseases we are likely to face over time. The delegation told me the Americans had objected and they decided not to come. Similarly, a world famous German cancer specialist agreed to come, only to be told later that he would not be given permission to enter Iraq.”

    Not only are we poisoning the people of Iraq and Afghanistan, but we are making a concerted effort to keep out specialists from other countries who can help. The U.S. Military doesn’t want the rest of the world to find out what we have done.

    Such relatively swift development of cancers has been reported by doctors in hospitals treating civilians following NATO bombing with DU in Yugoslavia in 1998—1999 and the US military invasion of Iraq using DU for the first time in 1991. Medical experts report that this phenomenon of multiple malignancies from unrelated causes has been unknown until now and is a new syndrome associated with internal DU exposure.

    Just 467 US personnel were wounded in the three-week Persian Gulf War in 1990—1991. Out of 580 400 soldiers who served in Gulf War I, 11 000 are dead, and by 2000 there were 325 000 on permanent medical disability. This astounding number of disabled vets means that a decade later, 56 percent of those soldiers who served in the first Gulf War now have medical problems.

    Tokyo tribunal, guided by the principles of International Criminal Law and International Humanitarian Law, found Bush guilty of war crimes

    Although not reported in the mainstream American press, a recent Tokyo tribunal, guided by the principles of International Criminal Law and International Humanitarian Law, found President George W. Bush guilty of war crimes. On March 14, 2004, Nao Shimoyachi, reported in “The Japan Times” that President Bush was found guilty “for attacking civilians with indiscriminate weapons and other arms,” and the “tribunal also issued recommendations for banning Depleted Uranium shells and other weapons that indiscriminately harm people.” Although this was a “Citizen’s Court” having no legal authority, the participants were sincere in their determination that international laws have been violated and a war crimes conviction is warranted.

    Troops involved in actual combat are not the only servicemen reporting symptoms. Four soldiers from a New York Army National Guard company serving in Iraq are among several members of the same company, the 442nd Military Police, who say they have been battling persistent physical ailments that began last summer in the Iraqi town of Samawah.

    “I got sick instantly in June,” said Staff Sgt. Ray Ramos, a Brooklyn housing cop. “My health kept going downhill with daily headaches, constant numbness in my hands and rashes on my stomach.”

    Uran Medical Research Center: Air, soil and water samples contained “hundreds to thousands of times” the normal levels of radiation

    Dr. Asaf Durakovic, UMRC founder, and nuclear medicine expert examined and tested nine soldiers from the company says that four “almost certainly” inhaled radioactive dust from exploded American shells manufactured with depleted uranium. Laboratory tests revealed traces of two manmade forms of uranium in urine samples from four of the soldiers.

    If so, the men — Sgt. Hector Vega, Sgt. Ray Ramos, Sgt. Agustin Matos and Cpl. Anthony Yonnone — are the first confirmed cases of inhaled depleted uranium exposure from the current Iraq conflict.

    The 442nd, made up for the most part of New York cops, firefighters and correction officers, is based in Orangeburg, Rockland County. Dispatched to Iraq in Easter of 2003, the unit’s members had been providing guard duty for convoys, running jails and training Iraqi police. The entire company is due to return home later this month.

    “These are amazing results, especially since these soldiers were military police not exposed to the heat of battle,” said Dr. Asaf Duracovic, who examined the G.I.s and performed the testing.

    In a group of eight U.S. led Coalition servicemen whose babies were born without eyes, seven are known to have been directly exposed to DU dust. In a group (250 soldiers) exposed during the first Gulf war, 67% of the children conceived after the war had birth defects.

    Dr. Durakovic’s UMRC research team also conducted a three-week field trip to Iraq in October of 2003. It collected about 100 samples of substances such as soil, civilian urine and the tissue from the corpses of Iraqi soldiers in 10 cities, including Baghdad, Basra and Najaf. Durakovic said preliminary tests show that the air, soil and water samples contained “hundreds to thousands of times” the normal levels of radiation.

    “This high level of contamination is because much more depleted uranium was used this year than in (the Gulf War of) 1991,” Durakovic told The Japan Times.

    “They are hampering efforts to prove the connection between Depleted Uranium and the illness,” Durakovic said

    “They do not want to admit that they committed war crimes” by using weapons that kill indiscriminately, which are banned under international law.”

    (Note about Dr. Durakovic; First, he was warned to stop his work, then he was fired from his position, then his house was ransacked, and he has also reported receiving death threats. Evidently the U.S. D.O.D is very keen on censoring DU whistle-blowers!)

    Diagnostic distinction between natural uranium and DU using the technique of TIMS

    Dr. Durakovic, UMRC research associates Patricia Horan and Leonard Dietz, published a unique study in the August 2002 issue of Military Medicine Medical Journal. The study is believed to be the first to look at inhaled DU among Gulf War veterans, using the ultrasensitive technique of thermal ionization mass spectrometry, which enabled them to easily distinguish between natural uranium and DU. The study, which examined British, Canadian and U.S. veterans, all suffering typical Gulf War Syndrome ailments, found that, nine years after the war, 14 of 27 veterans studied had DU in their urine. DU also was found in the lung and bone of a deceased Gulf War veteran. That no governmental study has been done on inhaled DU “amounts to a massive malpractice,” Dietz said in an interview.

    Small particle size and crystalline structure

    The Japanese began studying DU effects in the southern Iraq in the summer of 2003. They had a Geiger counter which they watched go off the scale on many occasions. During their visit,a local hospital was treating upwards of 600 children per day, many of which suffered symptoms of internal poisoning by radiation. 600 children per day? How many of these children will get cancer and suffer an early and painful death?

    “Ingested DU particles can cause up to 1000 times the damage of an X-ray”, said Mary Olson, a nuclear waste specialist and biologist at the Nuclear Information and Resource Service in Washington D.C.

    It is this difference in particle size as well as the dust’s crystalline structure that make the presence of DU dust in the environment such an extreme hazard, and which differentiates its properties from that of the natural uranium dust that is ubiquitous and to which we all are exposed every day, which seldom reaches such a small size. This point is being stressed, as comparing DU particles to much larger natural ones is misleading.

    The U.S. Military and its supporters regularly quote a Rand Corp. Study which uses the natural uranium inhaled by miners.

    Particles smaller than 10 microns can access the innermost recesses of lung tissue where they become permanently lodged. Furthermore, if the substance is relatively insoluble, such as the ceramic DU-oxide dust produced from burning DU, it will remain in place for decades, dissolving very slowly into the bloodstream and lymphatic fluids through the course of time. Studies have identified DU in the urine of Gulf War veterans nine years after that conflict, testifying to the permanence of ceramic DU-oxide in the lungs. Thus the effects are far different from natural uranium dust, whose coarse particles are almost entirely excreted by the body within 24 hours.

    Over 10 trillion doses at 0.34 milligrams per dose are floating around Iraq and Afghanistan

    The military is aware of DU’s harmful effects on the human genetic code. A 2001 study of DU’s effect on DNA done by Dr. Alexandra C. Miller for the Armed Forces Radiobiology Research Institute in Bethesda, Md., indicates that DU’s chemical instability causes 1 million times more genetic damage than would be expected from its radiation effect alone.

    Studies have shown that inhaled nano-particles are far more toxic than micro-sized particles of the same basic chemical composition. British toxicopathologist Vyvyan Howard has reported that the increased toxicity of the nano-particle is due to its size.

    For example, when mice were exposed to virus-size particles of Teflon (0.13 microns) in a University of Rochester study, there were no ill effects. But when mice were exposed to nano-particles of Teflon for 15 minutes, nearly all the mice died within 4 hours.

    “Exposure pathways for depleted uranium can be through the skin, by inhalation, and ingestion,” writes Lauren Moret, another DU researcher. “Nano-particles have high mobility and can easily enter the body. Inhalation of nano-particles of depleted uranium is the most hazardous exposure, because the particles pass through the lung-blood barrier directly into the blood.”

    “When inhaled through the nose, nano-particles can cross the olfactory bulb directly into the brain through the blood brain barrier, where they migrate all through the brain,” she wrote. “Many Gulf era soldiers exposed to depleted uranium have been diagnosed with brain tumors, brain damage and impaired thought processes. Uranium can interfere with the mitochondria, which provide energy for the nerve processes, and transmittal of the nerve signal across synapses in the brain.”

    Based on dissolution and excretion rate data, it is possible to approximate the amount of DU initially inhaled by these veterans. For the handful of veterans studied, this amount averaged 0.34 milligrams. Knowing the specific activity (radiation rate) for DU allows one to determine that the total radiation (alpha, beta and gamma) occurring from DU and its radioactive decay products within their bodies comes to about 26 radiation events every second, or 800 million events each year. At .34 milligrams per dose, there are over 10 trillion doses floating around Iraq and Afghanistan.

    How many additional deaths are we talking about? In the aftermath of the first Gulf War, the UK Atomic Energy Authority came up with estimates for the potential effects of the DU contamination left by the conflict. It calculated that “this could cause 500 000 potential deaths”. This was “a theoretical figure”, it stressed, that indicated “a significant problem”.

    The AEA’s calculation was made in a confidential memo to the privatized munitions company, Royal Ordnance, dated 30 April 1991. The high number of potential deaths was dismissed as “very far from realistic” by a British defense minister, Lord Gilbert. “Since the rounds were fired in the desert, many miles from the nearest village, it is highly unlikely that the local population would have been exposed to any significant amount of respirable oxide,” he said. These remarks were made prior to the more recent invasions of both Afghanistan and Iraq, where DU munitions were used on a larger scale in and near many of the most populated areas. If the amount of DU ordinance used in the first Gulf War was sufficient to cause 500 000 potential deaths, (had it been used near the populated areas), then what of the nearly six times that amount used in operation Iraqi Freedom, which was used in and near the major towns and cities? Extrapolating the U.K. AEA estimate with this amount gives a figure of potentially 3 million extra deaths from inhaling DU dust in Iraq alone, not including Afghanistan. This is about 11% of Iraq’s total population of 27 million. Dan Bishop, Ph.d chemist for IDUST feels that this estimate may be low, if the long life of DU dust is considered. In Afghanistan, the concentration in some areas is greater than Iraq.

    The suffering of the veterans

    What can an otherwise healthy person expect when inhaling the deadly dust? Captain Terry Riordon was a member of the Canadian Armed Forces serving in Gulf War I. He passed away in April 1999 at age 45. Terry left Canada a very fit man who did cross-country skiing and ran in marathons. On his return only two months later he could barely walk.

    He returned to Canada in February 1991 with documented loss of motor control, chronic fatigue, respiratory difficulties, chest pain, difficulty breathing, sleep problems, short-term memory loss, testicle pain, body pains, aching bones, diarrhea, and depression. After his death, depleted uranium contamination was discovered in his lungs and bones. For eight years he suffered his innumerable ailments and struggled with the military bureaucracy and the system to get proper diagnosis and treatment. He had arranged, upon his death, to bequeath his body to the UMRC. Through his gift, the UMRC was able to obtain conclusive evidence that inhaling fine particles of depleted uranium dust completely destroyed his heath. How many Terry Riordans are out there among the troops being exposed, not to mention Iraqi and Afghan civilians?

    Inhaling the dust will not kill large numbers of Iraqi and Afghan civilians right away, any more than it did Captain Riordan. Rather, what we will see is vast numbers of people who are chronically and severely ill, having their life spans drastically shortened, many with multiple cancers.

    Melissa Sterry, another sick veteran, served for six months at a supply base in Kuwait during the winter of 1991—92. Part of her job with the National Guard’s Combat Equipment Company “A” was to clean out tanks and other armored vehicles that had been used during the war, preparing them for storage.

    She said she swept out the armored vehicles, cleaning up dust, sand and debris, sometimes being ordered to help bury contaminated parts. In a telephone interview, she stated that after researching depleted uranium she chose not to take the military’s test because she could not trust the results. It is alarming that Melissa was stationed in Kuwait, not Iraq. Cleaning out tanks with DU dust was enough to make her ill.

    US-UK war alliance: war criminals

    In, 2003, the Christian Science Monitor sent reporters to Iraq to investigate long-term effects of depleted uranium. Staff writer Scott Peterson saw children playing on top of a burnt-out tank near a vegetable stand on the outskirts of Baghdad, a tank that had been destroyed by armor-piercing shells coated with depleted uranium. Wearing his mask and protective clothing, he pointed his Geiger counter toward the tank. It registered 1000 times the normal background radiation. If the troops were on a mission of mercy to bring democracy to Iraq, wouldn’t keeping children away from such dangers be the top priority?

    The laws of war prohibit the use of weapons that have deadly and inhumane effects beyond the field of battle. Nor can weapons be legally deployed in war when they are known to remain active, or cause harm after the war concludes. It is no surprise that the Japanese Court found President Bush guilty of war crimes.

    Dr. Alim Yacoub of Basra University conducted an epidemiological study into incidences of malignancies in children under fifteen years old, in the Basra area (an area bombed with DU during the first Gulf War). They found over the 1990 to 1999 period, there was a 242% rise. That was before the recent invasion.

    In Kosovo, similar spikes in cancer and birth defects were noticed by numerous international experts, although the quantity of DU weapons used was only a small fraction of what was used in Iraq.

    Field study results from Afghanistan

    Verifiable statistics for Iraq will remain elusive for some time, but widespread field studies in Afghanistan point to the existence of a large scale public health disaster. In May of 2002, the UMRC (Uranium Medical Research Center) sent a field team to interview and examine residents and internally displaced people in Afghanistan. The UMRC field team began by first identifying several hundred people suffering from illnesses and medical conditions displaying clinical symptoms which are considered to be characteristic of radiation exposure. To investigate the possibility that the symptoms were due to radiation sickness, the UMRC team collected urine specimens and soil samples, transporting them to an independent research lab in England.

    UMRC’s Field Team found Afghan civilians with acute symptoms of radiation poisoning, along with chronic symptoms of internal uranium contamination, including congenital problems in newborns. Local civilians reported large, dense dust clouds and smoke plumes rising from the point of impact, an acrid smell, followed by burning of the nasal passages, throat and upper respiratory tract. Subjects in all locations presented identical symptom profiles and chronologies. The victims reported symptoms including pain in the cervical column, upper shoulders and basal area of the skull, lower back/kidney pain, joint and muscle weakness, sleeping difficulties, headaches, memory problems and disorientation.

    Two additional scientific study teams were sent to Afghanistan. The first arrived in June 2002, concentrating on the Jalalabad region. The second arrived four months later, broadening the study to include the capital Kabul, which has a population of nearly 3.5 million people. The city itself contains the highest recorded number of fixed targets during Operation Enduring Freedom. For the study’s purposes, the vicinity of three major bomb sites were examined. It was predicted that signatures of depleted or enriched uranium would be found in the urine and soil samples taken during the research. The team was unprepared for the shock of its findings, which indicated in both Jalalabad and Kabul, DU was causing the high levels of illness. Tests taken from a number of Jalalabad subjects showed concentrations 400% to 2000% above that for normal populations, amounts which have not been recorded in civilian studies before.

    Those in Kabul who were directly exposed to US-British precision bombing showed extreme signs of contamination, consistent with uranium exposure. These included pains in joints, back/kidney pain, muscle weakness, memory problems and confusion and disorientation. Those exposed to the bombing report symptoms of flu-type illnesses, bleeding, runny noses and blood-stained mucous. How many of these people will suffer a painful and early death from cancer? Even the study team itself complained of similar symptoms during their stay. Most of these symptoms last for days or months.

    In August of 2002, UMRC completed its preliminary analysis of the results from Nangarhar. Without exception, every person donating urine specimens tested positive for uranium contamination. The specific results indicated an astoundingly high level of contamination; concentrations were 100 to 400 times greater than those of the Gulf War Veterans tested in 1999. A researcher reported. “We took both soil and biological samples, and found considerable presence in urine samples of radioactivity; the heavy concentration astonished us. They were beyond our wildest imagination.”

    Fall 2002: 30% of those interviewed in Afghanistan display symptoms of radiation sickness

    In the fall of 2002, the UMRC field team went back to Afghanistan for a broader survey, and revealed a potentially larger exposure than initially anticipated. Approximately 30% of those interviewed in the affected areas displayed symptoms of radiation sickness. New born babies were among those displaying symptoms, with village elders reporting that over 25% of the infants were inexplicably ill.

    How widespread and extensive is the exposure? A quote from the UMRC field report reads:

    “The UMRC field team was shocked by the breadth of public health impacts coincident with the bombing. Without exception, at every bombsite investigated, people are ill. A significant portion of the civilian population presents symptoms consistent with internal contamination by uranium.”

    In Afghanistan, unlike Iraq, UMRC lab results indicated high concentrations of Non-depleted Uranium, with the concentrations being much higher than in DU victims from Iraq. Afghanistan was used as a testing ground for a new generation of “bunker buster” bombs containing high concentrations of other uranium alloys.

    “A significant portion of the civilian population”? It appears that by going after a handful of terrorists in Afghanistan we have poisoned a huge number of innocent civilians, with a disproportionate number of them being children.

    The military has found depleted uranium in the urine of some soldiers but contends it was not enough to make them seriously ill in most cases. Critics have asked for more sensitive, more expensive testing.

    Italy

    According to an October 2004 Dispatch from the Italian Military Health Observatory, a total of 109 Italian soldiers have died thus far due to exposure to depleted uranium. A spokesman at the Military Health Observatory, Domenico Leggiero, states “The total of 109 casualties exceeds the total number of persons dying as a consequence of road accidents. Anyone denying the significance of such data is purely acting out of ill faith, and the truth is that our soldiers are dying out there due to a lack of adequate protection against depleted uranium”. Members of the Observatory have petitioned for an urgent hearing “in order to study effective prevention and safeguard measures aimed at reducing the death-toll amongst our serving soldiers”.

    There were only 3000 Italian soldiers sent to Iraq, and they were there for a short time. The number of 109 represents about 3.6% of the total. If the same percentage of Iraqis get a similar exposure, that would amount to 936 000. As Iraqis are permanently living in the same contaminated environment, their percentage will be higher.

    The Pentagon and its misinformation machine: They lie and denigrate

    The Pentagon/DoD have interfered with UMRC’s ability to have its studies published by managing, a progressive and persistent misinformation program in the press against UMRC, and through the use of its control of science research grants to refute UMRC’s scientific findings and destroy the reputation of UMRC’s scientific staff, physicians and laboratories. UMRC is the first independent research organization to find Depleted Uranium in the bodies of US, UK and Canadian Gulf War I veterans and has subsequently, following Operation Iraqi Freedom, found Depleted Uranium in the water, soils and atmosphere of Iraq as well as biological samples donated by Iraqi civilians. Yet the first thing that comes up on Internet searches are these supposed “studies repeatedly showing DU to be harmless.” The technique is to approach the story as a debate between government and independent experts in which public interest is stimulated by polarizing the issues rather than telling the scientific and medical truth. The issues are systematically confused and misinformed by government, UN regulatory agencies (WHO, UNEP, IAEA, CDC, DOE, etc) and defense sector (military and the weapons developers and manufacturers).

    Dr. Yuko Fujita, an assistant professor at Keio University, Japan who examined the effects of radioactivity in Iraq from May to June, 2003, said : “I doubt that Iraq is fabricating data because in fact there are many children suffering from leukemia in hospitals,” Fujita said. “As a result of the Iraq war, the situation will be desperate in some five to 10 years.”

    The March 14, 2004 Tokyo Citizen’s Tribunal that “convicted” President Bush gave the following summation regarding DU weapons: (This court was a citizen’s court with no binding legal authority)

    1. Their use has indiscriminate effects;

    2. Their use is out of proportion with the pursuit of military objectives;

    3. Their use adversely affects the environment in a widespread, long term and severe manner;

    4. Their use causes superfluous injury and unnecessary suffering.

    Two years ago, President Bush withdrew the United States as a signatory to the International Criminal Court’s statute, which has been ratified by all other Western democracies. The White House actually seeks to immunize U.S. leaders from war crimes prosecutions entirely. It has also demanded express immunity from ICC prosecution for American nationals.

    Conclusions

    If terrorists succeeded in spreading something throughout the U.S. that ended up causing hundreds of thousands of cancer cases and birth defects over a period of many years, they would be guilty of a crime against humanity that far surpasses the Sept. 11th attacks in scope and severity. Although not deliberate, with our military campaigns in Iraq and Afghanistan, we have done just that. If the physical environment is so unsafe and unhealthy that one cannot safely breath, then the outer trappings of democracy have little meaning. At least under Saddam, the Iraqi people could stay healthy and conceive normal children. Few Americans are aware that in getting rid of Saddam, we left something much worse in his place.

    Is There an ID Chip in Your Future?

    0

    CBNNews.com There’s a growing movement to forcibly tag or chip your animals with radio frequency identification devices. Many privacy advocates believe this could lead to a scarier level: implanting you and me. Now, there is an effort to stem the tide.Introducing NAIS

    Greg Niewendorp raises cattle in northern Michigan. Time in the saddle is one of the best parts of the day for this fifth generation farmer.

    But these days, he’s spending lots of time holed up in his home office. Why? Niewendorp and other small farmers are fighting the government’s plans to identify and track every single farm animal in the country.

    It’s called NAIS or National Animal Identification System.

    “Our primary interest is protecting the food supply by having a rapid system that can reach out and address the needs for the primary food animals,” said USDA Undersecretary Bruce Knight.

    On October 8, Michigan AG officials arrived on Niewendorp’s farm with a search warrant. But Niewendorp refused to allow them to put RFID tags on his cattle.

    Pressure forced Niewendorp to give in that day, but his story spread rapidly in farming circles -making him “the face” of a grass-roots opposition movement.

    “The tag goes in the ear. They give me a premises I.D. number. Now they’ve got a national number on my cattle, a national number on my land. I might still technically own the animal but they’re controlling what I can and can’t do with it,” he said.

    While this may be the law in Michigan, Wisconsin and Indiana, the USDA insists the federal identification program is not mandatory.

    Knight said, “It can, it should and it will work on a voluntary basis.”

    Still, privacy experts say many USDA programs already require an NAIS number. And small farmers like Virginian Scott Wilson worry about the cost of buying tags and tracking animals.

    “To be effective they’re going to need 100 percent participation in this program and that is really going to put an undue burden on us as small farmers,” Wilson said.

    The USDA wants to be able to track animals quickly in the event of a disease outbreak. It believes NAIS will do that and help encourage confidence in the safety of our food supply – in the eyes of both consumers and global markets.

    Like It or Not, NAIS is Fast Becoming Reality

    More than one and a half million RFID tags are spread across some 400,000 farms today.

    The USDA is now accepting bids for an additional million and a half tags. The latest development is implantable devices for livestock.

    Pets aren’t supposed to be part of this program, but activist Barb Haywood is not so sure.

    She and others in the dog world say mandatory pet chipping is already happening in many communities.

    “A microchip is not a benign device. A microchip is a data collection device – a data collection device that’s designed not just to collect data on your dog – but you,” Haywood said.

    It’s the law in places like Stockton, California and El Paso, Texas. Pet chip companies publicize heart-warming stories about lost animals being re-united with their families.

    But what about health concerns? Privacy expert Katherine Albrecht wonders how many pet owners know about the cancer studies she recently uncovered.

    “It may not be such a good idea to force people to chip their family companions when there may be even a slight chance that there’s a cancer link there,” said Albrecht.

    What about the ‘Human’ Implant Market?

    Another concern is that animal implants may speed up the growth of the human implant market.

    That’s because Digital Angel, a major manufacturer of animal chips, is owned by the same company that makes the human implant, Verichip.

    Since the FDA approved Verichip in 2004, it has set up shop in more than 900 hospitals. Verichip assures patients that in a medical emergency, a simple wave of a scanner could correctly identify them and their medical information.

    But Verichip is working through health concerns of its own.

    Susan Byrne received her chip in July, and says her arm still hurts.

    “The next day, that’s when I really felt discomfort. I felt like I was having an injection 24/7 – like the needle was still in my arm,” Byme said.

    She says Verichip told her she was the first patient to ask that her chip be removed. But Byme is skeptical, and Verichip did not respond to CBN News’ calls on the subject.

    Opponents of the Verichip also worry that human implants will one day be mandatory.

    “There is actually a growing concern that an HMO or an employer could actually require a person to be micro-chipped to get insurance or to keep a job,” Albrecht said.

    So far, Wisconsin, North Dakota, and California have all passed laws forbidding the mandatory chipping of people.

    But for many animals, it may be too late.

    “We’re a very small voice right now going against the tide saying, ‘Hey, this doesn’t make sense,’ Wilson said.

    What makes sense to both sides is safety. It seems, though, that no one can agree. But at what price?

    Met Police to pilot Tasers

    0

    By Lewis Page

    The governing body of the Metropolitan Police yesterday gave approval for Tasers to be issued to non-firearms-trained police in a pilot scheme beginning next month. Similar trials are already underway with other UK police forces.

    “Members [of the Met Police Authority] raised legitimate concerns about broadening the use of Taser to routine policing,” said Cindy Butts, MPA deputy chair.

    “We remain worried about the message this sends out to London’s communities about the escalation of confrontation and need further reassurance that vulnerable people… will not be adversely affected.

    “However… Without the Met participating, this authority will be unable to influence a final decision about future use of the Taser.

    “Consequently, today we agreed that the Met participates in the trial with the following rider: I will lead an MPA working group, working with the Met to jointly monitor and evaluate the trial…

    “We want to move forward and influence the national debate. Our concerns have not gone away, nor have they been answered… We will monitor these areas rigorously and ensure that the experiences of London influence national policy for the good.”

    The MPA has agreed to let the Met deploy Tasers in the hands of non-firearms police only on the third time of asking. On two previous occasions MPA members were “dissatisfied” with the level of information provided.

    The full MPA announcement is here. ®

    US says it has right to kidnap British citizens

    0

    AMERICA has told Britain that it can “kidnap” British citizens if they are wanted for crimes in the United States.

    A senior lawyer for the American government has told the Court of Appeal in London that kidnapping foreign citizens is permissible under American law because the US Supreme Court has sanctioned it.

    The admission will alarm the British business community after the case of the so-called NatWest Three, bankers who were extradited to America on fraud charges. More than a dozen other British executives, including senior managers at British Airways and BAE Systems, are under investigation by the US authorities and could face criminal charges in America.

    Until now it was commonly assumed that US law permitted kidnapping only in the “extraordinary rendition” of terrorist suspects.

    The American government has for the first time made it clear in a British court that the law applies to anyone, British or otherwise, suspected of a crime by Washington.

    Legal experts confirmed this weekend that America viewed extradition as just one way of getting foreign suspects back to face trial. Rendition, or kidnapping, dates back to 19th-century bounty hunting and Washington believes it is still legitimate.

    The US government’s view emerged during a hearing involving Stanley Tollman, a former director of Chelsea football club and a friend of Baroness Thatcher, and his wife Beatrice.

    The Tollmans, who control the Red Carnation hotel group and are resident in London, are wanted in America for bank fraud and tax evasion. They have been fighting extradition through the British courts.

    During a hearing last month Lord Justice Moses, one of the Court of Appeal judges, asked Alun Jones QC, representing the US government, about its treatment of Gavin, Tollman’s nephew. Gavin Tollman was the subject of an attempted abduction during a visit to Canada in 2005.

    Jones replied that it was acceptable under American law to kidnap people if they were wanted for offences in America. “The United States does have a view about procuring people to its own shores which is not shared,” he said.

    He said that if a person was kidnapped by the US authorities in another country and was brought back to face charges in America, no US court could rule that the abduction was illegal and free him: “If you kidnap a person outside the United States and you bring him there, the court has no jurisdiction to refuse – it goes back to bounty hunting days in the 1860s.”

    Mr Justice Ouseley, a second judge, challenged Jones to be “honest about [his] position”.

    Jones replied: “That is United States law.”

    He cited the case of Humberto Alvarez Machain, a suspect who was abducted by the US government at his medical office in Guadalajara, Mexico, in 1990. He was flown by Drug Enforcement Administration agents to Texas for criminal prosecution.

    Although there was an extradition treaty in place between America and Mexico at the time – as there currently is between the United States and Britain – the Supreme Court ruled in 1992 that the Mexican had no legal remedy because of his abduction.

    In 2005, Gavin Tollman, the head of Trafalgar Tours, a holiday company, had arrived in Toronto by plane when he was arrested by Canadian immigration authorities.

    An American prosecutor, who had tried and failed to extradite him from Britain, persuaded Canadian officials to detain him. He wanted the Canadians to drive Tollman to the border to be handed over. Tollman was escorted in handcuffs from the aircraft in Toronto, taken to prison and held for 10 days.

    A Canadian judge ordered his release, ruling that the US Justice Department had set a “sinister trap” and wrongly bypassed extradition rules. Tollman returned to Britain.

    Legal sources said that under traditional American justice, rendition meant capturing wanted people abroad and bringing them to the United States. The term “extraordinary rendition” was coined in the 1990s for the kidnapping of terror suspects from one foreign country to another for interrogation.

    There was concern this weekend from Patrick Mercer, the Tory MP, who said: “The very idea of kidnapping is repugnant to us and we must handle these cases with extreme caution and a thorough understanding of the implications in American law.”

    Shami Chakrabarti, director of the human rights group Liberty, said: “This law may date back to bounty hunting days, but they should sort it out if they claim to be a civilised nation.”

    The US Justice Department declined to comment.

    Additional reporting: Anna Mikhailova

    How America Lost the War on Drugs

    0

    After Thirty-Five Years and $500 Billion, Drugs Are as Cheap and Plentiful as Ever: An Anatomy of a Failure

     Ben Wallace-Wells

    1. AFTER PABLO On the day of his death, December 2nd, 1993, the Colombian billionaire drug kingpin Pablo Escobar was on the run and living in a small, tiled-roof house in a middle-class neighborhood of Medellín, close to the soccer stadium. He died, theatrically, ­ridiculously, gunned down by a Colombian police manhunt squad while he tried to flee across the barrio’s rooftops, a fat, bearded man who had kicked off his flip-flops to try to outrun the bullets. The first thing the American drug agents who arrived on the scene wanted to do was to make sure that the corpse was actually Escobar’s. The second thing was to check his house.

    The last time Escobar had hastily fled one of his residences – la Catedral, the luxurious private prison he built for himself to avoid extradition to the United States – he had left behind bizarre, enchanting ­detritus, the raw stuff of what would ­become his own myth: the photos of ­himself dressed up as a Capone-era gangster with a Tommy gun, the odd collection of novels ranging from Graham Greene to the Austrian modernist Stefan Zweig. Agents from the Drug Enforcement Administration, arriving after the kingpin had fled, found neat shelves lined with loose-leaf binders, carefully organized by content. They were, says John Coleman, then the DEA’s assistant administrator for operations, “filled with DEA reports” – internal documents that laid out, in extraordinary detail, the agency’s repeated attempts to capture Escobar.

    “He had shelves and shelves and shelves of these things,” Coleman tells me. “It was stunning. A lot of the informants we had, he’d figured out who they were. All the agents we had chasing him – who we trusted in the Colombian police – it was right there. He knew so much more about what we were doing than we knew about what he was doing.”

    Coleman and other agents began to work deductively, backward. “We had always wondered why his guys, when we caught them, would always go to trial and risk lots of jail time, even when they would have saved themselves a lot of time if they’d just plead guilty,” he says. “What we realized when we saw those binders was that they were doing a job. Their job was to stay on trial and have their lawyers use discovery to get all the information on DEA operations they could. Then they’d send copies back to Medellín, and Escobar would put it all together and figure out who we had tracking him.”

    The loose-leaf binders crammed in Escobar’s office on the ground floor gave Coleman and his agents a sense of triumph: The whole mysterious drug trade had an organization, a structure and a brain, and they’d just removed it. In the thrill of the moment, clinking champagne glasses with officials from the Colombian police and taking congratulatory calls from Washington, the agents in Medellín believed the War on Drugs could finally be won. “We had an endgame,” Coleman says. “We were literally making the greatest plans.”

    At the headquarters of the Office of National Drug Control Policy in Washington, staffers tacked up a poster with photographs of sixteen of its most wanted men, cartel leaders from across the Andes. Solemnly, ceremoniously, a staffer took a red magic marker and drew an X over Escobar’s portrait. “We felt like it was one down, fifteen to go,” recalls John Carnevale, the longtime budget director of the drug-control ­office. “There was this feeling that if we got all sixteen, it’s not like the whole thing would be over, but that was a big part of how we would go about winning the War on Drugs.”

    Man by man, sixteen red X’s eventually went up over the faces of the cartel leaders: KILLED. EXTRADITED. KILLED. José Santacruz Londoño, a leading drug trafficker, was gunned down by Colombian police in a shootout. The Rodríguez Orejuela brothers, the heads of the Cali cartel, were extradited after they got greedy and tried to keep running their organization from prison. Some U.S. drug warriors believed that the busts were largely public-relations events, a showy way for the Colombian government to look tough on the drug trade, but most were less cynical. The crack epidemic was over. Drug-related murders were in decline. Winning the War on Drugs didn’t seem such a quixotic and open-ended mission, like the War on Poverty, but rather something tangible, a fat guy with a big organization and binders full of internal DEA reports, sixteen faces on a poster, a piñata you could reach out and smack. Richard Cañas, a veteran DEA official who headed counternarcotics efforts on the National Security Council under both George H.W. Bush and Bill Clinton, can still recall the euphoria of those days. “We were moving,” he says, “from success to success.”

    This is the story of how that momentary success turned into one of the most sustained and costly defeats the United States has ever suffered. It is the story of how the most powerful country on Earth, sensing a piñata, swung to hit it and missed.

    2. THE MAKING OF A TRAGEDY

    For Cañas and other drug warriors, the death of Escobar had the feel of a real pivot, the end of one kind of battle against drugs and the beginning of another. The war itself had begun during the Nixon administration, when the White House began to get reports that a generation of soldiers was about to come back from Vietnam stoned, with habits weaned on the cheap marijuana and heroin of Southeast Asia and hothoused in the twitchy-fingered freakout of a jungle guerrilla war. For those in Washington, the problem of drugs was still so strange and new in the early Seventies that Nixon officials grappled with ideas that, by the standards of the later debate among politicians, were unthinkably radical: They appointed a panel that recommended the decriminalization of casual marijuana use and even considered buying up the world’s entire supply of opium to prevent it from being converted into heroin. But Nixon was a law-and-order politician, an operator who understood very well the panic many Americans felt about the cities, the hippies and crime. Calling narcotics “public enemy number one in the United States,” he used the issue to escalate the culture war that pitted Middle Americans against the radicals and the hippies, strengthening penalties for drug dealers and devoting federal funds to bolster prosecutions. In 1973, Nixon gave the job of policing these get-tough laws to the newly formed Drug Enforcement Administration.

    By the mid-1980s, as crack leeched out from New York, Miami and Los Angeles into the American interior, the devastations inflicted by the drug were becoming more vivid and frightening. The Reagan White House seemed to capture the current of the moment: Nancy Reagan’s plaintive urging to “just say no,” and her husband’s decision to hand police and prosecutors even greater powers to lock up street dealers, and to devote more resources to stop cocaine’s production at the source, in the Andes. In 1986, trying to cope with crack’s corrosive effects, Congress adopted mandatory-minimum laws, which hit inner-city crack users with penalties as severe as those levied on Wall Street brokers possessing 100 times more powder cocaine. Over the next two decades, hundreds of thousands of Americans would be locked up for drug offenses.

    The War on Drugs became an actual war during the first Bush administration, when the bombastic conservative intellectual Bill Bennett was appointed drug czar. “Two words sum up my entire approach,” Bennett declared, “consequences and confrontation.” Bush and Bennett doubled annual spending on the drug war to $12 billion, devoting much of the money to expensive weaponry: fighter jets to take on the Colombian trafficking cartels, Navy submarines to chase cocaine-smuggling boats in the Caribbean. If narcotics were the enemy, America would vanquish its foe with torpedoes and F-16s – and throw an entire generation of drug users in jail.

    Though many on the left suspected that things had gone seriously awry, drug policy under Reagan and Bush was largely conducted in a fog of ignorance. The kinds of long-term studies that policy-makers needed – those that would show what measures would actually reduce drug use and dampen its consequences – did not yet exist. When it came to research, there was “absolutely nothing” that examined “how each program was or wasn’t working,” says Peter Reuter, a drug scholar who founded the Drug Policy Research Center at the RAND Corp.

    But after Escobar was killed in 1993 – and after U.S. drug agents began systematically busting up the Colombian cartels – doubt was replaced with hard data. Thanks to new research, U.S. policy-makers knew with increasing certainty what would work and what wouldn’t. The tragedy of the War on Drugs is that this knowledge hasn’t been heeded. We continue to treat marijuana as a major threat to public health, even though we know it isn’t. We continue to lock up generations of teenage drug dealers, even though we know imprisonment does little to reduce the amount of drugs sold on the street. And we continue to spend billions to fight drugs abroad, even though we know that military efforts are an ineffective way to cut the supply of narcotics in America or raise the price.

    All told, the United States has spent an estimated $500 billion to fight drugs – with very little to show for it. Cocaine is now as cheap as it was when Escobar died and more heavily used. Methamphetamine, barely a presence in 1993, is now used by 1.5 million Americans and may be more addictive than crack. We have nearly 500,000 people behind bars for drug crimes – a twelvefold increase since 1980 – with no discernible effect on the drug traffic. Virtually the only success the government can claim is the decline in the number of Americans who smoke marijuana – and even on that count, it is not clear that federal prevention programs are responsible. In the course of fighting this war, we have allowed our military to become pawns in a civil war in Colombia and our drug agents to be used by the cartels for their own ends. Those we are paying to wage the drug war have been accused of ­human-rights abuses in Peru, Bolivia and Colombia. In Mexico, we are now ­repeating many of the same mistakes we have made in the Andes.

    “What we learned was that in drug work, nothing ever stands still,” says Coleman, the former DEA official and current president of Drug Watch International, a law-and-order advocacy group. For every move the drug warriors made, the traffickers adapted. “The other guys were learning just as we were learning,” Coleman says. “We had this hubris.”

    3. BRAINIACS AND COLD WARRIORS

    “At the beginning of the Clinton administration,” Cañas tells me, “the War on Drugs was like the War on Terror is now.” It was, he means, an orienting fight, the next in a sequence of abstract, generational struggles that the country launched itself into after finding no one willing to actually square up and face it on a battlefield. After the Cold War, in the flush and optimism of victory, it felt to drug warriors and the American public that abstractions could be beaten. “It was really a pivot point,” recalls Rand Beers, who served on the National Security Council for four different presidents. “We started to look carefully at our drug policies and ask if everything we were doing really made sense.” The man Clinton appointed to manage this new era was Lee Brown.

    Brown had been a cop for almost thirty years when Clinton tapped him to be the nation’s drug czar in 1993. He had started out working narcotics in San Jose, California, just as the Sixties began to swell, and ended up leading the New York Police Department when the city was the symbolic center of the crack epidemic, with kids being killed by stray bullets that barreled through locked doors. A big, shy man in his fifties, Brown had made his reputation with a simple insight: Cops can’t do much without the trust of people in their communities, who are needed to turn in offenders and serve as witnesses at trial. Being a good cop meant understanding the everyday act of police work not as chasing crooks but as meeting people and making allies.

    “When I worked as an undercover narcotics officer, I was living the life of an addict so I could make buys and make busts of the dealers,” Brown tells me. “When you’re in that position, you see very quickly that you can’t arrest your way out of this. You see the cycle over and over again of people using drugs, getting into trouble, going to prison, getting out and getting into drugs again. At some point I stepped back and asked myself, ‘What impact is all of this having on the drug problem? There has to be a better way.’ ”

    In the aftermath of the Rodney King beating, this philosophy – known as community policing – had made Brown a national phenomenon. The Clinton administration asked him to take the drug-czar post, and though Brown was skeptical, he agreed on the condition that the White House make it a Cabinet-level position. Brown stacked his small office with liberals who had spent the long Democratic exile doing drug-policy work for Congress and swearing they would improve things when they retook power. “There were basic assumptions that Republicans had been making for fifteen years that had never been challenged,” says Carol Bergman, a congressional staffer who became Brown’s legislative liaison. “The way Lee Brown looked at it, the drug war was focused on locking kids up for increasing amounts of time, and there wasn’t enough emphasis on treatment. He really wanted to take a different tactic.”

    Brown’s staff became intrigued by a new study on drug policy from the RAND Corp., the Strangelove-esque think tank that during the Cold War had employed mathematicians to crank out analyses for the Pentagon. Like Lockheed Martin, the jet manufacturer that had turned to managing welfare reform after the Cold War ended, RAND was scouting for other government projects that might need its brains. It found the drug war. The think tank assigned Susan Everingham, a young expert in mathematical modeling, to help run the group’s signature project: dividing up the federal government’s annual drug budget of $13 billion into its component parts and deciding what worked and what didn’t when it came to fighting cocaine.

    Everingham and her team sorted the drug war into two categories. There were supply-side programs, like the radar and ships in the Caribbean and the efforts to arrest traffickers in Colombia and Mexico, which were designed to make it more expensive for traffickers to bring their product to market. There were also demand-side programs, like drug treatment, which were designed to reduce the market for drugs in the United States. To evaluate the cost-effectiveness of each approach, the mathematicians set up a series of formulas to calculate precisely how much additional money would have to be spent on supply programs and demand programs to reduce cocaine consumption by one percent nationwide.

    “If you had asked me at the outset,” Everingham says, “my guess would have been that the best use of taxpayer money was in the source countries in South America” – that it would be possible to stop cocaine before it reached the U.S. But what the study found surprised her. Overseas military efforts were the least effective way to decrease drug use, and imprisoning addicts was prohibitively expensive. The only cost-effective way to put a dent in the market, it turned out, was drug treatment. “It’s not a magic bullet,” says Reuter, the RAND scholar who helped supervise the study, “but it works.” The study ultimately ushered RAND, this vaguely creepy Cold War relic, into a position as the permanent, pragmatic left wing of American drug policy, the most consistent force for innovating and reinventing our national conception of the War on Drugs.

    When Everingham’s team looked more closely at drug treatment, they found that thirteen percent of hardcore cocaine users who receive help substantially reduced their use or kicked the habit completely. They also found that a larger and larger portion of illegal drugs in the U.S. were being used by a comparatively small group of hardcore addicts. There was, the study concluded, a fundamental imbalance: The crack epidemic was basically a domestic problem, but we had been fighting it more aggressively overseas. “What we began to realize,” says Jonathan Caulkins, a professor at Carnegie Mellon University who studied drug policy for RAND, “was that even if you only get a percentage of this small group of heavy drug users to abstain forever, it’s still a really great deal.”

    Thirteen years later, the study remains the gold standard on drug policy. “It’s still the consensus recommendation supplied by the scholarship,” says Reuter. “Yet as well as it’s stood up, it’s never really been tried.”

    To Brown, RAND’s conclusions seemed exactly right. “I saw how little we were doing to help addicts, and I thought, ‘This is crazy,’ ” he recalls. ” ‘This is how we should be breaking the cycle of addiction and crime, and we’re just doing nothing.’ ”

    The federal budget that Brown’s office submitted in 1994 remains a kind of fetish object for certain liberals in the field, the moment when their own ideas came close to making it into law. The budget sought to cut overseas interdiction, beef up community policing, funnel low-level drug criminals into treatment programs instead of prison, and devote $355 million to treating hardcore addicts, the drug users responsible for much of the illegal-drug market and most of the crime associated with it. White House political handlers, wary of appearing soft on crime, were skeptical of even this limited commitment, but Brown persuaded the president to offer his support, and the plan stayed.

    Still, the politics of the issue were difficult. Convincing Congress to dramatically alter the direction of America’s drug war required a brilliant sales job. “And Lee Brown,” says Bergman, his former legislative liaison, “was not an effective salesman.” With a kind of loving earnestness, the drug czar arranged tours of treatment centers for congressmen to show them the kinds of programs whose funding his bill would increase. Few legislators came. Most politicians were skeptical about such a radical departure from the mainstream consensus on crime. Congress rewrote the budget, slashing the $355 million for treatment programs by more than eighty percent. “There were too many of us who had a strong law-and-order focus,” says Sen. Chuck Grassley, a Republican who ­opposed the reform bill and serves as co-chair of the Senate’s drug-policy caucus.

    For some veteran drug warriors, Brown’s tenure as drug czar still lingers as the last moment when federal drug policy really made sense. “Lee Brown came the closest of anyone to really getting it,” says Carnevale, the longtime budget director of the drug-control office. “But the bottom line was, the drug issue and Lee Brown were largely ignored by the Clinton administration.” When Brown tried to repeat his treatment-centered initiative in 1995, it was poorly timed: Newt Gingrich and the Republicans had seized control of the House after portraying Clinton as soft on crime. The authority to oversee the War on Drugs passed from Rep. John Conyers, the Detroit liberal, to a retired wrestling coach from Illinois who was tired of drugs in the schools ? a rising Republican star named Dennis Hastert. Reeling from the defeat at the polls, Clinton decided to give up on drug reform and get tough on crime. “The feeling was that the drug czar’s office was one of the weak areas when it came to the administration’s efforts to confront crime,” recalls Leon Panetta, then Clinton’s chief of staff.

    4. THE YOUNG GUNS

    The administration was not doing much better in its efforts to stop the flow of drugs at the source. Before Clinton had even taken office, Cañas – who headed drug policy at the National Security Council – had been summoned to brief the new president’s choice for national security adviser, Anthony Lake, on the nation’s narcotics policy in Latin America. “I figured, what the hell, I’m going back to DEA anyway, I’ll tell him what I really think,” Cañas recalls.

    The Bush administration, he told Lake, had been sending the military after the wrong target. In the 1970s, drugs were run up to the United States through the Caribbean by a bunch of “swashbuckling entrepreneurs” with small planes – “guys who wouldn’t have looked out of place at a Jimmy Buffett concert.” In 1989, in the nationwide panic over crack, Defense Secretary Dick Cheney had managed to secure a budget of $450 million to chase these Caribbean smugglers. (Years later, when a longtime drug official asked Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld why Cheney had pushed the program, Rumsfeld grinned and said, “Cheney thought he was running for president.”) The U.S. military loved the new mission, because it gave them a reason to ask for more equipment in the wake of the Cold War. And the Bush White House loved the idea of sending the military after the drug traffickers for its symbolism and swagger and the way it proved that the administration was taking drugs seriously.

    The problem, Cañas told Lake, was that the cocaine traffic had professionalized and was now moving its product through Mexico. With Caribbean smugglers out of the game, the military program no longer made sense. The new national security adviser grinned at Cañas, pleased. “That’s what we think as well,” Lake said. “How would you like to stay on and help make that happen?”

    Taking a new approach, the Clinton administration shifted most military assets out of the Caribbean and into the Andes, where the coca leaf was being grown and processed. “Our idea was, Stop messing around in the transit countries and go to the source,” Cañas tells me. The administration spent millions of extra dollars to equip police in Bolivia and Colombia to bust the crop’s growers and processors. The cops were not polite – Human Rights Watch condemned the murders of?Bolivian farmers, blaming “the heavy hand of U.S. drug enforcement” – but they were ­effective, and by 1996, coca production in Bolivia had begun a dramatic decline.

    After Escobar fell, the American drug agents who had been chasing him did not expect the cocaine industry to dry up overnight – they had girded for the fallout from the drug lord’s death. What they had not expected was the ways in which the unintended consequences of his downfall would permanently change the drug traffic. “What ended up happening – and maybe we should have predicted this would happen – was that the whole structure shattered into these smaller groups,” says Coleman, the veteran DEA agent. “You suddenly had all these new guys controlling a small aspect of the traffic.”

    Among them was a hired gun known as Don Berna, who had served as a bodyguard for Escobar. Double-crossed by his boss, Berna broke with the Medellín cartel and struck out on his own. For him, the disruption caused by the new front in America’s drug war presented a business opportunity. But with the DEA’s shift from the Caribbean into Bolivia and Colombia, Berna and other new traffickers had a production problem. So some of the “microcartels,” as they became known, decided to move their operations someplace where they could control it: They opened negotiations with the FARC, a down-at-the-heels rebel army based in the jungles of Colombia. In return for cash, the FARC agreed to put coca production under its protection and keep the Colombian army away from the coca crop.

    Berna and the younger kingpins also had a transportation problem: Mexican traffickers, who had been paid a set fee by the cartels to smuggle product across the U.S. border, wanted a larger piece of the business. The Mexican upstarts had a certain economic logic on their side. A kilo of cocaine produced in Colombia is worth about $2,500. In Mexico, a kilo gets $5,000. But smuggle that kilo across the border and the price goes up to $17,500. “What the Mexican groups started saying was, ‘Why are we working for these guys? Why don’t we just buy it from the Colombians directly and keep the profits ourselves?’ ” says Tony Ayala, a retired DEA agent and former Mexico country attache.

    The remaining leaders of the weakened Cali cartel, DEA agents say, traveled up to Guadalajara for a series of meetings with Mexican traffickers. By 1996, the Colombians had decided to hand over more control of the cocaine trade to the Mexicans. The Cali cartel would now ship cocaine to Guadalajara, sell the drugs to the Mexican groups and then be done with it. “This wasn’t just happenstance,” says Jerome McArdle, then a DEA assistant agent for special operations. “This was the Colombians saying they were willing to reduce their profits in exchange for reducing their risk and exposure, and handing it over to the Mexicans. The whole nature of the supply chain changed.”

    Around the same time, DEA agents found themselves picking up Mexican distributors, rather than Colombians, on the streets of New York. Immigration and customs officials on the border were meanwhile overwhelmed by the sheer number of tractor-trailers – many of them loaded with drugs – suddenly pouring across the Mexican border as a consequence of NAFTA, which had been enacted in 1994. “A thousand trucks coming across in a four-hour ­period,” says Steve Robertson, a DEA special agent assigned to southern ­Texas at the time. “There’s no way we’re going to catch everything.”

    Power followed the money, and Mexican traffickers soon had a style, and reach, that had previously belonged only to the Colombians. In the border town of Ciudad Juárez, the cocaine trafficker Amado Carrillo Fuentes developed a new kind of smuggling operation. “He brought in middle-class people for the first time – lawyers, accountants – and he developed a transportation division, an acquisitions division, even a human-resources operation, just like a modern corporation,” says Tony Payan, a political scientist at the University of Texas-El Paso who has studied the drug trade on the border. Before long, Carrillo Fuentes had a fleet of Boeing 727s, which he used to fly cocaine, up to fifteen tons at a time, up from Colombia to Mexico. The newspapers called him El Señor de los Cielos, the Lord of the Skies.

    The Mexican cartels were also getting more imaginative. “Think of it like a business, which is how these guys thought of it,” says Guy Hargreaves, a top DEA agent during the 1990s. “Why pay for the widgets when you can make the widgets yourselves?” Since the climate and geography of Mexico aren’t right for making cocaine, the cartels did the logical thing: They introduced a new product. As Hargreaves recalls, the Mexicans slipped the new drug into their cocaine shipments in Southern California and told coke dealers, “Here, try some of this stuff – it’s a similar effect.”

    The product the Mexican cartels came up with, the new widget they could make themselves, was methamphetamine. The man who mastered the market was a midlevel cocaine trafficker, then in his late twenties, named Jesús Amezcua. In 1994, when U.S. Customs officials at the Dallas airport seized an airplane filled with barrels of ephedrine, a chemical precursor for meth, and traced it back to Amezcua, the startling new shift in the drug traffic became clear to a handful of insiders. “Cartels were no longer production organizations, whose business is wrapped up in a single drug,” says Tony Ayala, the senior DEA agent in Mexico at the time. “They became trafficking organizations – and they will smuggle whatever they can make the most profit from.”

    5. THE LOBBYISTS & THE MAD PROFESSOR

    It is only in retrospect that these moments – the barrels of ephedrine seized in Dallas, the quiet suggestion that meth had worked its way into the cocaine supply chain – take on a looming character, the historic weight of a change made manifest. Up until methamphetamine, the War on Drugs had targeted three enemies. First there were the hippie drugs – marijuana, LSD – that posed little threat to the general public. Then there was heroin, a horrible drug but one that was largely concentrated in New York City. And, finally, there was crack. What meth proved was that even if the DEA could wipe out every last millionaire cocaine goon in Colombia, burn every coca field in Bolivia and Peru, and build an impenetrable wall along the entire length of the Mexican border – even then, we wouldn’t have won the War on Drugs, because there would still be methamphetamine, and after that, something else.

    Gene Haislip, who served for years as one of the DEA’s top-ranking administrators, believes there was a moment when meth could have been shut down, long before it spiraled into a nationwide epidemic. Haislip, who spent nearly two decades leading a small group at the agency dedicated to chemical control, is his own kind of legend; he is still known around the DEA as the man who beat quaaludes, perhaps the only drug that the U.S. has ever been able to declare total victory over. He did it with gumshoe methodicalness: by identifying every country in the world that produced the drug’s active ingredient, a prescription medication called methaqualone, and convincing them to tighten regulations. Haislip believes he was present the moment when the United States lost the war on methamphetamine, way back in 1986, when meth was still a crude biker drug confined to a few valleys in Northern California – a decade before the Mexican drug lords turned it into the most problematic drug in America. “The thing is, methamphetamine should never have gotten to that point,” Haislip says. And it never would have, he believes, if it hadn’t been for the lobbyists.

    Haislip was known around the DEA as precise-minded and verbal. His impulse, in combatting meth, was the same one that had pushed the drug warriors after Escobar: the quixotic faith that if you could just stop the stuff at the source, you could get rid of all the social problems at once. Assembling a coalition of legislators, Haislip convinced them that the small, growing population of speed freaks in Northern California was enough of a concern that Congress should pass a law to regulate the drug’s precursor chemicals, ephedrine and pseudoephedrine, legal drugs that were used in cold medicine and produced in fewer than a dozen factories in the world. “We were starting to get reports of hijacking of ephedrine, armed robbery of ephedrine, things that had never happened before,” Haislip tells me. “You could see we were on the verge of something if we didn’t get a handle on it.”

    All that was left was to convince the Reagan administration. One day in late 1986, Haislip went to meet with top officials in the Indian Treaty Room, a vast, imposing space in the Eisenhower Executive Office Building: arches, tiled floors, the kind of room designed to house history being made. Haislip noticed several men in suits sitting quietly in the back of the room. They were lobbyists from the pharmaceutical industry, but Haislip didn’t pay them much attention. “I wasn’t concerned with them,” he recalls.

    When Haislip launched into his presentation, an official from the Commerce Department cut him off. “Look, you’re way ahead of us,” the official said. “We don’t have anything to suggest or add.” Haislip left the meeting thinking he had won: The bill he proposed was submitted to Congress, requiring companies to keep records on the import and sale of ephedrine and pseudoephedrine.

    But what Haislip didn’t know was that the men in suits had already gone to work to rig the bill in their favor. “Quite frankly,” Allan Rexinger, one of the lobbyists present at the meeting later told reporters, “we appealed to a higher authority.” The pharmaceutical industry needed pseudoephedrine to make profitable cold medications. The result, to Haislip’s dismay, was a new law that monitored sales of ephedrine and pseudoephedrine in bulk powder but created an exemption for selling the chemicals in tablet form – a loophole that protected the pharmaceutical industry’s profits.

    The law, drug agents say, sparked two changes in the market for illegal meth. First, the supply of ephedrine simply moved overseas: The Mexican cartels, quick to recognize an emerging market, evaded the restrictions by importing powder from China, India and Europe and then smuggling it across the border to the biker groups that had traditionally distributed the drug. “We actually had meetings where we planned for a turf war between the Mexicans and the Hells Angels over methamphetamine,” says retired DEA agent Mike Heald, who headed the San Francisco meth task force, “but it turned out they realized they’d make more money by working together.” Second, responding to a dramatic uptick in demand from the illegal market, chemical-supply companies began moving huge amounts of ephedrine and pseudoephedrine out to the West Coast in the form of pills, which were then converted into meth. Rather than stemming the tide of meth before it started, the Reagan administration had unwittingly helped accelerate a new epidemic: Between 1992 and 1994, the number of meth addicts entering rehab facilities doubled, and the drug’s purity on the street rose by twenty-seven percent.

    Haislip resolved to have another go at Congress, but the issue ended up in a dispiriting cycle. The resistance, he says bitterly, “was always coming from the same lobbying group.” In 1993, when he persuaded lawmakers to regulate the sale of ephedrine in tablet form, the pharmaceutical industry won an exception for pseudoephedrine. Drug agents began to intercept shipments of pseudoephedrine pills in barrels. Three years later, when lawmakers finally regulated tablets of pseudoephedrine, they created an exception for pills sold in blister packs. “Congress thought there was no way that meth freaks would buy this stuff and pop the pills out of blister packs, one by one,” says Heald. “But we’re not dealing with normal people – we’re dealing with meth freaks. They’ll stay up all night picking their toes.”

    By the time Haislip retired, in 1997, the methamphetamine problem was really two problems. There were the mom-and-pop cooks, who were punching pills out of blister packs and making small batches of drugs for themselves. Then there were the industrial-scale Mexican cartels, which were responsible for eighty percent of the meth in the United States. It took until 2005 for Congress to finally regulate over-the-counter blister packs, which caused the number of labs to plummet. But once again, the Mexican groups were a step ahead of the law. In October 2006, police in Guadalajara arrested an American chemist named Frederick Wells, who had moved to Mexico after losing his job at Idaho State University. An academic troublemaker who drove around campus with signs on the back of his pickup truck raging at the college administration, Wells had allegedly used his university lab to investigate new ways that Mexican traffickers could use completely legal reagents to engineer meth precursors from scratch. “Very complicated numerical modeling,” says his academic colleague Jeff Rosentreter. By the time Wells was arrested, the State Department had only just succeeded at pressuring Mexico to restrict the flow of pseudoephedrine, even though Wells had apparently been hard at work for years creating alternatives to that chemical. The lobbying by the pharmaceutical industry, Haislip says, “cost us eight or nine years.”

    For some in the drug war, it was a lesson that even the most promising efforts to restrict the supply of drugs at the source – those that rely on legal methods to regulate legally produced drugs – remained nearly impossible, outflanked by both drug traffickers and industry lobbyists. The tragedy of the fight against methamphetamine is that it repeated the ways in which the government tried to fight the cocaine problem, and failed – racing from source to source, trying to eliminate a coca field or an ephedrine manufacturer and then racing to the next one. “We used to call it the Pillsbury Doughboy – stick your finger in one part of the problem, and the Doughboy’s stomach just pops out somewhere else,” says Rand Beers. “The lesson of U.S. drug policy is that this world runs on unintended consequences. No matter how noble your intentions, there’s a good chance that in solving one problem, you’ll screw something else up.”

    6. THE GENERAL & THE ADMAN

    Within the Clinton White House, the reform effort spearheaded by Lee Brown had created a political dilemma. Republicans, having taken control of Congress in 1994, were attacking the administration for being soft on drugs, and the White House decided that it was time to look tougher. “A lot of people didn’t think Brown was a strong leader,” Panetta tells me. As senior figures within the administration cast about for a replacement, they started by thinking about who would be the opposite of Brown. “We wanted to get someone who was much stronger, much tougher, and could come across that way symbolically,” Panetta says.

    During the planning for a possible invasion of Haiti, Panetta and others had discovered a rising star at the Pentagon, a charismatic, bullying four-star general named Barry McCaffrey, who had annoyed many in the Pentagon’s establishment. In 1996, halfway into his State of the Union address, Clinton looked up at McCaffrey, a lean, stern-seeming military man in the balcony, and informed the nation that the general would be his next drug czar. “To succeed, he needs a force far larger than he has ever commanded before,” Clinton said. “He needs all of us. Every one of us has a role to play on this team.” McCaffrey, the bars on his epaulets shimmering, saluted. It was one of the president’s biggest applause lines of the night.

    For the drug warriors in McCaffrey’s office, “the General” was everything the languid, considered, academic Lee Brown had not been. “It was clear from the outset that here was a guy who would take advantage of the bully pulpit and who, unlike Brown, would probably be able to get things done,” says Bergman, Brown’s former liaison. “One thing that surprised us all was how thoughtful he was – he wasn’t a knee-jerk, law-enforcement guy. He understood there needed to be money for treatment. He prided himself on being very sensitive to the racial issues, and he was sensitive to the impact of sentencing laws on African-American men.” McCaffrey imported his own staff from the Southern Command – mostly men, all military. They lent the White House’s drug operation – previously a slow place – the kinetic energy of a forward operating base. “We went to a twenty-four-hour clock, so we’d schedule meetings for 1500,” one longtime staffer recalls. “His people sat down with senior staff and told us what size paper the General wanted his memos on, this kind of report would have green tabs, this would have blue tabs.”

    The General’s genius was for publicity. “He was great at getting visibility,” Carnevale says. McCaffrey held grandstanding events everywhere from Mexico to Maine, telling reporters that the decades-long narrative of impending doom around the drug war was out of date – and that if Congress would really dedicate itself to the mission, the country had a winnable fight on its hands. Drug-use numbers were edging downward; even cocaine seemed to be declining in popularity. “We are in an optimistic situation,” McCaffrey declared.

    For the first time ever, McCaffrey had the drug czar’s office develop a strategy for an endgame to the drug war, a plan for finishing the whole thing. The federal government needed to reduce the amount of money it was spending on law enforcement and interdiction. But McCaffrey believed this was only possible once it could guarantee that drug use would continue to decline. “The data suggested very strongly that those who never tried any drugs before they were eighteen were very likely to remain abstinent for their whole lives, but that those who even smoked marijuana when they were teenagers had much worse outcomes,” says McCaffrey’s deputy Don Vereen. So the General decided to focus the government’s attention on keeping kids from trying pot.

    The “gateway theory,” as it became known, had a natural appeal. Because most people who used hard drugs had also smoked marijuana, and because kids often tried marijuana several years before they started trying harder drugs, it seemed that keeping them off pot might prevent them from ever getting to cocaine and heroin. The only trouble is, the theory is wrong. When McCaffrey’s office commissioned the Institute of Medicine to study the idea, researchers concluded that marijuana “does not appear to be a gateway drug.” RAND, after examining a decade of data, also found that the gateway theory is “not the best explanation” of the link between marijuana use and hard drugs. But McCaffrey continued to devote more and more of the government’s resources to going after kids. “We have already clearly committed ourselves,” he declared, “to a number-one focus on youth.”

    “That decision,” Bergman says, “was where you could see McCaffrey begin to lose credibility.”

    In 1996, less than a year into his term, the new drug czar met Jim Burke, a smooth-talking, silver-haired executive who chaired the Partnership for a Drug-Free America – the advertising organization best known for the slogan “This is your brain on drugs.” “Burke personally was very hard to resist,” one of his former colleagues tells me. “I’ve seen him sell many conservative members of Congress and also liberals like Mario Cuomo.”

    Burke told McCaffrey a simple story. In the late 1980s, he said, the major television networks had voluntarily given airtime to the Partnership to run anti-drug ads aimed at teenagers. The number of teenagers who used drugs – especially marijuana – declined during that period. But in the early 1990s, Burke said, the rise of cable TV cut into the profits of the networks, which became stingier with the time they dedicated to anti-drug advertising. The result, the adman told the General, was that the number of teenagers who used drugs was climbing sharply – to the outrage of Dennis Hastert and other conservative members of Congress. As a clincher, Burke handed McCaffrey a graph that showed the declining amount of airtime dedicated to anti-drug advertising on one axis and the declining perception among teenagers of the risks associated with drugs on the other. “I’m ninety-nine percent sure,” one staffer at the Partnership tells me, “that it was that conversation that sold McCaffrey.”

    The General mobilized his office, lobbying Congress to allocate enough money to put anti-drug advertising on the air whenever teenagers watched television. His staff was skeptical. For all of McCaffrey’s conviction and charisma, he didn’t have much in the way of facts. “That was all we had – no data, just this one chart – and we had to go and sell Congress,” Carnevale recalls. But Congress proved to be a pushover. Conservatives, who held a majority, were thrilled that soft-on-pot liberals in the Clinton administration finally wanted to do something about the drug problem. “At some point, you have to draw a line and say that some things are right and some things are wrong,” says Sen. Grassley, explaining his support of the measure. “And using any drugs is just flat-out wrong.” To the Partnership’s delight, Congress allocated $1 billion to buy network time for anti-drug spots aimed at teenagers.

    The General was also starting to make friends beyond the Clinton administration. The drug czar had found a natural ally in Hastert, who had become the GOP’s de facto leader on drug policy. The former wrestling coach struck few as charismatic – his joyless and drudging style, his form like settled gelatin – but his experiences in high schools had left him with the feeling that the drug issue, in the words of his longtime aide Bobby Charles, “had become extremely poignant.” Hastert wasn’t quite Lee Brown; he believed that the prime focus of the drug war should be to increase funding for military operations in Colombia. But he and his staff had grown frustrated with the exclusively punitive character of drug policy and wanted the Republicans to take a more compassionate stance. His staff had studied the RAND reports and largely agreed with their conclusions. “We felt if you didn’t get at the nub of the problem, which was prevention and treatment, you weren’t going to do any good,” says John Bridgeland, a congressional aide who helped coordinate Republican drug policy. Hastert eventually won $450 million to be used, in part, to expand a faith-based program discovered by Bridgeland: Developed by a former evangelical minister, it brought together preachers, parents and drug counselors to fight the problem of “apathy” through “parent training” and “messages from the pulpit.”

    But with McCaffrey’s emphasis on kids came another, almost fanatical focus: going after citizens who used pot for medical purposes. If he was fighting marijuana, the General was going to fight it everywhere, in all its forms. He threatened to have doctors who prescribed pot brought up on federal charges, and dismissed the science behind medical marijuana as a “Cheech and Chong show.” In 1997, voters in Oregon introduced an initiative to legalize medical marijuana in the state. “I’ll never forget the senior-staff meeting the morning after the Oregon initiative was announced,” Bergman says. “McCaffrey was furious. It was like this personal affront to him. He couldn’t believe they’d gotten away with it. He wanted to have this research done on the groups behind it and completely trash them in the press.” As the General traveled to the initiative states, stumping against medical marijuana, his aides sneered that the initiatives were “all being mostly bankrolled by one man, George Soros,” the billionaire investor who favored decriminalizing drugs.

    Even for those who shared McCaffrey’s philosophy, the theatrics seemed strange: There he was, on evening newscasts, effectively insisting that grandmothers dying of cancer were corrupting America’s youth. His office pushed arguments that, at best, stretched the available research: Marijuana is a gateway drug that leads inexorably to the abuse of harder drugs; marijuana is thirty times more potent now than it was a generation ago. “It didn’t track with the conclusions our researchers came to,” says Bergman. “It felt like he was trying to manipulate the data.”

    McCaffrey had taken the drug war in a new direction, one that had little obvious connection with preventing drug abuse. For the first time, the full force of the federal government was being brought to bear on patients dying from terminal diseases. Even the General’s allies in Congress were appalled. “I can’t tell you how many times I went to the Hill with him and sat in on closed-doors meetings,” Bergman recalls. “Members said to him, ‘What in the world are you doing? We have real drug problems in the country with meth and cocaine. What the hell are you doing with medical marijuana? We get no calls from our constituents about that. Nobody cares about that.’ McCaffrey was just mystified by their response, because he truly believed marijuana was a gateway drug. He truly believed in what he was doing.”

    Continued…

    CIA hires Jordanian intelligence to run torture center

    0

    CIA hires Jordanian intelligence to run torture center

    The Washington Post reports that the CIA has been using the headquarters of the General Intelligence Department in Jordan as a facility to hold detainees and get some of them tortured.

    Since 2000, at the CIA’s behest, at least 12 non-Jordanian terrorism suspects have been detained and interrogated here, according to documents and former prisoners, human rights advocates, defense lawyers and former U.S. officials.

    In most of the cases, the spy center served as a covert way station for CIA prisoners captured in other countries. It was a place where they could be hidden after being arrested and kept for a few days or several months before being moved on to Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, or CIA prisons elsewhere in the world….

    The General Intelligence Department, or GID, is perhaps the CIA’s most trusted partner in the Arab world. The Jordanian agency has received money, training and equipment from the CIA for decades and even has a public English-language Web site. The relationship has deepened in recent years, with U.S. officials praising their Jordanian counterparts for the depth of their knowledge regarding al-Qaeda and other radical Islamic networks.

    In the aftermath of Sept. 11, however, the GID was attractive for another reason, according to former U.S. counterterrorism officials and Jordanian human rights advocates. Its interrogators had a reputation for persuading tight-lipped suspects to talk, even if that meant using abusive tactics that could violate U.S. or international law.

    “I was kidnapped, not knowing anything of my fate, with continuous torture and interrogation for the whole of two years,” Al-Haj Abdu Ali Sharqawi, a Guantanamo prisoner from Yemen, recounted in a written account of his experiences in Jordanian custody. “When I told them the truth, I was tortured and beaten.”

    Sharqawi was captured in Karachi, Pakistan, in February 2002 in a joint Pakistani-U.S. operation. Although the Guantanamo Bay prison had just opened, the CIA flew him instead to Amman, where he was imprisoned for 19 months, according to his account and flight records. He was later taken to another CIA-run secret prison, his statement says, before he was finally moved to Guantanamo in February 2004.

    The CIA maintains its Amman facility as a torture center:

    Samieh Khreis, an Amman lawyer who has represented former Guantanamo inmates from Jordan, said testimony by former prisoners and others in Jordan reinforced a long-held suspicion that the CIA ran a satellite operation inside headquarters of the General Intelligence Department.

    “Of course they had a jail here, a secret jail – of course, no question,” he said. “If they were to put me in that GID building over there, in my mind, it might as well be an American jail.”

    Some of those taken there are never heard from again:

    Jamil Qasim Saeed Mohammed, a Yemeni microbiology student, was captured in a U.S.-Pakistani operation in Karachi a few weeks after 9/11 on suspicion of helping to finance al-Qaeda operations. Witnesses reported seeing masked men take him aboard a Gulfstream V jet at the Karachi airport Oct. 24, 2001.

    Records show that the plane was chartered by a CIA front company and that it flew directly to Amman. Mohammed has not been seen since. Amnesty International said it has asked the Jordanian government for information on his whereabouts but has not received an answer.

    FBI Refuses To Confirm Identity Of 9/11 Planes

    FOIA Appeal Denied: FBI Again Refuses To Confirm Identity Of 9/11 Planes

    Aidan Monaghan

    In an effort to end speculation surrounding the events at the Pentagon building on September 11, 2001, a Freedom of Information Act request was made of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, seeking confirmation of the process by which recovered debris belonging to the 4 aircraft used in the 9/11 terrorist attacks was identified. This request was denied. An appeal of that decision has also been denied. Court action is pending.

    According to the FBI, “the material requested is located in an investigative file which is exempt from disclosure pursuant to Title 5, United States Code, Section 552, subsection (b) (7) (A).”

    This subsection reads: “could be reasonably be expected to interfere with enforcement proceedings.”

    The FBI has publicly declared that certain civil aircraft were involved in the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001. It apparently was not believed by the FBI, that disclosure of that information would jeopardize any September 11th “enforcement proceedings”.

    It is unknown why disclosure of aircraft identifying data – that is presumably the basis for the FBI’s current public opinion regarding the 9/11 planes and which was likely provided by the Federal Aviation Administration or the National Transportation Safety Board – could then jeopardize FBI “enforcement proceedings”.

    “The National Transportation Safety Board is an independent Federal agency charged by Congress with investigating every civil aviation accident in the United States.”

    http://www.ntsb.gov/Abt_NTSB/history.htm

    The NTSB acknowledges that it provided assistance to the FBI, regarding its investigation of the civil aircraft reportedly used during the terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001:

    “The terrorist attacks of September 11, 2001 are under the jurisdiction of the Federal Bureau of Investigation. The Safety Board provided requested technical assistance to the FBI, and any material generated by the NTSB is under the control of the FBI.”

    (See NTSB source links provided below)

    The FBI currently lists American Airlines flight 11, United Airlines flight 175, American Airlines flight 77 and United Airlines flight 93, as those used to carry out the 9/11 attacks:

    http://www.fbi.gov/pressrel/pressrel01/092701hjpic.htm

    The National Transportation Safety Board lists the above flights on September 11, 2001 as being provided by the following aircraft, that were listed under the Federal Aviation Administration registry as follows:

    American Airlines flight 11 – N334AA

    http://www.ntsb.gov/ntsb/GenPDF.asp?id=DCA01MA060&rpt=fa

    United Airlines flight 175 – N612UA

    http://www.ntsb.gov/ntsb/GenPDF.asp?id=DCA01MA063&rpt=fa

    American Airlines flight 77 – N644AA

    http://www.ntsb.gov/ntsb/GenPDF.asp?id=DCA01MA064&rpt=fa

    United Airlines flight 93 – N591UA

    http://www.ntsb.gov/ntsb/GenPDF.asp?id=DCA01MA065&rpt=fa

    Original FOIA request denial:

    Original FOIA request:

    Benefit data discs ‘held for year’

    0

    Press Association

    The Conservatives have branded a report that an ex-contractor at the DWP had two discs with thousands of benefit claimants’ details for more than a year “disturbing”.

    The News of the World reports that two discs were found at the home of a former contractor to the Department for Work and Pensions.

    The worker discovered that she had inadvertently forgotten to return the discs when her work with the DWP finished – and expressed her surprise that no one had checked that she had done so.

    The two new missing discs reveal what kind of benefits the people receive. The data on the discs can be accessed by any standard computer and is not encrypted or protected by a password.

    The blunder comes days after the Government was forced to admit it had lost the personal details of more than 25 million people in the post.

    That crisis was sparked when a junior official at HM Revenue & Customs official in Tyne and Wear sent two unencrypted CDs containing details of child benefit claimants by courier to the National Audit office in London. The discs were not recorded or registered.

    Shadow work and pensions secretary Chris Grayling said of the latest blunder: “This is an exceptionally disturbing new development involving highly sensitive personal information.

    “The fact that it hasn’t been copy protected is further evidence of a cavalier attitude towards data protection in Government departments. Ministers need to explain urgently how they are going to put things right.”

    On Saturday it emerged confidential information on millions of investors is regularly being sent through the post to HM Revenue and Customs without proper security.

    Investment managers in the City are required to mail personal data on their clients to HMRC on unencrypted computer discs despite the recent outcry.

    Britons Reject ID Cards After Missing Data Scandal

    1

    (Angus Reid Global Monitor) – A growing scandal over the government’s loss of the personal data of 25 million British people last week could carry unexpected consequences, according to a poll by Populus published in The Times. 55 per cent of respondents think the incident proves the government would be unable to handle the introduction of smart identification cards and should abandon plans to do so.

    In June, Gordon Brown officially became Labour leader and prime minister, replacing Tony Blair. Brown had worked as chancellor of the exchequer. Blair served as Britain’s prime minister since May 1997, winning majority mandates in the 1997, 2001 and 2005 elections to the House of Commons.

    On Nov. 20, chancellor of the exchequer Alistair Darling announced that compact discs with detailed information on citizens went missing when HM Revenue & Customs was transferring them to another government agency through an unregistered mailing service. Paul Gray, chairman of the agency in question, resigned as a result of the incident. 44 per cent of respondents think Darling should also lose his job over the mishandling of the data, while 40 per cent disagree.

    In 2006, the House of Commons approved the Identity Cards Act, effectively creating Britain’s National Identity Register (NIR). The NIR is due to store up to 49 different items on everyone living in the country, including fingerprints, DNA, home address and telephone numbers. The legislation stipulates that, starting on 2009, everybody in Britain will hold a “smart” biometric ID card linked to the national register. The card will be required for access to public services such as doctors’ surgeries, unemployment offices, libraries and others.

    On Nov. 27, Dave Hartnett, acting chairman of HM Revenue & Customs, sent out personalized letters of apology to millions of people affected by the data loss. Nigel Evans, chairman of the All-Party Parliamentary Group on Identity Fraud in Parliament, accused the government of incurring on yet another dangerous practice, saying the letters contain each claimants’ name, address, national insurance and child benefit numbers, which could be used for identity theft.

    Evans said that “a million letters go missing every day; there are households of multiple occupation. (…) There are people paid to rummage in people’s bins: they will know that information will be lying in the rubbish over the next few days. Fraudsters can sit on the information for some time so people should check their bank accounts carefully.”

    Polling Data

    Yesterday, the chancellor of the exchequer Alistair Darling announced that computer disks containing detailed personal and financial information on 25 million British people had gone missing, after being sent from HM Revenue & Customs to the National Audit Office via an unregistered mail service last month. The Chairman of HM Revenue & Customs has resigned as a result. Please answer the following questions.

    Should the chancellor of the exchequer resign, or be sacked, as a result of this incident–which he described as ‘a catastrophic error?

    Yes, he should lose his job 44%
    No, he shouldn’t lose his job 40%
    Don’t know 15%

    Some people have said that this incident shows that the government cannot be trusted properly to protect and manage confidential information about people and therefore means that the plans to introduce ID cards must now be abandoned. Do you think that the government should go ahead with its plan for ID cards, or should the idea of introducing ID cards be dropped?

    Go ahead with ID cards 29%
    Scrap ID cards 55%
    Don’t know 15%

    Source: Populus / The Times
    Methodology: Telephone interviews with 1,025 British adults, conducted on Nov. 21, 2007. No margin of error was provided.

    DNA database growth defended by police

    0

    More than a crime a day is being solved in Norfolk due to improvements in DNA sampling, according to police forensic experts.

    BEN KENDALL

    Almost 50,000 people in the county are held on the national DNA database, representing 6pc of the total population. But Norfolk police last night insisted the samples are the key to solving hundreds of offences.

    And while the database continues to grow by 700 people a month, Alan Gilbert, Norfolk’s head of crime command, insisted: “If you’ve got nothing to hide, you’ve got nothing to fear”.

    Almost 50 suspects are found each month in the county using the database, meaning that 500-plus people who may otherwise go unpunished a brought to justice each year.

    The majority are linked to volume crimes such as burglaries but there is still hope many high profile offences, such as unsolved murder cases, could be unravelled.

    Only yesterday a 70-year-old man was charged with the murder of a teenage girl whose body was found in allotments in Birmingham in 1961.

    Mr Gilbert said: “We are constantly refining techniques and making sure we have the best systems in place. As a result we are becoming increasingly successful in the number of cases we are able to solve using DNA evidence.

    “Last year we were identifying as many as 39 suspects each month on average and this year that has increased to 49.

    “A lot of these are historic cases which might otherwise go unsolved. Obviously DNA is only one part of the evidence we need to gather but it does help investigation teams focus their inquiries.

    “When it comes to more serious offences, there is a real possibility that DNA will hold the vital clue. In some cases it is just a matter of time before a suspect is picked up for a minor matter and we can match them to evidence gathered on a cold case.”

    In the past the national database has attracted controversy, not least because it includes people arrested for all recordable crimes including some more serious driving matters. Even once a suspect has been cleared they remain on the database.

    Association of Chief Police Officer guidelines do allow people to apply for their details to be removed under exceptional circumstances. But Mr Gilbert admitted this was “very rare”.

    He said: “Hundreds of crimes have been solved since the introduction of the database including many high profile cases. If somebody is arrested for a one-off offence they shouldn’t have anything to worry about.

    “If however somebody has committed a serious crime or is a repeat offender then this increases the chances they will be caught.”

    Earlier this year it was revealed that at least 3,500 of the people on the database in Norfolk are aged under-18 and critics added that keeping the DNA of innocent people without their consent is wrong. Nationally there are about 3.5m on the database.

    Before 2001, the police could take DNA samples during investigations but had to destroy the samples and the records if the people concerned were acquitted or charges were not proceeded with.

    The law was changed in 2001 to remove this requirement, and changed again in 2004 so that DNA samples could be taken from anyone arrested for a recordable offence and detained in a police station.

    Fayed feared Princess Diana crash was a plot

    0

    Mohamed Fayed ‘instantly feared Princess Diana crash was a plot’

    By Laura Clout

    Mohamed Fayed appeared convinced that the crash that killed his son Dodi and Diana, Princess of Wales was “a plot or assassination” from the moment he heard about it, the inquest into their deaths has been told.

    When Franz Klein, the president of the Ritz hotel in Paris, broke the news of the accident to Mr Fayed, the Harrods owner replied: “I know more than you know, more than you think.”

    Giving evidence at the inquest, Mr Klein also claimed that Dodi told him during the summer of 1997 of his plans to marry the princess.

    He said that Dodi spoke to him of plans for the couple to settle in Paris at Villa Windsor, where Edward VIII and Wallis Simpson lived in exile after his abdication.

    He told the inquest, at the Royal Courts of Justice in London, that Dodi had chosen an engagement ring from the Repossi jewellers’ “Dis-moi oui” (Tell me Yes) range shortly before the crash in the early hours of Aug 31, 1997.

    Breaking down in tears, Mr Klein, known as Frank, described how he called Mr Fayed in London, about 20 minutes after the accident had happened, to relay the news.

    He recalled: “I said, ‘Mr Fayed, very sorry to disturb you, there has been a terrible accident… Dodi passed away and the driver’ and Mr Fayed said, ‘Sorry’.”

    He went on: “Mr Fayed said, ‘What about the princess?’ and I said, ‘The information I have is she’s alive’ – the only thing I knew – and I said ‘an accident’, that I said definitely.

    “Mr Fayed, very calm, said to me, ‘Frank, this is not an accident, this is a plot or an assassination’.

    “I said, ‘You cannot say that, it’s an accident’ and he said, ‘Frank, I know more than you know, more than you think’.

    “Then I think the conversation was over.”

    Mr Klein said he received a call from Dodi around Aug 18 or 19 telling him that the pair were going to be in Paris at the end of the month.

    “I remember very well, he called me and he said, ‘Frank I just passed by a jewellers’ shop’,” said Mr Klein.

    He said Dodi then told him: “I want to buy some jewellery, I’m going to get engaged.”

    Mr Klein told of a second conversation, around Aug 29, when the Villa Windsor -which Mr Fayed rented from the French government – was mentioned. “He informed me he was going to Paris the following day,” Mr Klein said.

    “He did not mention the princess by name but he did tell me that he was going to stay in Paris, to live, he told me he was going to move to the Villa Windsor with his girlfriend and he told me, all the time in English, that they were going to get married.”

    Mr Fayed, who was sitting only a few yards from Mr Klein as he gave evidence, claims that the couple were assassinated on the orders of Prince Philip to prevent them marrying because the Royal Family was not prepared for a Muslim to become stepfather to the future king, Prince William.

    The inquest continues.

    CNN Attempts to Fix Its Own Poll Against Ron Paul

    0

    Kurt Nimmo
    TruthNews

    Desperation. It stinks of desperation. During the Republican debate, CNN once again attempted to derail the Ron Paul campaign. This time they ran the following lower third under Paul as he spoke:

    “Will Ron Paul let America down by not running as an independent?”

    Say what?

    Obviously, CNN wants Paul to run as an independent because he is blowing the other candidates off the stage and basically over-turning the political establishment apple cart. People are sick and tired of the “conservatives,” who are really establishment bootlickers and neocons, and want a sincere candidate, one that represents change and traditional constitutional values.

    This scares the dickens out of the corporate media – and that is why they have dedicated so little coverage to Ron Paul.

    But it not going to work, as CNN’s own poll demonstrates (see the video).

    Brother of pilot falsely accused over 9/11 wins claim

    0

    Clare Dyer
    The Guardian

    Mohamed Raissi, the brother of Lotfi Raissi, an Algerian-born pilot falsely accused of involvement in the September 11 terror attacks, has won an action for damages in the high court against the Metropolitan Police for wrongly arresting and holding him on suspicion of terrorist acts.

    But Sonia Raissi, the wife of the pilot – who was the first person accused of participating in the attacks on the World Trade Centre and the Pentagon in 2001 – had a similar claim rejected yesterday.

    The size of Mohamed Raissi’s payout has yet to be determined, but he and his sister-in-law were each claiming £150,000. The Met was given permission to appeal against the judgment.

    Mr Justice McCombe ruled that the police had no reasonable grounds for suspicion that Mohamed Raissi was involved in terrorist activities, just because he was close to his brother and lived near him and they had access to each other’s houses in London. But his sister-in-law’s case was different, and the factors the arresting officer had in mind “amply justified” the arrest at the time.

    Both Mrs Raissi, 31, of Chiswick, west London, and her brother-in-law, of Heston, Hounslow, Middlesex, said their arrests by anti-terrorist police officers on September 21 2001 were unlawful and that they were falsely imprisoned.

    Lotfi Raissi was arrested following an extradition request from the US. He was eventually released in February 2002 and a judge ruled that there was “no evidence” to suggest he was connected to 9/11 or any form of terrorism.

    The French-born Mrs Raissi, who was working at Heathrow as a customer service agent at the time of her arrest, was released without charge after five days.

    Mohamed Raissi, now 35, was detained for around 42 hours and also released without charge after being arrested at his home in Hounslow.

    The judge said : “Mrs Sonia Raissi was not merely the wife of a prime suspect.

    “She had been with him in a foreign country at a time when he might well have been thought to have been engaged, at the same time and at the same location, in the very training which was being undergone by one of the known perpetrators of the atrocities.

    “It must have been reasonable to suspect that, if Lotfi was possibly involved, she too might be complicit in the offences.”

    Mohamed Raissi had been due to start work as a cleaning supervisor at Heathrow airport on the morning he was arrested, but the offer was withdrawn.

    Lotfi Raissi, now 33, who spent nearly five months in jail following the false allegations, has an appeal pending against a ruling earlier this year that the home secretary was entitled to exclude him from a Home Office ex-gratia compensation scheme for victims of miscarriages of justice.

    Government-sponsored cyberattacks on the rise

    0

    Governments are using the Internet to spy and launch cyberattacks that target critical systems, according to McAfee’s cybersecurity report

    By Jon Brodkin

    Governments and allied groups worldwide are using the Internet to spy and launch cyberattacks on their enemies, targeting critical systems including electricity, air traffic control, financial markets, and government computer networks, according to McAfee’s annual report examining global cybersecurity.

    This year, China has been accused of launching attacks against the United States, India, Germany and Australia, but the Chinese are not alone: 120 countries including the United States are said to be launching Web espionage operations, according to McAfee’s Virtual Criminology Report, issued today and developed with input from NATO, the FBI, the United Kingdom’s Serious Organized Crime Agency, and various groups and universities.

    “Cyber assaults have become more sophisticated in their nature, designed to specifically slip under the radar of government cyber defenses,” McAfee states. “Attacks have progressed from initial curiosity probes to well-funded and well-organized operations for political, military, economic and technical espionage.”

    One attack against Estonia, allegedly carried out by Russia, disrupted government, news and bank servers for several weeks in April, McAfee notes. In the United States, a Pentagon computer network allegedly was hacked by China-based perpetrators in June, the McAfee report states.

    The Internet is simply a great tool for gathering intelligence, both for world powers like the United States and China and small countries with limited resources, says David Marcus, security research and communications manager at McAfee Avert Labs.
    He doesn’t think cyberattacks will replace conventional warfare, but says they are becoming an important augmentation, with countries using technology to spread disinformation and disrupt communications. He also predicts it will be common for governments to license cybercriminals to attack enemies in a sort of privatized model. “We’re already starting to see that with state-sponsored malware,” he says. “I only think you’re going to start seeing more than that because it’s easier to attack government X’s database than it is to nuke their troops.”

    McAfee said its research also found an increasing threat to banking and other online services, and “the emergence of a complex and sophisticated market for malware.” Malware today is more complex than ever before, capable of acting as if it were genetically modified. “These ‘super-strength’ threats are more resilient, are modified over and over again like recombinant DNA,” McAfee writes. “Nuwar [Storm Worm] was the first example, and experts say there will be more examples in 2008.”

    VoIP is a new target of cybercriminals, and such social-networking applications as MySpace and Facebook are sure to be exploited more often, going forward, McAfee says. NATO insiders say many governments are unaware of the Web espionage threats and have left themselves open to cyberattack.

    One aspect that might be overlooked is the economy that distributes the tools of cybercrime. Software flaws are sold for as much as $75,000, and criminals can buy custom-written Trojans designed to steal credit card data. Additionally, McAfee says an “underground economy already includes specialized auction sites, product advertising and even support services, but now competition is so fierce that ‘customer service’ has become a specific selling point.”

    Network World is an InfoWorld affiliate.

    US planning multi-billion dollar spy satellites

    0

    The US is pursuing a multibillion-dollar programme to develop the next generation of spy satellites, the first major effort of its kind since the Pentagon cancelled the ambitious and costly Future Imagery Architecture system two years ago, according to US officials.The new system, known as BASIC, would be launched by 2011 and is expected to cost $2-4bn (€1.4-2.8bn), according to US officials familiar with the programme.

    Photo reconnaissance satellites are used to gather visual information from space about adversarial governments and terror groups, such as construction at suspected nuclear sites or militant training camps.

    Satellites also can be used to survey damage from hurricanes, fires and other natural disasters.

    The new start comes as many US officials, politicians and defence experts question the high costs of satellite programmes, particularly after the demise of the previous programme that wasted time and money.

    The National Reconnaissance Office spent six years and billions of dollars on Future Imagery Architecture, or FIA, before deciding in September 2005 to scrap a major component of the programme.

    Boeing, the primary contractor, had run into technical problems in the development of the electro-optical satellite and blew its budget by as much as £3bn (€2bn) before the Pentagon pulled the plug, according to industry experts and government reports.

    “They grossly underestimated the cost of the programme”, as well as the technological feasibility of FIA, said John Pike, a space expert who heads GlobalSecurity.org. FIA “was an hallucination”, he said.

    The Defence Department is in the initial stages of preparing the new programme for bidders. The Pentagon’s classified “request for information” on the technology was issued this autumn to industry. Comments were due two weeks ago. A solicitation for proposals is expected next spring.

    Meanwhile, the Pentagon is conducting a study to determine what satellite capabilities are feasible. The analysis will be completed by the end of the year.

    Officials said the Pentagon was considering a range of options, but the new programme is expected to be significantly less ambitious than the one it is meant to replace.Options include developing an entirely new photo imagery satellite or a derivative of a commercial imagery satellite, buying a commercial satellite or leasing existing satellite capacity.

    A US commercial satellite launched in September by DigitalGlobe can make out the outline of a 20in object from space. In April, a satellite will be launched with the ability to see a 16in object. By 2011, that capability is expected to narrow to nearly 10in.

    Industry officials said the contract probably would be for a commercial or commercially derived spacecraft because of the time and budget constraints and the government’s apparent desire to maintain control of the satellite.

    The US military has a $1bn (€680,920) contract with two commercial satellite companies to buy space imagery. Each contract pays for a satellite, its launch and insurance and roughly 200 million dollars in photo imagery.

    “We would look forward to reviewing any new government acquisition request since we give the government more eyes in the sky and high quality imagery at a fraction of the cost,” said Mark Brender, vice president for communications at GEOEYE.

    GEOEYE and DigitalGlobe have the imagery contract with the Pentagon.

    When the Pentagon cancelled the programme in 2005, it hired Lockheed Martin to cobble together a space craft from spare parts from the current generation of secret electro-optical reconnaissance satellites to cover a potential gap in coverage.

    The House and Senate intelligence committees have criticised the Pentagon and intelligence agencies’ management of space programmes. Half the programmes have experienced cost growth of 50% or more.

    The US Defence Department spends about $20bn (€13.6bn) annually on space programmes. 

    http://www.eecho.ie/news/story/?trs=mhmhidqlojgb

    Warning to Bush: Bomb Iran and face impeachment

    0

    Biden’s warning to Bush: Bomb Iran and face impeachment

    David Edwards and Nick Juliano

    Sen. Joe Biden, the loquacious long-shot Democratic presidential candidate, warned President Bush Thursday that he would move for impeachment if the president unilaterally authorized a military strike against Iran.

    “The President has no authority to unilaterally attack Iran and … if he does, as foreign relations committee chairman and former chairman of judiciary, I will move to impeach him,” Biden told a crowd of about 100 potential voters at a campaign stop in New Hampshire.

    Biden said he is meeting with constitutional law experts and plans to send Bush a legal memo formally outlining his warning, according to Seacoast Online, which reported his comments.

    The senior Delaware senator told the crowd that calls for Bush’s immediate impeachment were valid but may not have enough constitutional support to make them viable. He added that Bush wasn’t the only White House figure who deserves to be booted.

    “If you’re going to impeach George Bush, you better impeach Cheney first,” Biden said, garnering applause from the crowd.

    On MSNBC’s Morning Joe Friday, host Joe Scarborough, a former Republican congressman, criticized Biden’s proposal.

    “It is so unfortunate, that this is how we campaign now, talking about impeachment,” Scarborough said, “when you have [Iranian president Mahmoud] Ahmadinejad talking about obliterating Israel, talking about obliterating the United States, talking about building nuclear weapons, how we can’t stop him. Saying just absolutely horrendous crazy things, sending Iranian forces into Iraq to kill American troops.

    “And Joe Biden, who I like and respect, talking on the campaign trail about impeaching a commander in chief because of a decision that he may make against a madman,” he continued. “And everybody knows that Ahmadinejad is a madman, and that Iran is one of the most dangerous planets on Earth.”

    One assumes Scarborough meant to say “most dangerous countries on Earth.”
    This video is from MSNBC Morning Joe, broadcast on November 30, 2007.


    20 percent of election printouts were unreadable

    1

    A recount after next year’s presidential election could mean disaster for Cuyahoga County based on problems discovered Tuesday with paper records produced by electronic voting machines.

    More than 20 percent of the printouts from touch-screen voting machines were unreadable and had to be reprinted. Board of Elections workers found the damaged ballots when they conducted a recount Tuesday of two races, which involved only 17 of the county’s 1,436 precincts.

    The recount lasted more than 12 hours. Reprinting the damaged records and hand-counting them created an extra step that added hours.

    “If it is as close as it’s been for the last two presidential elections and it’s that close again in 2008, God help us if we have to depend on Cuya- hoga County as the deciding factor with regard to making the decision on who the next president of the United States is,” said County Commissioner Jimmy Dimora, a longtime opponent of the county’s touch-screen voting system.

    Board of Elections Director Jane Platten said recounting the entire county for the 2008 presidential election could take more than a week.

    “The high number of paper audit trails that need to be reprinted was at best a difficult task to have to work through,” Platten said. “I think that’s going to be an indication of future recounts.”

    Tuesday’s recounts were for a North Royalton City Council seat and positions on the Bedford Heights Charter Review Commission. The recount upheld the official results that showed Dan Kasaris won the North Royalton race. Results were not available Tuesday night for the Bedford Heights election.

    Cuyahoga County uses touch-screen voting machines that store votes on a memory card inside each machine. On Election Day, a paper record of each ballot is printed inside each machine on long reels of paper.

    The printout is the paper trail used during recounts. If it’s damaged and unreadable — usually because the paper jammed when printing — a new copy is printed from the machine’s memory card.

    “It’s workable, but tedious,” said board member Rob Frost after watching Tuesday’s recounts. “I think that’s, in part, the nature of recounts.”

    Election workers inspected 70 paper printouts, which represented nearly 4,400 ballots cast Nov. 6 in North Royalton and Bedford Heights. Election workers found 15 of the 70 printouts damaged and those had to be reprinted.

    “This is very much a cause for concern,” board member Inajo Davis Chappell said. “All the technology issues pose a challenge to us, especially given the volume of voters we expect in the primary.”

    Diebold Inc. made the county’s voting equipment. The company renamed its elections division Premier Election Solutions. The high percentage of damaged paper trails seen on Tuesday is not typical, Premier spokesman Chris Riggall said. “That is a percentage that prompts us to do further investigation,” he said.

    The board has two more recounts scheduled to begin today: A race for Olmsted Falls City Council and a seat on the Solon Board of Education. The recounts on Tuesday and today were automatically triggered because the margin of victory was one-half of 1 percent or less.

    The damaged paper records found Tuesday were another problem for the board following the Nov. 6 countywide election.

    The county still doesn’t know why its vote-counting software crashed twice election night. An investigation into the software problem could begin next week, once the county’s recounts are finished.

    Ohio Secretary of State Jennifer Brunner hopes to answer concerns about the county’s voting system. She has initiated a statewide voting equipment review. A report expected Dec. 14 could recommend changes.

    Meanwhile, elections officials must determine the best way to hold elections with their current machinery.

    “I wish those paper trails would come out pristine — and they don’t, and they’re not going to,” Platten said. “We’re going to have to deal with it again.”

    US Roman Catholic Bishop: 9/11 was inside job

    3

    RenewAmerica

    Bishop Richard Williamson, seemingly the most outspoken and controversial bishop of the Society of St. Pius X, asserted in a recent talk that the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks were committed “to get the American public to accept the invasions of Afghanistan and Iraq,” according to a news item by Jack Kenny in the Nov. 15, 2007 issue of The Wanderer.

    Bishop Williamson, whose talk was held Nov. 4, 2007 in Bedford, Mass., is quoted as saying:

    “Without 9-11, it would have been impossible to attack Afghanistan or Iraq. The forces inside the United States government and driving the United States government absolutely wanted to attack and destroy Iraq. The destruction wrought upon Iraq is unspeakable. And now the same forces want to do the same thing to Iran . . . They may well be plotting another 9-11.”

    The news item continues: “Heat from the burning fuel of the planes that flew into the twin towers of the World Trade Center could not have melted the 47 steel columns in each tower, causing them to collapse, he claimed. And a commercial airliner could not have penetrated six of the ten walls that were breached by ‘whatever hit the Pentagon,’ he said.”

    What did hit the Pentagon, according to Bishop Williamson?

    “It was a missile that hit the Pentagon. It was a missile that could only have been fired by the American military.”

    Torture Leads to Lies

    By Susan C. Strong

    The administration’s torture policy is driven by fear and false assumptions. It’s time the public learned the truth about pain-tainted information.

    Despite Mukasey’s confirmation and the next round of holidays coming on, progressives must not let up on the torture issue now. It has great power. It goes to the core of what it means to be an American during the George W. Bush era. And it’s a powerful wedge for all our foreign policy and domestic issues.

    The administration’s main argument for their “alternative interrogation techniques” is still the need to get useful information to better protect Americans. Outcry against trusting pain-induced, pain-tainted “information” is growing. Nevertheless, Senators Schumer and Feinstein’s recent votes for Mukasy show just how far we still have to go in framing the torture issue for the American public. If the public changes its mind, the legislators will too.

    There are a lot of valid ethical, practical, and moral ways to criticize “alternative interrogation” practices, but the most powerful, broad-based appeal is that information gotten by painful methods most certainly breeds lies, and lies taken for genuine military intelligence threaten our safety. So now we need two things: l. a sound bite like “torture or not, pain breeds lies, and lies mean danger,” or just “torture breeds lies, and lies mean danger,” and 2. a very simple, visually graphic way of communicating these ideas, as the sound bite opens up media space.

    Why do we need very simple verbal and visual ways of communicating these realities? The reason there is still support for torture as a tactic in this country is that some people make false assumptions about it, based on their temperaments. Many people in our country need to be able to almost see a thing, hear it, taste it, or smell it before they are able to get how it really works. These frightened mainstream citizens imagine that if they knew something, and someone hurt them, they would tell what they knew. So we need to develop video clips, ads, and other graphics that depict the real story about pain-tainted information.

    How can we do that? Let’s sketch two scenarios to see how this works out in reality. Number one: say you have, as we know we have, a lot of men and boys in custody who just happened to be at the wrong place at the wrong time when they were caught; these people actually know nothing at all. But our people hurt them until they say something. Possibly our military “checks out” this tainted bunch of lies, and finally, if our side has any integrity at all, they discover that they were fed a bunch of lies. But in the meantime, by tormenting “little people” who really did know nothing, they have created some new, seriously angry enemies, both in the prisons, in their home countries and families and around the world.

    That’s one model. Let’s look at the other scenario: say our side has gotten hold of some real Al Qaeda operatives. They inflict pain on them until they “talk.” Again, the prisoners are going to tell lies, if they do talk. If our military personnel are trained to give only name, rank, and serial number, and to withstand torture themselves, just think what real Al Qaeda personnel must be trained to do: withstand torture and/or lie too. Maybe withstand torture and then finally, in the end, tell lies, so that it looks real.

    If I can think of this scenario, so can Bin Laden, and long, long before me. Bin Laden must be laughing very hard at us. Along with believing in the lies of his followers, we are falling smack dab into the rest of his torture trap — the more we inflict pain on prisoners held without due process, the more the Islamic world (and the rest of the world too) grows to hate and distrust us, the more America’s image as the shining city on the hill is besmirched-just the effect Bin Laden is trying to create.

    Real experts in military intelligence are unanimous in saying that inflicting pain is definitely not the way to get valid information from suspects. The latest article detailing this well known fact can be found in The New Republic, October 22. Other kinds of trust-inducing methods do work, and intelligence experts have the case studies to prove it. Even in domestic police work, there is startling new evidence of how often false confessions are made under even light or no duress at all. See “What Makes Criminal Suspects Give a False Confession?

    The administration’s torture policy is, at rock bottom, driven by fear and supported by public fear. In Rory Kennedy’s excellent documentary, Ghosts of Abu Graib, one witness said that right after U.S. forces took Bagdad, the American leadership panicked, because they couldn’t understand the people, the language or the culture, and they couldn’t find out what was really happening on the street or why. That was when they started using “alternative interrogation techniques” on ordinary Iraqis, who actually knew nothing at all. The Americans needed information, any information at all, to satisfy the frightened people in D.C., so they set out to get something, anything, and it really didn’t matter at all if it was just a pack of lies spit out by ordinary Iraqis, in order to stop the pain.

    The only way to fight that kind of fear is with a bigger fear-fear of pain-induced lies, deliberate or not, that really do threaten our safety. Just saying “we don’t torture” isn’t even a fig leaf, as long as we use pain to get so-called “information.” (To stay current on this issue, see the National Religious Campaign Against Torture.)

    Facebook Users Protest Online Tracking

    0

    By Louise Story and Brad Stone
    The New York Times

    Faced with its second mass protest by members in its short life span, Facebook, the enormously popular social networking Web site, is reining in some aspects of a controversial new advertising program.

        Within the last 10 days, more than 50,000 Facebook members have signed a petition objecting to the new program, which sends messages to users’ friends about what they are buying on Web sites like Travelocity.com, TheKnot.com and Fandango. The members want to be able to opt out of the program completely with one click, but Facebook won’t let them.

        Late yesterday the company made an important change, saying that it would not send messages about users’ Internet activities without getting explicit approval each time.

        MoveOn.org Civic Action, the political group that set up the online petition, said the move was a positive one.

        “Before, if you ignored their warning, they assumed they had your permission” to share information, said Adam Green, a spokesman for the group. “If Facebook were to implement a policy whereby no private purchases on other Web sites were displayed publicly on Facebook without a user’s explicit permission, that would be a step in the right direction.”

        Facebook, which is run by Mark Zuckerberg, 23, who created it while an undergraduate at Harvard, has built a highly successful service that is free to its more than 50 million active members. But now the company is trying to figure out how to translate this popularity into profit. Like so many Internet ventures, it is counting heavily on advertising revenue.

        The system Facebook introduced this month, called Beacon, is viewed as an important test of online tracking, a popular advertising tactic that usually takes place behind the scenes, where consumers do not notice it. Companies like Google, AOL and Microsoft routinely track where people are going online and send them ads based on the sites they have visited and the searches they have conducted.

        But Facebook is taking a far more transparent and personal approach, sending news alerts to users’ friends about the goods and services they buy and view online.

        Charlene Li, an analyst at Forrester Research, said she was surprised to find that her purchase of a table on Overstock.com was added to her News Feed, a Facebook feature that broadcasts users’ activities to their friends on the site. She says she did not see an opt-out box.

        “Beacon crosses the line to being Big Brother,” she said, “It’s a very, very thin line.”

        Facebook executives say the people who are complaining are a marginal minority. With time, Facebook says, users will accept Beacon, which Facebook views as an extension of the type of book and movie recommendations that members routinely volunteer on their profile pages. The Beacon notices are “based on getting into the conversations that are already happening between people,” Mr. Zuckerberg said when he introduced Beacon in New York on Nov. 6.

        “Whenever we innovate and create great new experiences and new features, if they are not well understood at the outset, one thing we need to do is give people an opportunity to interact with them,” said Chamath Palihapitiya, a vice president at Facebook. “After a while, they fall in love with them.”

        Mr. Palihapitiya was referring to Facebook’s controversial introduction of the News Feed feature last year. More than 700,000 people protested that feature, and Mr. Zuckerberg publicly apologized for aspects of it. However, Facebook did not remove the feature, and eventually users came to like it, Mr. Palihapitiya said. He said Facebook would not add a universal opt-out to Beacon, as many members have requested.

        MoveOn.org started the anti-Beacon petition on Nov. 20, and as of last night more than 50,000 Facebook users had signed it. Other groups fighting Beacon have about 10,000 members in total. Facebook, they say, should not be following them around the Web, especially without their permission.

        The complaints may seem paradoxical, given that the so-called Facebook generation is known for its willingness to divulge personal details on the Internet. But even some high school and college-age users of the site, who freely write about their love lives and drunken escapades, are protesting.

        “We know we don’t have a right to privacy, but there still should be a certain morality here, a certain level of what is private in our lives,” said Tricia Bushnell, a 25-year-old in Los Angeles, who has used Facebook since her college days at Bucknell. “Just because I belong to Facebook, do I now have to be careful about everything else I do on the Internet?”

        Two privacy groups said this week that they were preparing to file privacy complaints about the system with the Federal Trade Commission. Among online merchants, Overstock.com has decided to stop running Facebook’s Beacon program on its site until it becomes an opt-in program. And as the MoveOn.org campaign has grown over the past week, some ad executives have poked fun at Facebook users.

        “Isn’t this community getting a little hypocritical?” said Chad Stoller, director of emerging platforms at Organic, a digital advertising agency. “Now, all of a sudden, they don’t want to share something?”

        Facebook users each get a home page where they can volunteer information like their age, hometown, college and religion. People can post photos and write messages on their pages and on their friends’ pages.

        Under Beacon, when Facebook members purchase movie tickets on Fandango.com, for example, Facebook sends a notice about what movie they are seeing in the News Feed on all of their friends’ pages. If a user saves a recipe on Epicurious.com or rates travel venues on NYTimes.com, friends are also notified. There is an opt-out box that appears for a few seconds, but users complain that it is hard to find. Mr. Palihapitiya said Facebook is making the boxes larger and holding them on the Web pages longer.

        Mr. Green of MoveOn.org said that his group would be tracking the effects of the latest changes before deciding if it would still push for a universal opt-out.

        The whole purpose of Beacon is to allow advertisers to run ads next to these purchase messages. A message about someone’s purchase on Travelocity might run alongside an airline or hotel ad, for example. Mr. Zuckerberg has heralded the new ads as being like a “recommendation from a trusted friend.”

        But Facebook users say they do not want to endorse products.

        “Just because I use a Web site, doesn’t mean I want to tell my friends about it,” said Annie Kadala, a 23-year old student at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill. “Maybe I used that Web site because it was cheaper.”

        Ms. Kadala found out about Beacon on Thanksgiving day when her News Feed told her that her sister had purchased the Harry Potter “Scene It?” game.

        “I said, ‘Susan, did you buy me this game for Christmas?'” Ms. Kadala recalled. “I don’t want to know what people are getting me for Christmas.”

    Feeling Betrayed, Facebook Users Force Site to Honor Their Privacy
        By Ellen Nakashima
        The Washington Post

        Friday 30 November 2007

        Sean Lane’s purchase was supposed to be a surprise for his wife. Then it appeared as a news headline – “Sean Lane bought 14k White Gold 1/5 ct Diamond Eternity Flower Ring from overstock.com” – last week on the social networking Web site Facebook.

        Without Lane’s knowledge, the headline was visible to everyone in his online network, including 500 classmates from Columbia University and 220 other friends, co-workers and acquaintances.

        And his wife.

        The wraps came off his Christmas gift thanks to a new advertising feature called Beacon, which shares news of Facebook members’ online purchases with their friends. The idea, according to the company, is to allow merchants to effectively turn millions of Facebook users into a “word-of-mouth promotion” service.

        Lane called it “Christmas ruined,” and more than 50,000 other users signed a petition in recent days calling on Facebook to stop broadcasting people’s transactions without their consent.

        Last night, Facebook backed down and announced that the Beacon feature would no longer be active for any transaction unless users click “ok.” Beacon is a core element of Facebook’s attempt to parlay the personal and behavioral information it collects about its members into a more sophisticated advertising business, an effort to turn a user’s preferences into an endorsement with commercial value.

        The merging of social networking and online advertising combines two of the most powerful forces on the Internet today, and privacy advocates say it raises issues about the way personal data are disclosed for marketing purposes.

        “Sites like Facebook are revolutionizing how we communicate with each other and organize around issues together in a 21st century democracy,” said Adam Green, a spokesman for MoveOn.org, a liberal activist group that has launched the petition drive to pressure Facebook to stop broadcasting members’ purchases and using their names as endorsements without explicit permission. “The question is: Will corporate advertisers get to write the rules of the Internet or will these new social networks protect our basic rights, like privacy?”

        The site, which was started in a Harvard dorm room, has become a Silicon Valley powerhouse, recently valued at $15 billion. It allows its users to share messages, photos and updates on their lives.

        Facebook launched Beacon as part of a wider social advertising campaign Nov. 6, with 44 announced partners, including Overstock, Travelocity, the auction site eBay, the movie ticket site Fandango, Blockbuster and the shoe site Zappos. The Beacon feature, free to advertisers, is not restricted to commerce. A person’s high score on an online game might also be posted for friends to see.

        Facebook puts a string of code called a cookie on a user’s computer, which tracks the user on Beacon partner sites. In the version that Facebook launched, a person logged into Facebook who bought, say, a movie ticket, was alerted that the Web site was sending a “story” to his profile and had a chance to opt out – both at the merchant’s site and on his own page, Facebook says.

        But privacy advocates criticized the opt-out feature – a pop-up box – because it disappeared after a few seconds and said Facebook should allow users to turn off Beacon and include an “opt in” feature for those who wish to receive the service. Last night, Facebook apparently added an “opt in” feature for each transaction, which Green called “a huge step in the right direction,” but still did not include a way to shut off the service permanently.

        Beacon is a key part of what Facebook founder and chief executive Mark Zuckerberg, 23, called “a completely new way of advertising online.” Sometimes, ads accompany the news feeds. The ads could contain a person’s photo.

        Yesterday Facebook issued an apology on MoveOn’s Facebook page: “We’re sorry if we spoiled some of your holiday gift-giving plans.”

        In a news release last night, Facebook said “we appreciate feedback from all Facebook users and made some changes to Beacon in the past day. Users now have more control over stories that get published.”

        Marketers can target paid social ads on Facebook according to criteria such as age, gender, political views and taste in movies, Zuckerberg told media and ad executives at the launch, according to Online Media Daily.

        “What’s unique about Facebook is it’s really turning over personal profile data to advertisers,” said Jeff Chester, executive director of the Center for Digital Democracy, a privacy advocacy group. “In essence, it’s telling advertisers, we know exactly who your targets are, what their favorite entertainment is, the books they read, the kinds of social networks they have, what their political leanings are.”

        Chester’s group, along with the U.S. Public Interest Research Group, has asked the Federal Trade Commission to investigate whether Facebook and MySpace, a rival social networking site that is also targeting members for ads, are using deceptive practices to violate people’s privacy.

        MoveOn has created a blog on its Facebook page for people to post comments. The wall contained more than 800 as of yesterday.

        They include Tasha Valdez from Michigan, who wrote: “Oh my gosh, my cousin’s entire Christmas shopping list this week was displayed on the [Facebook News] feed. That’s so messed up. This has gotta stop!”

        Beacon’s risks go beyond ruining someone’s Christmas, said Mike Rogers, editor and publisher of a gay-oriented Web site, PageOneQ. “We teach young people to be very careful about what they post and all of a sudden comes along an automated system like this. What happens if a kid is on a football team and he buys a ticket to ‘Brokeback Mountain’ [a gay-themed film]?” he said, alluding to the possibility that the youth could be outed and harassed as a result.

        For Lane, spoiling his wife’s surprise was bad enough.

        Within two hours after he bought the ring on Overstock.com, he received an instant message from his wife, Shannon: Who is this ring for?

        What ring, he messaged back, from his laptop at work in Waltham, Mass.

        She said that Facebook had just put an item on his page saying he bought a ring. It included a link to Overstock, which noted that the 51 percent discount on the ring.

        Lane, 28, a technical project manager at an online printing company, was crestfallen. He had gone to lengths to keep the ring a secret, even telling Shannon he was not going to give her jewelry this year.

        Lane complained to Overstock. Company spokesman Judd Bagley said this week that on Nov. 21, Overstock abandoned its Beacon feature until Facebook changes its practice so that users must volunteer if they want to participate.

        “I was really disappointed because for me the whole fun of Christmas is the surprise,” said Shannon Lane, 28, who married Sean a year ago in September. “I never want to know what I’m getting.”

        ———

        Staff writer Ylan Mui contributed to this report.

    Habib ‘told not to talk about Guantanamo torture’

    0

    AAP

    FORMER Guantanamo Bay detainee Mamdouh Habib says he did not reveal details of his torture in early interviews with media and others because he was told not to by his doctors and lawyers.

    Mr Habib was giving evidence today in second-stage defamation proceedings against Nationwide News, over a February 2005 column in Sydney’s The Daily Telegraph.

    A jury has found the article defamed Mr Habib by implying he falsely made claims about torture.

    The former terror suspect told the NSW Supreme Court that in interviews in 2005 with human rights group Amnesty International and the 60 Minutes television program, he did not talk about being given electric shocks and being drugged on legal and medical advice.

    In one interview he denied being tortured before being taken to Guantanamo Bay, saying there was “just kicking”, and in the other he stated that he had been beaten only once for refusing to sign a document.

    “I explained I be kicking (sic), no blanket, and told (Amnesty) I have a lot of stuff I can’t talk about until my court case,” Mr Habib said.

    “I have been told by my psychological doctor not (to) go through the torture because I was very stressed.”

    Mr Habib said his memory of what happened had come back slowly because of the trauma and the drugs he had been given, but he insisted his current account was accurate.

    “Now I have no reason not to give evidence about tortures,” he said.

    Nationwide News barrister Alec Leopold accused Mr Habib of trying to erect a “smokescreen” around what actually happened.

    “(Mr Habib’s evidence this week) was a complete revision of history,” Mr Leopold said. “I want to suggest to you that you made up your evidence… on Wednesday.

    “The real position was that stated approximately two years ago to (Amnesty).”

    Mr Habib replied: “No.”

    Mr Leopold grilled Mr Habib on his recollections of Australian consular official Alastair Adams during his interrogations.

    He also played a tape of Mr Habib’s first interview with Australian officials at Guantanamo Bay in May 2002, saying he seemed then to be “articulate, in terrific spirits and very good condition”.

    The voice on the tape is heard to say: “I don’t fight, I don’t kill nobody, I don’t harm nobody.

    “Jihad does not mean carrying a gun and killing people for no reason.”

    The former Guantanamo inmate said a number of his supposed answers in the interview were incorrect and refused to confirm that the person speaking on the tape was him.

    “I believe I met with people from Australia (in Cuba), but I never have any interview with them,” he said.

    ASIO officers were to give evidence this afternoon about their interviews with Mr Habib in Guantanamo, Egypt and Pakistan.

    We are all put at risk by identity scheme

    1

    The suggestion by James Hall that Project Stork (Letters, November 29) has nothing to do with the national identity scheme is risible. The roadmap for the project was presented on June 13 at this year’s European e-identity conference in Paris. Frank Leyman, manager for international relations at FEDICT (the Belgian public service responsible for e-government), described the project thus: “Implementation of an EU-wide interoperable system for recognition of electronic identification and authentication that will enable businesses, citizens and government employees to use their national electronic identities in any member state.”

    Mr Leyman’s presentation placed identification at the heart of the project and explained how Belgian ID cards would link into the system. Although final project details were still to be formalised, the schedule showed the UK government taking responsibility for Work Package 4: identification, digital signatures, and association and provision of personal data. To suggest this is unrelated to the national identity scheme is beyond belief. Meanwhile, Mr Hall states that the national identity register will hold only “core identity information”. His notion of what constitutes core data will not be shared by most readers.

    Few people would consider details of visits to clinics or applications for credit to be core identity data. Yet these will be recorded on the ID database. The Identity Cards Act specifies approximately 50 categories of information to be registered.

    Fraudsters will find the database immeasurably more useful than child benefit records: it will contain everything the discerning conman could need to practise identity fraud. The biometric data will prove priceless for criminals. Unlike passwords, fingerprints cannot be changed after hackers gain access.

    The register will store full names and details of all places of residence – a matter of concern to people who are trying not to be found by those who would do them harm, such as men and women fleeing domestic abuse. The government has demonstrated time and again that it cannot be trusted to look after our personal data. A degree of transparency and honesty from ministers and officials seeking to seize more data still would not go amiss.

    Geraint Bevan, NO2ID Scotland, 3e Grovepark Gardens, Glasgow.

    Armageddon: February 2008‏

    0

    By J A Blacker, Science Correspondent
    RINF Alternative News

    What level of lies, deceit , treason and down right inhuman behaviour do the United States of America & its NEOCONS elite practice?

    Well, this is just a sanitized taste of the level of utter bile these so called allies exhibit, with friends like these who needs brutal & murderous enemies?

    These Animals, PEAR & Chaney, along with the rest of his buddy NEOCON pirates, are directly, personally, responsible for the deaths of over 1 million people, men women & children, including our troops. The Neocons have mutilated many more & want much more blood – your blood!

    This is the face of SATAN folks, the evil which the elite operate & are directing against ALL, included in that bag of filth are the TREASONOUS British establishment including and particularly the so called Monarchy. Depleted Uranium is supplied from the Queens companies & will kill millions more in years
     to come including UK citizens.

    Watch & learn, for you shall be next if you do not WAKE UP!!!

    February 2008 is earmarked fro the beginning of Armageddon folks, that is if we do not inform and alert the world Public!

    Firstly, what did the NEOCONS know prior to gulf war 2 yet ignored:

    Indeed the US deaths from the first gulf war was over 100,000 due to the Gulf War Syndrome, ie, depleted Uranium poisoning & other toxic effects of nerve agents & injections.

    Now see how the Vultures claim no responsibility:

    http://www.truthnews.us/?p=954

    Look, don’t take our word for any of this – do your own research, but do it fast.

    VIDEO: Mayor “Crook and Bully” Giuliani Pre-9/11

    0

    New Yorkers know this Rudy Giuliani. He was a bully, he regularly called people names, he was divisive, thin skinned, and arrogant. A Giuliani presidency would be packed with his ring kissing cronies and neocons eager to exploit his aggressiveness in the Middle East. Be very, very careful.

    Giuliani & the 9/11 Mastermind

    0

    Rudy Giuliani Does Business With Sheik Who Helped 9/11 Mastermind Elude FBI

    Three weeks after 9/11, when the roar of fighter jets still haunted the city’s skyline, the emir of gas-rich Qatar, Sheikh Hamad bin Khalifah al-Thani, toured Ground Zero. Although a member of the emir’s own royal family had harbored the man who would later be identified as the mastermind of the attack–a man named Khalid Sheikh Muhammad, often referred to in intelligence circles by his initials, KSM–al-Thani rushed to New York in its aftermath, offering to make a $3 million donation, principally to the families of its victims. Rudy Giuliani, apparently unaware of what the FBI and CIA had long known about Qatari links to Al Qaeda, appeared on CNN with al-Thani that night and vouched for the emir when Larry King asked the mayor: “You are a friend of his, are you not?”

    Abdallah al-Thani remains a named defendant in the 9/11 lawsuits that are still proceeding in Manhattan federal court, but his Washington lawyers declined to address the charges that he shielded KSM, insisting only that he never “supported” any “terrorist acts.” Asked if Abdallah al-Thani ever supported any terrorists rather than their acts, his lawyer David Nachman declined to comment further. The Congressional Research Service report summarized the evidence against him: “According to the 9/11 Commission Report and former U.S. government officials, royal family member and current Qatari Interior Minister, Sheikh Abdullah (Abdallah) bin Khalid Al Thani, provided safe harbor and assistance to Al Qaeda leaders during the 1990s,” including KSM. While numerous accounts have named Abdallah as the KSM tipster, the report simply says that “a high ranking member of the Qatari government” is believed to have “alerted” KSM “to the impending raid.”

    In other words, as incredible as it might seem, Rudy Giuliani–whose presidential candidacy is steeped in 9/11 iconography–has been doing business with a government agency run by the very man who made the attacks on 9/11 possible.

    Source

    China tells Bush to Sling his Hook

    0

    AP

    Chinese Foreign Minister Yang Jiechi told President George W. Bush on Wednesday that Beijing’s refusal to let a U.S. Navy aircraft carrier into Hong Kong was a “misunderstanding,” the White House said.

    The Defence Department said it had issued a formal complaint to China and that Beijing still had not provided sufficient explanation for blocking the USS Kitty Hawk aircraft carrier, and eight ships travelling with it, entry to Hong Kong for a long-planned Thanksgiving holiday visit.

    Bush brought up the issue with China’s foreign minister in a meeting at the White House.

    “The president raised the issue about the recent aborted port call by the USS Kitty Hawk. Foreign Minister Yang assured the president that it was a misunderstanding,” White House spokeswoman Dana Perino said.

    China also denied access last week to two smaller U.S. Navy ships, the minesweepers USS Guardian and USS Patriot, seeking refuge from an approaching storm. Top U.S. Navy officers said that decision was more troublesome than the move to block the Kitty Hawk because the sailors needed safe harbour.

    Pentagon spokesman Geoff Morrell said the complaint to China was related to both incidents.

    “It is baffling,” he said. “It’s regrettable and we have not to date received sufficient explanation as to why it took place.”

    Beijing’s action came as a surprise just weeks after a visit to China by U.S. Defence Secretary Robert Gates that has been described by U.S. officials as positive.

    Relations between China and the United States have improved since 2001, when the countries’ militaries broke contact following a collision between a Chinese fighter jet and U.S. spy plane. 

    But many differences remain between Beijing and Washington over issues such as China’s military build-up and U.S. weapon sales to Taiwan.

    There has been speculation that China’s move to block the ships was related to irritation over U.S. plans to sell Taiwan an upgrade to its missile system and a meeting between Bush and exiled Tibetan spiritual leader the Dalai Lama.

    Bush and Yang also discussed North Korea, Iran and other bilateral issues in their meeting, Perino said.

    (Reporting by Tabassum Zakaria and Kristin Roberts; Editing by Cynthia Osterman)

    Judge: Bank debt collectors behaved like robbers

    2

    When Tapan Bose fell behind on his car loan repayments to the largest commercial bank in India he could not have known that it would leave his friend’s son requiring 12 stitches in his battered skull.

    Mr Bose escaped a vicious beating by a gang of the country’s notorious debt collectors because he was inside a club when they came calling for 34,000 rupees (£400) owed to ICICI Bank. Instead, it was 21-year-old Vinod Kumar who was sitting in Mr Bose’s car, waiting for his father and his friend to emerge. Three men dragged him out and beat him with iron rods before seizing the car. He was in hospital for a fortnight with severe head and back injuries.

    This week a Delhi judge condemned the savage attack carried out in the name of ICICI and fined the bank 550,000 rupees in a landmark case that comes as India’s banking regulator tries to reform the nascent debt-collection industry. The behaviour of rogue agents is of increasing concern in India, where the credit culture is new and interest rates are rising.

    “No civilised society governed by the rule of law can brook such kind of conduct,” Justice J. D. Kapoor, the President of the Consumer Commission, said. Handing down the biggest fine yet in a consumer case, he said that the bank had allowed the agents to behave like robbers.

    This is the first time that an Indian bank has been held accountable for the actions of third-party agents appointed to collect bad debts. In its defence, ICICI argued that it had not sanctioned any criminal conduct. It has since sacked the collection manager of the branch who appointed the agents and two men have been arrested by police. The bank was ordered to pay Mr Bose, a 42-year-old builder, 5,000 rupees’ compensation, write off the loan and deposit 50,000 rupees into a consumer welfare fund for court costs. ICICI said that it would abide by the judgment.

    The economic boom in India has led to a surge in earnings and consumer aspirations. Commercial lenders have been quick to offer easy finance for homes, cars and other big purchases previously out of reach for most Indians. Banks have been accused of employing aggressive tactics, such as persistent cold calling, to win new business with little regard to a potential customer’s credit risk.

    “In order to make more profits, these banks attract people who cannot afford a two-wheeler and encourage them to buy a four-wheeler,” Prashant Mehendiratta, Mr Bose’s lawyer, told The Times. “This is OK for most salaried employees but the cash income of the lower middle classes fluctuates. They don’t understand that it is easy to get a card but harder to pay it off.”

    With the number of defaulters on the rise, Indian banks have come under pressure to collect more loans to protect their credit ratings. This has led to the outsourcing of the task to agents, who can employ thuggish tactics to earn their commission.

    In some cases, the intimidation has had tragic consequences. Prakash Sarvankar, a father of three, hanged himself in Bombay two months ago because he was unable to repay a 50,000-rupee ICICI loan. In his suicide note he blamed the agents for threatening him and his family. The bank eventually agreed to pay 15,000 rupees compensation.

    Borrowing ideas

    – The Indian loan market has grown 11-fold in the past five years, partly because of aggressive marketing

    – HSBC India advertises its personal loans for “when expenses arise, like your daughter’s marriage, furnishing your home or a family holiday”

    – The bank claims that it is “just like borrowing money from a friend”

    Sources: HSBC, agencies

    Banks scourged by falling dollar

    0

    The supply of dollars is now so profuse that it is always higher than the banks’ purchasing capacity. Banks now buy dollars in dribs and drabs, as they do not have enough VND.

    The volume of dollars flowing into Eximbank these days is 30% higher than the same period last year. In the first 10 months of the year, some US$2bil went in. In the last few days, the bank has purchased US$5-7mil every day.

    Currently, Vietcombank, the biggest foreign currency trader in Vietnam, always quotes the dollar purchase price equal to the sale price, at VND16,048/USUS$1 (as of November 27), reflecting the bank’s desire to bring as few dollars as possible.

    An official from Vietincombank said that the supply of dollars is very profuse but the bank is not able to purchase dollars in large quantities, as the bank does not enough VND.

    The official said that banks are now incurring losses due to the devaluation of the dollar. However, banks still have to buy dollars at prices higher than the levels they want since they must adhere to the floor level set by the State Bank of Vietnam.

    In principle, when there is an excess of foreign currency supply, the central bank would buy, in order to prevent devaluation which harms exports. However, the central bank has yet to interfere in the market. There are no signs that the central bank will buy up dollars from commercial banks.

    People are now exchanging the dollar for VND at a tremendous rate to prepare for Tet shopping. Meanwhile, making dollar deposits in foreign banks is not profitable for Vietnamese banks, as the world’s interest rates are reducing due to the FED’s rate cuts.

    The supply and demand imbalance of the dollar has become more serious as commercial banks cannot find borrowers. Import-export companies, the biggest clients, rarely borrow dollars at the end of the year; they need VND to pay local companies.

    The Vietincombank official said that the demand for VND loans is increasing, but the bank is trying to limit outstanding VND loans. Meanwhile, the bank is ready to satisfy any and all dollar loan demands.

    Ho Huu Hanh, Director of the HCM City Branch of the State Bank of Vietnam, acknowledged that dollars are now in excess. Nguyen Van Hung, Deputy Director of the Hanoi Branch of the State Bank, also said that banks are facing dollar abundance. However, he said that Hanoi’s banks would not bear insurmountable pressure as Hanoi is the banking centre.

    Mr Hung said that there would be no significant changes to the VND/USUS$ exchange rate towards year end. Banks top priority now is to help curb inflation, he said.

    Source: VnExpress

    VIDEO: How to make a candidate disappear

    0

    The fix was in

    US elections are rigged long before the voting results are falsified.

    The news media helps the process along by making (or trying to make) legitimate candidates disappear.

    In the 2008 campaign for president, the candidate the news media is trying to trivialize and marginalize Ron Paul.

    In 1992, the “disappeared” candidate was Democrat Larry Agran.

    The good news is that the Internet has made this kind of chicanery, much more difficult.

    9/11 Truth: Science Behind the Theory

    0

    Stephen Demetriou

    There has been peer-reviewed scientific research in the past couple of years that has provided significant support to the arguments of the 911 Truth Movement. First though, as there is a vocal minority[1] that resorts to the misleading charge that the movement’s cause is in pursuit of a far-fetched conspiracy, and it’s membership,[2] (and here,[3]) is comprised of nothing but conspiracy theorists, consider what a conspiracy theory actually is. When two or more individuals sit down and contrive to plot out some action, you have what is properly called a conspiracy. The investigators who set about to discover the plot and with the available evidence explain it, are indeed conspiracy theorists formulating a conspiracy theory. This is true in detective work; it is true in prosecutorial work.

    The official hypothesis of the events of 9/11, that 19 amateur pilots penetrated the most heavily surveiled and fortified real estate on the planet, with no interference for a period of up to 90 minutes, and then crashed those planes into three separate buildings is itself a conspiracy theory. The official telling of the tale, as by the 9/11 Commission, the NIST and FEMA studies, and then popularly supported by a PBS NOVA episode, a History Channel documentary, and the Popular Mechanic’s report is a well-distributed, albeit faulty, explanation of a terrorist conspiracy and its effects, by the official conspiracy theorists and their supporters. In that telling, after the planes crashed, fire weakened steel members of the Twin Towers leading to the total disintegration of two 110-story steel framed buildings into seven-floor piles of rubble. This is the basic structure of the official conspiracy theory.

    The 911 Truth Movement is presenting an alternative conspiracy theory, which we believe makes better use of evidence held in common with other observers and researchers but ignored in the official accounts:

    Flowing, molten steel in the basements of the three buildings, for at least 100 days after the event…

    Explosives residue signatures in micro-spheres of iron-rich particles from millimeter size down to micron size found in multiple dust samples from around the site…

    The lack of a sufficient fuel source to thermodynamically explain the temperatures necessary to form molten iron…

    Sulfidation of steel columns, as is indicative of the explosive residues that are found in fire investigations[4] where explosives are suspected.

    The official investigations have not examined all of these observed phenomena and have offered no explanation to how and why they are found. Their conclusions do not include this evidence, and in my opinion forces their conspiracy theory to be thought of as incomplete. The official theory leaves out of its explanation significant observed phenomena, as if they simply didn’t happen. In the cases where the phenomena are mentioned, it is unexplained, or said to require more investigation, with which we agree. The truth movement suggests that the use of this observable evidence leads in a very natural way to consider explosives in the destruction of the towers, and more investigation is needed with this in mind.

    Scientific analysis is being done on samples of World Trade Center steel and dust recovered from the site. Through scanning electron microscopy (SEM) and x-ray energy dispersive spectroscopy (X-EDS) samples of WTC steel and iron-rich dust samples collected from the surrounding destruction zone show some surprising results.

    The presence of spherules of iron in multiple dust samples is indicative of molten iron widely dispersed. This is important because the official NIST investigators acknowledged there is no evidence to support that the steel columns in any way melted. They said in a 2006 Factsheet: “In no instance did NIST report that steel in the WTC towers melted due to the fires. The melting point of steel is about 1,500 degrees Celsius (2,800 degrees Fahrenheit). Normal building fires and hydrocarbon (e.g., jet fuel) fires generate temperatures up to about 1,100 degrees Celsius (2,000 degrees Fahrenheit). NIST reported maximum upper layer air temperatures of about 1,000 degrees Celsius (1,800 degrees Fahrenheit) in the WTC towers (for example, see NCSTAR 1, Figure 6-36).”

    But why are “microspheres” of iron significant? Surface tension naturally determines the spherical shape of a liquid suspended in air. Given that spherical-shaped iron particles are found in the dust, and molten iron is subject to surface tension, it is easy to suggest that the spheres were once in a molten form suspended in air. No other phenomenon can plausibly explain that particular shape in this circumstance. An analysis[5] by the United States Geological Service (USGS) found iron-rich spheres in dust produced during the destruction of the towers. See also this.[6]

    Analysis of the spheres using X-EDS methods, the same methods used by materials scientists[7] in their analysis in arson investigations, found iron-aluminum-sulfur combinations in the spheres, which is consistent with the use of sulfur-enhanced thermite, or thermate. Steven Jones, a PhD physicist formerly of Brigham Young University, says of the composition:[8] “Given the mix of trace metals present in anomalously high concentrations in the WTC dust such as zinc, copper and manganese and barium, the formation of iron-aluminum-rich spherules, I have argued that significant aluminothermic reactions occurred, with likely ingredients to include powders of aluminum, iron oxide, copper oxide, zinc nitrate, sulfur, and potassium permanganate. We are learning more by studying the iron-rich spheres found in the WTC dust.”

               Another supportive finding for the truth movement’s suggestion explosives were used in the destruction of the buildings is the observation of flowing molten steel in the basements of WTC 1, 2, and 7. (WTC 7 is a special[9] case, having dropped straight down into its own footprint at near free fall speed, as did the others, after not being hit by a plane, and suffering considerably less damage to its structure than its neighbors WTC 4[10] and 5. The hulking steel frames of these buildings survived without collapse, and required demolition even after sustaining heavy damage and intense, engulfing fires.) Many[11] people involved saw the flowing steel in the basements while in the recovery effort and the clean up. It persisted for at least 100 days. The heat signature was recorded by satellite-based thermography[12], (and here[13]). What sort of temperatures are needed to create molten steel, and how would such a thing happen in not one, but three, generalized locations?

               As mentioned above, iron melts at about 1500C. Not only does iron require a large heat source to become molten, the source must be sufficiently hot, for a long enough period, to overcome the thermal conductive properties of iron. Iron conducts heat energy quite well, efficiently drawing heat away from the area being heated to cooler parts. An energy source must continue to add energy to the metal as the heat is conducted away from the concentration of heat for the iron to melt. The amount of heat necessary to melt a quantity of iron to a molten flow must either be hot enough for a protracted and steady heating, or the heat source must be very intense, with excess heat sufficient to easily overcome the iron’s conductive properties and melt the iron.

    This type of energy is neither explained by any of the official investigations, nor supported by the observed event of destruction under the assumption the official explanation is correct. In this line of reasoning, gravity caused the disintegration of the buildings, after fire damaged the supports. It would have to follow that gravity somehow contained the energy[14] to spontaneously generate enough heat to melt iron in three separate collapse events, and under different circumstances in one of those three collapses. Or, if the molten iron is to be explained by residual fires that persisted after the collapses, what would the thermodynamic properties be of the fuel burned in those fires to generate temperatures hot enough to create Dante-esque[15] scenes of flowing, molten metal? Hydrocarbon fires: jet fuel, office materials, carpets, plastics, nylon burn under the most ideal, highly ventilated conditions at about 650C. Air temperatures under blast-ventilation conditions can attain 1100C, but this is difficult to sustain, especially under a smoldering pile of rubble, or in the extremely smoky, sooty, dispersed fires seen before the complete destruction.

    The intensity of the molten pools were such that according to the US Department of Energy’s Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratories, “Approximately three million gallons of water were hosed on site in the fire-fighting efforts, and 1 million gallons fell as rainwater, between 9/11 and 9/21…” and all this water still failed to extinguish the basement fires. This was simply the ten-day window in which they looked. The spraying down of the pile persisted for months.

    This type of energy is not explained by gravity, or by residual hydrocarbon fires, and is unusual in light of the amount of water dumped on the fires. It is, however, plausibly explained by the use of high-energy explosives[16], capable of igniting exothermic reactions[17] in materials in the rubble that are both hot enough to melt iron and are self-sustaining for a period of time. Thermate-like explosives contain their own source of oxygen[18] and cannot be put out with water. The observable, scientific evidence suggests a strong possibility explosives[19] were involved in the destruction of the World Trade Center towers. The 9/11 Truth movement believes the evidence is strong enough to warrant a well-funded, independent, impartial investigation designed to include this hypothesis in its analysis.

    US signs deal for long-term occupation of Iraq

    0

    By Jerry White

    President Bush and the Iraqi Prime Minister Nouri Al-Maliki signed an agreement Monday paving the way for the long-term occupation of the Middle Eastern country and its transformation into a semi-colonial protectorate of the US.

    The “Declaration of Principles for a Long-Term Relationship of Cooperation and Friendship” outlines plans for the establishment of permanent US military bases in Iraq to suppress internal opposition to the US-installed regime and protect US economic and political interests throughout the region. It also provides for preferential treatment for US energy conglomerates and investors to exploit Iraq’s newly opened up oil resources.

    The new agreement–signed during a secret videoconference between Bush and Maliki–without the slightest democratic pretenses in each country–exposes the repeated lies, peddled by the White House ever since the April 2003 invasion, that the US had no intention to set up permanent military bases or carry out an long-term occupation of Iraq.

    The declaration calls for the current United Nations mandate–which has provided a legal fig leaf for the US occupation–to be extended one more year and thereafter to be replaced by a bilateral economic and security pact between the two countries.

    The full details of the pact–including the size of the US occupying force–are to be worked out by July 31, 2008 and are scheduled to take effect in early 2009, i.e., after Bush leaves office. Although the agreement will commit US troops to remain in the country for years, if not decades, the White House insists that it will not rise to the level of a formal treaty, requiring congressional approval.

    Maliki signed the declaration without any serious parliamentary debate. Sunni Arab and Shia politicians immediately denounced it, saying the agreement would lead to “US interference for years to come.” The Association of Muslim Scholars, a Sunni group, said the Iraqi signatories of the declaration would be looked on as “collaborators with the occupier.”

    Under the proposed formula, Iraqi officials told the Associated Press, Iraqi forces will take charge of internal security, and US troops will relocate to bases outside the cities. They foresee at least 50,000 American troops remaining in the country indefinitely. The White House says the bilateral agreement will not contain timetables for the withdrawal of troops.

    White House deputy national security advisor Lieutenant-General Douglas Lute said the declaration signaled that the US “will protect our interests in Iraq, alongside our Iraqi partners, and that we consider Iraq a key strategic partner, able to increasingly contribute to regional stability.”

    US forces will protect the interests of American energy companies once the country’s vast oil wealth–the second largest proven oil reserves in the world–are opened up to international and in particular US investment. This is only possible by intensifying US military repression of the Iraqi people and crushing popular opposition to the US-installed regime and the American occupation.

    At the same time permanent US bases are being set up to project American military power throughout the Middle East and provide US forces increased capabilities to launch attacks against Iran, Syria and other countries.

    Debka-Net-Weekly, a web site associated with Israeli military intelligence, said the US has plans to remove 100,000 troops by the end of 2009, leaving behind 50,000-70,000 in 20 huge land and air bases. “These bases,” the site wrote, “are under construction; they will be secured by broad swathes of space, fortified with weaponry and remote-controlled electronic devices.” US troops will be responsible for protecting Iraq’s borders from “external threats,” Debka reported, adding, “US air strength and special forces in these bases will have rapid deployment capabilities for reaching points outside Iraq at need.”

    The US launched the Iraq war to establish unchallenged domination of the Middle East and fend off the growing inroads into the energy-rich region by its economic rivals, such as China and Russia. The economic advantages of occupying Iraq are spelled out in one of the principles outlined in the new US-Iraqi declaration, which calls for “facilitating and encouraging the flow of foreign investment to Iraq, especially American investments, to contribute to the reconstruction and rebuilding of Iraq.”

    Another declares US support for aiding Iraq’s “transition to a market economy,” which includes opening up the nationalized oil industry to the control of ExxonMobil, Chevron and other US energy conglomerates.

    Earlier this month the Iraqi government, guided by American legal advisors, cancelled a contract originally signed by the Saddam Hussein government in 1997 with the Russian company Lukoil, for the development of the vast oil field in Iraq’s southern desert. The West Qurna fields–with estimated reserves of 11 billion barrels, the equivalent of the worldwide proven oil reserves of ExxonMobil, America’s largest oil company–will now be opened to international, and in particular, US bidders.

    Vladimir Tikhomirov, the chief economist at the Russian bank UralSib, told the New York Times, “From the Russian government perspective, Iraq is seen as occupied and its administration directed by Washington, particularly when it comes to oil. The Russians see the cancellation of the contract in Iraq as part of the US drive to keep control over the major oil fields there.”

    The declaration of principles is loaded with Orwellian language aimed at concealing its nakedly imperialist aims. The US–which launched an illegal war and occupation that have resulted in the virtual destruction of an entire society and the deaths of more than one million Iraqis–declares its commitment to “deter foreign aggression.” All those who oppose the occupation are “terrorists” and “outlaws” who must be defeated and “uprooted” from Iraq.

    The real face of the American military presence was shown this week when US troops fired on vehicles at roadblocks in Baghdad and north of the Iraqi capital, killing at least five people, including three women and a child, in two separate shootings.

    The commitment to a long-term occupation hardly provoked a murmur from the Democratic Party. House Speaker Nancy Pelosi criticized Bush for planning to leave office with a “US army tied down in Iraq and stretched to the breaking point, with no clear exit strategy.”

    While opposing Bush for failing to efficiently wage the war the Democrats defend the same economic interests as the Republicans and have made it clear they will not end the occupation if they take control of the White House in 2009. In fact the military scenario envisaged in the deal signed by Bush corresponds to the bipartisan plans being worked out between the Bush administration and the Democrats for a “post-surge Iraq.”

    Leading Democrats, such as presidential candidates Hillary Clinton and Barack Obama, have argued for the reduction of US forces and their redeployment from the cities to “over-the-horizon” positions where they could strike opponents of the US-backed regime, as well as Iran. Clinton in particular has argued that pulling US troops out of the cities would reduce US casualties, thereby making the long-term occupation of Iraq more politically palatable in the US, while still keeping forces available to defend US economic interests.

    YouTube stops account of anti-torture activist

    0

    YouTube stops account of Egypt anti-torture activist

    Cynthia Johnston

    CAIRO, Nov 27 (Reuters) – The video-sharing Web site YouTube has suspended the account of a prominent Egyptian anti-torture activist who posted videos of what he said was brutal behaviour by some Egyptian policemen, the activist said.

    Wael Abbas said close to 100 images he had sent to YouTube were no longer accessible, including clips depicting purported police brutality, voting irregularities and anti-government demonstrations. YouTube, owned by search engine giant Google Inc <GOOG.O>, did not respond to a written request for comment. A message on Abbas’s YouTube user page, http://youtube.com/user/waelabbas, read: “This account is suspended.”

    “They closed it (the account) and they sent me an e-mail saying that it will be suspended because there were lots of complaints about the content, especially the content of torture,” Abbas told Reuters in a telephone interview. Abbas, who won an international journalism award for his work this year, said that of the images he had posted to YouTube, 12 or 13 depicted violence in Egyptian police stations.

    Abbas was a key player last year in distributing a clip of an Egyptian bus driver, his hands bound, being sodomised with a stick by a police officer — imagery that sparked an uproar in a country where rights groups say torture is commonplace.

    That tape prompted an investigation that led to a rare conviction of two policemen, who were sentenced to three years in prison for torture. Egypt says it opposes torture and prosecutes police against whom it has evidence of misconduct.

    YOUTUBE RULES

    YouTube regulations state that “graphic or gratuitous violence” is not allowed and warn users not to post such videos. Repeat violators of YouTube guidelines may have their accounts terminated, according to rules posted on the site.

    Rights activists said by shutting down Abbas’s account, YouTube was closing a significant portal for information on human rights abuses in Egypt just as Cairo was escalating a crackdown on opposition and independent journalists.

    The Internet has emerged in Egypt as a major forum for critics of the Egyptian government.

    “The goal is not showing the violence, it is showing police brutality. If his goal was just to focus on violence without any goal, that is a problem. But Wael is showing police brutality in Egypt,” said Gamal Eid, head of the Arabic Network for Human Rights Information.

    This year, for the first time, an Egyptian court convicted and jailed a blogger over his Internet writings.

    A string of court rulings since September has seen at least 12 Egyptian journalists ordered jailed on charges from defaming President Hosni Mubarak to misquoting the minister of justice.

    Elijah Zarwan, a prominent blogger and activist in Egypt, said he thought it was unlikely that YouTube had come under official Egyptian pressure, and was more likely reacting to the graphic nature of the videos.

    “I suspect they are doing it not under pressure from the Egyptian government but rather because it made American viewers squeamish,” he said. “But to shut them down because some people might find the truth disturbing is unconscionable.” (Writing by Cynthia Johnston)

    Military Recruiting Vans Draw Fire

    0

    Pat Elder

    A ninth grader in a suburban Washington DC classroom is delighted to be excused from Algebra class to spend a half hour shooting a life-like 9 MM pistol and lobbing explosive ordinance from an M1A2 Abrams tank simulator. At the same time 3,000 miles away in La Habra, California, a 15 year-old girl is released from English class to squeeze off rounds from a very real looking M-16 rifle. The kids thoroughly enjoy the experience, especially the part about getting out of class.

    The two students have experienced the Army’s Adventure Van, a 60-foot, 30-ton 18-wheeler with several interactive exhibits that bring an adrenaline rush and glorify weaponry and combat. The Army’s 19 vans frequent various community events and two thousand schools a year, generating more than 63,000 recruiter leads. In addition to the Adventure Van, the Army has three other 18-wheelers for recruiting purposes. The Aviation Recruiting Van contains an AH 64 Helicopter flight simulator and an interactive air warrior and weapons display.

    The American Soldier Adventure Van has an interactive air/land warrior display and a future warrior display. The Army Marksmanship Trainer has an interactive rifle range.

    In addition to the fleet of 18-wheelers, the Army has four RockWalls, the popular rock climbing wall for youth. The Army also brings machine gun toting humvees, tanks and other military vehicles on high school campuses to enhance their recruiting efforts. Both the Army and Air Force have their own recruiting motorcycles.

    The interactive theatrical weapons simulators provide a mesmerizing experience for many teens, captivated by the awesome accuracy and power of the Army’s killing machines. The banter between adolescent and Army recruiter is empowering for the Maryland teenager as he holds an absolutely frightening replica of the cold, metallic 8.5 pound M-16-A-2. “This is awesome!” The recruiter explains, “The weapon is a 5.56 mm caliber, air-cooled, gas-operated, magazine-fed rifle, with a rotating bolt. It is constructed of steel, aluminum and composite plastics.”

    Firing the simulator produces a minor kick to the weapon and a small red dot is projected on a bull’s eye target about 20 feet away. The shooter is accurate from left to right on the target, but he’s hitting it a few inches below bull’s eye. His recruiter explains that soldiers shooting the M-16-A-2 must aim high in order to place shots on the desired target, especially at close range. “Cool!” is the reply.

    Despite protests by parents and civic groups across the country, the Army defends its right to enter high school campuses with their high-tech mobile cinemas. Kelly Rowe, public affairs officer for the Baltimore Recruiting Battalion, compared the Army Adventure Van to efforts by colleges to recruit students. “I don’t think it’s any different from an athlete who gets 10 letters saying, ‘Come play for us,’ ” Rowe said.

    Of course, these military vehicles go beyond the access required by Section 9528 of the No Child Left Behind Act, which states that military recruiters are to have the same access as college and career recruiters.

    The Air Force and the Navy also have fleets of trucks and vans that visit high schools. The Air Force has a Raptor Trailer, with a miniature replica of the Air Force’s newest fighter aircraft and two video game stations that put children behind the joystick piloting an F-22 fighter that’s coming to the aid of a friendly F-4 under attack by hostile MiG-29s. Five Navy Exhibit Centers include a “Nuclear Power Van,” and an “America’s Sea Power Van.”

    Some school districts, like the Los Angeles Unified School District and the Montgomery County, Maryland Public Schools have policies that forbid military vehicles on public school campuses.

    If you see a military vehicle at your high school, let your local school officials know of your concerns. These vehicles don’t belong in our schools.

    Pat Elder is a member of the Coordinating Committee of the National Network Opposing the Militarization of Youth

    Bush administration forced to turn over spying docs

    0

    Bush administration forced to turn over spying documents by Friday

    Declan McCullagh

    A federal judge has ordered the Bush administration to divulge documents related to immunizing telecommunications companies from lawsuits, saying they illegally opened their networks to the National Security Agency.

    U.S. District Judge Susan Illston in San Francisco gave the Office of the Director of National Intelligence until November 30 (Friday) to turn over documents relating to conversations it had with Congress and telecommunications carriers about how to rewrite wiretapping laws.

    The Electronic Frontier Foundation had filed this case to seek faster processing of a Freedom of Information Act request it filed, which could help buttress its ongoing lawsuit against AT&T. There are approximately 250 pages of unclassified material and 65 pages of classified material, which would be redacted, that the administration has identified but said could not be turned over until December 31.

    Note that Illston’s order doesn’t deal with the NSA’s wiretapping program itself (how it works, what companies are involved, whether there really is a secret room at AT&T’s 611 Folsom Street location). Instead the documents relate only to conversations and communications about retroactive immunity for companies like AT&T that are accused of violating the law.

    Note also that if AT&T and other telecommunications companies followed the law, no retroactive immunity is necessary. Because AT&T and the Bush administration are supporting such a legal shield, you can draw your own conclusions about what’s really going on.

    The Friday deadline means that the documents will likely be available in time to influence congressional debate over amending the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act. Some FISA amendments expire in February 2008, which means that Congress is likely to return to the topic soon.

    The House of Representatives rejected retroactive immunity on November 16. The Senate Judiciary Committee seemed to like the idea of immunity, but the debate is expected to resume on the Senate floor next month.

    Europeans could get access to UK ID database

    0

    By Lewis Page

    News emerged yesterday of a mysterious international ID card plan, described by the Tories as “a European-wide identity card project called Project Stork”. The Conservatives suggested in Parliament that Stork was a huge Europe-wide extension to the planned UK National ID card with its associated databases and biometrics.

    “How,” asked the shadow Home Sec David Davis, did the government intend to “prevent a repetition of the disaster of the past few weeks when sensitive personal data are held not by one Government but by 27?”

    The actual Home Secretary, Jacqui Smith, seemed a trifle puzzled about what exactly Stork might be (“or Stalk,” says the Indy. Ha ha!).

    Smith replied:

    “If the right hon. Gentleman wants to give me more information about the particular allegation that he is making, I will of course be willing to follow it up… The advantage of a national identity register is that it enables the linking of biometric information, maintained on one database, with biographic data, maintained on another, thereby strengthening the protection for individuals…”

    Biometrics as a panacea for database misuse has already been dealt with, so we thought we’d chase down Project Stork.

    Contacted by the Reg, a Home Office spokesman said that Project Stork was a “research project” designed to explore the interlinking of national e-government services across – so far – 14 countries. It is apparently meant to achieve “mutual recognition” between setups such as the UK’s Government Gateway portal, used for such purposes as submitting tax returns.

    Stork, according to the Home Office, might let a UK citizen use his or her Government Gateway login in France, for such purposes as paying car tax on a French-registered car. The spokesman said that any future link to the UK national ID card scheme was “speculation at this point”.

    The UK official lead on Stork is Dr Mireille Levy, Head of Identity Management Standards at the Home Office Identity and Passport Service (IPS), the organisation currently taking forward ID cards for foreign UK residents and which will take charge of the National ID scheme.

    Dr Levy attended the prestigious Ecole normale supérieure, an elite academic hothouse feeding the French civil service, and holds a PhD in mathematics from the Paris University Pierre et Marie Curie. She has lived in the UK for some time, however, working as a topflight government scientist at the Rutherford Appleton Laboratory and as head of radio planning at the Home Office.

    Dr Levy has also spent time as a “Homeland Security Executive” with the UK-headquartered arms colossus, BAE Systems plc, before taking up her current post at the Home Office IPS. She describes herself on the professional networking site LinkedIn as being employed in “Law Enforcement”.

    Sadly Dr Levy was unwilling to speak to the Reg directly, referring all enquiries back to the Home Office press department.

    The European Commission release has recently issued some information on Stork:

    European ministers, as well as some non-European countries (e.g. Iceland), set themselves the political objective to reach mutual recognition and interoperability of electronic identities by the year 2010 in the Manchester Declaration adopted in November 2005. This declaration, however, also adopts the subsidiarity principle, leaving full autonomy to Member States as to what kind of electronic identity they issue. The STORK project is expected to help bridge the gap between the different eID systems currently in use, leading to a de facto standard for interoperability in eIDs. The deadline for this is 2010, when the EU’s European eID Management Framework comes into force.The UK’s Identity and Passport Service (IPS) is leading the pilot project, in close co-operation with the Government Gateway, the UK’s centralised registration service.

    “It is about the eventual pan-European recognition of electronic IDs,” noted an IPS spokesperson. “Neither services nor entitlements will change; rather, the project is currently about looking at methods that already exist and figuring out how to make them recognise each other.”

    STORK actually stands for Secure idenTity acrOss boRders acKnowledged*. Back in June, Belgian e-gov official Frank Leyman gave this presentation (pdf) on the scheme, describing it as a “large scale pilot” and saying that ten countries had signed “letters of intent” to participate, including the UK, Belgium, and others such as France, Poland, Estonia and Slovenia. Another five nations were interested but not committed at that stage.

    “The consortium is about to be formed,” according to Mr Leyman. Belgians’ “eID” would be based on the Belgian national ID smartcard; other nations such as Slovenia would use “virtual identification” (presumably a login and password like the UK government gateway) and there would also – according to Leyman – be an “Anglo Saxon model”, based on “other identification tools like passports”.

    The usefulness of Stork is described thus:

    A citizen living in country A will be able with the eID… to make a tax declaration online in country B where s/he is currently working… get automatic and paperless reimbursement of health expenses incurred during holidays in country C… and get pension rights from country D (where s/he was working before for some years)…

    One of the participating organisations in STORK is EEMA – “Europe’s leading independent, trade association for e-Business” – headquartered in the UK.

    EEMA’s Roger Dean told the Reg that Stork is 50 per cent funded by the EU to the tune of €10m, with participating national governments and businesses expected to cough up another €10m. EEMA’s stance on eID/National ID cards is fairly plain:

    ID cards were viewed positively during the Second World War, as a means of protecting citizens against spies. However, there are some serious concerns regarding the introduction of an ID card into the UK… such schemes have been in existence for years in other ‘civilised’ countries, are compulsory, and yet are not perceived as challenging civil rights. Properly implemented it could act for the greater social good… It is also likely that it would facilitate evoting and remote voting. However, one of the main benefits would be in providing proof of identification for ebusiness — an area which simply cannot enjoy its full potential without it… EEMA and a number of its Member organisations look forward to collaborating with the Government in this vital area of identity management.

    Dean told the Reg that he himself was broadly in favour of a UK national ID card scheme.

    “If you ask me, [UK] ID cards yes or no, I’d say yes,” he said. “Sooner or later everyone will have an identity card in some form… the Belgians are rolling theirs out, the Estonians are fully complete – though there are only two million of them, so that was a comparatively small project.”

    Dean said that Stork was intended to allow, for instance, a doctor to access health records held by a different country. This did seem to confirm the Tories’ spectre of quite far-flung public officials being able to access the proposed UK databases. However Dean said that the process would be “under the individual’s control”.

    Police forces, of course, already share information via organisations such as Interpol. Exactly how much access different enforcement authorities might have to the various Stork-involved databases across Europe wasn’t clear.

    According to EEMA, the various participants in Project Stork have now submitted their proposals to the European Commission, and they await a decision “hopefully as soon as January or February” on the scheme moving ahead.

    The Home Office, asked about this, said that proposals had indeed been submitted but they didn’t expect any EC decision before next April. Even then, they were at pains to emphasise that “this is purely a research effort”.

    When it was pointed out that the Belgians were calling Stork a “large-scale pilot”, the Home Office spokesman said “well, we’re calling it a research project.”

    Exact details remain to be established. The spectre of Austrian police officers (for instance) being able to spy on UK health or biometric records seems pretty remote – let alone the idea that, say, the Turkish government would have their own copies of UK databases as the Tories suggest. On the other hand, it isn’t hard to imagine even a quite innocuous implementation of STORK protocols creating some interesting records.

    Suppose you did go to France and tax a car using your UK.gov login – forget about ID cards. The French system would need to check with the Brit one that your eID was real, and a record of that check would exist in the relevant logs if nowhere else. A British official wishing to know what you were up to could easily search these files, and say “aha – chummy has just taxed a car in France”, or been to see a doctor in Iceland**, or paid property taxes in Slovakia.

    Likewise, our own Home Office might soon – if research next year determines that Stork-type ideas are feasible – have a somewhat better handle on just how many Estonians, Slovakians and Spaniards (etc) are using British government services and/or paying British taxes: and whether or not these people have a) obtained their mandatory foreign-resident ID cards and b) been truthful when submitting their details.

    Lots of food for thought here. And it has to be said, those worried about the potential for catastrophic errors, bugs, leaks or backdoors in the government IT networks of the future may not find the compliant, ID-card-loving Belgians’ choice of tech partner reassuring. ®

    Update: Since publication the Home Office have been back in touch. They’d like to reassure everyone that there are “no plans” to share usage information between governments (except as necessary to authenticate eIDs). They also say that the UK Government Gateway doesn’t keep any records of transactions “other than temporary ones” (though somebody in the government does – eg the tax people or the DVLA). Finally they say, in answer to whether you could use STORK eID checks to track an individual’s activities is “categorically no.”

    So that’s all right then.

    *Breaks every rule of Acronym Club, we say. Nobody the Reg spoke to could say who came up with it. Presumably something like Secret Tracking And Law-Enforcement Kommissariat (STALK) didn’t seem cuddly enough.

    **Iceland is on board with Stork, though not an EU nation.

    Bet your bottom dollar tensions will follow

    Bet your bottom dollar tensions will follow – Dollar could drop 90% in value – Bank of England

    By J A Blacker, Science Correspondent
    RINF Alternative News

    The Dollar, if the Bank of England is to be believed, could lose 90% of its 2002 value within three years, one pundit thinks it could be worse and even the US top brass are bracing themselves for a real cropper.

    40 Billion of sub prime debt has thus far been written off costing a 30% drop in the value of the Dollar, imagine how it will plummet when all 150 billion is written off, and that is the best possible outcome.

    If the Bank of England’s 200 billion sub prime estimate is accurate, 30% v 40 Billion, ? % v 200 Billion?, and the Bank of England could be as much as 100 Billion out, one annalist has calculated the unrecoverable sub prime debt to be written off could be 300 Billion.

    What ever you do, ditch the Dirty Dollar fast & buy Euros, Yen or Swiss Dollar – have tin hats at the ready folks because the whole lot is about to tumble as the US dollar is a reserve currency.

    http://mparent7777-2.blogspot.com/2007/11/bet-your-bottom-dollar-tensions-will.html

    VIDEO: 9/11 – The Secret Rulers of the World

    1

    The source of most if not all our woes, revealed (from the present to the past): Connecting the dots through ~3000 years of revisionist human history, spanning from the time of the pharaohs, all the way up to the present dynasties creating the New World Order, in a quest to perfect the enslavement of mankind. From pirates to banksters, to the ruling elite, who run the world’s finances, the media and cover both side of nearly every conflict or war: the world may make more sense after watching this.

    The Entire Series: The Secret Rulers of the World

    01. That Morning of September
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gAcxGD…
    _______________________________________

    02. Only the Start
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=GQVEwl…
    _______________________________________

    03. Profiting from 9/11
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=acxmiy…
    _______________________________________

    04. Hidden Empire
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=-D27WW…
    _______________________________________

    05. Vatican Hoarding
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=OfvZXk…
    _______________________________________

    06. Amen & the Pharaohs
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=_1zsFx…
    _______________________________________

    07. Abraham, a Pharaoh? [7/29]
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=D7wgFD…
    _______________________________________

    08. Oceans of Blood
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=tWoFry…
    _______________________________________

    09. The Queen
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=At59tK…
    _______________________________________

    10. King of Kings
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=TEq9KP…
    _______________________________________

    11. The Empire
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vxjKi8…
    _______________________________________

    12. The Cult of Amen
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3Q6N-f…
    _______________________________________

    13. The Committee of 300 / Illuminati
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=NSAd9n…
    _______________________________________

    14. Godfathers / Rothschilds
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=apKl3T…
    _______________________________________

    15. The New World Order
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=4TbXJO…
    _______________________________________

    16. Freemasonry / M.A.F.I.A
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=dsahdn…
    _______________________________________

    17. Cheating at Monopoly: control the money
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=l_y98H…
    _______________________________________

    18. Private Credit Enslavement
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=03QQY6…
    _______________________________________

    19. The Bushes & their Nazi Buddies
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HcRZlD…
    _______________________________________

    20. Palestine / Israel
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=2vn-ws…
    _______________________________________

    21. Butcher Banksters
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=vhTDXL…
    _______________________________________

    22. The Corporate Media
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=otrdl-…
    _______________________________________

    23. Royalty’s Drug Running Kingpins
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=urOs7w…
    _______________________________________

    24. The so-called “War on Terror”
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uVAR6U…
    _______________________________________

    25. “Iraqi Dates”
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=rhRG59…
    _______________________________________

    26. The Antichrist?
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=5HY0aC…
    _______________________________________

    27. The Slave Credit System
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=ZRm3wD…
    _______________________________________

    28. Silly Slaves: Tax Goes to Banksters
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=AWtCAl…
    _______________________________________

    29. The Power is Yours to End the Nightmare
    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Fjg9Ew…

    The Neoconservative Agenda to Sacrifice the Fifth Fleet

    0

    The Neoconservative Agenda to Sacrifice the Fifth Fleet — The New Pearl Harbor 

    By Michael Salla

    The U.S. plans for an attack on Iran envision to sacrifice the Fifth Fleet in order to justify a nuclear retaliation. This is not a hypothetical scenario, but a real option being discussed within the U.S. Joint Chief of Staff cabinet. According to our sources, admiral William Fallon made clear that if such an order was given, he would refuse to follow it and would hand in his resignation along with the entire Centcom headquarter’s. So far only the Navy and Army’s superior officers’ resistance has prevented the neoconservatives and the Air Force to launch the operations.

    The Bush administation has covered up and ignored dissenting Pentagon war games analysis that suggests an attack on Iran’s nuclear or military facilities will lead directly to the annihilation of the Navy’s Fifth Fleet now stationed in the Persian Gulf. Lt. General Paul Van Riper led a hypothetical Persian Gulf state in the 2002 Millennium Challenge wargames that resulted in the destruction of the Fifth Fleet. His experience and conclusions regarding the vulnerability of the Fifth Fleet to an assymetrical military conflict and the implications for a war against Iran have been ignored. Neoconservatives within the Bush administration are currently aggressively promoting a range of military actions against Iran that will culminate in it attacking the US Navy’s Fifth Fleet with sophisticated cruise anti-ship missiles. They are ignoring Van Riper’s experiences in the Millennium Challenge and how it applies to the current nuclear conflict with Iran.

    Iran has sufficient quantities of cruise missiles to destroy much or all of the Fifth Fleet which is within range of Iran’s mobile missile launchers strategically located along its mountainous terrain overlooking the Persian Gulf. The Bush administration is deliberately downplaying the vulnerability of the Fifth Fleet to Iran’s advanced missile technology which has been purchased from Russia and China since the late 1990’s. The most sophisticated of Iran’s cruise missiles are the ‘Sunburn’ and ‘Yakhonts’. These are missiles against which U.S. military experts conclude modern warships have no effective defense. By deliberately provoking an Iranian retaliation to U.S. military actions, the neoconservatives will knowingly sacrifice much or all of the Fifth Fleet. This will culminate in a new Pearl Harbor that will create the right political environment for total war against Iran, and expanded military actions in the Persian Gulf region.

    The Fifth Fleet’s Vulnerability to Iran’s Anti-Ship Missile Arsenal

    The U.S. Navy Fifth Fleet is headquartered in the Gulf State of Bahrain which is responsible for patrolling the Persian Gulf, Arabian Sea, Suez Canal and parts of the Indian Ocean. The Fifth Fleet currently comprises a carrier group and two helicopter carrier ships. Its size peaked at five aircraft carrier groups and six helicopter carriers in 2003 during the invasion of Iraq. Presently, it is led by the USS Enterprise (CVN-65), the first nuclear powered aircraft carrier commissioned in 1961, and on November 2, began participating in a Naval exercise in the Persian Gulf .

    The Fifth Fleet’s base in Bahrain, is only 150 miles away from the Iranian coast, and would itself be in range of Iran’s new generation of anti-ship cruise missiles. Also, any Naval ships in the confined terrain of the Persian Gulf would have difficulty in maneuvering and would be within range of Iran’s rugged coastline which extends all along the Persian Gulf to the Arabian sea.

    Iran began purchasing advanced military technology from Russia soon after the latter pulled out in 2000 from the Gore-Chernomyrdin Protocol, which limited Russia’s sales of military equipment to Iran. Russia subsequently began selling Iran military technology that could be used in any military conflict with the U.S. This included air defense systems and anti-ship cruise missiles in which Russia specialized to offset the U.S. large naval superiority.

    The SS-N-22 or ‘Sunburn” has a speed of Mach 2.5 or 1500 miles an hour, uses stealth technology and has a range up to 130 miles. It contains a conventional warhead of 750 lbs that can destroy most ships. Of even greater concern is Russia’s SSN-X-26 or ‘Yakhonts’ cruise missile which has a range of 185 miles which makes all US Navy ships in the Persian Gulf vulnerable to attack. More importantly the Yakhonts has been specifically developed for use against Carrier groups, and has been sold by Russia on the international arms trade.

    Both the Yakhonts and the Sunburn missiles are designed to defeat the Aegis radar defense currently used on U.S. Navy ships by using stealth technology and low ground hugging flying maneuvers. In their final approaches these missiles take evasive maneuvers to defeat anti-ship missile defenses. So great is the threat posed by the Sunburn, Yakhonts and other advanced anti-ship missiles being developed by Russia and sold to China, Iran and other countries, that the Pentagon’s weapons testing office in 2007 moved to halt production on further aircraft carriers until an effective defense was developed. Iran has purchased sufficient quantities of both the Sunbeam and Yakhonts to destroy much or all of the Fifth Fleet anywhere in the Persian Gulf from its mountainous coastal terrain.

    Millennium Challenge Wargames

    The “Millennium Challenge” was one of the largest wargames ever conducted and wargames involved 13,500 troops spread out at over 17 locations. The wargames involved heavy usage of computer simulations, extended over a three week period and cost $250 million. Millennium Challenge involved asymmetrical warfare between the U.S military forces, led by General William Kernan, and an unnamed state in the Persian Gulf. According to General Kernan, the wargames “would test a series of new war-fighting concepts recently developed by the Pentagon.” Using a range of asymmetrical attack strategies using disguised civilian boats for launching attacks, planes in Kamikaze attacks, and Silkworm cruise missiles, much of the Fifth Fleet was sunk. The games revealed how asymmetrical strategies could exploit the Fifth Fleet’s vulnerability against anti-ship cruise missiles in the confined waters of the Persian Gulf.

    In a controversial decision, the Pentagon decided to simply ‘refloat’ the Fifth Fleet to continue the exercise which led to the eventual defeat of the Persian Gulf state. The sinking of the Fifth Fleet was ignored and the wargames declared a success for the “new war-fighting concepts” adopted by Gen. Kernan. This led to Lt General Paul Van Riper, the commander of the mythical Gulf State, calling the official results “empty sloganeering”. In a later television interview, General Riper declared “when the concepts that the command was testing failed to live up to their expectations, the command at that point began to script the exercise in order to prove these concepts. This was my critical complaint.”

    Most significant was General Riper’s claims of the effectiveness of the older Cruise missile technology, the Silkworm missile which were used to sink an aircraft carrier and two helicopter-carriers loaded with marines in the total of 16 ships sunk. When asked to confirm Riper’s claims, General Kernar replied: “Well, I don’t know. To be honest with you. I haven’t had an opportunity to assess what happened. But that’s a possibility… The specifics of the cruise-missile piece… I really can’t answer that question. We’ll have to get back to you”.

    The Millennium Challenge wargames clearly demonstrated the vulnerability of the US Fifth Fleet to Silkworm cruise missile attacks. This replicated the experience of the British during the 1980 Falklands war where two ships were sunk by three Exocet missiles. Both the Exocet and Silkworm cruise missiles were an older generation of anti-ship missile technology that were far surpassed by the Sunburn and Yakhonts missiles. If the Millennium Challenge was a guide to an asymmetrical war with Iran, much of the U.S Fifth Fleet would be destroyed. It is not surprising Millennium Challenge was eventually scripted so that this embarrassing fact was hidden. To date, there has been little public awareness of the vulnerability of the US Fifth Fleet while stationed in the Persian Gulf. It appears that the Bush administration had scripted an outcome to the wargames that would promote its neoconservative agenda for the Middle East.

    The Neo-Conservative Strategy to Attack Iran

    Neoconservatives share a political philosophy that US dominance of the international system as the world’s sole superpower needs to be extended indefinitely into the 21st century. In early 2006 neoconservatives within the Bush administration began vigorously promoting a new war against Iran due to the alleged threat posed by its nuclear development program. Iran has consistently maintained that its nuclear development is lawful and in compliance with the Nonproliferation Treaty (NPT). Since 2004, The Bush administration has been citing intelligence data that Iran is secretly developing nuclear weapons and must under no circumstances be allowed to do this.

    Much of Iran’s nuclear development has occurred in underground facilities built at a depth of 70 feet with hardened concrete overhead that protect them from any known conventional attack. This led to the Bush administration arguing in early 2006 that tactical nuclear weapons would need to be used to take out Iran’s nuclear facilities. This culminated in a fierce debate between leading neo-conservatives such as Dick Cheney and Donald Rumsfeld, with the Joint Chiefs of Staff which remained adamantly opposed. Seymour Hersh in May 2006, reported the opposition of the Joint Chiefs of Staff.’
    Subsequent efforts by the neo-conservatives to justify a conventional military attack have been handicapped by widespread public skepticism by the threat posed by Iran’s nuclear program, and Iran’s compliance with the Nonproliferation Treaty according to Mohamed ElBaradei, the head of the IAEA. ElBaradei cites U.S. military assessments that Iran is a few years away from developing weapons grade nuclear fuel that could be used for nuclear weapons. The Bush administration, frustrated by the determined opposition both within the U.S bureaucracy, military and the international community to its plans has adopted a three pronged track strategy for its goal of ‘taking out’ Iran.

    The first strategy is to drive up public perceptions of an international security crisis by warning of a Third World War if Iran’s nuclear program is not stopped. In a Press Conference speech on October 17, President Bush declared: “if you’re interested in avoiding World War III, it seems like you ought to be interested in preventing them [Iranians] from having the knowledge necessary to make a nuclear weapon.” Bush’s startling rhetoric was followed soon after by Vice President Cheney on October 23 who warned in a speech that the US and its allies were “prepared to impose serious consequences” on Iran. : The second strategy has been shift emphasis from removing Iran’s nuclear facilities, to emphasizing its support for terrorism. Given widespread military and political opposition to attacks on Iran’s nuclear facilities, the Bush administration is now depicting Iran as a supporter of terrorism in Iraq.” The change in strategy was given a powerful boost by the passage of the Kyle-Lieberman Amendment by the U.S. Senate on September 26 which designated “the Iranian Revolutionary Guards Corps as a foreign terrorist organization”. This would enable the Bush administration to authorize strikes against Iranian Revolutionary Guard facilities inside Iran on the basis that they are supporting Iraqi terrorist groups targeting U.S. military forces.

    The third and most dangerous strategy used by the Bush administration is to sanction a covert mission that would create the necessary political environment for a war against Iran. This is arguably best evidenced in the infamous B-52 ‘Bent Spear’ incident on August 30, 2007 where five (later changed to six) nuclear armed cruise missiles were found en route to the Middle East for a covert mission. The nuclear warheads had adjustable yields of between 5 to 150 kilotons, and would have been ideal for use against Iran’s underground nuclear facilities or in a false flag operation that would be blamed on Iran. However, Air Force personnel stood down ‘illegal’ orders that most likely came from the White House, and averted what could have been the detonation of one or more nuclear devices in the Persian Gulf region.

    Consequences of Iran being Attacked

    In an effort to intimidate Iran, the Bush administration has regularly placed two aircraft carrier group formations in the Persian Gulf . The size and timing of possible U.S. military attacks on Iran’s nuclear and/or military facilities, will influence the speed and scale of an Iranian response. Iran’s response will predictably result in a military escalation that culminates in Iran using its arsenal of anti-ship cruise missiles on the U.S. Fifth Fleet and closing off the Strait of Hormuz to all shipping. Iran’s ability to hide and launch cruise missiles from mountainous positions all along the Persian Gulf will make all Fifth Fleet ships in the Persian Gulf vulnerable. The Fifth Fleet would be trapped and unable to escape to safer waters. The Millennium Challenge wargames in 2002 witnessed the sinking of most of the Fifth fleet.

    If an attack on Iran were to occur before the end of 2007, it would lead to the destruction of the USS Enterprise with its complement of 5000 personnel on board. Further losses in terms of support ships and other Fifth Fleet naval forces in the Persian Gulf would be catastrophic. An Iranian cruise missile attack would replicate losses at Pearl Harbor where the sinking of five ships, destruction of 188 aircraft and deaths of 2,333 quickly led to a declaration of total war against Imperial Japan by the U.S. Congress.

    The declaration of total war against Iran by the U.S. Congress would lead to a sustained bombing campaign and eventual military invasion to bring about regime change in Iran. Military conscription would occur in order to provide personnel for the invasion of Iran, and to support U.S. troops in Iraq and Afghanistan that would come under greater pressure. Tensions would rapidly escalate with other major powers such as Russia and China who have supplied Iran with sophisticated weapons systems that could be used against U.S. military assets. The closing of the Strait of Hormuz to all shipping and total war conditions in the U.S. would lead to a collapse of the world economy, and further erosion of civil liberties in a U.S. engaged in total war.

    Conclusions

    The above scenario is very plausible given the military capacities of Iran’s anti-ship cruise missiles and the U.S. Navy’s vulnerability to these while operating in the Persian Gulf. The Bush administration has hidden from the American public the full extent of the Fifth Fleet’s vulnerability, and how it could be trapped and destroyed in a full scale conflict with Iran. This is best evidenced by the controversial decision to downplay the real results of the Millennium Challenge wargames and the dissenting views of Lt. General Van Riper over the lessons to be learned. This culminated in General Van Riper joining a group of retired generals in calling for the resignation of Donald Rumsfeld.

    Neo-conservatives within the Bush administration are fully aware of the vulnerability of the Fifth Fleet, yet have at times tried to place up to three carrier groups in the Persian Gulf which would only augment U.S. losses in any war with Iran. Yet the Bush administration has still attempted to move forward with plans for nuclear, conventional and/or covert attacks on Iran which would precipitate much of the terrible scenario described above.

    A reasonable conclusion to draw is that neoconservatives within the Bush administration are willing to sacrifice much or all of the U.S. Fifth Fleet by militarily provoking Iran to launch its anti-ship cruise missile arsenal in order to justify ‘total war’ against Iran, and force regime change. A new Pearl Harbor can be averted by making accountable Bush administration officials willing to sacrifice the Fifth Fleet in pursuit of a neoconservative agenda.

     Michael Salla
    Dr. Michael Salla is an internationally recognized scholar in international politics, conflict resolution, US foreign policy and the new field of ’exopolitics’. He is author/editor of five books; and held academic appointments in the School of International Service& the Center for Global Peace, American University, Washington DC (1996-2004); the Department of Political Science, Australian National University, Canberra, Australia (1994-96); and the Elliott School of International Affairs, George Washington University, Washington D.C., (2002). He has a Ph.D in Government from the University of Queensland, Australia, and an M.A. in Philosophy from the University of Melbourne, Australia. He has conducted research and fieldwork in the ethnic conflicts in East Timor, Kosovo, Macedonia, and Sri Lanka, and organized peacemaking initiatives involving mid to high level participants from these conflicts.

    MI5 and MI6 to recruit more minority spies

    0

    MI5, which has a target of increasing its current 3,000 staff to 4,000 by 2011, also insisted that it wanted to improve relations with Muslim communities.

    The BBC Monday was broadcasting a series of interviews with ethnic community members working for Britain’s intelligence and security services in a bid to broaden the recruitment of MI5 and MI6 officers among the country’s minority communities.

    A male and female agent, calling themselves Shazad and Jayshree, were permitted to talk for the first time, spoke on the BBC’s Asian Network about their job, which they insisted was to protect the UK and not target Muslims.

    “If you look at the bigger picture, I think you realise this isn’t about spying on your own community, or letting your own community down, or any of those things,” Shazad said.

    “It is about protecting people like yourself – others out there – from threats, and there can be a number of different kinds of threats,” he said.

    Yasmin, who was introduced as a member of overseas intelligence agency MI6, was also reported to have told BBC Radio 1’s Newsbeat about her work recruiting spies.

    Yasmin insisted that she did not think she was recruited because of her Muslim faith and said she would challenge “very strongly” any suggestion that her religion complicated her work.

    The head of MI6 recruitment, Mark, said the organisation wanted to attract people and to be truly to be representative and reflective from all ethnic minorities, not just Muslims.

    “We want to be truly, but clearly if we are going to be reflective we do need to have Muslims in our organisation because of the insight and understanding that they bring,” he said.

    Britain’s domestic security service, MI5, also told the BBC that it hoped the insight into life as a British Asian agent will help increase its percentage of black and minority ethnic staff, which currently stands at 6.5 per cent.

    MI5, which has a target of increasing its current 3,000 staff to 4,000 by 2011, also insisted that it wanted to improve relations with Muslim communities.

    The exclusive interviews were said to have been the first recorded at MI5’s London headquarters in the organisation’s 98-year history. –IRNA

    Impeach Bush over lies about CIA operative

    0

    Anyone else’s jaw drop when former White House press secretary Scott McClellan started to hawk his book, revealing that all top ranking Bush administration officials were lying in the outing of CIA operative, Valerie Plame?

    In 1974, Congress threatened to impeach then-President Nixon and he resigned midway into his second term.

    Thirty-four years later, can’t they muster the initiative and go after this president?
    This fiasco certainly rises to the definition of “high crimes and misdemeanors” more than a bungled burglary or President Clinton’s lying about a private affair.

    It doesn’t matter that Bush has only a year left on his lease. He and his crew promised America honesty, integrity and a step higher on the morality ladder than the previous administration.

    Congress, do the right thing and bring forth the Articles of Impeachment now.

    Source

    UK gov rethinks ID card database

    1

    INQUIRER staff:THE LOSS OF 25 million citizens’ records has forced the UK government to review its plans to introduce the national identity register, the foundation of its ID card scheme.

    Data protection minister, yeah really, Michael Wills told parliament that it needed to learn some lessons from the loss of 25 million records. The government will scrutinise “everything” and assess things after it had done its peer.

    The Home Secretary, Jacquet Smith, still thinks the register is important. Because you can link the biometric data in one database to biographical information in another, everything would be just hunky dory.

    Under the plans, every man, woman and child in this country needs to be fingerprinted and photographed. Refuseniks face legal sanctions.

    The Taliban rise again?

    0

    The Taliban now control most of Afghanistan – and may soon share power, says robert fox

    President Karzai of Afghanistan has announced that six years after the Taliban were driven out of power in Kabul, representatives of the hardline Muslim movement are ‘increasingly’ approaching him for talks.

    It has been pretty clear that Karzai and his clan have been talking to Taliban leaders for months, possibly more than a year. What his announcement hints at is that some sort of power-sharing deal is in the wind.

    Interestingly, after the first reports of the talks had been transmitted by Reuters last week, there was no immediate follow-up from the BBC and the New York Times, both of whom have resident correspondents in Kabul. It suggests that the Afghan president was told to cool it by Washington and London.

    Karzai’s announcement of the contacts with the Taliban is a clear warning. It is no longer a case of confidence among Karzai’s

    international sponsors wavering; spectacularly, he has lost trust in them and is seeking his own, very Afghan, way out of the predicament.

    Despite the best efforts of the Americans and British forces, supported by the Canadians, Australians and Dutch among others, the chances of Karzai’s government continuing in its present form, let alone extending its authority to beyond the capital, are getting less favourable by the day.

    The Senlis Council, a European think-tank, said in a report published last week that 54 per cent of Afghan territory is now under Taliban control. This figure is hard to measure in the shifting sands of tribal, militia and criminal loyalties that cover most of the country, but Senlis’s survey methods are sophisticated.

    More to the point is the map produced by Senlis showing the spread of violent incidents and terrorist attacks across Afghanistan and Waziristan. They are now radiating right across the territory with dozens north of the Hindu Kush in non-Pashtun areas. Not surprisingly, the largest number of bombings and killings is around Jalalabad in southeast Afghanistan. This is the main gateway from the tribal areas in Pakistan, which are now dominated by Taliban sympathisers and their al-Qaeda allies.

    Taliban recruiting and training has shown a sharp increase since Pervez Musharraf ran into difficulties this summer when he sacked his chief justice and sent in his troops against the militants in Islamabad’s Red Mosque, symbol of extremism.

    With the return of the exiled former prime minister Nawaz Sharif to contest the upcoming elections in Pakistan – he received a rapturous welcome at Lahore airport yesterday – it is likely that whatever government succeeds Musharraf’s rule will have a strong Islamist complexion. Sharif stands for Islamic nationalism, and is likely to strike a deal with at least some Taliban elements.

    Even if the Pakistan army again tries to annul the elections and brings back emergency rule, it too is likely to play to its Islamist wing (harking back to the Islamist

    military dictatorship of General Zia al Huq) and cut a deal with some of the Taliban leadership. This must be behind Karzai’s thinking.

    America will try to thwart any accommodation with Taliban elements, nationally or locally, in Afghanistan. Its response to the latest violence is to hint that it will send more special forces units across the border to ‘root out’ Taliban and al Qaeda training camps in the tribal areas of Pakistan. This is risky and far from certain to succeed.

    In last week’s report, the Senlis Council warned Nato to double the number of its troops in Afghanistan, or risk Kabul falling to Taliban forces by the spring. But Nato is unwilling or unable to produce a fighting force on this scale, despite repeated appeals from its secretariat and the US leadership for the allies to send more troops. Indeed some, like the Netherlands and Canada, are suggesting they may cut back.

    It looks as if the Taliban could be back in Kabul well before the spring.

    http://www.thefirstpost.co.uk/index.php?storyID=9617&p=2

    The Bush Family Gets Away with Crimes

    1

    The Bush Family Gets Away with Crimes That Would Land Anyone Else in Jail

    In the history of the American Republic, perhaps no political family has been more protected from scandal than the Bushes.

    When the Bushes are involved in dirty deals or even criminal activity, standards of evidence change. Instead of proof “beyond a reasonable doubt” that would lock up an average citizen, the evidence must be perfect.

    If there’s any doubt at all, the Bushes must be presumed innocent. Even when their guilt is obvious to anyone with an ounce of common sense, it’s their accusers and those who dare investigate who get the worst of it. Their motives are challenged and their own shortcomings are cast in the harshest possible light.

    For decades — arguably going back generations — the Bushes have been protected by their unique position straddling two centers of national power, the family’s blueblood Eastern Establishment ties and the Texas oil crowd with strong links to the Republican Right. [For details on this family phenomenon, see Robert Parry’s Secrecy & Privilege.]

    This reality was underscored again by how major news outlets and the right-wing press reacted to a new piece of evidence implicating George W. Bush in a criminal cover-up in the “Plame-gate” scandal.

    Though the evidence is now overwhelming that President Bush was part of a White House cabal that leaked Valerie Plame Wilson’s identity as a covert CIA officer and then covered up the facts, major newspapers, such as the New York Times and the Washington Post, continue to pooh-pooh this extraordinary scandal.

    The latest piece of evidence was the statement from former White House press secretary Scott McClellan that Bush was one of five senior officials who had him clear Karl Rove and I. Lewis Libby in the leak when, in fact, they were two of the leakers.

    “The most powerful leader in the world had called upon me to speak on his behalf and help restore the credibility he lost amid the failure to find weapons of mass destruction in Iraq,” McClellan said in a snippet released by the publisher of his upcoming memoir.

    “So I stood at the White House briefing room podium in front of the glare of the klieg lights for the better part of two weeks and publicly exonerated two of the senior-most aides in the White House: Karl Rove and Scooter Libby,” McClellan said. “There was one problem. It was not true.”

    After McClellan’s statement touched off a brief furor on the Internet and cable TV shows, his publisher Peter Osnos tried to soften the blow. Osnos told Bloomberg News that McClellan didn’t mean that Bush deliberately ordered his press secretary to lie.

    “He told him something that wasn’t true, but the President didn’t know it wasn’t true,” Osnos said.

    What Bush Knew

    But neither McClennan nor Osnos knows what Bush really knew.

    The revelatory point in McClellan’s statement was that Bush was a direct participant in the campaign to protect Rove and Libby as they lied about their roles in the leak. Previously that was an inference one could draw from the facts, but it had not been confirmed by a White House official.

    Indeed, looking at the available evidence, it would defy credulity that Bush wasn’t implicated in the Plame-gate leak and the subsequent cover-up, which led to Libby’s conviction earlier this year on four counts of perjury and obstruction of justice.

    For Bush not to have been involved would have required him to be oblivious to the inner workings of the White House and the actions of his closest advisers on an issue of great importance to him.

    From the evidence at Libby’s trial, it was already clear that Bush had a direct hand in the effort to discredit Plame’s husband, former U.S. Ambassador Joseph Wilson, after he had gone public in July 2003 with his role in a CIA investigation of what turned out to be bogus claims that Iraq had sought yellowcake uranium from Niger.

    Bush, who had cited those bogus claims in his 2003 State of the Union Address in making his case for invading Iraq, was worried about his credibility when U.S. forces failed to find WMD evidence and when Wilson became the first Washington insider to start questioning Bush’s case for war.

    So, Bush collaborated with Vice President Dick Cheney in mounting a counter-attack against Wilson. Bush decided to selectively declassify portions of a National Intelligence Estimate in order to undercut Wilson’s credibility and agreed to have that information leaked to friendly reporters.

    It was in that context that Libby, Rove and other administration officials went forth to brief reporters, contacts that ended up disclosing that Wilson’s CIA wife, Plame, played a role in arranging his work on the CIA investigation. The suggestion was that Wilson’s unpaid fact-finding trip to Niger was a case of nepotism or a junket.

    Following these press contacts, Plame’s identity surfaced in a July 14, 2003, article by right-wing columnist Robert Novak, who had gotten his information from two sources, Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage and his friend, the president’s chief political adviser Karl Rove.

    But Rove’s work on the Plame leak didn’t stop with Novak’s article; he continued to peddle the information to other journalists, such as MSNBC’s Chris Matthews, who told Wilson a week after Novak’s column, “I just got off the phone with Karl Rove. He says and I quote, ‘Wilson’s wife is fair game.’”

    Rove has since disputed the precise “fair game” quote, but he doesn’t deny talking to Matthews about Plame’s identity. So, we know that a week after the original leaks had blown Plame’s undercover status, Bush had not called off the dogs. His closest political adviser still was using the information to undermine Wilson.

    Hardball Politics

    This pattern of hardball politics, of course, fits with how George W. Bush and others in his family play the game.

    His father, George H.W. Bush, would talk about how rough he could be when in “campaign mode.” The younger George Bush just extended that pugnacious approach to full-time, aided and abetted by a powerful right-wing media that has carried water for him consistently over the past eight years.

    Even American citizens who get in Bush’s way feel the lash. Just ask the likes of former weapons inspector Scott Ritter, who challenged Bush’s pre-Iraq War claims about WMD, or the Dixie Chicks, who dared to diss the Commander in Chief at one of their concerts.

    So, the treatment of Wilson/Plame was part of the standard fare for what happened to Americans who dissented on Bush’s war policies. However, this one was a little different because the leak destroyed the career of a covert CIA officer and endangered her network of foreign agents who had been supplying information about WMD in the Middle East.

    In September 2003, upset about this collateral damage, the CIA forwarded a criminal complaint to the Justice Department seeking an investigation into the outing of Plame. As far as the CIA was concerned, her classified identity was covered by a 1982 law barring willful exposure of CIA officers who had “served” abroad in the preceding five years.

    But Bush and his inner circle could still breathe easily since the probe was under the control of Attorney General John Ashcroft, considered to be a right-wing Bush ally. The White House responded to press inquiries disingenuously, claiming Bush took the leak very seriously and would punish anyone involved.

    “The President has set high standards, the highest of standards, for people in his administration,” McClellan said on Sept. 29, 2003. “If anyone in this administration was involved in it, they would no longer be in this administration.”

    Bush personally announced his determination to get to the bottom of the matter.

    “If there is a leak out of my administration, I want to know who it is,” Bush said on Sept. 30, 2003. “I want to know the truth. If anybody has got any information inside our administration or outside our administration, it would be helpful if they came forward with the information so we can find out whether or not these allegations are true.”

    Yet, even as Bush was professing his curiosity and calling for anyone with information to step forward, he was withholding the fact that he had authorized the declassification of some secrets about the Niger uranium issue and had ordered Cheney to arrange for those secrets to be given to reporters.

    In other words, though Bush knew a great deal about how the anti-Wilson scheme got started — since he was involved in starting it — he uttered misleading public statements to conceal the White House role.

    Spreading Lies

    Also, since the other conspirators knew that Bush already was in the know, they would have read his comments as a signal to lie, which is what they did. In early October, press secretary McClellan said he could report that political adviser Karl Rove and National Security Council aide Elliott Abrams were not involved in the Plame leak.

    That comment riled Libby, who feared that he was being hung out to dry. Libby went to his boss, Dick Cheney, and complained that “they’re trying to set me up; they want me to be the sacrificial lamb,” Libby’s lawyer Theodore Wells later said.

    Cheney scribbled down his feelings in a note to press secretary McClellan: “Not going to protect one staffer + sacrifice the guy the Pres that was asked to stick his head in the meat grinder because of incompetence of others.”

    Cheney initially ascribed Libby’s role in going after Wilson to Bush’s orders, but the Vice President apparently thought better of it, crossing out “the Pres” and putting the clause in a passive tense.

    Cheney has never explained publicly the meaning of his note, but it suggests that it was Bush who sent Libby out on the get-Wilson mission to limit damage from Wilson’s criticism of Bush’s false Niger-yellowcake claim in the State of the Union Address.

    Cheney’s reference to the “incompetence of others” may refer to those who cleared the false Niger claim in the first place.

    Bush’s subsequent behavior in the latter half of 2003 adds to the evidence of his guilt.

    Assuming Bush was sincere in his desire to get to the bottom of who leaked Plame’s identity — or just wanted to make sure there was no security risk in his inner circle — he presumably would have ordered an internal White House security probe. But he didn’t.

    James Knodell, director of the White House security office, conceded before a congressional committee in March 2007 that no internal security investigation was performed; no security clearances were suspended or revoked; no punishment of any kind was meted out to White House political adviser Rove, even after his role in leaking Plame’s classified identity was determined.

    Knodell, whose job included assessing Executive Branch security breaches, said that what he knew about the Plame case was “through the press.” A logical inference from Knodell’s inaction was that Bush already knew who had leaked Plame’s identity because he was involved in the leak.

    In fall 2003, with no White House security review underway and the criminal probe presumably bottled up in the Justice Department, the cover-up broadened. On Oct. 4, 2003, McClellan added Libby to the list of officials who have “assured me that they were not involved in this.”

    So, Libby had a motive to lie to the FBI when he was first interviewed about the case. He had gone to the mat with his boss to get his name cleared in the press, meaning it would make little sense to then admit involvement to FBI investigators, especially when it looked as if the cover-up would hold.

    “The White House had staked its credibility on there being no White House involvement in the leaking of information about Ms. Wilson,” a federal court filing later noted. For his part, Libby began claiming that he had first learned about Plame’s CIA identity from NBC’s Washington bureau chief Tim Russert after Wilson had gone public.

    Reversal of Fortune

    This White House cover-up might have worked, except in late 2003, Ashcroft decided he wouldn’t be the loyal foot soldier and recused himself because of a conflict of interest. Deputy Attorney General James Comey then picked Patrick Fitzgerald — the U.S. Attorney in Chicago — to serve as special prosecutor.

    Fitzgerald pursued the investigation far more aggressively. Bush’s White House countered with a combination of public stonewalling and a continued PR campaign to further discredit Wilson.

    Bush’s political and media allies dissected every nuance of the Wilson/Plame case to highlight supposed inconsistencies and contradictions.

    The Republican National Committee put out nasty anti-Wilson talking points; senior Republicans on the Senate Intelligence Committee called Wilson a liar; the right-wing media — aided and abetted by the Washington Post’s neoconservative editorial page — amplified these ugly attacks to the public.

    Right-wing lawyer Victoria Toensing received widespread media coverage when she claimed that Plame was not a “covert” officer under the definition of the 1982 law protecting the identities of intelligence agents because it only applied to CIA personnel who had “resided” or were “stationed” abroad in the previous five years.

    Toensing argued that since Plame, the mother of young twins, was stationed at CIA headquarters in Langley, Virginia, and resided in the Washington area, she wasn’t “covert” even if that was her official CIA status. But Toensing was misrepresenting the law that she said she had helped draft while a congressional staffer in the early 1980s.

    The actual wording of the law as it pertained to CIA and other clandestine officers was “served” abroad, which is not synonymous with “stationed” or “resided,” the words that Toensing had substituted.

    One can be stationed or reside inside the United States and still “serve” abroad by undertaking secret missions overseas, which Plame had done.

    But many in the right-wing news media and even at prestige newspapers like the Washington Post adopted Toensing’s word games as reality. It became an article of faith in some political circles that Plame was not a “covert” officer and that therefore there was “no underlying crime” in the leaking of her identity.

    Bush’s Guilt?

    But what does this ongoing pattern of deception and character assassination against Wilson and Plame suggest about Bush’s innocence or guilt?

    If Bush were the innocent party that we are supposed to believe, wouldn’t he have acted differently? Wouldn’t he have called for an end to these attacks on two American citizens who had served their country?

    But Bush never tried to halt these cruel diversionary tactics. The White House goal, it appears, was to stir up enough confusion so that the public wouldn’t focus on the logical conclusion that Bush was responsible for damaging a CIA operation intended to protect national security.

    In October 2005, Fitzgerald indicted Libby on five counts of lying to federal investigators and obstructing justice. Libby was convicted on four of five counts in March 2007 and sentenced to 30 months in jail.

    But Bush’s role in the cover-up wasn’t finished. On July 2, 2007, Bush commuted Libby’s sentence to spare him any jail time. The President also left open the possibility that Libby might receive a full pardon before Bush left the White House.

    The combination of taking away the stick of jail time and dangling the carrot of a full pardon eliminated any incentive for Libby to turn state’s evidence against Bush, Cheney and other senior officials.

    In a different era, one might expect major newspapers, like the New York Times and the Washington Post, to erupt in fury over such an obvious case of presidential wrongdoing. One also might have anticipated serious hearings by a Democratic-controlled Congress to get to the bottom of this sorry affair.

    But not in this era. Even when former press secretary McClellan became the first White House insider to acknowledge that senior officials, including Bush and Cheney, put him up to spreading lies about the Plame-gate scandal (whatever they knew at the time), there was almost no reaction, except on the Internet and some cable TV shows.

    The Post and Times essentially ignored McClellan’s statement, apparently buying into the later spin that Bush might not have known then that Libby and Rove were lying. Bush’s right-wing apologists already are back on the attack, claiming that McClellan’s back-tracking supports Bush’s innocence.

    The Democrats also don’t seem to have the stomach to hold Bush accountable. One presidential hopeful, Sen. Christopher Dodd, D-Connecticut, called for the Justice Department to investigate whether Bush had intentionally misled the public.

    But the Democrats control both houses of Congress and presumably could compel testimony from many of the principals. They might even be able to force an explanation from special prosecutor Fitzgerald about why he didn’t pursue a broader case and what Bush and Cheney told him during their interviews about the Plame leak.

    Instead the Democrats appear frightened of the counter-attack that the right-wing media could unleash, especially when major mainstream publications like the Times show little interest in the story and others like the Post actually are helping Bush in his cover-up.

    But the broader picture appears to be that George W. Bush is just the latest member of the Bush family who can skate away from nearly any wrongdoing without paying a price.

    [For more on this remarkable pattern of protecting the Bushes, see Consortiumnews.com’s “Bush Rule of Journalism” or two of our books, Secrecy & Privilege and Neck Deep.]

    Robert Parry broke many of the Iran-Contra stories in the 1980s for the Associated Press and Newsweek. His latest book, Neck Deep: The Disastrous Presidency of George W. Bush, was written with two of his sons, Sam and Nat, and can be ordered at neckdeepbook.com. His two previous books, Secrecy & Privilege: The Rise of the Bush Dynasty from Watergate to Iraq and Lost History: Contras, Cocaine, the Press & ‘Project Truth’ are also available there. Or go to Amazon.com.

    To comment at Consortiumblog, click here. (To make a blog comment about this or other stories, you can use your normal e-mail address and password. Ignore the prompt for a Google account.) To comment to us by e-mail, click here.

    Bringing the War on Terrorism Home

    0

    Congress Considers Methods to Disrupt Movements in the United States

    Bringing the War on Terrorism Home: Congress Considers How to ‘Disrupt’ Radical Movements in the United States

    From the November 25, 2007 issue
    By Jessica Lee
    The Indypendent, New York City

    Under the guise of a bill that calls for the study of “homegrown terrorism,” Congress is apparently trying to broaden the definition of terrorism to encompass both First Amendment political activity and traditional forms of protest such as nonviolent civil disobedience, according to civil liberties advocates, scholars and historians.

    The proposed law, The Violent Radicalization and Homegrown Terrorism Prevention Act of 2007 (H.R. 1955), was passed by the House of Representative in a 404-6 vote Oct. 23. (The Senate is currently considering a companion bill, S. 1959.) The act would establish a “National Commission on the prevention of violent radicalization and ideologically based violence” and a university-based “Center for Excellence” to “examine and report upon the facts and causes of violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism and ideologically based violence in the United States” in order to develop policy for “prevention, disruption and mitigation.”

    Many observers fear that the proposed law will be used against U.S.-based groups engaged in legal but unpopular political activism, ranging from political Islamists to animal-rights and environmental campaigners to radical right-wing organizations. There is concern, too, that the bill will undermine academic integrity and is the latest salvo in a decade-long government grab for power at the expense of civil liberties.

    David Price, a professor of anthropology at St. Martin’s University who studies government surveillance and harassment of dissident scholars, says the bill “is a shot over the bow of environmental activists, animal-rights activists, anti-globalization activists and scholars who are working in the Middle East who have views that
    go against the administration.”

    Price says some right-wing outfits such as gun clubs are also threatened because “[they] would be looked at with suspicion under the bill.”

    The Bill of Rights Defense Committee (BORDC), which has been organizing against post-Sept. 11 legislative attacks on First Amendment rights, is critical of the bill. “When you first look at this bill, it might seem harmless because it is about the development of a commission to do a study,” explained Hope Marston, a regional organizer with BORDC.

    “However, when you realize the focus of the study is ‘homegrown terrorism,’ it raises red flags,” Marston said. “When you consider that the government has wiretapped our phone calls and emails, spied on religious and political groups and has done extensive data mining of our daily records, it is worrisome of what might be done with the study. I am concerned that there appears to be an inclination to study religious and political groups to ultimately try to find subversion. This would violate our First Amendment rights to free speech and freedoms of religion and association.”

    One pressing concern is definitions contained in the bill. For example, “violent radicalization” is defined as “the process of adopting or promoting an extremist belief system for the purpose of facilitating ideologically based violence to advance political, religious, or social change.”

    Alejandro Queral, executive director of the Northwest Constitutional Rights Center, asks, “What is an extremist belief system? Who defines this? These are broad definitions that encompass so much. … It is criminalizing thought and ideology.”

    For her part, Marston takes issue with the definition of homegrown terrorism. “It is about the ‘use, planned use, or threatened use, of force or violence to intimidate or coerce the government.’ This is often the language that refers to political activity.”

    Congressional sponsors of the bill claim it is limited in scope.

    “Though not a silver bullet, the legislation will help the nation develop a better understanding of the forces that lead to homegrown terrorism, and the steps we can take to stop it,” said Rep. Jane Harman (D-Calif.) Oct. 23, who co-authored the bill. “Free speech, espousing even very radical beliefs, is protected by our Constitution – but violent behavior is not.”

    The bill’s purpose goes beyond academic inquiry, however. In a press release dated Nov. 6, Harman stated: “the National Commission [will] propose to both Congress and [Department of Homeland Security Secretary Michael] Chertoff initiatives to intercede before radicalized individuals turn violent.” (Harman’s office refused three separate requests by The Indypendent for comment.)

    Some assert this would allow law enforcement agencies to target radicals in general. Price says, “This bill is trying to bridge the gap between those with radical dissenting views and those who engage in violent acts. It’s a form of prior restraint.”

    Price explains how this may work, citing an example in his home town of Olympia, Wash., where a peaceful blockade took place in early November at the Port of Olympia to prevent the shipment of war materials between the United States and Iraq. He says, “It will be these types of things that will start getting defined as terrorism, including Quakers and indigenous rights’ campaigns.”

    Kamau Franklin, an attorney with the Center for Constitutional Rights (CCR), is also concerned at the targeting of peaceful protests. He says the “Commission’s broad mandate can lead to the ability to turn civil disobedience, a form of protest that is centuries old, into a terrorist act.” It’s possible, he says, “that someone who would have been charged with disorderly conduct or obstruction of governmental administration may soon be charged with a federal terrorist statute.”

    “My biggest fear is that they [the commission] will call for some new criminal penalties and federal crimes,” says Franklin. “Activists are nervous about how the broad definitions could be used for criminalizing civil disobedience and squashing the momentum of the left.”

    The bill provides a list of Congressional findings, including a failure to understand the development and promotion of “violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism and ideologically based violence,” which is argued to pose a threat to domestic security. The Internet was highlighted as a tool in “providing access to broad and constant streams of terrorist-related propaganda to United States citizens.”

    The Congressional Budget Office estimates that the bill would cost $22 million over four years.

    THE THREAT (OR LACK THEREOF)

    Although the legislation is vague, a chief target appears to be Islamic militants living in the United States. Harman, in her Nov. 6 press release, says the bill is needed to combat violent radicalization and cites four cases as examples of such – all of them involving Muslim Americans allegedly engaged in terrorist activity. The bill’s language also states that proposed appointees to the National Commission should have “expertise and experience” in a long list of disciplines such as “world religions.” But the only religion named is Islam.

    The bill appears to be influenced by the government-affiliated RAND Corporation, whose website includes a letter from Harman noting, “RAND … and I have worked closely for many years.” Harman, who chairs the House Subcommittee on Intelligence, Information Sharing and Terrorism Risk Assessment, introduced H.R. 1955 on April 19, 2007.

    Two weeks prior to this, Brian Michael Jenkins of RAND delivered testimony on “Jihadist Radicalization and Recruitment” to Harman’s subcommittee. Jenkins claimed “radicalization and recruiting are taking place in the United States,” and listed a number of high-profile cases in which Muslim Americans have been arrested on terrorism-related charges.

    In his testimony, Jenkins admitted convictions in these cases – in Lackawanna, N.Y., Northern Virginia, New York City, Portland, Ore., and elsewhere – relied on charges being “interpreted broadly” by the courts.

    There has been significant criticism of how government officials have hyped many of these cases as mass terror attacks thwarted in the nick of time despite a lack of any actual plans or means to commit a violent act on the part of the defendants. It’s also been noted that in numerous instances the government employed informants who goaded the suspects into committing the illegal acts for which they were arrested.

    In June, Jenkins was back before Harman’s subcommittee discussing the role of the National Commission. According to the Congressional Quarterly website, Jenkins said, “[Homegrown terrorism] is the principal threat that we face as a country and it will likely be the principal threat that we face for decades.” The website stated, “Unless a way of intervening in the radicalization process can be found, ‘we are condemned to stepping on cockroaches one at a time,’ he added.”

    At the end of his second round of testimony, Jenkins undercut the claims that there is any real danger requiring the creation of the National Commission and Center for Excellence. He said, “Judging by the terrorist conspiracies uncovered since 9/11, violent radicalization has yielded very few recruits. Indeed, the level of terrorist activities in the United States was much higher in the 1970s that it is today.” (Repeated inquiries by The Indypendent to the RAND Corporation to interview Jenkins or other staff analysts were turned down by the media relations department, which claimed they were all unavailable for the rest of the year.)

    This has the Arab-American community worried. “When you look at the creation of the Commission, it is scary, especially when people [on the national commission] will be appointed by the White House,” said Kareem Shora, executive director of the American-Arab Anti-Discrimination Committee (ADC). He pointed to the recess appointment, despite widespread criticism, of Daniel Pipes to the U.S. Institute of Peace in 2003, who, Shora said, “propagated hate against Arabs.”

    Shora is worried H.R. 1955 will unfairly target Muslims, even though he says they have been largely helpful in terrorist investigations since Sept. 11. Despite the assistance, he says civil rights abuses continue to occur, including “voluntary interviews,” the Absconder Apprehension Initiative and the Special Registration Program.

    MAPPING MUSLIMS

    The passage of the H.R. 1955 coincided with a furor over the Los Angeles Police Department’s plan to “map” Muslim communities in the city. Appearing before the U.S. Senate Committee on Homeland Security on Oct. 30, Michael Downing, the assistant commanding officer of LAPD’s Counter-terrorism/Criminal Intelligence Bureau, said the project “will lay out the geographic locations of the many different Muslim population groups around Los Angeles [and] take a deeper look at their history, demographics, language, culture, ethnic breakdown, socio-economic status and social interactions.”

    Shora says, “Looking at a community based on religious affiliation alone … is unconstitutional. The ADC added in a press release that singling “out individuals for investigation, surveillance, and data collection based solely on religion … would violate equal protection and burden the free exercise of religion.”

    Following the outcry, the LAPD announced Nov. 15 that it was dropping the mapping plan. Opposition came from many quarters, including scholars, because the LAPD envisioned using academics in the mapping program. It reportedly intended “to have the data assembled by the University of Southern California’s Center for Risk and Economic Analysis.” Recruiting academics for counterterrorism efforts is also at the heart of H.R. 1955, which proposes a university-based Center of Excellence.

    Roberto Gonzalez, an anthropologist who co-authored a recent article with David Price criticizing the Pentagon’s use of scholars in the Iraq and Afghanistan wars, says the prospect of creating a Center “is a bad idea because it is likely to compromise the intellectual integrity of the academy.” H.R. 1955 advocates for the use of “cultural anthropologists,” which concerns Price that they would “be doing secretive work for the state.”

    Chip Berlet, senior analyst at the Boston-based Political Research Associates, argues the government is trying to establish a Center to get around legal prohibitions on gathering data specifically based on race and religion. He explains that there is already extensive research being done on the roots of political violence by scores of academics around the country but many of their findings do not fit into the government’s agenda. To Berlet, the proposed Center is nothing more than “a slush fund for politically connected hacks.”

    TARGET ‘ANTI-GLOBALISTS’

    Islamic militants are not the only threat on the government’s radar.

    “A chief problem is radical forms of Islam, but we’re not only studying radical Islam,” Harman told In These Times, a Chicago-based newsmagazine. “We’re studying the phenomenon of people with radical beliefs who turn into people who would use violence.”

    In 2004, the FBI named “eco-terrorism,” a broad term that includes property destruction, the top domestic threat. The July 2007 National Intelligence Estimate found that “special interest groups” were also likely to cause small-scale violent attacks.

    These “special interest groups” were outlined in a 2005 RAND report, “Trends in Terrorism.” One chapter was devoted to a non-Muslim “homegrown terrorist” threat – anti-globalists. “Anti-globalists directly challenge the intrinsic qualities of capitalism, charging that in the insatiable quest for growth and profit, the philosophy is serving to destroy the world’s ecology, indigenous cultures and individual welfare,” stated the report. The report identifies rightwing movements such as neo-Nazis as threats and states there should be a focus on anarchist and radical environmental groups, citing anarchists involved in civil disobedience during the 2004 National Republican Contention in New York City and millions of dollars in property damage by the Earth Liberation Front in the last decade.

    A WAR OF WORDS – A LOOK AT VIOLENCE

    Observers say using vaguely defined terms is part of a historical pattern of sweeping government repression that includes the post- World War II “Red Scare” and the FBI’s counter-intellegence program, nicknamed Cointelpro. They are also concerned that H.R. 1955 will foster a legislative momentum on criminalizing a broad range of dissident voices.

    Jules Boykoff, an assistant professor of politics and government at Pacific University and author of Beyond Bullets: The Suppression of Dissent in the United States, said he was alarmed that “violence” was not defined. He noted the definition of “ideologically based violence” is the “means to use, planned use, or threatened use of force or violence by a group or individual to promote the group or individual’s political, religious, or social beliefs.”

    “It is a circular definition, what does that mean?” asked Boykoff, while reading the bill aloud. “What does violence mean? We do not need laws like this because we already have plenty of laws on the books that make it a crime to blow up or set fire to buildings. It is called arson.”

    Boykoff commented that the bill used the terms “extremism” and “radicalism” interchangeably. “The word ‘radical’ shares the etymological root to the word ‘radish,’ which means to get to the root of the problem. So, if the government wants to get at the actual root of terrorism, then let’s really talk about it. We need to talk about the economic roots, the vast inequalities in wealth between the rich and poor.” Boykoff says historically the government has used “radical” as a way of dismissing groups as “extremists,” however, and uses the two words as synonyms.

    Hope Marston of the BORDC is nervous about the definition of homegrown terrorism, which is “about the ‘use, planned use, or threatened use, of force or violence’ to intimidate or coerce the government.” She says, “The definition does not make clear what force is.”

    Bron Taylor, a professor at University of Florida who studies radical religion and environmental movements, questioned the government’s interpretation of violence. He spent years as an ethnographic researcher exploring the propensity of individuals within the radical environmental movement to turn to violence, a word he says defines as harm to sentient beings, not property destruction.

    “There are all sorts of things that activists do that involve little or no risk of hurting people, but their actions get labeled as violent, or even worse, as acts of terrorism,” Taylor said. “For example, if 10 activists push themselves into a congressperson’s regional office, make noise, pull out files and make a scene, is that an act of terrorism? It is quite possible that the act could scare the hell out of the secretary and office workers because they don’t know these people or what they intend to do? But is that terrorism? Some people would like to frame it that way.”

    “In any political dispute, whoever succeeds in defining the terms is likely to prevail in the debate,” Taylor said. “That is why scholars and the media need to be scrupulous in the ways they use and define terms deployed by the partisans in these disputes. They should strive to come up with terms that are as descriptive, accurate and as neutral as possible.”

    THE ROLE OF THE COMMISSION

    The legislation authorizes a 10-member National Commission (the Senate bill calls for 12 members) appointed by the President, the secretary of homeland security, congressional leaders and the chairpersons of both the Senate and House committees on Homeland Security and Governmental Affairs.

    After convening, the Commission is to submit reports at six-month intervals for 18 months to the President and Congress, stating its findings, conclusions, and legislative recommendations “for immediate and long-term countermeasures … to prevent violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism and ideologically based violence.”

    Kamau Franklin of CCR says he finds the timing of the legislation disturbing coming a year before the presidential elections and about eight months prior to the Democratic and Republication National Conventions – both which of have increasingly been the site of large-scale protests and civil disobedience.

    More disturbing are the similarities to Cointelpro, which was investigated by a U.S. Senate select committee on intelligence activities (commonly known as the Church Committee), which convened in 1975. The Church Committee found that from 1956 to 1971, “the Bureau conducted a sophisticated vigilante operation aimed squarely at preventing the exercise of First Amendment rights of speech and association, on the theory that preventing the growth of dangerous groups and the propagation of dangerous ideas would protect the national security and deter violence.”

    Hope Marston says, “In the 1970s when we learned of the violation in rights that the government had been doing for 40 years, there was public outrage. Because these erosions of the Bill of Rights have happened during ‘the war on terror,’ we aren’t supposed to protest anything the government does because they are ‘protecting us.’ That feeling has made the government’s actions more dangerous.”

    MONEY FOR COPS, REPRESSION FOR FREE

    The Senate version of the bill finds that the domestic threats “cannot be easily prevented through traditional Federal intelligence or law enforcement efforts, and requires the incorporation of State and local solutions.”

    “That’s about joint terrorism task force making,” Franklin said. “It’s a way to create a federal slush fund so local police departments can get their hands on it. This happened in the 1960s.”

    Marston agreed. “This sounds like part of the same continuum we’ve experienced in the last seven years, which is the effort to deputize local law enforcement to work with the FBI and national agencies without local accountability, as we have seen with the establishment of joint-terrorism task forces across the country,” Marston said. “On 9/11, there were only a few joint-terrorism task forces, now there are more than 100 in existence. … When you talk about working with local law enforcement to possibly spy on groups and individuals to try to find the so-called ‘needle in the haystack,’ this definitely poses a threat to local autonomy.”

    Although Cointelpro was partially dismantled in the 1970s and the FBI’s power to conduct domestic intelligence curbed, many safeguards have been overturned in the last 30 years, according to David Cole and Jim Dempsey, authors of Terrorism and the Constitution: Sacrificing Civil Liberties in the Name of National Security. Legislation such as the Antiterrorism and Effective Death Penalty Act of 1996 and the 2001 USA Patriot Act “radically transformed the landscape of government power, and did so in ways that virtually guarantee repetition of some of law enforcement’s worst abuses of the past,” the authors wrote.

    In the last few years, many states have passed versions of the Patriot Act, while Congress has placed further checks on civil liberties with the Patriot Improvement and Reauthorization Act (2006), the Animal Enterprise Terrorism Act (2006) and the Protect America Now Act (2007), which amended the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act of 1978 and legalized the Bush administration’s warrantless wiretapping program.

    THE BOGUS CENTER OF EXCELLENCE

    H.R. 1955 gives Department of Homeland Security Secretary Michael Chertoff the power to establish a “Center of Excellence,” a university-based research program to “bring together leading experts and researchers to conduct multidisciplinary research and education for homeland security solutions.” The Department currently has eight Centers at academic institutions across the country, strengthening what many see as a growing military-security-academic complex.

    Rep. Harman, in an Oct. 23 press release, stated that, the Center would “examine the social, criminal, political, psychological and economic roots of domestic terrorism.”

    “I do not have a lot of concerns with this legislation,” said Jim Dempsey, policy director at the Center for Democracy and Technology. “Violent radicalization is an issue that deserves to be studied and understood. I am more comfortable with this bill’s approach, which is to treat the issue as a matter for broad study using largely open sources, than I would be with an approach that directed the FBI, DHS or the CIA to examine the issue,” Dempsey said. Dempsey was the assistant counsel to the House Judiciary Subcommittee on Civil and Constitutional Rights from 1985-1994, the former Deputy Director for the Center for National Security Studies and co-authored with David Cole, Terrorism and the Constitution.

    “I do have some concern that the Commission and the Center will focus on Muslims and will contribute to a climate of apprehension,” Dempsey continued. “But I still think the bill is probably a good idea, if its concepts are in a true spirit of inquiry.”

    Taylor agrees, but is leery that Washington politicians will hold power over commission and Center. “As an academic, I like the idea of creating Centers of Excellence in general because they bring together excellent scholars,” Taylor said. “But this is not something that the government should have a great deal of control over, because it is so ideologically charged. We’ve had plenty of examples of administrations, this one in particular, that likes to manipulate and downplay scientific findings that run at variance with their ideological and political objectives.”

    “The bill itself, no matter how well drafted, does not guarantee a balanced outcome,” noted Dempsey. “To ensure balance, human rights activists will have to get involved in the work of the Commission and the Center.”

    “If they really want to know why we have terrorism, they are going to need to explore counter-narratives,” explained Boykoff. “When the Sept. 11 attacks occurred, one narrative to explain the situation was that there is ‘an external enemy out there who hates America.’ Other narratives, such as that perhaps U.S. foreign policy might be fueling acrimonious feelings towards the U.S., were not considered. I am skeptical that the Center for Excellence would be open to these other narratives, but rather would be regurgitating the standard narrative.”

    It is unclear how researchers would gather the information.

    “If you are trying to understand in the broadest sense what turns people to violence in a variety of political causes, it is not something you can do easily, and it must be studied in a serious way,” said Taylor, who has began studying the radical environmental movement since 1989. “It is exceptionally hard to study these groups. They tend to be suspicious of new comers and outsiders, rightfully so. They aren’t fond of academic institutions or academics because they tend to view most of what goes on at institutions of higher education as being subservient to interests of global capital,” he said.

    With his research experience, Taylor believes that it is absurd to think the Commission could produce a significant report in 18 months.

    “To find out what makes people tick, you actually have to engage with them as a human being, and that is a long process that takes patience and trust building.”

    Anthropologist Price is also worried. “My concern is that anthropologists would again be doing secretive work for the state. This bill is going to be interpreted so narrowly. It is calling for an ideological litmus test,” Price said. “The military believes there are ways to get around this questions legally, but ethically, it is a big deal. There are ethical codes of conduct in anthropology, sociology, psychology, in the social sciences in general, that they very basic precautions are taken.”

    A LONG HISTORY OF DISSENT

    For U.S. historian Howard Zinn, author of A People’s History of the United States, H.R. 1955 can be added to a long list of government policies that have been passed to target dissent in the United States.

    “This is the most recent of a long series of laws passed in times of foreign policy tensions, starting with the Alien and Sedition Acts of 1798, which sent people to jail for criticizing the Adams administration,” Zinn said in an email to The Indypendent. “During World War I, the Espionage Act and Sedition Act sent close to a thousand people to jail for speaking out against the war. On the eve of World War II, the Smith Act was passed, harmless enough title, but it enabled the jailing of radicals – first Trotskyists during the war and Communist party leaders after the war, for organizing literature, etc., interpreted as “conspiring to overthrow the government by force and violence.”

    “In all cases, the environment was one in which the government was involved in a war or Cold War or near-war situation and wanted to suppress criticism of its policies,” Zinn said.

    Regardless, Zinn remains optimistic. “We should keep in mind that an act of repression by the state is a recognition of the potential of social movements and therefore we need to persist, through the repression, in order to bring about social change,” Zinn said. “We can learn to expect the repression, and not to be intimidated.”

    Hope Marston remains hopeful. “The work we have been doing at BORDC is mobilizing people in the grassroots across the political spectrum, she said. “It is not just a Leftist effort to protect the Bill of Rights. We have worked with libertarians and republicans. We have helped get 412 resolution passed on the state and local level against the erosion of the Bill of rights.”

    Editors Note: Shortly after this article went to press, the Los Angeles Police Department announced they scrapped their plan to “map the muslim community” after meeting behind closed doors with leaders in the Arab-American communities.

    A.K. Gupta contributed research and interviews.

    ID cards must be scrapped now, say MPs

    0

    By Philip Johnston

    The future of Labour’s identity card project was increasingly in doubt yesterday as MPs called for the scheme to be scrapped following the loss of the child benefit records.

    Even Labour MPs were questioning how Gordon Brown could proceed with the multi-billion pound scheme.

    John McDonnell, MP for Hayes and Harlington, said: “This has demonstrated that the ID card scheme is unworkable. It will be a ghastly, expensive mess. The Government must now drop the whole idea.”

    Karen Buck, a Labour member of the Commons home affairs committee, called for a “pause”.

    “The worst thing would be to plough on and say ‘we’re going ahead with this’ until we have had a chance for proper reflection and measure where public opinion stands when this has calmed down,” she said.

    The Tory leader David Cameron told the Prime Minister that the public would find it “bizarre” if the Government was not willing now to “stop and think” about ID cards.

    Philip Davies, Tory MP for Shipley, said: “This fiasco makes it all the more imperative that the Government forgets once and for all the ID card project. Given Labour’s track record, they’d be risking potentially catastrophic consequences if they went ahead.”

    A Downing Street spokesman insisted that the position was unchanged. He said: “In the design process, they are factoring in security measures so biometrics, such as fingerprints, will link a person securely and reliably to his or her unique identity, which means it should be much more difficult to misuse another person’s identity, even if the full details are known of his or her biographical information.”

    IT experts warned that the security would only be as effective as the people who looked after the information. If procedures were not followed or if criminals corruptly obtained the details, everyone would be at risk of ID theft.

    The Government has dropped plans, on cost grounds, to build a new database for the scheme. It will instead ”piggy-back” on an existing Whitehall IT system used for National Insurance numbers. The National Insurance numbers of every family with children aged under 16 are among the personal details now missing.

    Ministers are also under pressure to publish the ID card Gateway Review, a Whitehall audit which assesses whether the project can work and is affordable.

    The Government has refused to release its findings despite being ordered to by the Information Commissioner.

    Canadian man dies 4 days after being Tasered

    0

    A Canadian man died Saturday, four days after police used a Taser stun-gun on him because he reportedly was acting erratically in a store, police said. He was the third person to die in recent weeks in Canada after being shocked by the hand-held weapon.

    Robert Knipstrom, 36, died in a hospital after two officers used pepper spray, a Taser and their batons to subdue the British Columbia resident. Police earlier said Knipstrom was extremely agitated, aggressive and combative with the two officers who responded. He was conscious and speaking when he was taken to the hospital.

    The cause of death has yet to be determined. Although a Taser was used against Knipstrom, it was not immediately clear what role, if any, it played in his death, said Inspector Brendan Fitzpatrick.

    Investigations into Knipstrom’s death have been launched separately by the British Columbia Coroner’s Office and the Royal Canadian Mounted Police, police said at a news conference Saturday.

    The case comes as Canadian police face intense criticism over the death of Robert Dziekanski, a Polish immigrant who died at Vancouver airport last month after officers used a Taser and manhandled him.

    A Nova Scotian man also died earlier this week, 30 hours after being shocked with the Taser at a jail where he was being held on assault charges.

    Tasers a form of torture, says UN

    0

    TASER electronic stun guns are a form of torture that can kill, a UN committee has declared after several recent deaths in North America.

    “The use of these weapons causes acute pain, constituting a form of torture,” the UN’s Committee against Torture said.

    “In certain cases, they can even cause death, as has been shown by reliable studies and recent real-life events,” the committee of 10 experts said.

    Three men, all in their early 20s, were reported to have died in the United States this week, days after a Polish man died at Vancouver airport after being Tasered by Canadian police.

    The man, Robert Dziekanski, 40, fell to the ground and died after the police officers piled on top of him.

    There have been three deaths in Canada after the use of Tasers over the past five weeks.

    The company that makes the weapons has said that similar deaths have been shown by “medical science and forensic analysis” to be “attributable to other factors and not the low-energy electrical discharge of the Taser”.

    The UN committee made its comments in recommendations to Portugal, which has bought the newest Taser X26 stun gun for use by police.

    Portugal “should consider giving up the use of the Taser X26,” as its use can have a grave physical and mental impact on those targeted, which violates the UN’s Convention against Torture, the experts said.

    Source

    Flight logs reveal secret rendition

    0

    THE secret flight plans of American military planes have revealed for the first time how European countries helped send prisoners, including British citizens, to the Guantanamo Bay prison camp.

    Despite widespread criticism of alleged human rights abuses and torture at the US base in Cuba, a Sunday Times investigation has shown that at least five European countries gave the United States permission to fly nearly 700 terrorist suspects across their territory.

    Three years ago, The Sunday Times published flight logs of CIA civilian jets in Europe, setting off a controversy over the whether countries across the continent have been secretly involved in America’s rendition of terrorist suspects to countries that carry out torture.

    The row is now set to be reignited. Inquiries by Ana Gomes, a Portuguese member of the European parliament, have uncovered not only more CIA flight logs but also more sensitive military flight plans, which until now have remained a closely guarded secret.

    The logs show how most prisoners changed planes at a Turkish military airbase and flew across Greek, Italian and Portuguese airspace. Others reached Cuba after touching down in Spain, whose governing socialist party once expressed indignation at conditions in Guantanamo.

    The flight logs show that three Britons – Shafiq Rasul, Jamal Udeen and Asif Iqbal – were flown across Europe to Cuba on January 14, 2002. Moazzam Begg, another Briton, was taken by the same route to Guantanamo on February 2, 2003; and Binyam Mohamed, a British resident whose release the British government is now trying to negotiate, arrived in Cuba after crossing Europe in a special flight in September 2004.

    According to the flight plans, the first 23 prisoners to arrive at Guantanamo – including another British citizen, Feroz Abbasi, then 21, and an Australian, David Hicks – had arrived at the American naval base in Cuba after flying from the Moron airbase in Spain.

    Abbasi has claimed in a statement that prisoners were abused within hours of arriving. “We were made to sit on our heels, one foot over the other, supported by one foot’s toes alone, for hours. Some of us were old, weak, fatigued, and injured – they were the ones to drop first in the searing Caribbean heat.”

    Described by the Pentagon as the “worst of the worst” from Al-Qaeda and the Taliban, the images of prisoners such as Abbasi dressed in orange jumpsuits, their heads shaved and shackled by their wrists and ankles, shocked the world. Within a day, Donald Rumsfeld, then US defence secretary, announced that the Geneva conventions would not apply to what were now called “enemy combatants”.

    Last week, Europe’s leading watchdog on human rights alleged that European countries had breached the international convention against torture by giving the US secret permission to use its airspace.

    Thomas Hammarberg, the Council of Europe’s commissioner for human rights, said: “What happened at Guantanamo was torture and it is illegal to provide facilities or anything to make this torture possible. Under the law, European governments should have intervened and should not have given permission to let these flights happen.”

    Gomes added: “It’s clear to me that Guantanamo could not have been created without the involvement of European countries.”

    Methods used at Guantanamo Bay, condemned by Britain’s Court of Appeal as a legal “black hole” and as a “monstrous failure of justice” by one law lord, have included the prolonged use of isolation, sleep deprivation, and use of stress positions. “These are methods that have been declared as unlawful by the European Court of Human Rights,” Hammarberg said.

    The military flight plans show that all key flights arriving in Guantanamo had come across European airspace either through Spain or the Incirlik airbase in southeastern Turkey. The Sunday Times compared the military flight plans against a database compiled by Reprieve, the British-based charity that represents Guantanamo prisoners, of when prisoners first weighed in at the camp.

    The investigation, cross-checked against other Pentagon documents, shows for the first time which prisoner arrived on which flight at Guantanamo, and by what route. At least 170 other prisoners flew over Spanish territory, more than 700 crossed Portuguese space, and more than 680 were transshipped at Incirlik. Most flights also crossed Greek and Italian airspace, according to a source in European air traffic control.

    On February 2 2003, for example, a US Air Force C-17 Globemaster plane took off from Incirlik with 27 prisoners on board for Cuba. The same day, prisoner number 558 weighed in at 136lb (62kg) at the camp. He can be named as Moazzam Begg, now 39, from Birmingham, who was released in January 2005, and has never been charged with a crime.

    Interviewed by phone last week, Begg recalled: “Inside the plane there was a chain around our waist, and it connected to cuffs around my wrists, which were tied in the back, and to my ankles. We were seated but it was so painful not being able to speak, to hear, to breathe properly, to look, to turn left or right, to move your hands, stretch your legs, or anything.” At the time flights were landing in Spain and crossing Spanish airspace, socialist leaders there were expressing “indignation” over conditions in Guantanamo. Now the socialists are in government after winning an election in March 2004 just after the Madrid train bombings and they are being asked to defend Spain’s continued collaboration with American operations. Under international law, government and military planes can cross another country’s territory only with diplomatic permission.

    In a statement to the European parliament on the visits of CIA planes to Spain, the foreign minister Miguel Angel Moratinos has testified: “Our territory may have been used not to commit crimes on it, but as a stopover on the way to committing crime in another country.”

    Spain, it has now emerged, had a specific agreement with the US to allow flights and visits to Spanish airbases for American planes.

    In Portugal, the foreign minister Luis Amado has said flights across his country’s airspace took place “under the aegis of the UN and Nato and that Portugal naturally follows the principle of good faith in the relations with its allies”. Nato’s role in Guantanamo stems from a secret agreement made in Brussels on October 4 2001 by all Nato members, including Britain. Although never made public, Lord Robertson, the former British defence secretary who was later Nato’s secretary-general, explained that day that Nato had agreed to provide “blanket overflight clearances for the United States and other allies’ aircraft for military flights related to operations against terrorism”.

    Today, Nato is more coy about its role in helping send prisoners to Guantanamo.

    In a letter to Gomes, Jaap de Hoop Scheffer, the current secretary-general, said no Nato planes had “flown to or from Guantanamo Bay” and that Nato “as an organisation has no involvement or co-ordinating role in providing clearance or overflight rights for other flights”. Turkey, meanwhile, has declared that its agencies had “reached no findings regarding any unacknowledged deprivation of liberty conducted by foreign agencies within the territory of the republic of Turkey or any transport by aircraft or otherwise of the persons deprived of their liberty”.

    In London, Clive Stafford Smith, legal director of Reprieve, said, with America threatening that Guantanamo prisoners faced the death penalty, European governments had made “pious statements” that they would never send prisoners to the US without obtaining assurances they would not be executed.

    Stafford Smith added: “Some European governments, it’s now clear, systematically assisted in clandestine flights and illegal prisoner transfers to Guantanamo Bay. We need a full investigation and Europeans need to face their responsibility for these crimes.”

    See flight logs and complete list of prisoners at www.ghostplane.net

    Additional reporting: Natalia Viana

    A Generalized Meltdown of Financial Institutions

    1

    Reality has finally caught up to the stock market. The American consumer is underwater, the banks are buried in debt, and the housing market is in terminal distress. The Dow is now below its 200-Day Moving Average — the first big “sell” signal. Anything below 12,500 could trigger program-trading and crash the market. The increased volatility suggests that we are watching a “real time” meltdown.

    International Business editor for the UK Telegraph, Ambrose Evans Pritchard, summed up yesterday’s action in the Asian markets:

    “The global credit crisis has hit Asia with a vengeance for the first time, triggering a massive flight to safety as investors across the region pull out of risky assets. Yields on three-month deposits in China and Korea have plummeted to near 1pc in a spectacular fall over recent days, caused by panic withdrawals from money market funds and credit derivatives.

    “‘This’ is a severe warning sign,’ said Hans Redeker, currency chief at BNP Paribas. ‘Asia ignored the credit crunch in August but now we’re seeing the poison beginning to paralyze the whole global economy.'” (Credit ‘Heart attack’ engulfs China and Korea” Ambrose Evans Pritchard,UK Telegraph,)

    The credit storm that began in the United States with subprime mortgages has spread to markets across the globe. In fact, the train has already crashed. What we’re seeing now is the boxcars piling up on top of each other.

    On Tuesday Chinese government officials ordered a complete halt to bank lending to slow the speculative frenzy that has created an enormous equity bubble in the stock market. According to the Wall Street Journal:

    “Chinese authorities are slamming the brakes on bank lending, in their latest attempt to curb the runaway investment threatening to overheat what is soon to be the world’s third-largest economy. In recent weeks, regulators have quietly ordered China’s commercial banks to freeze lending through the end of the year, according to bankers in several cities. The bankers say that to comply, they are canceling loans and credit lines with businesses and individuals.” (“China freezes lending to Curb Investing Frenzy” Wall Street Journal)

    The move illustrates how concerned the Chinese are that a slowdown in US consumer spending will trigger a crash on the Shanghai stock market. It also shows that the Chinese are having difficulty dealing with the inflation generated by the hundreds of billions of US dollars absorbed via the trade imbalance with the US. China is awash in USDs and that surplus is causing a steady rise in food and energy costs. This could be mitigated by allowing their currency to “float” freely. But a sudden, steep increase in the Chinese yuan’s value could also send the world headlong into a global recession. For now, the lending freeze and price fixing appear to be the way out.

    Another sign that the markets have reached a “tipping point” appeared in a Reuters article on Wednesday; “Interbank Covered Bond Trading Halted on Volatility”:

    “Renewed credit turmoil and volatility led the European Covered Bond Council (ECBC) on Wednesday to suspend inter-bank market-making in covered bonds until Monday, Nov. 26.

    The move is a sign of the stress in the covered bond market, which is dominated by German institutions that have almost a trillion euros of covered bonds outstanding.

    Covered bonds — backed by pools of assets that remain on the borrower’s balance sheet — are usually highly liquid and typically rated triple-A by ratings agencies. The ECBC’s recommendation is aimed at relieving the pressure on market makers who are forced to quote prices at a fixed bid-offer spread.

    “In light of the current market situation and in order to avoid undue over-acceleration in the widening of spreads, the 8-to-8 Market-Makers & Issuers Committee recommends that inter-bank market-making be suspended,” the ECBC said in a release.”

    Note: This isn’t mortgage-backed junk that’s being sold, but highly liquid bonds that are usually easy to cash in. The ECBC’s action is a sign of pure desperation and indicates that credit paralysis has infected the entire euro banking system.

    Reuters: “Due to general market conditions and the specific mechanics of the inter-dealer market making it even seems possible that inter-dealer market making will not be resumed this year.”

    That’s bad. The mechanism for converting covered bonds into cash has broken down.

    The dollar took another pasting on Wednesday, sliding to $1.49 on the euro; another new record. Gold shot up to $814 per ounce. Oil continues to flirt with the $100 per barrel mark, and the yen rose to 107 per dollar forcing a sell-off of hedge fund assets levered through the carry trade.

    Jon Basile, economist at Credit Suisse, summed it up like this: “There’s a heck of a lot of bad news out there.” Indeed.

    In California Governor Arnold Schwarzenegger has joined with four mortgage lenders to freeze adjustable interest rates (ARMs) for some of the state’s highest-risk borrowers; another unprecedented move. The Governor hopes to avoid a collapse of the California real estate market which has gone into a tailspin. Home sales have plummeted more than 40 per cent for the last two months. Prices have dropped sharply—roughly 12 per cent statewide. New construction has slowed to a crawl. Layoffs are steadily rising. Jumbo loans (mortgages over $417,000) have been put on the “Endangered Species” list. Even qualified borrowers can’t get mortgages. Nothing is selling. California housing is “off the cliff”.

    Schwarzenegger’s plan to keep over-extended subprime mortgage-holders in their homes faces an uncertain future. What incentive is there for homeowners to continue paying exorbitant monthly rates when their payments are not applied to the principle? The homeowners would be better off bailing out, accepting foreclosure, and starting over with a clean slate.

    It’s unrealistic to thinks that Schwarzenegger can stop the tidal wave of foreclosures that are sweeping across the state. An estimated 3 million homeowners will lose their homes nationwide.

    If you want to blame someone; blame Alan Greenspan. He’s the one who created this mess. According to the economist Mike Shedlock:

    “The Fed caused the credit crunch by slashing interest rates to 1 per cent to bail out its banking buddies in the wake of a dotcom bubble collapse. All the Fed did was create a bigger bubble. This bubble is so big in fact that it cannot even be bailed out. It’s the end of the line for a serially bubble blowing Fed.

    “So not only was this the biggest credit bubble in history, this was also the biggest transfer of wealth from the poor and middle class to the already enormously wealthy. That is the real travesty of justice regardless of whether or not the price tag is $1 trillion, $2 trillion, or $10 trillion.” (Mike Shedlock, “Mish’s Global Economic Trend Analysis”)

    The problem has gotten so serious that even Secretary of the Treasury, Henry Paulson, is putting up red flags. Last week, Paulson ignited a sell-off on Wall Street when he made this statement:

    “The nature of the problem will be significantly bigger next year because 2006 [mortgages] had lower underwriting standards, no amortization, and no down payments….We’re never going to be able to process the number of workouts and modifications (to mortgages) that are going to be necessary doing it just sort of one-off. I’ve talked to enough people now to know that there’s no way that’s going to work.”

    The desperation is palpable. Like Schwarzenegger, Paulson is trying to get mortgage-lenders to provide a safety net for struggling borrowers who are defaulting on their loans.

    Paulson is calling for emergency legislation that will allow the Federal Housing Administration to play a greater role in the relief effort. The FHA has already expanded its traditional role by taking on hundreds of billions in extra debt just to keep a few “private” mortgage lenders and banks from going bankrupt. Of course, when Paulson’s plan goes kaput and the debts pile up; it’ll be the taxpayer that foots the bill.

    “Paulson also called the Senate’s failure to pass legislation overhauling mortgage giants Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac frustrating,” saying that the two government-sponsored entities need to be playing a bigger role in the housing market.

    “If we ever need them it’s during times like today, and they’re most valuable when there is distress in the mortgage market,” he said. “I’d like to see them playing an even bigger role.”(Wall Street Journal)

    Fannie and Freddie, have already posted enormous quarterly losses and don’t have the capital reserves to put millions of subprime mortgage-holders under their “government-sponsored” umbrella. Paulson is just grabbing at straws.

    Similar troubles are brewing in the broader market where late-payments and defaults have spread to credit card debt and new car loans. Every area of “securitized” debt has suddenly veered off the road and into the ditch. Last week the Fed injected more credit into the teetering banking system than anytime since 9-11.

    No one has predicted the downward-spiral in the market more accurately than Nouriel Roubini. Roubini is a Professor at the Stern School of Business at New York University. His analysis appears regularly on his blogsite, Global EconoMonitor. Last week’s prediction was particularly dire and is worth reprinting here:

    “It is increasingly clear by now that a severe U.S. recession is inevitable in next few months…I now see the risk of a severe and worsening liquidity and credit crunch leading to a generalized meltdown of the financial system of a severity and magnitude like we have never observed before. In this extreme scenario whose likelihood is increasing we could see a generalized run on some banks; and runs on a couple of weaker (non-bank) broker dealers that may go bankrupt with severe and systemic ripple effects on a mass of highly leveraged derivative instruments that will lead to a seizure of the derivatives markets… massive losses on money market funds with a run on both those sponsored by banks and those not sponsored by banks; ..ever growing defaults and losses ($500 billion plus) in subprime, near prime and prime mortgages with severe knock-on effect on the RMBS and CDOs market; massive losses in consumer credit (auto loans, credit cards); severe problems and losses in commercial real estate…; the drying up of liquidity and credit in a variety of asset backed securities putting the entire model of securitization at risk; runs on hedge funds and other financial institutions that do not have access to the Fed’s lender of last resort support; a sharp increase in corporate defaults and credit spreads; and a massive process of re-intermediation into the banking system of activities that were until now altogether securitized.” (Nouriel Roubini’s Global EconoMonitor)

    “A generalized meltdown of the financial system”.

    Looks like Chicken Little might have gotten it right this time; “The sky IS falling.”

    Mike Whitney lives in Washington state. He can be reached at: fergiewhitney@msn.com

    Halliburton Concentration Camps Already Constructed

    2

    On February 17, 2006, in a speech to the Council on Foreign Relations, Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld spoke of the harm being done to the country’s security, not just by the enemy, but also by what he called “news informers” who needed to be combated in “a contest of wills.”

    In 2002 Attorney General John Ashcroft announced his desire to see camps for U.S. citizens deemed to be “enemy combatants.” 

    A Defense Department document, entitled the “Strategy for Homeland Defense and Civil Support,” has set out a military strategy against terrorism that envisions an “active, layered defense” both inside and outside U.S. territory. In the document, the Pentagon pledges to “transform U.S. military forces to execute homeland defense missions in the . . . U.S. homeland.” The strategy calls for increased military reconnaissance and surveillance

    The Washington Post reported on February 15, 2006 that the National Counterterrorism Center’s (NCTC) central repository holds the names of 325,000 terrorist suspects, a fourfold increase since fall of 2003. A Pentagon official said the Counterintelligence Field Activity’s TALON program has amassed files on antiwar protesters.

    Shortly after Bush orchestrated 9/11, he issued “Military Order Number One”, which empowered him to detain any noncitizen as an international terrorist or enemy combatant. Today that order extends to U.S. citizens as well.

    Halliburton subsidiary “KBR has been awarded a contract announced by the Department of Homeland Security’s United States Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE) component. The Indefinite Delivery/Indefinite Quantity contingency contract is to support ICE facilities and has a maximum total value of $385 million over a five year term. The contract provides for establishing temporary detention and processing capabilities in the event of an emergency influx of immigrants into the United States, or to support the rapid development of new programs”See Source Document on Halliburton Site or page 1, & 5 below
    HOUSTON, Texas — Halliburton (NYSE:HAL) announced that income from continuing operations for the full year of 2005 was $2.4 billion. Consolidated revenue in the fourth quarter of 2005 was $5.8 billion. Consolidated operating income was $779 million in the fourth quarter of 2005. This increase was largely attributable to higher activity in the Energy Services Group (ESG), partially offset by lower revenue in KBR primarily on government services projects in the Middle East. Annual operating income more than tripled to $2.7 billion in 2005.

    Why exactly are prisons being built for “the rapid development of new programs”. Halliburton’s company site confirms that the government is engaged in a massive construction and preparation exercise to build concentration camps and prisoner processing facilities in the United States. This is particularity astonishing and disturbing considering that the U.S. already incarcerates more orders of magnitude more people than any other nation, about on-par with U.S.S.R. at the height of Stalin’s era.

    The contract of the Halliburton subsidiary KBR to build immigrant detention facilities is part of a longer-term Homeland Security plan titled ENDGAME, which sets as its goal the removal of “all removable aliens” and “potential terrorists.” In the 1980s Richard Cheney and Donald Rumsfeld discussed similar emergency detention powers as part of a super-secret program of planning for what was euphemistically called “Continuity of Government” (COG). These men planned for suspension of the Constitution, not just after nuclear attack, but for any “national security emergency,” which they vaguely defined in Executive Order 12656 of 1988.

    Over 800 concentration camps are reported throughout the United States, all fully operational and ready to receive U.S. Prisoners who disagree with the government. The concentration camps are all staffed and manned by full-time guards, however, they are all empty. These camps are to be operated by FEMA (Federal Emergency Management Agency) when Martial Law is implemented in the United States (at the stroke of a Presidential pen and the Attorney General’s signature on a warrant).

    The camps have railroad facilities as well as roads leading to and from the detention facilities, many have airports. Like Auschwitz, some of the camps have airtight buildings and furnaces. The majority of the camps can each house a population of 20,000 prisoners. Currently, the largest of these facilities is just outside of Fairbanks, Alaska. The Alaskan facility is a massive “mental health” facility and can hold approximately 2 million people.

    Following the Halliburton subsidiary KBR (formerly Kellogg Brown and Root) announcement on Jan. 24 that it had been awarded a $385 million contingency contract by the Department of Homeland Security to build detention camps, two weeks later, on Feb. 6, Homeland Security Secretary Michael Chertoff announced that the Fiscal Year 2007 federal budget would allocate over $400 million to add 6,700 additional detention beds (an increase of 32 percent over 2006. What is interesting in the Homeland Security plan is that each concrete prison bed costs $60,000 per bed! Observing these concentration camps and general jail and prison facilities throughout the U.S., the Homeland Security plan is clearly buffered to build significantly more than 6,700 additional beds.

    The Homeland Security $400 million allocation is more than a four-fold increase over the FY 2006 budget, which provided $90 million for the same purpose. Both the contract and the budget allocation are in partial fulfillment of an ambitious 10-year Homeland Security strategic plan, code-named ENDGAME, authorized in 2003. According to a 49-page Homeland Security document on the plan, ENDGAME expands “a mission first articulated in the Alien and Sedition Acts of 1798.” Its goal is the capability to “remove all removable aliens,” including “illegal economic migrants, aliens who have committed criminal acts, asylum-seekers (required to be retained by law) or potential terrorists.” The government’s definition of an enemy combatant covers almost any individual who promotes the rudimentary rights guaranteed by the U.S. Constitution.

    Readiness Exercise 1984 – Rex 84
    Rex 84 is a United States federal government program to test their ability to detain large numbers of American citizens. Exercises similar to Rex 84 happen periodically. From 1967 to 1971 the FBI kept a list of persons to be rounded up as subversive, dubbed the “ADEX” list.

    Texas Congressman Henry Gonzales revealed many years ago plans of Rex 84 which former colonel Ollie North helped design. The late Representative Jack Brooks also of Texas brought this concentration camp and internment program as well as the Continuity of Government Program to light during the Iran Contra hearing. The chairman refused to let North even talk about them in open hearings under “National Security.” Mr. Gonzales stated these camps and plans were for the detention of AMERICANS, especially those who refused to surrender their weapons.

    The Rex-84 Alpha Explan (Readiness Exercise 1984, Exercise Plan), indicates that FEMA in association with 34 other federal civil departments and agencies conducted a civil readiness exercise during April 5-13, 1984. It was conducted in coordination and simultaneously with a Joint Chiefs exercise, Night Train 84, a worldwide military command post exercise (including Continental U.S. Forces or CONUS) based on multi-emergency scenarios operating both abroad and at home. In the combined exercise, Rex-84 Bravo, FEMA and DOD led the other federal agencies and departments, including the Central Intelligence Agency, the Secret Service, the Treasury, the Federal Bureau of Investigation, and the Veterans Administration through a gaming exercise to test military assistance in civil defense.

    Cont.. www.libertyforlife.com/jail-police/us_concentration_camps.htm

    Additives ‘a risk to children’s health’

    0

    Parents have been warned to remove food additives linked to hyperactive behaviour from children’s diets by the EU’s leading expert on the issue.

    Dr John Larsen, who heads the European Food Safety Authority’s panel on additives, said the measure would be “prudent” to protect youngsters’ health.

    His comments came as researchers at Southampton University warned that additives harm the “psychological health” of children, holding back their progress at school and their ability to learn to read at a young age.

    The discovery has triggered calls from consumer and health groups for a total ban on additives.

    At yesterday’s EFSA conference in Brussels, Dr Larsen, a member of the Danish National Food Institute, said: “It would be prudent to take these out of the diet. It seems they may have this ability to worsen something that is going on.

    “If parents think there might be a problem – such as with behaviour – they should try removing these additives.”

    Despite campaigners – including the Daily Mail – lobbying to have dangerous additives banned from foods, the Government has so far refused to do so.

    However, the Foods Standards Agency has passed responsibility on a final decision to the EFSA and a panel headed by Dr Larsen.

    But he has refused to say whether he would like a total ban, insisting his team would need to examine properly the Southampton research.

    The study, which has been praised as the most thorough of its kind, was led by Professor Jim Stevenson.

    It concluded that additives can cause “significant adverse effects” in children.

    Professor Stevenson added: “I feel that the effects we are seeing here are sufficiently great to represent a threat to health.”

    Source

    Japan opposition stands ground on Afghan mission

    0

    TOKYO (AFP) – Japan’s opposition stood firm Thursday against resuming a naval mission supporting the US-led “war on terror” in Afghanistan as a ship returned home from the Indian Ocean.

    Prime Minister Yasuo Fukuda made a new pitch to the opposition hours after returning from a two-nation trip which included a trip to Washington where he promised US President George W. Bush he would work to restart the deployment.

    “He called for support for the Afghan refuelling mission… He pleaded over and over again,” main opposition leader Ichiro Ozawa told reporters after he met Fukuda.

    Ozawa said he rejected Fukuda’s proposal to have consultations on resuming the naval mission, which provided fuel and other logistical support to troops in Afghanistan.

    “We will pursue the policy of having debate in parliament,” he said, arguing his party’s view on how Japan’s troops should contribute to the global fight against terrorism was “fundamentally different” from that of the ruling party.

    The opposition, which won control of the upper house of parliament in July 29 polls, opposed the mission arguing that it is against the nation’s pacifist constitution and Japan has been too close to the Bush administration.

    Fukuda, whose predecessor quit in part over the row, discussed the Indian Ocean mission during a visit last week to the US to meet Bush. He returned to Japan early Thursday after taking part in an Asian summit in Singapore.

    Fukuda argues that Japan must play a greater role in international security as the world’s second largest economy. But the government was forced to call the ships home on November 1 as legislation expired amid legislative deadlock.

    The Kirisame destroyer, which had been at sea for four months, returned Thursday morning to Sasebo port in southwestern Nagasaki prefecture, television footage showed.

    The other ship in the mission, the Tokiwa oiler, is due to return to Tokyo on Friday, a defence ministry official said.

    The opposition’s refusal to cooperate with Fukuda raises the possibility that the ruling bloc’s bill to resume the Afghan mission may remain stuck in the opposition-led upper house as the current session expires on December 15.

    Ozawa said “there is not enough time left” for full deliberation of the bill in the upper house.

    He blamed the ruling camp for “wasting time” after the election setback.

    “In the first place, the (ruling) Liberal Democratic Party failed to recognise what would happen after seeing the results on July 29,” he said.

    The opposition has also said it would first probe a growing corruption scandal before considering Fukuda’s bill, which was sent by the lower house last week with an overwhelming majority by the ruling coalition.

    The scandal has implicated Finance Minister Fukushiro Nukaga, who admitted playing golf with a defence contractor, former Yamada Corp. executive Motonobu Miyazaki, who has been arrested on embezzlement and document forgery charges.

    Nukaga, who has also served as defence chief before, has denied any wrongdoing.

    The defence ministry said Thursday it has suspended trade with Yamada and its US subsidiary as its president admitted padding bills on military supplies.

    Incompetence Shall Set Brits Free from Database Hell‏

    0

    The lesson of the Great Data Loss is not that the Brit government and the civil service are incompetent (although they are), but that in a market economy the government can’t hire competent IT people. That’s good for Brit freedom.

    The scandal:

    Searches were continuing for two CDs containing the names, addresses and bank details of 9.5million adults and the names, dates of birth and National Insurance numbers of all 15.5 million children in the country which went missing after being put in the post by HM Revenue and Customs.

    It has since emerged that the National Audit Office, which had asked for the CDs, had specifically requested that bank details and other sensitive data be removed from them when it asked for other copies of the Child Benefit database in March, but a senior manager refused to do so on cost grounds.

    On October 18 two unencrypted CDs were put in the post, unregistered and unrecorded, which never arrived at the NAO.

    As a result the bank details of every parent in the country are now missing, and experts have warned that criminal gangs could use the information to commit fraud and identity theft for years to come if the information falls into the wrong hands.

    Obviously culpability lies with the guy who exported & burned the data and mailed the disks insecurely, and responsibility lies with the management chain above him, including Brown.

    But the real fault is with the design of the database, which any competent developer would have built so that only encrypted data could be exported.

    A major government IT system has such an obvious fatal flaw because the people who designed, built, and maintain it are second rate.

    The Brit government gets IT talent either through direct hires, or (more commonly) by subcontracting to big consultancies. But any first rate system designer or developer will avoid government work like the plague because:

    1. The specification, rather than being rooted in the market realities of a commercial customer, will instead be set by pols, and they change with the wind, taking the spec with it. Spec changes make for bugs, low productivity, and frustration as good work has to be junked.

    In this particular case, until recently data sharing between government departments was forbidden, but the Blair/Brown soft fascism reversed that, and now all sorts of private data gets sent between government departments – when I recently booked a flight with British Airways, they told me they had to pass all my booking data to the Brit Customs and Tax authorities, even though I don’t live in the UK.

    So my guess is the export facility in this case was kludged on to an older system. But since data export is a hugely complex area, without first rate designers it was done wrong.

    2. Good developers hate bureaucratic development methodologies, because they know they do much better and faster work in small tightly integrated teams. But governments prefer micromanagement and (apparent) risk-avoidance and mandate large teams of people, with each developer working on a tiny piece of functionality.

    3. Still, money talks, and government would get quality if it paid good developers what it pays senior ministers. But of course it won’t.

    So that’s why every Brit government IT project has been a disaster, and why the National ID system will quickly be compromised

    More generally, this limitation blocks the Brit elite from ever getting the Orwellian control of citizens it so relentlessly seeks.

    And when the Brits do finally decide to revolt, their government’s second rate IT systems will easily be subverted by a few smart hackers.

    http://depleteduranium.wordpress.com/2007/11/22/incompetence-shall-set-brits-free/

    Time to break free

    0

    The Middle East’s oil exporters should end their currencies’ peg to the dollar
     IN THE past week Iran’s president, Mahmoud Ahmadinejad, has damned it as a “worthless piece of paper” and China’s premier, Wen Jiabao, has moaned that it is causing his country “big pressure”. The dollar’s relentless decline–it hit a new low of $1.49 against the euro on November 21st–is prompting jibes from America’s critics, jangling investors’ nerves and giving policymakers headaches.

    Nowhere are the dilemmas more acute than in the Gulf, where virtually all the oil-rich states peg their currencies to the greenback. The combination of soaring oil prices and the tumbling dollar is distorting their economies and fuelling inflation. When the Gulf states meet on December 3rd in Qatar, they should agree to loosen their ties to the dollar.

    The argument for linking to the greenback was to provide an anchor for the region’s economies, many of which are small, open and financially immature. In effect, the Gulf states import America’s monetary policy. The trouble is that a fixed currency makes it hard for oil exporters to adjust to swings in the price of oil. And monetary policy in the world’s largest oil-importer is not always right for those who sell the stuff.

    Soaring oil prices have brought the Gulf Arabs huge riches. Their real exchange rates, as a result, ought to rise. The simplest way to do that is for the currency to strengthen, but the peg prevents nominal appreciation. Worse, the dollar itself has been falling. The result is rising domestic inflation. Some smaller Gulf economies now have inflation rates of around 10%.

    What is to be done? The two most widely discussed options are to revalue or to shift to a currency basket (which Kuwait has already done). By repegging their currencies to the dollar at a higher rate, the Gulf states would alleviate some of today’s inflationary pressure. But they would not address the underlying mismatch between any oil exporter and a dollar peg. Switching the peg to a basket of currencies that included, say, the euro and yen as well would give the Gulf states a bit more protection against oil-price swings, but it is hardly a perfect fit. Since most big currencies belong to oil importers, the Gulf States would still be linking their currencies to monetary conditions that may not suit them.

    Eventually, the currency pegs should be abandoned. After all, developed economies that are big commodity exporters, such as Norway, allow their currencies to float. In recent years many emerging economies have shifted from exchange-rate pegs to a “managed float”. Instead of aiming for an exchange rate, their central banks have an inflation target. If the Gulf states move to a single currency, as they plan to in the next few years, that currency should surely float. But floating is not feasible in the short-term. These countries have no history of independent monetary policy and few institutions to conduct it.

    Look beyond a basket

    For the moment, the Gulf states are stuck with a currency peg. But they could do better than the dollar. One intriguing idea is to include the oil price as part of a basket that includes the leading currencies (see article). This would ensure their currencies absorbed some of the impact of oil-price swings.

    A big uncertainty is what such a shift would mean for the dollar. In the short term, the effect on the Gulf states’ appetite for greenbacks would not be dramatic, since the dollar would have a big weight in any basket. And there should not be a sudden sale of the oil exporters’ dollar reserves. The worry is that the end of the Gulf states’ dollar peg would send jittery investors into a panic. That risk is real. But with oil prices rising and the dollar falling, the dangers of inaction are greater. The Gulf states need to get rid of their dollar peg now.

    http://www.economist.com/opinion/displaystory.cfm?story_id=10177927

    Depleted Uranium Dust May Kill You

    0

    DU May be Causing Global Contamination

    There are those who believe that the widespread use of Depleted Uranium in weaponry is creating a cloud of low-level (but hazardous) radioactive particles around the world, causing a global epidemic of diabetes and cancer. (DU is used by the US and British military in coating tanks and shells.) One article on the global contamination theory is here: The Queen’s Death Star. And here’s the LATEST development:

    They were told depleted uranium was not hazardous. Now, 23 years after a US arms plant closed, workers and residents have cancer – and experts say their suffering shows the use of such weapons may be a war crime. It is 50 years since Tony Ciarfello and his friends used the yard of a depleted uranium weapons factory as their playground in Colonie, a suburb of Albany in upstate New York state. . .Today there are lumps on Ciarfello’s chest – strange, round tumours that protrude about an inch. ‘No one seems to know what they are,’ he says. ‘I’ve also had a brain aneurysm caused by a suspected tumour. I’m constantly fatigued and for years I’ve had terrible pains, deep inside my leg bones. I fall over without warning and I’ve got a heart condition.’ Ciarfello’s illnesses have rendered him unable to work for years. Aged 57 and a father of five, he looks much older.

    In a paper to be published in the next issue of the scientific journal Science of the Total Environment, a team led by Professor Randall Parrish of Leicester University reports the results of a three-year study of Colonie, funded by Britain’s Ministry of Defence.

    Parrish’s team has found that DU contamination, which remains radioactive for millions of years, is in effect impossible to eradicate, not only from the environment but also from the bodies of humans. Twenty-three years after production ceased they tested the urine of five former workers. All are still contaminated with DU. . .

    TV footage shot in Baghdad in 2003 shows children playing in the remains of tanks coated with thick, black DU oxide, while there have long been claims that the DU shells that destroyed Saddam Hussein’s tanks in the 1991 Gulf war were responsible for high rates of cancer in places such as Basra.

    For a general article on DU see Nukes of the Gulf War by John Shirley.

    http://signsofwitness.com/?p=1111

    Liar cop Blair survives no-confidence vote‏

    0

    Commissioner Sir Ian Blair has won a vote of confidence by members of the Metropolitan Police Authority. The UK’s most senior officer was facing censure after his force was found guilty of health and safety failures following the shooting of Brazilian Jean Charles de Menezes.

    Fifteen members of the MPA supported Sir Ian, seven voted against him and there was one abstention.

    After the vote Sir Ian said: “I’m going to go back and get on with my job.”

    Pleased

    He added: “I’m pleased to have the backing of the majority of the police authority. I don’t in any way minimise the tragedy that is the death of Jean Charles de Menezes. ”

    MPA chairman Len Duvall said Sir Ian had the “overwhelming support” of the Police Authority.

    He said: “I think it is appropriate he is allowed to get on with his job, which is about learning the lessons of this and making sure it never happens again in London.”

    Mr Duvall said Sir Ian was not a “lame duck commissioner”.

    He added that he expected Sir Ian to continue working for the rest of his contract, which continues for another two and a half years.

    Despite the vote, the pressure remains on Sir Ian to resign. The Conservative candidate for London mayor, Boris Johnson, said he still thought the commissioner’s position was “very difficult”.

    Speaking on the BBC’s World at One he said: “I did say from the very beginning that I thought he should go. I think it was absolutely unbelievable that nobody seemed willing to pay the price for the shooting of an innocent man in Stockwell Tube station.”

    Mr de Menezes’s cousin, Erionaldo da Silva, said: “We believe Ian Blair’s position is untenable and we have no confidence in him. We do not believe that this vote resolves the main issues on this case.”

    He called for an inquest into his cousin’s death “as soon as possible”.

    During the meeting, Sir Ian’s supporters argued that the commissioner should be allowed to draw a line under the Stockwell shooting and concentrate on making London safer.

    Silence

    Sir Ian had sat in virtual silence during the four-hour meeting as members of the police authority argued whether he should keep his job.

    One critic said Sir Ian should follow the example of the chairman of HM Revenue and Customs and resign.

    But Mr Duvall said the watchdog body risked bringing itself into disrepute by the public and vitriolic attacks on Sir Ian.

    He said they were entering “virtually unknown territory” as they met to make their most important decision since the authority was created seven years ago.

    If the authority had failed to back Sir Ian, Home Secretary Jacqui Smith would have come under pressure to sack him.

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk/7107631.stm

    Cellphone Tracking Powers on Request

    0

    By Ellen NakashimaFederal officials are routinely asking courts to order cellphone companies to furnish real-time tracking data so they can pinpoint the whereabouts of drug traffickers, fugitives and other criminal suspects, according to judges and industry lawyers.

    In some cases, judges have granted the requests without requiring the government to demonstrate that there is probable cause to believe that a crime is taking place or that the inquiry will yield evidence of a crime. Privacy advocates fear such a practice may expose average Americans to a new level of government scrutiny of their daily lives.

    Such requests run counter to the Justice Department‘s internal recommendation that federal prosecutors seek warrants based on probable cause to obtain precise location data in private areas. The requests and orders are sealed at the government’s request, so it is difficult to know how often the orders are issued or denied.

    The issue is taking on greater relevance as wireless carriers are racing to offer sleek services that allow cellphone users to know with the touch of a button where their friends or families are. The companies are hoping to recoup investments they have made to meet a federal mandate to provide enhanced 911 (E911) location tracking. Sprint Nextel, for instance, boasts that its “loopt” service even sends an alert when a friend is near, “putting an end to missed connections in the mall, at the movies or around town.”

    With Verizon‘s Chaperone service, parents can set up a “geofence” around, say, a few city blocks and receive an automatic text message if their child, holding the cellphone, travels outside that area.

    “Most people don’t realize it, but they’re carrying a tracking device in their pocket,” said Kevin Bankston of the privacy advocacy group Electronic Frontier Foundation. “Cellphones can reveal very precise information about your location, and yet legal protections are very much up in the air.”

    In a stinging opinion this month, a federal judge in Texas denied a request by a Drug Enforcement Administration agent for data that would identify a drug trafficker’s phone location by using the carrier’s E911 tracking capability. E911 tracking systems read signals sent to satellites from a phone’s Global Positioning System (GPS) chip or triangulated radio signals sent from phones to cell towers. Magistrate Judge Brian L. Owsley, of the Corpus Christi division of the Southern District of Texas, said the agent’s affidavit failed to focus on “specifics necessary to establish probable cause, such as relevant dates, names and places.”

    Owsley decided to publish his opinion, which explained that the agent failed to provide “sufficient specific information to support the assertion” that the phone was being used in “criminal” activity. Instead, Owsley wrote, the agent simply alleged that the subject trafficked in narcotics and used the phone to do so. The agent stated that the DEA had ” ‘identified’ or ‘determined’ certain matters,” Owsley wrote, but “these identifications, determinations or revelations are not facts, but simply conclusions by the agency.”

    Instead of seeking warrants based on probable cause, some federal prosecutors are applying for orders based on a standard lower than probable cause derived from two statutes: the Stored Communications Act and the Pen Register Statute, according to judges and industry lawyers. The orders are typically issued by magistrate judges in U.S. district courts, who often handle applications for search warrants.

    In one case last month in a southwestern state, an FBI agent obtained precise location data with a court order based on the lower standard, citing “specific and articulable facts” showing reasonable grounds to believe the data are “relevant to an ongoing criminal investigation,” said Al Gidari, a partner at Perkins Coie in Seattle, who reviews data requests for carriers.

    Another magistrate judge, who has denied about a dozen such requests in the past six months, said some agents attach affidavits to their applications that merely assert that the evidence offered is “consistent with the probable cause standard” of Rule 41 of the Federal Rules of Criminal Procedure. The judge spoke on condition of anonymity because of the sensitivity of the issue.

    “Law enforcement routinely now requests carriers to continuously ‘ping’ wireless devices of suspects to locate them when a call is not being made . . . so law enforcement can triangulate the precise location of a device and [seek] the location of all associates communicating with a target,” wrote Christopher Guttman-McCabe, vice president of regulatory affairs for CTIA — the Wireless Association, in a July comment to the Federal Communications Commission. He said the “lack of a consistent legal standard for tracking a user’s location has made it difficult for carriers to comply” with law enforcement agencies’ demands.

    Gidari, who also represents CTIA, said he has never seen such a request that was based on probable cause.

    Justice Department spokesman Dean Boyd said field attorneys should follow the department’s policy. “We strongly recommend that prosecutors in the field obtain a warrant based on probable cause” to get location data “in a private area not accessible to the public,” he said. “When we become aware of situations where this has not occurred, we contact the field office and discuss the matter.”

    The phone data can home in on a target to within about 30 feet, experts said.

    Federal agents used exact real-time data in October 2006 to track a serial killer in Florida who was linked to at least six murders in four states, including that of a University of Virginia graduate student, whose body was found along the Blue Ridge Parkway. The killer died in a police shooting in Florida as he was attempting to flee.

    “Law enforcement has absolutely no interest in tracking the locations of law-abiding citizens. None whatsoever,” Boyd said. “What we’re doing is going through the courts to lawfully obtain data that will help us locate criminal targets, sometimes in cases where lives are literally hanging in the balance, such as a child abduction or serial murderer on the loose.”

    In many cases, orders are being issued for cell-tower site data, which are less precise than the data derived from E911 signals. While the E911 technology could possibly tell officers what building a suspect was in, cell-tower site data give an area that could range from about three to 300 square miles.

    Since 2005, federal magistrate judges in at least 17 cases have denied federal requests for the less-precise cellphone tracking data absent a demonstration of probable cause that a crime is being committed. Some went out of their way to issue published opinions in these otherwise sealed cases.

    “Permitting surreptitious conversion of a cellphone into a tracking device without probable cause raises serious Fourth Amendment concerns especially when the phone is in a house or other place where privacy is reasonably expected,” said Judge Stephen William Smith of the Southern District of Texas, whose 2005 opinion on the matter was among the first published.

    But judges in a majority of districts have ruled otherwise on this issue, Boyd said. Shortly after Smith issued his decision, a magistrate judge in the same district approved a federal request for cell-tower data without requiring probable cause. And in December 2005, Magistrate Judge Gabriel W. Gorenstein of the Southern District of New York, approving a request for cell-site data, wrote that because the government did not install the “tracking device” and the user chose to carry the phone and permit transmission of its information to a carrier, no warrant was needed.

    These judges are issuing orders based on the lower standard, requiring a showing of “specific and articulable facts” showing reasonable grounds to believe the data will be “relevant and material” to a criminal investigation.

    Boyd said the government believes this standard is sufficient for cell-site data. “This type of location information, which even in the best case only narrows a suspect’s location to an area of several city blocks, is routinely generated, used and retained by wireless carriers in the normal course of business,” he said.

    The trend’s secrecy is troubling, privacy advocates said. No government body tracks the number of cellphone location orders sought or obtained. Congressional oversight in this area is lacking, they said. And precise location data will be easier to get if the Federal Communication Commission adopts a Justice Department proposal to make the most detailed GPS data available automatically.

    Often, Gidari said, federal agents tell a carrier they need real-time tracking data in an emergency but fail to follow up with the required court approval. Justice Department officials said to the best of their knowledge, agents are obtaining court approval unless the carriersprovide the data voluntarily.

    To guard against abuse, Congress should require comprehensive reporting to the court and to Congress about how and how often the emergency authority is used, said John Morris, senior counsel for the Center for Democracy and Technology.

    Staff researcher Richard Drezen contributed to this report.

    Keating: US able to wage Iran war

    0

    Admiral Timothy J. Keating claims the US is more than prepared to wage war on Iran if Washington chooses to launch a military strike.

    “I don’t think our capability has diminished at all,” Commander of US Pacific Command, Admiral Keating, told Reuters in Bahrain on Wednesday.

    The admiral’s fire-back remarks were made in response to comments by Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad who was also in Bahrain last week. Ahmadinejad had said that Washington’s ‘shabby’ army and its ‘rusty and disabled weapons’ pose no threat to the Islamic Republic.

    Admiral Timothy, who claims that the US military’s capability remains undiminished even after four years of its siege on Iraq, maintains that because of the ‘continued presence’ of the US Army in the region, the Fifth Fleet and Central Command’s ability is ‘even better than before’.

    The admiral, however, did not explain how military experience equates to overall readiness.

    He also made no remarks about the low morale of US troops and how the US intends to launch another war in spite of the soaring suicide rate among American vets returning from the war-torn country.

    The White House continues to threaten Iran over its nuclear energy program, saying Tehran pursues nuclear weapons.

    This comes at a time that Iran says it seeks nuclear energy for peaceful purposes and the UN nuclear watchdog confirms Tehran’s peaceful nuclear intentions.

    Iran has warned Washington and its allies of a ‘crushing response’ to any threats against the Iranian nation.

    MD/AA/MG

    Socialist Firefighters To Spy for Feds

    0

    By EILEEN SULLIVAN

    Firefighters in major cities are being trained to take on a new role as lookouts for terrorism, raising concerns of eroding their standing as American icons and infringing on people’s privacy.

    Unlike police, firefighters and emergency medical personnel don’t need warrants to access hundreds of thousands of homes and buildings each year, putting them in a position to spot behavior that could indicate terrorist activity or planning.

    But there are fears that they could lose the faith of a skeptical public by becoming the eyes of the government, looking for suspicious items such as building blueprints or bomb-making manuals or materials.

    Since the Sept. 11, 2001, terrorist attacks, Americans have given up some of their privacy rights in an effort to prevent future strikes. The government monitors phone calls and e-mails; people who fly have their belongings searched before boarding and are limited in what they can carry; and some people have trouble traveling because their names are similar to those on terrorist watch lists.

    The American Civil Liberties Union says using firefighters to gather intelligence is another step in that direction. Mike German, a former FBI agent who is now national security policy counsel to the ACLU, said the concept is dangerously close to the Bush administration’s 2002 proposal to have workers with access to private homes – such as postal carriers and telephone repairmen – report suspicious behavior to the FBI.

    “Americans universally abhorred that idea,” German said.

    The Homeland Security Department is testing a program with the New York City fire department to share intelligence information so firefighters are better prepared when they respond to emergency calls. Homeland Security also trains the New York City fire service in how to identify material or behavior that may indicate terrorist activities. If it’s successful, the government intends to expand the program to other major metropolitan areas.

    As part of the program, which started last December, Homeland Security gave secret clearances to nine New York fire chiefs, according to reports obtained by The Associated Press.

    “They’re really doing technical inspections, and if perchance they find something like, you know, a bunch of RPG (rocket-propelled grenade) rounds in somebody’s basement, I think it’s a no-brainer,” said Jack Tomarchio, a senior official in Homeland Security’s intelligence division. “The police ought to know about that; the fire service ought to know about that; and potentially maybe somebody in the intelligence community should know about that.”

    Even before the federal program began, New York firefighters and inspectors had been training to recognize materials and behavior the government identifies as “signs of planning and support for terrorism.”

    When going to private residences, for example, they are told to be alert for a person who is hostile, uncooperative or expressing hate or discontent with the United States; unusual chemicals or other materials that seem out of place; ammunition, firearms or weapons boxes; surveillance equipment; still and video cameras; night-vision goggles; maps, photos, blueprints; police manuals, training manuals, flight manuals; and little or no furniture other than a bed or mattress.

    The trial program with Homeland Security opens a clear information-sharing channel – which did not exist before – between the fire service and Homeland Security’s intelligence division.

    “We’re there to help people, and by discovering these type of events, we’re helping people,” said New York City Fire Chief Salvatore Cassano. “There are many things that firefighters do that other law enforcement or other agents aren’t able to do.” He added, “A normal person that doesn’t have this training wouldn’t be looking for it.”

    Cassano would not discuss specifics, but he did say that some terrorism-related information has been passed along to law enforcement since firefighters and officers began the training three years ago. “They’ve had some hits,” Cassano said. “It’s working.”

    Separately, the fire services in Washington, D.C., Phoenix and Atlanta have also been receiving terrorism-related intelligence training. Los Angeles County provides intelligence training so firefighters and inspectors can spot dangerous chemicals or other materials that could be used in bombs. And the fire service is also represented in at least 13 state and regional intelligence “fusion” centers across the country – where local, state and federal agencies share information about terrorism and other crimes.

    In Washington, the fire service made its first foray into the intelligence world about two years ago, and now D.C. Fire/EMS has access to the same terrorism-related intelligence as the police, said Larry Schultz, an assistant fire chief in charge of operations.

    D.C. firefighters and EMS providers are in 170,000 homes and businesses each year on routine calls, Schultz said.

    “So we see things and observe things that may be useful to law enforcement,” he said. “We can walk into your house. We don’t need a search warrant.” If an ambulance team shows up at a house and sees detailed maps of the District’s public transit system on the wall, that’s something the EMS provider would pass along, he said.

    “It’s the evolution of the fire service,” said Bob Khan, the fire chief in Phoenix, which has created an information-sharing arrangement between the fire service and law enforcement through terrorism liaison officers.

    Because firefighters are on the front lines, the fire service needs to know about intelligence that could somehow affect what they do, said Gregory Cade, who as head of the U.S. Fire Administration is the nation’s top fire chief.

    If, for example, Washington is hosting an International Monetary Fund meeting where there will be a large group of protesters and a truckload of gasoline has been stolen in Baltimore, firefighters need to know about intelligence from overseas that terrorists are trying to make explosive devices out of gasoline, Schultz said.

    “Getting appropriate, actionable intelligence is important for a fire chief in deciding what to do and how to allocate resources and to know what’s going on,” Cade said. “No one is expecting us to be the analyst person who is sitting down, trying to connect all of this stuff together and determining, ‘Oh, yes, this looks like a terrorist plot.’ ”

    But Cade said that until recently, there’s been no mechanism for fire departments to share what they learn with law enforcement and intelligence analysts who could use it.

    “If in the conduct of doing their jobs they come across evidence of a crime, of course they should report that to the police,” said the ACLU’s German. “But you don’t want them being intelligence agents.”

    It’s of particular concern for communities already under law enforcement scrutiny. “Do we want them to fear the fire department as well as the police?” German asked.

    The Detroit metropolitan area, which has one of the largest concentrations of Arab Americans in the country, does not conduct this type of intelligence training, nor does it plan to. “That’s a touchy area,” said Detroit’s deputy fire commissioner, Seth Doyle. Detroit firefighters do receive training about hazardous materials, but not the details that New York and D.C. firefighters are now on the lookout for.

    A structural diagram of the Ambassador Bridge, which links Detroit to Canada, materials and literature to make a bomb and a bomb prototype are things firefighters should pay attention to, Doyle said. But the bridge diagram by itself might not be enough. “I don’t want our folks to be put in a position where they’re reporting something that creates a situation where there was really no real problem in the first place,” Doyle said.

    Jeff Zack, a spokesman for the International Association of Fire Fighters, said the union does not know enough about the training programs to say whether it’s a good idea for the country, but the union is concerned that the training be done properly and that this new development does not take away people’s rights.

    Advocates of the fire service’s intelligence role say privacy will not be violated. Homeland Security said if its program with New York is expanded across the country, civil rights and civil liberties training would be included.

    Thanksgiving Reflections of an Anti-Capitalist

    Institutionalized Glorification of our Greed and Gluttony: Thanksgiving Reflections of an Anti-Capitalist

    Gluttony and greed kill more than the sword.

    –Italian proverb

    Gluttony and surfeiting are no proper occasions for thanksgiving.

    ~Charles Lamb, 1821

    Another propaganda-driven greed-fest has nearly passed in the land of the corporatized and the home of the subservient. Obedient little wage slaves and consumers that most of us are (to varying degrees of course), we have once again dutifully greased the wheels of the monstrous capitalist machine and made our proper sacrifices at the altar of Mammon. Between our voracious inhalation of all manner of edibles to our obscene spree of rapacious spending using money eagerly fronted by the usurious kings of finance capital, Thanksgiving and Black Friday are celebratory days indeed for the moneyed elite comprising the allegedly non-existent ruling class in our “egalitarian” and “democratic” nation.

    I celebrated Thanksgiving. However, I wasn’t bowing my head and expressing gratitude to the Calvinist God in which I am “supposed to” believe for the things for which I “should” be grateful. There was an interesting duality to my day as I contemplated that for which I feel a deep ingratitude and celebrated that which sparks my feelings of sincere gratitude.

    The components of my “Thanklessgiving” included:

    1. The trillions of OUR tax dollars OUR government spends each year attempting to attain global hegemony through nearly ubiquitous military bases, a nuclear arsenal large enough to obliterate the universe, and numerous ecocidal, genocidal invasions of ridiculously weaker nations which, fortunately, usually give us a bit of what we deserve by sending us home limping.

    2. The US American Gulag, a penal system populated by over two million human beings. The “land of the free” has the largest number of incarcerated people in the world, even surpassing China, the most populous and allegedly most repressive nation in the world. Criminalizing select forms of self-medicating (those that predominate in the urban core Bantustans to which we have relegated much of our black population) has proven to be an efficient means of “legally” repressing black males. Meanwhile, alcohol, a drug which severely impairs judgment, lowers inhibitions, causes the bloody demise of over 16,000 innocents on our highways each year, and tends to increase the belligerence factor exponentially, remains quite legal and practically flows from the spigots of our homes. And we’re imprisoning people for the possession of marijuana?

    3. Factory farms and the fast food industry that necessitated their genesis. Speciesism is a cancer that has long infected our collective thinking with the notion that we can selectively inflict wanton cruelty on non-human animals. Pigs are as intelligent as dogs (imagine the mass outrage if we began large-scale torture, mutilation, and consumption of family canines) yet we imprison them in such tight quarters for such extended periods that they go insane, treat sows as breeding machines, rip out their teeth without anesthetizing them, sometimes disembowel them with hooks through their anuses while they are alive, and at other times boil them to death while they are still conscious. Recently, the turkeys who suffered unimaginably painful lives and deaths (so their flesh could help expand the midriffs of scores of millions of human animals) experienced their own “thanksgiving” when their agonized existences finally came to an end. Instead of using the monster military (which We the Taxpayers have paid to create) as a means to murder untold millions of civilians who “are in the wrong place at the wrong time,” perhaps we would be better served to evacuate the human and non-human animals from the murderous slaughterhouses and thus finally facilitate the smart use of “smart bombs.”

    4. The crypto-racism that continues to mar our sociocultural landscape like cesspools of toxic sludge. Aside from the aforementioned “War on Drugs” that targets black males and enables us to justify arming and supporting Latin American Right Wing dictators who foster an environment which allows our corporations to rape their nations, there is still a chasm of inequality between blacks and whites in terms of income, wealth, health, and education. The root causes of this gross injustice are myriad but include rampant covert racism (Jim Crow is not dead; he has simply gone incognito) and epidemic intergenerational poverty perpetuated by deplorable public education in predominately black schools and various other nearly insurmountable systemic impediments to climbing the socioeconomic ladder. And let’s not forget Lou Dobbs’ crusade against the Mexican migration to the US forced by neoliberal economic policies born of savage capitalism.

    5. The War on Terror. A more appropriate name for this abomination would be “The War on Islamic People because many of their nations possess much of the oil that capitalism needs to continue fueling the engines of profit and endless growth and because many Muslims are furious that the Zionists stole Palestine.” I guess they went with the War on Terror because the true name is too cumbersome. If we stopped bankrolling the terrorist state of Israel, launching imperial invasions, installing and supporting ruthless regimes, and wielding our economic power like a cudgel, we would stop pissing off so many people and wouldn’t have the constant concern of angry victims employing asymmetric warfare against us.

    6. The evisceration of our Constitution and steady march toward fascism. Bush’s signing statements, the Patriot Act and subsequent Orwellian legislation, the trend toward privatization of the military, the increasingly incestuous relationship between the public and private sectors, two consecutive stolen Presidential elections, Islamophobia, pathological nativism, and an ever-increasing obsession with militarism are the obvious symptoms of a nation plunging into an abyss not unlike that experienced by the Germans under the Nazi regime. While we are not there yet, we are certainly experiencing the prefigurements of “capitalism in decay.” Remember that Hitler and his cabal did not fully initiate the machinations of fascism overnight either.

    7. The soul (and human and animal and Earth) murdering socioeconomic construct of capitalism. While it is true that selfishness, greed, narcissism, and the tendency to exploit are intrinsic to each human being, we choose to glorify, embrace, amplify and perpetuate a system that demands that we hone these characteristics like weapons in order to “succeed” within our malignant means of economic organization. Tragically, even those who recognize the infinite toxicity of such practices still need to employ them to some extent simply to survive.

    8. The mainstream media and Madison Avenue. These entities are deeply complicit in crimes of the highest order, including the ongoing genocide in Iraq that has killed millions of people dating back to the Gulf War and the insatiable desire we US Americans have to acquire more “stuff” (also known as consumerism–a practice that is literally killing our planet). Crypto-fascist media outlets like Fox News and the endless stream of advertising blasted at us 24/7 serve the interests of our depraved moneyed elite well as they shepherd the masses to support and glorify the malevolent American Empire with sanguine enthusiasm.

    9. The myth that “America doesn’t torture.” Sorry folks, but we have been doing it for quite some time. Abu Ghraib was no anomaly. MK-ULTRA was not about mind control. The CIA used the results of the horrifying abuse Dr. Ewen Cameron inflicted on his psychiatric patients to write Kubark, their manual on employing psychological torture. During the Vietnam War, the US employed Operation Phoenix, which included the routine use of torture and resulted in the deaths of over 20,000 Vietnamese. The School of Americas (now called the Western Hemisphere Institute for Security Cooperation) at Fort Benning in Georgia has churned out over 60,000 Latin American Right Wing thugs trained to torture and murder any who dare challenge the sacred right of capitalists to rape and exploit our neighbors to the south, including saintly men like Archbishop Oscar Romero, who was gunned down for having the fortitude to stand up for the impoverished victims of US-sanctioned and financed death squads in El Salvador.

    10. The existence of over one million homeless human beings in a nation awash in abundance. Our perverse system spends trillions of PUBLIC dollars on our leviathan killing apparatus yet we apply asinine palliatives, like the privately-funded Christian homeless shelter where I helped prepare and serve Thanksgiving dinner again this year, to feed and shelter our indigent and hungry brethren (many of whom are veterans who were brain-washed into serving in our imperial conquests and then kicked to the curb like yesterday’s garbage).

    As I reveled in my role of ingrate to the Empire, I gave sincere thanks for:

    1. Family and true friends.

    2. Chandra

    3. Patrice Greanville, the editor in chief of Cyrano’s Journal, who is also my friend, ally, and mentor.

    4. My intellect, moral stamina and profound life experiences which have enabled me to shed my false consciousness and begin waging a sustained struggle against the many ravages of the cancer of capitalism and the American Empire.

    5. The numerous anti-capitalist individuals, websites, publications, and groups with which I have become allied and affiliated.

    6. Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels, for providing us with the knowledge and tools to battle the exploitative, murderous abomination that is destroying the Earth.

    7. Radicals throughout history, including Thomas Paine, Rosa Luxemburg, Emma Goldman, MLK, Malcolm X, Archbishop Romero, and many others.

    8. The numerous brilliant and intellectually courageous contributors to Cyrano’s Journal and Thomas Paine’s Corner.

    9. The Earth, its infinite beauty, and its capacity to sustain life.

    10. Groups like PETA and the Animal Liberation Front. While I don’t formally militate with a specific group, I am a passionate animal liberationist. Collectively, we horrifically torture and slaughter billions of animals each year. While too far ahead of the consciousness curve to effect sweeping changes to the prevailing paradigm, “terrorist groups” like the ALF serve the movement well and their efforts are laudable.

    11. Hamas, for the social service work it does on behalf of its horribly oppressed people and for its relentless struggle against US/Israeli efforts to eradicate the Palestinians.

    12. Hugo Chavez, for catalyzing and perpetuating the Bolivarian Revolution as an alternative to the deeply entrenched Washington Consensus and for the huge strides he has made towards egalitarianism in Venezuela.

    13. Fidel Castro, despite his imperfections (which have been ridiculously over-exaggerated by both the capitalist propaganda networks and the reactionary Gusanos), has remained steadfast in his defiance against US and capitalist domination of the Western Hemisphere and has launched numerous invasions of other nations with his army of physicians. Small wonder he invokes such fear in the tiny, shriveled hearts of capitalists and petite-bourgeoisie the world over.

    14. The Internet, for providing a means for people of conscience to connect, network, and strive to give the masses an education to supplant their capitalist mind-fuck. Underestimating the importance of winning hearts and minds would be a gross miscalculation indeed for those of us who want to evoke significant social and political change for the better.

    Yes, our social indoctrination to immerse ourselves in the “traditional activities” of Thanksgiving and Black Friday is premised on filthy lies, the torture of hundreds of millions of innocent birds, a celebration of the initiation of the Native American Genocide, an unconscionable waste of resources, and the insatiable greed of those atop the capitalist hierarchy. More nauseating than eating too much turkey, isn’t it?

    Yet that doesn’t mean that we can’t opt out of “the great American tradition,” use the time to experience gratitude for those aspects of our existence which are truly meaningful, and commit ourselves to the struggle against the beast that is devouring them.

    Jason Miller is a recovering US American middle class suburbanite who strives to remain intellectually free. He is Cyrano’s Journal Online’s associate editor (http://www.bestcyrano.org/) and publishes Thomas Paine’s Corner within Cyrano’s at http://www.bestcyrano.org/THOMASPAINE/. You can reach him at JMiller@bestcyrano.com

    Rumsfeld Torture Case Dropped in France

    1

    PARIS (AP) – A Paris prosecutor has thrown out a complaint against former Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld for torture in Iraq and at the U.S. military detention camp at Guantanamo Bay, a lawyer for one of the four groups that filed the case said Friday.

    The prosecutor dismissed the case on the grounds that Rumsfeld benefits from immunity, said attorney Patrick Baudoin, president of the International Federation of Human Rights. The organizations that brought the complaint have asked the prosecutor to reconsider.

    The complaint was filed Oct. 25 during a visit by Rumsfeld to Paris.

    Prosecutor Jean-Claude Marin said Rumsfeld is covered by the immunity accorded to heads of state or government and foreign ministers for acts during their time in office, according to a letter seen by The Associated Press. The French Foreign Ministry advised the prosecutor’s office in the matter, the letter said.

    Rumsfeld’s one-day visit last month was enough time for the European and American human rights groups to take advantage of a French disposition by which people suspected of torture can be prosecuted in France if they are on French soil.

    The complaint said that Rumsfeld, in his former position as U.S. defense secretary, “authorized and ordered crimes of torture to be carried out … as well as other war crimes.”

    It cited documents including memos from Rumsfeld, internal reports and testimony from former U.S. Army Brig. Gen. Janis Karpinski – the one-time commander of U.S. military prisons in Iraq.

    The Bush administration has repeatedly denied the government tortures people.

    The complaint was filed by the New York-based Center for Constitutional Rights, the Berlin-based European Center for Constitutional and Human Rights and two Paris-based groups, the International Federation of Human Rights and the League of Human Rights.

    The International Federation for Human Rights cited cases it claimed had set a precedent for a new interpretation of immunity. Those included Chile’s late dictator Gen. Augusto Pinochet, who was pursued in Europe in 1990s and, more recently, former Chad President Hissene Habre, indicted by a Belgian court last year for alleged war crimes and crimes against humanity.

    Loose Change Final Cut Press Conference

    0

    This is the official press launch for Loose Change Final Cut. The film is the third and final version of the most downloaded and watched movie in Internet history. The movie explores the events of September 11th, 2001 challenging the official story as put forward by the Bush administration and the mainstream media.

    It was hosted by Emily Buchanan of BBC World Affairs and features both the director of the film, Dylan Avery, and the UK distributor Tim Sparke, of Mercury Media. It also features guest speaker Gordon Ross, a mechanical engineer who features in the new version of the film.

    The Press Launch video was filmed, edited and produced by myself and planetfrog.

    Now for ID cards – and the biometric blues

    0

    Ben Goldacre

    Sometimes just throwing a few long words about can make people think you know what you’re talking about. Words like “biometric”. When Alistair Darling was asked if the government will ditch ID cards in the light of this week’s data cock-up, he replied: “The key thing about identity cards is, of course, that information is protected by personal biometric information. The problem at present is that, because we do not have that protection, information is much more vulnerable than it should be.”

    Yes, that’s the problem. We need biometric identification. Fingerprints. Iris scans. Gordon Brown says so too: “What we must ensure is that identity fraud is avoided, and the way to avoid identity fraud is to say that for passport information we will have the biometric support that is necessary.”

    Tsutomu Matsumoto is a Japanese mathematician, a cryptographer who works on security, and he decided to see if he could fool the machines which identify you by your fingerprint. This home science project costs about £20. Take a finger and make a cast with the moulding plastic sold in hobby shops. Then pour some liquid gelatin (ordinary food gelatin) into that mould and let it harden. Stick this over your finger pad: it fools fingerprint detectors about 80% of the time. The joy is, once you’ve fooled the machine, your fake fingerprint is made of the same stuff as fruit pastilles, so you can simply eat the evidence.

    But what if you can’t get the finger? Well, you can chop one off, of course – another risk with biometrics. But there is an easier way. Find a fingerprint on glass. Sorry, I should have pointed out that every time you touch something, if your security systems rely on biometric ID, then you’re essentially leaving your pin number on a post-it note.

    You can make a fingerprint image on glass more visible by painting over it with some cyanoacrylate adhesive. That’s a posh word for superglue. Photograph that with a digital camera. Improve the contrast in a picture editing program, and print the image on to a transparency sheet, then use that to etch the fingerprint on to a copper-plated printed circuit board (it sounds difficult, but you can buy a beginner’s etching set at Maplin for £10.67). This gives an image with some three-dimensional relief. You can now make your gelatin fingerpad using this as a mould.

    Should I have told you all that, or am I very naughty? Yes to both.

    It’s well known that security systems which rely on secret methods are less secure than open systems, because the greater the number of people who know about the system, the more people there are to spot holes in it, and it is important that there are no holes. If someone tells you their system is perfect and secret, that’s like quacks who tell you their machine cures cancer but they can’t tell you how: it’s cobblers.

    Open the box, quack. In fact you might sense that the whole field of biometrics and ID is rather like medical quackery: as usual, on the one hand we have snake oil salesmen promising the earth, and on the other a bunch of humanities graduates who don’t understand technology, science or even human behaviour. Buying it. Bigging it up. Thinking it’s a magic wand.

    But it’s not. The leak last week wasn’t because of unauthorised access, it couldn’t have been stopped with biometrics; it happened because of authorised access which was managed with a contemptible, cavalier incompetence. The damaging repercussions for 25 million people will not be ameliorated by biometrics.

    So will biometrics prevent ID theft? Well, it might make it more difficult for you to prove your innocence. And once your fingerprints are stolen, they are harder to replace than your pin number. But here’s the final nail in the coffin. Your fingerprint data will be stored in your passport or ID card as a series of numbers, called the “minutiae template”. In the new biometric passport with its wireless chip, remember, all your data can be read and decrypted with a device near you, but not touching you.

    What good would the data be, if someone lifted it? Not much, insisted Jim Knight, the minister for schools and learners, in July: “It is not possible to recreate a fingerprint using the numbers that are stored. The algorithm generates a unique number, producing no information of any use to identity thieves.” Crystal clear, Jim.

    Unfortunately, a team of mathematicians published a paper in April this year, showing that they could reconstruct a fingerprint from this data alone. In fact, they printed out the images they made, and then – crucially, completing the circle – used them to fool fingerprint readers.

    Ah biometrics. Such a soothingly technical word. Repeat it to yourself.

    Expanding NSA Power Bad, Fourth Amendment Good

    0

    By Ralph Lopez 

    Missing from the debate over expanding NSA authority in the War on Terror is the simple question, beyond our reflexive desire for privacy: why is expanding this authority such a bad idea? We know the Feds have done nasty, un-American things like spy on activists like Martin Luther King, but it comes out in the wash, doesn’t it? Did the Founders, who took pains to enshrine freedom from “unreasonable search and seizure,” without “probable cause,” understand what the Stasi, Hitler, and the KGB all understood? That knowledge is power, and absolute knowledge of peoples’ lives becomes absolute power?

    The origin of the Fourth Amendment of the Bill of Rights, which Congress has been merrily gutting since the Patriot Act, was the hated “general warrant” which allowed British soldiers to enter a colonial’s home, barn, and property in search of anything suspicious. It was a principle cause of the Revolution. Could the Founding Fathers, a bunch of old white guys versed in the Greek and Latin classics, philosophy, mathematics, and history, have grasped the significance of a monopoly of information in the hands of the government, which already possesses a monopoly of force?

    The Stasi Patriot Act was written long before 9/11. As Congressman Jim McDermott said, “they had all this on the shelf somewhere, ideas of things they would like to do and they got 9/11 and they said “its our chance, go for it!””

    For those of us not used to thinking like a Machiavelli, use a little imagination. Come up up with a list of fun things to do if you were in charge, had no respect for anyone, and had a search and eavesdropping power free of judicial oversight, meaning, no one looking over your shoulder to see what you were looking at, which is what a warrant means. The controversy over the NSA is not just pie-in-the-sky liberals squawking over their precious rights in the “new world” in which terrorist are trying to kill us. Let’s get this out of the realm of ideas and push it down to action on the ground.

    1. Spy on all protesters and activists, from pro-life to anti-war, so you know when they are going to unfurl banners in the gallery of the House of Representatives, then change the schedule to mess them up.

    2. Get the psychiatric records of anyone who leaks a “classified” document which is only classified because it shows the government continuing to fight a war which it believes cannot be won, oops, been there done that. Not imaginative. His name was Daniel Ellsberg, he leaked the Pentagon Papers, and Nixon wanted his deepest darkest confessions to fish through for a smear campaign. Fourth Amendment ideas are already the direct cause one American president being slapped down.

    3. Find out who that pesky congressman is sleeping with, who wants you impeached. My personal feeling is that this is exactly what Bush has on half these guys, hence their reluctance to impeach. When you get a blank check to spy, you don’t turn it against pipsqueaks like you or me first; you turn it against the guys who can really hurt you. In the process you undermine the entire basis of government. Could this account for Bush’s perpetual smirk?

    4. Give an old frat buddy and staunch supporter, who already has all the money he ever wants, something more important to him now: the chance to settle an old score. If there is a motivator more powerful than money, it’s hatred. We’ll see what we can find on him, old buddy, everyone has some kind of dirt on him somewhere.

    5. Keep looking. The Patriot Act says we can go through any records pertaining to you, bank account, car dealer, dentist, lawyer, real estate, telephone company, anything, understand? The NSA just makes it easier. Rather than feds walk in and going through paper records, business transacted through the Internet is swept up and kept in a “dump.” When we need it, pop in your first-middle-last-social-and-birthday, and BINGO!

    6. If we find nothing, why not just frame him? We don’t have anything on him, but we do on the AG in that state. He’ll know the truth but he won’t say anything.

    7. Tell that pitbull reporter we’re going to fax his girlfriend’s abortion records to his wife. The Patriot Act allows government agencies to look into anyone’s medical records, remember?

    8. Allow a black market of tips, payback and blackmail to flourish among the rich and well-connected, the way the Stasi East German Secret Police did, just so long as it doesn’t hurt anyone important.

    9. If you are the beneficiary of such a black market, and you, as someone connected, knows someone else connected who owes you a favor, get the full text of your competitor’s marketing strategy for the next product cycle.

    10. Always, always, make sure you are spying on your own people. Patriotic whistleblowers are among the most credible sources when they go to reporters. Everyone knows they have nothing to gain and everything to lose. Declare him enemy combatant before he talks and have him waterboarded, the punk.

    Add your own to the list! Then send this to your congressmen, and to your friends! Dirty tricks are a game to these guys! Why shouldn’t we have fun too?

    Remember, what we are talking about is not the power to spy on terrorists. The government already has that. They can flip the switch immediately if they think anything is going down. They just have to get a warrant within 48 hours. That’s after the fact. Bush lies when he implies the Constitution is outdated because sometimes there’s no time to get a warrant. It shows what he really wants: no one looking over his shoulder whatsoever.

    Before the Stasi Patriot Act of 2001, in recognition that intelligence agents shifted through massive amounts of data, a wall was erected that forbade evidence obtained by intelligence agents without a warrant from being used in normal criminal prosecutions, since that came perilously close to what judges call “fishing expeditions.” With the Patriot Act, this wall was dismantled. Anything found on you in any way can be used against you.

    In 2003 federal agents in Las Vegas used the no-warrant provisions of the Patriot Act to bring charges in run-of-the-mill money laundering and political corruption cases not related to terrorism. Justice Department spokesman Mark Corrallo said: “The Patriot Act was not meant to be just for terrorism. A lot of the uninformed criticism was obviously misplaced.”

    What the Founders understood is, if you make one branch of the government Big Brother, able to prosecute every wrongdoing, it will not sometimes be abused and applied unequally; it will always be abused and applied unequally. The requirement for searches to be approved by a judge upon the showing of “probable cause” was an outgrowth of inherent distrust of centralized authority. George Bush’s mantra that “this is not a law enforcement problem” is not accidental. It is carefully crafted and deliberate. It is meant to foster a contempt for the law, and to extend the rules of the battlefield, where the word of the Commander-in-Chief is law, to Americans and American soil.

    All political persuasions should fear this. We’re not talking about the power of the Bush administration. We’re talking about a permanent change to a Stasi culture benefiting whomever holds the reins of power. The Founders, whose incredibly bleak view of human nature led them to place checks and balances into the very core of the Constitution, put a brake on human nature with the Fourth Amendment. Boy, those sure were some smart old white guys.

    Data loss sends a chill down the spine

    0

    The Guardian

    The government is disingenuous in suggesting that biometric data will protect information related to ID cards. The information to be held in connection with the ID card scheme includes not only name, address and biometric information but also numbers for national insurance, passport, driving licence and any other “designated document”. The latter could easily include information such as a key to provide access to one’s health data on the NHS Spine. Now that data laws say that “information will normally be shared in the public sector, provided it is in the public interest” (Home Office insists biometric data is secure, November 21), there will be people with access via the proposed identity database, through these links, to any individual’s tax, benefits, bank account, travel, driving conviction and health records.

    To make it a criminal offence to reveal data makes no fundamental difference. The fact that an individual has access to the information means that it can be leaked, and the more people that have access to the information the greater the probability that someone will do so, whether maliciously or by accident.

    The proposed ID card scheme provides a massive potential leak of personal information and should be stopped forthwith.
    Dr Michael Howarth
    Networking lecturer, University of Surrey

    An incompetent civil servant who wrote the entire contents of the ID card database on to CDs and then lost them would have lost the fingerprints of the entire population. This would be a disaster. If your bank account is compromised you can get a new one with a new number. You can’t get new fingerprints.

    Ministers assume the only way a fingerprint could enter the ID system is if the ID card holder uses a fingerprint reader. However, compromised readers could be used to inject fingerprint data directly into the ID card system, allowing fraudsters to impersonate the holders of the stolen biometrics.
    Andrew Watson
    Cambridge

    The security and reliability of biometrics are still matters of debate, but in any case biometrics will not be needed by the tens of thousands of government and private employees who will have access to the national identity register. They will be able to access the database using the same login procedures used by most computer users. If the Revenue’s shockingly incompetent security regime applies elsewhere in government, there will be nothing to stop any employee viewing or copying records from the NIR.

    The government has forfeited any right to be trusted with personal data. It is not enough to say they will learn lessons. All planned or current projects involving personal data must be put on hold until independent audits show that they respect the rights of the citizen.
    Mike Richards
    Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire

    In view of the government’s inability to guarantee the total security of my, or anyone else’s, personal data, I am writing to the prime minister, the chancellor, the leaders of the Conservative and the Liberal Democrat parties and also to my member of parliament to give notice that I shall refuse to have an ID card, even if that means being fined or jailed.

    I urge everyone to follow suit. The more fuss we make now, the less likely this or any future government is to put our identities at risk of fraudulent use.
    Val Harrison
    Birmingham

    There is still time to stop the ID card system, but IT systems to monitor all of England’s children and their families are nearing completion and contain highly confidential data. The ContactPoint system tracks all children’s contacts with health, welfare and other agencies, and the eCaf system will contain detailed assessments of children, parents and family life in cases where services are being sought.

    The government needs to face up to two facts. First, its IT systems are unjustifiably intrusive. Second, it is an incompetent steward of personal information. The most important lesson to be learned from the blunders at Revenue and Customs is that systems like ContactPoint and eCaf must be abandoned.
    Chris Mills
    Sevenoaks, Kent

    VIDEO: Driver Tased For Asking Why He Was Stopped

    0

    Man who refused to sign speeding ticket because he did not understand what it was is tased and arrested by officer who then refused to read him his rights

    Steve Watson
    Infowars.net

    A man was tased and arrested on a Utah highway after being stopped by an officer and refusing to sign a speeding ticket because he did not understand what offence he had committed or why he had been pulled over.

    The encounter, captured on the police car camera on September 14th and released this week, is the latest in a long string of incidents involving the unacceptable use of Tasers by officers on citizens whom the evidence reveals are in no way threatening, acting unlawfully or resisting co-operation.

    The video shows the Utah Highway Patrolman pull over Jared Massey and his pregnant wife who also had their baby with them in the car and ask for Mr Massey’s license.

    Mr Massey tells the officer he does not understand why he has been stopped or what he is being charged with, at which point the officer orders Massey to get out of the car. The officer then puts down his clipboard and immediately takes out his Taser and points it at Mr Massey without any provocation whatsoever, yelling “Turn around and put your hands behind your back” as Massey attempts to point out the speed limit sign and engage the officer in conversation.

    A shocked Massey asks “what the hell is wrong with you?” and backs away, turning around as the officer had demanded, at which point the officer unleashes 50,000 volts from the Taser into Massey’s body, sending him screaming to the ground instantly and causing his wife to jump out of the car and yell hysterically for help.

    Watch the video:

    Lying face down on the ground a shell shocked, Mr Massey says “officer I don’t know what you are doing, I don’t know why you are doing what you are doing” to which the officer replies “I am placing you under arrest because you did not obey my instruction.”

    Mr Massey then once again asks the officer several times why he was stopped and what he is being charged with. He then asks for his rights to be read and points out that the officer cannot arrest him without doing this. Instead of reading Massey his rights the officer then addresses another patrolman who arrives on the scene sardonically commenting “Ohhh he took a ride with the Taser” to which the other officer answers “painful isn’t it”.

    The icing on the cake comes at the end of the video when the officer LIES to his own colleague about the encounter, clearly stating that he verbally warned Massey he was going to tase him, as is the law, when there was no warning whatsoever.

    Mr Massey is planning to file a lawsuit against the Utah Highway Patrol. He says he was already slowing down as he approached the 40 mile per hour sign in the construction zone outside of vernal. All charges except for the speeding ticket have been dropped.

    This amazing video reveals how eroded civil and constitutional rights have now become. The officer had no legal right to make Massey sign any document he did not understand

    Tasers are supposed to be the last response before lethal action, however, police now use them as if they are batons or pepper spray.

    In the last year over 300 people have died in admitted cases in the US alone from being tased. In the last week alone we have posted three separate stories of Taser deaths. Every week we post stories of incidents, which often feature old women, children and disabled people as the victims. The weapons are even being used in schools.

    The police are now trained that “pain compliance,” a euphemism for torture, is acceptable in apprehending anyone even if that person poses no physical danger. If you electrify any person, they suffer extreme pain and stand a high chance of being killed.

    Despite this, idiotic media hacks such as Fox News host Brian Kilmead are happy to promote police state tactics, selling the idea that protestors or people that merely question authority in any way are threatening and should be tased or “beaten to a pulp”.

    This phenomenon is out of control, how many more acts of wanton police brutality, torture and death by means of tasering are we to endure?

    Taser use is being abused by police all over the country and beyond as cops are trained that torture is a perfectly acceptable response to somebody who acts out of the ordinary, asks the wrong question or refuses to show their papers.

    One Million Dead in Iraq: Our Own Holocaust Denial

    0

    Institutionally unwilling to consider America’s responsibility for the bloodbath, the traditional media have refused to acknowledge the massive number of Iraqis killed since the invasion.

    By Mark Weisbrot

    Institutionally unwilling to consider America’s responsibility for the bloodbath, the traditional media have refused to acknowledge the massive number of Iraqis killed since the invasion.

    Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmedinejad’s flirtation with those who deny the reality of the Nazi genocide has rightly been met with disgust. But another holocaust denial is taking place with little notice: the holocaust in Iraq. The average American believes that 10,000 Iraqi civilians have been killed since the US invasion in March 2003. The most commonly cited figure in the media is 70,000. But the actual number of people who have been killed is most likely more than one million.

    This is five times more than the estimates of killings in Darfur and even more than the genocide in Rwanda 13 years ago.

    The estimate of more than one million violent deaths in Iraq was confirmed again two months ago in a poll by the British polling firm Opinion Research Business, which estimated 1,220,580 violent deaths since the US invasion. This is consistent with the study conducted by doctors and scientists from the Johns Hopkins University School of Public Health more than a year ago. Their study was published in the Lancet, Britain’s leading medical journal. It estimated 601,000 people killed due to violence as of July 2006; but if updated on the basis of deaths since the study, this estimate would also be more than a million. These estimates do not include those who have died because of public health problems created by the war, including breakdowns in sewerage systems and electricity, shortages of medicines, etc.

    Amazingly, some journalists and editors – and of course some politicians – dismiss such measurements because they are based on random sampling of the population rather than a complete count of the dead. While it would be wrong to blame anyone for their lack of education, this disregard for scientific methods and results is inexcusable. As one observer succinctly put it: if you don’t believe in random sampling, the next time your doctor orders a blood test, tell him that he needs to take all of it.

    The methods used in the estimates of Iraqi deaths are the same as those used to estimate the deaths in Darfur, which are widely accepted in the media. They are also consistent with the large numbers of refugees from the violence (estimated at more than four million). There is no reason to disbelieve them, or to accept tallies such as that the Iraq Body Count (73,305 – 84,222), which include only a small proportion of those killed, as an estimate of the overall death toll.

    Of course, acknowledging the holocaust in Iraq might change the debate over the war. While Iraqi lives do not count for much in US politics, recognizing that a mass slaughter of this magnitude is taking place could lead to more questions about how this horrible situation came to be. Right now a convenient myth dominates the discussion: the fall of Saddam Hussein simply unleashed a civil war that was waiting to happen, and the violence is all due to Iraqis’ inherent hatred of each other.

    In fact, there is considerable evidence that the occupation itself – including the strategy of the occupying forces – has played a large role in escalating the violence to holocaust proportions. It is in the nature of such an occupation, where the vast majority of the people are opposed to the occupation and according to polls believe it is right to try and kill the occupiers, to pit one ethnic group against another. This was clear when Shiite troops were sent into Sunni Fallujah in 2004; it is obvious in the nature of the death-squad government, where officials from the highest levels of the Interior Ministry to the lowest ranking police officers – all trained and supported by the US military – have carried out a violent, sectarian mission of “ethnic cleansing.” (The largest proportion of the killings in Iraq are from gunfire and executions, not from car bombs). It has become even more obvious in recent months as the United States is now arming both sides of the civil war, including Sunni militias in Anbar province as well as the Shiite government militias.

    Is Washington responsible for a holocaust in Iraq? That is the question that almost everyone here wants to avoid. So the holocaust is denied

    Coup D’Etat Rumblings in Venezuela

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    The Bush administration tried and failed three prior times to oust Hugo Chavez since its first aborted two-day coup attempt in April, 2002. Through FOIA requests, lawyer, activist and author Eva Golinger uncovered top secret CIA documents of US involvement that included an intricate financing scheme involving the quasi-governmental agency, National Endowment of Democracy (NED), and US Agency for International Development (USAID). The documents also showed the White House, State Department and National Security Agency had full knowledge of the scheme, had to have approved it, and there’s little doubt of CIA involvement as it’s always part of this kind of dirty business. What’s worrying now is what went on then may be happening again in what looks like a prelude to a fourth made-in-Washington attempt to oust the Venezuelan leader that must be monitored closely as events develop.

    Since he took office in February, 1999, and especially after George Bush’s election, Chavez has been a US target, and this time he believes credible sources point to a plot to assassinate him. That information comes from Alimamy Bakarr Sankoh, president of the Hugo Chavez International-Foundation for Peace, Friendship & Solidarity (HCI-FPFS) in a November 11 press release. Sankoh supports Chavez as “a man of peace and flamboyant champion of human dignity (who persists in his efforts in spite of) growing US blackmail, sabotage and political blasphemy.”

    HCI-FPFS sources revealed the plot’s code name – “Operation Cleanse Venezuela” that now may be unfolding ahead of the December 2 referendum on constitutional reforms. According to Sankoh, the scheme sounds familiar – CIA and other foreign secret service operatives (including anti-Castro terrorists) aiming to destabilize the Chavez government by using “at least three concrete subversive plans” to destroy the country’s social democracy and kill Chavez.

    It involves infiltrating subversive elements into the country, inciting opposition within the military, ordering region-based US forces to shoot down any aircraft used by Chavez, employing trained snipers with shoot to kill orders, and having the dominant US and Venezuelan media act as supportive attack dogs. Chavez is targeted because he represents the greatest of all threats to US hegemony in the region – a good example that’s spreading. Venezuela also has Latin America’s largest proved oil reserves at a time supplies are tight and prices are at all-time highs.

    Sankoh calls Washington-directed threats “real” and to “be treated seriously” to avoid extending Bush’s Middle East adventurism to Latin America. He calls for support from the region and world community to denounce the scheme and help stop another Bush administration regime change attempt.

    More information on a possible coup plot also came from a November 13 Party for Socialism and Liberation article headlined “New US plots against the Venezuelan Revolution.” It states Tribuna Popular (the Communist Party of Venezuela) and Prensa Latina (the Latin American News Agency) reported: “Between Oct. 7 and Oct 9, high-ranking US officials met in Prague, Czech Republic, with parts of the Venezuelan opposition (where they were) urged to convene social uprisings, sabotage the economy and infrastructure, destroy the food transportation chain and plan a military coup.” It said Paul Wolfowitz and Madeleine Albright attended along with Humberto Celli, “a well-known coup-plotter from the Venezuelan party Accion Democratica.”

    The article further reported Tibisay Lucena, The National Electoral Council chairman, said the Venezuelan corporate media was “stoking a mood of violence amongst right-wing students” through a campaign of agitprop, and Hermann Escarra from the “pro-coup” Comando Nacional de la Resistencia openly incited “rebellion” last August and then called for constitutional changes to be stopped “through all means possible.”

    The Venezuelan news agency, Diaria VEA, also weighed in saying “anonymous students planned on committing acts of destabilization” as the December 2 vote approaches. Venezuelan Radio Trans Mundial provided proof with a recorded video of a youth dumping gasoline into an armored vehicle, ramming metal barricades into police on top of other vehicles, and knocking them from their roofs and hoods onto the ground.

    The Threat of Street Protest Violence

    For weeks, protests with sporadic violence have been on Venezuela’s streets as anti-Chavistas use middle and upper class students as imperial tools to destabilize the government and disrupt the constitutional process. The aim is to discredit and oust the Chavez government and return the country to its ugly past with Washington and local oligarchs in charge and the neoliberal model reinstated.

    Venezuela’s Foreign Minister, Nicolas Maduro, weighed in on this on November 8. He accused Washington of meddling by staging violent Caracas street protests against proposed constitutional reforms to extend the country’s participatory social democracy. Referring to a November 7 shootout at Caracas’ Central University, he said: “We don’t have any doubt that the government of the United States has their hands in the scheme that led to the ambush yesterday” that Chavez calls a “fascist offensive.” Several students were wounded on the streets from a clash between pro and anti-Chavez elements.

    “We know the whole scheme,” Maduro added, and he should as it happened before in 2002, again during the disruptive 2002-03 oil management lockout, and most often as well when elections are held to disrupt the democratic process. These are standard CIA operating tactics used many times before for 50 years in the Agency’s efforts to topple independent leaders and kill them. Chavez understands what’s happening, and he’s well briefed and alerted by his ally, Fidel Castro, who survived over 600 US attempts to kill him since 1959. He’s now 81 and very much alive but going through a difficult recovery from major surgery 15 months ago.

    Chavez has widespread popular support throughout the region and from allies like Ecuador’s Raphael Correa and Nicaraguan President Daniel Ortega who expressed his “solidarity with the revolutionary people of Venezuela and our friend Hugo Chavez, who is being subjected to aggression from a counterrevolution fed by the traitors from inside the country and by the empire (referring to the US).” He compared the situation to his own country where similar efforts are being “financed by the United States Embassy” in Managua to support elements opposed to his Sandinista government even though it’s very accommodative to Washington.

    Even Brazil’s Lula chimed in by calling Chavez’s proposed reforms consistent with Venezuela’s democratic norms, and he added: “Please, invent anything to criticize Chavez, except for lack of democracy.”

    Constitutional Reform As A Pretext for Protests

    Washington’s goal from all this is clear, but why now? Last July, Chavez announced he’d be sending Venezuela’s National Assembly (AN) a proposed list of constitutional reforms to debate, consider and vote on. Under Venezuelan law, the President, National Assembly or 15% of registered voters (by petition) may propose constitutional changes. Under articles 342, 343, 344 and 345, they must then be debated three times in the legislature, amended if needed, and then submitted to a vote that requires a two-thirds majority to pass. Finally within 30 days, the public gets the last word, up or down, in a national referendum. It represents the true spirit of democracy that’s unimaginable in the US where elitists control everything, elections are a sham, and the people have no say.

    That was true for Venezuela earlier, but no longer. In its history, there have been 26 Constitutions since its first in 1821, but none like the 1999 Bolivarian one under Chavez that’s worlds apart from the others. It created a model participatory social democracy that gave all citizens the right to vote it up or down by national referendum and then empowered them (or the government) later on to petition for change.

    On August 15, Chavez did that by submitting 33 suggested amendment reforms to the Constitution’s 350 articles and explained it this way: The 1999 Constitution needed updating because it’s “ambiguous (and) a product of that moment. The world (today) is very different from (then). (Reforms are) essential for continuing the process of revolutionary transition” to deepen and broaden Venezuelan democracy. That’s his central aim – to create a “new geometry of power” for the people along with more government accountability to them.

    Proposed reforms will have little impact on the nation’s fundamental political structure. They will, however, change laws with regard to politics, the economy, property, the military, the national territory as well as the culture and society and will deepen the country’s social democracy.

    The National Assembly (AN) completed its work on November 2 adding 25 additional articles to Chavez’s proposal plus another 11 changes for a total of 69 articles that amend one-fifth of the nation’s Constitution. The most important ones include:

    — extending existing constitutional law that guarantees human rights and recognizes the country’s social and cultural diversity;

    — building a “social economy” to replace the failed neoliberal Washington Consensus model;

    — officially prohibiting monopolies and unjust consolidation of economic resources;

    — extending presidential terms from six to seven years;

    — allowing unlimited presidential reelections so that option is “the sovereign decision of the constituent people of Venezuela” and is a similar to the political process in countries like England, France, Germany and Australia;

    — strengthening grassroots communal councils, increasing their funding, and promoting more of them;

    — lowering the eligible voting age from 18 to 16;

    — guaranteeing free university education to the highest level;

    — prohibiting foreign funding of elections and political activity;

    — reducing the work week to 36 hours to promote more employment;

    — ending the autonomy of Venezuela’s Central Bank to reclaim the country’s financial sovereignty the way it should be everywhere; today nearly all central banks are controlled by private for-profit banking cartels; Republican presidential candidate Ron Paul wants to end that status in the US and correctly explains the Federal Reserve Bank is neither federal nor does it have reserves; it’s owned and run by Wall Street and the major banks;

    — adding new forms of collective property under five categories: public for the state, social for citizens, collective for people or social groups, mixed for public and private, and private for individuals or private entities;

    — territorial redefinition to distribute resources more equitably to communities instead of being used largely by economic and political elites;

    — prohibiting sexual orientation discrimination and enacting gender parity rights for political candidates;

    — redefining the military as an “anti-imperialist popular entity;”

    — in cases where property is appropriated for the public good, fair and timely compensation to be paid for it;

    — protecting the loss of one’s home in cases of bankruptcy; and

    — enacting social security protection for the self-employed.

    The National Assembly also approved 15 important transitional dispositions. They relate to how constitutional changes will be implemented if approved until laws are passed to regulate them. One provision is for the legislature to pass 15 so-called “organic laws” that include the following ones:

    — a law on “popular power” to govern grassroots communal councils (that may number 50,000 by year end) that Chavez called “one of the central ideas….to open, at the constitutional level, the roads to accelerate the transfer of power to the people (in an) Explosion of Communal (or popular) Power;” five percent of state revenues will be set aside to fund it;

    — another promoting a socialist economy for the 21st century that Chavez champions even though he remains friendly to business; and

    — one relating to the country’s territorial organization; plus others on education, a shorter workweek and more democratic changes.

    Under Venezuelan law, and in the true spirit of democracy, these proposed changes will be for citizens to vote up or down on December 2. The process will be in two parts reversing an earlier decision to do it as one package, yea or nay. One part will be Chavez’s 33 reforms plus 13 National Assembly additions, and the other for the remaining 23 articles.

    Coup D’Etat Rumblings Must Be Taken Seriously

    Now battle lines are drawn, opposition forces are mobilized and events are playing out violently on Venezuela’s streets. The worst so far was on November 7 when CNN falsely reported “80,000” anti-Chavez students demonstrated “peacefully” in Caracas to denounce “Hugo Chavez’s attempts to expand his power.” The actual best estimates put it between 2000 and 10,000, and long-time Latin American expert James Petras calls the protesters “privileged middle and upper middle class university students,” once again being used as an imperial tool.

    In their anti-government zeal, CNN and other dominant media ignore the many pro-Chavez events writer Fred Fuentes calls a “red hurricane” sweeping the country. An impressive one was held on November 4 when the President addressed hundreds of thousands of supporters who participated in an 8.5 kilometer Caracas march while similar pro-reform rallies took place at the same time around the country. They’re the start of a “yes” campaign for a large December 2 turnout that’s vital as polls show strong pro-reform support by a near two to one margin.

    In an effort to defuse it, orchestrated opposition turned violent and officials reported eight people were injured in the November 7 incident. No one was killed, but one was wounded by gunfire when at least “four (masked) gunmen (who looked like provocateur plants, not students) fir(ed) handguns at the anti-Chavez crowd.” In an earlier October demonstration, opposition students clashed with police who kept them from reaching the National Assembly building and a direct confrontation with pro-Chavez supporters that might have turned ugly.

    It did on November 7 when violence erupted between pro and anti-government students, but it wasn’t as reported. Venezuelan and US corporate media claimed pro-Chavez supporters initiated the attack. In fact, they WERE attacked by elements opposing the President. They seized this time to act ahead of the referendum to disrupt it and destabilize the government as prelude to a possible planned coup.

    One pro-Chavez student explained what happened. She and others were erecting posters supporting a “yes” referendum vote when they were attacked with tear gas and crowds yelling they were going to be lynched. Avila TV had the evidence. Its unedited footage showed an opposition student mob surrounding the School of Social Work area where pro-Chavez students hid for safety. They threw Molotov cocktails, rocks, chairs and other objects, smashed windows, and tried to burn down the building as university authorities (responsible for security) stood aside doing nothing to curtail the violence. Another report was that corporate-owned Univision operatives posing as reporters had guns and accompanied the elements attacking the school in an overt act of complicity by the media.

    The pattern now unfolding on Caracas streets is similar to what happened ahead of the April, 2002 aborted coup attempt, and Petras calls it “the most serious threat (to the President) since” that time. The corporate media then claimed pro-government supporters instigated street violence and fired on “unarmed” opposition protesters. In fact, that was later proved a lie as anti-Chavez “snipers” did the firing as part of the plot that became the coup. A similar scheme may now be unfolding in Caracas and on other campuses around the country as well.

    In his public comments, Foreign Minister Maduro accused the major media and CNN of misrepresenting events and poisoning the political atmosphere. It’s happening in Venezuela and the US as the dominant media attacks Hugo Chavez through a campaign of vilification and black propaganda.

    US Corporate Media on the Attack

    On November 12, The Venezuela Information Office (VIO) reported that growing numbers of “US print newspapers lodged attacks against Venezuela” using “outdated cold-war generalizations” and without explaining any of the proposed democratic changes. Among others, they came from the Houston Chronicle that claimed:

    — constitutional reforms will “eliminate the vestiges of democracy” in Venezuela when, in fact, they’ll strengthen it, and the people will vote them up or down;

    — Chavez controls the electoral system when, in fact, Venezuela is a model free, fair and open democracy that shames its US equivalent. The Chronicle falsely said reforms will strip people of their right to due process. In fact, that’s guaranteed under article 337 that won’t be changed.

    VIO also reported on a Los Angeles Times editorial comparing Chavez to Bin Laden. It compounded that whopper by claiming reforms will cause a global recession due to higher oil prices that, of course, have nothing to do with changes in law. In another piece, the LA Times inverted the truth by falsely claiming a public majority opposes reforms. Then there’s the Miami Herald predicting an end to freedom of expression if changes pass and the Washington Post commenting on how high oil prices let Chavez buy influence.

    The Post then ran an inflamatory November 15 editorial headlined “Mr. Chavez’s Coup” if which it lied by saying November 7 student protesters “were fired on by gunmen (whom) university officials later ‘identified’….as members of government-sponsored ‘paramilitary groups’ when, in fact, there are no such groups. The editorial went on to say Chavez wants to “complete his transformation into an autocrat (to be able to) seize property….dispose of Venezuela’s foreign exchange reserves….impose central government rule on local jurisdictions and declare indefinite states of emergency” as well as suspend due process and freedom of information. Again, misinformation, deliberate distortion and outright lies from a leading quasi-official US house organ.

    Rupert Murdock’s Wall Street Journal weighed in as well with its lead anti-Chavez attack dog and all-round character assassin extraordinaire, Mary Anastasia O’Grady. This writer has tangled with her several times before and earlier commented how one day she’ll have a serious back problem because of her rigid position of genuflection to the most extreme hard-right elements she supports. Her latest November 12 column was vintage O’Grady and headlined “More Trouble for Chavez (as) Students and former allies unite against his latest power grab.”

    Like most of her others, this one drips with vitriol and outrageous distortions like calling Chavez a “dictator” when, in fact, he’s a model democrat, but that’s the problem for writers like O’Grady. Absent the facts, they use agitprop instead. O’Grady writes: “Mr. Chavez has been working to remove any counterbalances to his power for almost nine years (and) has met strong resistance from property owners, businesses, labor leaders, the Catholic Church and the media.” Now add opposition well-off students. Omitted is that the opposition is a minority, it represents elitist interests, and Chavez has overwhelming public support for his social democracy and proposed reform changes including from most students O’Grady calls “pro-Chavez goons.”

    Once again, she’s on a rampage, but that’s her job. She claims the absurd and people believe her – like saying the media will be censored, civil liberties can be suspended, and government will be empowered to seize private property. He’s a “demagogue,” says O’Grady, waging “class warfare,” but opposition to reform “has led to increased speculation (his) days are numbered.” Wishing won’t make it so, and O’Grady uses that line all the time.

    The New York Times is also on the attack in its latest anti-Chavez crusade. It’s been a leading Chavez critic for years, and Simon Romero is its man in Caracas. On November 3, he reported “Lawmakers in Venezuela Approve Expanded Power for Chavez (in a) constitutional overhaul (to) enhance (Chavez’s) authority, (allow) him to be reelected indefinitely, and (give) him the power to handpick rulers, to be called vice-presidents, (and) for various new regions to be created in the country….The new amendments would facilitate expropriations of private property (and allow state) security forces to round up citizens (stripped of their) legal protections” if Chavez declares a state of emergency – to make him look like Pakistan’s Musharraf when he’s mirror opposite.

    Romero also quoted Jose Manuel Gonzales, president of Venezuela’s Fedecamaras (chamber of commerce), saying “Venezuelan democracy was buried today” and anti-Chavez Roman Catholic church leaders (always allied with elitists) calling the changes “morally unacceptable.” Then on November 8, Romero followed with an article titled “Gunmen Attack Opponents of Chavez’s Bid to Extend Power” and implied they were pro-Chavez supporters. Again false. Still more came on November 10 headlined “Students Emerge as a Leading Force Against Chavez” in an effort to imply most students oppose him when, in fact, these elements are a minority.

    His latest so far is on November 17 titled “Chavez’s Vision Shares Wealth and Centers Power” that in fairness shows the President addressing a huge crowd of supporters in Maturin on November 16. But Romero spoiled it by calling his vision “centralized, oil-fueled socialism (with) Chavez (having) significantly enhanced powers.” Then he quotes Chavez biographer Alberto Barrera Tyszka who embarrassed himself and Romero saying the President is seizing and redirecting “power through legitimate means (and this) is not a dictatorship but something more complex,” the ‘tyranny’ of popularity.” In other words, he’s saying democracy is “tyranny.” The rest of the article is just as bad with alternating subtle and hammer blow attacks against a popular President’s aim to deepen his socially democratic agenda and help his people.

    Romero’s measured tone outclasses O’Grady’s crudeness that’s pretty standard fare on the Journal’s notorious opinion page. He’s much more dangerous, however, with a byline in the influential “newspaper of record” because of the important audience it commands.

    One other notable anti-Chavez piece is in the November 26 issue of the magazine calling itself “the capitalist tool” – Forbes. It shows in its one-sided commentary and intolerance of opposing views. The article in question, headlined “Latin Sinkholes,” is by right wing economist and long-time flack for empire, Steve Hanke. In it, he aims right at Chavez with outrageous comments like calling him a “negative reformer (who) turned back the clock (and) hails Cuba, the largest open-air prison in the Americas, as his model. His revolution’s enemy is the marketplace.” He then cites a World Bank report saying “Venezuela is tied with Zimbabwe as this year’s champion in smothering economic freedom,” and compounds that lie with another whopper.

    Point of fact – Venezuela and Argentina have the highest growth rates in the region and are near the top of world rankings in recent years. Following the devastating oil management 2002-03 lockout, Venezuela’s economy took off and grew at double digit rates in 2004, 05 and 06 and will grow a likely 8% this year. Hanke, however, says “Venezuela’s economic performance under Chavez has been anemic (growing) at an average rate of only 2% per year. In the same article, he aims in similar fashion at Ecuador’s Raphael Correa calling him “ruthlessly efficient (for wanting to) pull off a Bolivarian Revolution in Ecuador.” Hanke and most others in the dominant media are of one mind and never let facts contradict their opinions. Outliers won’t be tolerated even when it’s proved their way works best.

    There’s lots more criticism like this throughout the dominant media along with commentators calling Chavez “a dictator, another Hitler (and) a threat to democracy.” Ignoring the rules of imperial management has a price. This type media assault is part of it as a prelude for what often follows – attempted regime change.

    Further Venezuela Information Office (VIO) Clarification of Facts on the Ground

    On November 15, VIO issued an alert update to dispel media inaccuracies “about Venezuela’s constitutional reforms and the student protests” accompanying them. They’re listed below:

    — Caracas has a student population of around 200,000; at most 10,000 participated in the largest protest to date, and VIO estimates it was 6000;

    — the major media ignore how the government cooperates with students and made various accommodations to them to be fair to the opposition;

    — Venezuelan police have protected student protesters, and article 68 of the Constitution requires they do it; it affirms the right of all Venezuelans to assemble peacefully;

    — in addition, student protest leaders linked to opposition parties were granted high-level meetings with government officials to present their concerns;

    — on November 1, their student representatives met with directors of the National Electoral Council (CNE) and presented a petition to delay the referendum;

    — on November 7, they again met with National Tribunal of Justice officials and presented the same petition;

    — on November 12, Minister of Interior and Justice Minister, Pedro Carreno, met 20 university presidents to assure them the government respects university autonomy and their students’ right to assemble peacefully;

    — VIO reported what really happened at another November 1 protest after students met with CNE officials; some of them then tried to chain themselves to the building while others charged through police lines and injured six officers; in addition, one student had 20 liters of gasoline but never got to use it criminally; after the incident, the CNE president, Tibisay Lucena, issued a public statement expressing his disappointment about this kind of response to the government’s good faith efforts; and

    — VIO said students and university presidents from across the nation filed a document with the Supreme Court on November 14 supporting constitutional reform. Chief justice Luisa Estela Morales praised their coming and said the court’s doors are open to anyone wanting to give an opinion. The dominant media reported nothing on this. It also ignored the government’s 9000 public events throughout the country in past weeks to explain and discuss proposed reforms and that a hotline was installed for comments on them, pro or con.

    — finally, when protests of any kind happen in the US, police usually attack them with tear gas, beatings and mass arrests to crush their democratic spirit and prevent it from being expressed as our Constitution’s First and most important amendment guarantees. In Venezuela, the spirit of democracy lives. It never existed in the US, and we want to export our way to everyone and by force if necessary.

    Here’s a November 15 breaking news example of our way in action. At 8:00AM, 12 FBI and Secret Service agents raided the Liberty Dollar Company’s office in Evansville, IN and for the next six hours removed two tons of legal Ron Paul Dollars along with all the gold, silver and platinum at the location. They also took all location files and computers and froze Liberty Dollar’s bank accounts in an outrageous police state action against a legitimate business. This move also seems intended to impugn the integrity of a presidential candidate gaining popularity because he defies the bellicose mainstream and wants more people empowerment.

    Chavez champions another way and answered his critics at a November 14 Miraflores Presidential Palace press conference where he denounced them for lying about his reform package. He explained his aim is to strengthen Venezuela’s independence and transfer power to the people, not increase his own. “For many years in Venezuela,” he said, “they weakened the powers of the state as part of the neoliberal imperial plan….to weaken the economies of countries to insure domination. While we remained weak, imperialism was strengthened,” and he elaborated.

    He then continued to stress his most important reform “is the transfer of power to the people” through an explosion of grassroots communal, worker, student and campesino councils, formations of them into regional and national federations, and the formation of “communes (to) constitute the basic nucleus of the socialist state.” Earlier Chavez stated that democratizing the economy “is the only way to defeat poverty, to defeat misery and achieve the largest sum of happiness for the people.” He’s not just saying this. He believes and acts on it, and that’s why elitists target him for removal even though he wants equity for everyone, even his critics, and business continues to thrive under his government. But not like in the “good old” days when it was all one-way.

    Venezuelan Business is Booming – So Why Complain?

    Business in Venezuela is indeed booming, and in 2006 the Financial Times said bankers were “having a party” it was so good. So what’s the problem? It’s not good enough for corporate interests wanting it all for themselves and nothing for the people the way it used to be pre-Chavez. Unfair? Sure, but in a corporate-dominated world, that’s how it is and no outliers are tolerated. Thus Hugo Chavez’s dilemma.

    Last June, Business Week (BW) magazine captured the mood in an article called “A Love-Hate Relationship with Chavez – Companies are chafing under the fiery socialist. But in some respects, business has never been better.” Writer Geri Smith asked: “Just how hard is it to do business in Venezuela” and then exaggerated by saying “hardly a day passes without another change in the rules restricting companies.” Hardly so, but what is true is new rules require a more equitable relationship between government and business. They provide more benefits to the people and greater attention to small Venezuelan business and other commercial undertakings like an explosion of cooperatives (100,000 or more) that under neoliberal rules have no chance against the giants.

    Nonetheless, the economy under Chavez is booming, and business loves it even while it complains. It’s because oil revenues are high, Chavez spends heavily on social benefits, and the poor have seen their incomes more than double since 2004 when all their benefits are included. The result, as BW explains: “Sales of everything from basics” to luxury items “have taken off….and local and foreign companies alike are raking in more money than ever in Venezuela.” In addition, bilateral trade has never been higher, but American business complains it’s caught in the middle of a Washington – Caracas political struggle.

    The article continues to show how all kinds of foreign business is benefitting from cola to cars to computer chips. Yet, it restates the dilemma saying “As Chavez continues his socialist crusade, there are signs of rising discontent,” and it’s showing up now on the country’s streets with the latest confrontation still to be resolved, one way or another.

    Events Are Ugly and Coming to A Head

    Through the dominant media, Washington and Venezuelan anti-Chavez elements are using constitutional reform as a pretext for what they may have in mind – “to arouse the military to intervene” and oust Chavez, as Petras notes in his article titled “Venezuela: Between Ballots and Bullets.” He explains the opposition “rich and privileged (coalition) fear constitutional reforms because they will have to grant a greater share of their (considerable) profits to the working class, lose their monopoly over market transactions to publicly owned firms, and see political power evolve toward local community councils and the executive branch.”

    Petras is worried and says “class polarization….has reached its most extreme expression” as December 2 approaches: “the remains of the multi-class coalition embracing a minority of the middle class and the great majority of (workers) is disintegrating (and) political defections have increased (including 14) deputies in the National Assembly.” Add to them former Chavez Defense Minister, Raul Baduel, who Petras believes may be “an aspirant to head up a US-backed right-wing seizure of power.”

    The situation is ugly and dangerous, and lots of US money and influence fuels it. Petras puts it this way: “Venezuelan democracy, the Presidency of Hugo Chavez and the great majority of the popular classes face a mortal threat.” An alliance between Washington, local oligarchs and elitist supporters of the “right” are committed to ousting Chavez and may feel now is their best chance. Venezuela’s social democracy is on the line in the crucial December 2 vote, and the entire region depends on it solidifying and surviving.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Mondays at noon US Central time.

    Spy warns there could be a war over water

    HE is the spy who came in from the cold, endured the heat, experienced the chill and was burned in the process. Little wonder Lance Collins is pushing the cause of climate change.

    Lt-Col Collins, head of intelligence operations for General Peter Cosgrove during the East Timor conflict, triggered a series of high-level Government inquiries three years ago with explosive claims about a series of failures by Australia’s spy agencies.

    Now he is forecasting that unless global warming and the effects of climate change are addressed, Australia and the Asian region face a bleak future in which countries will go to war over dwindling resources, including the nation’s most precious commodity – water.

    “Water is going to be a crucial resource in the years to come,” he said yesterday.

    “Wars have always been fought over resources and with climate change, if most of our water is to be found in the north, which is relatively undefended, then we’ll have to rethink our strategies on defending northern Australia.

    Lt-Col Collins, who co-wrote a book about the Australian intelligence scene, has now entered the political arena as an adviser to Margherita Tracanelli, the Climate Change Coalition candidate for the Prime Minister’s seat of Bennelong. Lt-Col Collins, who says he has not seriously contemplated a future role in politics despite several approaches to stand for Parliament, first met Ms Tracanelli while serving in Dili in 1999.

    Ms Tracanelli, a human rights advocate , said yesterday Lt-Col Collins’ advice “has been invaluable”.

    Lt-Col Collins’ move into the political arena follows the decision by former intelligence officer Andrew Wilkie to run on the Greens Senate ticket in Tasmania. Mr Wilkie unsuccessfully challenged Mr Howard in Bennelong as an independent in the 2004 federal election.

    http://www.news.com.au/story/0,23599,22798668-421,00.html

    Is Brown re-thinking ID cards?

    0

    By Nick Assinder

    The creation of a giant register of every card-carrying member of the British public was always one of the more controversial elements of the ID cards proposal.

    The missing data crisis could not have provided a more spectacular example of what might happen if such databases are not secure.

    It has sparked widespread fears over the security of personal information and raised the inevitable demands for the entire ID card scheme to be abandoned – with signs the government may now be having second thoughts.

    The legislation has already been passed by Parliament, despite some severe cross-party reservations.

    But the campaign against it, backed by the opposition parties and civil liberties groups, has been given fresh impetus by the data crisis.

    Now might just be the last chance the prime minister gets to put this whole thing onto the back burner, or trim it in an attempt to answer some of the biggest criticisms.

    A tactical retreat at this point, after reviews of the system and the new inquiries already launched by Mr Brown into what went wrong with the child benefit information, might cause far less damage than seeing a top-level and possibly growing revolt against the proposal – specifically the pledge to eventually make the cards compulsory – up to the next general election.

    Election

    That election, even delayed until the last moment, is still far too close for ministers to feel at all confident the data crisis will not still be fresh in voters’ minds.

    Indeed it is likely that any Labour manifesto commitment to making the scheme compulsory would see the Tories turning it into a key election platform around the bigger issue of competence.

    For the moment, ministers insist ID cards would be essential in stopping just the sort of identity theft and fraud which might be carried out by anyone using the child benefit information illegally.

    But Tory leader David Cameron has said voters will think it is plain “bizarre and weird” if Mr Brown does not at least have another look at the proposals.

    Liberal Democrat president has said: “We need to assess the stupidity of that proposal early so we don’t waste any more public money going down that completely unhelpful road.”

    They have been joined by some senior Labour MPs, including Karen Buck, a member of the Commons home affairs committee, and Andy Love, a member of the Treasury committee.

    Both have suggested it is time to stand back and have a period of reflection over the proposals.

    Perhaps crucially, the information commissioner, Richard Thomas, has urged ministers to review the amount of data they intend to amass on the national identity register.

    ‘Confident’

    And some in Westminster were pointing to Gordon Brown’s words during question time in which he told David Cameron: “What we must ensure is that identity fraud is avoided, and the way to avoid identity fraud is to say that for passport information we will have the biometric support that is necessary, so that people can feel confident that their identity is protected.”

    Some have read that as a sign Mr Brown might be ready to abandon any plans to make ID cards compulsory, widely seen as the only way to ensure they are effective.

    It is even being speculated he is ready to make do with biometric passports which are gradually being rolled out, with no immediate move to go further down the road to ID cards.

    Under the current legislation, everyone over the age of 16 applying for a passport will have their “biometric” details – including fingerprints, eye or facial scans – added to a national identity register from 2008.

    The first identity cards will be issued in 2009 to those wanting one, but from 2010 anyone renewing or getting a passport will have to get one.

    It would be possible for the prime minister to go no further than the first – passports – phase of the scheme and delay moving to the further steps indefinitely if necessary.

    Can we trust Government over ID cards?

    1

    The loss of two computer discs containing the personal and banking details of 25 million people has inevitably cast fresh doubts over the Government’s plans to make us all have identity cards. There is good reason for these concerns.

    If the Government cannot be trusted to safeguard the sensitive information contained on the lost discs can it be trusted to look after a national identity register which would contain a wealth of useful information for criminals and terrorists. Ministers will no doubt assure us that the system for protecting the data on the national identity register will be so robust that we need have no fears. A few weeks ago, however, they probably would have said the same about the information provided by child benefit claimants – the information which has now gone astray.

    There is a fundamental point here. We live in a society where the Government and other authorities are entrusted with more and more information about us. We are under almost constant surveillance from a battery of CCTV cameras in every town and city. The police have a growing database of people’s DNA profiles, many of whom have not been convicted of any crime. ID cards will shortly mean that even more information will be stored about us.

    All of this sensitive data is held on trust. We have no idea whether Governments in the future might misuse this information or, more likely, simply mislay it in a similar blunder to the one we have witnessed this week.

    This error should give us all pause for thought, particularly over the issue of ID cards. Are we really happy to have yet more data stored about us? Will it really make us more secure, as the Government claims, or more vulnerable? It is difficult not to feel a sense of deep unease about the further cataloguing of the entire population.

    http://www.thisisleicestershire.co.uk/displayNode.jsp?nodeId=132384&command=displayContent&sourceNode=133850&contentPK=19035945&folderPk=77796&pNodeId=133851

    VIDEO: Paul Bremer and 9/11

    3

    Mission Accomplished

    In the early hours right after the 9/11 attacks, Paul Bremer appeared on NBC suggesting that Osama bin Laden was responsible. He was one of the first to float the name.

    What Bremer failed to mention is that as he appeared on television calmly speculating about who was responsible, 1,700 of the employees the company he worked for were “missing” as a result of the attack on the South Tower of the World Trade Center.

     
    It later turned out that over 200 were killed, one of the biggest losses of any organization that day.

    Two years later, Bush put Bremer in charge of rebuilding Iraq.

    There he decided against the advice of all military and diplomatic experts to disband Iraq’s army and put 400,000 armed and trained and then-cooperative soldiers in the street without any means of support and a major grudge against the US.

    Bremer…on TV right after 9/11 starting the Osama did it myth and then in Iraq guaranteeing a massive and deadly insurgency.

    What was Bremer doing before 9/11?

    Among other things, he was the Managing Director of Kissinger Associates.

    You know, Henry Kissinger. The former Harvard Professor turned adviser to the Rockefeller family who became Nixon’s foreign affairs adviser during the Vietnam War which Nixon extended for eight years beyond LBJs term.

    Still think the “botched” occupation of Iraq was a mistake or a surprise?

    Like Vietnam, the Iraq War is intended to bleed America dry
    financially and isolate it diplomatically – and the very same cast of characters have their fingerprints all over it and profiting from it.

    But try to find this very basic background information in the news media, mainstream or alternative.

    Are Bush and Cheney guilty of treason?

    0

    By Carol WolmanUS Constitution Article 3 Section 3. Treason against the United States, shall consist only in levying War against them, or in adhering to their Enemies, giving them Aid and Comfort. No Person shall be convicted of Treason unless on the Testimony of two Witnesses to the same overt Act, or on Confession in open Court.

    On Sept 20th, 2001, George W. Bush announced a “war on terror”. “Our war on terror begins with al Qaeda, but it does not end there. It will not end until every terrorist group of global reach has been found, stopped and defeated.” http://www.whitehouse.gov/news/releases/2001/09/20010920-8.html

    If we are engaged in a war on terrorist groups, then anyone who gives aid and comfort to terrorist groups is an enemy.

    One major aim of terrorist groups is to get hold of weapons of mass destruction, in order to better terrorize a target population, such as the people of the US.

    At the time Bush gave his speech, Valerie Plame was an undercover CIA agent, running an international ring of CIA assets, whose job was tracking WMD’s through world black markets and preventing them from falling into the hands of terrorists. Two years later, her undercover identity was leaked to the press. Her outing did serious and lasting damage.

    Several intelligence officials described the damage in terms of how long it would take for the agency to recover. According to their own assessment, the CIA would be impaired for up to “ten years” in its capacity to adequately monitor nuclear proliferation on the level of efficiency and accuracy it had prior to the White House leak of Plame Wilson’s identity. http://rawstory.com/news/2005/Outed_CIA_officer_was_working_on_0213.html In other words, the outing of Valerie Plame made it much easier for “every terrorist group of global reach” to acquire WMD’s.

    Thus, the outing of Valerie Plame gave aid and comfort to terrorist groups.

    In other words, whoever “leaked” her undercover CIA identity to the press gave aid and comfort to terrorist groups, by making it easier for them to acquire WMD’s.

    OUTING VALERIE PLAME WAS AN ACT OF TREASON.

    “Scooter” Libby took the fall for the administration on the Plame outing, after being convicted of perjury and obstruction of justice by Patrick Fitzgerald’s grand jury. Bush suspended his sentence, so he did no jail time.

    Now Scott McClelland, who was presidential spokesman at the time, tells us that both Bush and Cheney were directly involved into misleading him, Scott McClelland, into telling the press that no one in the White House did the outing of Plame.

    In other words, Bush and Cheney are co-conspirators in the outing of Plame, or at least in the coverup and obstruction of justice. They have both committed treason.

    If Congress does not impeach them immediately, then the whole Congress is guilty of treason.

    When the 2008 election comes around, We the People should turn out of office any Representative who has not cosponsored HR 333/799- to impeach Cheney.

    We’re forming a New Broom Coalition, for a clean sweep of Congress. If you, or someone you know, is running for Congress on an impeachment platform, please contact us through our website: http://sances.info/newbroom/.

    Take action — click here to contact your local newspaper or congress people:
    impeach Bush and Cheney

    Click here to see the most recent messages sent to congressional reps and local newspapers

    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=qTowK03sr7Q

    Carol S. Wolman, MD is a psychiatrist in Northern California. A lifelong peace activist, she has written extensively on the psychology of our times. She is a cochair of Bay Area Impeach Bush-Cheney. You can join or form a local group at http://impeachbush.meetup.com/ She ran for Congress in ’06, and is now a Gteen candidate for Congress in CA district 1. She is a coordinator of The New Broom Coalition, for a clean sweep of Congress.

    Cannabis lowers greenhouse emissions

    Hemp helps with green movement

    Lucas Coppes

    As environmental consciousness increases, a plant with great potential to accommodate our generation’s awareness has re-emerged, but its negative associations leave some obstacles to overcome.

    Hemp, which is too often associated with marijuana, does come from the same family of plants, but yields a fraction of the active ingredient, THC.

    Hemp has the uncanny ability to help in solving many of the world’s major dilemmas from nutrition problems to the greenhouse effect.

    In 1938, Popular Mechanics named hemp the first “billion dollar crop” for the U.S., which it could use to produce everything from fuel, paper and oil to medicine and dynamite. According to Jack Herer in his book The Emperor Wears No Clothes, if we still used the same process being used in 1916 to produce hemp paper today, it could replace 40 to 70 per cent of all pulp paper.

    Today, hemp will produce 4.1 times more pulp for paper over a 20-year rotation compared to trees. For example, supermarket paper bags from trees and chemical-based plastic bags would be replaced with a biodegradable, more durable paper that’s acquired from an annually renewable source: cannabis hemp.

    In the U.S., 82 per cent of spending goes towards energy to maintain a home or to produce its products. Development in biomass energy has exploded in the last few years, and cellulose from things like corn and sugar cane can be converted to methanol and then to a high-octane lead-free gasoline.

    Hemp prevails again, as it produces the most net biomass, and has from four to 100 times more cellulose than other products currently in use. This variation is due to inadequate research, but suggests hemp’s equivalent potential to corn and sugar. This idea is not as novel as it seems; Ford Motor Co. was operating this process in the 1930s using tree cellulose, and Henry Ford himself partially constructed a car using hemp.

    Both paper and fuel show major benefits for combating the greenhouse effect, as we would keep trees alive and allow them to grow and keep 10 times more carbon dioxide out of the atmosphere.

    Hemp is an annually renewable resource, such that the carbon dioxide it emits when used as gasoline is recycled to keep the plant alive during its next generation. In the ground it expels oxygen and recycles the carbon for our energy uses.

    The seed of the hemp plant also offers critical support to humanity, as it is one of the most complete sources of nutrition. It provides all the essential amino acids that provide support for our immune system, skin, hair and thought processes. It can also be made into butter, much like peanut butter. As Udo Erasmus, a PhD nutritionist and lecturer, said, “Hemp butter puts our peanut butter to shame for nutritional value.”

    Since hemp can grow in virtually any climate including northern and dessert climates, it offers nutritional support and protein for developing countries.

    These are only a few of the countless benefits of hemp. It’s about time we opened our minds and implemented some thoughtful solutions to secure humanity’s future on mother earth.

    HILLARY QUOTES: How Common?

    0

    Hat Tip to Earl1911 for finding these!

    Where is the G-damn f**king flag? I want the G-damn f**king flag up every f**king morning at f**king sunrise.” (From the book “Inside The White House” by Ronald Kessler, p. 244 – Hillary to the staff at the Arkansas Governor’s mansion on Labor Day, 1991)

    “You sold out, you mother f**ker! You sold out!” (From the book “Inside” by Joseph Califano, p. 213 – Hillary yelling at Democrat lawyer.)

    “It’s been said, and I think it’s accurate, that my husband was obsessed by terrorism in general and al-Qaida in particular.” (Hillary telling a post-9/11 world what a ‘great’ commander in chief her husband was; Dateline, NBC 4/16/2004.)

    “I have to admit that a good deal of what my husband and I have learned [about Islam] has come from our daughter.” (TruthInMedia.org 8/8/1999 – Hillary at a White House function, proudly tells some Muslim groups she is gaining a greater appreciation of Islam because Chelsea was then taking a class on the “religion of peace”)

    F**k off! It’s enough that I have to see you shit-kickers every day, I’m not going to talk to you too!! Just do your G*damn job and keep your mouth shut.” (From the book “American Evita” by Christopher Anderson, p. 90 – Hillary to her State Trooper bodyguards after one of them greeted her with “Good morning.”

    “You f**king idiot.” (From the book “Crossfire” p. 84 – Hillary to a State Trooper who was driving her to an event.)

    “If you want to remain on this detail, get your f**king ass over here and grab those bags!” (From the book “The First Partner” p. 259 – Hillary to a Secret Service Agent who was reluctant to carry her luggage because he wanted to keep his hands free in case of an incident.)

    “Get f**ked! Get the f**k out of my way!!! Get out of my face!!!”(From the book “Hillary’s Scheme” p. 89 – Hillary’s various comments to her Secret Service detail agents.)

    “Stay the f**k back, stay the f**k away from me! Don’t come within ten yards of me, or else! Just f**king do as I s ay, Okay!!!?” (From the book “Unlimited Access”, by Clinton FBI Agent in Charge, Gary Aldrige, p. 139 – Hillary screaming at her Secret Service detail.)

    “Many of you are well enough off that [President Bush’s] tax cuts may have helped you. We’re saying that for America to get back on track, we’re probably going to cut that short and not give it to you. We’re going to have to take things away from you on behalf of the common good.” (Hillary grandstanding at a fund raising speech in San Francisco; SFGate.com 6/28/2004.)

    “Why do I have to keep proving to people that I am not a liar?!”(From the book “The Survivor,” by John Harris, p. 382 – Hillary in her 2000 Senate campaign)

    “Where’s the miserable c*ck sucker?” (From the book “The Truth About Hillary” by Edward Klein, p. 5 – Hillary shouting at a Secret Service officer)

    “No matter what you think about the Iraq war, there is one thing we can all agree on for the next days – we have to salute the courage and bravery of those who are risking their lives to vote and those brave Iraqi and American soldiers fighting to protect their right to vote.” (Was posted on Hillary Clinton’s senate.gov web site on 1/28/05)

    “Put this on the ground! I left my sunglasses in the limo. I need those sunglasses. We need to go back!” (From the book “Dereliction of Duty” p. 71-72 – Hillary to Marine One helicopter pilot to turn back while en route to Air Force One.)

    A right-wing network was after his presidency…including perverting the Constitution.” (To Barbara Walters about the Republicans who impeached her husband; 20/20, ABC 6/8/2003.)

    “What are you doing inviting these people into my home? These people are our enemies! They are trying to destroy us!” (From the book “The Survivor” by John Harris, p. 99 – Hillary screaming to an aide, when she found out that some Republicans had been invited to the White House)

    “I mean, you’ve got a conservative and right-wing press presence with really nothing on the other end of the political spectrum.” (C-Span, 1/19/1997 – Hillary complains about the mainstream media, which are all conservatives in her opinion)

    “Come on Bill, put your dick up! You can’t f**k her here!!” (From the book “Inside The White House” by Ronald Kessler, p. 243 – Hillary to Gov. Clinton when she spots him talking with an attractive female at an Arkansas political rally)

    “You know, I’m going to start thanking the woman who cleans the restroom in the building I work in. I’m going to start thinking of her as a human being” (From the book “The Case Against Hillary Clinton” by Peggy Noonan, p. 55)

    “You show people what you’re willing to fight for when you fight your friends.” (From the book “The Agenda” by Bob Woodward, ch. 14)

    “We are at a stage in history in which remolding society is one of the great challenges facing all of us in the West.” (From the book “I’ve Always Been A Yankee Fan” by Thomas D. Kuiper, p 119 – During her 1993 commencement address at the University of Texas)

    “The only way to make a difference is to acquire power” (From the book “I’ve Always Been A Yankee Fan” by Thomas D. Kuiper, p 68 – Hillary to a friend before starting law school.)

    “We just can’t trust the American people to make those types of choices…. Government has to make those choices for people” (From the book “I’ve Always Been A Yankee Fan” by Thomas D. Kuiper, p 20 – Hillary to Rep. Dennis Hastert in 1993 discussing her expensive, disastrous taxpayer-funded health care plan)

    “I am a fan of the social policies that you find in Europe” (From the book “I’ve Always Been A Yankee Fan” by Thomas D. Kuiper, p. 76 – Hillary in 1996)

    Hat Tip Joe http://gatewaypundit.blogspot.com/2007/03/hillary-clinton-get-fcked.html

    http://patricksperry.wordpress.com/2007/06/30/hillary-quotes/

    NYC Fire Chief: Giuliani ‘Not a Hero’ ‘He Ran That Day’

    0

    Rudy is now “trumpeting his leadership in the wake of 9/11 in campaign mailings to voters in Iowa and New Hampshire” despite claiming all along that he wasn’t running on his 9/11 record. Dan Abrams has on FDNY Deputy Fire Chief Jim Riches, whose group, 9/11 Firefighters and Families, vows to not let Giuliani get away with it.

    Riches: “We are going to follow him around and tell the true story of what happened on 9/11.” … “and get the message out to all of America and every state to let them know that Rudy Giuliani is not Mr 9/11. He’s not a hero. He ran that day.”

    What the Giuliani campaign is now outwardly touting as his strength could very well become his achilles heel. This is not the first NYC firefighter group to take on Rudy ( http://therealrudy.org/radios ). Under pressure from these groups, NYC has just launched an investigation into “how the FDNY ended up using faulty equipment during the terrorist attacks and why Giuliani gave a no-bid contract to Motorola for that equipment.” ( http://www.crooksandliars.com/2007/11… )

    And it’s not like the Kerik indictment doesn’t strike right at the heart of his 9/11 hero claims too.
    http://www.talkingpointsmemo.com/hors…

    School of the Americas

    1

    Twenty thousand people staged a protest at Fort Benning, home of the School of Americas, now known as the Western Hemisphere Institute for Security Cooperation (WHINSEC)Veterans of WWII, Korea, Vietnam and the never-ending Gulf Wars marched side by side with Catholic sisters and Buddhist monks.


    Eleven were arrested and are facing six months imprisonment for “trespass.” The individual being interviewed in this clip is a CIA employee named Duane Clarridge.

    During the slaughter in Central America during the 1980s the Vice President of the United States was George Bush Sr.

    http://www.brasschecktv.com/page/204.html

    Child benefit: Civil servant’s error led to fiasco

    0

    By Richard Edwards

    The records fiasco was triggered a month ago when a junior civil servant put a brown envelope with two compact discs into a general post basket in his office.

  • Junior clerk’s bungle sparks ID fraud alert for every family

    The unnamed official, working at HM Revenue and Customs (HMRC) offices just outside Newcastle, had put the personal details of 25 million people into the internal mail.

     
    Police officers search the Child Benefits Agency offices
    Police officers search the Child Benefits Agency offices for the missing compact discs

    It was neither recorded nor registered, meaning it was treated simply as another piece of the 100,000 items of mail handled every night by the contracted couriers, TNT. It was destined for the National Audit Office (NAO) in central London, 278 miles away, but it never arrived.

    Hundreds of police officers are now on its trail. Detectives do not know if the data is in the hands of a criminal, lost on a roadside, or, indeed, if it ever left the office in Newcastle.

    One police source said: “We don’t know when it was lost, let alone where. We’re looking for a needle in a hundred haystacks.”

    The series of blunders had their origin in March, when complacency and laziness about the security of personal data was first evident.

    A junior official had supplied a full copy of Revenue and Customs’ child benefit data to London, by post, where it was audited and returned. They had broken the rules about how to transport sensitive records but it seemed they had got away with it.

    In October, the NAO asked again for information from the child benefit database.

    On Oct 18, the civil servant put two password-protected discs into an envelope at the office in Waterview Park, Washington, Tyne and Wear.

    It is assumed they were put into the internal mail basket. A van driver, working for TNT, made the daily pick-up of general mail.

    It was organised into destinations and delivered. No other post was reported lost.

    But as Alistair Darling, the Chancellor, embarrassingly admitted to the Commons yesterday: “It appears the data has failed to reach the addressee in the NAO.”

    The initial security lapse was exacerbated by the authority’s reaction to the loss. Only on Nov 8, three weeks later, was it reported to senior management.

    In that time, a further copy of the data was sent, which this time arrived.

    The civil servant believed the package was delayed by the postal strike or an NAO move and “hoped it would turn up” and kept quiet, an HMRC spokesman said.

    On Nov 10, Mr Darling was finally informed that the original copy had not shown up. The Chancellor was perhaps given the impression that HMRC were close to tracking it down but when there was still no news on Nov 14, he ordered them to call in the police.

    The Metropolitan Police said they were only alerted the next day – last Thursday – and officers were handed the lead in the investigation on Sunday – a full month since the loss.

    In an indication of how seriously it is being taken, the search is being led by Acting Assistant Commissioner Janet Williams, a specialist in organised crime is a former commander of Special Branch.

    It is understood that the civil servant has been interviewed, along with other office members, TNT staff and Audit Office officials.

    Police are also searching the NAO premises in Victoria, central London.

    The Met said: “Active inquiries are being made to try to recover the data.”

  • Tracking by sun: RFID goes solar

    1
    Solar-powered Radio Frequency Identification (RFID)

    Savi Technology, a unit of Lockheed Martin, has announced it recently began deploying solar-powered Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) readers and signposts located at a major U.S. Army supply facility in Kuwait. The solar-powered signposts activate RFID tags attached to vehicles or pieces of equipment. The tags then report the assets’ positions to nearby RFID readers, which relay the information to Savi Site Manager software that automatically updates the assets’ latest location.

    According to Savi, use of solar energy provides an energy efficient and environmentally friendly power source for users’ RFID hardware, and also eliminates the need to install electrical infrastructure in remote areas where there is no fixed reader infrastructure. The tools installed in Kuwait enable the facility to track more than 25,000 tags per day. Plans are also underway with the U.S. Department of Defense to expand the use of solar-powered applications to other areas in the Middle East and beyond.

    Solar-powered signposts

    Savi Networks also operates a solar-powered RFID-based network in Colombia. There, Savi RFID signposts and readers are used to track the status and security of containerized cargo shipments managed by Emprevi Ltda., a Colombia-based provider of logistics and security services for major importers and exporters. Savi Networks, a joint venture in which Savi Technology holds a majority interest, installed solar-powered panels at strategic supply chain checkpoints, including source factories and port facilities, to monitor in-transit goods manufactured in and exported from Colombia.

    http://fleetowner.com/news/savi_solar_powered_radio_frequency/

    How Could 9/11 Hijackers Obtain Secret Service Codes?

    0

    911Blogger

    How could reportedly disorganized and incompetent hijackers or cave dwelling terrorists thousands of miles away, know how to threaten Air Force One with classified Secret Service codes on 9/11/2001?

    Poll: Americans losing trust in Bush

    3

    A poll conducted by C-SPAN’s Capital News online about the Iraq war shows that most Americans trust Congress far more than US president.

    The C-SPAN news network on Monday asked voters the question, “Should the Congress or the President decide when to withdraw US troops from Iraq?”

    The results of the voting up to now show that 74 percent of the Americans prefer that the Congress decide on the matter, while only 26 percent believe the US president, as the Commander in Chief, is the right authority who should make the decision.

    The poll shows that the majority of Americans have lost their trust in President Bush due to his policies over troops withdrawal from Iraq.

    Instead, they rely on the Congress to make a decision.

    RZS/BGH

    The True Cost of the Iraq War

    The Iraq War has cost Americans well over $1 trillion. According to a study by the Democratic Staff of Congress’ Joint Economic Committee, entitled “The Hidden Costs of the Iraq War,” “The economic costs to the United States of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan so far total approximately $1.5 trillion… That amount is nearly double the $804 billion the White House has spent or requested to wage these wars through 2008.” The report also calculates that the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan have already cost the typical family of four more than $20,000. As the report notes, “The full economic costs of the war to the American taxpayers and the overall U.S. economy go well beyond even the immense federal budget costs already reported.” Unlike previous assessments, these estimates look at the conflicts; “‘hidden costs’– including higher oil prices, the expense of treating wounded veterans and interest payments on the money borrowed to pay for the wars.” [Washington Post, 11/13/07]

    Staying the course in Iraq could cost an additional $2 trillion. While the war in Iraq has already incurred a tremendous cost on American taxpayers and the American economy, staying the course in Iraq is a choice that would have huge additional costs. It is estimated that staying the course in Iraq could cost an additional $2 trillion in total economic costs, including interest payments for war-related debt payments. [Joint Economic Committee, Majority Staff, 11/07]

    War in Iraq comes at significant cost to our economy. The Center for Economic and Policy Research estimated that the impact of funding the war on the U.S. economy occurs “at the loss of 500,000 jobs after ten years of war spending, and crimping overall economic output by $60 billion a year.” Dean Baker, co-director at Center for Economic and Policy Research explained that funding the war in Iraq is “draining resources away from productive sectors of the economy… It will be more of a drag over time.” Gus Faucher at Moody’s explains that while interest rates are low, “they would be even lower were it now for the war.” Faucher concludes that paying for the war is “going to have an impact on long-term growth, especially if this continues.” Additionally, the war is diverting billions from more “productive investment(s) by American businesses in the United States.” The war is also creating disruptions to the economy by pulling Guard and Reservists out of their jobs at an estimated cost of $1 to $2 billion. [CNN-Money, 10/23/07. Washington Post, 11/13/07]

    War in Iraq has contributed to rising gas prices. David Kirsch, a former State Department energy analyst who now manages oil market intelligence for PFC Energy consultants in Washington, “Without this disaster, oil prices would be much lower today.” The Dallas Morning News writes that, “The crippling of Iraq’s oil production since the start of the war amounts to one of the biggest disruptions in world oil supplies since World War II, according to statistics compiled by the U.S. Department of Energy.” A study by the Democratic Staff of Congress’ Joint Economic Committee estimates that declining Iraqi production “has likely raised oil prices in the U.S. by between $4 and $5 a barrel.” [Dallas Morning News, 11/12/07. Washington Post, 11/13/07]

    War in Iraq financed by debt – America facing huge future interest costs. Reuters reported that the “wars in Iraq and Afghanistan could cost taxpayers a total of $2.4 trillion by 2017 when counting the huge interest costs because combat is being financed with borrowed money, according to a study released on Wednesday.” The Congressional Budget Office “estimated that interest costs alone from 2001-2017 could total more than $700 billion.” [Reuters, 10/24/07]

    Veterans care costs will grow “putting historic strains on the Veterans Administration.” Advances in modern medicine have meant that U.S. military personnel in Iraq that have been wounded are surviving at an unprecedented rate due to advances in modern medicine. Greg Bruno at CFR notes that, “costs associated with treating the wounded are skyrocketing, putting historic strains on the VA. The Congressional Budget Office estimates the agency’s medical expenditures could top $9 billion by 2017, with an additional $4 billion in survivors’ benefits.” One expert, Linda Bilmes at Harvard, “estimates disability compensation and medical care costs could reach $700 billion over the lifetime of these soldiers.” [CFR, 11/09/07]

    Country must brace for a “tsunami” like surge in number of homeless vets. More and more veterans of the war in Iraq and Afghanistan are turning up homeless. The Veterans Affairs Department puts the number of homeless Iraq and Afghanistan veterans at more than 400 and they are bracing for many more in the years ahead. Phil Landis the chairman of Veterans Village of San Diego, explained that, “We’re beginning to see, across the country, the first trickle of this generation of warriors in homeless shelters… But we anticipate that it’s going to be a tsunami.” [NY Times, 11/08/07]

    Bush ‘approved lies’ in CIA leak case

    0

    Bush ‘approved lies’ in CIA leak case that exposed spy whose husband opposed Iraq war, says former aide

    A former White House press secretary has accused US president George Bush of approving “lies” after the media was told that top-ranking aides were not involved in a leak which exposed an American CIA agent.

    Scott McClellan says in an upcoming book that he was misled by President Bush and other high officials into misinforming the press about the Valerie Plame CIA leak case that fueled debate about the Iraq war.

    McClellan says he publicly exonerated former top White House aides Karl Rove and Lewis “Scooter” Libby because Bush had called on him to help restore his credibility after the failure to find weapons of mass destruction in Iraq.

    “There was one problem,” he wrote. “It was not true.

    “I had unknowingly passed along false information. And five of the highest ranking officials in the administration were involved in my doing so: Rove, Libby, the vice president, the president’s chief of staff, and the president himself,” McClellan said in an excerpt released last night.

    McClellan, a long-time Bush aide, whose job as White House press secretary from 2003 to 2006 was to field questions from the press, was not available for comment.

    His book “Inside the Bush White House and What’s Wrong with Washington” is due out only in April, but the publisher, Public Affairs, posted the excerpt on its Web site as a teaser.

    Asked about the excerpt, White House press secretary Dana Perino said: “The president has not and would not ask anyone to pass on false information.”

    A criminal investigation into who leaked the identity of former CIA analyst Valerie Plame reached into the ranks of top White House aides and resulted in the conviction of Libby on perjury and obstruction of justice charges in March.

    Libby, Vice President Dick Cheney’s former chief of staff, was sentenced to 2 1/2 years in prison. Bush commuted the sentence in July.

    Plame’s cover was blown after her husband, former Ambassador Joseph Wilson, accused the Bush administration of manipulating intelligence on Iraqi weapons of mass destruction to build its case for war.

    No one was charge with criminally disclosing Plame’s identity.

    Rove, Bush’s former White House political adviser, was investigated but not charged, in the CIA leak probe.

    On the day when Libby’s verdict was announced, McCllelan was asked in an interview on CNN’s “Larry King Live” whether he had been lied to by those involved.

    He responded: “I did speak directly with them and I was careful about the way I phrased it at the time, even though I believed what they had told me to be the truth.”

    http://www.dailymail.co.uk/pages/live/articles/news/worldnews.html?in_article_id=495404&in_page_id=1811&ito=newsnow

    Home Office insists biometric data is secure

    0

    Alan Travis
    The Guardian

    The Home Office last night sought to shore up public trust in its £5.6bn identity card project, as the failure over child benefit records fed into anxieties over so-called “Big Brother” databases.Critics of the “surveillance society” claimed the ID cards project could not now go ahead without a review of its privacy safeguards to see if they worked. They also raised concern about leaks from other databases, including NHS personal records and the new children’s register.

    The Home Office insisted that the biometric elements in its database, the electronic fingerprints and facial scans, will keep it secure and proof against identity theft, even if there were to be a major breach and stolen confidential data.

    “The biometric means that it will be much more difficult to use somebody else’s identity, as they will have to provide the correct fingerprint or facial image at the same time. You can’t create a fingerprint or a face,” said a Home Office spokesman. He also emphasised that the identity register would also be protected by a chip-and-pin with severe penalties for those who tried to access the database illegally.

    Legislation includes sentences of up two years for “an unauthorised disclosure” by staff from the database, and a maximum of 10 years for those who tamper physically or technically with it. Activity on the system will be audited, and an alert raised if an unauthorised action or attempt to access the register is made.

    These safeguards did little to reassure ID card critics. The shadow chancellor, George Osborne, said the loss of the child benefit records was the “final blow for the ambitions of this government to create a national ID database” as “they simply can not be trusted with people’s personal information”.

    The No2id campaign called for an immediate audit of all personal information held by the government: “This data disaster shows up the madness behind the government’s ID schemes. People had no choice about giving up that information. It makes the government the biggest identity theft of all.”

    Spokesman Phil Booth said that the government’s plan to share personal data between departments also contained dangers, which only a full and independent audit could now resolve.

    Richard Thomas, the independent Information Commissioner, said the security breach illustrated that any system was only as good as its weakest link. Last week, he voiced concerns over the amount of information to be stored on the ID register – in particular “transaction data” tracking each time the ID card is swiped at an airport, police station or social security office.

    The Treasury last month published a plan for “centralised management” of all personal data held on various department databases, intended to reduce the number of times a citizen has to notify government of a change such as moving home or job. But with the complexity of databases, including the rapidly expanding national DNA database and the NHS personal records database, there are concerns at what privacy can be maintained, let alone “leaks” or theft of records.

    Data laws laid down the key principle that data provided to the government for one purpose should not be available for a different one. Earlier this year the principle was reversed in secondary legislation. It now reads “information will normally be shared in the public sector, provided it is in the public interest.”

    NO2ID calls for government data audit

    0

    An independent audit should be held into all personal information held by the government, NO2ID said.

    Responding the news that HMRC have lost the confidential details of over 15 million people, NO2ID, the campaign against ID cards and the ‘database state’, called for an immediate halt to the development of the National Identity Scheme (NIS). They said it should not resume until a full and independent audit of personal information stored by the government has been conducted.

    Their national coordinator, Phil Booth, said people had no choices in giving up that information and this makes the government “the biggest identity thief of them all”.

    “It’s bad enough that HMRC can’t be trusted with basic financial details. But within five years the Home Office could be leaking or losing people’s complete identity records. And ‘data-sharing’ plans would make your whole life depend on government identity management. If you are not on their list, you won’t exist,” he said.

    “Development of the National Identity Scheme should stop now. But more than that — we all need to know what information the government holds about us now, how it is already being shared among departments, and what the dangers are. That will only happen if there is a full and independent audit of what personal information is currently collected and the ways it is used.”

    Will Darling’s data giveaway kill off ID cards?

    0

    By John Oates

    UK Identity Crisis Anti-ID card campaigners believe that yesterday’s admission by Chancellor Alistair Darling that the government has lost records and private information relating to 25 million people could be the nail in the coffin for the ID card project.

    A spokesman for campaign group NO2ID said: “It’s inevitably good news for our campaign because it proves to people that this government, and indeed any government, cannot be trusted with this amount of information. For 25 million people this is a catastrophe but it is just a small herald of the national ID scheme which would mean a potential catastrophe for 60 million of us.”

    He continued: “It’s always been a difficult notion or concept as to why it’s important for people to care what data government has on you and how it deals with it. Sadly, it takes a catastrophe like this to sharpen people’s focus on the issue.”

    Timely research from CA, released yesterday, found that two thirds of UK consumers believe organisations should take more responsibility for protecting personal details online. Only one in four UK consumers trust the government with their data – up two per cent on last year. Researchers spoke to 2,000 people in 2006 and 2007.

    Simon Perry, vice president of security strategy at CA, said: “It shows just how much critical data can be contained on a couple of CDs. It appears that it is standard practice to shuttle this data around physically which means there is no audit trail – no way of knowing if the information was accessed or copied. It’s good that the government has taken some proactive action in talking to banks but the inconvenience falls on account and card holders – it’s about externalising the pain.”

    Asked whether the scandal has an impact on the ID card scheme, Perry said: “If these issues come up with existing data stores you have to question government claims that a national database can be made rock solid.”

    In August, the House of Lords Science and Technology Committee published a report which recommended a law governing data breaches. In October, the government rejected its recommendations.

    Perry said he was a big supporter of breach disclosure – legislation which would force companies and government organisations to admit to data breaches.

    He said: “The longer the gap between a data breach and people being told about it the greater the risk of fraud occurring. Such disclosures internalise the pain.”

    William Beer, security practice director for Europe at Symantec, told the Reg: “Twenty-five per cent of data breaches come from governments – because of the amount of data they hold and the number of sites they run. Technology can help with this, but it is not a silver bullet. It’s about processes and people too.”

    Beer also favours legislation to force government departments and other organisations to admit to failures. “Data breach notification laws, as recommended by the House of Lords in August, would help. We’ve already seen positive impact from similar laws in the US.”

    Asked if he would be happy putting his personal data into a UK national database, he said: “I’d certainly be asking some questions, I’d have some concerns.” ®

    9/11 Research Reflects Badly On Cambridge University

    0

    No Detectable Respect For Science: False Claims Regarding 9/11 Research Reflect Badly On University Of Cambridge

    On September 11, 2007, the BBC published an article describing an unpublished paper by Dr. Keith Seffen of the University of Cambridge.

    Dr. Seffen, the BBC said, had constructed a mathematical model of the World Trade Center collapses which showed that “once the collapse of the twin towers began, it was destined to be rapid and total.”

    According to the BBC, Dr. Seffen proceeded from this mathematical model to describe the destruction of the twin towers as a “very ordinary thing to happen”.

    The BBC also reported that Dr. Seffen’s findings “are published” in the Journal of Engineering Mechanics (JEM), a publication of the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE).

    But this claim — which the BBC apparently never checked — was false.

    The BBC’s article was based on a press release from the University of Cambridge which begins as follows:

    A new mathematical analysis of the collapse of the World Trade Centre has been published by a Cambridge University academic, with results that challenge conspiracy theories surrounding the September 11th attacks.

    Unfortunately, Dr. Seffen’s paper had not been published at the time of the press release, and it has not been published to this day. (Earlier this month, the ASCE announced that Dr. Seffen’s paper is scheduled to be published in the February 2008 issue of the JEM.)

    Professor Alison Richard is the Vice-Chancellor of the University of Cambridge.

    According to her web page,

    The Vice-Chancellor is the principal academic and administrative officer of the University, and Professor Richard is the first woman to hold the position full-time.

    The University of Cambridge is among the world’s foremost universities […]

    The University’s academic staff of some 1,700 are globally recognized for the excellence of their teaching and research.

    It is most unlikely that the University’s reputation for academic excellence will have been enhanced by this incident.

    The author of the paper, Dr. Keith Seffen, is a senior lecturer in the Structures Group of Cambridge’s Engineering Department. The head of the Structures Group is Dr. Chris Burgoyne.

    According to the page describing the people of the Structures Group,

    Chris Burgoyne is Head of the Structures Group and a Reader in Concrete Structures. His interests are prestressed concrete, advanced composites, MRI imaging of concrete and structural properties of bone. He is a fellow of Emmanuel College.

    Tel: 01223 332698
    Email: cjb@eng.cam.ac.uk

    Drs. Chris Burgoyne, Alison Richard and Keith Seffen will soon receive the following email:

    TO: Dr. Chris Burgoyne
    Head of the Structures Group
    Department of Engineering
    University of Cambridge
    cjb@eng.cam.ac.uk

    CC: Dr. Alison Richard
    Vice-Chancellor of the University of Cambridge
    v-c.office.online@admin.cam.ac.uk

    CC: Dr. Keith Seffen
    Senior Lecturer in Structural Engineering
    University of Cambridge
    kas14@cam.ac.uk

    Dear Dr. Burgoyne,

    More than two months ago, the University of Cambridge published a press release whose opening sentence falsely claims that an unpublished research paper written by Dr. Keith Seffen of the Engineering Department’s Structures Group “has been published”. [1]

    The subject of the paper was a controversial one, and the press release was echoed by the BBC and several other news providers. [2, 3, 4, 6]

    The false claim in the opening sentence was pointed out shortly after the BBC article was published [5], and the BBC changed its online report within a few hours. [6]

    Today, more than two months later, Dr. Seffen’s paper remains unpublished. [7] Yet the press release is still online, with the original wording intact. [1]

    Curiously, the press release contradicts itself in its eighth paragraph, saying Dr. Seffen’s paper “will be published”. The conflict between this statement and the assertion in the opening paragraph has never been explained, satisfactorily or otherwise.

    Dr. Seffen has declined to answer any questions submitted to him by email. [8]

    As you well know, one does not normally expect to see the conclusions of an unpublished paper discussed in the major media, especially when the topic is controversial.

    Much less does one expect to see an article representing an unpublished paper as having been published.

    If this had been an honest mistake, a prompt and apologetic clarification could have been granted a long time ago.

    The lack of any such clarification, along with Dr. Seffen’s subsequent failure to answer any questions, embodies no detectable respect for science nor any hint of a quest for truth.

    Quite independent of the merits of Dr. Seffen’s paper, this incident reflects badly not only on Dr. Seffen and the Structures Group but on the entire University of Cambridge as well.

    It would be a shame if such conduct were to become the norm for Dr. Seffen and his colleagues.

    Therefore it seems quite reasonable to ask:

    • Why has the University not yet posted a correction nor issued an apology?
    • When does the University intend to do these things?
    • Is this the sort of conduct the University expects from the Professors who represent it?
    • And if not, how and when does the University intend to make its wishes known?

    Your attention to this not inconsiderable matter is most appreciated.

    Sincerely

    [ … ]

    Notes:

    [1] University of Cambridge: 9/11 “conspiracy” theories challenged by Cambridge research

    [2] Cambridge Evening News: Lecturer dismisses twin towers blast theory

    [3] Business Weekly: Zero Grounds for Ground Zero conspiracy theory

    [4] Winter Patriot: Seffen’s Folly: Attempted 9/11 Hoax By Cambridge And The BBC Was A Failure

    [5] Winter Patriot: UK Engineer: WTC ‘Collapses’ Were ‘A Very Ordinary Thing’

    [6] BBC: 9/11 demolition theory challenged

    [7] Winter Patriot: WTC ‘Collapse’ Research Cited In September Is Scheduled To Be Published In February

    [8] Winter Patriot: Where’s The Paper? Did The BBC And A Cambridge Don Commit Fraud To Cover Up Mass Murder?

    I have no doubt that Drs. Burgoyne, Richard and Seffen will enjoy hearing from me on this matter.

    They will probably enjoy hearing from you, too.

    And if you click here, you can send email to all three of them at the same time — just like I did!

    Lost: the personal details of 25 million people

    0

    Who decided to post two discs with personal and financial details of 25 million people by unregistered delivery?
    What has become of the missing discs and could they have fallen into the hands of fraudsters?
    Why did the Government wait 10 days before telling the public what had happened?
    Where will the buck stop after the revenue chief’s resignation?
    When can the British people be sure once again that their money is safe in their bank accounts?

     

    Seven million families are having to make urgent checks on their bank accounts today after the biggest security blunder in history led to the personal details of 25 million fathers, mothers and children being lost by the Whitehall department responsible for all tax and benefits.

    The head of HM Revenue and Customs, Paul Gray — one of the country’s most highly paid civil servants — resigned his £198,000-a-year post as the scale of the fiasco became clear.

    But the Prime Minister and his embattled Chancellor, Alistair Darling, were counting the cost to their own reputations last night as the disaster left them looking accident-prone and open to opposition charges of incompetence.

    The news that a package containing the personal details of every family in Britain with a child under 16 had gone missing in the post was greeted with astonishment and anger when it was revealed to MPs by the Chancellor.

    It could not have come at a worse time for Mr Darling, who just 24 hours earlier had come under sustained attack from the opposition after admitting that taxpayers’ money could be at risk in the £24bn rescue of Northern Rock.

    Damaging as that crisis has been for the Government, the political fallout from the loss of millions of families’ personal data could prove even more far-reaching. Gleeful Tories, urging the Chancellor in the starkest of language to “get a grip”, were comparing it to John Major’s hapless last days in power.

    There was an audible intake of breath in the Commons as Mr Darling told MPs that two discs containing the details of all child benefit recipients, records for 25 million individuals and 7.25 million families, had been lost.

    The records included the recipient’s name and those of their children, their addresses and dates of birth, child benefit numbers, national insurance numbers and, where relevant, bank or building society account details — all the facts that fraudsters need to illegally remove money from banks.

    They are the details that families are regularly being warned by the Government not to reveal to potential fraudsters. And they would be worth a fortune on the black market.

    A junior official from HM Revenue and Customs had sent the discs to the National Audit Office at the NAO’s request on 18 October by the HMRC’s internal post, run by the courier firm TNT, even though it was in clear breach of the department’s rules governing the release of such sensitive information and may have been in breach of data protection regulations.

    The NAO, realising it had not received the data, ordered a further copy to be sent by HMRC. This time it was sent by registered post and did arrive.

    It was only on 8 November, almost three weeks after the first discs were posted, that senior HMRC officials were told they were missing. They informed the Chancellor on 10 November, a Saturday. Hardly believing his ears, the Chancellor ordered “comprehensive searches to be carried out of all premises where the missing data might be found”. He decided that the breach of security was so grave that he had to tell the Prime Minister immediately.

    On 12 November, Mr Gray told Mr Darling that evidence might have been found of the route taken by the data and that the discs were likely to be recovered. However, two days later, those hopes were dashed when the HMRC chairman admitted that the internal searches had failed to trace the discs. The Chancellor ordered Mr Gray immediately to call in the Metropolitan Police to conduct a full investigation to find the missing package.

    That inquiry was still under way yesterday. The police say they are confident no crime was involved.

    Mr Darling told the Commons: “Our priority is to find this data. Searches continue to be carried out, including of the HMRC and NAO premises. Staff are being interviewed but so far the missing data has not been found.”

    It is not the first time that data has gone missing from the HMRC. The Information Commissioner was already investigating two earlier breaches by the department. In September, an HMRC employee reported that his laptop had been stolen from his car. The laptop contained customer details from about 15 financial institutions. The information was encrypted but the computer bag contained print-outs of some individuals’ data.

    And in October, the HMRC sent a CD via courier to Standard Life but the disc was lost en route. The CD was not encrypted and contained details of 15,000 Standard Life customers, including names and national insurance numbers.

    For 10 days, the Government has been sitting on the news, knowing that when it came out there would be outrage mixed with deep anxiety. Last week, major clearing banks were secretly warned by the Government that there was a potential security breach. They were asked to make sure there had been no sudden surge in raids on personal bank accounts, evidence that the nightmare scenario — the discs falling into the hands of organised crime syndicates — had happened. On Monday, the Chancellor was told by the banks that they had found no trace of accounts being raided. That was the assurance he needed before a public announcement could be made.

    George Osborne, the shadow Chancellor, urged Mr Darling to take control of the crisis. “Never mind the lack of vision; just get a grip,” he said. “Let us be clear about the scale of this catastrophic mistake — half the country will be very anxious about the safety of their family and the security, and the whole country will be wondering how on earth the Government allowed this to happen.”

    Fall from grace of a dependable civil servant

    Bearded and bespectacled, sober and sensible, Paul Gray was known throughout the Civil Service as trustworthy and dependable. But that reputation was dealt a huge blow when he was held responsible for the biggest blunder in British data protection history. Although many MPs believe he has been made the “fall guy” for the incompetence of others, there was little doubt that the head of the chairman of HM Revenue and Customs would have to be the first to roll. Mr Gray, 59, who is married with two sons, was one of the 300 highest-paid civil servants, earning £198,000 a year. It is likely he will keep his pension but the Cabinet Office said yesterday he would not receive a special resignation package. Mr Gray joined the Treasury in 1969 and rose steadily through the ranks to become the economic affairs private secretary to the Conservative prime minister, Margaret Thatcher. When she quit in 1990, he returned to the Treasury to work on monetary policy. He then became head of personnel and central services. In 1998, Mr Gray joined the Department of Social Security as head of policy, before becoming second permanent secretary for pensions and disability in the Department for Work and Pensions. He oversaw the merger of the former DSS, the Employment Service and parts of the Department for Education and Employment, which made him the ideal choice to head the merged Inland Revenue and Customs and Excise departments when the HMRC was established by Gordon Brown in 2004.

    Mr Gray, a Leicester City football fan, keeps a small flock of Wensleydale sheep. He will now have a lot more time to tend them.

    Colin Brown

    Reconstructing fingerprint images from templates

    0

    Reconstructing fingerprint images from templates

    This is for everyone who thinks fingerprints cannot be reverse engineered from biometric systems, and especially for Jim Knight MP, the Labour Minister for Schools and Learners, who offered up the below incorrect information in a parliamentary debate in July this year with Greg Mulholland MP:

    “Secondly, as I stated earlier, it is not possible to recreate a fingerprint using the numbers that are stored. The algorithm generates a unique number, producing no information of any use to identity thieves. I shall quote from a statement from the Information Commissioner’s Office–a thoroughly independent source–that says in the third paragraph:

    “Full fingerprint images are not stored and cannot be generated (‘reverse engineered’) from the template.”

    I hope that that is clear to all those listening, because it is an important reassurance on the points that the hon. Gentleman has made.” …absolutely crystal Jim.

    1. Original fingerprint scan

    2. Stored fingerprint template

    3. Print reconstructed from template

    From:

    From Template to Image: Reconstructing
    Fingerprints from Minutiae Points

    Arun Ross, Member, IEEE, Jidnya Shah, and Anil K. Jain, Fellow, IEEE

    April 2007

    (as shown on the Leave Them Kids Alone site)

    Ron Paul – Challenging the American Empire

    0

    Ron Paul: The Only Presidential Candidate to Challenge the American Empire

    By David T. Beito and Scott HortonFlying under the radar of mainstream media coverage, supporters of Dr. Ron Paul, a seventy-two year old ten-term congressman and obstetrician from Texas, have staged a political revolution. Despite little publicity, they have raised over $15 million, mostly in small donations, giving Paul more money in the bank than John McCain.

    In a November 5 “money bomb” (inspired by Guy Fawkes Day as depicted in the film, “V for Vendetta”) the Paul Revolutionaries raked in $4.3 million. In doing so, they set a new one-day record for all Republican candidates. In addition, Paul’s backers have spontaneously organized over 1,100 meet-up groups. That’s more than any other candidate in the race including the youthful and photogenic Barak Obama. By all indications, most of the meet-up group members, now numbering over 60,000, are under age twenty-five. Paul’s appeal can be attributed to his no-holds-barred small government, pro-liberty message as well as his consistent call to bring home the troops.

    Reporters are right to emphasize the wide gap between Paul and the pro-war Republican presidential field but they should not stop there. If they dig a little deeper, they will find that his disagreements with Democrats are equally great. Paul is the only candidate in either party who wants to shut down the entire American overseas political and military Empire.

    Rather than “isolationist” in foreign policy, however, Paul embraces as his own Thomas Jefferson’s stated goal of “peace, commerce, and honest friendship with all nations, entangling alliances with none.” But, unlike our third president, Paul appears bound and determined to apply these words across-the-board. His voting record shows a consistent support for free trade and legislation to redirect the military strictly to home defense rather than foreign occupation. The Democrats, by contrast, largely share the bi-partisan post-World War II consensus of spreading democracy, human rights, or “vital interests” by military force.

    Few subscribe to this consensus more zealously than Democratic frontrunner Hillary Clinton who has considerable credentials as a hawk dating back to her husband’s administration. Most notably, she was an aggressive cheerleader for the bombing campaigns against both Iraq and Serbia in Kosovo. Paul, like many Republicans at the time, opposed both. Although Hillary later broke with Bush on Iraq, she rejects a non-interventionist approach. She wants to leave U.S. troops behind in Iraq to fight al Qaeda as well as keep them in the region. When asked in a recent debate whether she would promise that the troops would be home from Iraq by the end of her first term, Clinton refused. Although Barak Obama opposed the war from the outset, his current views are not much different. He also intends to station U.S. forces permanently in the region and reserves the right to put them back in Iraq again in full force to stop “genocide” (a term he never defines). John Edwards advocates the same approach.

    While it is true that the Democrats are dovish on Iraq when compared to Bush, they blow bugles on the Darfur region of Sudan. The frontrunners demand tougher sanctions, imposition of a no-fly zone, and U.S. aid for more UN troops. Edwards pledges to work with NATO and deploy U.S. “military assets” to enforce the zone. Clinton has even suggested a blockade of the Port of Sudan, an act of war under international law. The truculence of the Democrats on Darfur defies logic given their objections to the Iraq War. The same conditions apply in Darfur that also led to the Iraq quagmire including a history of Islamic sectarian strife, a long civil war, and no real tradition of the rule of law and democracy. Despite widespread violence and Sunni fundamentalism in Sudan, there has never been a suicide bombing there. Were the Democrats to spread the War on Terror into Darfur, that statistic would certainly change.

    Rather than avoid all foreign political entanglements, as would Paul, the Democratic frontrunners promise to extend them. All three, to quote Edwards, hope to exercise “American leadership to forge powerful alliances-with longtime allies and reluctant friends, with nations already living in the light of democracy and with peoples struggling to join them.” In contrast to Paul, they do not intend to scale down foreign American bases, much less reconsider the merits of George McGovern’s old dream to “Come Home America.” As Obama puts it, the United States “cannot afford to be a country of isolationists right now….we need to maintain a strong foreign policy, relentless in pursuing our enemies and hopeful in promoting our values around the world.” Woodrow Wilson could not have said it better.

    If Americans expect a “great debate” about foreign policy fundamentals in 2008, absent an upset by Paul and his campaign against the American empire and for free trade, they will not get it. That would be a pity. As examples of “blowback” from previous and ongoing interventions continue to mount, such as spiraling oil prices, the free-fall in the value of the dollar, and the current strife in Pakistan and Kurdistan, Americans need such a debate more than ever before.

    Watchdog: War on Terrorism Leads to Rights Abuses

    0

    By Tim Cocks

    Kampala – Torture, beatings, executions, racist stereotyping and intrusive surveillance are among the abuses countries are committing in the name of fighting terrorism, a rights watchdog said on Monday.

        The Commonwealth Human Rights Commission said since the 9/11 attacks, many nations had been using the military for police work in the so-called “war on terror”, leading to brutal policing techniques, including extra-judicial killings.

        The Commission made the allegations in a report which reviews human rights in the 53-nation body before the biennial Commonwealth Heads of Government Meeting (CHOGM).

        “Until recently, torture was condemned as a gross violation of human rights … fear of terrorism and the desire to respond to it is steadily undermining this absolute prohibition,” the report said.

        Among the offenders it named was Pakistan, which risks suspension from the Commonwealth because of President Pervez Musharraf’s imposition of martial law. Also mentioned was Uganda, where military police this year raided the High Court to seize bailed opposition supporters accused of treason.

        “The extra-judicial killing of ‘terrorists’ provides an easy way of eliminating suspects … often, these ‘terrorists’ turn out to be children, dissidents, unarmed and peaceful protesters,” the report said.

        It said the right not to be jailed without charge was slowly being eroded. In Tanzania and Bangladesh, suspects can be held indefinitely without trial.

        In Malaysia, Singapore and Brunei they can be detained for longer than 700 days, while Britain is considering an extension of the 28-day period suspects can be held without charge.

        “The consequences of taking people into custody without cause, for long periods of detention, are made even direr by laws that restrict access to counsel,” the report said.

        “Positive profiling” of terror suspects has spawned racist stereotypes, it said. In Britain, people of south Asian descent are 30 percent more likely than others to be stopped by police.

        “Anti-terrorism has resulted in the deepest compromises of our member states on human rights,” Yash Ghai, an expert on rights and law at Hong Kong University, told delegates at a Commonwealth People’s Forum.

        Uganda will host CHOGM on Friday, after a state visit from Britain’s Queen Elizabeth, the head of the Commonwealth.

        The report notes that despite 13 international counter-terrorism conventions and resolutions, countries have failed to agree on a definition of terrorism.

    “Safe” Uranium That Left a Town Contaminated

    0

    By David Rose

    They were told depleted uranium was not hazardous. Now, 23 years after a US arms plant closed, workers and residents have cancer – and experts say their suffering shows the use of such weapons may be a war crime.

        Colonie, New York – It is 50 years since Tony Ciarfello and his friends used the yard of a depleted uranium weapons factory as their playground in Colonie, a suburb of Albany in upstate New York state. ‘There wasn’t no fence at the back of the plant,’ remembers Ciarfello. ‘Inside was a big open ground and nobody would chase us away. We used to play baseball and hang by the stream running through it. We even used to fish in it – though we noticed the fish had big pink lumps on them.’

        Today there are lumps on Ciarfello’s chest – strange, round tumours that protrude about an inch. ‘No one seems to know what they are,’ he says. ‘I’ve also had a brain aneurysm caused by a suspected tumour. I’m constantly fatigued and for years I’ve had terrible pains, deep inside my leg bones. I fall over without warning and I’ve got a heart condition.’ Ciarfello’s illnesses have rendered him unable to work for years. Aged 57 and a father of five, he looks much older.

        The US federal government and the firm that ran the factory, National Lead (NL) Industries, have been assuring former workers and residents around the 18-acre site for decades that, although it is true that the plant used to produce unacceptable levels of radioactive pollution, it was not a serious health hazard.

        Now, in a development with potentially devastating implications not only for Colonie but also for the future use of some of the West’s most powerful weapon systems, that claim is being challenged. In a paper to be published in the next issue of the scientific journal Science of the Total Environment, a team led by Professor Randall Parrish of Leicester University reports the results of a three-year study of Colonie, funded by Britain’s Ministry of Defence.

        Parrish’s team has found that DU contamination, which remains radioactive for millions of years, is in effect impossible to eradicate, not only from the environment but also from the bodies of humans. Twenty-three years after production ceased they tested the urine of five former workers. All are still contaminated with DU. So were 20 per cent of people tested who had spent at least 10 years living near the factory when it was still working, including Ciarfello.

        The small sample size precludes the drawing of statistical conclusions, the journal paper says. But to find DU at all after so long a period is ‘significant, since no previous study has documented evidence of DU exposure more than 20 years prior … [this] indicates that the body burden of uranium must still be significant, whether retained in lungs, lymphatic system, kidneys or bone’. The team is now testing more individuals.

        In 1984, having bought the factory from NL for $10 in a deal that meant the firm was exempted from having to pay for its clean-up, the federal government began a massive decommissioning project, supervised by the Army Corps of Engineers. The clean-up did not finish until summer 2007, having cost some $190m. Contractors demolished the buildings and removed more than 150,000 tons of soil and other contaminated detritus, digging down to depths of up to 40ft and trucking it 2,000 miles by rail to underground radioactive waste sites in the Rockies. All that is now left of the NL plant is a huge, undulating field, ringed by razor wire.

        Despite this colossal effort, Parrish and his colleagues found high concentrations of DU particles in soil, stream sediments and household dust in the vicinity of the site, deposited long ago when the factory burnt the shavings and chips produced by the weapons manufacturing process: the study estimates that, over the years, about 10 tons of uranium oxide dust wafted from the chimney into the surrounding environment.

        The Army Corps clean-up team tested the soil from some of the gardens of houses backing on to the plant, and in cases where it was found to be emitting more than 35 pico curies of radiation per gram they removed it. The researchers discovered dust in and around buildings emitting up to 10 times as much. DU, inhaled in the form of tiny motes of oxide that lodge inside the lungs, emits alpha radiation, nuclei of helium. Unlike the gamma radiation produced by enriched, weapons-grade uranium, alpha particles will not penetrate the skin.

        But inside the body DU travels around the bloodstream, accumulating not only in the lungs but also in other soft tissues such as the brain and bone marrow. There, each mote becomes an alpha particle hotspot, bombarding its locality and damaging cell DNA. Research has shown that DU has the potential to cause a wide range of cancers, kidney and thyroid problems, birth defects and disorders of the immune system.

        When DU ‘penetrators’ – armour-piercing shells that form the standard armament of some of Britain’s and America’s most commonly deployed military aircraft and vehicles – strike their targets, 10 per cent or more of the heavy DU metal burns at high temperatures, producing oxide particles very similar to those at Colonie.

        TV footage shot in Baghdad in 2003 shows children playing in the remains of tanks coated with thick, black DU oxide, while there have long been claims that the DU shells that destroyed Saddam Hussein’s tanks in the 1991 Gulf war were responsible for high rates of cancer in places such as Basra.

        Parrish’s team includes David Carpenter, an environmental health expert from Albany University. ‘DU burns, it releases particulates that can be breathed in, and it doesn’t go away,’ he says. ‘The issue does not concern military personnel as much as civilian populations in theatres where they are used. Now we know that we can still find measurable levels of DU among the people of Colonie, we need a much bigger study to establish whether they have suffered disproportionate ill-effects such as cancers as a consequence. If they have, it would raise a serious ethical challenge to the use of these weapons. Arguably it could constitute a war crime.’

        The NL plant on Central Avenue, Colonie’s main artery, opened in 1958 and became one of the Pentagon’s main suppliers. DU – the material left in huge quantities by the process of refining enriched uranium for bombs and nuclear reactors – is extremely dense. A pointed rod fired at high velocity will penetrate not only armour but several feet of concrete. In 1979 a whistleblower from inside the plant told the local health department that it was releasing large amounts of DU from its 50ft chimney, which was not properly filtered. The state government carried out atmospheric tests and in 1981 ordered that main production cease. The factory shut three years later.

        One of those who has now tested positive is Mike Aidala, 71, who worked at the plant for 22 years and became its health and safety director. ‘When it started, the place was spotless,’ he says. ‘But over the years it got dirtier and dirtier. We burnt the chips produced by the lathes in a steel furnace.’ He added: ‘A lot of my co-workers died young. Whether the plant was the reason, I guess we’ll never know.’

        As concern in Colonie rose, a residents’ group began to call for a publicly funded health study. For Anne Rabe, a founder member of a campaign that has now lasted for 25 years, the Parrish study represents overdue vindication. ‘I do find it very ironic that the US government at state and federal level refused for so long to do anything, and now the UK comes along and has funded these tests,’ Rabe says.

        Repeatedly, US agencies have claimed that the Colonie plant was reasonably safe, despite the massive clean-up. Most recently, in 2003, the federal Agency for Toxic Substances and Disease Registry issued a report saying that, although the pollution produced when the plant was operating might have slightly increased the risks of kidney disease and lung cancer, there was now ‘no apparent public health hazard’.

        Rabe’s campaign has conducted a health study of its own, assembling a dossier from personal contacts and by knocking on neighbours’ doors. It found that among almost 400 people surveyed there were numerous cases of rare cancers, thyroid and kidney complaints and birth defects.

        The main difficulty the campaigners faced in the past is that DU eventually dissolves and is passed in the urine. The US government claimed that the plant had been shut so long that it would be impossible to determine who had been contaminated – so rendering a full health survey pointless.

        However, Parrish has developed new, more sensitive methods. At the same time, his impartiality is impeccable. Before his work in Colonie, Parrish tested more than 400 Gulf war veterans, failing to detect DU in any of them – so dealing a serious blow to those who claimed that DU is one of the causes of Gulf war syndrome. ‘I did not expect to find it in Colonie,’ he says.

        Some of those who have tested positive display classic, common symptoms found in DU victims elsewhere. For example, Ciarfello says he was still in his twenties when his teeth ‘just started to crumble: they ground down to nothing until they were just these little stumps and I pushed them out with my tongue’. Other members of his family are sick. His son developed a severe kidney condition, while his brother, Frank, can barely walk and also suffers chronic fatigue. A nephew was born with a disfiguring facial skin tumour that has required repeated surgery.

        Tom Donnelly, 56, spent 34 years as a foreman at a garage door workshop next to the NL factory, where tests have found high concentrations of DU in dust samples from places such as shelves and light fittings. He has three auto-immune disorders: Crohn’s disease, a chronic inflammation of the bowel, total alopecia, and cerebral vasculitis, an immune system-related narrowing of blood vessels in the brain.

        ‘The new tests suggest I inhaled about 4,000 particles of DU,’ Donnelly says. ‘I used to come to work in the morning and see the chimney blowing its smoke in a thick black plume. Most of us had no idea that the plant was using uranium at all. After all, the sign outside said National Lead. The Army Corps removed all that soil, but they never looked at the dust at all. The effect on my life has been devastating, but how many others are already dead?’ One is his late boss and friend Tom Murphy – who, like Donnelly, developed Crohn’s and died of it at 61.

        Ann Carusone lived in a house behind the plant from the time of her birth in 1966 until 1993. ‘When I tested positive, my reaction was sheer disbelief,’ she says. She has endured years of a chronic lung disease, sarcoidosis, an inflammation of the lymph nodes usually found in much older people, as well as a blood disorder that produced petecchiae – dots of blood beneath her skin, similar to those seen in some of those exposed to radiation at Hiroshima. In her twenties she had a pre-cancerous ovarian cyst that when removed was the size of a grapefruit.

        ‘I knew many people from round here who died young, in their twenties and thirties,’ she says. ‘We used to play out in the creek that flowed out of the plant site. The water was sluggish, a weird yellow-green colour. We’d splash about in it. Now we know it was laden with depleted uranium.’

        ‘It’s very striking how many people in this small group have immune disorders like Tom Donnelly’s,’ says Carpenter. ‘I can say with great confidence that people who inhaled DU are at greater risk of lung cancer, as well as leukaemia, other cancers and genetic damage of the type that causes birth defects. Previous responses by official bodies could be said to amount to a cover-up. People have been told that there’s no problem, and that’s very clearly not true.’

        Yesterday NL failed to return calls requesting comment.


        Deadly Residue    Depleted uranium (DU) is the residue left in massive quantities when bomb-grade uranium is refined to make reactor fuel and nuclear weapons.

        The densest naturally occurring metal, it is used to make armour-penetrating shells, standard armament for some of the West’s most widely deployed military aircraft and vehicles, such as Bradley armoured cars, Abrams tanks, and Jaguar A10 fighter planes.

        Less intensely radioactive than bomb-grade uranium, DU emits alpha particles, known to cause cancers.

        DU weapons that strike their targets produce clouds of tiny uranium oxide particles, which lodge in the lungs and other soft tissues such as the brain and bone marrow.

        DU shells were widely used in the 1991 Gulf war; in Bosnia and Kosovo; and are being used now in Iraq and Afghanistan.

      ——-

    Neocon fabricated quote to stir war with Iran

    0

    Neocon accused of misquoting Iran’s leader to push case for invasion

     

    Nick Juliano

    One of the country’s most prominent neoconservative pundits has been accused of using a fabricated quote from Iran’s supreme religious leader in pushing his argument that a US invasion is the only recourse to deter that country’s nuclear ambitions.

    Norman Podhoretz is among the most vocal in urging President Bush to bomb Iran, and he has predicted the president will launch an attack before his term is up. Podhoretz’s argument is based on his belief that a nuclear-armed Iran would not be deterred from launching its missiles because its leaders do not fear their country’s destruction.

    The Economist has called into question an oft-cited statement Podhoretz attributes to Iranian leader Ayatollah Khomeini, saying it is likely “bogus.”

    Podhoretz, a prominent adviser to Republican candidate Rudy Giuliani, is unbowed in his push for war, and he says he accurately quoted Khomeini saying the following:

    We do not worship Iran, we worship Allah. For patriotism is another name for paganism. I say let this land [Iran] burn. I say let this land go up in smoke, provided Islam emerges triumphant in the rest of the world.

    The Economist quotes Shaul Bakhash, a Middle East scholar at George Mason University, who thoroughly researched the alleged quotation, which was first cited by Iranian journalist Amir Taheri. Bakhash could find no evidence that those words ever crossed the Ayatollah’s lips.

    “This research, I think, clearly establishes that the alleged quotation is a fabrication,” Bakhash writes in a private newsletter for Gulf experts. The scholar searched the Library of Congress, a database of Farsi-language holdings at libraries worldwide, books published in Iran and a “presumably comprehensive” database of Khomeini’s “statements, speeches, fatwas, etc.” and could not find the quotation Podhoretz and other Iran hawks are so fond of.

    Andrew Sullivan, blogging at The Atlantic, jumps at the chance to undercut Podhoretz’s apparent misquotation.

    “One should not expect intellectual honesty from Norman Podhoretz. … So I have no hope he will respond to this post at the Economist,” Sullivan writes.

    Podhoretz shoots back, accusing Sullivan of “shrill hysteria” and relying on his original source to back up the quote’s validity. Taheri tells Podhoretz that the quote appeared in “Paymaha va Sokhanraniyha-yi Imam Khomeini (“Messages and Speeches of Imam Khomeini”) published by Nur Research and Publication Institute (Tehran, 1981).”

    “The quote, along with many other passages, disappeared from several subsequent editions as the Islamic Republic tried to mobilize nationalistic feelings against Iraq, which had invaded Iran in 1980,” Taheri writes. “The practice of editing and even censoring Khomeini to suit the circumstances is widely known by Iranian scholars.”

    To Podhoretz, this is all the proof he needs that the Khomeini quote is accurate; he further pushes back against claims from the Economist that another quote from former Iranian President Rafsanjani is inaccurate. But even the quotes are inaccurate the case for war against Iran remains, he argues.

    “Since the case I make … rests on much more than the two quotations from Khomeini and Rafsanjani,” he says, “it would still stand even if those quotations were in fact ‘bogus’ or ‘fabricated.’”

    Google Refuses to Run Impeachment Ad

    0

    By Ralph Lopez

    Google has refused to run the following sponsored ad and link paid for by the Northeast Impeachment Coalition and YaliesForImpeachment.org:

    Help Impeach Cheney NOW
    Nonpartisan, the time is here.
    House JC 202-225-3951 Demand ACTION
    YaliesForImpeachment.org

    Google’s explanation is the following:

    “At this time, Google policy does not permit ad text that advocates against an individual, group, or organization. In addition, this policy doe not permit the advertisement of websites that advocate against a group protected by law.”

    Protected by law? Since when is the Vice President of the United States protected from free speech? Political speech is protected speech. Cheney is a public figure. Google does run ads “against” the tobacco industry. We believe this is settled law in the print and TV worlds. Any legal beagles out there please weigh in. We’ll be forwarding this to the ACLU and the general media Monday morning. Following is the full text of the email Google sent to our coordinator. An example of political speech Google DOES allow: if you type in keywords “support the president” the following ad comes up:

    Elect More Republicans
    The Party of Lincoln, Reagan and You. Support the RNC today.
    www.gop.com

    Also included is a list of impeachment-related advertising which Google allows. What’s the difference between “Impeach Bush” and “Help Impeach Cheney Now?” Our feeling is the line is drawn at political advertising which might actually wake people up, is too effective. Please circulate widely, and in the meantime, use Yahoo for your search engine.

    Moronic marijuana policies

    0

    It’s time for my annual rant on the stupidity of marijuana eradication and although it goes on nationally, in no place is it better illustrated than California where they’ve just completed their yearly attack on harmless plants.

    [T]he annual Campaign Against Marijuana Planting had uprooted some 3 million plants, wiping out an estimated $11.6 billion worth of weed. That is more than twice the value of the state’s largest legal agricultural commodity, milk and cream, which was worth $5.2 billion in 2005, according to the state Department of Food and Agriculture. It is nearly four times the value of the state’s largest legal cash crop, grapes, which was worth $3.2 billion.

    This is only a fraction of the state’s outdoor crop. Using past state and federal government figures, they failed to eradicate some 14 million plants. And that’s just the outdoor crop. It doesn’t include a prodigious indoor cultivation industry which is increasing as outdoor growers are moving into suburban homes to avoid detection.

    Marijuana Policy Project sums up the futility of it all.

    “The Department of Justice has confirmed everything we’ve been saying about CAMP all year,” said Bruce Mirken, San Francisco-based director of communications for the Marijuana Policy Project. “If you want criminal gangs moving in next door to grow marijuana, if you want to make those criminals unbelievably rich, and if you want to guarantee that marijuana becomes more potent, current policies are working perfectly. If you think that’s crazy, then it’s time for California to regulate marijuana production just like we regulate wine.”

    In 5,000 years no one has died as a direct result of ingesting cannabis. In contrast, 7,600 people died in a single year from aspirin overdose and hundreds of thousands have died of alcohol abuse and tobacco use. Yet we spend tens of billions of tax dollars every year making war on a harmless weed when we could be reaping possibly hundreds of billions in tax revenues from a regulated legal industry. How dumb is that?

    http://cernigsnewshog.blogspot.com/2007/11/moronic-marijuana-policies.html

    Former Guantanamo Chaplain tours UK

    0

    Former Guantanamo Chaplain tours UK for the first time, Shares platform with ex-detainees

    By Cageprisoners

    Cageprisoners is hosting a series of events around the UK, and inviting people to attend a truly unique opportunity to hear former US army Chaplain James Yee speak and discuss his experiences with former Guantánamo detainee and Cageprisoners’ spokesman, Moazzam Begg.

    There are few people in the world who have never heard of the notorious US military prison facility at Guantánamo Bay, Cuba. However, very few people have heard eye-witness accounts from US military personnel who served there — and even more rarely from Muslims within the US military.

    Chaplain (Yusuf) James J. Yee, a former US Army Chaplain and graduate of West Point served as the Muslim Chaplain for the U.S. prison camp in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, in 2003. While ministering to prisoners at Guantanamo Bay, Captain Yee advised camp commanders on detainee religious practices and objected to the cruel and degrading abuses to which the prisoners were subjected.

    What sets Yee’s already unique story apart from others is how his fortune changed from being recognized twice as an outstanding officer serving the US military to being regarded as an enemy of the state. Captain Yee was arrested and imprisoned in a Naval brig for 76 days in September 2003 while being falsely accused of spying, espionage, and aiding the alleged Taliban and Al-Qaeda prisoners. He was held in solitary confinement and subjected to the same sensory deprivation techniques that were being used against the prisoners in Cuba that he had been ministering to.

    Af! ter months of government investigation, all criminal charges w! ere drop ped. He tendered his resignation from the U.S. Army and received an Honorable Discharge on January 7, 2005. Upon separation he was awarded with a second Army Commendation medal for “exceptionally meritorious service.”

    James Yee will be speaking with Moazzam Begg at the London Muslim Centre on Wednesday 5th December, (in conjunction with Q News and Hidden Detainees), in Birmingham on Thursday 6th December (co-organised by the Birmingham Guantanamo Coalition), where they will also be joined by the ‘Tipton Three’, and in Luton on Sunday 9th December.

    Yee will also be touring the UK, in conjunction with FOSIS, Scotland Against Criminalising Communities, Save Omar Deghayes Campaign, and speaking in a host of cities, amongst them Glasgow, Dundee, Brighton, Manchester, and Lampeter. For full details of his UK itinery see: http://www.cageprisoners.com/campaigns.php?id=596

    Copies of Yee’s gripping account of his Guantanamo experience and struggle for justice For God And Country: Faith and Patriotism Under Fire will also be available at most events

    Dates:

    London — 5/12/07
    Cageprisoners, Hidden Detainees and Q News
    London Muslim Centre, Whitechapel, E1
    6:30pm
    Birmingham – 6/12/07
    Cageprisoners and Birmingham Guantanamo Campaign
    with the Tipton Three
    Carrs Lane Church Centre, Carrs Lane, Birmingham B4 7SX
    7pm
    Luton – 9/12/07
    Cageprisoners
    Dallow Community Centre, 234 Dallow Road, Luton, LU1 1TF
    5:30pm

    Cannabis may prevent breast cancer

    1

    Marijuana compound shows promise in fighting breast cancer

    Machines Like Us

    A compound found in cannabis may prove to be effective at helping stop the spread of breast cancer cells throughout the body. That’s the finding of a new study published in the latest issue of the journal Molecular Cancer Therapeutics.

    The study, by scientists at the California Pacific Medical Center Research Institute, is raising hope that CBD, a compound found in Cannabis sativa, could be the first non-toxic agent to show promise in treating metastatic forms of breast cancer.

    “Right now we have a limited range of options in treating aggressive forms of cancer,” says Sean D. McAllister, Ph.D., a cancer researcher at CPMCRI and the lead author of the study. “Those treatments, such as chemotherapy, can be effective but they can also be extremely toxic and difficult for patients. This compound offers the hope of a non-toxic therapy that could achieve the same results without any of the painful side effects.”

    The researchers used CBD to inhibit the activity of a gene called Id-1, which is believed to be responsible for the aggressive spread of cancer cells throughout the body, away from the original tumor site.

    “We know that Id-1 is a key regulator of the spread of breast cancer,” says Pierre-Yves Desprez, Ph.D., a cancer researcher at CPMCRI and the senior author of the study. “We also know that Id-1 has also been found at higher levels in other forms of cancer. So what is exciting about this study is that if CBD can inhibit Id-1 in breast cancer cells, then it may also prove effective at stopping the spread of cancer cells in other forms of the disease, such as colon and brain or prostate cancer.”

    Unlike cannabis or THC, an ingredient also isolated from marijuana that is used in some medical treatments, CBD does not have any psychoactive properties, so using it would not violate any state or federal laws. However, the researchers point out that this is not a recommendation for people with breast cancer to smoke marijuana. They say it is highly unlikely that effective concentrations of CBD could be reached by smoking cannabis.

    The study was primarily funded by the California Breast Cancer Research Program.

    Former Employee of CIA and FBI Pleads Guilty

    1

    Former Employee of CIA and FBI Pleads Guilty to Conspiracy, Unauthorized Computer Access and Naturalization Fraud

    WEBWIRE

    DETROIT — Nada Nadim Prouty, a 37-year-old Lebanese national and resident of Vienna, Va., pleaded guilty today in the Eastern District of Michigan to charges of fraudulently obtaining U.S. citizenship, which she later used to gain employment at the FBI and CIA; accessing a federal computer system to unlawfully query information about her relatives and the terrorist organization Hizballah; and conspiracy to defraud the United States.

    The announcement was made today by Stephen J. Murphy, U.S. Attorney for the Eastern District of Michigan; Kenneth L. Wainstein, Assistant Attorney General for National Security; Willie T. Hulon, Executive Assistant Director of the FBI’s National Security Branch; Brian M. Moskowitz, Special Agent in Charge of the Detroit Office of U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement (ICE); and Kurt Rice, Chicago Field Office Special Agent in Charge for the U.S. State Department’s Diplomatic Security Service.

    At a hearing in Detroit before the U.S. District Court Judge Avern Cohn, Prouty entered a plea of guilty to counts one, two and three of a second superseding information. Count one of the information charges conspiracy, for which the maximum penalty is five years imprisonment and a $250,000 fine. Count two charges unauthorized computer access, for which the maximum penalty is one year imprisonment and a $100,000 fine. Count three charges naturalization fraud, for which the maximum penalty is 10 years imprisonment and a $250,000 fine, and requires the court to de-naturalize the defendant.

    “This case highlights the importance of conducting stringent and thorough background investigations,” said U.S. Attorney Stephen J. Murphy. “It’s hard to imagine a greater threat than the situation where a foreign national uses fraud to attain citizenship and then, based on that fraud insinuates herself into a sensitive position in the U.S. government. I applaud the excellent investigative work of the FBI, ICE and DHS, which led to the successful prosecution today.”

    “It is a sad day when one of our public servants breaches our security and trust,” said Assistant Attorney General Kenneth L. Wainstein. “This defendant engaged in a pattern of deceit to secure U.S. citizenship, to gain employment in the intelligence community, and to obtain and exploit her access to sensitive counterterrorism intelligence. It is fitting that she now stands to lose both her citizenship and her liberty.”

    “We became aware of this compromise in December 2005 and moved to address any further damage,”said Willie T. Hulon, Executive Assistant Director of the FBI’s National Security Branch. “The FBI worked closely with other agencies to investigate this matter. We continue to evaluate our security practices and will make any necessary changes.”

    “Nada Proudy’s guilty plea should serve as a solemn warning to those who say they’ve pledged their allegiance to the United States and then make the conscious decision to place America’s interests at risk,” said Brian M. Moskowitz, Special Agent in Charge of the ICE Office of Investigations in Detroit. “Becoming a naturalized U.S. citizen is an honor and a privilege. ICE will do everything in its power to see that those who achieve this honor by fraud and deception are brought to justice.”

    Naturalization Fraud

    According to documents filed in court by the government, Prouty first entered the United States from Lebanon on June 24, 1989, on a one-year, non-immigrant student visa. After her visa expired, she remained in the country, residing in Taylor, Mich., with her sister, Elfat El Aouar, and an individual named Samar Khalil Nabbouth. In order to remain in the United States and evade U.S. immigration laws, Prouty later offered money to an unemployed U.S. citizen to marry her. On August 9, 1990, Prouty married the U.S. citizen. As planned, Prouty never lived with her fraudulent “husband,” but continued to live with her sister and Nabbouth.

    Prouty later submitted a series of false, fraudulent and forged documents and letters to federal immigration officials to verify the validity of the fraudulent marriage in order to obtain permanent residency status, and, later, U.S. citizenship, thereby committing naturalization fraud. On Aug. 5, 1994, the former Immigration and Naturalization Service granted Prouty U.S. citizenship under the name “Nada Nadim Deladurantaye.” The following year, she filed for a divorce from her fraudulent husband, and later obtained a U.S. passport, which she used to travel overseas.

    Talal Khalil Chahine

    According to court documents, from May 1992 through April 1993, and again, from August through November 1994, Prouty was employed as a waitress and hostess at La Shish Inc., a chain of Middle Eastern restaurants in Detroit that was owned by Talal Khalil Chahine. During this time, Chahine wrote a letter for submission into Prouty’s immigration file attesting to the validity of Prouty’s false marriage.

    Chahine is currently a fugitive believed to be in Lebanon. He, along with Prouty’s sister, Elfat El Aouar, and others were charged in 2006 in the Eastern District of Michigan with tax evasion in connection with a scheme to conceal more than $20 million in cash received by La Shish restaurants and to route funds to persons in Lebanon. Last month, Chahine was also charged in the Eastern District of Michigan, along with a senior ICE official in Detroit and others in a bribery and extortion conspiracy in which federal immigration benefits were allegedly awarded to illegal aliens in exchange for money.

    Employment at FBI and CIA

    In April 1999, through a series of false representations and use of her fraudulently procured proof of U.S. citizenship, Prouty, then known as “Nada Nadim Alley,” obtained employment as a special agent of the FBI. It was a prerequisite to FBI employment that she be a U.S. citizen. As a special agent with the FBI, Prouty was granted a security clearance and assigned to the FBI’s Washington Field Office to work on an extraterritorial squad investigating crimes against U.S. persons overseas. During her tenure with the FBI, Prouty was not assigned to work on investigations involving the international terrorist group Hizballah.

    In August 2000, Prouty’s sister, Elfat El Aouar, entered into a marriage with Talal Khalil Chahine, the owner of La Shish Inc. In September 2000, Prouty, while employed as an FBI special agent, used the FBI’s computerized Automated Case System (ACS), without authorization, to query her own name, her sister’s name, and that of her brother-in-law, Talal Khalil Chahine. In addition, on or about June 4, 2003, Prouty accessed the FBI’s ACS and obtained information from a national security investigation into Hizballah that was being conducted by the FBI’s Detroit Field Office.

    According to court documents, in August 2002, Prouty’s sister, Elfat El Aouar, and her brother-in-law, Talal Khalil Chahine, attended a fundraising event in Lebanon where the keynote speakers were Chahine himself and Sheikh Muhammad Hussein Fadlallah. Sheikh Fadlallah had previously been designated by the U.S. government as a Specially Designated Global Terrorist based upon his status as a leading ideological figure with Hizballah.

    In June 2003, through a series of false representations and use of her fraudulently procured proof of U.S. citizenship, Prouty, then known as “Nada Nadim Prouty,” voluntarily left her position with the FBI and obtained employment with the CIA. It was also a prerequisite to CIA employment that she be a U.S. citizen.

    On Nov. 6, 2007, Prouty resigned her position at the CIA. Pursuant to the terms of her plea agreement, she has agreed to fully and truthfully cooperate with the CIA on any matters the CIA deems necessary to transition Prouty out of its employment in a manner consistent with safeguarding the national security of the United States. This cooperation includes participation in debriefing and polygraph interviews.

    The ongoing investigation into this matter is being conducted by the FBI and ICE, with assistance from the U.S. Department of State, Diplomatic Security Service, and the Internal Revenue Service.

    The case is being prosecuted by Eric M. Straus, Chief of the National Security Unit, and Kenneth R. Chadwell, Assistant U.S. Attorney, from the U.S. Attorney’s office for the Eastern District of Michigan, as well as Mark J. Jebson, Special Assistant U.S. Attorney and Senior Assistant Chief Counsel for U.S. Immigration and Customs Enforcement.

    Pentagon Cover Up

    0

    15,000 or More US Deaths in Iraq War?

     By MIKE WHITNEY

    The Pentagon has been concealing the true number of American casualties in the Iraq War. The real number exceeds 15,000 and CBS News can prove it.

    CBS’s Investigative Unit wanted to do a report on the number of suicides in the military and “submitted a Freedom of Information Act request to the Department of Defense”. After 4 months they received a document which showed–that between 1995 and 2007– there were 2,200 suicides among “active duty” soldiers.

    Baloney.

    The Pentagon was covering up the real magnitude of the “suicide epidemic”. Following an exhaustive investigation of veterans’ suicide data collected from 45 states; CBS discovered that in 2005 alone “there were at least 6,256 among those who served in the armed forces. That’s 120 each and every week in just one year.”

    That is not a typo. Active and retired military personnel, mostly young veterans between the ages of 20 to 24, are returning from combat and killing themselves in record numbers. We can assume that “multiple-tours of duty” in a war-zone have precipitated a mental health crisis of which the public is entirely unaware and which the Pentagon is in total denial.

    If we add the 6,256 suicide victims from 2005 to the “official” 3,865 reported combat casualties; we get a sum of 10,121. Even a low-ball estimate of similar 2004 and 2006 suicide figures, would mean that the total number of US casualties from the Iraq war now exceed 15,000.

    That’s right; 15,000 dead US servicemen and women in a war that–as yet–has no legal or moral justification.

    CBS interviewed Dr. Ira Katz, the head of mental health at the Department of Veteran Affairs. Katz attempted to minimize the surge in veteran suicides saying, “There is no epidemic of suicide in the VA, but suicide is a major problem.”

    Maybe Katz is right. Maybe there is no epidemic. Maybe it’s perfectly normal for young men and women to return from combat, sink into inconsolable depression, and kill themselves at greater rates than they were dying on the battlefield. Maybe it’s normal for the Pentagon to abandon them as soon as soon they return from their mission so they can blow their brains out or hang themselves with a garden hose in their basement. Maybe it’s normal for politicians to keep funding wholesale slaughter while they brush aside the casualties they have produced by their callousness and lack of courage. Maybe it is normal for the president to persist with the same, bland lies that perpetuate the occupation and continue to kill scores of young soldiers who put themselves in harm’s-way for their country.

    It’s not normal; it’s is a pandemic—an outbreak of despair which is the natural corollary of living in constant fear; of seeing one’s friends being dismembered by roadside bombs or children being blasted to bits at military checkpoints or finding battered bodies dumped on the side of a riverbed like a bag of garbage.

    The rash of suicides is the logical upshot of the U.S. war on Iraq. Returning soldiers are traumatized by their experience and now they are killing themselves in droves. Maybe we should have thought about that before we invaded.

    Check it out the video at: CBS News “Suicide Epidemic among Veterans

    Mike Whitney lives in Washington state. He can be reached at: fergiewhitney@msn.com

    106 Journalists killed this year

    0

    Français

    More than 100 journalists have been killed in 2007, the World Association of Newspapers said in its half-year report on press freedom worldwide, published today.

    One hundred and six journalists died on duty in 28 countries, 45 of them killed in Iraq, where 150 media workers have lost their lives since 2003.

    The number of journalists killed in 2007 is approaching the record 110 deaths last year.

    The full report can be read here. The list of journalists killed, with details about their cases, can be found here.

    The report also said:

    -  Journalists in Latin America continue to be the victims of murder, threats and harassment when investigating sensitive subjects such as corruption and drug trafficking. Government persecution and legal actions also hinder the work of the press, which nevertheless continues its unyielding battle for freedom of information.

    -  In the Middle East and North Africa, there are a growing number of independent newspapers that do not shy away from criticising the authorities and questioning the lack of democracy. Nonetheless, the general media scene is plagued by strict government control and legal action taken against anyone who dares question those in power.

    -  More and more journalists in sub-Saharan Africa are prosecuted and jailed on charges of “endangering state security,” whereas harsh repression through “insult laws” and criminal defamation continues. These repressive measures are the target of a new initiative from WAN and the World Editors Forum to improve conditions for journalists on the continent: the Declaration of Table Mountain, www.declarationoftablemountain.org/….

    -  Hostility toward independent and opposition media and attempts to silence them can again be seen in parts of Europe and Central Asia. Spurious charges of “extremism” and “anti-state” criminal charges remained an effective tool to hinder critical reporting.

    -  Asia is home to some of the most repressive regimes in the world, which suppress all dissident voices and forbid any form of independent media. Simmering ethnic, political and religious tensions exist in a number of countries.

    The Paris-based WAN, the global organisation for the newspaper industry, defends and promotes press freedom and the professional and business interests of newspapers world-wide. Representing 18,000 newspapers, its membership includes 76 national newspaper associations, newspaper companies and individual newspaper executives in 102 countries, 12 news agencies and 10 regional and world-wide press groups.

    Biometric ID cards planned

    0

    Standard ID card for non-EU residents is planned for all member states

    Kim Thomas

    Biometric ID cards could be adopted throughout the European Union (EU) by 2010 if a proposed regulation goes ahead.

    The regulation, scheduled for adoption before the end of this year, will introduce a standard version of the resident permit that all 27 member states issue to nationals from outside the EU. The aim is to make it easier to verify that someone is entitled to residence.

    The new permit will be in the form of a smart card that stores, in encrypted form, two biometric identifiers: a facial image and two fingerprints. The technical specification is due to be published by 2008, and the new European resident permit will be rolled out within two years after that.

    Known as the European Citizen Card (ECC), the cards could also be used by cardholders as a way of authenticating their identity in ecommerce transactions.

    An estimated 20 million people within the EU require such a permit.

    Bush Cheney really is planning to attack Iran!

    0

    With the encouragement of Democrats-from-Mars

    LOOK OUT–HERE THEY COME AGAIN! Bush & Buckshot are riding their little stick horses, waving the bloody flag of 9/11, demonizing another Muslim nation, shouting warnings about weapons of mass destruction, bellowing for regime change, and generally trying to whoop up a new war. Having done so well in Iraq, George W and Cheney are pushing feverishly to hype up a national-security threat and commit our nation, our bedraggled military, our depleted treasury, and our country’s already-tarnished name to another of their fantasyland, neocon, preemptive invasions of a sovereign people who are doing no harm to us. Their target this time: IRAN.

    You might be thinking, oh, come on, Hightower, surely not. You’re paranoid–even the Bushites aren’t that crazy. I wish.

    The drums of war

    For such leading neocon zealots as Norman Podhoretz, bombing and even invading Iran are about protecting “our” Mideastern oil, strengthening Israel’s regional power, and continuing Western control of the restive Muslim majority in the Middle East. Podhoretz and other true believers assert that there’s an urgent need for Israel and the West to crush Iran’s Muslim government now, frantically wailing that it intends to destroy America and control the world. Even though Iran has made no threats to the U.S., the neocons see regime change there as the key to winning “World War IV” (they insist that the Cold War was World War III) against what they have dubbed “Islamofacism.”

    How nutty are they? Podhoretz concedes that by attacking such an influential Islamic nation, Bush would “unleash a wave of anti-Americanism all over the world that will make the anti-Americanism we’ve experienced so far look like a lovefest.” Yet this Dr. Strangelove maniacally declares, “I pray with all my heart that he will.” Now there’s a prayer to a truly fiendish god!

    George W, who is so besotted by Podhoretz that he has bestowed the Presidential Medal of Freedom on him, has bought into this guy’s insanity. Adopting Podhoretz’s inflamed doomsday stance, Bush recently accused Iran of preparing for global war (though W only ranks it as WW III), and Bush’s bombastic sidekick, Cheney, has now threatened that Tehran will suffer “serious consequences” if it doesn’t do what Washington wants. Just as they did in the run-up to their 2003 Iraq attack, the Bushites are now pounding out a drumbeat of propaganda to soften up the public, enlist the compliant media, and cow soft-spined Democratic leaders. You’ll recognize some familiar themes (a.k.a. lies) in BushCheney’s rationale for a “preventive” war of aggression against Iran:

    Claim: Iran is in cahoots with al Qaeda, the demons who crashbombed America on 9/11. Actually, no. Iran is a Shiite nation that has long been in opposition to the Sunni-exclusive Islam preached by al Qaeda. Indeed, even before al Qaeda’s attacks on America, Iran’s leaders vehemently opposed the terrorist group’s presence in neighboring Afghanistan, and Iran was one of the first Muslim countries to condemn the 9/11 assault. Iran also has willingly turned over al Qaeda suspects to the U.S.

    Claim: WMDs! Iran is on the brink of making a nuclear bomb, thus posing an imminent threat to America and to our national interests. Not so. Iran has no nuclear weapons and is nowhere near having the ability to build one. As a signer of the Nuclear NonProliferation Treaty, Iran has the right to enrich uranium to make electrical power (something our own country does every day). The Iranian government regularly allows inspectors from the International Atomic Energy Agency access to its nuclear facilities, and this UN agency (which is the one that turned out to be right about the lack of WMDs in Iraq) has found no evidence that Iran is trying to make a bomb. Even if it were, it would be years away from having one. There certainly is no imminent threat of an Iranian nuclear assault on any country, including our own, which is 7,000 miles away. Plus, Bush’s own former top commander in Iraq, Gen. John Abizaid, points out that the U.S. lived with a nuclear Soviet Union throughout the Cold War and now lives with a number of nuclear nations, including China and Pakistan, so “there are ways to live with a nuclear Iran.” It’s simply a lie that the Bushites must rush to war to keep us from being nuked.

    Claim: Those dastardly Iranians are meddling in our war in Iraq by supplying weapons to our enemies and by sending intelligence agents to undermine Iraq’s government. Not likely. While some Iranianmade weapons have turned up in Iraq, there’ve been no findings of a large or regular influx and no evidence that the Iranian government itself is even tacitly behind it. Remember that Iran’s leaders are Shiites who do not like al Qaeda and do not support the Sunni insurgency, so the only Iraqi force that Tehran would want to help is the Shiite majority that Bush himself has put in charge. As for Iranian “operatives” in Iraq, the two countries share long familial and cultural relationships, so there are a lot of Iranians in Iraq all the time. In fact, Iraq’s Shiite-led government is pro-Iranian and has many economic and even military agreements with Tehran. Indeed, when U.S. troops “captured” a group of Iranians in a Baghdad hotel this summer, they turned out to be energy experts invited to Iraq by Prime Minister Maliki, who had them released.

    On the warpath

    Not that Iran’s military/political/ theocratic leaders are a bunch of sweethearts, by any means. That country’s loudmouth, Holocaust-denying president, Mahmoud Ahmadinejad, makes himself an easy target for Bushite demonization, and all peace-seeking governments must be vigilant toward Iran’s potential for belligerence. This requires steady engagement, smart diplomacy, military subtlety, and careful consideration of the complexities embodied within Iran’s rich, proud, 6,000-year-old culture.

    Unfortunately, BushCheney doesn’t do engagement, diplomacy, subtlety, or complexity. If there’s an international need to shell a pecan, the Bushites go at it with a sledgehammer, blissfully ignorant of their own ignorance. Do you think, for example, that George W is even aware that President Ahmadinejad can rant and rave all he wants, but he is not in charge of his country’s foreign policy, which is in the firm grip of Iran’s supreme leader, Ayatollah Khamenei?

    But realities did not deter Bush and the neocons from miring our country in Iraq, and now they are aggressively putting us on a path to war with Iran.

    • In August, Bush announced, “I have authorized our military commanders in Iraq to confront Teheran’s murderous activities.”
    • Investigative journalist Seymour Hersh revealed last month that Cheney has instructed the Joint Chiefs of Staff to draw up plans for attacking Iran.
    • Hersh added that the bombing would be accompanied by selected “incursions” into Iran by U.S. Special Forces units.
    • The London Telegraph reported in September that the Pentagon has developed a list of some 2,000 bombing targets in Iran.
    • There are plans for both a limited “surgical” bombing of the Iranian military’s training sites and a broad bombing that would include nuclear-power facilities and other targets.
    • Two aircraft carriers, a flotilla of U.S. Navy warships, and numerous cruise missiles have been put in place at the Strait of Hormuz, on Iran’s southern shore. In fact, half of our navy’s warships now sit within striking distance of Iran.
    • The Pentagon has suddenly started building a new U.S. military base near the Iraqi town of Badrah, right up against Iran’s border.
    • In September, Israel launched a preemptive raid in Syria to destroy a construction site that Israelis claim might have been the beginning of a nuclear reactor — even though Syria has no nuclear-weapons program and could legally build a reactor for electric power. Cheney gave U.S. approval for Israel’s strike only after leaders there refused his pleas that they bomb Iran’s nuclear-power plant instead.

    Yes, the U.S. Air Force and Navy have the razzle-dazzle firepower to destroy 2,000 Iranian targets in short order (not to mention thousands of Iranian civilians, for many of the targets are in populated places). But what happens the next day? Remember those neocon promises, just before the bombing of Iraq in 2003, that our troops would be showered with rose petals by a grateful public? Here we go again. Still intoxicated with the same ideological delusions, the neocons offer nothing but vague assurances that the Iranian masses will greet our forces as liberators and spontaneously overthrow the Tehran regime. In fact, opposition leaders inside Iran say that even the talk of a U.S. military attack is disastrous for their movement, for such reports strengthen hardliners in Iran and weaken those who want to reach out to the West. Iranians are Iranians first, and when a foreign power threatens to bomb or invade their country, they unite.

    On Day Two (as well as on Days Three, Four, and so on), Iran most certainly will respond, and the results could be truly hellish for America. That furious wave of anti-Americanism that Podhoretz gleefully predicts would have explosive results in Iraq (further endangering our besieged troops), in such neighboring countries as Saudi Arabia, in the cities of Europe, and right here in the States, where our own citizens could become retaliatory targets.

    Then there’s oil. Iran and its allies could block the narrow Strait of Hormuz, which connects all of the oil-producing Persian Gulf states to their foreign markets. Up to twenty-five percent of the world’s oil must pass through this strategic waterway, and shutting it down would cause prices to zoom astronomically, creating havoc for our oil-soaked economy.

    What to do?

    You might hope that cooler heads will prevail. Republican political operatives, for example, are aghast at the possible ’08 fallout (“Every Republican is going to be defeated,” cried one). Also, the generals don’t want this — they know that they don’t have the manpower for a real war with Iran. Nor will Bush have a “coalition of the willing” this time — even the doggishly loyal British government thinks attacking Iran is madness. Then there’s Putin of Russia, who pointedly traveled to Iran last month to declare that no one should “even think of making use of force in this region.”

    However, as a former Bush official told Hersh, “Cheney doesn’t give a rat’s ass” about any of that, “and neither does the president.” The chickenhawks are screeching for war, and they are immune to sanity.

    Well, surely, you say, the Democrats will finally stand up to these knuckleheads. After all, Congress has all the power it needs to say no [see last month’s Lowdown], and the time for saying it is now, before the shooting starts, before the Bushites start hiding behind the rhetorical cloak of “support the troops.”

    But the Democrats’ congressional leadership is already waffling, and some of their presidential candidates are joining Bush in rattling our sabers at Iran, hoping to appear commander-in-chiefish. Astonishingly, the Senate passed a resolution on September 26 by a 76-22 vote that endorses Bush’s confrontation with Tehran! The Kyl-Lieberman amendment buys into the Bushite myths about Iran, calls for the entire Iranian military to be designated “Global Terrorists” under a Bush executive order, and states that it should be U.S. policy to use all instruments of our national power (specifically including “military instruments”) to confront the “destabilizing influence” of Iran.

    Democrats — especially Sen. Hillary Clinton — are now trying to deny that their vote for this resolution gave Bush a free pass to go after Iran, claiming that the resolution was only meant to apply to Iranian interference in Iraq. Intentions are nice, but Bush is not. The amendment’s language plainly allows plenty of wiggle room, and the Bushites have shown that they will interpret even an errant sneeze as permission to do whatever they want. Besides, why the hell would Democrats pass anything involving the expansion of this horrible war? Voters put them in charge of Congress to go the opposite way, not to buck up Bush with a new piece of warmongering that Sen. Jim Webb has called “Cheney’s fondest pipe dream.”

    We the People have to be the leaders. More than ever, we have to get noisy. We can’t just wring our hands — there are things we can do:

    • First, connect with our allies in Congress, including the 22 senators who voted against the Kyl-Lieberman surrender to Bush (list available here). Let antiwar lawmakers know you’re behind them, ask them to get still noisier on this, and ask that they develop an inside-outside strategy to rally and focus our national outrage against expanding Bush’s Iraq disaster into Iran.
    • Second, demand that your Congress critters (whatever their stripe) use all their congressional powers (to control spending, launch investigations, declare war, etc.) to say that the president can take no preemptive military action against Iran without a full, constitutionally mandated declaration of war by Congress.
    • Third, connect with any and all of the savvy grassroots groups in this issue’s “Do Something” box. Use their information, sign all of their petitions, spread their materials, and join their actions.
    • Fourth, talk, talk, talk, and talk some more — in church, at school, with your neighbors and coworkers, at town hall meetings, in family phone calls or visits, on talk radio, at candidate forums, in supermarket check-out lines… wherever you can find an ear. The vast majority of Americans have not heard what Bush is up to, and they won’t like it. The most effective way to reach them and activate them is by personal contact — i.e., you. Talk to someone about it every day.
    • Fifth, don’t let Democrats waffle. Iraq was Bush’s war (and his political debacle), but Iran would be a product of a Democratic-controlled Congress, and they will be responsible either for allowing it…or for stopping it.
    • Sixth, come up with your own action idea, and let the rest of us know how we can support and spread it.

    Be brave. Be loud. Your country needs you.

    Saudi minister warns of dollar collapse

    0

    The dollar could collapse if Opec officially admits considering changing the pricing of oil into alternative currencies such as the euro, the Saudi Arabian foreign minister has warned.

    Prince Saud Al-Faisal was overheard ruling out a proposal from Iran and Venezuela to discuss pricing crude in a private meeting at the oil cartel’s conference.

    In an embarrassing blunder at the meeting in Riyadh, ministers’ microphones were not cut off during a key closed meeting, and Prince Al-Faisal was heard saying: “My feeling is that the mere mention that the Opec countries are studying the issue of the dollar is itself going to have an impact that endangers the interests of the countries. “There will be journalists who will seize on this point and we don’t want the dollar to collapse instead of doing something good for Opec.”

    After around 40 minutes press officials cut off the feed, which had been accidentally broadcast to the press room.

    Prince Al-Faisal added: “This is not new. We have done this in the past: decide to study something without putting down on paper that we are going to study it so that we avoid any implication that will bring adverse effects on our countries’ finances.”

    Iran and Venezuela have argued that the meeting’s final communique should voice concern about the level of the dollar, which has recently fallen to new record lows against the euro. They are pushing for oil to be denominated against a basket of currencies.

    The greenback also weakened slightly against the pound, although sterling’s own recent weakness has pushed it down from $2.10 to $2.0457 during the week.

    Nigerian finance minister Shamsuddeen Usman said that Opec could declare in the communique that: “While underlining our concern for the continued depreciation of the dollar and its adverse impact on our revenues, we instruct our finance ministers to study the issue exhaustively and advise us on ways to safeguard the purchasing power of our revenues, of our members’ revenues.”

    Chancellor Alistair Darling will today urge his fellow finance ministers at a major G20 summit to increase investment in oil production and refinement.

    http://www.thebusiness.co.uk/news-and-analysis/358346/saudi-minister-warns-of-dollar-collapse.thtml

    Son of Satan is Unhappy. Wonder Why?

    0

    Tony Blair is supposed to be enjoying the high life after leaving office but friends say he is miserable

    On the face of it, retirement seems to agree with Tony Blair.

    He is leaner and fitter than when he left Downing Street nearly five months ago. Gone is the vaguely haunted look that characterised his final, troubled days in office.

    Now that he is free to pursue the millions on offer to him after life in No 10, the former Prime Minister already bears the unmistakable buffed glow of a money-maker.

    Scroll down for more…

    Out of office: Friends say Tony Blair is ‘in mourning’ for his Downing Street life

    He has even found time for the occasional game of tennis, although not yet the lie-ins he promised himself once he was no longer running the country.

    A steady stream of early-morning builders and decorators to his still-unfinished London home has put paid to that.

    Not that he has any time to be idle. When not criss-crossing the Atlantic or travelling to China in recent weeks to deliver a series of highly lucrative speeches, he has been hard at work sketching the outline of his forthcoming autobiography which will net him £6 million.

    Indeed, Mr Blair has quickly honed his taste for the high living to which he has always been drawn.

    Friends say he has, of late, been extolling the virtues of the private Gulfstream jets that are now his preferred mode of travel – those wishing to book him on the international lecture circuit are routinely told that providing Mr Blair with his own airliner is a non-negotiable requirement.

    Nor, it seems, is the Blairs’ £3.65 million home near Hyde Park proving a sufficiently comfortable base for him as he commits pen to paper with those musings about ten years in power.

    Instead, he is said to have spent recent weeks holed up in the lavish £20 million Mayfair home of his friend, PR guru Matthew Freud, as he waits for the completion of his own luxurious offices nearby.

    All of which is very grand. So why, given that earlier this month he commanded an astonishing £240,000 just to pay a three-hour visit to a Chinese housing development, do those closest to him say Tony Blair is “utterly miserable”?

    In fact, so out-of-sorts is the former premier as he struggles to come to terms with life outside the corridors of power that one recent visitor to Tony and Cherie’s new home told me: “There is an all-pervading joylessness about the place. Tony is very low.

    “Neither of them is happy. The initial sense of relief both of them felt when they left Downing Street has gone and they are having trouble adjusting. I always felt that once the money started rolling in, Cherie, in particular, would perk up, but even she is miserable.

    “As soon as you walk through the front door there is a bad vibe. The house feels soulless and there is tension in the air.”

    Scroll down for more…

    Slimline: Tony Blair is tanned and toned since leaving office

    Part of the problem, say friends, is that Cherie is using much of the downstairs of the house in Connaught Square as an office and every morning their home is invaded by her staff, who now include a chauffeur.

    The friend added: “Her staff are milling about constantly. It feels more like a business than a home.”

    The mood has not been helped, insiders say, by a war of attrition being waged by the two teams the Blairs have hired to oversee their separate offices.

    At the centre of the acrimony is Martha Greene, the New York-born former restaurant owner who acts as Cherie’s manager. The energetic Miss Greene is said to be so at odds with members of Mr Blair’s office that Tony has chosen to escape to Matthew Freud’s during the day simply to keep the peace.

    One source said: “Martha is bossy beyond belief. The aggravation is affecting everyone. Tony needs to get out of the house for some peace and to work.”

    All this comes at a time when Blair remains, say friends, in a “period of mourning” over his lost power.

    And while the fortune he is now earning has undoubtedly softened the blow – during his first lecture tour of North America last month he earned more in a week than the £183,000 he earned in a year as PM – he cannot come to terms with his new role as a “civilian”.

    This is perhaps unsurprising given that Blair’s status has been reduced from that of world statesman to little more than a celebrity for hire.

    Consider his highly-paid trip to the Far East last week, which was partially funded by Chen Runguang, a property tycoon worth more than £100 million.

    After paying £80,000 in local income tax, Mr Blair still trousered £156,000 for addressing a group of businessmen and touring Mr Runguang’s development of luxury villas in the industrial city of Dongguan.

    Scroll down for more…

    Diplomat: Blair, during his time as Prime Minister, rarely had a moment’s rest

    This week, Mr Blair’s image was being used to promote the development, with pictures of his visit displayed on a hoarding outside the sales office, while a slide show of his tour of the properties plays inside.

    For all the financial consolations, it must surely be something of a come-down from those cosy Camp David summits with George Bush.

    And then there is the fact that he was accused by the Chinese media of “gold digging” and “money sucking” and – horrors! – of boring his audience with another speech during the visit.

    Certainly, he has fared better in America, where he remains popular.

    Last month, he gave a series of speeches in the U.S. and Canada as friends revealed that Cherie had “put the arm on him” to earn more money.

    He didn’t do badly – bringing home around £300,000 in just one week of four paid talks and a series of appearances for charity. But after being the guest of honour at a £500-a-head white tie charity dinner at the Waldorf Astoria in New York (fellow guests included Rupert Murdoch and mayor Michael Bloomberg), he was accused of telling the same jokes at a paid-for speech to oilmen in Calgary days later.

    And when the Jewish Federation in Tampa, Florida, approached his agents, the Washington Speakers’ Bureau, to book him for its annual President’s dinner next March, it baulked at their insistence that Blair would charge £125,000 for a one-hour talk, plus, of course, the prerequisite private jet to transport him from the UK.

    The trouble is that the money is desperately needed. The Blairs have £5 million of mortgages on their several properties including their London home, two flats in Bristol and his former constituency home in County Durham.

    The couple were also linked last month with a £3 million estate close to Chequers, the Prime Minister’s weekend home in Buckinghamshire. They are said to have made three trips to view the Christopher Wren-designed Winslow Hall, set in 22 acres.

    Friends say the Blairs initially set their hearts on the property which, despite needing at least £1 million of renovations, has its own Catholic chapel (Mr Blair is said to be preparing to convert to Catholicism, possibly later this month). But recently, the couple have “gone quiet” on the subject.

    Meanwhile, their new earning power (Cherie has also signed her own £1.5 million deal to write her memoirs) does not seem to be reflected in the decor of their new London home, say visitors. One recent guest described the interior of the Georgian Connaught Square house as “unutterably naff”.

    Scroll down for more…

    Free time: Tony Blair has slimmed down since he left office and even finds time for the odd game of tennis

    The friend told me: “Considering all the renovations they are still having done, the place is a taste-free zone.

    “Cherie simply has no clue about style and decoration. The house in Islington that they had before they moved into Downing Street was a shambles, and this place is the same.

    “They are having an expensive marble floor put in, but, true to form, Cherie has been telling their architect, a man called Simon, to get her discounts on everything.

    “One of their few extravagances has been an enormous plasma television which dominates one wall downstairs.

    “The house is lovely outside and you’d think it would be equally elegant inside, but they have brought all their old, nasty furniture down from the constituency house in Trimdon and it just doesn’t fit in.

    “I felt a flush of horror come over me when Cherie showed me into the living room and there was this huge and tacky TV next to a flower-patterned sofa of the most questionable taste.

    “You’d think given the money they’re earning that they could have splashed out on some decent new stuff.”

    Mrs Blair has nevertheless insisted on living a life commensurate with her position as the former unofficial First Lady and has assembled her own staff, having taken with her from Downing Street two full-time female assistants. She has also headhunted her former No 10 cleaner to work for them at their new home.

    And as befits her taste for the regal, she has seen fit to employ her own full-time chauffeur (friends had become used to her complaining that she was expected to drive herself around when her husband was Prime Minister).

    While she continues to tout herself for speaking engagements, insiders say the lure of her husband on the lecture circuit has led to a dropping off in her own bookings.

    Where once it was her controversial speaking engagements that kept the family afloat, it is now Tony who is the major breadwinner – which leaves barrister Cherie clear to stake her long-held ambition to be chosen as a High Court judge.

    Her well-orchestrated bid for the job, which began in an interview she gave to Lawyer magazine this week, has received something of a blow, however.

    In accompanying comments, her former mentor, Michael Beloff QC, describes his one-time protege as a “reasonable” advocate.

    Meanwhile, friends confirm that Mr Blair, who was appointed a Middle East envoy after leaving his job in June, is attempting to rekindle his political career by lobbying for the role of first full-time president of the EU.

    He has already enlisted the support of French President Nicolas Sarkozy, with whom he dined in Paris at the end of last month.

    It is a position he would relish, not least because it would allow him to do battle once more with Gordon Brown. On the subject of the former Chancellor, friends say it was Cherie who was the prime mover in persuading her husband to appear in the controversial three-part BBC1 documentary, The Blair Years, which begins tomorrow night.

    It features friends of Blair, including Peter Mandelson, former BBC boss John Birt and former Health Secretary Alan Milburn, who were sanctioned to speak about his former Chancellor Gordon Brown’s alleged treachery.

    The programme is seen by friends of the Blairs as the first salvo in a ‘get even’ assault on his successor.

    In particular, Cherie – whose memoirs will come out to coincide with next year’s Labour Conference (and a year before her husband’s tome) – is said by insiders to be “beside herself” at the thought of getting her revenge on Mr Brown in its pages.

    Given their multifarious missions – the determination to make money, the desperation to reclaim their former power-broker status and that overwhelming desire for revenge – the Blairs have left themselves little time to readjust.

    As a friend said: “They are both incredibly busy and I think they should have given themselves time to be a normal couple again after all the madness of the years in No 10.

    “I always felt Tony was reluctant to dive straight into making money, but Cherie was having none of it. She felt it was his turn to start making some cash for them.

    “But it’s not making him happy and I think it has been a mistake to turn the house into her office. The place feels tense and miserable.”

    http://www.dailymail.co.uk/pages/live/articles/news/news.html?in_article_id=494607&in_page_id=1770

    Jim Rogers Urges People to Sell U.S. Dollar Holdings

    9

    Aaron Pan and Paul Gordon

    Investor Jim Rogers urged people to get out of the dollar and says he expects to be rid of all his U.S. currency assets by summer next year.

    ”If you have dollars, I urge you to get out,” Rogers said in an interview from Singapore. He is chairman of New York-based Rogers Holdings, formerly known as Beeland Interests Inc. ”That’s not a currency to own.”

    The dollar fell 9.5 percent this year against a basket of six major currencies as a housing slump slowed the economy and losses stemming from subprime mortgage defaults spread among U.S. banks. Rogers, who said last month he was shifting out of all his dollar assets, plans to buy commodities, Japan’s yen, the Chinese yuan and the Swiss franc.

    Interest rate futures traded on the Chicago Board of Trade show a 72 percent chance that the central bank will lower its target rate for overnight loans between banks to 4.25 percent on Dec. 11, its third reduction this year.

    Rogers, who predicted the start of the global commodities rally in 1999, criticized Federal Reserve Chairman Ben S. Bernanke for comments on the currency before a congressional committee on Nov. 8.

    ”He is a total fool,” Rogers said. ”He said Americans who buy only American goods are not affected if the value of the U.S. dollar goes down. I was terrified.”

    Bernanke said the only effect of a weaker dollar on a typical American with their wealth in dollars, buying consumer goods in dollars, would be ”their buying powers, it makes imported goods more expensive.”

    Rogers said that’s not right.

    ”If you only buy American products and the dollar goes down, the price of oil goes up, copper goes up, wheat goes up,” he said. ”That affects you. He doesn’t understand the economy as far as I can see.”

    High School Physics Prooves Towers were Demolished

    When I talk to people about the building collapses on 9/11/2001, most people have never even heard about the destruction of World Trade Center Building No. 7, the 47 story steel office tower that fell into its own footprint at 5:20 on the evening of 9/11. But even people who know about building 7 will indicate that they don’t feel competent to have an opinion about the plausibility of the official explanation for the twin towers collapse. They will say things like “I’m not a structural engineer.” or “I’m no architect.”

    I contend that you don’t have to be a structural engineer or architect to see that the official story, to the extent that there is one, is strictly impossible. Even knowledge of basic High School physics is enough to prove that the official explanation can not be squared with the rapidity of collapse or the plumes of concrete dust observed on 9/11.

    9/11 Commission Report Fails High School Physics Test

    Newton’s law of gravity tells us exactly what to expect from falling bodies. A falling object experiences a constant acceleration of 32ft/sec^2. We can calculate that the time it would take for an object to fall from the top of one of the 1350ft WTC towers is 9.2 seconds without accounting for air resistance. When air resistance is included, for example, for a brick falling from that height, we would expect it to take about 12 sec. This is very close to the approximately 10 seconds it took for the towers to fall as reported in the official Kean-Hammilton-Zelikow report or the 10 to 13 seconds as independently measured from observation of various videos of the collapses. The bottom line is that the towers fell at essentially free fall speed.

    WTC Tower ExplodingAnother fundamental law of physics is the conservation of energy and it applies to falling bodies as well. An object, as it falls, converts its gravitational potential energy (due to height above ground) into kinetic energy (speed). If that object has to use some of its energy for something else, like pushing air out of the way, then there will be less energy available as kinetic energy so it will take a bit longer to reach the ground. As we’ve seen in the example of a brick falling from the top of the tower, even just the energy required to move air out of the way is enough to slow the free fall time from 9.2 seconds to 12 seconds.

    In the “official” explanation of the collapse, the so-called “pancake theory”, the floor above gives way and crashes into the floor below it, which gives way and together they fall on the next floor below, and so on. The falling floor must use a considerable amount of its energy to break loose the floor below. In addition, to account for the observed dust plumes, the crashing together of the floors has to crush the concrete floor slabs into a fine powder and that takes a very substantial amount of energy as well. Additional energy is then required to eject those tons of crushed concrete at high speed in all directions because that’s what was observed on 9/11. All of this energy must be subtracted from the original potential energy of the falling floor, which means there is much less energy available as kinetic energy(speed) so the floors must be falling much slower than they would otherwise.

    How much slower? You don’t have to be an engineer to realize that the energy required to crush the concrete into fine powder and blow it out of the buildings at high speed is many times more energy than what is required just to move air out of the way. If the energy required to move air out of the way of a falling brick could increase the fall time from 9.2 sec. to 12 sec, the requirement to not only move air, but also crush concrete, and eject tons of crushed concrete dust laterally at high speed, should have increased the fall time considerably.

    The fact that the buildings were observed to fall at essentially free fall speed, means that all of the gravitational potential energy of the building was in fact converted to the kinetic energy of falling. The fall speed accounts for all of the gravitational potential energy available. There is no gravitational energy available to break steel, crush concrete, eject dust or do anything else but just fall.

    The Conservation of Energy Law forces us to conclude that there had to be some additional source of energy. Some source of energy to pulverize the concrete and send it in all directions at high speed as a fine powder. Some additional energy to knock out the heavy steel beams that had supported the building for 40 years so that the top of the building could free fall unimpeded to the ground in just over 10 seconds.

    What was the source of the additional energy? Since the 9/11 commission neglected to investigate the mater, that has been left to your imagination, but large quantities of high grade explosives fit the bill.

    Peace, Matt.
    http://9eleven.info

    Sufferers sue ‘happy pill’ firm for £30million

    0

    By MARTIN DELGADO

    SeroxatLawyers representing patients who insist the bestselling drug is addictive have issued the first of 600 High Court writs against the company, each seeking compensation of up to £50,000.

    Since first prescribed in Britain in 1990, Seroxat has been linked to at least 50 suicides of adults and children.

    GSK, which makes up to £1billion a year from the drug, is already embroiled in lawsuits with American users, and has been accused of failing to act on warnings that it could have serious side-effects, including mood swings and personality changes.

    Expert advice on how to beat depression…

    Mark Harvey, of law firm Hugh James, claims Seroxat is “defective” under the 1987 Consumer Protection Act.

    He said: “When patients took the drug, not only was there no warning of withdrawal problems, there was also a statement on the data sheet until about 2003 which said you cannot be addicted to Seroxat.

    “Unfortunately many people are havingdifficulties as they try to withdraw from the drug, and there are a few who have not been able to stop taking it.”

    Earlier this year the BBC’s Panorama programme alleged that GSK had covered up fears about Seroxat’s safety, which the firm strongly denied.

    The drug was banned for under-18s in 2003 amid concerns that it contributed to suicide among adolescents with depression, and adult patients have reported that, when they stop taking it, they feel aggressive, reckless and violent towards themselves.

    Four years ago a man arrested for armed robbery was cleared after medical experts concluded that his behaviour could have been altered by severe withdrawal symptoms from Seroxat.

    GlaxoSmithKline said: “Seroxat has benefited millions of people worldwide.

    “We believe the product is not defective and that there is therefore no merit in this litigation.”

    9/11 Group Plot Anti-Giuliani Ad Campaign

    0

    9/11 Firefighters and Family Members Plot Anti-Giuliani Ad Campaign

    By TAHMAN BRADLEY

    A group of 9/11 firefighters and victims’ family members with eyes on derailing Republican Rudy Giuliani’s presidential campaign is close to a decision on forming an entity that would run issue ads in key early nominating states.

    “TV made him a hero, and we’ll use TV to take him down,” New York Fire Chief Jim Riches told ABC News.

    The final decision about the formation of an outside entity will happen sometime within the next few weeks after the group finalizes its plans at a meeting scheduled for after Thanksgiving. So far, though, under Riches’ leadership, the group has sought legal guidance and help from political consultants.

    If the group decides to move forward, it would set up a 527 committee — or something similar to Swift Boat Veterans for Truth, which in 2004 helped sink Democratic Sen. John Kerry’s White House bid.

    This Monday, the firefighters and family members are holding a meeting at Dartmouth College in New Hampshire hoping to spread the word about what they say is Giuliani’s “egregious” use of 9/11 for political gain.

    The group also is considering additional trips to early presidential primary states Iowa, Florida and South Carolina.

    Riches, who lost his firefighter son Jimmy in the World Trade Center’s north tower, said, “We don’t want him running on 9/11 or the bodies of all these dead people or my dead son saying that he did a great job that day.”

    He and other members of the anti-Giuliani group claim 9/11 first responders were given bad radios and that that prevented them from hearing evacuation orders when the World Trade Center buildings were about to collapse. They also contend Giuliani rushed cleanup work and misled people about air quality at Ground Zero, where recovery workers, including Riches, say they contracted illnesses.

    Asked to comment for this story, the Giuliani campaign referred ABC News to a statement from Lee Ielpi, another firefighter whose son died on Sept. 11.

    “I understand the emotion surrounding Sept. 11, but we cannot lose sight of the fact that it was the terrorists who attacked New York City,” the statement said. “On that day and the days following, New Yorkers and the rest of the country were fortunate to have the steady and strong leadership of Mayor Rudy Giuliani.”

    Like Ielpi, there are numerous firefighters and 9/11 family members who don’t agree with the criticism leveled against Giuliani for his handling of the terrorist attack. They instead laud Giuliani for his leadership and resolve during the crisis. The Giuliani campaign has a team of “First Responders for Rudy” across the country who vouch for the mayor.

    Claims that Giuliani has exploited and misled people about his 9/11 record are not new. A major union representing firefighters, The International Association of Fire Fighters (IAFF), released a 13-minute film this summer focusing on what it describes as “failures” by Giuliani before, during and after 9/11. Chief Riches was featured in the union’s video.

    The IAFF has had ties to the Democratic Party. It has endorsed Connecticut Sen. Chris Dodd’s 2008 presidential campaign and supported Sen. Kerry in 2004.

    Comments Giuliani made back in August, in which he told reporters in Cincinnati that he was at Ground Zero “as often, if not more, than most of the workers,” infuriated some 9/11 recovery workers. On that issue, Riches told ABC News Giuliani “was at Yankee Stadium more than he was down at Ground Zero.” Giuliani later admitted he could have better articulated what he meant.

    It is unclear what effect, if any, Riches and his group will have on the widely held perception that Giuliani is a hero of 9/11. But an issue ad campaign like the one they are contemplating would target what is believed to be one of Giuliani’s greatest strengths — that he is a proven leader who is strong on national security.

    As a 527 entity, the group would be able to raise millions dollars from both low-dollar and large donors, seemingly enough money to run numerous ads.

    The criticism of Giuliani doesn’t seem to have changed his standing in the Republican presidential contest or his image overall. He’s still widely admired by much of the country. Despite holding liberal views on abortion, guns and gay rights, polls still show the former mayor atop the GOP presidential field.

    NIST encryption standard may have NSA backdoor

    0

    By Ryan Paul

    According to security experts, an algorithm for generating random numbers that is included in an official standard documented by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) could potentially include a backdoor planted by the NSA.

    In a recent blog entry, cryptographer Bruce Schneier describes research that was presented by his colleagues Niels Ferguson and Dan Shumow at the CRYPTO 2007 conference this past August. The security researchers have raised concerns about a potential backdoor in the Dual_EC_DRBG algorithm, which is documented in NIST’s 800-90 publication about deterministic random bit generators. Dual_EC_DRBG, which is based on elliptic curves, is said to be significantly slower to compute than the other algorithms in the standard and was supposedly only included at all because it has the strong support of the NSA.

    Dual_EC_DRBG uses a seemingly arbitrary series of specific fixed numbers which are published in the standard to define the elliptic curve used for the algorithm. The origin of those numbers has not been revealed or explained but it is possible to use other numbers instead. The researchers realized that the fixed set of numbers used in Dual_EC_DRBG could have a mathematical relationship to a secret second set of numbers, which could then be used as a master key to decrypt content.

    “[W]e have no way of knowing whether the NSA knows the secret numbers that break Dual_EC-DRBG,” wrote Schneier. “We have no way of knowing whether an NSA employee working on his own came up with the constants–and has the secret numbers. We don’t know if someone from NIST, or someone in the ANSI working group, has them. Maybe nobody does.”

    Schneier also explains that the algorithm’s susceptibility to decryption via a secret number set presents broader risks. The party which holds the master key would be able to decrypt content that uses Dual_EC-DRBG, but if the key was leaked or if others managed to figure it out independently, all implementations of the algorithm that use the fixed numbers specified in 800-90 could be compromised.

    “Even if no one knows the secret numbers, the fact that the backdoor is present makes Dual_EC_DRBG very fragile. If someone were to solve just one instance of the algorithm’s elliptic-curve problem, he would effectively have the keys to the kingdom,” wrote Schneier. “He could then use it for whatever nefarious purpose he wanted. Or he could publish his result, and render every implementation of the random-number generator completely insecure.”

    Although the researchers present compelling evidence to support their argument that a master key could potentially exist, there is no evidence yet that such a key was intentionally formulated by the NSA and included as a backdoor. The NSA’s support for the algorithm does seem somewhat suspicious, particularly in light of its relative weaknesses compared to the others in the standard. Schneier recommends that developers avoid using Dual_EC-DRBG and notes that “both NIST and the NSA have some explaining to do.”

    Ruling Blocks Challenge to Wiretapping

    0

    By ERIC LICHTBLAU

    A federal appeals court said today that secrecy laws forced it to exclude critical evidence about the National Security Agency’s domestic eavesdropping program from being used by an Islamic charity in a lawsuit even though the mere existence of the program could no longer be considered a “state secret.”

    The complex ruling was a victory for the Bush administration and signaled trouble for civil rights groups that are trying to show that the eavesdropping program was unconstitutional and to hold telecommunications companies liable for carrying it out.

    The Al-Haramain Islamic Foundation, a charity in Oregon, had perhaps the best evidence of anyone that it had been a target of the wiretapping program, based on a top secret document mistakenly given to the group in 2004.

    But the ruling by the United States Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit, based in San Francisco, found that evidence about the document could not be introduced in court because it fell under the “state secrets” privilege invoked by the government. The court, reversing a lower court ruling, said the trial judge had made “a commendable effort to thread the needle” but that its final ruling in allowing the evidence was flawed.

    However, the appeals court split off from its ruling a separate claim made by more than 40 groups against the telecommunications companies, and it has yet to rule on whether those lawsuits were covered by the state secrets privilege as well.

    A lawyer for the group leading that part of the lawsuit, the Electronic Frontier Foundation, said in an interview that he was heartened by the appeals court’s clear rejection of the government’s claim everything involved in the eavesdropping program should be considered a state secret. That could bode well for the remaining piece of the case, said the lawyer, Kevin Bankston.

    Indeed, the appeals court spent most of its 27-page ruling explaining why the eavesdropping program should not be considered a state secret. It listed numerous public statements, including those by President Bush, former attorney general Alberto R. Gonzales, and the director of the Central Intelligence Agency, Michael V. Hayden, about details of the program. And it said: “In light of extensive government disclosures” about the Terrorist Surveillance Program, “the government is hard-pressed to sustain its claim that the very subject matter of the litigation is a state secret.”

    The judges on the panel were M. Margaret McKeown, Michael Daly Hawkins and Harry Pregerson. Judges McKeown and Hawkins were nominated by President Bill Clinton, which Judge Pregerson was a nominee of President Jimmy Carter.

    In presenting the charity case before the lower court, its lawyers had also argued that warrantless eavesdropping of telephone conversations between its directors and lawyers violated the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act, which established a secret court to issue top secret surveillance warrants authorized by a judge, The Associated Press reported.

    Today, the appeals court did keep the charity’s lawsuit alive, if barely, by sending the lawsuit back to a trial court in Portland, Ore., to determine if that law governing the wiretapping of suspected terrorists trumps the state secrets law.

    The appeals court said that “the F.I.S.A. issue remains central to Al-Haramain’s ability to proceed with this lawsuit.”

    Defend the Constitution? They’ll drug you for it

    U.S. Government Considers US Constitution “Terrorist Literature”

    The U.S. Government now officially considers people who “make numerous references to the Constitution” to be “potential terrorists”

    BBC deliberately distorts Iran’s history

    1

    The British Broadcasting Corporation (BBC) has deliberately distorted Iranian history in a recently published news report.

    In the news report ‘Tajik capital’s last Lenin plea’ published on its website on Nov. 9th 2007, BBC deliberately distorted the Iranian history by claiming the 9th century Persian poet Rudaki was ‘Tajik’.

    “The communists want to move the statue to their party headquarters when the park in which it stands is redesigned. It will be replaced by a statue of the ninth-century Tajik poet, Rudaki…. They believe a statue of Rudaki, the founder of Tajik literature, is a more fitting ideological figure for the city.”

    The BBC knows or should have known that Rudaki was in fact Iranian (not Tajik) and numerous reliable sources including ‘Britannica’ have confirmed him to be the ‘Father of Persian poetry’ and the first Iranian poet to compose poems in the ‘New Persian’ in Arabic alphabet.

    Rudaki was born c. 859, Rudak, Khorasan of Iran. A talented singer and instrumentalist, Rudaki served as a court poet to the Samanid ruler Nasr II (914-943) in Bukhara until he fell out of favor in 937. He ended his life in wretched poverty.

    Approximately 100,000 couplets are attributed to Rudaki, but of that enormous output, fewer than 1,000 have survived, and these are scattered among many anthologies and biographical works. He died in 940/941, Rudak.

    SBB/HGH

    9/11 Truth – How The Towers Fell (Blueprint for Truth)

    2

    How The Towers Fell (Blueprint for Truth, The Architecture of Destruction)

    Richard Gage delivers the most complete argument to date that the official story defies reality, logic, and the laws of physics. Included in his presentation are clips from 9/11 Mysteries and Loose Change.

    9/11 Theory Destroyed By Unsung Internet Heroes

    0

    Rebuffed! 9/11 Conspiracy Theory Destroyed By Unsung Internet Heroes

    Defenders of Cambridge’s Dr. Keith Seffen [photo] and his paper, “Progressive Collapse of the World Trade Centre: a Simple Analysis“, are popping up everywhere. Well, not everywhere, but they’re popping up in a few places. And with one reasoned rational argument after another, they have taken me apart.

    On Sunday, I posted a review of Dr. Seffen’s paper, and based on the reactions that piece received, I thought I had done a fairly good job of treating it calmly and rationally. But it turns out that I have been deceived by yes-men and weak-kneed courtiers. The review was shoddy, full of holes, politically motivated and shameful in the extreme.

    After excerpts from that review were posted on usenet, at sci.physics, R. Steve Walz explained what was wrong with my analysis:

    Dr. Seffen assumes that a constant force, supplied by the suddenly unsupported top of the tower, was pressing down, crushing each story, one after another, all the way down to the ground. An elementary understanding of physics would tell you that this is not possible, unless the top section of the building — the part doing the crushing — were made of much denser material than the bottom section — the material being crushed.

    No, the force even increases, being the sum of the total collapsing material, and since it is not limited by air resistance, being an internal air explosion, it can achieve near the speed of sound and not just some speed limited by some modified terminal velocity.

    So Dr. Seffen and I were both wrong. The total force increases! And it’s not even limited by air resistance! I’ve always thought some truthers were off in fantasy land with claims that the towers collapsed “faster than free-fall speed”. How could that happen, I wondered, unless a force were pushing down on the falling concrete?

    It’s a shame both Dr. Seffen and I missed such a basic fact!

    It was an internal explosion. It wasn’t limited by air resistance. And it reached speeds well in excess of terminal velocity.

    A single brick could crush a huge stack of paper cups and emerge intact. And this is the sort of situation Seffen’s paper models. But that’s not what happened to the World Trade Center.

    In the case of the WTC, the material being crushed was nearly identical to the material doing the crushing. In fact, the structural steel was thicker at the bottom than the top, in which light Seffen’s model appears even less appropriate to the event (not that this makes very much difference in the long run).

    As I said, the mass collapsing continues to increase as it collapses.

    And therefore all the debris that went whooshing down the streets … it was actually still pushing down on the towers at the very same time!

    The point is: If the top of the building had crushed all the stories below it, then the damage to the top portion would have been significant: we would naturally expect that the amount of damage to the top would be similar to the amount of damage to the bottom. Or, thinking about the thickness of the steel, we might expect the damage to the top to be even greater than the damage to the bottom.

    You’re completely misunderstanding all the physics behind the non-conspiracy understanding of the 9/11 collapses. The model surely involves the sum of the collapsing material at any instant, and does so by considering the effect of one story on all the stories beneath it, adding the stories above it which collapsed on it when the frame bent.

    The frame bent! That’s it!! I’ve always thought the frame snapped into pieces, like we see in the pictures.

    But if the frame bent, it makes perfect sense that the buildings collapsed the way they did.

    The “bent frame” is not shown in any photographs or videos of the collapse, but that’s irrelevant.

    But in Dr. Seffen’s model, the top section of the building is not destroyed in the process of crushing the stories below it; instead, its entire mass is still available to crush even the lowest stories.

    The MASS doesn’t disappear if it itself is crushed!!!

    If post-collapse photos from Ground Zero had showed the top 20 or 30 stories of each tower, virtually intact and sitting on the ground, then Seffen’s model could perhaps be considered appropriate. But according to all the video and photographic evidence, it’s not even close.

    More nonsense, those hit the pile beneath at much more than any typical terminal velocity, and the whole thing releases quite enough energy to do the melting of aluminum seen in the wreckage, and the sub-red glow of the iron.

    Steve almost had me confused for a while. He’s quite right that “the mass doesn’t disappear if it itself is crushed.” But some of it rose up in a huge cloud, and some of it poured out horizontally (or even up and outward) in all directions, billowing down every street, depositing toxic dust and other debris in nearby apartments, and so on.

    And it simultaneously remained in place to crush the stories below it!

    Furthermore, the crushed material cascading down “hit the pile beneath at much more than any typical terminal velocity” which makes perfect sense. And of course “the whole thing releases quite enough energy to do the melting of aluminum seen in the wreckage, and the sub-red glow of the iron”!!

    I especially like how this explanation explains the appearance of molten metal flowing from the towers before they collapsed!

    The collapse generated the heat that melted the metal that flowed out of the building just before it collapsed. It makes perfect sense if you repeat it often enough.

    In light of this new explanation, we’re apparently very fortunate the collapsing towers didn’t bore a hole in the Earth all the way to China!

    If the Chinese thought we had done it on purpose and chose to retaliate, we’d be finished in no time.

    Fortunately that didn’t happen, and with Steve having cleared up the technical end of things, we’re now in a better position to appreciate the non-technical comments…

    PatColo (Pat from Colorado?) threw in a link to the same review at the Gold and Silver Forum:

    Keep Your Hats On: Keith Seffen’s “Mathematical Model Of The WTC Collapse” Is Incoherent, Inappropriate, And Almost Meaningless

    But Juristic Person quickly found all the weak spots in that review.

    …one tangent after another, after another, after another.

    Seffen’s article is only a SUGGESTION.

    The 9/11 Troof Movment has certainly presented it’s fair share of “suggestions”, hasn’t it Patcolo?

    The Truth Movement is so presumptuous in it’s conviction that there is a “missing link” (bombs, thermite, thermate, mini-nukes, space-beam laser, etc) that anyone who presents an alternative suggestion that doesn’t fall in line with the pre-purchased philosophy of the 9/11 Truth Movement, is automatically chastised.

    Such is the way of the emotionally charged paranoid frenzy called “The 9/11 Truth Movement”….

    BaaBaaBaa found substantial merit in Juristic Person’s post:

    Nail hit.

    If George Bush said tomorrow “I ordered the planes to hit the WTC.” And gave all the details on how he did it and why. And in fact showed video tapes of the “911 war room”. Yet he denies the use of CDs. The “truth movement” would call him a liar.

    The Truther movement should be called the controlled demolition movement. Their purpose TODAY is to squash any theory that does not support the theory of CDs. They are not injecting any new evidence just rehashing old speculation.

    Forget talking about the 19 Arab hijackers. Forget talking about how these guys who where under surveillance from the FBI pulled this off. Forget about how these guys where funded. Forget about how these extremist Islamic groups got their start. All that is buried by the so called truth movement.

    What I do believe is that 19 Arab Jihadist assisted by certain covert agencies planned and implemented the events on 911. This scenario fits the facts as we know them. And more importantly the events after 911. CDs would fit into such a scenario. But I see no evidence for CDs. So I chuck the CD theory out the window. until new evidence is found.

    Sure there are missing pieces to the puzzle. But that is no excuse to manufacture a puzzle piece. When you pull this crap you lose credibility.

    I am sorry to say the real perpetrators got away with 911. And while we can find fault in the MSM. Some blame should be shifted to the alternative media. Especially the controlled demolition movement. Who is so dogmatic about CDs. And so focused on this speculation that any new evidence that does not have a direct bearing on the CD theory is swept under the floor.

    That about covers it, I’d say.

    It’s precise, detailed, factual … everything you could ask for in the way of scientific criticism.

    There’s certainly no excuse to manufacture a puzzle piece, and I guess that’s exactly what I did when I pointed out that Dr. Seffen’s model made no sense on a number of levels. But it also important to note that I never talk about how Islamic radicalism got its start, and in particular I never mention anything about Pakistan.

    All the rest — from the hypothetical analysis of what I would think if Bush “confessed” to the accusation of manufacturing evidence, must certainly apply to me personally, otherwise Juristic Person would never have said any of it!

    Thus, it was all starting to make sense to me. And then Peter Lemkin started a thread at Education Forum, writing

    To all the 9/11 Official Version Borg elements, with love!

    Where’s The Paper? Did The BBC And A Cambridge Don Commit Fraud To Cover Up Mass Murder?

    The two main points of the post to which Peter linked were (1) that the BBC had called Dr. Seffen’s research published when it wasn’t, and (2) that Dr. Seffen and Dr. Ross Corotis, the editor of the Journal of Engineering Mechanics (which had reportedly published the paper), had failed to answer any questions concerning the status or even the existence of the paper.

    Len Colby gave a fantastic response, hitting all the right notes and finding all the weaknesses in what was, after all, a rather shoddy report:

    This is the kind of silliness that could only impress a “truther”. Perhaps the BBC worded the article badly. The author […] indicated he visited the Cambridge Engineering department site so he should have seen the press release, which said “Dr Seffen’s new analysis, which will be published in a forthcoming issue of the American Society of Civil Engineers’ Journal of Engineering Mechanics”

    “will be” and “forthcoming” as in ‘in the future’ presumably the journal doesn’t list papers that haven’t been published yet. I assume Dr. Seffen and the editor of the journal have better things to do than correspond with misinformed paranoids.

    http://www.eng.cam.ac.uk/news/stories/2007/twin_towers/

    If we go to the current page of the blog it turns out that yes indeed the paper will be published as advertised and is even currently available.

    http://winterpatriot.blogspot.com/

    The blogger claims to “have taught college maths” see Peter’s link but since he doesn’t tell us where or even his name there is no way to confirm this. He mocks Seffen’s conclusions but they passed peer review in a prominent journal and are inline with the conclusions of other highly qualified engineers.

    It’s amazing how little research is needed to show that most truther claims don’t stand up to scrutiny.

    Amazing indeed.

    It’s also amazing the sort of hoops people can jump through.

    The paper has still not been published, but it’s available because I obtained a copy, which I then posted and publicized. This proves that my original research was incorrect. Since the paper is available, I must have been lying when I said it wasn’t.

    Similarly, the original article published by the BBC was badly worded, as the press release from Cambridge says Dr. Seffen’s findings “are to be published in an upcoming issue”.

    Presumably the journal doesn’t list papers until they are actually published, and you can easily see that I am not only making a mountain out of a molehill, but lying about it too — especially if you forget the first sentence of the Cambridge press release, which says:

    A new mathematical analysis of the collapse of the World Trade Centre has been published by a Cambridge University academic, with results that challenge conspiracy theories surrounding the September 11th attacks.

    And Dr. Seffen could have cleared up all the confusion by replying to a single email, but he chose not to do that because he really does have better things to do than than correspond with misinformed paranoids.

    All of which provides a perfect illustration of everything I have done wrong with this story, and with my blogging in general.

    I admit it: I’ve been a truther. I’ve been a misinformed paranoid. I’ve been concerned with whether the news was true or false. I’ve failed to see that it really doesn’t matter. But it doesn’t.

    It doesn’t matter whether articles in the media are well-written and tell the truth or so badly worded that they actually invert the truth and say exactly the opposite.

    Who cares? It’s all ink on newsprint, or pixels on a screen. The medium is the message. You’re not reading me, you’re sitting at your computer. And so on. You’re not watching BBC; you’re watching the television. Change the channel; it doesn’t matter. Still the same medium. Still the same message.

    In other words, content is irrelevant. Accuracy in content is something only a truther could get excited about. And anyway, I was lying.

    The paper is available which means it’s been published and that means it’s been peer-reviewed which means we can believe every word of it, even the parts where the author acknowledges fudging his model by saying things such as

    The precise variation does not matter…

    Do you see how simple that was?

    It’s amazing how little research is needed to show that most truther claims don’t stand up to scrutiny.

    So I’m finished. But that doesn’t mean everybody is finished.

    James B. of Screw Loose Change started a thread at the James Randi Educational Forum this way:

    Keith Seffen WTC Paper Out

    It is via a troofer site, but I have no reason to doubt it is not [sic] valid.

    R Mackey found the paper most satisfactory:

    My compliments to Dr. Seffen, for a straightforward paper and a closed-form solution. The guy even gives us a Lagrangian.

    That’s one more peer-reviewed paper for the good guys. The opposition still stands at, let’s see… carry the two… zero.

    Is there anyone out there who still thinks the Truth Movement hasn’t forfeit the contest?

    Apollo 20 had the gall to disagree!

    Dr. Seffen is another engineer who is apparently so enamoured of his own model that he fails to make the distinction between a theoretical/calculated result and a real-world observation/measurement.

    Thus on page 18 of his paper we read:

    “The actual time for collapse of WTC 1 ranges from 8.3 seconds to 12.0 seconds, and for WTC2, from 7.3 seconds to 12.1 seconds…”

    It turns out that these collapse times are not the observed times but the calculated times!

    But then Dr. Seffen goes on to claim that his “actual” collapse times “embrace the observed period for both towers.”

    Where has anyone claimed to have observed a crush down time of 8.3 seconds for WTC 1 or 7.3 seconds for WTC 2?

    This is complete BS and is being dishonest to say the least!

    Engineers!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!!

    But SDC had the perfect comeback for that particular complaint — indeed for all such complaints.

    Well, for heaven’s sake, it is your responsibility to send a detailed criticism to the journal in which the article appears. Please get on it!

    Seriously.

    I suppose some of my readers will get on it, as seriously as possible, if and when the paper is published in a journal.

    In the meantime, I’m going to start paying more attention to pomeroo, who had it all figured out a long time ago:

    Predictably, conspiracy liars are reduced to parading their ignorance of science and their crude anti-Semitism to rail against an authoritative paper that explodes their pernicious and baseless fantasies. As the alternative to spewing more mindless venom is to acknowledge that their evil movement is dead, the dunces must be excused for a redundant demonstration of their intellectual bankruptcy.

    Posting all this marks a fitting end to a blogging career, I should say.

    I’m tired of being predictable. I’m tired of spewing mindless venom. I’m tired of being a conspiracy liar. I’m tired of parading my ignorance of science, and my crude anti-Semitism is starting to make me sick, to tell you the truth. I’m tired of railing against an authoritative paper which says things like “the precise variation is unimportant” and thereby explodes my pernicious and baseless fantasies. And rather than spewing more mindless venom, I choose to acknowledge that my evil movement is dead.

    I will never tell the truth again. Ever, ever, ever. It wasn’t doing me any good anyway. It was only an evil habit brought about by my imaginary membership in an evil movement, and I promise not to do it any more. Now perhaps I may be excused for this demonstration of my intellectual bankruptcy.

    Speaking of intellectual bankruptcy …

    I never meant to get into this 9/11 stuff. I never meant to get political at all. I never even meant to start a blog. One day I was just sitting here, drooling all over my keyboard as usual, and trying to figure out how to tie my shoes. And the cat walked across the keyboard, and she did a little dipsy-doodle, and the next thing I knew the computer was saying “Thank you for starting a blog.”

    I never have anything to blog about so I make stuff up, and I can’t tell whether it’s true or false because the sad fact is: I can’t even read! And I can’t spell too many words, but I have a spell checker. I just type random keystrokes and backspaces until the spell checker is happy; then I move on to the next word. I’ve been doing this for three years now, and even my regular readers haven’t noticed that I don’t actually know anything at all about anything!

    I don’t know what I’ll do when I quit blogging. After all, I’m not smart enough to get a job, or civil enough to have any friends. I may find I have nothing to do all day but drool on my keyboard and try to figure out how to tie my shoes. Such is life.

    Well, I’ve kept you long enough. I promise I will never say another word about any of this …

    or anything else …

    until next time. ;-)

    http://winterpatriot.blogspot.com

    US House snubs Bush on wiretap law

    0

    AFP

    The US House of Representatives defied President George W. Bush on Thursday, passing a bill tightening legal oversight of the power of intelligence agents to use wiretaps to eavesdrop on terror suspects.

    The bill, approved in the Democratic-led House by 227 votes to 189 did not however meet the president’s demands for retroactive legal immunity to telecommunications firms which may have handed over data to the government.

    The White House immediately warned the legislation would “dangerously weaken our ability to protect the nation from foreign threats.”

    “If this bill is presented to the President in its current form, the Director of National Intelligence and the President’s other senior advisers will recommend that he veto it.”

    The legislation would replace a previous law passed in August under fierce pressure from the administration that expanded the powers of the US intelligence services to use wiretaps in global terror probes.

    Democratic House Majority Leader Steny Hoyer said the new bill would give “the intelligence community the tools it needs to listen in on those who seek to harm us, while addressing concerns that the bill passed in August could authorize warrantless surveillance of Americans.”

    The bill permits wide powers for US agents to listen in on telephone and email conversations outside the United States but routed through US-based communications firms.

    But if one party is thought to be on the US mainland more legal constraints would apply.

    The Senate still has to act on the legislation.

    The rush to change US law came after a US federal judge earlier this year secretly ruled a key element of the electronic telephone wiretapping program was illegal.

    The ruling held that the Bush administration had overstepped its authority in trying to eavesdrop on communications between two locations abroad that are passed through routing stations in US territory.

    After the September 11 attacks in 2001, Bush authorized the National Security Agency to eavesdrop, without a court warrant, on telephone calls and e-mails between people inside the United States and suspected terrorists abroad.

    The administration put the warrantless domestic eavesdropping program under the supervision of the secret court under the Foreign Intelligence Surveillance Act in January after months of criticism from civil liberties groups.

    Dems Stay Silent on Bush White House Crimes

    0

    It’s Treason: Dems Stay Silent on Bush White House Crimes

    By Richard W. Behan

    Lying to the people and the Congress was the most despicable violation of the rule of law by Mr. Bush and Mr. Cheney, but many more followed.

    Treason against the United States, shall consist only in levying war against them, or in adhering to their enemies, giving them aid and comfort.

    –Article III, Section 3, United States Constitution (emphasis added)

    The mainstream Democrats — represented, say, by Harry Reid, Nancy Pelosi, Hillary Clinton, Barack Obama, John Edwards, Joe Biden, and Christopher Dodd — have not levied war against the United States. Their treason lies instead in committing the second offense: They adhere to enemies of the country, giving them aid and comfort.

    The enemies are President George W. Bush and Vice President Richard Cheney. Like no other president and vice president in history, these men attacked their country.

    It was not our geography George Bush and Richard Cheney invaded. Instead they abandoned and subverted the bedrock institution of our constitutional democracy: the rule of law. By word and deed, Mr. Bush repeatedly and arrogantly sets himself above the law, claiming obedience to be a matter of presidential choice. Mr. Cheney orchestrates, coaches, applauds and iterates.

    This cannot stand if the country we know and cherish is to survive. George Bush and Richard Cheney are literally enemies of the state; long before now and by any measure of constitutional justice, they should have been impeached and removed from office.

    Abjectly, continuously and stubbornly refusing to hold them accountable, however, the mainstream Democrats adhere to this criminal president and vice president: Nothing they have asked for has been denied, no barriers placed in their way. That is giving them aid and comfort, and that is treason. George Bush and Richard Cheney took the country to war illegally, with a deliberate, carefully designed and executed package of fear-mongering propaganda: lies, distortions and deceptions. No informed citizen entertains the slightest doubt about this.

    Lying to the people and the Congress was the most despicable violation of the rule of law by Mr. Bush and Mr. Cheney, but many more followed: torturing prisoners, denying habeas corpus, spying on U.S. citizens, nullifying new laws with “signing statements” and so on and on. The litany of impeachable offenses is long and painful, but the so-called “War on Terror,” these men insist, makes all of it acceptable, even necessary. Nearly six years have elapsed since the Bush administration first defeated the rule of law. For most of these years, a Republican Congress saw fit not to intervene, or even to question this behavior, so effective was the administration’s propaganda campaign and so firm were the bonds of partisanship. But now the mainstream Democrats control the Congress.

    Also during these six years, the truth emerged, and now we can see the “War on Terror” truly for what it is — an overarching megalie, an untruth of such unimaginable scope and magnitude it recalibrates for an entire nation the perception of reality. (Aryan supremacy was the megalie of Nazi Germany.) No one should be surprised that the threat of terrorism has increased, not diminished, since 9/11: the wars in Afghanistan and Iraq were not even remotely intended to combat it.

    We know the Bush administration, when it took office, was indifferent to terrorism, brushing aside explicit warnings about al Qaeda and Osama bin Laden; we know the president was planning instead, at least six months before 9/11, to invade both Afghanistan and Iraq; we know of a National Security Council memorandum dated Feb. 3, 2001, concerning the “capture of new and existing oil and gas fields” in Iraq; we have acquired with a lawsuit the maps of Iraqi oil fields Vice President Cheney’s “Energy Task Force” was studying a month later; we have learned how the privatized structure of Iraq’s postwar oil industry was designed by the Bush administration a year before the war began; we know the administration was negotiating pipeline rights-of-way with the Taliban, unsuccessfully, until five weeks before 9/11; we know the final threat to them was a “carpet of bombs”; we are aware of President Bush twice refusing offers from the Taliban to surrender Osama bin Laden, before and after the carpet of bombs was unleashed; we’ve read of the five “megabases” in Iraq to house 100,000 troops for as long as 50 years; we’ve learned the U.S. Embassy compound under construction in Baghdad will be ten times larger than any other in the world; and we know Exxon Mobil, Chevron, Royal Dutch Shell, and British Petroleum/Amoco are poised to claim immense profits from 81 percent of Iraq’s undeveloped oil fields.

    Are these the activities and outcomes of a “War on Terror?”

    We also know President Bush, a month before 9/11 in August of 2001, notified the governments of Pakistan and India he would launch a military mission into Afghanistan “before the end of October.”

    Between the dates of the president’s announcement and his order to attack, the Trade Towers and the Pentagon were struck by the hijacked airliners. Seizing in a heartbeat this spectacular opportunity to disguise and launch the preplanned invasions, the Bush administration concocted the megalie, and the “War on Terror” was born.

    The “War on Terror” is a conscious and ingenious masquerade for the geostrategic pursuit and control of Middle Eastern oil and gas resources. The facts place this beyond dispute. Mr. Bush’s claim of “taking the fight directly to the terrorists … and the states that harbor them” was yet one more intentional deception, as subsequent events fully demonstrated. In Afghanistan the state was overthrown instead of apprehending the terrorists — Osama bin Laden remains at large — and in Iraq, when we invaded, there were no terrorists at all. But today both “states” are fitted with puppet governments and dotted with permanent U.S. military bases in close proximity to their hydrocarbon assets.

    Only the Bush administration continues to natter about a bogus “War on Terror.” Others are more candid:

    • Republican Sen. Senator Charles Hagel: “People say we’re not fighting for oil. Of course we are. They talk about America’s national interest. What the hell do you think they’re talking about? We’re not there for figs.” (Speaking at Catholic University, Sept. 24, 2007)
    • Former Federal Reserve Chairman Alan Greenspan, in his book The Age of Turbulence: Adventures in a New World: “I’m saddened that it is politically inconvenient to acknowledge what everyone knows: The Iraq war is largely about oil.”
    • Democratic Sen. Jon Tester: “We’re still fighting a war in Iraq and people who are honest about it will admit we’re there over oil.” (Associated Press, Sept. 24, 2007)
    • Gen. John Abizaid, retired CENTCOM commander: “Of course it’s about oil, we can’t really deny that.” (Speaking at Stanford University, Oct. 13, 2007)

    The criminal fraudulence of the “War on Terror” is fully documented, but the contemporary press has been derelict in failing to expose the mega-lie and publicize it. The mainstream Democrats are equally derelict in ignoring it. Failing to hold President Bush accountable for his crimes constitutes the most profound obstruction of justice. And failing to contradict his hideous megalie clearly reinforces the president’s hand: the mainstream Democrats are now accomplices.

    The damage done by the Democrats’ treason is equally great in prospect. Without exposing the lie of the war in Iraq and acting upon the exposure, there is no credible and reliable way to stop the administration’s insane intention of attacking Iran. The proffered rationales — and the fraudulence — are identical, as the Democrats stride toward complicity in yet another illegal and immoral war.

    Why can’t the mainstream Democrats speak sublime truth to demonic power? Doing so, they claim, would be too “divisive” and jeopardize the party’s success in next year’s election.

    This strategy is politically suicidal. A Democratic sweep in 2008 grows dimmer every day.

    The rank-and-file Republicans who continue to believe Mr. Bush’s lies about the “War on Terror” will not vote for a Democrat. The rank-and-file Democrats who see through the lies are increasingly enraged by the insipid waffling of their mainstream candidates. And roughly half the American people don’t bother to vote at all, repelled by the tawdry attack ads and negativity of bitterly partisan, superficial, sophomoric and issue-avoidance politicking.

    If the mainstream Democrats do nothing to change this, they will wind up where they’re headed — disappointed and defeated in 2008 — and they will deserve it. Only by exposing and acting on the truth about the war can they change any Republican minds, regain the support of disenchanted Democrats and attract the politically inert, indifferent Americans. A new style of politics needs badly to be engaged, one that is dedicated not merely to winning elections, but to a genuine concern for truth, for justice, for the rule of law and for integrity in public service.

    The most direct and honorable way of invoking such a style is by impeaching George Bush and Richard Cheney. Never in our history have the high crimes and misdemeanors been so flagrant, and the people of our country know it.

    Yes, congressman Kucinich sought with a “member’s privilege” motion to initiate an impeachment proceeding on the floor of the House of Representatives. But Democratic Majority Leader Steny Hoyer moved immediately to kill the initiative, only to be thwarted by a Republican trick. Finally, Nancy Pelosi, desperate to avoid a floor debate, managed to have the matter referred to the Judiciary Committee, where Chairman John Conyers has been sitting on the original bill since last April. The giving of aid and comfort to the enemies will, seemingly, continue.

    But the mainstream Democrats now face a carpe diem moment of truly historic measure: If they choose, they can foreswear their treason. It was a majority, bipartisan vote that sent the impeachment bill to Judiciary, and that is all the political cover the Democrats need to take the next courageous and necessary step.

    For the sake of the rule of law, for the sake of the integrity of the Congress, for the sake of the country’s future and incidentally for the sake of a potential Democratic victory in 2008, the politics of truth and justice must be showcased. The Judiciary Committtee must hold hearings immediately, to see if impeachment is in fact warranted — and polls say the greater part of the country thinks it is.

    If the mainstream Democrats will not do this, if their treason continues, then decent and thinking citizens everywhere — concerned patriots all — can only weep for their country.

    From Clinton to Bush

    0

    Greg Palast

    Just months before he left office President Clinton paid a sudden visit to Musharraf. Congressional Democrats were stunned. Musharraf had quickly shown himself to be a Taliban-loving, unbalanced dictator who violated US treaty terms by exploding a nuke and threatening to incinerate our ally India. Notably, the Ambassador with Clinton made payments to the electric companies a top item on his agenda.

    Favors done; favors repaid. Nothing new under the sun, but it’s a dangerous game, Senator Clinton.

    All right, maybe you can say that President Clinton’s blessing of the radioactive dictator can’t be blamed on Hillary despite the smelly money chain going from Arkansas to Karachi. But, be honest, the lady sure as heck ain’t running on her record as a Senator; her whole pitch is, “Re-elect Clinton.” And I’d rather tell you this story before you hear it from President Giuliani.

    Nevertheless, let’s not lose sight of the current danger. While the Clinton’s may have handed us the Lunatic of Lahore, it’s George Bush who leaves mints on his pillow. I have no information that Clinton knew of the sales to North Korea. The Bush Administration did and, we discovered at BBC, blocked the CIA investigation that could have exposed it in 2001. And that, Mr. Bush, is a very, very dangerous game. The problem of creating Frankensteins, whether an Osama or a Saddam or a Musharraf, is that these creatures are often known to rise and turn on their creators.

    But I’m sure we’ll correct the error. Four years ago, as Bush was proclaiming victory over the Butcher of Baghdad, I wrote, “Given our experiences with Saddam and Osama, our monsters tend to get out of control after about 11 years. Therefore, we can expect, in the year 2013, that President Jeb Bush will have to order the 82d Airborne into Pakistan to remove Musharraf, the Killer of Karachi.”

    Unfortunately, we may not have that long.

    UPDATE: Tony Karon explains the faux democratic battle currently taking place in Pakistan.

    Via the awesome Anthony Loewenstein web site

    Guantanamo manual posted on Internet

    0

    The U.S. military’s operating manual for the Guantanamo prison camp has been posted on the Internet, providing a glimpse of the broad rules and tiniest minutia for detaining suspected terrorists.The 238-page manual, “Standard Operating Procedures for Camp Delta,” is dated March 27, 2003, and signed by Army Maj. Gen. Geoffrey Miller, who was then the commander of the prison that still holds about 300 al Qaeda and Taliban suspects.

    It appears to be an authentic copy of the rules as they existed at the time at the U.S. naval base in Cuba, a spokesman for the Guantanamo detention operation, Lt. Col. Ed Bush, said on Wednesday.

    It says incoming prisoners are to be held in near-isolation for the first two weeks to foster dependence on interrogators and “enhance and exploit the disorientation and disorganization felt by a newly arrived detainee in the interrogation process.”

    Styrofoam cups must be confiscated if prisoners have written on them, apparently because prisoners have used cups to pass notes to other captives. “If the cup is damaged or destroyed, the detainee will be disciplined for destruction of government property,” the rules say.

    The manual was posted last week on the Wikileaks.org Web site, which invites whistle-blowers around the world to anonymously publish state documents containing evidence of government corruption and injustice.

    The Guantanamo manual is stamped “unclassified,” and “for official use only,” meaning it was not secret but was never intended for mass distribution either.

    The manual also indicates some prisoners were designated as off limits to visitors from the International Committee of the Red Cross, something the military has repeatedly denied. 

    Some rules seem obvious. One advises troops: “In the event that dumpsters become full before scheduled pick up, utilize another dumpster within the camp.”

    Another notes that “Detainees are not allowed to colour their hair.”

    Allegations of abuse at Guantanamo have been lodged for years by prisoners, their lawyers, human rights monitors and a few military or government employees who worked at Guantanamo.

    The manual clearly mandates humane treatment and advises that “Abuse, or any form of corporal punishment is prohibited.”

    INSTRUCTIONS ONLY MILITARY COULD WRITE

    It contains instructions as only the military can write them, such as how to use pepper spray on unruly prisoners. “Aim at the eyes, nose and mouth when possible. Use a 1/2 to 1 second burst from a distance of 36 to 72 inches away.”

    When prisoners are forcibly removed from their cells, the role of each member of the five-member “Immediate Reaction Force team” is clearly defined — “The number three man is responsible for securing the detainee’s left arm…”

    The manual spells out in minute detail how captives should be shackled, searched and moved and how the chains should be collected afterward.

    Four pages are devoted to describing how new arrivals should be taken off the plane and ferried across Guantanamo Bay to the prison camp on the main portion of the base — with one sniper and two spotters atop the ferry. 

    Prisoners are to be checked for scars, markings and tattoos, which are to be photographed for FBI records, and a linguist should be present to explain what is happening when body cavity searches are conducted, the rule book says.

    Bush, the Guantanamo spokesman, said there have been three changes in command since 2003 and the rules “have evolved significantly.” He said the camp holds dangerous terrorists and would not comment on specific rules for security reasons.

    Michael Christie

    Encrypted E-Mail Company Hushmail Spills to Feds

    0

    Encrypted E-Mail Company Hushmail Spills to Feds

    By Ryan Singel

    Hushmail, a longtime provider of encrypted web-based email, markets itself by saying that “not even a Hushmail employee with access to our servers can read your encrypted e-mail, since each message is uniquely encoded before it leaves your computer.”

    But it turns out that statement seems not to apply to individuals targeted by government agencies that are able to convince a Canadian court to serve a court order on the company.

    A September court document (.pdf) from a federal prosecution of alleged steroid dealers reveals the Canadian company turned over 12 CDs worth of e-mails from three Hushmail accounts, following a court order obtained through a mutual assistance treaty between the U.S. and Canada. The charging document alleges that many Chinese wholesale steroid chemical providers, underground laboratories and steroid retailers do business over Hushmail.

    The court revelation demonstrates a privacy risk in a relatively-new, simple webmail offering by Hushmail, which the company acknowledges is less secure than its signature product.

    A subsequent and refreshingly frank e-mail interview with Hushmail’s CTO seems to indicate that government agencies can also order their way into individual accounts on Hushmail’s ultra-secure web-based e-mail service, which relies on a browser-based Java encryption engine.

    Since its debut in 1999, Hushmail has dominated a unique market niche for highly-secure webmail with its innovative, client-side encryption engine.

    Hushmail uses industry-standard cryptographic and encryption protocols (OpenPGP and AES 256) to scramble the contents of messages stored on their servers. They also host the public key needed for other people using encrypted email services to send secure messages to a Hushmail account.

    The first time a Hushmail user logs on, his browser downloads a Java applet that takes care of the decryption and encryption of messages on his computer, after the user types in the right passphrase. So messages reach Hushmail’s server already encrypted. The Java code also decrypts the message on the recipient’s computer, so an unencrypted copy never crosses the internet or hits Hushmails servers.

    In this scenario, if a law enforcement agency demands all the e-mails sent to or from an account, Hushmail can only turn over the scrambled messages since it has no way of reversing the encryption.

    However, installing Java and loading and running the Java applet can be annoying. So in 2006, Hushmail began offering a service more akin to traditional web mail. Users connect to the service via a SSL (https://) connection and Hushmail runs the Encryption Engine on their side. Users then tell the server-side engine what the right passphrase is and all the messages in the account can then be read as they would in any other web-based email account.

    The rub of that option is that Hushmail has — even if only for a brief moment — a copy of your passphrase. As they disclose in the technical comparison of the two options, this means that an attacker with access to Hushmail’s servers can get at the passphrase and thus all of the messages.

    In the case of the alleged steroid dealer, the feds seemed to compel Hushmail to exploit this hole, store the suspects’ secret passphrase or decryption key, decrypt their messages and hand them over.

    Hushmail CTO Brian Smith declined to talk about any specific law enforcement requests, but described the general vulnerability to THREAT LEVEL in an e-mail interview (You can read the entire e-mail thread here):

    The key point, though, is that in the non-Java configuration, private key and passphrase operations are performed on the server- side.

    This requires that users place a higher level of trust in our servers as a trade off for the better usability they get from not having to install Java and load an applet.

    This might clarify things a bit when you are considering what actions we might be required to take under a court order. Again, I stress that our requirement in complying with a court order is that we not take actions that would affect users other than those specifically named in the order.

    Hushmail’s marketing copy largely glosses over this vulnerability, reassuring users that the non-Java option is secure.

    Turning on Java provides an additional layer of security, but is not necessary for secure communication using this system[…]

    Java allows you to keep more of the sensitive operations on your local machine, adding an extra level of protection. However, as all communication with the webserver is encrypted, and sensitive data is always encrypted when stored on disk, the non-Java option also provides a very high level of security.

    But can the feds force Hushmail to modify the Java applet sent to a particular user, which could then capture and sends the user’s passphrase to Hushmail, then to the government?

    Hushmail’s own threat matrix includes this possibility, saying that if an attacker got into Hushmail’s servers, they could compromise an account — but that “evidence of the attack” (presumably the rogue Java applet) could be found on the user’s computer.

    Hushmail’s Smith:

    [T]he difference being that in Java mode, what the attacker does is potentially detectable by the user (via view source in the browser).

    “View source” would not be enough to detect a bugged Java applet, but a user could to examine the applet’s runtime code and the source code for the Java applet is publicly available for review. But that doesn’t mean a user could easily verify that the applet served up by Hushmail was compiled from the public source code.

    Smith concurs and hints that Hushmail’s Java architecture doesn’t technically prohibit the company from being able to turn over unscrambled emails to cops with court orders.

    You are right about the fact that view source is not going to reveal anything about the compiled Java code. However, it does reveal the HTML in which the applet is embedded, and whether the applet is actually being used at all. Anyway, I meant that just as an example. The general point is that it is potentially detectable by the end-user, even though it is not practical to perform this operation every time. This means that in Java mode the level of trust the user must place in us is somewhat reduced, although not eliminated.

    The extra security given by the Java applet is not particularly relevant, in the practical sense, if an individual account is targeted. (emphasis added) […]

    Hushmail won’t protect law violators being chased by patient law enforcement officials, according to Smith.

    [Hushmail] is useful for avoiding general Carnivore-type government surveillance, and protecting your data from hackers, but definitely not suitable for protecting your data if you are engaging in illegal activity that could result in a Canadian court order.

    That’s also backed up by the fact that all Hushmail users agree to our terms of service, which state that Hushmail is not to be used for illegal activity. However, when using Hushmail, users can be assured that no access to data, including server logs, etc., will be granted without a specific court order.

    Smith also says that it only accepts court orders issued by the British Columbia Supreme Court and that non-Canadian cops have to make a formal request to the Canadian government whose Justice Department then applies, with sworn affidavits, for a court order.

    We receive many requests for information from law enforcement authorities, including subpoenas, but on being made aware of the requirements, a large percentage of them do not proceed.

    To date, we have not challenged a court order in court, as we have made it clear that the court orders that we would accept must follow our guidelines of requiring only actions that can be limited to the specific user accounts named in the court order. That is to say, any sort of requirement for broad data collection would not be acceptable.

    I was first tipped to this story via the Cryptography Mailing List, and Kevin, who had been talking with Hushmail about similar matters involving another case, followed up with Smith. We both agree Hushmail deserves credit for its frank and open replies (.pdf). Such candor is hard to come by these days, especially since most ISPs won’t even tell you how long they hold onto your IP address or if they sell your web-surfing habits to the highest bidders.

    More Deception: BBC admits manipulating news footage

    0

    The BBC has admitted adding the sound of babies crying to footage of quintuplets born to a Russian woman. The original footage, distributed by an Oxford hospital of the five girls, had no audio.

    But when the story ran on BBC Breakfast the clips had sound, even though the babies had respirators in their mouths.

    “Although we don’t believe viewers were materially misled, we should not have added sound to these pictures,” a BBC statement said.

    Other broadcasters including Sky and ITN ran clips of the footage without audio.

    A BBC spokesman said the corporation should have left the footage alone: “We received the film without sound and on reflection we should have kept it that way.”

    The sound was removed from the story by the Six O’Clock News bulletin after it was commented upon by the hospital.

    The admission follows a series of recent broadcasting scandals over authenticity.

    Warrant issued for Eubank arrest, for peaceful protest

    0

    A judge has issued a warrant for the arrest of ex-boxer Chris Eubank after he failed to turn up to court over an unlawful protest in Whitehall. Eubank was charged after he tried to park his seven-tonne truck outside the gates to Downing Street in May in protest at UK policy in Iraq.

    Eubank, 41, from Hove, East Sussex, was due to appear at City of Westminster Magistrates’ Court on Friday.

    District Judge Mike Snow fined Eubank £500 in his absence.

    The former world champion was also ordered to pay £380 costs. He has 14 days to pay.

    Eubank overseas

    Eubank was charged under the Serious and Organised Crime Act, relating to the staging of a unlawful demonstration in a designated area.

    During the incident he drove his truck emblazoned with a message calling on Gordon Brown to withdraw troops from Iraq.

    It read: “Mr Brown, you know that the policy in Iraq cannot succeed. Democracy cannot be exported with a gun. You can be the great leader and the great peace maker.”

    A smaller sign read: “This is not a protest.”

    Mel Goldberg, Mr Eubank’s agent, said on Friday his client was overseas and would not be back for a few days.

    He said: “He will come back and face the music.”

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/england/london/7098922.stm

    The Secret Food Code Conspiracy

    Westpress.co.uk

    Listen to the podcast here 

    <Parameters><Width>143</Width><Height>143</Height></Parameters>

     

    Imagine a world in which no food product could be penalised because of its origins or the way in which it had reached the supermarket shelf.A world where it was impossible to tell if a food item was organic, genetically modified or impregnated with hormones, and where herbal remedies were outlawed, undermining the complementary and alternative health care industry.

    According to independent researcher Ian Crane, this will be our world in just over two years’ time – unless we wake up to the “shocking” threat of the Codex Alimentarius, or Food Code, now being finalised by a range of 27 specialist committees working steadily awaty under the auspices of the World Trade Organization and the Food and Agricultural Organization.

    Ian, of Staverton, near Totnes in Devon, had 25 years’ international business experience in human resources behind him when he quit the corporate environment five years ago to become a researcher and public speaker on the events of 9/11 and the subsequent geopolitical agenda – about which he has produced a series of DVDs – and to indulge his special interest in the mythology and cosmology of the ancient Mayan civilisation of Central America.

    The immediate past chairman of the 9/11 Truth Campaign in Britain and Ireland, Ian has new DVDs out soon on the Codex threat and on Peak Oil: Myth or Reality?

    With the Codex Commission’s Committee on Nutrition and Food for Special Dietary Uses meeting in Germany this week, Ian warned that the effects of the “pernicious” legislation, due to be introduced on December 31, 2009, would be devastating.

    It meant that the consumer’s right to know the provenance and content of food would be taken away.

    Ian believes that, “without a shadow of a doubt”, there is a plot by major food and pharmaceutical companies to see that the Codex proposals become international law.

    “It’s corporatocracy gone crazy,” he told me. “Their thinking is so outrageous. We are talking about a corporate philosophy which is completely devoid of humanity, of compassion; it’s simply about profit.

    “What they are ensuring is that, effectively, from the moment that a human is conceived, until that human dies, that person is a potential revenue stream, and the more money they can make from that, the better it is for their shareholders, and increasing the market value of their companies.

    “But at what cost? A rapidly deteriorating state of human health which, to all intents and purposes, is self-inflicted because we are giving the food and drug companies the opportunities to change fundamentally the way we live.”

    If the natural health remedies, which had been around for millennia, were outlawed, it would increase people’s reliance on the pharmaceutical industry.

    Ian’s challenge is “prove me wrong”. He said: “I would love to enter a debate with somebody who could argue the case in support of the Codex Alimentarius.” He urges people to write to their MPs expressing concern, and to support the Alliance for Natural Health ( www.alliance-natural-health.org) in its fight against the Codex.

    Ian added: “I don’t deal in conspiracies, I deal in evidence, and I address the things I do because I’m very uncomfortable with the physical evidence in the public domain. In many cases, the physical evidence does not support the official version of events.”

    n Ian’s next public presentation is at St John’s Church, Bridgetown, Totnes, on Friday, November 23, at 7.15pm. His DVDs are available from www.rinf.com

    VIDEO: The 9/11 President

    0

    The next disaster for America and the world

    He did nothing to protect NYC after the first World Trade Center attacks.He showed no interest in getting to the truth about the 9/11 attacks.

    He worked with organized crime figures to remove the evidence (steel beams) from the scene for “recycling,” otherwise known as destruction of evidence.

    Now he runs on a platform of being a leader in the “War on Terror.”

    This video shows the depths of Giuliani’s lack of interest in protecting police and firemen.

    Years after 9/11, he still hadn’t bothered to inform himself about the details of the radio system failure that resulted in the unnecessary death of hundreds of firemen and thousands of citizens.

    The video ends with a short clip showing Giuliani’s close ties with the Rockefeller family.

    Sadly, you are probably looking at the next president of the United States. (Predicted on October 20, 2007)

    ENDGAME DVD – Alex Jones

    Order the DVD

    Alex JonesFor the New World Order, a world government is just the beginning. Once in place they can engage their plan to exterminate 80% of the world’s population, while enabling the “elites” to live forever with the aid of advanced technology. For the first time, crusading filmmaker ALEX JONES reveals their secret plan for humanity’s extermination: Operation ENDGAME.

    Jones chronicles the history of the global elite’s bloody rise to power and reveals how they have funded dictators and financed the bloodiest wars–creating order out of chaos to pave the way for the first true world empire.

    Order the DVD

    • Watch as Jones and his team track the elusive Bilderberg Group to Ottawa and Istanbul to document their secret summits, allowing you to witness global kingpins setting the world’s agenda and instigating World War III.
    • Learn about the formation of the North America transportation control grid, which will end U.S. sovereignty forever.
    • Discover how the practitioners of the pseudo-science eugenics have taken control of governments worldwide as a means to carry out depopulation.
    • View the progress of the coming collapse of the United States and the formation of the North American Union.Never before has a documentary assembled all the pieces of the globalists’ dark agenda. Endgame’s compelling look at past atrocities committed by those attempting to steer the future delivers information that the controlling media has meticulously censored for over 60 years. It fully reveals the elite’s program to dominate the earth and carry out the wicked plan in all of human history.

    Endgame is not conspiracy theory, it is documented fact in the elite’s own words.

    98% of all Cannabis plants seized are not psychoactive

    1

    98 Percent Of All Domestically Eradicated Marijuana Is “Ditchweed,” DEA Admits

    More than 98 percent of all of the marijuana plants seized by law enforcement in the United States is feral hemp not cultivated cannabis, according to newly released data by the Drug Enforcement Administration’s (DEA) Domestic Cannabis Eradication/Suppression Program and the Sourcebook of Criminal Justice Statistics.

    According to the data, available online at: http://www.albany.edu/sourcebook/pdf/t4382005.pdf, of the estimated 223 million marijuana plants destroyed by law enforcement in 2005, approximately 219 million were classified as “ditchweed,” a term the agency uses to define “wild, scattered marijuana plants [with] no evidence of planting, fertilizing, or tending.” Unlike cultivated marijuana, feral hemp contains virtually no detectable levels of THC, the psychoactive component in cannabis, and does not contribute to the black market marijuana trade.

    Previous DEA reports have indicated that between 98 and 99 percent of all the marijuana plants eradicated by US law enforcement is ditchweed.

    NORML Executive Director Allen St. Pierre criticized the DEA program for spending millions of taxpayers’ dollars to predominantly eradicate wild hemp. “The irony, of course, is that industrial hemp is grown legally throughout most the Western world as a commercial crop for its fiber content,” he said. “Yet the US government is spending taxpayers’ money to target and eradicate this same agricultural commodity.”

    According to a 2005 Congressional Research Service report, “The United States is the only developed nation in which industrial hemp is not an established crop.”

    St. Pierre said that most of the hemp plants eradicated by law enforcement are remnants of US-government subsidized crops that existed prior to World War II. “Virtually all wild hemp goes unharvested and presents no legitimate threat to public safety,” he said. “As such, it should be of no concern to the federal government or law enforcement.”

    According to DEA figures, Indiana reported seizing over 212 million ditchweed plants – far more than any other state. Missouri law enforcement confiscated some 4.5 million plants, and Kansas reported eradicating approximately 1.2 million plants. More than half of all states failed to report their ditchweed totals.

    California led all 50 states in the number of cultivated cannabis plants eradicated in 2005, with the DEA reporting that more than 2 million plants had been destroyed.

    The Domestic Cannabis Eradication/Suppression Program is a joint federal and state effort funded, in part, by the DEA.

                                STATE LEADERS:
                    DITCHWEED ERADICATED (2005)
                 Indiana (212,441,768 plants confiscated)
                 Missouri (4,529,695 plants confiscated)
                  Kansas (1,177,976 plants confiscated)
                 Wisconsin (272,650 plants confiscated)
                Oklahoma (100,736 plants confiscated)

                                 STATE LEADERS: 
            
    CULTIVATED CANNABIS** ERADICATED (2005)
                 California (2,011,277 plants confiscated)
                  Kentucky (510,502 plants confiscated)
                 Tennessee (440,362 plants confiscated)
                     Hawaii (255,113 plants eradicated)
                Washington (136,165 plants confiscated)

            **DEA footnote: “May include ‘tended’ ditchweed.”

    For more information, please contact NORML Executive Director Allen St. Pierre or NORML Senior Policy Analyst Paul Armentano at (202) 483-5500.

    House deals blow to CIA rendition

    0

    House votes to end CIA rendition program, ACLU says

    RAW STORY

    A little noticed prohibition in the Democrats’ $50 billion Iraq funding bill that passed the House Wednesday would effectively end CIA renditions, according to the American Civil Liberties Union.

    The ACLU, one of the largest nonprofit organizations fighting the Bush Administration on torture and civil liberties issues, lauded House members for passing the bill, which faces a rocky road in the Senate.

    The Iraq funding measure revises the Army Field Manual to prohibit torture and abuse, including waterboarding, and authorizes an array of specific interrogation tactics. It specifically states that CIA operatives must adhere to these rules as well.

    “The House of Representatives made great progress last night by passing legislation that reinforces the ban on torture and abuse by any government body or official,” said Caroline Fredrickson, director of the ACLU Washington Legislative Office, in a release. “This could end the CIA’s use of torture if signed into law. America does not stand for torture and Americans can now know that no element of our government is engaged in torture. This will begin to restore America’s tarnished image at home and abroad.”

    CIA renditions involve what some call an illegal practice of capturing terror suspects abroad and engaging in harsh interrogation techniques, shuffling them through different countries and sometimes handing them over to countries that practice torture as a matter of course to extract information.

    RAW STORY was the first to reveal the location of a secret CIA prison in Poland in March 2007.

    The bill would fund the Iraq for an additional four months and demands the withdrawal of troops to begin in 30 days. It is unlikely to be passed by the Senate in its current form.

    If the bill now fails to pass in the Senate or is vetoed by the president, the Pentagon will be forced to borrow from its budget to finance the occupation starting Nov. 17, 2007. Congress used the approaching deadline for an extension to include language not only banning torture, but also provisions that will reduce troops and force a new mission in Iraq.

    “The House voted last night to stop the Bush administration from playing word games with anti-torture laws,” Christopher Anders, ACLU Senior Legislative Counsel, added in the release. “The Army Field Manual spells everything out in clear black-and-white language, with no room for any lawyer to weasel around its protections. If the Army Field Manual is good enough for America’s men and women serving in uniform, it should certainly be good enough for civilians.”

    Also Thursday, a new report indicated that Ukraine airstrips had been used in CIA renditions.

    CNN Compares Ron Paul Supporters to Terrorists

    0

    Open Letter to CNN and Glenn Beck: Ron Paul Supporters are Not Terrorists

    Michael Nystrom

    CNN and Glenn Beck recently aired an inflammatory and misleading piece comparing Ron Paul supporters to terrorists. Mr. Beck’s irresponsible association has already led to impassioned responses from the large, peaceful and growing Ron Paul community, including a call to boycott CNN’s sponsors, and an eloquent response from a former US Marine.

    I was heartened by the Marine’s response. I fully support and encourage the boycott efforts. With this letter, I am also urging everyone within the Ron Paul community to write directly to CNN, requesting that your network and Glenn Beck issue a retraction, clarification and an apologyto Ron Paul and the peaceful Ron Paul community for your wrongful and damaging characterization.

    On November 5th, nearly 40,000 hard working Americans donated an average of $98 to Ron Paul’s campaign for president, resulting in one of the biggest one-day online political fundraising events ever. We did it because we are tired of mainstream networks such as yours ignoring us. We did it with the intention of making a news splash so large that you could no longer pretend we do not exist. Our efforts succeeded beyond our wildest expectations, but Mr. Beck’s recent piece has revealed your true colors.

    You did something shameful. You chose to portray 40,000 upstanding Americans as terrorists. I find it tragically ironic that Glenn Beck chose a segment called, “A Nation Divided” to compare the peaceful actions of fellow American citizens to terrorists. Mr. Beck’s actions only contribute to the division in this country. Calling this large group of peaceful Americans terrorists is an absolute disgrace, especially in a post-911 America when the Military Commissions Act allows the president, at his sole discretion, to name any American an “enemy combatant.” Your network and Glenn Beck may think it is funny to play fast and loose with this kind of language, but I take this very, very seriously. Nothing could be more divisive than to call fellow law-abiding Americans “terrorists.” Is this how far your network has sunk in its desperate grab for ratings? Shame on you. Shame on you and your editors, for selling out the foundations of our country so readily and so cheaply.

    In his piece Mr. Beck erroneously stated that Dr. Paul’s November 5th fundraising was done “to commemorate Guy Fawkes.” What is your source for this statement? This statement is factually incorrect, and I hereby request that you produce your source, or retract it. With this single incorrect fact, Beck goes on to spin an entire piece that only amplifies and distorts his disinformation. Later in the piece, CNN’s guest, David Horowitz, speaking of Ron Paul, says: “I think it is very significant that he chose Guy Fawkes as an image.” This so clearly misinformed that it would be laughable if not for its seriousness. Is it your network’s standing policy to allow such woefully misinformed guests on all of your “news” shows? How can you expect informed citizens to believe any of your future program guests if you allow such egregious errors go unchecked and uncorrected? Ron Paul and his official campaign had nothing to do with the organization of this day, so it is impossible that Ron Paul was the one to “choose Guy Fawkes as an image.” Please do not assume that all Americans are complete idiots, nor that we will stand by passively as you broadcast such lies.

    Your poorly researched, factually incorrect, sensationalist opinion is exactly what is dividing America and driving citizens from networks such as yours to the unimpeachable honesty and integrity exemplified by Dr. Ron Paul and his peaceful campaign for president. I hereby request that you issue a retraction, clarification and apology to Dr. Paul and his grassroots supporters. Without it, your network will continue its accelerating slide towards the realm of complete irrelevance in the minds of informed Americans.

    Passengers must answer 53 questions before Traveling

    0

    Terror crackdown: Passengers forced to answer 53 questions BEFORE they travel

    By JAMES SLACKTravellers face price hikes and confusion after the Government unveiled plans to take up to 53 pieces of information from anyone entering or leaving Britain.

    For every journey, security officials will want credit card details, holiday contact numbers, travel plans, email addresses, car numbers and even any previous missed flights.

    The e-borders system will monitor every passenger travelling into or out of the country

    The information, taken when a ticket is bought, will be shared among police, customs, immigration and the security services for at least 24 hours before a journey is due to take place.

    Anybody about whom the authorities are dubious can be turned away when they arrive at the airport or station with their baggage.

    Those with outstanding court fines, such as a speeding penalty, could also be barred from leaving the country, even if they pose no security risk.

    The information required under the “e-borders” system was revealed as Gordon Brown announced plans to tighten security at shopping centres, airports and ports.

    This could mean additional screening of baggage and passenger searches, with resulting delays for travellers.

    The e-borders scheme is expected to cost at least £1.2billion over the next decade.

    Travel companies, which will run up a bill of £20million a year compiling the information, will pass on the cost to customers via ticket prices, and the Government is considering introducing its own charge on travellers to recoup costs.

    Critics warned of mayhem at ports and airports when the system is introduced, beginning in earnest from mid-2009.

    By 2014 every one of the predicted 305million passenger journeys in and out of the UK will be logged, with details stored about the passenger on every trip.

    The scheme will apply to every way of leaving the country, whether by ferry, plane, or small aircraft. It would apply to a family having a day out in France by Eurotunnel, and even to a yachtsman leaving British waters during the day and returning to shore.

    The measure applies equally to UK residents going abroad and foreigners travelling here.

    The information will be stored for as long as the authorities believe it is useful, allowing them to build a complete picture of where a person has been over their lifetime, how they paid and the contact numbers of who they stayed with.

    The Home Office, which yesterday signed a contract with U.S. company Raytheon Systems to run the computer system, said e-borders would help to keep terrorists and illegal immigrants out of the country.

    For the first time since embarkation controls were scrapped in 1998, they will also have a more accurate picture of who is in the UK at any one time.

    The personal information stored about every journey could prove vital in detecting a planned atrocity, officials insist.

    But the majority – around 60 per cent – of the journeys logged will be made by Britons, mostly going on family holidays or business trips.

    Ministers are also considering the creation of a list of “disruptive” passengers, so that authorities know in advance of any potential troublemaker, such as an abusive drunk.

    David Marshall of the Association of British Travel Agents said: “We are staggered at the projected costs.

    “It could also act as a disincentive to people wanting to travel, and we are sure that is not what the Government intends.”

    Phil Booth, of the NO2ID group, warned travellers would pay a “stealth tax” on travel to pay for the scheme.

    He added: “This is a huge and utterly ridiculous quantity of personal information. This type of profiling will throw up many distressing errors and problems for innocent people.

    “We have already seen planes turned around mid-flight because a passenger’s surname matches that of somebody on a watch list.

    “When the Government talks about e-borders, it gives the impression it is about keeping bad people out. In fact, it is a huge grab of personal information, and another move towards the database state.”

    A pilot of the “e-borders” technology, known as Project Semaphore, has already screened 29million passengers.

    Immigration Minister Liam Byrne said: “Successful trials of the new system have already led to more than 1,000 criminals being caught and more than 15,000 people of concern being checked out by immigration, customs or the police.”

    But Nick Clegg, Liberal Democrat Home Affairs spokesman, said: “The Government must not use legitimate fears or dangers to crop vast amounts of private information without proper safeguards.”

    John Tincey, of the Immigration Service Union, said: “The question is are there going to be the staff to respond to the information that is produced?

    “In reality people could be missed. Potential terrorists could be coming through if there are not enough staff to check them.”

    Shadow Home Secretary David Davis said: “While e-borders could be a useful tool to secure our borders it will not be up and running for at least another seven years.

    “And given the Government’s woeful record on delivering IT based projects, it may well be over budget and over time.

    “In the meantime our borders remain porous. The Government should take practical measures to secure our borders, such as answering our call to establish a dedicated UK border police force.”

    – Restrictions on hand luggage carried on to passenger planes will be lifted from January.

    “Starting with several airports in the New Year, we will work with airport operators to ensure all UK airports are in a position to allow passengers to fly with more than one item of hand luggage,” Gordon Brown said.

    The single bag rule was introduced in August last year after police said they foiled a plot to blow up U.S.-bound airliners.

    It caused chaos at Heathrow Airport and drew complaints from airlines. Restrictions on carrying liquids are expected to continue.

    Ukraine link to CIA secret prisons probed

    0

    EU says airstrip, base used in extraordinary renditions

    By JAN SLIVA
    ASSOCIATED PRESS

    An EU investigator said Wednesday he has evidence to suggest that a Ukrainian airstrip was used by CIA-operated planes involved in the U.S. extraordinary rendition program.

    Giovanni Fava said he was also looking into possible CIA use of a military facility at a Ukrainian base. Fava, an Italian member of the European Parliament, drafted a report last year identifying more than 1,000 secret CIA flights with stopovers on European territory since 2001. He identified several of them as being used to transfer terror suspects.

    Ukraine Defense Minister Anatoly Gritsenko, in a telephone interview, dismissed Fava’s statements on the use of Ukrainian airspace by CIA planes and the use of a military base, calling them “nonsense.” He declined further comment.

    CIA spokesman Mark Mansfield declined to comment directly on the charges regarding Ukraine and extraordinary renditions — moving terrorism suspects from country to country.

    “Separate and apart from these allegations, there are several points I would make about renditions,” he said. “They have been conducted within the law. They have been carried out responsibly and with purpose.”

    Mansfield said the practice had disrupted potential attacks and allowed the United States and its allies to gain intelligence on terrorists.

    In a report earlier this year, Swiss investigator Dick Marty accused the CIA of running secret prisons in Poland and Romania to interrogate key terror suspects. He said prisoners were typically shackled and handcuffed, kept naked and in isolation.

    The CIA, while stopping short of a denial, said the report was “distorted.” Poland and Romania vehemently denied the charges.

    John Bellinger, legal adviser to the U.S. secretary of state, said that while there have been CIA flights over Europe or flights with stopovers, they may have simply carried intelligence experts, counterterrorist officials or forensic evidence.

    Fava and fellow Italian EU lawmaker Giulietto Chiesa cited what they said was a secret Ukrainian government document they had seen authorizing the landing of a CIA-operated Gulfstream jet plane five times in August 2005.

    They said the plane was earlier used in the transfer of Egyptian cleric Osama Moustafa Hassan Nasr, also known as Abu Omar, who was abducted from a street in Milan, Italy, before being flown to U.S. bases in Italy and Germany and finally moved to Egypt.

    “The plane was consistently used by the CIA,” Fava told a news conference.

    No2ID to ‘probe’ ID Act’s enabling laws

    0

    No2ID calls in pledge cash to ‘probe’ ID Act’s enabling laws

    By John Lettice

    Anti-ID card campaign No2ID has called in the donations offered as part of its 2005 ‘refuse’ pledge. The money, according to general secretary Guy Herbert, will in part be used to “probe” Government statutory instruments brought in to enable the ID scheme.

    Calling in the money now also allows No2ID to clear the decks for future campaigns, says Herbert. More than 11,000 people (list here, and possibly also on file at the Home Office) pledged to refuse to register for an ID card and to donate £10 to a legal defence fund. Subsequently the refuseniks have been joined by several high-profile public figures, including Nick Clegg, Chris Huhne and Dame Shirley Williams of the Lib Dems.

    According to Herbert, No2ID doesn’t yet have any specific items of legislation in mind for its first challenges, but as the construction of the ID scheme gathers pace it expects the Government to begin tabling measures to implement it. The ID Cards Act is to a great extent framework legislation, or an ‘enabling’ act which permits ministers to introduce parts of the scheme by tabling statutory instruments.

    In theory these are subject to approval by Parliament, but in practice little or no debate takes place, and many of them are barely noticed. “They come before Parliament on a wet Wednesday,” says Herbert. “Or they’re even tabled over a recess, so that at the end of the recess three men and a dog vote them through” and virtually nobody notices.

    It remains to be seen whether No2ID effectively putting them on notice will lead to the Government sharpening up its legislative act. If not, it will assuredly end in tears…

    Pledge money for No2ID should be sent to NO2ID, Box 412 LDF, 19/21 Crawford Street, London W1H 1PJ, or by bank transfer to sort code 40-28-15, a/c number 81377965. General donations are no doubt also welcome.

    Chavez: ‘Madman’ Bush planning Iran invasion

    0

    Venezuelachavez1He frequently refers to President Bush as “Mr. Danger,” but Thursday, Venezuela’s grande enchilada, Hugo Chavez, escalated the name-calling. Accusing the United States and Britain of planning to invade Iran, the South American country’s closest Middle East ally, Chavez said Bush “thinks of himself as the owner of the world,” adding, “The guy is a madman.”

    The leftist leader, up for re-election in December, also repeated claims that Washington intends to undermine him, too, though he offered no proof of the alleged scheming during a speech to supporters. The two antagonists are feuding, with each country expelling a diplomat in recent days.

    (Photo by Miraflores Press, AP)

    Venezuela’s Chavez calls Bush ‘madman,’ says U.S. planning to invade Iran

    By CHRISTOPHER TOOTHAKER
    Associated Press Writer

    CARACAS, Venezuela (AP) – Venezuelan President Hugo Chavez called U.S. President George W. Bush a “madman” on Thursday and accused the United States and Britain of planning to invade Iran, Venezuela’s closest ally in the Middle East.

    “He thinks of himself as the owner of the world and now they are making plans to invade Iran, and plans against Venezuela too,” Chavez said in a televised speech. “The guy is a madman.”

    Chavez, a sharp critic of the U.S.-led war in Iraq, did not provide any evidence of his allegations. Chavez frequently refers to Bush as “Mr. Danger” and has accused the U.S. president of being “the greatest terrorist in the world.”

    Since U.S. Defense Secretary Donald H. Rumsfeld compared Chavez to Adolf Hitler last week, Chavez has also begun referring to Bush as “Hitler.”

    “The Americans are going to have to tie (Bush) down one of these days, because if they don’t he’s capable of destroying half the world,” Chavez said Thursday.

    The Venezuelan leader also said British Prime Minister Tony Blair has teamed up with Bush in a confrontation with Venezuela.

    “He’s the madman’s unconditional and subordinate ally, and now he also came out shooting against us,” said Chavez.

    The British prime minister, speaking in the House of Commons on Wednesday, urged Venezuela to abide by the rules of the international community and said he’d like to see true democracy in communist-led Cuba, Venezuela’s closest ally in Latin America.

    Vice President Jose Vicente Rangel said Thursday that Venezuela wants to maintain healthy diplomatic relations with all nations but cannot accept meddling in its affairs.

    “Venezuela is a peaceful, democratic country that fights for peace in the world, for social justice and good relations between all the nations of the Earth,” Rangel said in a statement. “But, at the same time, our country has a high sense of dignity, sovereignty and respect as the highest norm of the international right to nonintervention.”

    Deputy Foreign Minister Pavel Rondon sent a formal complaint about Blair’s statements to the British Embassy in Caracas, saying Blair’s comments showed his disregard for “the principles of sovereignty, non-interference and self-determination.”

    Venezuela, along with Cuba and Syria, have voted against referring Iran to the U.N. Security Council for resuming uranium enrichment and no longer allowing snap inspections of its nuclear facilities.

    The United States fears Tehran is developing a nuclear bomb.

    Chavez has repeatedly accused officials in Washington of planning to invade Venezuela, the world’s fifth largest oil exporter. U.S. officials have denied any such plan exists.

    During Thursday’s speech to supporters, Chavez also criticized Britain’s long-standing claim to the Falkland Islands _ known as the Malvinas Islands by most Latin Americans _ and its recapture of the islands after Argentina invaded them in 1982.

    “These islands are Argentine, give the Malvinas back Mr. Blair,” said Chavez, a close ally of Argentina President Nestor Kirchner. “The British army went there to trample upon Argentine soldiers, supported by the government of the United States.”

    Venezuela is in the midst of a diplomatic row with the United States that has seen diplomatic officials expelled from both countries.

    U.S. officials expelled the chief of staff at the Venezuelan Embassy in Washington from the United States last week in what the U.S. State Department said was retaliation for Venezuela’s expulsion of a U.S. naval officer accused of spying.

    Chavez predicted on Wednesday the United States would step up attempts to undermine his government as he runs for re-election this year.

    “The forces of imperialism aren’t going to rest” in the months leading up to the Dec. 3 election, Chavez said.

    Confession of an American Thought Criminal

    0

    By Jason Miller
    RINF Alternative News

    “Thoughtcrime does not entail death: thoughtcrime IS death.”

    —Winston Smith from George Orwell’s 1984

    If you needed more evidence that most of our “esteemed” members of Congress are members of a criminal class of ruling elites, who regard the likes of us in the poor and working classes with the disdain most people reserve for cockroaches, look no further than H.R. 1955.

    93% of the filth “representing” us in the House voted in favor of the Violent Radicalization and Homegrown Terrorism Prevention Act of 2007. Once this vile piece of legislation sails through the Senate and the sociopath on Pennsylvania Ave gleefully slaps his endorsement on it, the mechanisms will be in place for our lords and masters to initiate programs that will make Cointelpro and the murder of Fred Hampton look like child’s play.

    According to our “betters” amongst the US plutocracy, we can’t afford the “luxury” of dissent. We are waging war on terrorism, a threat to the continued existence of the American Way of Life, which we know to be non-negotiable. Besides, dissidents simply present an obstacle to the wholesale terrorism we are inflicting on entire nations so that we can bring them “freedom and democracy.” As Bill O’Reilly suggested on Faux News last night, the only “sane thing” to do is to support the troops. And war protestors need to be arrested. So whether we are committing heinous war crimes or not, ignore your conscience, root for the home team, thank a vet and shut the fuck up!

    Under the soon-to-be law Violent Radicalization and Homegrown Terrorism Prevention Act of 2007, state and local police will join forces with the FBI, DHS, ICE, and like fascist entities to eradicate ideologies, plans, Internet “terrorist-related propaganda,” and any other “noxious weeds” which might spring forth to “threaten” the “aesthetics” of the immaculate grounds of our glorious corporatocracy, amply fertilized by the corpses of the millions of victims of our imperial and neoliberal conquests.

    Within the Orwellian construct of H.R. 1955, I have not decided whether I am a violent radical or a homegrown terrorist. Perhaps the powers that be will deem that I am both. Were I neither, that would mean that I had sold my soul and taken the last refuge of a scoundrel. What a nightmare that would be!

    Yes, America, I am a thought criminal. Consider my confession:

    1. While I have deep reservations about the death penalty for a number of reasons, I will gladly suspend those misgivings once the gradually intensifying social unrest reaches critical mass. Little would please me more than to see the likes of Bush, Cheney, Condi, O’Reilly, Perle, Clarence Thomas, Bolton, Negroponte and a host of others who have committed and enabled some of the most grievous crimes in history dangling lifelessly from the end of a rope.

    2. I view Zionism as a mental disease. The criminal apparatuses which pass themselves off as governmental structures in DC and Jerusalem do need to be “wiped off the map.” A majority of the constituencies in both the US and Israel view their governments with disgust and contempt. Both ruling bodies are infected with supporters of the Zionist plague and frequently implement policies which serve to inflict abject misery on millions of human beings.

    3. While I am not a direct participant, I wish the Animal Liberation Front great success in their endeavors. Under our depraved system of capitalism, the property ALF destroys and the profits they stymie are sacred. Yet the billions of sentient beings they champion are mere objects which we can wantonly subject to maiming, torture and death.

    4. I loath the Holocaust industry. Zionists have hijacked and exploited a horrific tragedy, cynically employed it to enact their own ethnic cleansing against the Palestinians, and used it as a justification for the continued existence of the monstrous state of Israel. While it is profoundly tragic that the Nazis tortured and murdered so many Jews, there were also significant numbers of Romas, homosexuals, and socialists who suffered similar fates. Besides, there have been many genocides throughout human history, including the one we have been inflicting upon Iraqis through the Gulf War, Clinton’s heinous economic sanctions, and the present illegal occupation.

    5. I long for the collapse of the American Empire. While we can’t predict what will arise to fill the ensuing vacuum, at least it will present an opportunity for us to create a more humane and just sociopolitical order.

    6. I believe the world would be a much better place if Wall Street and Madison Avenue ceased to exist. The greed, narcissism, and exploitation spewing forth from the entities and industries they represent are toxins to the human soul.

    7. I admire and support demonized people and entities such as Hugo Chavez, Fidel Castro, and Hamas as true champions of victimized people. Our ruling class portrays them as “threats” and “terrorists” because they have the cajones to stand up to the biggest, meanest, and most powerful bullies in history. Are they perfect? No. Are they admirable? Definitely.

    8. I despise the American flag. Since 9/11, it’s nearly ubiquitous presence has helped foster a cancerous form of patriotism and nativism. The “Stars and Stripes” has become a symbol of imperialism, oppression, and state terrorism. And yes, I have burned an American flag.

    9. I consider capitalism to be an abomination and a crime against humanity, the rest of the sentient beings on the planet, and the Earth. I am aggressively pursuing its demise through my intellectual efforts, including writing, educating, motivating, and publishing on my brain-child, Thomas Paine’s Corner at http://www.bestcyrano.org/thomaspaine/.

    10. I have known, befriended, and helped so-called “illegal” immigrants, and will continue to do so. People flooding the United States from Mexico are doing so because of the abject poverty caused by our neoliberal economic terrorism, NAFTA, and our support of their right wing oligarchs who joyfully implement the Washington Consensus, a recipe for misery for the poor and working class amongst their people. “Illegal immigration” is a forced migration caused by the ever-growing hubris and avarice of our moneyed elite.

    Much to the chagrin of those of you who remain enslaved by the intellectual chains of your indoctrination or who are dedicated reactionaries, I have as much right to remain in the United States as you do. And I’m not going anywhere voluntarily. So save your emails offering me passage on a slow boat to Russia. One thing we can probably agree upon though is the sanctity of the Second Amendment. My .38 caliber and 12 gauge are ready. Just in case I need to exercise my right to defend family, hearth and home.

    Meanwhile, let’s see if a thought criminal like me, who has committed no felonies, has no history of violence, and has formulated no plans to foment violence or engage in violent acts becomes a target of the Bush Regime’s Orwellian apparatus once they have read my confession.

    Jason Miller is a wage slave of the American Empire who has freed himself intellectually and spiritually. He is Cyrano’s Journal Online’s associate editor (http://www.bestcyrano.org/) and publishes Thomas Paine’s Corner within Cyrano’s at http://www.bestcyrano.org/THOMASPAINE/. You can reach him at JMiller@bestcyrano.com

    Travel terror security stepped up

    0
    Crowds at Heathrow Airport

    Mr Brown said security would have to be tight at airports

    Security will be stepped up at railway stations, airports and ports as part of government attempts to tackle terrorism, Gordon Brown has announced.There will be new security barriers, vehicle exclusion zones and blast resistant buildings, but air passengers will be allowed more luggage from 2008.

    Rail travellers at large stations will also face having their bags screened.

    The PM’s statement came amid confusion over his security minister’s views on detention limits for terror suspects.

    In his wide-ranging Commons statement on national security, Mr Brown said that the failed bomb attacks in London and Glasgow Airport in June showed the need to ensure young people are not “radicalised” by extremists.

    He outlined the creation of a new unit bringing together police and security intelligence to look not only at the “inner circle” of extremists but also at those at risk of falling under their influence.

    The bulk of the statement covered security at public places such as transport hubs, which had been the subject of a review by ex-Admiral and current security minister Lord West.

    Mr Brown said improved security would be installed at the country’s 250 busiest railway stations, as well as airports, ports and more than 100 other sensitive locations.

    “Additional screening” of baggage and passenger searches were planned at some large railway stations and other “sensitive locations”, he said.

    Guidance would be sent to thousands of cinemas, theatres, restaurants, hotels, sporting venues and commercial centres, as well as all hospitals, schools and places of worship to advise them on how to keep visitors safe against terrorism.

    Ministers would work with architects and planners to encourage them to “design-in” better security measures in new buildings, such as blast resistant material, safe areas and traffic control measures.

    Companies responsible for crowded places would be given updated advice on how they could improve resilience against attack, he said. About 160 counter-terrorism advisers will train civilian staff to watch out for suspect activity, ensure premises have adequate emergency facilities and make best use of their CCTV footage.

    Improved facilities to screen baggage would allow airports to seek approval from 7 January to let passengers take more than one item of hand luggage on flights.

    However, size restrictions on liquids and cabin luggage would remain.

    The security budget, currently £2.5bn this year, will rise to £3.5bn in 2011, he said and the security service will double in size from 2001, when it had less than 2,000 staff – to more than 4,000.

    He said tougher measures to deal with convicted terrorists would be included in the upcoming Counter Terrorism Bill and a new unit will be set up in the Charity Commission, to make sure charities are not exploited by extremists.

    Talks on “repatriation arrangements” for terrorism suspects, already agreed with Jordan, Lebanon and Algeria, were underway with “a number of additional countries,” he said.

    The prime minister also outlined measures to counter the influence of radical fundamentalists in Britain’s schools, universities, mosques, youth clubs and prisons, as well as on the internet.

    Strong relationships

    He said a new forum of head teachers would be convened to find ways to protect pupils from extremist propaganda.

    “There is no greater priority than the safety and security of our people and building the strongest possible relationships across all faiths and communities,” Mr Brown told MPs.

    He also said a review of the use of intercept evidence in court cases – currently banned – would report back in January and he believed there was a “consensus” on allowing terrorist suspects to be questioned after they are charged.

    Consultation with parties and communities was beginning on the controversial issue of holding terrorism suspects beyond 28 days without charge – which is opposed by both the Conservatives and the Liberal Democrats.

    Mr Brown, whose security minister Lord West had earlier had to backtrack after saying he was not convinced about extending the 28 day limit, said he believed it was possible to get a cross-party consensus.

    Community confidence

    In his response, Tory leader David Cameron said there had been “a number of good ideas”, and said the terrorist threat was now of “a completely different order” to that faced in the past.

    But he said: “As a nation we need the hard-nosed defence of our liberties.”

    Introducing post-charge questioning and using intercept evidence should relieve the need to extend pre-charge detention beyond 28-days, he argued.

    And acting Lib Dem leader Vincent Cable said: “Our main concern remains the issue of pre-charge detention.

    “This is not a separate issue from the issue about which you spoke at length, which is the issue of confidence in the minority communities, because this is an issue of great concern to them.

    “There already is a substantial degree of consensus – that we should not proceed beyond the present 28 days.”

    Graphic: Anti-terror measures for public buildings


    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/7093752.stm

    Ambulance driver defends slow Diana journey

    0

    David Batty and agencies
    Guardian Unlimited

    The ambulance carrying the dying Diana, Princess of Wales to hospital was deliberately driven slowly due to the severity of her injuries, an inquest heard today.The ambulance driver told the inquest jury that the onboard doctor ordered him to drive slowly in an attempt to save the princess’s life.

    The account of the driver, Michel Massebeuf, contradicted claims that the journey to hospital through central Paris was prolonged as part of a conspiracy to kill Diana.

    At the start of the inquest into Diana’s death, the coroner, Lord Justice Scott Baker, said questions had been raised as to why she was treated at the scene of the crash rather than being taken straight to hospital.

    It has been claimed that rather than being taken to the Pitie-Salpetriere hospital where she died, Diana could have been treated at the Hotel-Dieu, which the ambulance passed on the way.

    However, in a statement read to the jury today, Massebeuf, of the Service d’Aide Medicale d’Urgence (Samu), said he was told the Pitie-Salpetriere was ready to receive Diana but he was unable to set off until her condition was stable enough.

    “Although I cannot say exactly when, we knew from very early on that there was a place available at the Pitie-Salpetriere hospital, and that as soon as the patient’s condition allowed, I should make my way to that hospital,” he said.

    The onboard doctor, Jean-Marc Martino, treated Diana at the scene for almost 40 minutes before the ambulance set off.

    “The doctor instructed me to drive slowly because of the condition of the princess,” he said.

    “We had an escort of several police motorcyclists which enabled us to travel under optimal conditions at 40 or 50km per hour (25-31mph), smoothly, and without having to stop for traffic.

    “I should point out that driving slowly is a rule, the sole objective of which is to preserve a casualty where necessary.”

    The court heard how the ambulance had to come to a complete stop a short distance from the hospital when Diana’s blood pressure dropped, prompting fears her heart would stop.

    Massebeuf said: “In front of the Jardin des Plantes, the doctor asked me to stop. We stopped for about five minutes, in order for him to be able to provide treatment that required a complete absence of movement. We continued our journey without having to stop again.”

    Earlier today a member of the medical team at Pitie-Salpetriere hospital that treated Diana said everything possible had been done to save her life. Daniel Eyraud said doctors agreed “by common consent” to abandon attempts to restart the princess’s heart after prolonged surgery to treat severe injuries she suffered in the car crash in Paris in 1997.

    Diana’s inquest in London was told how staff at Paris’s Pitie-Salpetriere hospital carried out cardiac massage constantly as surgeons attempted to clamp a ruptured blood vessel next to her heart.

    But after repeated electric shocks also failed to revive the princess, medical staff accepted that the battle to save her life had been lost.

    Eyraud, an anaesthetist, said in a statement read to the jury: “We decided by common consent to stop heart massage as it was completely impossible to restore cardiac activity after such a long period of arrest. From that point, the princess was pronounced dead.”

    He said he could not recall the exact time when the decision was taken but said staff had treated her for “a few hours”.

    The jury was told Diana went into cardiac arrest at around 2.10am and was finally pronounced dead at 4am.

    “I personally believe we did everything possible to save the princess with the appropriate means,” Eyraud said.

    U.S. Reps Soliciting Funds for Banned Terrorist Group

    0

    Kach’s U.S. Representatives Continue to Solicit Funds for Banned Terrorist Group

    By The DC Investigative Journalism Collective

    Michael Guzofsky, a.k.a. Yekutiel Ben Ya’acov, maintains the Web site for the bannedVoice of Judea, which the State Department has designated a foreign terrorist organization (Staff photo P. Pasquini).
       

    ACCORDING TO Israeli Army Radio, the banned right-wing terrorist group Kach is petitioning Israel’s High Court of Justice to reinstate its status as a legal political party, thereby allowing its members to run for the Knesset. This follows on the heels of a 2006 decision by the U.S. Court of Appeals denying Kach’s request to have its 2003 redesignation as a foreign terrorist organization (FTO) overturned (see Jan./Feb. 2007 Washington Report, p. 19). Kach apparently is betting that, if Israel revokes its terrorist designation, the U.S. will soon follow suit.

    Ironically, while Kach’s eventual legal status may in fact be determined in Israel, the bulk of its support continues to flow from the United States. Kach’s U.S. supporters, in fact, are the lifeline that keeps the movement an active threat to any future peace between Israelis and Palestinians in the occupied territories.

    Kach and Kahane Chai were first listed as distinct terrorist organizations in 1995, when President Bill Clinton issued Executive Order 12947, entitled “Prohibiting Transactions with Terrorists Who Threaten to Disrupt the Middle East Peace Process.” (The list also named Hezbollah, the Egyptian Islamic Gamaat Islamiyya, led by Sheikh Abdul Rahman, and several Palestinian “rejectionist” groups, including the Popular Front for the Liberation of Palestine [PFLP] and Hamas.)

    On Oct. 5, 2001–less than a month after the Sept. 11 terrorist attacks on the U.S.–Secretary of State Colin Powell redesignated Kach and Kahane Chai as a “single organization” using various aliases [see box on facing page]. In 2003 the State Department included the name “Kahane” on its list of aliases of Kach/Kahane Chai. “The principal U.S. members of Kahane Chai/KACH [sic],” it found, “have consistently attempted to evade legal responsibility for their illegal activities by using different names for the organizations.”

    Having determined that Kach/Kahane Chai has “a substantial connection with the United States,” the State Department “provided Kahane Chai representatives in the United States with advance notification of possible redesignation.”

    According to the State Department’s administrative record–which never would have been released were it not for Kach’s 2003 appeal–letters of notification were sent by certified mail to Michael R. Guzofsky, Jacob Guzofsky, Richard Zim, Eric Greenberg and Fern Sidman. In addition to return receipts bearing the signatures of Michael Guzofsky, Greenberg and Sidman, the State Department received the following reply from attorney Kenneth Klein: “I am representing a United States citizen who is a representative of Kach, an advocacy organization existing in the United States.”

    Apparently the fact that Kach had been designated an FTO some eight years earlier was not a concern to Klein.

    Zionist Jihadis

    While it is the State Department which compiles the list of FTOs, the law is actually enforced by other federal agencies–Justice, in the case of criminal complaints, and Treasury, in the case of financial sanctions. Judging from publicly available U.S. government records, however, Kach/Kahane Chai has managed to maintain an extremely low profile for a designated FTO existing in the United States. To date there have been no indictments or criminal prosecutions against members or supporters of Kach/Kahane Chai.

    In its 2001 “Terrorist Assets Report” to Congress, the Treasury Department stated that it had frozen over $1 million belonging to al-Qaeda, over $6 million of Hamas funds, over $17,000 of Palestinian Islamic Jihad’s, and precisely $200 belonging to Kahane Chai. In 2002, Kahane Chai’s frozen assets increased by a single dollar, to $201. That is the extent of blocked Kach/Kahane Chai assets as reported through 2005.

    Treasury Department spokesperson Molly Millerwise points out that, in addition to the amounts of funds frozen, terrorist designations “shut down channels used by terrorist groups to raise, move, and store money, they put the world on notice about a group, individual or entity that poses a threat to security, and they make it harder, costlier, and riskier for terrorists to carry out their activities.”

    In the case of Kach/Kahane Chai, however, the repercussions seem to be minimal at best. According to a 2002 CIA Foreign Broadcast Information Service report, one of the aliases for Kach and Kahane Chai, “kahane.org,” lists the aforementioned Michael Guzofsky as its billing contact. Another Kach alias and designated FTO closely associated in recent years with Guzofsky–who himself goes by various aliases, including Yekutiel Ben Ya’acov–is the “Jewish Legion,” or Judean Legion or, in Hebrew, Gedud Haivri.

    According to the Department of State’s unclassified 2003 summary of the administrative record presenting the case for the group’s continued designation as an FTO, “Kahane Chai has solicited individuals for membership in a terrorist organization or to engage in terrorist activity…Kahane Chai, through its Web site http://www.kahane.org, has solicited individuals for membership in its group and has maintained the capabilities to engage in a terrorist activity by recruiting for its paramilitary wing, the Jewish Legion, which offers training in deadly hand-to-hand combat, firearms and guard dogs.”

    Israeli police investigated the Jewish Legion in 2004 for “setting up unauthorized roadblocks in which its members randomly select Palestinian vehicles for inspection.” According to a Jerusalem Post report, the group–based in Tapuach, a settlement located at a strategic junction near Nablus, in the heart of the West Bank–claimed that “it has extended activities outside the settlement boundaries where its armed members search Palestinian vehicles, ambulances and U.N. vehicles.”

    Israeli police subsequently raided and shut down Jewish Legion offices in Tapuach for being a front for Kach/Kahane Chai.

    Testimonials to Terrorists

    A series of testimonials by Israeli officials praising the Jewish Legion was posted on the Yahoo! Group “Stand By Israel” by moderator David Gross. One such testament is from Brig. Gen. Harel Konfo, Shomron Regional Israel Defense Forces (IDF) commander: “Good things must be said of a project that helps secure the Tapuach area.” That the Jewish Legion has actively worked in conjunction with the IDF is reflected in a posted message from a settler representative from the regional council noting that “The (J.L.) kennel has helped the IDF and yishuvim security teams.”

    The above quotes were taken verbatim from the Jewish Legion Web site, <www.defendisrael.net>. Gross also includes on the group’s homepage a scan of an October 2003 article from his local Long Beach, NY newspaper documenting an award he received for his support for the Jewish Legion in Tapuach.

    Like the Kahanists in the Palestinian population center of Hebron, south of Jerusalem, Tapuach’s extremist settlers are provided 24-hour protection by the Israel Defense Forces. According to “thumper0608,” an IDF officer posting on “Stand By Israel,” the Kahanist group is “well meaning and strongly Zionistic in their own way”–a way that just happens to encourage murdering Arab civilians (see “Tags” on the Voice of Judea YouTube page pictured opposite).

    Apparently, however, there are some lines that even Israeli settler paramilitaries are not allowed to cross. On Feb. 4, 2007, a blogger calling himself “Ya’aqov Ben-Yehudah” posted an article on the Internet titled “Naveh’s Crimes.” It included the reproduction of a sort of “wanted” sign in Hebrew posted around the occupied West Bank. As presented in the English translation, the individual in question is Yair Naveh, IDF “general of the central command” in the occupied West Bank, who is “wanted” for such alleged crimes as “expulsion” of Israeli settlers, “pogrom” in the conflict with settlers in Amona, as well as “incitement” and “silent expulsion” for signing restraining orders against settler youth attacking Palestinians during the annual olive harvest.

    In its 2006 closing brief to the U.S. Court of Appeals, the State Department described this sort of intimidation as “terrorist activity.” According to the brief, “Kahane Chai has engaged in terrorist activity by threatening and conspiring to carry out assassinations…Kahane Chai has threatened to harm Israeli Security officials involved in investigating Kahane Chai members.”

    “Charitable” Organizations

    On March 30, 2006–three years after the State Department listed the Jewish Legion as an alias of Kach–Americans and Israelis Strength and Honor (AISH) published an appeal for $5,000 to buy a Toyota truck for Israel’s Best Friend (IBF)–one of several recent reincarnations of the Tapuach-based Jewish Legion. According to the appeal, “AISH works closely with Israel’s Best Friend, a non-profit organization dedicated to providing guard dogs for those who need them in Israel. Our president, Ed Banyai, is on their board.”

    The following day, Ya’aqov Ben-Yehudah, poster of “Naveh’s Crimes,” posted an appeal on Stand By Israel entitled “urgent appeal help IBF stop terror in Israel please forward.” Seeking a $10,000 donation, this appeal concluded: “Your 501c3 tax deductible contributions can be sent to Americans and Israelis Strength and Honor–AISH, 6839 Woodridge Drive, Norfolk, VA 23518.”

    A search of Guidestar.org, which lists IRS charitable organizations, yielded no results for either “AISH” or “Israel’s Best Friend.”

    In a June 10, 2006 post to the MySpace group “jews4life,” “Moreh” included a link to the Jewish Legion (Gedud Haivry) Web site (<www.defendisrael.net>) and described the life of a Legionaire:

    “You buy your own ticket and got to show up in Tapuach, Samaria, ‘West Bank.’ To be accepted as a Legionaire, got to be mentally fit. Tests are tough. Life is hard, Food is bad. Bed is hard. Good thing, you won’t use bed much.”

    And volunteering is simple. The Web site <www.kahane.org> lists a Brooklyn phone number–(718) 874-2057–which conveniently rings in Tapuach.

    Among those who have responded to the recruitment effort is Eden Natan-Zada, who left his IDF unit for Tapuach and opened fire on a bus full of Israeli Arab citizens during the 2005 Gaza withdrawal, killing four people. Another new IDF recruit, American-born Israel Reinman, went missing in the West Bank, entered a mosque on June 5, 2006 and shot it up before fatally turning his military-issued weapon on himself. Police found Kahanist literature in his apartment. After emigrating to Tapuach from North Carolina, “Jeffrey Seath/Shmuel Zatam, a recent oleh hadash” (as described on kahane.org) was arrested for attempting to smuggle a sniper rifle and thousands of cartridges–as well as, according to one report, a crossbow. He told police of his dream of “hunting Arabs.”

    Visitors to Tapuach also have included an “Americans for a Safe Israel” delegation led by founder Herb Zweiborn, who received a hands-on tour of the group’s programs there by Michael Guzofsky and David Haivry of Revava, a Kahanist group focused on seizing the Temple Mount/Haram Al Sharif. The two Americans now live in Tapuach.

    The “defendisrael” Web site includes a detailed application form for volunteers, with fields for military, self-defense and criminal background. The site also offers a link for a secure credit card donation and a link for donating via PayPal, the ubiquitous Ebay-owned Internet payment service.

    According to Treasury spokesperson Millerwise, “ongoing fund-raising in the United States by designated parties is something we would take extremely seriously.” Its system of terrorist designations, she maintains, has made it “harder, costlier, and riskier for terrorists to carry out their activities.”

    Unless, apparently, contributions are made via Paypal.

    Bush Stands by His Dictator

    0

    By Robert Scheer

    “The war on terror” made me do it. That’s the excuse that works for George W. Bush to rationalize his assaults on the rule of law, from arbitrary arrest to torture. So why not try some war-on-terror obfuscation to bail out his president-dictator buddy over in Pakistan?

    That’s the card Bush played at his Saturday press conference when he once again celebrated Pakistani President Pervez Musharraf as a strong ally in the war on terrorism: “If you’re the chief operating officer of al-Qaida, you haven’t had a good experience. There has been four or five No. 3s that have been brought to justice one way or the other, and many of those folks thought they had found safe haven in Pakistan. And that would not have happened without President Musharraf honoring his word.”

    Of course Bush’s statement was utter nonsense. Al-Qaida has been having a very good experience with its CEO Osama bin Laden–whom Bush had promised to get “dead or alive”–being still very much alive and apparently moving with his minions quite easily across the Afghanistan-Pakistan border. So too his Taliban sponsors, who seem to get stronger each month; Afghanistan is no closer to stability than Iraq, that other war-on-terrorism battleground where Bush once claimed triumph.

    But now, even Pakistan is a war zone in which the terrorists seem to be thriving, and that is more troubling than the chaos in that other country we invaded to seize its imaginary nuclear bombs. Pakistan has real ones, upward of 80, as well as the aircraft and missiles to deliver them if some of the religious extremists in the military ever get in charge. Some highly placed folks in the Pakistan military supplied the transport planes used by Abdul Qadeer Khan, the father of the “Islamic bomb,” to transfer key nuclear weapons technology out of Pakistan and into North Korea, Libya and Iran. If Musharraf is such a determined warrior against terrorism, why has he pardoned Khan, the man who did so much to help those rogue nations that Bush warned us against, while preventing U.S. intelligence agents from interviewing him?

    Not to let Pakistani opposition leader Benazir Bhutto off the hook, because Khan’s network flowered under her tenure as prime minister, as well–not that Bush holds that against her either. Heck, U.S. presidents have tolerated Pakistan’s nuclear madness ever since President Jimmy Carter, and then Ronald Reagan, enlisted Pakistan to back the U.S-recruited Islamic fanatics, such as bin Laden, in their revolt against the Soviet puppet leader in Afghanistan. Reagan didn’t even care when the CIA warned him that Khan was kick-starting the Iranian nuclear weapons program that Bush now says may lead to World War III.

    But Bush’s coddling of Musharraf goes further; he dropped the sanctions imposed against Pakistan as punishment for its nuclear program and then rewarded the Pakistani president with $10 billion in military aid to fight terrorists. But what has fighting terrorists got to do with arresting your country’s lawyers and judges? Nothing, but here, too, the Bush people have an excuse: Musharraf is not a bad man–he’s just made a few mistakes.

    Secretary of State Condoleezza Rice, on a day last week when thousands of peaceful opponents of the dictatorship were being rounded up, called Musharraf a “reasonable man.” Boy, can she pick ’em. As for the mass arrests: “We think this was a bad decision. Full stop. A bad decision.” But bad decisions, like destroying the last vestiges of democracy in Pakistan, do not a bad dictator make, according to the Bush contingent. As Rice said: “I don’t have any doubt that he is somebody who tries to have the best interests of his country at heart.”

    In response to calls from Rice and Bush, Musharraf did say something about holding elections as soon as he gets a new supreme court appointed that will back his claim to be president. Bush wrote the book on that one.

    The opposition parties, whose members are being jailed by the thousands, said they wouldn’t participate in elections under martial law, but Bush called Musharraf’s vague promises of elections “positive steps” and said, “I take a person at his word until otherwise.”

    Bush is no dummy, and he knows that if you want to act like a dictator, you’d better not look like one, so “get rid of the uniform” is another bit of advice he offered the general-dictator-president of Pakistan. He could have added, “and smile more.” The best way to sell repression is with a smile or, if you can’t manage that, a smirk, as Bush well knows.

    Bush doesn’t care about your health or education

    0

    Bush vetoes domestic spending bill on health, education and jobs

    By Brian Knowlton

    President George W. Bush vetoed a major spending measure on Tuesday that would have funded education, health care and job training programs, saying it contained too many special projects, even as he signed a $459 billion bill to increase the Pentagon’s non-war funding.

    The veto, of a measure providing $150.7 billion in discretionary spending for the Departments of Education, Labor, and Health and Human Services, was announced as Bush was en route to southern Indiana to deliver an economics speech at which, his spokeswoman said, he would criticize Congress for its “wasteful spending.”

    It guaranteed a new round of wrangling with the Democrats who control Congress over war costs and domestic spending priorities.

    The president’s criticisms of Congress’s spending priorities have grown steadily more pointed. But in her immediate response to the veto, the Democratic speaker of the House, Representative Nancy Pelosi, seemed to be trying to hold her fire, keeping open the possibility of reaching compromise but saying the president need to help in finding “common ground.”

    The veto announcement also came as top Democratic lawmakers were unveiling a new study on the “hidden costs” of the Iraq and Afghan wars. They said that if one included such factors as the higher cost of oil, lost productivity and interest payments on money borrowed to finance the wars, the real costs would nearly double, to more than $1.5 trillion.

    The report, from Democrats on Congress’s Joint Economic Committee, said that the administration had spent or requested $804 billion to wage the two wars through the end of 2008.

    But experts say it is difficult to project war costs into the future; and although oil prices have surged to well above $90 a barrel from about $37 a barrel in 2003, it is difficult to determine war’s precise contribution to that increase.

    The Defense Department measure includes a stopgap spending bill that will finance operations of most federal agencies at 2007 levels through Dec. 14.

    Congress is still working on a bill to provide a fresh infusion of money for the Iraq war while requiring Bush to begin withdrawing troops from Iraq.

    Senator Edward Kennedy, Democrat of Massachusetts and chairman of the Health, Education, Labor and Pensions Committee, attacked both the veto and the level of war spending. “Cancer research, investments in our schools, job training, protecting workers and many other urgent priorities have all fallen victim to a president who squanders billions of dollars in Iraq but is unwilling to invest in America’s future,” he said.

    And Representative David Obey, the Wisconsin Democrat who is chairman of the House Appropriations Committee, denounced the veto as “pure politics.”

    Dana Perino, the White House spokeswoman, said the vetoed measure exceeded the president’s fiscal target by $10 billion and included 2,000 earmarks. “We call on Congress to take out the pork and reduce the overall spending levels and return it to the president,” Perino told reporters traveling with Bush on Air Force One, according to a transcript released by the White House.

    Democrats seized on the most sensitive aspects of the bill.

    Pelosi said the vetoed measure was “a bipartisan and fiscally responsible bill that addresses the priorities of the American people,” from cancer research to veterans’ health care. “At the same time,” she said, “President Bush and his congressional allies demand hundreds of billions of dollars for the war in Iraq – none of it paid for.”

    “Democrats have offered to work cooperatively with the president to address the priorities of our nation,” she added. “We believe our differences are not so great that compromise cannot be reached. But the president must work with us finding common ground.”

    Bush’s tone, in his speech in Indiana, was less conciliatory.

    “The Congress now sitting in Washington holds this philosophy,” he said, according to an advance text of the speech. “Their majority was elected on a pledge of fiscal responsibility, but so far it is acting like a teenager with a new credit card.”

    “This year alone, leaders in Congress are proposing to spend $22 billion more than my budget provides,” he said. “Some of them claim this is not really much of a difference, and the scary part is that they seem to mean it.”

    Robert Pear contributed reporting from New Albany, Indiana.

    Repugnant Republicans: Pro-God, Anti-Humanity

    0

    Repugnant Republicans: Anti-Abortion, Pro-Torture; Pro-God, Anti-Humanity 

    When it comes to the rabid right

    and torture, anything goes

    The WSJ argued that waterboarding doesn’t

    necessarily constitute “cruel, inhuman

    or degrading” treatment of ‘terrorists”

    Torture is “a defining value of

    the American conservative movement”

    Have you noticed that the pro-torture right

    has gone from saying that torture is abhorrent

    to saying that torture isn’t occurring to saying

    that torture is not torture to now saying

    that torture is “something of which

    every American should be proud”

    That is the state of our discourse,

    and it’s getting worse

    The arc is simply horrifying:

    We don’t torture … we did torture,

    but those were a few bad apples…

    we do torture, but only in life-threatening crises…

    torture is morally sound, so quit your bellyaching

    The Republican National Committee, working with the editors of the Wall Street Journal, have decided to fund a summer camp for their members’ kids where the kids can learn first-hand that waterboarding and other interrogation techniques currently used by the U.S. Government and its agents aren’t really torture.

    Children of the Wall Street Journal’s editorial page staff will have special scholarship available to them.

    Located in the Blue Ridge Mountains, Camp Torquemada for Boys And Girls will feature such activities as Waterboarding, Sleep Deprivation, Cold Room Sleepouts and for advanced campers, eye-gouging, bone drilling, mock-and-real firing squads and fingernail pulling.

    “Each of these activities will help these young campers develop a useful skill set,” said Reinhard Heidrich, the new summer camp’s head counselor.

    “Waterboarding, for example, is useful for improving underwater swimming skills. Those who have their fingernails yanked out will learn not to bite them.”

    The camp features a first rate staff from top to bottom, said Heidrich. “Dr. Josef Mengele, for example, will be responsible for the kids’ medical care during the summer.”

    Tuition will be paid by means of contributions to the Americans Proud Of Torture PAC, whose charter calls upon it to instill Americans with pride for this nation’s dungeons and concentration camps wherever in the world they may be.

    Torture Is the New Abortion [Original]

    Remember that golden, innocent time — the 1980s and ’90s — when the phrase “political litmus test” was associated with the debate about abortion rights, and torture was associated with the Spanish Inquisition?

    Those days are gone. And, as usual in life, there’s good news and bad news.

    The good news? Abortion isn’t nearly as divisive an issue as it used to be. The bad news? For the GOP, torture is the new abortion.

    Not too long ago, judicial nominees and political candidates could expect to be grilled on abortion.

    As the Republican leadership became dominated by right-wing evangelicals, staunch opposition to abortion became a precondition for those seeking support from GOP insiders.

    Soon, abortion was a litmus test for both parties. Just as Republicans would oppose any candidate or nominee who supported abortion rights, Democrats would oppose anyone who wanted Roe vs. Wade overturned.

    Of course, the abortion debate was never just about abortion. It was also about the role of the judiciary, the role of individual freedom, the role of women and the role of religion.

    As a result, debates about abortion sparked pitched battles between the political parties.

    Today, though, the GOP’s interest in abortion appears greatly diminished. When President Bush nominated Michael B. Mukasey as attorney general, no one seemed clear about Mukasey’s views on abortion — and no one in the GOP seemed to care very much either.

    These days, you can forget that old-style GOP rhetoric about “values,” “human dignity” and the “culture of life.” Because the GOP has a new litmus test for its nominees: Will you or will you not protect U.S. officials who order the torture of prisoners?

    As Scott Horton reports in his Harper’s Magazine blog:

    “Several days before his first meeting with the Senate Judiciary Committee, Michael Mukasey’s Justice Department handlers arranged a private meeting for him with a number of ‘movement conservatives.’…

    “They pushed aggressively on the torture question. They wanted Mukasey to pledge that he would toe the administration’s line” by not criticizing the administration’s approval of waterboarding and similar interrogation techniques.

    They wanted him to “protect those who authored the [interrogation] program” by issuing opinions that would keep those responsible for the program from facing criminal prosecution.

    In his Senate testimony, Mukasey made it clear that he shared this agenda. He was conciliatory on a wide range of issues, but even when it looked as though his confirmation was at risk, he refused to give an opinion on whether waterboarding constitutes torture or is legally prohibited. That was his line in the sand.

    For further evidence that torture is the new abortion — at least when it comes to the GOP — look at the Republican presidential hopefuls.

    This time around, rigorously antiabortion evangelicals such as Sam Brownback and Mike Huckabee gained little traction, while Rudy Giuliani — who supports abortion rights — has a solid lead.

    On Wednesday, Giuliani gained the coveted endorsement of Pat Robertson, founder of the Christian Coalition.

    Giuliani’s main selling point with GOP stalwarts is his toughness on terrorism, symbolized by his “gloves-off” approach to interrogations.

    In the campaign’s first GOP presidential debate, Giuliani told a cheering crowd that if the U.S. captured a suspect believed to be planning a terrorist attack:

    “I would tell the people who had to do the interrogation to use every method they can think of.”

    Pressed on whether that would include waterboarding, Giuliani repeated, “Every method they could think of, and I would support them in doing that.” More recently, Giuliani claimed that whether or not waterboarding is torture “depends on who does it.”

    But if the waterboarding debate has become a symbolic rallying point for Republicans — emblematic of a broader insistence on aggressive unilateralism in foreign affairs and on executive power unchecked by Congress or the judiciary here at home — it increasingly seems to be turning into a symbolic litmus test for Democrats too.

    Significantly, every Democrat running for president opposed Mukasey’s confirmation, specifically citing his refusal to call waterboarding torture.

    New York’s Charles Schumer and California’s Dianne Feinstein became the only Democrats on the Senate Judiciary Committee to vote for Mukasey, and both found themselves on the defensive.

    They shouldn’t have been so surprised by the rapid blowback. Far more than the abortion debate ever did, the debate about torture goes to the very heart of what (if anything) this country stands for.

    Do we want to be the nation imagined by the signers of the Declaration of Independence, a nation with “a decent respect to the opinions of mankind,” committed to a vision of human dignity and unalienable rights, limited government and the rule of law?

    Or would we rather bring back the methods of the Spanish Inquisition?

    As litmus tests go, that’s not such a bad one.

    More BBC Deceit: The 9/11 Hoax That Didn’t Quite Work

    On September 11, 2007, the BBC published an article called “9/11 demolition theory challenged“, which described a research paper written by University of Cambridge senior lecturer Keith Seffen.

    Dr. Seffen, the BBC said, had constructed a mathematical model of the World Trade Center collapses which showed that “once the collapse of the twin towers began, it was destined to be rapid and total.”

    According to the BBC, Dr. Seffen proceeded from this mathematical model to describe the destruction of the twin towers as a “very ordinary thing to happen”.

    The BBC also reported that Dr. Seffen’s findings “are published” in the Journal of Engineering Mechanics.

    The Journal of Engineering Mechanics (JEM) is a monthly publication of the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE). A search of the ASCE website turned up no mention of a Keith Seffen, nor any mention of any “Seffen”.

    I wrote a brief item about this that morning.

    1) September 11, 2007:
    UK Engineer: WTC ‘Collapses’ Were ‘A Very Ordinary Thing’

    Shortly after my piece was published, the BBC page was changed to say that that Dr. Seffen’s findings “are to be published” in the Journal of Engineering Mechanics.

    I noted the change in an update to my item, where I also provided a link to two different mirrors of the original text. I also noticed the distinctive smell of manure. So I kept digging.

    It became apparent obvious that the BBC piece was based on a press release from Cambridge, which said (in the opening paragraph) that Dr. Seffen’s findings were “published”, and (much later) that they were “to be published”.

    Apparently this self-contradiction didn’t raise any eyebrows. But it was not the only problem with the press release.

    Virtually every paragraph was either misleading or downright false. And it showed very clearly that Seffen’s approach was not scientific, but political. I wrote about the press release on September 14th.

    2) September 14, 2007:
    Bad Science: Keith Seffen And The WTC ‘Collapse’

    Nearly eight weeks later, after repeated requests for clarification (from myself and others) had been ignored, I posted a compendium of the coverage Seffen and his paper had received, noting that it had been largely uncritical but remarkably sparse.

    3) November 5, 2007:
    Seffen’s Folly: Attempted 9/11 Hoax By Cambridge And The BBC Was A Failure

    The following day I noted some of the many unanswered questions and documented a series of requests for clarification which had been ignored by Dr. Seffen and by Dr. Ross Corotis, the editor of the JEM.

    4) November 6, 2007:
    Where’s The Paper? Did The BBC And A Cambridge Don Commit Fraud To Cover Up Mass Murder?

    Several readers of the latter two stories joined in the effort to obtain further information. Some of them had academic credentials, and their requests stirred Dr. Corotis to action.

    Two days later, I was pleased to report on a message from the ASCE, saying that according to their records, Dr. Seffen’s paper is scheduled for publication in the February 2008 JEM.

    5) November 8, 2007:
    WTC ‘Collapse’ Research Cited In September Is Scheduled To Be Published In February

    This was good news for two reasons. It marked the first public commitment from the ASCE to publish the paper. And it provided confirmation of the fact that the paper had not been published when it was cited (and referred to as published) by the BBC and others.

    Then another reader — one with even more impressive credentials — started digging in a different place, and unearthed a copy of the paper itself.

    The following day I posted the first few pages of Seffen’s paper (in HTML) on my website

    6) November 9, 2007:
    Introducing Keith Seffen’s “Progressive Collapse Of The WTC: A Simple Analysis”

    I also provided a link to the entire paper (a small PDF file).

    http://winterpatriot.pbwiki.com/f/seffen_simple_analysis.pdf

    True to the description provided by the press release, the paper turned out to be worthless as science, but not entirely meaningless.

    7) November 11, 2007:
    Keep Your Hats On: Keith Seffen’s “Mathematical Model Of The WTC Collapse” Is Incoherent, Inappropriate, And Almost Meaningless

    Via the fantastic Winter Patriot site, make sure you add them to your bookmarks

    CIA agent alleged to have met Bin Laden in July

    0

    French report claims terrorist leader stayed in Dubai hospital

    Anthony Sampson
    The Guardian

    Two months before September 11 Osama bin Laden flew to Dubai for 10 days for treatment at the American hospital, where he was visited by the local CIA agent, according to the French newspaper Le Figaro.The disclosures are known to come from French intelligence which is keen to reveal the ambiguous role of the CIA, and to restrain Washington from extending the war to Iraq and elsewhere.

    Bin Laden is reported to have arrived in Dubai on July 4 from Quetta in Pakistan with his own personal doctor, nurse and four bodyguards, to be treated in the urology department. While there he was visited by several members of his family and Saudi personalities, and the CIA.

    The CIA chief was seen in the lift, on his way to see Bin Laden, and later, it is alleged, boasted to friends about his contact. He was recalled to Washington soon afterwards.

    Intelligence sources say that another CIA agent was also present; and that Bin Laden was also visited by Prince Turki al Faisal, then head of Saudi intelligence, who had long had links with the Taliban, and Bin Laden. Soon afterwards Turki resigned, and more recently he has publicly attacked him in an open letter: “You are a rotten seed, like the son of Noah”.

    The American hospital in Dubai emphatically denied that Bin Laden was a patient there.

    Washington last night also denied the story.

    Private planes owned by rich princes in the Gulf fly frequently between Quetta and the Emirates, often on luxurious “hunting trips” in territories sympathetic to Bin Laden. Other sources confirm that these hunting trips have provided opportunities for Saudi contacts with the Taliban and terrorists, since they first began in 1994.

    Bin Laden has often been reported to be in poor health. Some accounts claim that he is suffering from Hepatitis C, and can expect to live for only two more years.

    According to Le Figaro, last year he ordered a mobile dialysis machine to be delivered to his base at Kandahar in Afghanistan.

    Whether the allegations about the Dubai meeting are confirmed or not, the wider leaks from the French secret service throw a worrying light on the rivalries and lack of coordination between intelligence agencies, both within the US and between western allies.

    A familiar complaint of French intelligence is that collaboration with the Americans has been essentially one-way, with them happy to receive information while giving little in return.

    Domestic spying inquiry restarted at DoJ

    0

    By DEVLIN BARRETT

    The Justice Department has reopened a long-dormant inquiry into the government’s warrantless wiretapping program, a major policy shift only days into the tenure of Attorney General Michael Mukasey.

    The investigation by the department’s Office of Professional Responsibility was shut down last year, after the investigators were denied security clearances. Gonzales told Congress that President Bush, not he, denied the clearances.

    “We recently received the necessary security clearances and are now able to proceed with our investigation,” H. Marshall Jarrett, counsel for the OPR, wrote to Rep. Maurice Hinchey, D-N.Y. A copy of the letter, dated Tuesday, was obtained by The Associated Press.

    Hinchey and other Democrats have long sought an investigation into the spying program to see if it complies with the law. Efforts to investigate the program have been rebuffed by the Bush administration.

    “I am happily surprised,” Hinchey said. “It now seems because we have a new attorney general the situation has changed. Maybe this attorney general understands that his obligation is not to be the private counsel to the president but the chief law enforcement officer for the entire country.”

    The OPR investigation was begun in February 2006 but was shut down a few months later when the National Security Agency refused to grant Justice Department lawyers the security clearances to ask questions about the program. Justice Department officials said Gonzales recommended Bush approve the clearances, but the president said no.

    White House officials referred questions to the Justice Department.

    The investigation “will focus on whether the DOJ attorneys who were involved complied with their ethical obligations of providing competent legal advice to their client and of adhering to their duty of candor to the court. Because this matter involves a pending inquiry, I can’t comment further,” Justice Department spokesman Brian Roehrkasse said in a statement.

    The Office of Professional Responsibility was created to ensure that Justice Department lawyers do not violate ethical rules. It is not authorized to investigate activities of the National Security Agency.

    Bush’s decision to authorize the spy agency to monitor people inside the United States, without warrants, generated a host of questions about the program’s legal justification.

    The administration has vehemently defended the eavesdropping, saying the NSA’s activities were narrowly targeted to intercept international calls and e-mails of Americans and others inside the U.S. with suspected ties to the al-Qaida terror network.

    A separate Justice Department internal investigation was opened last year by the agency’s inspector general. Those investigators received their security clearances around the same time the OPR investigators’ were denied, and their probe is ongoing.

    Democrats have complained in the past that neither probe reviews whether the surveillance program violates the Constitution, the kind of decision usually reserved for the courts.

    News of the reborn investigation comes a day before the first formal ceremony marking Mukasey’s new post as head of the Justice Department.

    Supreme Court Chief Justice John Roberts will administer the ceremonial oath to Mukasey, a retired federal judge who has promised to enforce laws fairly and keep the Justice Department free of political pressure from the White House.

    Bush is scheduled to speak at the ceremony, set for 10:10 a.m. EST, after which Mukasey will address his employees for the first time.

    Mukasey was sworn in last Friday in a brief, private ceremony that allowed him to start receiving daily classified briefings from his national security aides.

    Mukasey, the third attorney general of the Bush administration, has 14 months until the president’s term is up to turn around the beleaguered department. Gonzales resigned in September amid charges that he allowed politics to illegally interfere with personnel decisions and lied to Congress about national security programs.

    A department investigation also is looking at last year’s firings of nine U.S. attorneys–and whether at least one of them was dismissed because he refused to target Democratic candidates shortly before the 2006 elections.

    Mukasey, nominated by Bush the day Gonzales left the department, is a retired chief judge of the U.S. District Court in Manhattan.

    His confirmation by the Senate hit a brief–but serious–snag after he refused to say point-blank that he considered a harsh interrogation tactic known as waterboarding to be torture.

    The Senate narrowly confirmed him late Thursday, 53-40. Critics noted that marked the slimmest margin by which an attorney general was confirmed in more than 50 years.

    –––

    Associated Press writer Lara Jakes Jordan contributed to this report.

    CIA misled judges in Moussaoui case

    BY GREG GORDON

    The CIA has three video and audio recordings of interrogations of senior al-Qaida captives but misled federal judges about the evidence during the case against terrorist Zacarias Moussaoui, federal prosecutors revealed in a Nov. 9 court filing that was made public Tuesday.

    The disclosure is unlikely to undo Moussaoui’s conviction because the agency said the material on the tapes doesn’t pertain to his case.

    However, the disclosure that the government taped some interrogations of high-value detainees could invite fresh scrutiny of the CIA’s treatment of so-called “enemy combatants” who were held at secret prisons or U.S. bases overseas.

    John Radsan, a former CIA assistant general counsel who teaches at the William Mitchell College of Law in St. Paul, called the revelation of the tapes “huge” news. “So far, there has been great mystery about what was actually done to the high-value detainees,” he said. “A videotape is worth a thousand words.”

    The government’s letter said that “the CIA came into possession of the three recordings under unique circumstances involving separate national security matters,” leaving unclear whether the tapes show CIA interrogations or possibly questioning by agents of another country.

    Prosecutors revealed the existence of the tapes in a letter to Chief Judge Karen Williams of the 4th U.S. Circuit Court of Appeals in Richmond, Va., and to U.S. District Judge Leonie Brinkema of Alexandria, Va., the trial judge in the tumultuous, 4½-year prosecution of Moussaoui.

    In it, they said that the CIA didn’t notify them until Sept. 13 that it had discovered a videotape and the transcript of an interrogation of an unidentified detainee. Prosecutors said they then asked the CIA to perform “an exhaustive review” for any other recordings of roughly a half-dozen al-Qaida captives whom Moussaoui had sought as defense witnesses, and a second videotape and a brief audio tape were discovered.

    Among the prisoners whose testimony Moussaoui sought were Khalid Sheikh Mohammed, who allegedly admitted masterminding the Sept. 11 attacks after he was waterboarded.

    FBI: Blackwater shootings ‘unwarranted’

    0

    Most of the shots fired by private U.S. security firm Blackwater that killed 17 civilians in Baghdad Sept. 16 were unwarranted, a preliminary FBI report says.

    Investigators said in a report now under review by the Justice Department as many as five of the company’s guards opened fire during the shootings, and as many as 14 of the deaths were unnecessary, the New York Times reported Wednesday.

    “I wouldn’t call it a massacre, but to say it was unwarranted is an understatement,” one official who asked not to be identified told the Times.

    The company said its guards opened fire when they perceived a security threat to their four-car convoy, and denied any wrongdoing.

    A separate U.S. military review of the shootings concluded all of the killings were unjustified and potentially criminal, the Times said, although prosecutors have yet to decide whether to seek indictments.

    Rep. David Price, D-N.C., sponsored legislation to extend U.S. criminal law to contractors serving overseas, and said he hopes new Attorney General Michael Mukasey would make the issue “a top priority.”

    (UPI

    Torturing Palestinian Detainees

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    B’Tselem is the conservative Israeli Information Center for Human Rights in the Occupied Territories with a well-deserved reputation for accuracy. A group of prominent academics, attorneys, journalists and Knesset members founded the organization in 1989 to “document and educate the Israeli public and policymakers about human rights violations in the Occupied Territories, combat the phenomenon of denial prevalent among the Israeli public, and help create a human rights culture in Israel” to convince government officials to respect human rights and comply with international law.

    Its work covers a wide range of human rights issues that include detentions and torture. In May, 2007, it prepared a detailed 100 page report titled “Absolute Prohibition: The Torture and Ill-treatment of Palestinian Detainees” that’s now available in print for those who request it. This article summarizes its findings that represent a joint effort by B’Tselem and HaMoked: Center for the Defense of the Individual that was founded in 1988 to support Palestinian rights during the first intifada in the late 1980s.

    Since the early 1990s, B’Tselem published more than ten reports on Israelis’ use of torture and mistreatment of Palestinian detainees. This is the latest one in an effort to raise public awareness and help abolish these abhorrent practices. The findings are based on testimonies solicited from a small “unrepresentative” sample of 73 Palestinian West Bank residents who were arrested between July, 2005 and January, 2006, agreed to tell their stories, and who met predetermined criteria for the study.

    They were chosen from the names of 4460 Palestinian detainees whose relatives contacted HaMoked for help to locate their whereabouts. HaMoked provides this service because Israel violates international law and its own military regulations by denying family members any information about who was detained or where they’re being held. From its many years investigating Israeli torture, B’Tselem believes the information in this report accurately reflects the types and extent of Israeli abusive practices.

    Torture, abuse or degrading treatment are abhorrent in any form for any reason, and long-standing international law forbids these practices under all circumstances. The four 1949 Geneva Conventions banned any form of “physical or mental coercion” and affirmed sick, wounded, war prisoners and civilians must be treated humanely. All four conventions have a common thread called Common Article Three that requires all non-combatants to be treated humanely at all times. There are no exceptions for any reasons, and violations are grave breaches of Geneva and other international law that constitute crimes of war and against humanity.

    Nonetheless, the 1987 Landau Commission (headed by retired Israeli Supreme Court Chief Justice Moshe Landau) cited the “necessary defense” provision in the Penal Law to recommend using “psychological and moderate physical pressure,” to obtain evidence for convictions in criminal proceedings. Its justification was that coercive interrogation tactics were necessary against “hostile terrorist activity” it defined to include not just threats or acts of violence but all activities related to Palestinian nationalism.

    Later in September, 1999, Israel’s High Court of Justice (HCJ) responded to the Public Committee Against Torture in Israel’s petition (PCATI) and issued a landmark decision (reversing Landau recommendations) and barred the use of torture against detainees. It was, however, a hollow gesture as at the same time it ruled pressure and a measure of discomfort were legitimate interrogation side-effects but should not be used to break a detainee’s spirit. It then added a giant loophole allowing interrogators to use physical force and avoid prosecutions in “ticking time bomb” cases even though international law allows no exceptions, and Israeli authorities could claim that excuse for anyone in custody.

    Since its occupation of Gaza and the West Bank (the OPT) in 1967, Israel imprisoned over 650,000 Palestinians according to the Palestinian peace and justice group MIFTA. That’s equivalent to about one-sixth of the OPT’s population today. The security services currently hold around ten to twelve thousand Palestinian men, women and children in its prisons under deplorable conditions with many under administrative detention without charge. Based on earlier assessments by Hamoked, B’Tselem estimates as many as 85% of them are subjected to torture and mistreatment in custody even though most of them aren’t accused of terrorism. These practices are routinely and systematically used against political activists, students accused of being pro-Islam, sheikhs and religious leaders, people in Islamic charitable organizations, relatives of wanted individuals or any man, woman or child Israel targets for any reason.

    B’Tselem’s May, 2007 report states that the Israeli Security Agency (ISA – formerly called the General Security Service or GSS) admits to using “exceptional” methods that include “physical pressure” of interrogation in “ticking bomb” cases that can be used as an excuse to abuse anyone. In addition, law enforcement officials openly admit harsh measures are approved retroactively so that Palestinian detainee rights can be freely violated without fear of recrimination. In other words, ISA interrogators know the rules – don’t ask permission, use any methods you wish, and don’t worry about the consequences after the fact. There won’t be any, and it shows in what detainees told B’Tselem.

    They reported being “softened up” for interrogation from the moment of their arrest to when ISA agents took over. Abuses at the outset included beatings, painful binding, swearing, humiliation and denial of basic needs. The ISA procedure then included seven key forms of abuse that violated the detainees’ dignity and bodily integrity. They were inflicted to break their spirit, but international law calls it torture when it includes verified intent, severe pain or suffering, improper motive, and involvement of the state. All those conditions apply to Israeli abusive practices that included:

    — isolation that prohibited detainees from contact with family, an attorney or ICRC representatives; this exacerbated detainees’ sense of powerlessness by creating a situation in which they’re completely at the mercy of interrogators; it’s also known to cause them serious psychological harm when continued for extended periods;

    — psychological pressure from solitary confinement in “putrid, stifling cells three to six square meters in size” with no windows or access to daylight and fresh air; a fixed overhead light on 24 hours a day; walls made of rough plaster making them uncomfortable or impossible to lean against; a water faucet on one wall and some cells with sinks; a usually dirty and damp mattress and “filthy putrid” blankets on the floor; nothing else in cells; reading and writing materials not allowed; in many cells, toilets were holes in the floor; detainees denied all human contact except for guards and interrogators.

    — physical conditions in solitary confinement cells are regulated in Criminal Procedure Regulations issued by Israel’s Minister of Internal Security with the approval of the Knesset Constitution, Law and Justice Committee; they don’t apply to “security detainees,” however, so cells have no bed, chairs and most often no sink; nothing else provided including use of a telephone and right to have visitors provide items; cells were too small to walk around in, and no daily outside exercise was allowed;

    — detainees weakened from lack of physical activity, sleep deprivation and inadequate food; they’re denied basic needs like food and liquids, medicines or the right to relieve themselves; throughout long hours of interrogation, they’re shackled to a chair unable to move hands or legs even minimally; they had nutritional deficiencies and food received was inadequate, cold, improperly cooked, flavorless and often repulsive in appearance; many detainees resisted eating as long as possible;

    — shackling in the “shabah” position that’s the prolonged and painful binding of detainees’ hands and feet to a standard-sized unupholstered, metal frame, rigid plastic chair fixed to the floor with no armrests; hands tightly bound behind the back in adjustable plastic handcuffs and connected to a ring at the back of the seat to stretch them uncomfortably below the backrest; legs bound to the chair’s front legs; detainees were unable to get up throughout interrogation that on average lasted eight consecutive hours without a break and on the first day ran 12 hours; later in the interrogation period, sessions shortened to four or five hours;

    — interrogations only for a small portion of this time; for most if it, interrogators were out of the room; at those times air conditioning turned up to uncomfortably cold levels; most often only one meal served during a day’s interrogation; very sparing toilet privileges allowed; nearly all detainees complained of severe back, neck, shoulder, arms and wrist pain during interrogation; numbness or loss of sensation in limbs also reported; the Israeli High Court of Justice (HCJ) ruled in 1999 that all “shabah” shackling procedures are unlawful since they violate rules for “reasonable and fair interrogation” and injure detainees’ dignity and well-being; ISA interrogators ignore the ruling with impunity;

    — cursing and humiliating strip searches of detainees as well as shouting, spitting in the face and other related abusive practices; detainees forced to strip naked and submit to body searches while being yelled at and mocked;

    — intimidations made to include threats of physical torture (called “military interrogation”), arrest of family members and destruction of homes;

    — using informants (“asafirs”) to get information that’s not abusive as such but is a very questionable method following preparatory “softening up.”

    B’Tselem then discussed “special” interrogation methods that mostly involve physical violence:

    — sleep deprivation for 30 to 40 hours during which detainees left painfully shackled in interrogation rooms; guards frequently awakened detainees between midnight and 5AM; various type oppressive noises used at night to interfere with sleep;

    — use of “dry” beatings that included punching, kicking all parts of the body, striking with rifle butts and face slapping; detainees hit with clubs, helmets and other objects; heads slammed against a wall, floor or hard surface; beatings inflicted when detainees’ hands were bound behind their back, and they were blindfolded; additional beatings during physical inspections with their hands cuffed;

    — painful binding with handcuffs or other devices tight enough to cut off blood flow circulation and cause swelling;

    — sharp twisting of the head forcefully and suddenly sideways or backwards;

    — forced “frog” crouching on tiptoes with cuffed hands behind the back accompanied by shoving or beating until detainees lost their balance and fell forward or backward; this method inflicts pain by increasing pressure on leg muscles and also hurts wrists after falling;

    — use of forced “banana” position that involves bending the back in a painful arch while the body is extended horizontally to the floor on a backless chair with arms and feet bound beneath it.

    Prison killings also occur like the October 22 one at the notorious Ketziot Detention Center in the Negev desert where 2300 Palestinians are held under very harsh conditions. It happened at 2AM when prison guards began searching tents and strip-searching inmates in a deliberate middle of the night provocation. Prisoners resisted and about 550 members of the Israeli Prison Service (IPS) Metsada riot dispersal unit responded with excessive force by beating them with plastic clubs and rifle butts as well as firing rubber-coated bullets, live ammunition, tear gas and stun grenades that set tents ablaze and caused as many as 250 inmate injuries and at least nine serious ones. During the assault, Mohammed Al Ashqar was killed after being shot in the head.

    The Palestinian Center for Human Rights (PCHR) maintains that prisoner abuse, repressive tactics and killing Palestinians is official Israeli policy that’s become even worse under current IPS director, Beni Kaniak. PCHR reports he instituted these punitive measures:

    — reductions in food and cleaning materials rations;

    — additional items prisoners forbidden to have;

    — confiscated prisoners’ money and prevented none sent from families to reach them;

    — widespread use of solitary confinement;

    — periodic movement of prisoners to new facilities to prevent any sense of stability;

    — repeated unannounced harsh late night raids like the October 22 one at Ketziot.

    These tactics and Palestinian detainee torture and abuse are condoned “under the auspices of the Israeli law enforcement system.” B’Tselem reported since 2001, Israel’s State Attorney’s Office got over 500 complaints of these practices but investigated none of them. Overall, instances of detainee mistreatment are rarely looked into and even fewer ever result in indictments. Further, despite its 1999 ruling, Israel’s High Court of Justice (HCJ) aids ISA interrogations by refusing to accept even one of hundreds of petitions brought before it for redress. HCJ also lets ISA conceal information from detainees that abusive orders were issued against them or that legal petitions were filed on their behalf. It further allows evidence obtained under torture to be used in criminal proceedings.

    B’Tselem and HaMoked are committed to ending Israel’s use of torture against Palestinian detainees. They cite the example of the US Army’s September, 2006 Field Manual for Human Intelligence Collector Operations as a proper guide to conducting interrogations even though authorized physical and psychological brutality became official administration policy under George Bush post-9/11. Nonetheless, this manual covers 18 interrogation methods experience showed work under varying situations and conditions. They range from establishing trust between interrogator and detainee to the use of ruses and psychological manipulation. In all cases, they don’t involve torture or other unlawful practices.

    It’s one thing to have rules and laws and another to abide by them. The US under George Bush condones and practices “the harshest interrogation techniques ever used by the Central Intelligence Agency” according to once secret Department of Justice (DOJ) legal opinions. It’s no different in Israel where the ISA systematically and routinely uses banned interrogation measures with impunity. B’Tselem and HaMoked want these practices ended and urge the Israeli government to halt them by enacting enforceable laws “strictly prohibiting torture and cruel, inhuman or degrading treatment” in accordance with international law.

    They further recommend every complaint of abuse and torture be investigated by an independent body, persons found to have broken the law to be prosecuted, and that “every detainee receives minimum humane conditions.” Israel claims to be a civilized state. It’s about time it acted like one.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMIcroEffect.com Mondays at noon US central time.

    The History of the Loose Change Phenomenon

    0

    Tim Sparke

    Introduction

    9/11 has clearly been the most important event of the 21st century, providing the basis for the US invasions of Afghanistan and Iraq and many other dimensions of the “war on terror.” There is, accordingly, no more important question than whether the official account of 9/11 is true. The main purpose of the “Loose Change” series of films is to explore various unanswered questions about 9/11 – questions that, by virtue of being unanswered by any official body, raise doubts about the truth of the official account.

    Background To Loose Change Final Cut

    “Loose Change I” and “Loose Change II” have been seen by millions, online, on TV and on DVD. In the words of Vanity Fair ‘Loose Change 2 is the world’s first internet blockbuster, and if it were released theatrically would pack out Movie Houses’.

    Over 40 countries broadcast Loose Change 2 in 2006 and an estimated 50 million people have now downloaded the film online.Given this unprecedented interest in the subject and clear demand amongst the world community, we have decided to produce Loose Change: Final Cut for online pay per view and theatrical release in 2007.

    By the very nature of this type of investigative film-making, flaws in the narrative become apparent when new information and new footage becomes available. By virtue of overcoming those flaws and incorporating this new material, “Loose Change: Final Cut” is significantly different from, and better than, the earlier versions incorporating 80% new material, and amazing new evidence, checked for accuracy by Dr David Ray Griffin the foremost 9/11 academic.

    Because of this, the film will thereby attract the millions who have seen Loose Change I and II as well as a new audience. LC: Final Cut is the authoritative 9/11 movie, a genre busting critical success which will re-define the power and the importance of investigative documentary — a story of the Emperor’s New Clothes for the 21st Century.

    It will alter the way in which mankind views the concept of democratic accountability, and questions the concepts of right and wrong, truth and fiction.

    Loose Change: Final Cut is the most explosive, and most important, political film of the decade. Delivered in a contemporary accessible style, set to a rhythmic dynamic sound track and using the latest graphics technology, its mission is to prove that the official story of 9/11 cannot be true.

    Narrative

    The film is broken into segments:

    Pre 9/11 investigations into the activities of the alleged hijackers by the FBI.

    The Pentagon attack

    The collapses of WTC 1 and 2

    What happened to Flight 93.

    The collapse of WTC 7.

    The 9/11 Commission: What it failed to report.

    Does the evidence suggest we have been hoaxed?

    The opening segment begins news reports, provided by main stream media, the hijackers were trained at US Military Institutions and that some of the hijackers were still alive after 9/11. It then progresses into the ‘Able Danger’ hearings, which contradict the official version of events concerning surveillance of Mohamed Atta and others, and to mainstream reports that the alleged hijackers had received training at US military bases.

    The film then examines the evidence that the US government had planned extensively for the attacks on the WTC and Pentagon despite vigorous denials of such activity and even sent FEMA (Federal Emergency Management Agency) to the WTC site the night before 9/11.

    The segment on the Pentagon provides visual, testimonial, and commonsense evidence showing the extremely unlikelihood of the official account, according to which the Pentagon was struck by AA 77 (a Boeing 757) under the control of al-Qaeda hijacker Hani Hanjour (who was known as a terrible pilot). This segment will reveal Secretary of Transportation Norman Mineta’s explosive testimony, before the 9/11 Commission, suggesting that Vice-President Cheney had issued a “stand-down” order regarding an aircraft approaching Washington DC shortly before the Pentagon was struck.

    The World Trade Centre segment provides various types of evidence – visual, testimonial, and scientific – against the official theory, which states that the collapses of WTC 1, and 2 were caused by externally caused damage plus fire. This evidence shows that these collapses must instead have been brought about in the same way that all other total collapses of steel-frame buildings have historically been brought about: by pre-planted explosives in the procedure known as controlled demolition. The evidence of this is corroborated by Professor Steven Jones and Gordon Ross. The narrative then attempts to account for what happened to flight 93. The official story does not square with the absence of debris at the alleged site. The film then shows how various versions of events were created and then discarded by the Bush Administration.

    The narrative then attempts to account for what happened to flight 93. The official story does not square with the absence of debris at the alleged site. The film then shows how various versions of events were created and then discarded by the Bush Administration to explain away what happened.

    The film’s investigation into the collapse of WTC 7 is perhaps the most perplexing in the whole 9/11 story. From the failure to provide an official explanation, to the miraculous announcement of the collapse of the building 30 minutes before it happened by BBC TV, Loose Change Final Cut demonstrates that whatever did happen to that building was nothing to do with hijacked planes and small fires. According to demolition expert Danny Jowenko, its destruction can only be accounted for by ‘controlled demolition’.

    The penultimate segment examines the work of the 9/11 commission. How it was staffed by Bush Insiders who had every reason to ignore testimony that didn’t support the official story, how it failed to give victims families the opportunity to question witnesses, and how it failed to put George Bush on the stand on oath in public. He testified in secret, there was no transcription of his answers offered, all notes were subject to White House review, and Dick Cheney was with him to make sure he kept to the agreed script.

    To conclude, Loose Change Final Cut, asks whether on the basis of the evidence presented, whether 19 Arab hijackers were the sole perpetrators of the most significant terrorist attack in history or have we been lied to by a corrupt government and the massmedia?

    The film then shows exactly what has happened post 9/11

    — two invasions, one of which was based upon a lie, the suspension of Habeus Corpus, the 13th Century act preventing the state from unlawfully imprisoning people without going in front of a judge, the creation of the culture of fear, the bankrupting of the American nation.

    We end with a call to action asking people to demand a new truly independent investigation into 9/11.

    America’s Most Mobbed Up Election

    0

    SAM SMITH

    IF THE POLLS don’t shift, we are facing an extraordinary election between two presidential candidates who have unprecedented past connections with a seamy underworld.

    This is not to say that we haven’t had individual candidates with mob or similar ties before. Harry Truman rose in the corrupt politics of Kansas City; Lyndon Johnson was a skilled election rigger, and John F Kennedy, it is likely, won office thanks to the Mafia friends of his father.

    But in each of these cases, there was some reasonable expectation that the candidate would put away churlish things once in office. And, for the most part, they did, save some not insignificant falls from grace such as JFK using the mob to further his disastrous Cuban policy or LBJ aiding the heroin trade to further his disastrous SE Asian policy.

    But every administration since Kennedy – with the notable exception of Jimmy Carter and Gerald Ford – has been substantially sullied by mob-like activities. As I wrote in the Great American Political Repair Manual ten years ago:

    “There is a world of difference between simple human error and premeditated malevolence. One of the most remarkable things about American politics over the past thirty years is how often the latter has intruded on the normal workings of our democracy. Many of these incidents have been poorly reported or only briefly covered and then forgotten. The cumulative story has been almost totally ignored.

    “We need not finally determine who killed JFK and for what reasons to recognize a more generic fact: our politics has been repeatedly interrupted and distorted by assassins, mobs, rogue intelligence agents and agencies, freelance conspirators, drug runners, massive corruption, illegal financial manipulation and off-the-shelf government operations. . .

    “These incidents are both a cause and a reflection of the deterioration of American democracy. Transforming our politics calls for neither paranoia nor fatalism on this score, but it does require inoculating the body politic against such occurrences.”

    What we are facing now, however, is worse. With no little help from Bill Clinton and George W. Bush, mob politics is no longer merely an intrusion on our public affairs, it has become a standard of normalcy. As I have noted before, we all live in a Mafia neighborhood now.

    Which is why the two must corrupt candidates are leading the race for the White House.

    If this sounds like an exaggeration, consider this: both Giuliani and Hillary Clinton strongly recommended that the recently indicted Bernie Kerick be placed in charge of protecting the basic safety of all Americans as head of Homeland Security.

    This is the sort of stuff you used to see only in cheap gangster movies. But now it is so normal that the media mentions it only in passing if at all.

    Or consider this: what other Democratic or Republican candidates come even close to Clinton or Giuliani in their lack of integrity and corrupt past. Where is Edwards’ or McCain’s Bernie Kerick?

    What other candidate in either party had a father and an uncle in the mob (like Giuliani) or is married to a man (as Hillary Clinton is) whose uncle-mentor was, according to FBI and local police sources, tied to the New Orleans mob and whose mother hung out with Mafia types at the Hot Springs racetrack, or (like both Clintons) were close pals or partners of a number of eventually criminals like the Jim McDougal, Dan Lasater, Webster Hubbell and Peter Paul.

    What other candidates other than Clinton had among their friends a convicted drug distributor like Lasater who supplied cocaine to their brother-in-law?

    What other candidates other than Clinton had a friend like Rich who was are on the FBI’s most wanted list for 20 years until their spouse pardoned him?

    There are several reasons to ignore such a past:

    – It happened a long time ago and things have really changed.
    – One isn’t responsible for ones’ relatives and the candidate clearly reflects different values.
    – One has done enough good to make these matters fade.
    – There isn’t anyone better running.

    None of these reasons apply to either Giuliani or Clinton. There isn’t a single ground – save personal opinion – that distinguishes these candidates as more moral, wise or imaginative than their competitors. Neither is there any hint that either has matured in such values.

    There is, however, one important difference between the two and their competitors. If one is running a hedge fund, large corporation or – for some other less attractive reason – seeking a candidate you can fund in return for some deals, Giuliani or Clinton are clearly your choices.

    In short, they are the ones who would be most easily manipulated by those up to no good.

    That’s what mob politics is all about. The contributions don’t go to the best candidates but the ones who are most easily bought. This is why rejecting public campaign financing is so costly: we pay far more in public funds without it. It just happens after the election rather than before – and the big campaign contributors get a profit out of it to boot.

    Sadly, the media – for reasons both of convenience and cowardice – falls for this racket and puts a polite sheen on what is simply a national version of what we used to associate with the worst urban machines. Reporters and commentators run from any suggestion that what is going on isn’t a civic textbook prescribed event. This is a lie and a cruel hoax played on the American public. And a major reason why this looks like it could be our most mobbed up election.

    Gordon Brown threatens Iran’s oil interests

    0

    Gordon Brown threatens Iran’s oil interests unless it curbs nuclear ambition

    Gordon Brown last night proposed a worldwide ban on companies developing Iran’s oil and gas fields if it failed to curb its nuclear ambitions.

    He promised to take the lead in seeking tougher penalties through the United Nations and the European Union as Britain and the United States seek to increase the pressure on Tehran.

    In his first major speech on foreign policy the Prime Minister said that Iran had a choice – confrontation with the international community and stringent sanctions against it; or dropping its nuclear plans, ending support for terrorism and having a transformed relationship with the world.

    Unless imminent reports from the EU and the International Atomic Energy Agency suggested movement from Iran, there would be stronger sanctions, including on oil and gas investment and the financial sector. “Iran should be in no doubt about our seriousness of purpose,” he said.

    Although Mr Brown does not rule out military action, and spoke last night about the occasional need for “hard-headed intervention”, he clearly believes that the diplomatic route should be followed. Wearing white tie for the first time at a City event, he set out what he called Britain’s “agenda for a hard-headed internationalism”.

    Speaking at the Lord Mayor’s Banquet at Guildhall, Mr Brown also:

    – Told America that it was Britain’s most important bilateral relation. “I have no truck with anti-Americanism in Britain or elsewhere,” he said;

    – Urged President Musharraf of Pakistan to restore the Constitution, release all political prisoners and step down as Chief of Army Staff;

    – Proposed reform of the big international institutions, including the UN, the G8, the International Monetary Fund and the World Bank;

    – Called for an international standby civilian force, including police and judges, to help to rebuild failed states, with reconstruction and development given equal weight with peacekeeping in international bodies.

    Mr Brown said: “My approach is hard-headed internationalism: internationalist because global challenges need global solutions and nations must co-operate across borders, often with hard-headed intervention, to give expression to our shared interests and shared values.”In an apparent reassurance to the US after ministerial criticism of President Bush, he said that Britain’s partnerships were not in competition with each other but “mutually reinforcing”. He said: “It is no secret that I am a life-long admirer of America . . . and it is good for Britain, Europe and the wider world that today France and Germany and the EU are building stronger relationships with America.”

    In a further reference to Iran, Mr Brown proposed that the active providers as well as the potential users of nuclear materials should be held to account. He suggested agreed access to a nuclear fuel bank to help non-nuclear states to acquire the new sources of energy they needed. But the offer would be made only if those countries renounced nuclear weapons.

    He rejected isolationism and said that it was possible to contemplate a global society that empowered people. “We cannot any longer escape the consequences of our interdependence. The old distinction between ‘over there’ and ‘over here’ does not make sense of this interdependent world.”

    Turning to Pakistan, Mr Brown said: “We call on President Musharraf of Pakistan to restore the Constitution and implement the necessary conditions to guarantee free and fair elections on schedule in January.”

    Don McKinnon, the Commonwealth Secretary-General, last night threatened to suspend Pakistan from the 53-member group, saying that it had “seriously violated the Commonwealth’s fundamental values”. He called for the resignation of Mr Musharraf as army chief, the release of political detainees, the removal of press restrictions, a move towards elections and restoration of the Constitution.

    The Pakistan High Commission in London said that “decisions regarding the transition will be taken in accordance with Pakistan’s national interests and requirements, not deadlines imposed from outside”.

    More Gitmo flights over Spain in 2007

    0

    MADRID: Nearly 50 flights to or from the controversial US “war on terror” camp at Guantanamo Bay used Spanish air space between 2002 and 2007 and 11 landed in Spain, the El Pais daily reported Monday.

    El Pais cited figures supplied by the airport management body AENA, part of the transport ministry, to Madrid-based judge Ismael Moreno. Moreno is investigating at least 10 CIA-chartered flights which landed in the Balearic islands between January 2004 and January 2005 and which are suspected of having been used for the CIA’s “rendition” strategy.

    This involves flying terrorist suspects through European states to detention in third countries. Amid allegations of the use of torture, the US treatment of the suspects has been widely criticised. The US administration insists that the “rendition” programme is legal however. afp

    Tell the truth about cannabis

    1

    Tell the truth about cannabis and maybe we’ll get somewhere

    Is there any wonder at all that everything which surrounds cannabis information-wise, is mixed up and confused?

    To illustrate this lets take a look at some news published this week through the worlds press.

    Cannabis far more toxic to the adolescent brain
    Just yesterday, a report was published by ‘The Independent’ newspaper in Ireland, as anti-cannabis an organisation as you’ll ever find, in which the publication loudly proclaimed that cannabis is far more toxic to the adolescent brain, than it is to a flaky old 41 year old brain such as mine.

    This story is nothing new in fairness and the majority of the anti-cannabis parade have been banging this particular drum for the majority of 2007. But does the story hold any water?

    Lets face it if our young people are to make a balanced judgement on the risks involved with using cannabis, its likely that the reports they read in newspapers are going to play a big part in that decision making process. Its only fair then, that we expect these newspapers to tell the truth, and without the added embelishments necessary to sell more newspapers.

    Another New Study
    “Studies into cannabis, running in tandem, point to a difference in the way the brain operates for cannabis users and non-cannabis users.”

    No sh*t sherlock?

    Its called getting stoned and I’m sure when an alcohol abuser gets drunk his or her brain works a little differently to when they are sober. But the research also suggests that the drug is more toxic to youngsters. A point I would like to take issue with.

    I mean..toxic? Is that the right word to use in this instance?

    Cannabis has been in the service of mankind for over 10,000 years in one guise or another, and whilst I have heard many descriptives used when communicating on the topic, toxic isn’t one that would automatically spring to mind.

    To quote this new report, “Dr Hugh Garavan, who is leading one of the studies, is examining the prefrontal cortex which is used for decision making, and the hippocampus which is used for memory”.

    I have to say at this stage my own decision making pre-frontal cortex is popping and jumping as it comes up with the decision never to buy a newspaper which has The Independent written on the front page but I digress..

    “We are finding differences with cannabis users. The hippocampus is being driven to work harder, perhaps to overcompensate for the drug.”

    Memory loss, psychosis and paranoia are some of the symptoms that might be linked to these skewed brain pictures.

    Dr Garavan added that the hippocampus is one of the last regions to develop properly.

    “Adolescents are more likely to experiment but their brains may not yet be mature.”

    So let me get this right Dr Garavan. The Hippocampus in adolescents is one of the last regions in the brain to develop, and therefore could be damaged permanently?

    Ok I think I’m getting the gist.

    ..or so I thought
    The following day, November 6th, another news report, sourced in Switzerland reads, “Teenagers Who Smoke Marijuana But Not Tobacco Are Different From Other Teen Groups”.

    Get this. A Swiss study suggests that teens who use only cannabis appear to function better than those who also use tobacco, and are more socially driven and have no more psychosocial problems than those who abstain from both substances.

    “The gateway theory hypothesizes that the use of legal drugs (tobacco and alcohol) is the previous step to cannabis consumption,” the authors write. “However, recent research also indicates that cannabis use may precede or be simultaneous to tobacco use and that, in fact, its use may reinforce cigarette smoking or lead to nicotine addiction independently of smoking status.”

    So lets just get this straight. This new report tells us that cannabis use could lead to nicotine addiction in otherwise socially well rounded young people?

    From a personal point of view I can see how this works.

    Not so fast, NicoTine
    I’m sure you would agree that the steps which have been taken to shield our kids from tobacco products is only now starting to pay dividends.

    It wasn’t all that long ago that no matter which TV channel you decided to watch, you were force fed pictures of your favourite rock stars, race drivers, actors etc, influential people in the eyes of the Great British youth, all of whom would be smoking as they were filmed doing their thing.

    Coronation Street, and the old actors and actresses from days gone by, who played parts such as Bet Lynch, Stan and Hilda Ogden, Mike Baldwin, Deidre Barlow etc, would often be seen puffing on a cigarette as they acted out their scene.

    Back when Murray Walker was the King of Formula 1, every single race car on the track, was emblazened with cigarette manufacturers logo’s. The all important sponsorship deals which no race team could operate without, and Guns & Roses rock legend Slash was never without a cigarette hanging from his mouth as he killed his latest guitar solo stone dead.

    These days of course things are very different.

    But would that be the case if tobacco was an outlawed, underground substance like cannabis?

    No of course it wouldn’t because black market tobacco use would be as rife as cannabis use is today.

    If we wish to educate our young people to the real risks involved with cannabis use, as well as teaching an attitude of tolerance, knowing your limits etc, we need to guarantee the information they are exposed to is truthful and factual.

    Young people today are more in control of the information they are exposed to than ever before.

    By feeding them with mis-guided information its the fastest way to get them to slam the door right in FRANK’s face and with figures showing 50% of our 15-24 year olds using cannabis regularly, its time to face facts.

    Prohibition doesn’t work. Its time for change.

    Join us and help make it happen.

    http://cannazine.co.uk

    9/11 Seminar

    3

    On 25th November 2007, the Changing Times organisation, based in Lewes, will
    be holding a Sunday afternoon seminar to give a focused look at the issues
    surrounding doubts over the official story of 9/11.

    This event is designed to introduce people to these issues in a clear and
    accessible way, or act as a refresher for those already drawn to the 9/11
    truth campaigning, which is now growing massively around the world.

    Andy Thomas of Changing Times says: “There will be NO propaganda or
    political bias, just an intensive examination of the evidence which leads
    people to doubt the official line on what happened that fateful day. It
    seems clear that 9/11 has been used to justify a global agenda of aggression
    and oppression, and many feel it was engineered to do exactly that. This
    event will be an ideal opportunity for those who may be on the fringes of
    concern about 9/11 and want to know more.”

    Thomas continues: “Digging for the truth of what really happened on 9/11 may
    be the keystone to pulling the rug from beneath a worrying global agenda.
    It is increasingly clear that the official story of what happened that day
    simply cannot be correct. Yet from it a climate of fear has been created,
    destroying liberty and democracy as a result. Spreading awareness of the
    issues surrounding the actual events of that day may help encourage a proper
    investigation and expose the growing attack on our freedom of speech and
    movement.”

    This event will be taking place at the Lewes Subud Centre, Station Street,
    Lewes, on Sunday 25 November 2007 between 1.45pm-6.00pm. Admission £5.
    Numbers are limited and attenders should contact Changing Times in advance
    if they want to come, by emailing info@changingtimes.org.uk

    9/11 TRUTH: A BEGINNER’S GUIDE
    A Sunday afternoon seminar
    Presented by ANDY THOMAS and the Changing Times team

    Sunday 25 NOVEMBER 2007, at:

    Lewes Subud Centre
    26a Station Street
    Lewes
    East Sussex
    BN7 2DB

    TIME: 1.45pm – 6.00pm

    SCHEDULE:
    1.30pm Doors open
    1.45pm Presentation, followed by discussion
    4.00pm Tea break
    4.30pm Discussion and showing of a 9/11 DVD
    6.00pm Close

    SYNOPSIS:
    Why do so many now question the official account of the tragic events of
    9/11? The campaign to reveal the hidden details of that pivotal day and the
    ‘war on terror’ that followed is one of the fastest-growing global truth
    movements. What are the issues raised by the 9/11 questioners and how
    convincing are they? Andy Thomas and the Changing Times team investigate
    the pros and cons of this modern Pandora’s Box, and look in detail at the
    evidence and controversial arguments surrounding the September 11th attacks.

    Spy Cameras in Bins

    0

    By Julian Whittle

    CARLISLE City Council is to introduce portable spy cameras to catch fly tippers.

    Council chiefs report a 200 per cent increase in illegal fly tipping since the city switched to fortnightly wheelie-bin collections in the spring.

    They say that, up to now, staff have taken a softly-softly approach to households who leave out too much rubbish.

    But from this week, starting in St Aidan’s ward, people who put out too much waste, or put it out too early, can expect a £50 fixed-penalty fine.

    Councillor Ray Bloxham, the executive member responsible, said: “The big problem we’ve had has been people dumping sacks in back lanes.

    “There are also people who put out waste earlier than the day of collection.”

    The spy cameras have been borrowed from the Environment Agency and should be in use later this month.

    They are likely to be deployed first in so-called fly-tipping “hot spots” – Botchergate east, Botcherby, Aglionby Street, Warwick Square and Dowbeck Road.

    A report says that students and migrant workers are among the worst offenders.

    The council also has plans to extend a pilot scheme for the 6,794 mainly-terraced homes not suited to wheelie-bins. They are given purple sacks, which are collected weekly.

    Under the pilot scheme in Garden Street, Orchard Street, Brook Street and London Road, households leave sacks at their front door rather than in the lanes at the back.

    Council officers have also suggested making a £10 charge for the bulky-items collection service, currently free. This covers removal of electrical goods, sofas, mattresses and other large items.

    A £10 charge should bring the council £120,000 a year.

    Mr Bloxham, however, said he opposed a charge for fear it would encourage fly tipping.

    A final decision will be taken in December.

    Overall, the council says fortnightly collections have been a success.

    The volume of household waste sent to landfill has fallen by 28 per cent and the proportion of waste recycled is at a record high of 52.2 per cent.

    The amount of waste collected at Rome Street tip has also fallen.

    The switchover involved delivery of 45,000 wheeled bin, 3,500 greenboxes and 60,000 green sacks for recycling.

    There are plans to extend recycling schemes and set up 20 recycling points to serve rural areas where kerbside collections are not viable.

    Despite the magnitude of the change, the council received only 65 formal complaints. Environmental health officers report no increase in the rat population.

    Mr Bloxham added: “We haven’t had the problems experienced by other local authorities who’ve moved to fortnightly waste collections.

    “That’s because we introduced kerbside recycling collections at the same time.”

    Police refuse to probe one in six crimes

    0

    Police in Lincolnshire refused to investigate one in six crimes last year, it has been revealed.

    Figures released under the Freedom of Information Act show 9,003 crimes were “screened out” as unsolvable within hours of being reported to Lincolnshire Police.

    Last year 55,277 crimes were reported to the county’s force, meaning 16 per cent – or one in six – were not investigated.

    From the 12 English and Scottish forces that responded to the Freedom of Information request, it was revealed that 788,000 crimes were screened out last year from a total of 2,029,000 recorded offences – a rate of 39 per cent.

    The findings suggest that out of six million offences reported to forces in the UK last year, around 2.3 million were not investigated.

    When crimes are screened out no officer visits the scene of the crime and no attempt is made to catch the culprit.

    Even robberies and violent crimes can be screened out, while other cases involve fraud, theft and vandalism.

    In some areas, forces have adopted an official policy not to investigate non-residential burglaries, criminal damage under £1,000 or low level harassment – regardless of solvability.

    Lincolnshire Police said screening out was necessary in order to make best use of limited resources.

    Source

    ID Cards: Why I am prepared to break the law

    0

    By Philip Johnston

    Like most readers of this newspaper, I consider myself to be a law-abiding citizen who invariably accepts a decision of Parliament as the law of the land, however barmy or against my personal interests, because it has been democratically arrived at. But there are two matters on which I would be ready to take a stand and accept the consequences.

    The first is that I will refuse to register on the Government’s ID card database.

    The second is that I will withhold part of my taxes if Parliament agrees to finance political parties out of state funds.

    On the issue of ID cards, I would find myself in the dock with, among many others, Shirley Williams, Nick Clegg and Chris Huhne, three leading Liberal Democrats who have said they will refuse to co-operate with the scheme because it is an unwarranted infringement of liberty.

    On the second, I can count on little support from party politicians since it suits them to be funded by the taxpayer.

    There would be penalties for breaking the law. But what would they be, exactly? When the ID Card Act was going through Parliament, the Government was careful not to make imprisonment a penalty for non-registration. In fact, it originally proposed to fine people £2,000 for failing to register but this was taken out of the Bill.

    Now, the only penalty – civil, not criminal – is a £1,000 fine for failing to notify the authorities of changes in circumstances, such as a new address or marriage.

    Lady Williams, a former Cabinet minister, said on BBC’s Any Questions? at the weekend that she would go to prison rather than carry an ID card; but the Government has been cleverer than that.

    It foresaw the possibility of millions of ID martyrs and will not give them – us – that satisfaction.

    The discussion on Any Questions? was predicated upon a mistaken belief that this law has still to be passed and could yet be abandoned by Gordon Brown.

    But it has been on the Statute Book for a year.

    It is true that another Act will be needed to make ID cards a universal requirement.

    However, from next year, they will be compulsory for all non-UK nationals staying longer than three months and, from the following year, they will be automatically issued to UK citizens on renewal of a passport.

    When one group has them, ID registration must either be extended to everyone or scrapped, otherwise we would have two classes of citizen.

    From 2009, if you want a passport, you will be entered on to the ID register.

    There is no choice. It will not, however, be a legal requirement to carry the ID card or to show it to a police officer in the street. Until such time as registration is made mandatory for everybody – which will not be in this parliament – the principal penalty for refusing to co-operate is that you will not be able to travel abroad.

    What an extraordinary business. The Government would stop us leaving these shores if we refuse to sign up to its wretched ID database.

    It so happens that there is an alternative open to me because I was born in Northern Ireland and so am entitled to an Irish passport. Yet, since I am British, I would not fall into the foreign national ID card category either.

    When my passport comes up for renewal in a few years’ time, to avoid being a number on the ID database I shall become Irish – unless they introduce one as well.

    More problematic will be how to avoid giving money to political parties for their campaigning.

    Many people already donate to parties they do not support, for instance trade unionists who vote Conservative or Liberal Democrat but contribute to a political fund which is then handed over to the Labour Party.

    Most of us are helping, indirectly, to finance Labour through the £10 million taxpayer-funded trade union ”modernisation” grant introduced two years ago and described by Opposition MPs as a ”bung” to the Government’s paymasters which is then recycled to the party.

    We all pay, too, for the legitimate political activities of Opposition parties through the Short money system used to run their Westminster operations; and new £10,000 communications allowances for MPs have also been used for partisan leafleting.

    We are already forking out for political campaigning, even if the mechanisms are blurred.

    But what if this was formalised into transparent state support for political parties?

    Such an idea was recently put forward during all-party talks on political funding.

    A draft agreement prepared by Sir Hayden Phillips, the former Whitehall mandarin chairing the discussions, suggested a system whereby a voluntary £10 donation from an individual would be matched by £10 of taxpayers’ money.

    Parties would also receive 40p for every vote they received at general elections.

    These talks also considered imposing a £50,000 cap on donations and a statutory limit on expenditure.

    But they collapsed amid acrimony and recrimination.

    The Conservatives blamed Labour for refusing to countenance any cap on union donations; Labour said the Tories walked away from a possible deal because they wanted to keep Lord Ashcroft’s money flowing into marginal seats.

    It is typical that these negotiations should founder on the rocks of self-interest, rather than because one or other party was unhappy at the prospect of state funding.

    The arrogant assumption that the taxpayer should be fleeced further because the parties spend too much and are having trouble raising enough cash is breathtaking.

    Furthermore, the notion that state support underpins political integrity is simply not sustained by the evidence.

    If anything, public funding of political parties leads to greater venality, not less, as is evident from countries like Italy or France where campaigning is far more dependent on the taxpayer.

    In any case, why should public funds reinforce the political hegemony of a few extant political parties? Who says Labour or the Conservatives have a right to exist that requires support from the taxpayer?

    They should spend within their means or go out of business.

    The alternative, that I should be required to help finance any party that will force me to sign up to an ID card scheme, beggars belief.

    Media is ignoring Ron Paul

    0

    It is of great concern to me that our media have the power to manipulate how we perceive current events. If only the media were a reliable source for information, unfortunately they’re not. How do I know this? Take, for example, the story about the state Republicans’ straw poll in Bismarck Oct. 26. Mitt Romney was announced the winner. The only candidate who deserves the Republican nomination is Congressman Ron Paul, who received 4 percent of the vote in the poll, tying with Mike Huckabee. What truly upset me was when I watched KFYR that night and listened to the report about the event, they showed the percentages for each of the candidates but omitted Paul’s name. The media tried alluding that Paul didn’t receive any votes. However, he was the only candidate who received votes but whose votes were not reported. Why?

    Paul has gathered most of his support through the Internet, and the media have tried to ignore him. But Paul has won more straw polls than any other candidate. He appeals to the most important American citizens, the youth. Now, before the elderly population of North Dakota starts throwing their fleischkuekle and walkers at me, let me just say that the reason the youth are the most important people in any campaign is because they represent the future.

    Paul supports the Constitution and our rights. In America, we support freedom and equality – that is, if you’re not a white male. We want fair elections and the only way we can have this is if we quit eating the media’s biased stuff.

    In closing, if people want communism, they should vote for Hillary Clinton. If fascism, vote for Rudy Giuliani. If more of the same, vote for Fred Thompson. Finally, if they want a president who stands for freedom, is a champion of the Constitution and who is consistent when he votes, then America should cast its vote for Ron Paul.

    7/7 Ripple Effect

    1

    Regarding the 7/7/2005 terrorist attacks in London, let us look at the facts, and what we were told, and compare them. Then, using Ockham’s Razor and common-sense, let us see what conclusions are to be drawn, so we can all understand what most likely really did happen that day. 

    Secrets of Natural Energy

    0

    The Sands Arts Centre (downstairs room) 7.30 p.m.

    Tuesday November 20th .

    To continue the successful evening which was held in September, we have a variety of speakers on the subject of ‘Secrets of Natural Energy.’

     

    Update by Derek Ellis from Stavely-in-Cartmel who is at present working on the development of a generator powered by water. He is also working on water powered vehicle technology.

     

    Presentation by John Blacker of Hest Bank MSc IMI, with film footage of American born Stanley Meyer who discovered the amazing release of power from water by passing a sound frequency through it

     

    Presentation by David Boyle of Blackpool who has formed a company called ‘Solar Steel’ and this technique uses the power formed by expansion and contraction of metal using the sun.

     

    Presentation by Roy Watkins who co-owns Ulverston Natural Health Centre

    and who has been following a Dublin company ‘Steorn’s’ claim that revolving magnets can produce free, clean and constant energy.

     

    As usual, the presentations will be followed by discussion and planning for future events.

     

    There is free admission and donations are welcome. Any monies collected will help fund speakers’ expenses and our chosen worthy cause which is Elizabeth Beckett of Alston Cumbria.

    Loose Change Final Cut – The Evidence

    0

    Tim Sparke

    The Evidence That What Really Happened At 9/11 Has Been Covered Up: As Shown In Loose Change Final Cut.

    The evidence collated in the film, when viewed in its totality now proves beyond reasonable doubt that the official story of 9/11 cannot be true. The film includes the allegations that:

    1) At least 6 of the alleged named 9/11 hijackers match the names of 6 Arabs who were trained at US military bases. We have obtained letters under the US Freedom of Information act showing this. In addition, two of the alleged named hi-jackers shared a home with an FBI informant.

    2) That US agents had been tailing the hi-jackers prior to 9/11 and made three attempts to inform the FBI – each time the meetings were cancelled. The US government denies any foreknowledge of the identities of the hi-jackers. The film proves that the Able Danger investigation did collate significant information regarding the activities of the alleged hijackers in the months prior to 9/11 — that much of this material was destroyed, but some of it still exists.

    3) That the man who according to the FBI and the Wall Street Journal funded 9/11, and sent Mohammad Atta $100,000, was none other than the head of the Pakistan Secret Service. He was meeting with key US government officials on the morning of 9/11. He ‘retired’ one month after his meetings.

    4) That Dick Cheney was warned that a plane was going to hit the Pentagon. That officials requested permission to shoot it down and he refused to give that permission, effectively condemning 120 US patriots to be killed. This is backed up by testimony we have obtained by Norman Mineta, US transportation secretary at the time of 9/11. This video evidence was presented to the 9/11 commission but was conveniently ‘lost’. We have obtained his testimony as reported to the 9/11 commission, and we have separately interviewed Mr Mineta who re-confirms his version of events.

    5) That the part of the building which was hit at the Pentagon was, according to Donald Rumsfeld investigating a missing a possible 2 trillion dollars….we have film of Rumsfeld confirming the investigation into the possible missing 2 trillion, shot the day before 9/11 on 10th September 2001.

    6) Expert testimony confirming that building 7, the third building which imploded on the afternoon of 9/11, could only have been brought down by controlled demolition – there is no other plausible explanation.

    7) Expert testimony from Mechanical Engineer Gordon Ross confirming: ‘The official story of how the twin towers collapsed defeats two laws of physics’. His peer reviewed paper has not been refuted by any official US government agencies.

    The film also show’s utterly damming evidence regarding how the Bush Administration forced the EPA to change the air quality warnings about the safety of breathing in toxic fumes from the dust that covered Manhattan in the days after 9/11 condemning thousands to a slow death.

    This is just some of the remarkable evidence set out in the film.
    The film has been fact checked for accuracy by Dr David Ray Griffin and we can source every claim made.

    ‘I feared I’d end up dead in the woods like Dr Kelly’

    0

    ‘I feared I’d end up dead in the woods like Dr Kelly,’ says biological warfare expert who criticised Britain and U.S.

    By GLEN OWEN and OLIVER WADESON

     An EU expert on biological warfare has told how she fears ending up ‘dead in the woods’ like scientist Dr David Kelly after an alleged campaign of intimidation by members of MI6 and the CIA.
    Jill Dekker, a bio-defence expert based in Brussels, has reported a string of sinister incidents — including the parking of a hearse outside her house — after making a speech critical of British and American policy in the Middle East.

    Her claims are included in a new book by Liberal Democrat MP Norman Baker which argues that Dr Kelly was murdered to silence his criticism of the grounds for going to war in Iraq.

    American-born Dr Dekker has been billed at security conferences as the director of the ‘public health preparedness programme’ at the European Homeland Security Association (EHSA), a security think tank.

    She was placed under the protection of the Belgian government after reporting a series of sinister incidents earlier this year.

    The Belgians confirm that they mounted a three-month protection operation earlier this year for Dr Dekker, who has advised the European Commission on bio-terrorism issues, but refuse to be drawn on the extent to which her fears were wellfounded or why the protection was eventually lifted.

    The EHSA bears many of the hallmarks of a ‘front’ organisation for espionage activities, although Dr Dekker refuses to say anything about it except that it answers to the French government.

    Established in 2004, it holds workshops and conferences, and claims partnerships with a number of security-based thinktanks around the world.

    It appears to exist only in cyberspace, with its staff, including its president, French career diplomat Richard Narich, only contactable by email. Dr Dekker is not listed on the EHSA website and the organisation was yesterday not responding to any calls.

    Dr Dekker says the ‘intimidation’ against her started in March, as she was flying to Florida to give a speech on Syria’s weapons programme to an intelligence summit. She says she was subjected to a ‘heavy-handed’ interrogation by a man she suspects of being a British intelligence operative.

    She believes the speech made her powerful enemies because she argued that billions of dollars spent by the US government to develop a smallpox vaccine has been wasted because scientists — including British experts — have used a different viral strain to the one she believes is being developed in Damascus.

    Scroll down for more…

    ‘Mysterious’: The hearse which Jill Dekker followed and photographed

    If this is true, it means governments would have no way of protecting the public against the use of the virus by terrorists or rogue states.

    She also believes that Iraq did have a biological weapons capacity which was all shipped to Syria before the outbreak of war.

    She argues this was known, but was concealed from the public because the real purpose of the war was not to target weapons of mass destruction but to topple Saddam Hussein and gain a strategic foothold in the region.

    When she returned to her home in Belgium after the speech she said she was subjected to an overt campaign of surveillance and harassment, including being continuously followed on foot and having cars parked outside her house with the headlights on.

    On one occasion, she says she found a hearse parked outside her house with the drivers ‘staring straight ahead.’ When she approached, it sped off and she pursued it, taking photographs as evidence.

    After being told that Mr Baker was writing a book about the circumstances surrounding Dr Kelly’s death, she sent him an email on March 23 designed, she says, to highlight the risk she felt she was under.

    Dr David Kelly, the UK’s leading weapons inspector in Iraq, was found dead in 2003

    ‘I’ve informed all my diplomatic friends that not only am I not suicidal, I am looking forward to my children growing up and . . . also my great career,’ she wrote. ‘Much like other people who suddenly were found dead in woods.’A week later, she wrote: ‘The US State Department and their surrogates… continue to intimidate me and my family — every day they are outside my home, they tail me 24/7 — I believe they could try to kill me so I don’t reveal any more of my research on Syrian biological weapons.’

    In a third email in April, she wrote: ‘I refuse to be intimidated by anyone who uses the tactics they used — so unprofessional even people inside can’t believe how they have acted here — it’s like Johnny English [the 2003 spoof spy film starring Rowan Atkinson as an incompetent British agent], really so amateurish. Our services just aren’t what they used to be.’

    It is difficult to establish whether there is any truth to Dr Dekker’s claims of harassment, as she refuses to disclose the precise location of her home 90 minutes drive from Brussels for ‘security reasons’.

    She says the Belgian government extended its protection to her three months ago by making her a Belgian citizen, and is investigating her claims through its public prosecutor’s office. The Government confirms that she is now a Belgian national.

    Dr Dekker has given a detailed account to The Mail on Sunday of the alleged campaign of intimidation, which she believes was led by American and British intelligence.

    She tells how she was subjected to an ‘amateurish’ interrogation by the British man on the plane to Florida.

    ‘The plane was absolutely packed, and there was just one seat next to me that was empty. The plane was held up to let the final passenger on board,’ she said.

    ‘He then started asking me questions regarding my occupation, quite sensitive things about Nato and the like, to the point that I turned and said to him, ‘OK, go down the list’.

    ‘He then backed off but continued throughout the flight to be intrusive. He had this whole cover story about why he lived in Holland, right down to financial documents he showed me.

    He asked me right out of the blue about Isotopes — now there’s a word you don’t hear everyday on a transatlantic flight.’

    When she returned to Belgium after the conference she says was followed relentlessly on foot and by car, and had vehicles parked outside her house — often with darkened windows and their headlights fullon in broad daylight.

    Of her encounter with the mystery ‘hearse’, she said: ‘No one in our neighbourhood had died and the agents sitting in the front wouldn’t make any eye contact, just stared straight ahead.

    ‘I was pretty ticked off so I decided to pull my car out and follow them. They took off so fast — they must have been driving at around 100 kph through the countryside. Then they followed me the next day with this hearse with Belgian plates all the way home.’

    She says that after ‘making a few calls’, she was placed under the protection of the local police. The ‘campaign’ then stopped, having lasted just over a month.

    ‘It was unbelievable to me that I had to ask another government for protection against my own,’ she said. She kept a daily ‘harassment’ diary, which she has handed to the Belgian authorities.

    Dr Dekker, who says she met David Kelly before the Iraq war at Wilton Park, a countryside conference centre used by the Foreign Office, agrees with Mr Baker’s conclusion that he was murdered.

    Dr Kelly, the UK’s leading weapons inspector in Iraq, was found dead in woods close to his Oxfordshire home in 2003, after apparently committing suicide.

    He had been highly critical of the intelligence used to justify the invasion of Iraq, and in particular the infamous assertion that Saddam had weapons of mass destruction which he could deploy at 45 minutes notice.

    Speculation about potential culprits who might have had a motive to silence him has ranged from ‘special ops’ units of the intelligence services to expatriate Iraqi opponents of Saddam.

    Mr Baker writes in his book The Strange Death of David Kelly, which is published tomorrow: ‘I have met Dr Dekker on two occasions and had a number of long exchanges with her. She does not strike me as the sort either who would frighten easily, or who would ginger up her story for effect.

    ‘Rather, she is a somewhat hardnosed, intelligent and knowledgeable woman who has succeeded well in a profession where men predominate. I therefore took it seriously when she emailed me.’

    Dr Dekker emerged from the shadows of what she says has been a 20-year career as a scientist in 2005, when internet records show that she was a ‘bio-defence consultant’ for the Brussels-based thinktank New Defence Agenda.

    The organisation, which bills itself as ‘platform for discussing Nato and EU defence and security issues’, names former Hong Kong Governor Chris Patten and former Nato secretary general Lord Robertson among its patrons.

    But critics have called it the arms industry’s ‘weapon of mass disinformation’ because of the partnerships it has established with companies such as BAe Systems, Lockheed Martin and Thales.

    The International Intelligence Summit, which she addressed in Florida, described itself as ‘a nonpartisan, non-profit, neutral forum that uses private charitable funds to bring together intelligence agencies of the free world and the emerging democracies … the purpose of The Summit is to provide an opportunity for the international intelligence community to listen to and learn from each other, and to share ideas in the common war against terrorism.’

    The publicity for the conference said: ‘The list of presenters will include many of the top leaders of the intelligence, espionage, counterterrorism and counter-intelligence agencies from around the free world. The Summit is intended to be the most prestigious world conference on international studies, intelligence policy, terrorism, and homeland security.’

    The Summit flagged up Dr Dekker by saying she ‘regularly consults with Ministries of Public Health, Ministries of Foreign Affairs and Ministries of Defence on issues related to Mid-East state bio-warfare programmes’.

    It added that she ‘has advised the European Commission on bio-terterrorism and stockpiling for Category A bio-warfare agent countermeasures; resulting in (COM (2004) 701 Communication from the Commission to the Council and the European Parliament Preparedness and consequence management in the fight against terrorism’.

    Asked if she knew anyone who could back up her claims of intimidation, she referred us to one of her friends, who spent 20 years as a CIA officer and now works as a consultant.

    He said: “She told me what happened, and I believe it. What she described is known as heavy harassing surveillance, with the purpose of intimidating.”

    Dave Thomas, the local police inspector who was entrusted with Dr Dekker’s protection, said he had done so on the orders of the Belgian ministry of the interior.

    Speaking in accented English almost as good as his distinctly un- Belgian name would suggest, he said: “It is true that we were told to look after her. They said she was an important person who felt under threat.”

    But he did not go into details into what action his force had taken.

    A spokesman for the Interior Ministry said the order had come from the country’s Crisis Centre, Belgium’s emergency planning department.

    He said: “Jill Dekker specialises in bioterrorism. She reported to us that she felt she was being threatened by foreign intelligence services, and we received an instruction from the Crisis Centre on March 21 that she should be protected. The protection was withdrawn on July 7.”

    Last night, Mr Baker said he believed Dr Dekker could have made enemies by exposing a fallacy at the heart of military action against Iraq.

    “If the war was really about WMD, then to be consistent we should also invade Syria,” he said.

    “Otherwise, it suggests that it was more about giving Saddam a bloody nose.”

    Blowback, Pakistan-style

    0

    Mark LeVine

    The carnage that greeted Benazir Bhutto, the former Pakistan prime minister, upon her return to the country may have occurred in Karachi, but there is little doubt about where the orders came from: the badlands of the Northwest Frontier Province (NWFP) and neighbouring Federally Administered Tribal Areas (FATA), the home bases of al-Qaeda and the Taliban.

    Karachi, but there is

    little doubt about where the orders came from: the badlands of the Northwest Frontier Province (NWFP) and neighbouring Federally Administered Tribal Areas (FATA), the home bases of al-Qaeda and the Taliban.Those who gave the orders for the bombing intended not merely to decapitate the soon to be consecrated government before it could assume power.As important was the need to pre-empt the well-advertised assault on the militants in the frontier and tribal regions by the Pakistani military that was scheduled to start any day.Bhutto’s return was the public symbol of the government’s new, get tough attitude. “I know who these people are, I know the forces behind them,” Bhutto explained to the New York Times.

    Left unsaid, and unquestioned, was why Bhutto is so familiar with “these people,” most of whom are hiding out in the NWFP: The governments she led during the late 1980s and mid 1990s were, in conjunction with Pakistan’s notorious intelligence services (ISI), among the most important sponsors of the Taliban.

    Successive Pakistani governments supported the Taliban and the militants who would form the core of al-Qaeda not just because of their role in expelling the Soviets from Afghanistan.

    As important was the need to co-opt and keep busy this potentially destabilising new force in the complex political landscape of the NWFP.

    The problem is that Pakistan’s leaders were viewing the NWFP and FATA

    through the same distorted lens as the British did before them, seeing the region as a bastion of backwards tribes which could be manipulated and cajoled into preserving a status quo that left most of the people living in the region among the most underdeveloped people on earth.

    The trouble with tribes  

    The justification for such policies has long rested on the view of the region by outsiders as a primitive tribal system that is incapable of developing on its own terms, if at all. (As one friend in Peshawar, a law professor and rock artist, told me: “People call us walnuts; that is, hard-headed and stupid. I’m regularly asked by Pakistanis in the south if I live in a mud hut.”)

    This perception of supposedly primitive tribal peoples is not unique to Pakistan.

     Ever since Europe “discovered” the Americas

    and began to gain control over Africa and s outhern Asia more than half a millennium ago, tribes and tribalism have been the object of fear, fascination, and above all confusion.

    And American no less than Pakistani fall prey easily to the allure of “tribes” as the explanatory catch-all for what ails the world.

    American history is unimaginable without the ubiquitous image of the Indian “tribes”, and their role as “noble savage” against whom the country’s “frontier personality” developed.

    The Dutch, British and French empires also had an ambivalent relationship with what they defined as the “tribes” living in the societies with whom they came into contact.

    Dividing, classifying, and managing them (often against each other) was central to successful European trade with, and ultimately control over the Americas, Africa and S outh Asia.

    Definition debate

    Scholars have had a particularly tough time defining the term. A 1963 article in the British Journal of Sociology well summed up the problem, explaining that tribe was “an everyday word with a vengeance: probably everyone is quite sure what it means”. The problem, of course, was that most people, including many academics, didn’t quite know what it meant, and still don’t.

    The views of journalists, commentators and the public at large have been even more problematic.

    By and large, most people have simplistically assumed that any society that possessed tribes was technologically, politically and morally “inferior” to and “backwards” vis-a-vis Europe and later the US.

    This view has changed little in mainstream policy-making or journalism, as demonstrated by the writings of many commentators, who have often had a disproportionate influence on the formation of US foreign policy in the Muslim world.

    For instance, Thomas Friedman famously argued in his first best-seller, From Beirut to Jerusalem, Arab peoples are fundamentally

    different from the West because they “have not fully broken from their primordial identities”.

    The best way to understand the “tribalism” governing Arab societies, he argues, is to return to the “nomadic Bedouins of the desert” in 7th-century Arabia. In other words, an Arab living the Moroccan Sahara in 1989, the year the book was published, differed little from their ancestors who migrated from Arabia 1,400 years ago (later Friedman would come to believe that globalisation was the one force that could flatten out local particularities and open the way for the full modernisation of the Arab/Muslim world).

    ‘Ancient hatreds’

    Robert Kaplan, whose articles and best-selling books have equally influenced government policy-making, also draws on tribal imagery for his analyses.

    In his Balkan Ghosts, which influenced Bill Clinton‘s decision not to intervene in the Yugoslav civil war, he argues that the war was the result of irrational and irreconcilable “ancient hatreds”, which made it Western intervention futile and even foolhardy.

    More recently, Kaplan has argued that the “lawless frontier” and “unreconstructed” – that is, backwards and uncivilised – “tribal people” of the Pakistani-Afghan frontier are principle causes for the spread of the Taliban and al-Qaeda in these regions.

    Perhaps the most well known and influential tribalist argument is the Clash of Civilisations thesis of Bernard Lewis and Samuel Huntington.

    This theory enlarges the tribal model to the level of civilisation, and then argues that Islamic civilisation – as if Islam can be reduced to one simplistic representation – is incapable of change, development, or even rational behaviour.

    Because of this, the Muslim world must inevitably clash with the secularised, rational and enlightened West.

    Tribes and tribalism

    Of course, the fact that tribes and tribalism are politically charged and confusing terms doesn’t mean that there aren’t political groupings in the Muslim world define themselves in ways that roughly correspond to the English word tribe.

    From pre-Islamic times through today, Arab and Muslim societies more broadly have defined and differentiated their identities through kinship and similar relationships that fit the broad usage of the term.

    They trace their lineages back to common ancestors, and ensure communal solidarity – what the great Arab sociologist Ibn Khaldun famously termed asabiyya – through marriages to members of the same kinship networks and other mechanisms for securing loyalty to the tribe (qabila, a word whose Arabic root connotes hospitality and agreement).

    Tribal affiliations and loyalties have long played a crucial role in securing rights to land, particularly in the Afghan-Pakistani border regions that today are part of the NWFP and FATA.

    Both regions, which together comprise almost 100,000sq km, are composed of at least a dozen tribes belonging, largely, to the Pashtun ethnic group.

    Pashtun pride

    Pashtuns have long been known for their refusal to submit to foreign domination, and the more than a dozen tribes of the regions that would become the NWFP and FATA fought a succession of outside powers in the 18th and 19th centuries, including the Mughal, Afghan, Persian and British empires, in their quest to retain as much local autonomy as possible.

     

    Pakistani government forces are engaged in
    a difficult battle in the tribal areas [EPA]

    The British alone engaged in well over four dozen “expeditions” in the frontier or tribal areas between 1847 and 1908, as part of the struggle for control of these strategically important regions against Czarist Russia.

     

    Despite the regular and large scale use of force – in the first war with the Pashtuns, 14,800 soldiers went into the Tribal Areas, only one came out alive – the British never managed to secure full control over them.

    This was a primary reason why the government of India acquiesced to relatively wide local autonomy for the regions compared with much of India or in other colonies.Indeed, by 1877, the British administrator of the “frontier districts” described the regions as “a spectacle unique in the world … where, after 25 years of peaceful occupation, a great civilised power has obtained so little influence over its semi-savage neighbours, and acquired so little knowledge of them … There is absolutely no security for British life a mile or two beyond our border.”  

    Significant autonomy

    The NWFP was created by the British in 1905 as a reflection of the need to offer significant autonomy to the region’s Pashtun majority if a semblance of order was to be maintained.

    Its seven agencies or districts reflected not just the power of Pashtun identity, but the enduring impact of Arab, Hindu, Sikh, Dravidian, Sindhi and Punjabi influences, and the confusing interplay of caste and tribal structure as well.

    Religiously, Sufism rather than the orthodox Islam today associated with the Taliban was dominant in the region.

    Given the circumstances that led to its creation, it’s not surprising that the tribes of the NWFP have born the stamp of criminality since the days of British rule.

    First, they were defined by the “Criminal Tribes Act” of 1871. Until 1917, tribes were classified as “Backwards Classes” or “primitive”, and were divided into “criminal and wandering tribes, aboriginal tribes, and untouchables.” Even today, the region is governed by the “Frontier Crimes Regulation Ordinance” (FCR), which continues the centuries old tradition of governments equating the frontier regions with lawlessness and criminality.  

    The British placed Peshawar, capital of the NWFP, under direct federal administration to ensure a modicum of control of the surrounding areas by the central government. But in the NWFP and what would become the FATA, tribal customs were allowed to govern most aspects of people’s lives, as they do today.

    Politically, when provincial elections were held beginning in 1935, the leaders of the main tribes, or maliks (often referred to as “feudal lords” in the West, and by some Pakistanis as well) were most often elected to the local or national assemblies, extending their local power by participating in the emerging British, and then Pakistani, state structures.

     

    As the central government attempted to exert greater power over the frontier and tribal regions, however, the long-standing tensions between the secular laws of the state, the Sharia, or Islamic Law, and urf, or local customs, grew.

    Aggravating the situation was the fact that the NWFP and FATA were home to a particularly powerful code of ethics and behaviour, known as Pashtunwali, or the Pashtun way.

    Powerful obligations

    Pashtunwali is based on the powerful obligations to provide hospitality and sanctuary, even to one’s enemies, yet at the same time to exact revenge at all costs against any slights against one’s honour, or that of members of one’s family, clan or tribe.

    Musharraf’s popularity has plummeted as he
    prosecutes an unpopular war on terror [AFP]

    The code also requires Pashtuns to abide by the decisions of the council of tribal leaders when they meet in the assembly known as the jirga, which adjucates disputes and feuds.

     

    The overall system long served not just to maintain honour (which is what most Western commentators focus on), but equally important, to maintain a rough equality and balance of power between and within tribes.

    This function is crucial because in the imperial as well as globalised eras, external forces have exercised power precisely by disturbing local equality, or at least stability, in order to create new political orders more favourable to their interests.

    Indeed, this process generated significant instability in the tribal regions in the decades leading up to the creation of Pakistan, as economic transformations in India and neighbouring regions increased the power of previously minor tribal leaders at the expense of the more established maliks.

     

    They in turn aligned themselves with the British and later central Pakistani governments to retain their hold on power.

    Threat of instability

    As is so often the case in countries under colonial rule, the very system that the British imposed to maintain order politically was threatened by the instability their economic and military policies generated.

    As time wore on, the increasing power, corruption and exploitation of the “big Khans” (as the maliks are also known) encouraged the rise of a new generation of charismatic religious figures, and eventually the Taliban.

    Their egalitarian and purified vision of a just Islamic order was more in line with local customs and ideals than were the actions of the politically connected major land-owning maliks.

    What is particularly dangerous about this dynamic is that the coming together of the Taliban and the tribesmen brought into synergy two seemingly contradictory positions.

    The anti-nationalist and pan-Islamic identity of the often foreign-born Taliban (much of it inspired by the writings of the Pakistani theologian and activist Mawlana Mawdudi), ranged against the particularistic and locally rooted identity of the region’s tribal groups.

    As important, the Taliban brought in their own, much needed financial resources to the region. Their activities were supported by a succession of Pakistani governments, by the US and

    Saudis, and by remittances sent home by migrants working in the wealthy Gulf countries.

    History of rebellion

    The local people offered hospitality, generations of anger at the central government, and a history of violent rebellion under the banner of Islam.

     

    This combination of economic, geostrategic, political and ideological interests made the NWFP and FATA a natural base for the jihadi movements after the Afghan war.

    The growth of the heroin and arms trades, and other cross border smuggling (especially of Chinese-made goods, much of them pirated), also increased the power of the new religious forces and the growing number of tribal leaders who were aligned with them.

    As the US Institute of Peace concluded in a 2002 conference on the NWFP, “These new leaders have effectively captured the various forms of simmering discontent within the tribes and have emerged as more legitimate defenders of tribal interests.

    “The foundations of Pashtun identity have changed with perhaps a permanent turn towards Islamism and movement away from traditional secular, tribal leadership.”

    Complicating matters even more was that the central government’s main intelligence network, the ISI, simultaneously encouraged, infiltrated, and sometimes fought against the Pakistani Taliban and various jihadi groups.

    Dashed dream  

    The founders of Pakistan, Muhammad Jinnah, and Allama Iqbal imagined their hoped for country as a “land of the spiritually pure and clean” people.

    Their vision never approached reality, as from the start Pakistan was plagued by rampant poverty, lack of development, government repression and systemic corruption.

    Indeed, the new state quickly reinforced the most corrupt and exploitative dynamics of British rule, a reality that helped drive the leadership of East Pakistan to declare independence as Bangladesh in 1971.

    The Pashtun peoples of the NWFP and FATA have never had a cohesive enough nationalist identity to break away from the rest of the country.

    In fact, their relative independence depended on the region’s continued function as a buffer between Pakistan and its western neighbours, as well as on the very absence of state authority that has been an important cause of the region’s many economic and political woes.The ambivalence towards the state by local forces reflects the larger contradictions of life in the NWFP and FATA, which literally jump out at you when you travel through them. Signs welcoming you to the “land of hospitality” alternate with those that warn “Foreigners, keep out.”

    Rampant illiteracy

    Smugglers markets sell the latest high tech electronics, as well as advanced weapons, drugs and pornography. Innumerable English language and computer schools, and one of Pakistan’s most venerable universities, Islamia College, sit next to squalid refugee camps, in a region plagued by rampant illiteracy.

    The two regions are awash in money, but most is derived from the local gray and black economies.

    The state pledges increased funds for local development, yet 60 years after independence it has not managed to build a modern road into the provincial capital of Peshawar.

     

    The ambivalence towards the state reflects the
     contradictions of life in the tribal belt [GETTY]

    The government decries the prevalence of tribal customs, yet it continues to administer the regions based on customary practices such as the collective punishment of tribes. 

     

    Dictatorship is defended by appeals to fighting the terror it helped breed, while agreements designed to rein in the Taliban (such as the much-criticised 2006 Miranshah agreement between the government and tribal and Taliban leaders in North Waziristan) wind up helping the

    Taliban and al-Qaeda to regroup and grow.And now, the political situation has become so contradictory as to border on the absurd.  

    Former prime minister Benazir Bhutto is being called upon to save the country from the Taliban, when her government did perhaps the most to build up the Taliban.

    She is supposed to bring a breathe of political fresh air (which would be much appreciated, given the pollution levels across the country), but she was twice removed from power because of corruption.

    Interpol even issued arrest warrants for Bhutto and her husband, Asif Ali Zardari, otherwise known as “Mr Ten Percent” for the kickbacks he allegedly demanded from businesses during her time as prime minister.

     

    What can Bhutto do?

     

    It is hard to imagine what Bhutto will do that Musharraf hasn’t already done, or how she will succeed where he has, at least in Washington‘s eyes, failed.

    Indeed, it should surprise no one when, despite the horrific attack against her, Bhutto proves as incapable – or unwilling – to crush the Taliban and al-Qaeda as previous governments have been, including her own.

    It is hard to see what Bhutto can what Musharraf
    hasn’t already done in the war on extremists [AFP]

    That’s because ultimately, the tragic reality of Pakistan is that the forces tearing the country apart are the same ones that are holding it together.

    The central government is too weak and corrupt to implant or impose a strong, national identity or programme of development in the manner that Ataturk did in Turkey or Lenin and Stalin did in the Soviet Union.

     

    The very process of doing so would likely trigger widespread social unrest, disintegration and even civil war.

    The suicide bombings against Bhutto’s welcome home procession are only a taste of the chaos and large-scale violence that would erupt if a politician or party actually challenged the finely honed corruption and horse-trading that has defined Pakistani politics for generations.

    Although its causes would owe as much to economic and political inequalities as to religious or tribal ideologies, such a development would inevitably be interpreted as yet another example of “ancient tribal hatreds” dooming a developing country to perpetual war and poverty.

    Only this country is a nuclear-weapons state that is home to the world’s most dangerous terrorists. And unlike Bosnia or Rwanda, the US would be forced to intervene, fulfilling Osama bin Laden’s wildest dreams when he turned commuter planes into cruise missiles on that warm September morning over the island of Manhattan, six years ago last month.

    Mark LeVine is professor of modern Middle Eastern history at UC Irvine in California, USA, and author and editor of half-a-dozen books, including Why They Don’t Hate Us: Lifting the Veil on the Axis of Evil (Oneworld, 2005) and the forthcoming Heavy Metal Islam: Rock, Religion and the Struggle for the Soul of Islam (Random House/Verso) and An Impossible Peace: Oslo and the Burdens of History (Zed Books). He is a regular commentator on Al Jazeera’s The Listening Post. www.culturejamming.org

    Administration officials see few options for U.S.

    0

    For more than five months the United States has been trying to orchestrate a political transition in Pakistan that would manage to somehow keep Gen. Pervez Musharraf in power without making a mockery of President Bush’s promotion of democracy in the Muslim world.

    On Saturday, those carefully laid plans fell apart spectacularly. Now the White House is stuck in wait-and-see mode, with limited options and a lack of clarity about the way forward.

    General Musharraf’s move to seize emergency powers and abandon the Constitution left Bush administration officials close to their nightmare: an American-backed military dictator who is risking civil instability in a country with nuclear weapons and an increasingly alienated public. [complete article]

    Editor’s Comment – While the neoconservatives are waging a hysterical campaign targeting unrealized nuclear risks in Iran, the fearmongers have had little to say about the nuclear actualities in Pakistan. Indeed, we now know that for decades American administrations and Congress looked the other way while Pakistan both developed its own weapons program and created the most extensive clandestine proliferation network ever known – a network that is believed to remain in tact and in operation even though in February 2004 its chief of operations, AQ Khan, was forced into what could best be described as early retirement. Paradoxically, while the drumbeat for bombing Iran grows increasingly loud, there is a stunning silence in response to the preeminent risk for nuclear terrorism. Washington’s Faustian pact with General Musharraf is now unraveling, yet we are blithely assured that Pakistan’s weapons and nuclear materials will remain safe, whoever rises to power. We have seemingly entered a Through-the-Looking-Glass world where nuclear weapons that do exist are less dangerous than those that can be imagined.

    For more revelations on Washington and Islamabad’s twisted relations, read this:

    ‘Bush winked at Pakistan’s nuclear proliferation’
    Chidanand Rajghatta, Times of India, September 5, 2007

    Successive US administrations winked at Pakistan’s clandestine nuclearisation and its rampant proliferation activities, and Washington continues the charade of normalcy although proliferation activities continue to this day, an explosive new book on the subject has revealed.

    The disclosures in the book Deception: Pakistan, the United States and the Secret Trade in Nuclear Weapons by Adrian Levy and Catherine Scott-Clark, which is to be released next week, are nothing short of stunning.

    It charges US President Bush of perpetuating deceit in an elaborate American charade that forgave Pakistan for its nuclear transgressions as a price for keeping it from becoming an even more dangerous proposition – in other words, succumbing to Pakistani blackmail.

    Describing the episode in which US officials confronted Pakistan’s military ruler Pervez Musharraf with evidence of its nuclear proliferation, the authors say “American officials knew that Musharraf had known about the nuclear trade all along. And Washington had itself not only turned a blind eye to Pakistan’s nuclear bomb project for decades but had covered it up for imperative geopolitical reasons, even when Islamabad began trading its secret technology.”

    The authors credit then Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage of conceiving the drama in which Musharraf would promise to shut down Pakistan’s nuclear black market in return for winning continued US support for his unelected regime.

    It was agreed that A Q Khan and his aides would be arrested and blamed for “privately” engaging in proliferation. “The country’s military elite – who had sponsored Khan’s work and encouraged sales of technology to reduce their reliance on American aid – were left in the clear,” the authors say, adding that “Bush subscribed to the deceit.”

    However, in a worrying new claim for Washington’s non-proliferation pundits, who have spent the last two decades chasing WMD phantoms in all the wrong places, Pakistan’s proliferation has not stopped even now.

    They say new intelligence reports show that Pakistan is procuring a range of materials and components that “clearly exceeds” what Islamabad needed for its domestic nuclear program.

    KRL labs, A.Q.Khan’s old facility, had continued to coordinate the Pakistani sales programme and now runs a network of front companies in Europe, the Gulf and southeast Asia which deployed all the old tricks: disguising end-user certificates by shielding the ultimate destinations from sellers, and lying on customs manifests.

    Most alarming, say the authors, was the finding that hundreds of thousands of components amassed by Khan, including canisters with radioactive material, had vanished since he had been put out of operation.

    In other words, they write, Pakistan has continued to sell nuclear weapons technology (to clients known and unknown) even as Musharraf denies it – “which means either that the sales are being carried out with his secret blessing or that he is no more in control of Pakistan’s nuclear program than he is of the bands of jihadis in his country.”

    The book then quotes Robert Gallucci, a former US diplomat who tracked Islamabad’s nuclear program from inception in 1972, as describing Pakistan as “the number one threat to the world at this moment.”

    “If it all goes off, a nuclear bomb in a US or European city, I’m sure we will find ourselves looking in Pakistan’s direction,” says Gallucci.

    Such observations, and other disclosures in the book, hasn’t made the slightest impression on Washington, which continues a decades-long wink-wink policy that has made Pakistan’s into what experts are increasingly
    describing as the world’s most dangerous country.

    The Bush administration continues to back Musharraf and is trying to engineer a coalition between the military ruler and former PM Benazir Bhutto. The latest experiment does not address the nuclear proliferation issue, where Washington is yet to even question A.Q.Khan even as Pakistan spirals out of control.

    “The tragedy is that America’s gamble on Musharraf has not paid off…Musharraf presides over a country that is not only still a nuclear proliferator but the real source of the Islamist terrorism menacing the West,” say Levy and Clark-Scott.

    http://timesofindia.indiatimes.com/articleshow/msid-2338421,prtpage-1.cms

    My enemy’s enemy shouldn’t always be my friend

    0

    By Brian Vogt

    The outlook is looking increasingly gloomy for democracy in Pakistan. Our erstwhile ally in the war on terror, General Musharraf is looking worse by the day.  After he took power in a bloodless coup in 1999, many Pakistanis were hopeful about the future.  They were happy to be rid of a corrupt leader and willing to take a chance on Musharraf.  Polls indicate, however, that they have soured on his leadership. And it’s not surprising why. After having regularly promised free and fair elections, Pakistan’s electoral efforts have fallen short.  Musharraf’s seems to have a messiah complex and his justifications for his actions seem increasingly weak. Moreover, Musharraf’s alliance with the US has also hurt him with the Pakistani public that is increasingly skeptical of the war on terror. For the Pakistani public the “war on terror” is just considered a convenient excuse for further autocratic rule. 

    The New York Times reported that Musharraf caught word that the Supreme Court was about to issue a unanimous decision invalidating his recent election. Of course, Musharraf wasn’t about to let that meddling court have its way. He had learned his lesson in his tussle earlier this year with the Chief Justice. He therefore dismissed the court and we’re left today with an increasingly isolated and unpopular leader who justifies his continued abrogation of the constitution on the spurious grounds that it is necessary to combat terrorist elements. Sound familiar?   I wonder if in a one on one meetings with President Bush, they exchanged notes on using the “terrorist”  threat to bypass constitutional controls on power.    

    Of course, the U.S. is in a bind here. President Bush has publicly declared that democratic governance is the long term answer to overcoming violent extremism. It can give hope and dignity to oppressed people around the world who might otherwise choose terrorism. I agree that certainly it is a component of the solution – a very long term solution. However, this long term solution comes into conflict with our short term dilemma that Pakistan is ground zero on the war on terror.  After 9/11 Musharraf signed onto the coalition of the willing and has been rewarded handsomely in terms of massive infusions of aid. The results of Musharraf’s alliance have been mixed.  Certainly Pakistan’s assistance has led to the arrest and detention of high value targets and Pakistan’s support of our Afghanistan mission has been important. However, at the same time, Pakistan’s inability to control its own territory and reign in the Al Qaeda elements in the country have made many wonder whether we are getting our money’s worth. 

    It’s really a question here of short term vs long term interests. Unfortunately, in the past we too often have tended to focus on short term results and ignore the potential blowback from those actions. Just think back to the struggle in Afghanistan against the Soviets in the 1980s. Back then the US backed the mujahideen which, after the end of the Afghanistan conflict, led to the formation of Al Qaeda. The U.S. followed the old maxim, my enemy’s enemy is my friend. That sort of short term thinking contributed to the development of Al Qaeda and the foreign policy quagmire we find ourselves in now. 

    Flash forward now to the current situation in Pakistan. We can either support a dictator who has declared himself our friend against Al Qaeda (our once friend turned enemy), or we can support the long term stability of the country through the building of democracy. 

    The tragedy here is that this is just one example of the U.S. ignoring the potential blowback of its decisions – think U.S. support of Iraq against Iran…. or U.S. support of right wing dictators in Latin America who stood up against communism. 

    It’s time that we stood up for democracy. It can be messy, and it may mean short term losses, but in the long run, this will be the more effective bulwark against Islamic extremism. 

    What does this mean in Pakistan? Well, for one, we should get serious about withholding the massive budgetary supports we provide to the Pakistani government until elections are confirmed and Musharraf agrees to step down from his military position. The Bush administration seems to be trying to take both side on this.  Yesterday the President recounted a phone call during which he pressed the general on these two issues. However, just a day before,  Deputy Secretary of State John Negroponte said that Musharraf was an “indispensable” ally on the war on terror. With that kind of “diplomatic pressure” I wouldn’t be surprised if Musharraf calls our bluff. 

    Some critics argue that if Musharraf falls, we won’t like what takes his place. However, this paper argues just the opposite. We must not ignore the lessons of the past. Although maintaining support for Musharraf may lead to short term stability, if we’re interested in long term gain, I’d rather put by my money on democracy. It’s hard and it’s messy, but it’s the best way out of this mess.  

    Will 9/11 and BAE Derail Cheney’s Plan To Bomb Iran?

    by Jeffrey Steinberg

    Two recent events, both occurring in the context of Saudi Arabian King Abdullah’s visit to London at the end of October, have once again cast the dark shadows of 9/11 and the BAE scandal over Vice President Dick Cheney. Coupled with mounting opposition to Cheney’s war schemes from within the U.S. military and factions of the Bush Administration, as well as from Persian Gulf states, Russia, and even Israel, the spotlight, once again focussed on two of the biggest Cheney-linked scandals, could help derail the Vice President’s accelerating drive for a U.S. bombing of Iran, and avert what would certainly devolve into a new Eurasian Hundred Years War.

    On Nov. 1, Prince Bandar bin-Sultan, the longtime former Saudi ambassador in Washington, and the current national security advisor to King Abdullah, gave an interview to the Arabic-language satellite TV network Al-Arabiya, in which he made the startling claim that the Sept. 11, 2001 attacks could have been avoided, if the United States had taken Saudi intelligence efforts more seriously.

    Bandar claimed that Saudi intelligence was “actively following” most of the 9/11 hijackers “with precision,” prior to the attacks on the World Trade Center and the Pentagon. “If U.S. security authorities had engaged their Saudi counterparts in a serious and credible manner, in my opinion, we would have avoided what happened.”
    Finger-Pointing on 9/11

    Bandar’s accusations that the U.S. government could have stopped 9/11, had they pursued leads provided by Saudi intelligence, were met with skepticism by some U.S. intelligence officials consulted by EIR. They pointed to EIR’s own June 29, 2007 revelations, drawn from the 9/11 Commission Report and other sources, that then-Saudi Ambassador Bandar had funnelled more than $50,000 through two Saudi intelligence operatives, to some of the 9/11 hijackers. One source emphasized that the Bandar payments were so controversial that a 28-page segment of the 9/11 Commission report, dealing with this incident, was classified and blocked, to this day, from publication. But the Prince’s charges of U.S. failures, leading to the 9/11 attacks, could signal a rift between the Saudi prince and his “war party” ally Dick Cheney, that could set back the Vice President’s schemes to build up a Sunni versus Shi’ite confrontation in the Persian Gulf–a scheme he launched with his November 2006 trip to Riyadh, arranged by Bandar personally.

    Whether legitimate or not, Prince Bandar’s extraordinary claims mirrored comments made by King Abdullah on Oct. 29, in an interview with the BBC on the eve of his state visit to London. King Abdullah claimed that British authorities also failed to listen to Saudi intelligence warnings about terror plots in England; and the July 7, 2005 London subway bombings, which killed 52 people, could have been prevented, if British authorities had acted on specific warnings passed from Riyadh in advance of the attacks.

    U.S. intelligence sources, canvassed by EIR following the Bandar and Abdullah statements, reported that the Saudis had been devastated by the public revelation that 15 of the 19 Sept. 11 hijackers had been Saudi nationals, and that they were now launching a public relations offensive to get beyond the stigma. But, the sources observed, the effort to shift the blame for the 9/11 attacks carried considerable risks–for all parties concerned, including the Vice President, who has counted on the Saudis to back up his war plans against Iran.

    Bandar’s blunt allegations raised some dramatic questions, which echo charges made by Lyndon LaRouche, most recently, during his Oct. 10, 2007 international webcast from Washington, D.C. In his opening remarks, LaRouche declared: “I shall say, that I do know, beyond doubt, that 9/11 was an inside job. It was an inside job on behalf of what the Bush-Cheney Administration represents.” Later, LaRouche added, “I know more than I’m saying: With complicity of certain people in Saudi Arabia, with the British Empire, which shares power with Saudi Arabia, through the BAE, a job was done on the United States on 9/11. And we’ve been living under the heat of that, ever since. That I stand by. Other facts will come out at a suitable time.”

    With Bandar’s charges that U.S. officials failed to cooperate with the Saudis, who were tracking the 9/11 hijackers “with precision,” a question must be posed to Vice President Cheney and others inside the Bush White House:

    Did the Saudis, in fact, provide the Bush-Cheney Administration with “actionable intelligence” on a pending al-Qaeda attack on America? By July 2001, both the FBI and the CIA were circulating warnings about an al-Qaeda terrorist action. On July 10, 2001, then-CIA director George Tenet and Cofer Black, the Agency’s counterterrorism director, met with National Security Advisor Condoleezza Rice, Attorney General John Ashcroft, and Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld, to sound the alarms about an imminent al-Qaeda attack, but they were given the “brush-off”–by Rice, in particular.

    This led up to the now infamous Aug. 6, 2001 Presidential Daily Briefing, with a section titled “Bin Laden Determined to Strike Inside US,” which again warned of imminent al-Qaeda terrorist attacks on U.S. soil, based on a pattern of U.S.- and foreign-generated intelligence.

    Despite all of the FBI and CIA warnings, and the new claims by Prince Bandar that Saudi Arabia had also been warning about pending al-Qaeda attacks on the U.S.A., the Bush-Cheney White House did absolutely nothing to act on the warnings.

    Who bears the greatest burden of responsibility within the U.S. government for 9/11, whether or not the Bandar allegations pan out? At the time of the 9/11 attacks, Cheney was the counter-terrorism czar at the White House, a title bestowed on him by President Bush on May 17, 2001–at the very moment that the White House was shelving the findings of the Hart-Rudman U.S. Commission on National Security, which conducted a two-and-a-half year study of America’s vulnerability to terrorist attack, and demanded a major overhaul of U.S. domestic security planning and structures.

    The Bandar accusations, on the heels of the LaRouche Oct. 10 webcast, are now certain to push the 9/11 matter back onto the front burner, which is particularly bad news for Cheney, whom LaRouche has branded the “Hermann Göring” of the Bush Administration.

    The BAE Scandal: Back With a Vengeance

    With much pomp and circumstance, King Abdullah paid a state visit to Great Britain during the last week of October, in what was billed as the “Two Kingdoms” celebration. Over 500 people accompanied the King–including Prince Bandar, Defense Minister Prince Sultan (Bandar’s father), Foreign Minister Prince Saud al-Faisal, and Interior Minister Prince Naif.

    The visit once again placed a spotlight on the scandal surrounding the longstanding “Al-Yamamah” arms-for-oil deal between Britain’s premier arms manufacturer, BAE Systems, and the Saudis. Vince Cable, the acting leader of the Liberal Democratic Party, boycotted the entire British-Saudi ceremony in protest over the British government’s coverup of the BAE scandal, and over Saudi human rights violations.

    As one of his last official acts as Prime Minister, Tony Blair had ordered the Serious Fraud Office to shut down its investigation into the Al-Yamamah deal–including the reported $2 billion in kickbacks paid to Prince Bandar, the architect of the entire arms-for-oil scheme, since the mid-1980s. Just before packing his bags and leaving 10 Downing Street, Blair had signed a new BAE arms deal with the Saudis, worth an estimated $20 billion.

    As EIR exclusively revealed earlier this year, the real BAE Al-Yamamah scandal centered around a $100 billion offshore covert action fund, which was administered by the British, with Saudi complicity and American participation, utilizing the spot market sales of the Saudi oil, paid to BAE for the weapons and support systems. These clandestine funds, according to Bandar’s semi-authorized biography, went to a wide range of secret war schemes, including bankrolling the Afghani mujahideen, who battled the Soviet Red Army in Afghanistan throughout the 1980s; arming Chad with Soviet-made weapons, to repel a Libyan invasion in the late 1980s; and U.S. arms sales to Saudi Arabia, bypassing Congressional oversight. Some of the BAE slush funds went to Bandar–and may have even been part of the money that went to some of the 9/11 hijackers, through Saudi intelligence operative Osama Basnan.

    According to one U.S. intelligence source, the resurfacing of the BAE Al-Yamamah scandal during the Saudi royal visit to Britain could lead to new frictions between Riyadh and London. In an interview with BBC during the visit, Prince Faisal answered a question about the BAE scandal, saying that the focus of any investigation should be on the party that did the bribing, not on the recipients–i.e., blame BAE for any funny money passed to Prince Bandar.

    The BAE scandal remains a subject of serious investigation by the U.S. Department of Justice. So far, according to official sources, the probe is centered around possible BAE violations of the Foreign Corrupt Practices Act–for making the $2 billion in payoffs to Bandar, via Saudi bank accounts at Riggs Bank in Washington, D.C. If the DOJ investigation were to be expanded to include money laundering, the finances of the Saudi Embassy, during Bandar’s more than two decades as ambassador, could be opened to scrutiny. And that is something that Dick Cheney, the Republican National Committee, and a whole lot of others do not wish to see happen

    Let us never forget – As True As Ever

    0

    RINF Alternative News

    Remembrance Sunday is perhaps the saddest days in the UK calendar.

    As a mark of respect to all those who should have lived fuller lives had the powers that be been blessed with more courage to solve differences by intellectual means & persuasive argument, not violence.

    Here are 5 songs of which ask us all to show more respect and tolerance to fellow inhabitants of this planet.

    Judy Collins – Turn Turn Turn

     

    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DejUPN4SksU

    Blowing The Wind – Peter, Paul and Mary 

    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0LoBwkVLVKU

    Donovan – Universal Soldier 

    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IrPB8TPgs9U

    Barry McGuire – Eve of Destruction

     

     

    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=39ESOKkU1ho

    Judy Collins – “Amazing Grace”

     

     

    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uG3Xd7ENuyk

     

    Have our current leaders learned anything from the past? Will the seas be red & the land scorched barren before they have had their fill of war profit & Greed? Do they have the courage to solve petty differences by mutual respect and dialog?

     

    Do We have the courage to ensure they do?

    The Spy Who Wants Israel to Talk

    0

    By David Ignatius

    Efraim Halevy, the former head of the Israeli intelligence agency Mossad, titled his memoirs “Man in the Shadows.” But now that he’s out in the sunlight, the 72-year-old retired spy chief has some surprisingly contrarian things to say about Iran and Syria. The gist of his message is that rather than constantly ratcheting up the rhetoric of confrontation, the United States and Israel should be looking for ways to establish a creative dialogue with these adversaries.

    Halevy is a legendary figure in Israel because of his nearly 40 years of service as an intelligence officer, culminating in his years as Mossad’s director from 1998 to 2003. He managed Israel’s secret relationship with Jordan for more than a decade, and he became so close to King Hussein that the two personally negotiated the 1994 agreement paving the way for a peace treaty. So when Halevy talks about the utility of secret diplomacy, he knows whereof he speaks.

    Of course, Halevy looks like the fictional master spy George Smiley — thinning hair, wise but weary eyes, the rumpled manner of someone who might have been a professor in another life. And Halevy has the gift of anonymity: You would look right past him in a crowded room, never imagining that he was the man who had conducted daring secret missions. After he appeared here with former CIA director George Tenet at a conference sponsored by the Brookings Institution‘s Saban Center, Halevy agreed to sit down for an interview.

    Halevy suggests that Israel should stop its jeremiads that Iran poses an existential threat to the Jewish state. The rhetoric is wrong, he contends, and it gets in the way of finding a peaceful solution to the Iranian nuclear problem.

    “I believe that Israel is indestructible,” he insists. Iranian President Mahmoud Ahmadinejad may boast that he wants to wipe Israel off the map, but Iran’s ability to consummate this threat is “minimal,” he says. “Israel has a whole arsenal of capabilities to make sure the Iranians don’t achieve their result.” Even if the Iranians did obtain a nuclear weapon, says Halevy, “they are deterrable,” because for the mullahs, survival and perpetuation of the regime is a holy obligation.

    “We must be much more sophisticated and nuanced in our policies toward Iran,” Halevy contends. He argues for a combination of increased economic pressure and a diplomatic opening that attempts to speak to Iran’s “national aspirations” and its shared interests with America and the West — and even Israel.

    “Iranians, including those in government, know that acceptance of Israel is not just something they have to accept but something that might bring their deliverance,” Halevy maintains.

    The former spy chief also argues that Ahmadinejad’s fiery rhetoric masks a deep split within Iran over the country’s future. “I believe that behind their bombastic statements there is a desperate fear that they are going down a path that would have dire consequences,” he says. “They don’t know how to extricate themselves. We have to find creative ways to help them escape from their rhetoric.”

    Halevy, who made many secret visits to Iran during the days of the shah, argues that rather than rattling sabers the West should be looking for dialogue with Tehran. “A creative and constructive approach to Iran’s concerns — not the dreams of their fanatic president to effect the demise of Israel — might move them to see that their self-interest would be better served by taking alternative paths.”

    Halevy takes a similarly contrarian view about Syria. “Damascus is now ripe for peace negotiation,” he says. He argues that the Syrians are signaling their interest in such a negotiation and that the details of an agreement were worked out during extensive talks in the 1990s. The Syrian track might be a breakthrough, he argues, because an accommodation with Damascus might bring along the rest of the Arab world, lead to a settlement in Lebanon and undermine Syria’s current alliance with Iran.

    If the Syrians are serious about a dialogue with Israel, they should send a clear signal, Halevy advises. They should urge Hezbollah to release the Israeli prisoners it is holding or limit the activities of Hamas offices in Damascus. “Do a little,” he urges the Syrians. “Start the ball rolling.”

    Halevy has battled for decades for Israel’s security, launching hundreds of secret missions over the years to defend the Jewish state. So he has earned the right to offer iconoclastic advice about his country’s strategic interests. At this delicate moment, he suggests, war talk about Iran is a mistake. “Sensible Iranians are not in short supply,” he confides. The challenge is to find them and to begin a serious conversation.

    The writer is co-host ofPostGlobal, an online discussion of international issues. His e-mail address isdavidignatius@washpost.com.

    How to Destroy an African American City in 33 Steps

    0

    By BILL QUIGLEY

    Step One. Delay. If there is one word that sums up the way to destroy an African-American city after a disaster, that word is DELAY. If you are in doubt about any of the following steps–just remember to delay and you will probably be doing the right thing.

    Step Two. When a disaster is coming, do not arrange a public evacuation. Rely only on individual resources. People with cars and money for hotels will leave. The elderly, the disabled and the poor will not be able to leave. Most of those without cars–25% of households of New Orleans, overwhelmingly African-Americans–will not be able to leave. Most of the working poor, overwhelmingly African-American, will not be able to leave. Many will then permanently accuse the victims who were left behind of creating their own human disaster because of their own poor planning. It is critical to start by having people blame the victims for their own problems.

    Step Three. When the disaster hits make certain the national response is overseen by someone who has no experience at all handling anything on a large scale, particularly disasters. In fact, you can even inject some humor into the response–have the disaster coordinator be someone whose last job was the head of a dancing horse association.

    Step Four. Make sure that the President and national leaders remain aloof and only slightly concerned. This sends an important message to the rest of the country.

    Step Five. Make certain the local, state, and national governments do not respond in a coordinated effective way. This will create more chaos on the ground.

    Step Six. Do not bring in food or water or communications right away. This will make everyone left behind more frantic and create incredible scenes for the media.

    Step Seven. Make certain that the media focus of the disaster is not on the heroic community work of thousands of women, men and young people helping the elderly, the sick and the trapped survive, but mainly on acts of people looting. Also spread and repeat the rumors that people trapped on rooftops are shooting guns not to attract attention and get help, but AT the helicopters. This will reinforce the message that “those people” left behind are different from the rest of us and are beyond help.

    Step Eight. Refuse help from other countries. If we accept help, it looks like we cannot or choose not to handle this problem ourselves. This cannot be the message. The message we want to put out over and over is that we have plenty of resources and there is plenty of help. Then if people are not receiving help, it is their own fault. This should be done quietly.

    Step Nine. Once the evacuation of those left behind actually starts, make sure people do not know where they are going or have any way to know where the rest of their family has gone. In fact, make sure that African-Americans end up much farther away from home than others.

    Step Ten. Make sure that when government assistance finally has to be given out, it is given out in a totally arbitrary way. People will have lost their homes, jobs, churches, doctors, schools, neighbors and friends. Give them a little bit of money, but not too much. Make people dependent. Then cut off the money. Then give it to some and not others. Refuse to assist more than one person in every household. This will create conflicts where more than one generation lived together. Make it impossible for people to get consistent answers to their questions. Long lines and busy phones will discourage people from looking for help.

    Step Eleven. Insist the President suspend federal laws requiring living wages and affirmative action for contractors working on the disaster. While local workers are still displaced, import white workers from outside the city for the high-paying jobs like crane operators and bulldozers. Import Latino workers from outside the city for the low-paying dangerous jobs. Make sure to have elected officials, black and white, blame job problems on the lowest wage immigrant workers. This will create divisions between black and brown workers that can be exploited by those at the top. Because many of the brown workers do not have legal papers, those at the top will not have to worry about paying decent wages, providing health insurance, following safety laws, unemployment compensation, workers compensation, or union organizing. They become essentially disposable workers–use them, then lose them.

    Step Twelve. Whatever you do, keep people away from their city for as long as possible. This is the key to long-term success in destroying the African-American city. Do not permit people to come home. Keep people guessing about what is going to happen and when it is going to happen. Set numerous deadlines and then break them. This will discourage people and make it increasingly difficult for people to return.
    Step Thirteen. When you finally have to reopen the city, make sure to reopen the African-American sections last. This will aggravate racial tensions in the city and create conflicts between those who are able to make it home and those who are not.

    Step Fourteen. When the big money is given out, make sure it is all directed to homeowners and not to renters. This is particularly helpful in a town like New Orleans that was majority African-American and majority renter. Then, after you have excluded renters, mess the program for the homeowners up so that they must wait for years to get money to fix their homes.

    Step Fifteen. Close down all the public schools for months. This will prevent families in the public school system, overwhelmingly African-Americans, from coming home.

    Step Sixteen. Fire all the public school teachers, teacher aides, cafeteria workers and bus drivers and de-certify the teachers union–the largest in the state. This will primarily hurt middle class African Americans and make them look for jobs elsewhere.

    Step Seventeen. Even better, take this opportunity to flip the public school system into a charter system and push foundations and the government to extra money to the new charter schools. Give the schools with the best test scores away first. Then give the least flooded schools away next. Turn 70% of schools into charters so that the kids with good test scores or solid parental involvement will go to the charters. That way the kids with average scores, or learning disabilities, or single parent families who are still displaced are kept segregated away from the “good” kids. You will have to set up a few schools for those other kids, but make sure those schools do not get any extra money, do not have libraries, nor doors on the toilets, nor enough teachers. In fact, because of this, you better make certain there are more security guards than teachers.

    Step Eighteen. Let the market do what it does best. When rent goes up 70%, say there is nothing we can do about it. This will have two great results. It will keep many former residents away from the city and it will make landlords happy. If wages go up, immediately import more outside workers and wages will settle down.

    Step Nineteen. Make sure all the predominately white suburbs surrounding the African-American city make it very difficult for the people displaced from the city to return to the metro area. Have one suburb refuse to allow any new subsidized housing at all. Have the Sheriff of another threaten to stop and investigate anyone wearing dreadlocks. Throw in a little humor and have one nearly all-white suburb pass a law which makes it illegal for homeowners to rent to people other than their blood relatives! The courts may strike these down, but it will take time and the message will be clear–do not think about returning to the suburbs.

    Step Twenty. Reduce public transportation by more than 80%. The people without cars will understand the message.

    Step Twenty One. Keep affordable housing to a minimum. Use money instead to reopen the Superdome and create tourism campaigns. Refuse to boldly create massive homeownership opportunities for former renters. Delay re-opening apartment complexes in African American neighborhoods. As long as less than half the renters can return to affordable housing, they will not return.

    Step Twenty Two. Keep all public housing closed. Since it is 100% African-American, this is a no-brainer. Make sure to have African-Americans be the people who deliver the message. This step will also help by putting more pressure on the rental market as 5000 more families will then have to compete for rental housing with low-income workers. This will provide another opportunity for hundreds of millions of government funds to be funneled to corporations when these buildings are torn down and developers can build up other less-secure buildings in their place. Make sure to tell the 5000 families evicted from public housing that you are not letting them back for their own good. Tell them you are trying to save them from living in a segregated neighborhood. This will also send a good signal–if the government can refuse to allow people back, private concerns are free to do the same or worse.

    Step Twenty Three. Shut down as much public health as possible. Sick and elderly people and moms with little kids need access to public healthcare. Keep the public hospital, which hosted about 350,000 visits a year before the disaster, closed. Keep the neighborhood clinics closed. Put all the pressure on the private healthcare facilities and provoke economic and racial tensions there between the insured and uninsured.

    Step Twenty Four. Close as many public mental healthcare providers as possible. The trauma of the disaster will seriously increase stress on everyone. Left untreated, medical experts tell us this will dramatically increase domestic violence, self-medication and drug and alcohol abuse, and of course crime.

    Step Twenty Five. Keep the city environment unfriendly to women. Women were already widely discriminated against before the storm. Make sure that you do not reopen day care centers. This, combined with the lack of healthcare, lack of affordable housing, and lack of transportation, will keep moms with kids away. If you can keep women with kids away, the city will destroy itself.

    Step Twenty Six. Create and maintain an environment where black on black crime will flourish. As long as you can keep parents out of town, keep the schools hostile to kids without parents, keep public healthcare closed, make only low-paying jobs available, not fund social workers or prosecutors or public defenders or police, and keep chaos the norm, young black men will certainly kill other young black men. To increase the visibility of the crime problem, bring in the National Guard in fatigues to patrol the streets in their camouflage hummers.

    Step Twenty Seven. Strip the local elected predominately African American government of its powers. Make certain the money that is coming in to fix up the region is not under their control. Privatize as much as you can as quickly as you can–housing, healthcare, and education for starters. When in doubt, privatize. Create an appointed commission of people who have no experience in government to make all the decisions. In fact, it is better to create several such commissions, that way no one will really be sure who is in charge and there will be much more delay and conflict. Treat the local people like they are stupid, you know what is best for them much better than they do.

    Step Twenty Eight. Create lots of planning processes but give them no authority. Overlap them where possible. Give people conflicting signals whether their neighborhood will be allowed to rebuild or be turned into green space. This will create confusion, conflict and aggravation. People will blame the officials closest to them–the local African-American officials, even though they do not have any authority to do anything about these plans since they do not control the rebuilding money.

    Step Twenty Nine. Hold an election but make it very difficult for displaced voters to participate. In fact, do not allow any voting in any place outside the state even we do it for other countries and even though hundreds of thousands of people are still displaced. This is very important because when people are not able to vote, those who have been able to return can say “Well, they didn’t even vote, so I guess they are not interested in returning.”

    Step Thirty. Get the elected officials out of the way and make room for corporations to make a profit. There are billions to be made in this process for well-connected national and international corporations. There is so much chaos that no one will be able to figure out exactly where the money went for a long time. There is no real attempt to make sure that local businesses, especially African-American businesses, get contracts–at best they get modest subcontracts from the corporations which got the big money. Make sure the authorities prosecute a couple of little people who ripped off $2000–that will temporarily satisfy people who know they are being ripped off and divert attention from the big money rip-offs. This will also provide another opportunity to blame the victims–as critics can say “Well, we gave them lots of money, they must have wasted it, how much more can they expect from us?”

    Step Thirty One. Keep people’s attention diverted from the African-American city. Pour money into Iraq instead of the Gulf Coast. Corporations have figured out how to make big bucks whether we are winning or losing the war. It is easier to convince the country to support war–support for cities is much, much tougher. When the war goes badly, you can change the focus of the message to supporting the troops. Everyone loves the troops. No one can say we all love African-Americans. Focus on terrorists–that always seems to work.

    Step Thirty Two. Refuse to talk about or look seriously at race. Condemn anyone who dares to challenge the racism of what is going on–accuse them of “playing the race card” or say they are paranoid. Criticize people who challenge the exclusion of African-Americans as people who “just want to go back to the bad old days.” Repeat the message that you want something better for everyone. Use African American spokespersons where possible.

    Step Thirty-Three. Repeat these steps.

    Note to readers. Every fact in this list actually happened and continues to happen in New Orleans after Katrina.

    Cameron, EU Collaborator

    0

    The UK Column
    Cameron, EU CollaboratorBrian Gerrish and David Noakes are the editors.

    Download the paper in PDF format.

    The UK Column October 2007 – complete copy, (.pdf).

    http://eutruth.org.uk/

     

    Is Waterboarding Torture?

    0

    I’d like to digress from my usual analysis of insurgent strategy and tactics to speak out on an issue of grave importance to Small Wars Journal readers. We, as a nation, are having a crisis of honor.

    Last week the Attorney General nominee Judge Michael Mukasey refused to define waterboarding terror suspects as torture. On the same day MSNBC television pundit and former Republican Congressman Joe Scarborough quickly spoke out in its favor. On his morning television broadcast, he asserted, without any basis in fact, that the efficacy of the waterboard a viable tool to be used on Al Qaeda suspects.

    Scarborough said, “For those who don’t know, waterboarding is what we did to Khalid Sheikh Mohammed, who is the Al Qaeda number two guy that planned 9/11. And he talked …” He then speculated that “If you ask Americans whether they think it’s okay for us to waterboard in a controlled environment … 90% of Americans will say ‘yes.’” Sensing that what he was saying sounded extreme, he then claimed he did not support torture but that waterboarding was debatable as a technique: “You know, that’s the debate. Is waterboarding torture? … I don’t want the United States to engage in the type of torture that [Senator] John McCain had to endure.”

    In fact, waterboarding is just the type of torture then Lt. Commander John McCain had to endure at the hands of the North Vietnamese. As a former Master Instructor and Chief of Training at the US Navy Survival, Evasion, Resistance and Escape School (SERE) in San Diego, California I know the waterboard personally and intimately. SERE staff were required undergo the waterboard at its fullest. I was no exception. I have personally led, witnessed and supervised waterboarding of hundreds of people. It has been reported that both the Army and Navy SERE school’s interrogation manuals were used to form the interrogation techniques used by the US army and the CIA for its terror suspects. What was not mentioned in most articles was that SERE was designed to show how an evil totalitarian, enemy would use torture at the slightest whim. If this is the case, then waterboarding is unquestionably being used as torture technique.

    The carnival-like he-said, she-said of the legality of Enhanced Interrogation Techniques has become a form of doublespeak worthy of Catch-22. Having been subjected to them all, I know these techniques, if in fact they are actually being used, are not dangerous when applied in training for short periods. However, when performed with even moderate intensity over an extended time on an unsuspecting prisoner — it is torture, without doubt. Couple that with waterboarding and the entire medley not only “shock the conscience” as the statute forbids -it would terrify you. Most people can not stand to watch a high intensity kinetic interrogation. One has to overcome basic human decency to endure watching or causing the effects. The brutality would force you into a personal moral dilemma between humanity and hatred. It would leave you to question the meaning of what it is to be an American.

    We live at a time where Americans, completely uninformed by an incurious media and enthralled by vengeance-based fantasy television shows like “24”, are actually cheering and encouraging such torture as justifiable revenge for the September 11 attacks. Having been a rescuer in one of those incidents and personally affected by both attacks, I am bewildered at how casually we have thrown off the mantle of world-leader in justice and honor. Who we have become? Because at this juncture, after Abu Ghraieb and other undignified exposed incidents of murder and torture, we appear to have become no better than our opponents.

    With regards to the waterboard, I want to set the record straight so the apologists can finally embrace the fact that they condone and encourage torture.

    History’s Lessons Ignored

    Before arriving for my assignment at SERE, I traveled to Cambodia to visit the torture camps of the Khmer Rouge. The country had just opened for tourism and the effect of the genocide was still heavy in the air. I wanted to know how real torturers and terror camp guards would behave and learn how to resist them from survivors of such horrors. I had previously visited the Nazi death camps Dachau and Bergen-Belsen. I had met and interviewed survivors of Buchenwald, Auschwitz and Magdeburg when I visited Yad Vashem in Jerusalem. However, it was in the S-21 death camp known as Tuol Sleng, in downtown Phnom Penh, where I found a perfectly intact inclined waterboard. Next to it was the painting on how it was used. It was cruder than ours mainly because they used metal shackles to strap the victim down, and a tin flower pot sprinkler to regulate the water flow rate, but it was the same device I would be subjected to a few weeks later.

    On a Mekong River trip, I met a 60-year-old man, happy to be alive and a cheerful travel companion, who survived the genocide and torture … he spoke openly about it and gave me a valuable lesson: “If you want to survive, you must learn that ‘walking through a low door means you have to be able to bow.’” He told his interrogators everything they wanted to know including the truth. They rarely stopped. In torture, he confessed to being a hermaphrodite, a CIA spy, a Buddhist Monk, a Catholic Bishop and the son of the king of Cambodia. He was actually just a school teacher whose crime was that he once spoke French. He remembered “the Barrel” version of waterboarding quite well. Head first until the water filled the lungs, then you talk.

    Once at SERE and tasked to rewrite the Navy SERE program for the first time since the Vietnam War, we incorporated interrogation and torture techniques from the Middle East, Latin America and South Asia into the curriculum. In the process, I studied hundreds of classified written reports, dozens of personal memoirs of American captives from the French-Indian Wars and the American Revolution to the Argentinean ‘Dirty War’ and Bosnia. There were endless hours of videotaped debriefings from World War Two, Korea, Vietnam and Gulf War POWs and interrogators. I devoured the hundreds of pages of debriefs and video reports including those of then Commander John McCain, Colonel Nick Rowe, Lt. Dieter Dengler and Admiral James Stockdale, the former Senior Ranking Officer of the Hanoi Hilton. All of them had been tortured by the Vietnamese, Pathet Lao or Cambodians. The minutiae of North Vietnamese torture techniques was discussed with our staff advisor and former Hanoi Hilton POW Doug Hegdahl as well as discussions with Admiral Stockdale himself. The waterboard was clearly one of the tools dictators and totalitarian regimes preferred.

    There is No Debate Except for Torture Apologists

    1. Waterboarding is a torture technique. Period. There is no way to gloss over it or sugarcoat it. It has no justification outside of its limited role as a training demonstrator. Our service members have to learn that the will to survive requires them accept and understand that they may be subjected to torture, but that America is better than its enemies and it is one’s duty to trust in your nation and God, endure the hardships and return home with honor.

    2. Waterboarding is not a simulation. Unless you have been strapped down to the board, have endured the agonizing feeling of the water overpowering your gag reflex, and then feel your throat open and allow pint after pint of water to involuntarily fill your lungs, you will not know the meaning of the word.

    Waterboarding is a controlled drowning that, in the American model, occurs under the watch of a doctor, a psychologist, an interrogator and a trained strap-in/strap-out team. It does not simulate drowning, as the lungs are actually filling with water. There is no way to simulate that. The victim is drowning. How much the victim is to drown depends on the desired result (in the form of answers to questions shouted into the victim’s face) and the obstinacy of the subject. A team doctor watches the quantity of water that is ingested and for the physiological signs which show when the drowning effect goes from painful psychological experience, to horrific suffocating punishment to the final death spiral.

    Waterboarding is slow motion suffocation with enough time to contemplate the inevitability of black out and expiration —usually the person goes into hysterics on the board. For the uninitiated, it is horrifying to watch and if it goes wrong, it can lead straight to terminal hypoxia. When done right it is controlled death. Its lack of physical scarring allows the victim to recover and be threaten with its use again and again.

    Call it “Chinese Water Torture,” “the Barrel,” or “the Waterfall,” it is all the same. Whether the victim is allowed to comply or not is usually left up to the interrogator. Many waterboard team members, even in training, enjoy the sadistic power of making the victim suffer and often ask questions as an after thought. These people are dangerous and predictable and when left unshackled, unsupervised or undetected they bring us the murderous abuses seen at Abu Ghraieb, Baghram and Guantanamo. No doubt, to avoid human factors like fear and guilt someone has created a one-button version that probably looks like an MRI machine with high intensity waterjets.

    3. If you support the use of waterboarding on enemy captives, you support the use of that torture on any future American captives. The Small Wars Council had a spirited discussion about this earlier in the year, especially when former Marine Generals Krulak and Hoar rejected all arguments for torture.

    Evan Wallach wrote a brilliant history of the use of waterboarding as a war crime and the open acceptance of it by the administration in an article for Columbia Journal for Transnational Law. In it he describes how the ideological Justice Department lawyer, John Yoo validated the current dilemma we find ourselves in by asserting that the President had powers above and beyond the Constitution and the Congress:

    “Congress doesn’t have the power to tie the President’s hands in regard to torture as an interrogation technique….It’s the core of the Commander-in-Chief function. They can’t prevent the President from ordering torture.”

    That is an astounding assertion. It reflects a basic disregard for the law of the United States, the Constitution and basic moral decency.

    Another MSNBC commentator defended the administration and stated that waterboarding is “not a new phenomenon” and that it had “been pinned on President Bush … but this has been part of interrogation for years and years and years.” He is correct, but only partially. The Washington Post reported in 2006 that it was mainly America’s enemies that used it as a principal interrogation method. After World War 2, Japanese waterboard team members were tried for war crimes. In Vietnam, service members were placed under investigation when a photo of a field-expedient waterboarding became publicly known.

    Torture in captivity simulation training reveals there are ways an enemy can inflict punishment which will render the subject wholly helpless and which will generally overcome his willpower. The torturer will trigger within the subject a survival instinct, in this case the ability to breathe, which makes the victim instantly pliable and ready to comply. It is purely and simply a tool by which to deprive a human being of his ability to resist through physical humiliation. The very concept of an American Torturer is an anathema to our values.

    I concur strongly with the opinions of professional interrogators like Colonel Stewart Herrington, and victims of torture like Senator John McCain. If you want consistent, accurate and reliable intelligence, be inquisitive, analytical, patient but most of all professional, amiable and compassionate.

    Who will complain about the new world-wide embrace of torture? America has justified it legally at the highest levels of government. Even worse, the administration has selectively leaked supposed successes of the water board such as the alleged Khalid Sheik Mohammed confessions. However, in the same breath the CIA sources for the Washington Post noted that in Mohammed’s case they got information but “not all of it reliable.” Of course, when you waterboard you get all the magic answers you want -because remember, the subject will talk. They all talk! Anyone strapped down will say anything, absolutely anything to get the torture to stop. Torture. Does. Not. Work.

    According to the President, this is not a torture, so future torturers in other countries now have an American legal basis to perform the acts. Every hostile intelligence agency and terrorist in the world will consider it a viable tool, which can be used with impunity. It has been turned into perfectly acceptable behavior for information finding.

    A torture victim can be made to say anything by an evil nation that does not abide by humanity, morality, treaties or rule of law. Today we are on the verge of becoming that nation. Is it possible that September 11 hurt us so much that we have decided to gladly adopt the tools of KGB, the Khmer Rouge, the Nazi Gestapo, the North Vietnamese, the North Koreans and the Burmese Junta?

    What next if the waterboarding on a critical the captive doesn’t work and you have a timetable to stop the “ticking bomb” scenario? Electric shock to the genitals? Taking a pregnant woman and electrocuting the fetus inside her? Executing a captive’s children in front of him? Dropping live people from an airplane over the ocean? It has all been done by governments seeking information. All claimed the same need to stop the ticking bomb. It is not a far leap from torture to murder, especially if the subject is defiant. Are we willing to trade our nation’s soul for tactical intelligence?

    Is There a Place for the Waterboard?

    Yes. The waterboard must go back to the realm of SERE training our operators, soldiers, sailors, airmen and Marines. We must now double our efforts to prepare for its inevitable and uncontrolled use of by our future enemies.

    Until recently, only a few countries considered it effective. Now American use of the waterboard as an interrogation tool has assuredly guaranteed that our service members and agents who are captured or detained by future enemies will be subject to it as part of the most routine interrogations. Forget threats, poor food, the occasional face slap and sexual assaults. This was not a dignified ‘taking off the gloves’; this was descending to the level of our opposition in an equally brutish and ugly way. Waterboarding will be one our future enemy’s go-to techniques because we took the gloves off to brutal interrogation. Now our enemies will take the gloves off and thank us for it.

    There may never again be a chance that Americans will benefit from the shield of outrage and public opinion when our future enemy uses of torture. Brutal interrogation, flash murder and extreme humiliation of American citizens, agents and members of the armed forces may now be guaranteed because we have mindlessly, but happily, broken the seal on the Pandora’s box of indignity, cruelty and hatred in the name of protecting America. To defeat Bin Laden many in this administration have openly embraced the methods of by Hitler, Pinochet, Pol Pot, Galtieri and Saddam Hussein.

    Not A Fair Trade for America’s Honor

    I have stated publicly and repeatedly that I would personally cut Bin Laden’s heart out with a plastic MRE spoon if we per chance meet on the battlefield. Yet, once captive I believe that the better angels of our nature and our nation’s core values would eventually convince any terrorist that they indeed have erred in their murderous ways. Once convicted in a fair, public tribunal, they would have the rest of their lives, however short the law makes it, to come to terms with their God and their acts.

    This is not enough for our President. He apparently secretly ordered the core American values of fairness and justice to be thrown away in the name of security from terrorists. He somehow determined that the honor the military, the CIA and the nation itself was an acceptable trade for the superficial knowledge of the machinations of approximately 2,000 terrorists, most of whom are being decimated in Iraq or martyring themselves in Afghanistan. It is a short sighted and politically motivated trade that is simply disgraceful. There is no honor here.

    It is outrageous that American officials, including the Attorney General and a legion of minions of lower rank have not only embraced this torture but have actually justified it, redefined it to a misdemeanor, brought it down to the level of a college prank and then bragged about it. The echo chamber that is the American media now views torture as a heroic and macho.

    Torture advocates hide behind the argument that an open discussion about specific American interrogation techniques will aid the enemy. Yet, convicted Al Qaeda members and innocent captives who were released to their host nations have already debriefed the world through hundreds of interviews, movies and documentaries on exactly what methods they were subjected to and how they endured. In essence, our own missteps have created a cadre of highly experienced lecturers for Al Qaeda’s own virtual SERE school for terrorists.

    Congressional leaders from both sides of the aisle need to stand up for American values and clearly specify that coercive interrogation using the waterboard is torture and, except for limited examples of training our service members and intelligence officers, it should be stopped completely and finally —oh, and this time without a Presidential signing statement reinterpreting the law.

    http://www.montanawomenfor.org/2007/11/10/is-waterboarding-torture/

    Negativity on Islam ‘fuels tension’

    0

    Muhammad Abdul Bari criticised Government for fuelling tensions in Muslim community The UK must be careful how it tackles terrorism and treats Islamic culture if it is to avoid recreating a society reminiscent of Nazi Germany, the head of the Muslim Council of Britain has warned.

    Muhammad Abdul Bari, in an interview with the Daily Telegraph, criticised the Government for fuelling tensions in the Muslim community rather than dissipating them.

    He told the paper: “There is a disproportionate amount of discussion surrounding us. The air is thick with suspicion and unease. It is not good for the Muslim community, it is not good for society.”

    The Muslim leader continued: “Every society has to be really careful so that situation does not lead us to a time when people’s minds can be poisoned as they were in the 1930s.

    “If your community is perceived in a very negative manner and poll after poll says that we are alienated then Muslims begin to feel very vulnerable.

    “We are seen as creating problems, not as bringing anything, and that is not good for society.”

    The Government’s foreign policy and particularly the Iraq war, which he described as a “disaster”, had been used by criminals as a weapon to encourage young people into extremism, he said.

    Dr Bari also criticised the head of MI5, Jonathan Evans, for painting a bleak picture of the terrorist threat the night before the Queen’s Speech this week. He said: “I don’t think it was a good thing to share information in this way, I think it is creating a scare in the community and wider society. It probably helps some people who try to recruit the young to terrorism.”

    The leader believes integration should be a two-way process and that the emphasis should be on the positive aspects of Muslim culture instead of the threat of al Qaida.

    Muslim principles – including stricter attitudes to drinking, sex, marriage, abortion and dress – could improve the country as a whole and add more morality, he argues. Dr Bari said: “Marriage should not be forced on people but parents can be a catalyst… Young people are emotional, they want idealism. Older people have gone through all sorts of things and become a bit more experienced.”

    http://news.uk.msn.com/Article.aspx?cp-documentid=6648007

    Scotland Yard missing cash claims

    0

    The pressure on Sir Ian Blair has intensified after it emerged that Scotland Yard was probing allegations that millions of pounds in “expenses” had gone missing.

    The Met’s professional standards watchdog has launched a review of spending on American Express cards issued to staff.

    According to the News of the World, up to £6 million is unaccounted for and anti-corruption officers are preparing to interview hundreds of detectives.

    There are claims that cash has been lavished on luxury watches, flatscreen TVs and holidays.

    A spokesman for the Yard confirmed that two of the force’s detectives had been arrested last month on suspicion of theft in connection to the probe.

    “The Director of Professional Standards is currently conducting a review around the issue and usage of the Met’s American Express cards,” he said. “Any alleged criminality that is uncovered will be dealt with robustly. We have a comprehensive plan to recover any money that is outstanding.”

    The Met spokesman said the detectives were arrested on October 5 and October 8 respectively, and both had been bailed pending further investigation.

    The news comes as the clamour for the Commissioner to step down over the Stockwell tragedy continues to grow.

    An Independent Police Complaints Commission report into the shooting of Jean Charles de Menezes criticised Sir Ian personally last week for holding up its investigation.

    Scotland Yard was also found guilty at the Old Bailey of endangering the public during the botched operation, which saw the innocent Brazilian killed after being mistaken for a would-be suicide bomber.

    http://news.uk.msn.com/Article.aspx?cp-documentid=6652240

    Blair ‘knew Iraq had no WMD’

    0

    David Cracknell TONY BLAIR privately conceded two weeks before the Iraq war that Saddam Hussein did not have any usable weapons of mass destruction, Robin Cook, the former foreign secretary, reveals today.John Scarlett, chairman of the joint intelligence committee (JIC), also “assented” that Saddam had no such weapons, says Cook.

    His revelations, taken from a diary that he kept as a senior minister during the months leading up to war, are published today in The Sunday Times. They shatter the case for war put forward by the government that Iraq presented “a real and present danger” to Britain.

    Cook, who resigned shortly before the invasion of Iraq, also reveals there was a near mutiny in the cabinet, triggered by David Blunkett, the home secretary, when it first discussed military action against Iraq.

    The prime minister ignored the “large number of ministers who spoke up against the war”, according to Cook. He also “deliberately crafted a suggestive phrasing” to mislead the public into thinking there was a link between Iraq and Al-Qaeda, and he did not want United Nations weapons inspections to be successful, writes the former cabinet minister.

    Cook suggests that the government misled the House of Commons and asked MPs to vote for war on a “false prospectus”.

    He also reveals that Blair earlier gave President Bill Clinton a private assurance that he would support him in military action in Iraq if action in the UN failed “and it would certainly have been in line with his previous practice if he had given President Bush a private assurance of British support”.

    Cook’s long-awaited diaries, published in book form as Point of Departure, are the first memoir of any member of Blair’s cabinet. His disclosures are likely to lead to renewed calls for a judicial inquiry into the legitimacy of the war.

    The Hutton inquiry into the death of Dr David Kelly has dealt only with the question of what the government believed ahead of publication of its Iraq dossier in September 2002 and whether Downing Street hardened intelligence reports to make the threat from Saddam seem more compelling.

    Cook today opens a new controversy. He says that just days before sending troops into action, Blair no longer believed Saddam had weapons of mass destruction ready for firing within 45 minutes, the claim the prime minister had repeatedly made when arguing the case for war.

    Cook reveals that on February 20 this year he was given a briefing by Scarlett. “The presentation was impressive in its integrity and shorn of the political slant with which No 10 encumbers any intelligence assessment,” Cook writes in his diary. “My conclusion at the end of an hour is that Saddam probably does not have weapons of mass destruction in the sense of weapons that could be used against large-scale civilian targets.”

    Two weeks later, on March 5, Cook saw Blair. At the time the government was still trying to get a fresh UN resolution and Cook was still in government as leader of the Commons.

    Cook writes: “The most revealing exchange came when we talked about Saddam’s arsenal. I told him, ‘It’s clear from the private briefing I have had that Saddam has no weapons of mass destruction in a sense of weapons that could strike at strategic cities. But he probably does have several thousand battlefield chemical munitions. Do you never worry that he might use them against British troops?’

    “[Blair replied:] ‘Yes, but all the effort he has had to put into concealment makes it difficult for him to assemble them quickly for use’.”

    Cook continues: “There were two distinct elements to this exchange that sent me away deeply troubled. The first was that the timetable to war was plainly not driven by the progress of the UN weapons inspections. Tony made no attempt to pretend that what Hans Blix [the UN’s chief weapons inspector] might report would make any difference to the countdown to invasion.

    “The second troubling element to our conversation was that Tony did not try to argue me out of the view that Saddam did not have real weapons of mass destruction that were designed for strategic use against city populations and capable of being delivered with reliability over long distances. I had now expressed that view to both the chairman of the JIC and to the prime minister and both had assented in it.

    “At the time I did believe it likely that Saddam had retained a quantity of chemical munitions for tactical use on the battlefield. These did not pose ‘a real and present danger to Britain’ as they were not designed for use against city populations and by definition could threaten British personnel only if we were to deploy them on the battlefield within range of Iraqi artillery.

    “I had now twice been told that even those chemical shells had been put beyond operational use in response to the pressure from intrusive inspections. I have no reason to doubt that Tony Blair believed in September that Saddam really had weapons of mass destruction ready for firing within 45 minutes. What was clear from this conversation was that he did not believe it himself in March.”

    Cook asks: “If No 10 accepted that Saddam had no real weapons of mass destruction which he could credibly deliver against city targets and if they themselves believed that he could not reassemble his chemical weapons in a credible timescale for use on the battlefield, just how much of a threat did they really think Saddam represented?”

    He raises “the gravest of political questions. The rules of the Commons explicitly require ministers to correct the record as soon as they are aware that they may have misled parliament. If the government did come to know that the [United States] State Department did not trust the claims in the September dossier and that some of even their top experts did not believe them, should they not have told parliament before asking the Commons to vote for war on a false prospectus?”

    Cook decided not to publish his diaries ahead of last week’s Labour conference in Bournemouth. Had he done so, his revelations would have ensured Blair received a much tougher ride from activists, many of whom are deeply uneasy about the war.

    He reveals that in the months leading up to the war Downing Street aides, including Alastair Campbell, Blair’s former director of communications, and Jonathan Powell, his chief of staff, were obsessed with not falling out with Washington.

    Cook discloses that several cabinet ministers had held misgivings about the war, not just himself and Clare Short. At a cabinet meeting in late February 2002, Blunkett asked for a discussion on Iraq and Cook received cries of “hear, hear” from cabinet colleagues when he argued that Arab governments regarded Israel, not Iraq, as the real problem for the Middle East. Cook records it was “the nearest thing I’ve heard to a mutiny in cabinet”.

    His diary entry of March 7, 2002, a year before the war, says that Blunkett and Patricia Hewitt, the trade secretary, raised objections at cabinet.

    “A momentous moment. A real discussion at cabinet. Tony permitted us to have the debate on Iraq which David [Blunkett] and I had asked for. For the first time that I can recall in five years, Tony was out on a limb.”

    According to Cook, Blunkett asked Blair: “What has changed that suddenly gives us the legal right to take military action that we didn’t have a few months ago?”

    Hewitt warned Blair: “We are in danger of being seen as close to President Bush, but without any influence over President Bush.”

    But the prime minister was “totally unfazed” and, when Hewitt again raised objections at cabinet the following month, Blair refused to be boxed in, telling colleagues: “The time to debate the legal base for our action should be when we take that action.”

    Cook reveals that Bush had wanted to hold a crucial war council with Blair in London on the weekend before the invasion of Iraq, a move that would have been a public relations disaster given public hostility to the war. Blair persuaded Bush to hold the summit in the Azores instead.

    By September last year most of the cabinet had fallen into line. At cabinet on September 23, before parliament was recalled from its summer break, Cook says: “Personally I found it a grim meeting. Much of the two hours was taken up with a succession of loyalty oaths for Tony’s line.”

    He says only Estelle Morris, then education secretary, “bravely” reported public disquiet that Britain was simply following Bush.

    Blair accused of ‘gold-digging’

    0

    Tony Blair has been accused of “gold-digging” and “money-sucking” after he reportedly charged £240,000 for giving a speech in China. The China Youth Daily newspaper said the address had been like “listening to some domestic county or city-level official” and had given “nothing new”.

    But The Beijing News called the former UK prime minister’s visit an “honour”.

    Mr Blair’s spokesman said the speech had been “very well received by the audience in the hall”.

    ‘Tentacles’

    The former Labour leader spoke in Dongguan, in China’s southern province of Guangdong, as part of a visit sponsored by a real estate company.

    The subject of his address was economic development and how it could be combined with environmentally friendly policies.

    The Guangzhou Daily reported that Mr Blair had received $500,000 – about £240,000 – before tax for the speech. After tax, the fee was estimated to be £156,000.

    The Guangzhou Daily said: “Like many world-renowned statesmen, Tony Blair, who only recently left his throne as British prime minister on 27 June this year, has been rushing around the world making commercial speeches after leaving office.

    “This time, Blair’s money-sucking tentacles have extended into China.”

    A commentary in China Youth Daily says: “Mr Blair’s speech sounded familiar to me. It was like listening to some domestic county or city-level official making a report, and his viewpoints did not have too many new ideas.

    “That being the case, why did the local political and business sector spend such a huge sum of money to ‘buy’ this speech, and was it worth it?”

    It adds: “With China’s opening up and development, China will also become a golden market for lectures by international celebrities like [former US President Bill] Clinton and Blair, and more international celebrities will inevitably be invited to give speeches in China in future.

    “That being the case, we should be a bit less frivolous and vain, a bit more modest and pragmatic, and ask for more real knowledge and new knowledge, especially if we are spending even a single cent of taxpayers’ money.”

    ‘Mystique’

    The Beijing News says: “Blair’s different treatment in the East and the West clearly shows the effect of ‘looking good from a distance’…

    “Westerners, who have had close contact with Blair, have ‘shifted their affections’ since he stood down, but he still holds mystique for Asians.”

    It adds: “In China, his speech was free to listen to… listening to a speech by a celebrity like Blair was an honour, and it was not important whether any new ideas were heard.”

    Mr Blair’s spokesman said: “Mr Blair receives a large number of invitations to speak to a whole range of organisations.

    “His speech was very well received by the audience in the hall.”

    Mr Blair, who was replaced by Gordon Brown when he left Downing Street after 10 years, is now the Middle East envoy for the “Quartet” of the European Union, United Nations, Russia and the US.

    He announced last month that he had signed a deal to write his memoirs, reportedly worth about £5m.

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/7086474.stm

    9/11 Truth – We’ve got the BBC on the run

    By Mick Meaney
    RINF Alternative News

    Since July 2007 British scientist, member of Scholars for 9/11 Truth & Justice and RINF science correspondent, John A. Blacker, has been in an ongoing battle with the BBC over their lie infested hit piece programme ‘9/11: The Conspiracy Files’, which aired in February 2007 and was designed to present an unfair view of the 9/11 truth movement and prominent researchers. Mr Blacker is currently in ‘pre-action protocol’ with the BBC, meaning they have to try and settle the argument out of court.

    In this latest update, Mr Blacker has been informed of a scheduled meeting, due to take place in October which has now been pushed back further to late November. This is the third time the BBC has bought more time by delaying the meeting. A clear sign they are struggling to piece together a legal case to defend their actions.

    With the BBC desperately on the run, I am making available the latest letter Mr Blacker has sent them, in which he pin points even more of the faults contained in the programme and demands an apology for their blatant lies as their hit piece is a complete disrespect to the truth and an insult to all who died on 9/11.

    Please take the time to read the letter published below. As stated many months ago, RINF Alternative News will not allow this issue to be dropped and we’ve only just begun the battle to see justice prevail and the BBC admit it is guilty of mass public deception in a court of law.

    Pre action for damages without prejudice.

    Thursday, 08 November 2007

    Dear Chairman,

    Thank you for your letter dated 31 October 2007 and the 6 section Cover notes for appeal of which accompanied said.

    Firstly I request and Expect each and every member of the decision panel to disclose their affiliations such as to “Common Purpose” “Masons” etc, etc and to forward said disclosure to the Chair. I am a member of AE911 truth, STJ911 truth and also ST911 truth, I am not currently a member of any political party & I am 1 of three professional partners of Physical Systems, Lancaster England & a qualified Physicist & Mechanical Engineer.

    I shall be going through the folder you sent in order stating from section 1 and making my comments & observations as I proceed if I may, as this is the first opportunity I have been given to these information resources in their current format.

    SECTION 1

    (1) The Item

    The Conspiracy files team spoke to and recorded the testimony of many eyewitnesses, fire fighters, police officers, and public high witnesses, plus also officialdom high witnesses and had access to written testimony from many high witnesses via official sites on the WWW.

    YET NOT ONE SINGLE HIGH WITNESS WAS PRESENTED IN THE DOCUMENTARY TO PUT THE TRUTH PERSPECTIVE.

    If the documentary was not biases — WHY not one?

    Take for example the evidence of Fire CAPTAIN KARIN DESHORE who states on page 15 of the official report given to official government 911 investigators quote:

    “SOMEWHERE AROUND THE MIDDLE OF THE WORLD
    TRADE CENTER THERE WAS THIS ORANGE AND RED FLASH
    COMING OUT INITIALLY IT WAS JUST ONE FLASH THEN
    THIS FLASH JUST KEPT POPPING ALL THE WAY AROUND THE
    BUILDING AND THAT BUILDING HAD STARTED TO EXPLODE THE
    POPPING SOUND AND WITH EACH POPPING SOUND IT WAS
    INITIALLY AN ORANGE AND THEN RED FLASH CAME OUT OF
    THE BUILDING AND THEN IT WOULD JUST GO ALL AROUND THE
    BUILDING ON BOTH SIDES AS FAR AS COULD SEE THESE
    POPPING SOUNDS AND THE EXPLOSIONS WERE GETTING BIGGER
    GOING BOTH UP AND DOWN AND THEN ALL AROUND THE
    BUILDING”

    What sort of research did the BBC team do? How can a documentary ignore such clear damming evidence?

    WHAT WAS THE ACTUAL PROCESS OF SELECTING INFORMATION TO PRESENT TO THE PUBLIC?

    What checks and balances ensured impartiality & the delivery of FACTUAL & accurate information worthy of a BBC Documentary & BBC viewers ?????

    Alex Jones stated that he was filmed for many many hours and forwarded documentary proof upon proof to the BBC documentary team, yet all of that proof was ignored in favour of what was shown — why? What selection criteria was used, if not to deliberately select out everything which was conclusive in favour of what was actually shown — which was nothing more than Hearsay, Opinion & NEGATIVE Stereotyping of truth members.

    High witnesses, actual Fire fighters and actual police were ignored by the BBC crew in favour of 3rd hand 3rd rate information. Why? Where is the journalistic integrity in this so called documentary?

    Prof Jim Fetzer states the BBC team recorded many hours with him yet showed next to nothing of what he explained were the key science issues of the truth movement & the key evidence — why — what has the BBC got to hide — perhaps the FACTS???

    Why was all of this key evidence censored?

    (2.1)

    The truth movement

    A point which is missing, is the fact NO actual Physics was mentioned either to back the official government (Physically Impossible) lies, or more importantly, to explain why so many informed “intelligent” professional people do not believe the government lies because the official story simply defies the laws of physics.

    1 There was not enough energy in the “collapse sequence” to turn the 300,000 tonnes of concrete and all of the floor panels to DUST — by a factor of at least 10.

    2 3 buildings came to ground at near freefall; hence the undamaged, heaviest and strongest lower floors offered near zero resistance which was consistent with falling through clear AIR only.

    3 Falling bodies never take the path of greatest resistance, EVER, always the path of least resistance only! (without exception)

    4 A 757 simply can not fit through a 20 foot hole at the Pentagon — the program did not show the hole prior to collapse at the Pentagon, but misled the public into thinking the Jet had caused the damage after collapse. (TOTAL DECEIT)

    I will stick to just 4 points here, however there are more, please see the actual correspondence from myself re key omissions of key & important points.

    The Collapse of the twin towers.

    There was not a single mention that NIST, who were hired by the US government to explain why the towers came to ground — did not cover the actual collapse sequence AT ALL.

    The NIST report’s title was:

    “Final report on the collapse of the world trade centre towers.”

    Yet the official report did not actually even mention the “collapse” of the world trade centre towers or anything to do with building 007 (demolition 003).

    In summary MANY pieces of KEY DAMMING information were deliberately and methodically left out or deliberately & methodically removed from the documentary during editing because they were far too conclusive, and far too damaging to the official government lies peddled by this BBC documentary. Instead of reporting the bread & butter truth issues the program was bulked out with nonsense from a science fiction writer and some really dodgy reporting from “Popular Mechanics” et al who gave not one slither of proof to the statements they made.

    NOT a single first hand account was shown or mentioned — why? What process lead to no first hand accounts being selected or deemed worthy to be included or reported on in what was supposed to be a factual documentary?

    SECTION 002 correction:

    A second version of the letter dated 07/072007 was sent to the BBC via email to replace the one with hand written maths, this second version had typo corrections and also clearer printed maths which was better suited to publication online for the whole world to see.

    http://rinf.com/alt-news/911-truth/st911-scientist-to-sue-bbc-for-public-deception/776/

    SECTION 3

    The original letter was intended to pursue action for damages and apology.
    The response by the BBC was very positive as can be seen from the reply letters and it was at this point felt that whilst the documentary was a piece of yellow journalism designed to discredit the truth movement, it was perhaps not necessarily targeting and singling out any would be qualified scientist who was prepared to take a closer look at the evidence in detail, although it certainly did not encourage closer scrutiny as any fair and balanced documentary (considering all the evidence there is) should promote.

    NOTE: What is the point of a BBC documentary if it does not promote learning and further research into the subject matter, as opposed to just reinforcing the “Physically Impossible” government lies?

    As such after this point the Apology (for total public deception) and hopefully another program incorporating the actual key evidence and the actual first hand High witness testimony, would suffice.

    May I complement the team on what was visually, an excellent piece, the problem lies with the integrity of other aspects of the program as stated in correspondence, including this.

    SECTIONS 4.

    Fine

    SECTION 5.

    On page 2.

     “If a large passenger jet crashed into the Pentagon ….. why was the hole in the exterior wall apparently so small?”

    Whilst this script was being spoken, Images of the damage at the pentagon was being flashed, the problem is, it shows the damage AFTER collapse, as being the actual damaged caused by the Jet impact. Only a knowledgeable person would know the image shown was “After Collapse” some 20 minutes later, and was not the damage caused by the jet impact as the sequence implies.

    If only the 20 ft hole and the pre collapse images had been shown then this would have been honest journalism. As a result of confusing the viewer by flashing what was dishonest journalism and having those post collapse images associated with the initial jet impact, which was reinforced by the way in which the viewer was fed words and images together — this is propaganda Yellow Journalism portraying FALSE FACTS DECEPTION by stealth.

    On page 2 again,

    “Could a controlled demolition have caused this building to collapse at the World Trade Centre?”

    How misleading could one short question statement & video combination be? The viewer sees a 47 story steel framed building descending straight down at near freefall of which is not one of the twin towers, it is not called by its name, Building WTC007, and the viewer is not informed the building came to ground on the actual day of 911 into its own footprint at near freefall speed.

    Seeing as most of the population only know that 2 tall buildings were destroyed on the day of 911, would it not be honest journalism to actually name the building and mention the particular circumstances of which the building came to ground and of which is key to the truth movement perspective at the very least?

    Again this is an example of deception by KEY FACT OMMISION.

    On Page 12

    19:22 into the documentary – the images are not of 5 Alleged Hijackers arriving and checking in at Dulles airport as the commentary suggests, but are in fact 2 young men checking in hundreds of miles from DULLES at 5.45:08 on 9-11-01 in a an alleged link flight.

    Why was the misleading CCTV image used to totally deceive the unsuspecting Public viewer in combination with misleading narration? Why was the genuine actual image not shown, if they exist?

    On Page 13.

    Minutes later the façade of the building collapsed.
    The military say there was limited damage to the exterior wall, ……cont
    NO mention was made of the no fly zone around the pentagon and how large it is. No mention was made of the two rings of ground to air missile defence. No mention was made of the fact if any unauthorised aircraft reaches the outer zone jets are automatically scrambled to intercept and take under 10 seconds (YES UNDER 10 seconds) from lift-off to reach the Pentagon. No mention that if the unauthorised aircraft reaches the inner zone, regardless of transponder on or off, the missile batteries shoot until the target is destroyed.

    These key omissions are clear evidence of deliberate bias in reporting by omitting key information essential for the viewer to make a knowledgeable informed assessment of the Pentagon FACTS.

    On Page 14.

    21:19 into the documentary an engineer states: “What I usually say is that is Bullshit, but what I’ll say is that it’s just flawed people that have something to dream about to make a name for themselves. It’s absolutely not true.

    NOTE: AT no point in this Engineers statement does he once mention a 757 or large JET as hitting the Pentagon. A plane & plane wreckage at the pentagon is not the same as 757 plane wreckage at the Pentagon, indeed, there was an engine and plane wreckage found at the Pentagon.

    This part of the documentary has to be one of the most deceitful parts. Pardon the pun.
    Firstly the actual question relating to 757 wreckage was never put to the engineer on camera, for all the viewer knows the BBC crew could have asked the Engineer absolutely anything.

    And What exactly is “ABSOLUTELY NOT TRUE”?

    The journalism here is of the lowest possible quality and is clearly “YELLOW” and a deliberate attempt to make members of the truth movement who question the evidence of a 757 at the Pentagon – look ridiculous – and not actually get to the bottom of the saga via irrefutable evidence etc.

    A motorcycle fuel tank & bike parts (small engine & wheels) at a crash scene is not evidence of a Wagon has crashed.

    EVEN the Engineer did not say he witnessed ANY parts off a 757 or large Jet – to suggest a qualified Engineer would not know the difference between parts off a BIG jet and parts off a small one would be the height of stupidity.

    It would be like saying an Engineer would not know the difference between a motorcycle & a wagon engine or Motorcycle & wagon wheel.

    So why did the BBC journalists not ask for specifics, such as how large were the parts etc, could the parts have come off a 757 or large jet, were they large enough to fit a 757?
    On Page 17.

    The pilot Steve O’ Brien not once states he observed a 757, does anyone suppose he would not know a 757? The man is a trained observer who’s job it is to know and identify every type of aircraft without exception, does anyone think he would not state 757 if he had actually observed a 757 at his 12 o clock?

    If he was on a routine flight do you suppose a USAF pilot or any other pilot would not know that the Pentagon was in a defended air exclusion zone and off limits to unauthorised non military planes. Why did he not mention this in his video statement?
    Does anyone think a 500mph 757 is not the easiest target for a missile defence system to shoot down?

    Why were none of these types of questions put to the pilot as these and many like them had been informed to the BBC crew by Prof Fetzer and Alex Jones?

    Is there anybody alive who believes commercial jets are permitted to pull 4 G turns by the onboard fly by wire system?

    In conclusion the Conspiracy Files Documentary was a work of Total Public deception from start to end, perfectly crafted to stealthily deceive and forward nothing which was conclusive either one way or the other, in other words, perfect propaganda YELLOW journalism by stealth, omission & deception.

    Kind regards

    J A Blacker MSc IMI (Physical Systems)(Lancaster England)

    PS: Why was Prof Judy Wood not asked to explain the 911 physics?

    Sir Ian Blair’s behaviour is simply criminal

    0

    By Simon Heffer

    Can you imagine the shamelessness and moral depravity of someone who is paid a huge sum of money to do a job, singularly fails to do it, is rebuked by those to whom he is accountable for this failure, yet refuses absolutely to acknowledge any wrong on his part, and to dismiss any notion that he should resign from his post? Well, of course, you don’t have to imagine such a situation. You just need to observe the conduct this week of the Commissioner of the Metropolitan Police, Sir Ian Blair.

    In the past 10 days, the Met has been found guilty of breaking health and safety laws by killing Jean Charles de Menezes in 2005 when he was mistaken for a terrorist. This may be an absurd conviction to result from such an appalling act: but it is a conviction none the less, and it reflects on the failings of the command structure at the head of which sits Sir Ian.

    Then, this week, the London Assembly passed a vote of no confidence in him, and the Metropolitan Police Authority has signalled that it will hold one on November 22.

    Finally, the Independent Police Complaints Commission published a report into the Stockwell shooting that accused Sir Ian of obstructing its inquiries. He would seem, as they used to say in The Sweeney, to be bang to rights.

    However, as I write, this preposterous man is still in his job. His complete ignorance of his own inadequacy is symbolised by the fact that he seeks a £25,000 performance bonus, something his blameless deputy has declined. Frankly, the way Sir Ian is carrying on, he should be paying the Government, rather than the other way round.

    For the moment, he appears safe because the Home Secretary, Jacqui Smith, has pledged support for him. Why? Is it because this has become the rule among our governing class – to support each other in clinging on to office even in the face of proven and spectacular uselessness, on the grounds that they may need the same service one day? Or is it that determination, which John Major so repulsively instigated and which has since become a habit in our establishment, of being determined to ensure that “the media” do not claim a scalp? Certainly, it is perceived that the press do not much rate Sir Ian, or think he should be in his post: but what, for heaven’s sake, can be said to be unfair about that? If the Beano had a leader column, it, too, would be calling for Sir Ian’s sacking, on the grounds that he is a disgrace to his uniform and to the once good name of our police.

    The establishment has always closed ranks: but it used to do so on the basis that those who were really toast owned up to the fact and walked the plank. Those days are gone.

    Manipulative as ever, Sir Ian has gratefully received the backing of an inexperienced and over-promoted Home Secretary, and is now milking it for all it is worth. Never mind what this does to his own, wrecked reputation: it is a nail or three in Ms Smith’s coffin as well, and highlights once more the dismally low calibre of those who now govern us.

    Above all, it is the public and their welfare that are forgotten in this disgusting series of events. The police force – or service, as Sir Ian saponaceously refers to it – is crucial in a civilised society. It is the means of protecting the law-abiding majority against the malevolent minority. Sir Ian absurdly said he would go if he felt he had lost the confidence of his officers. He lost that long ago: he should see some of the emails they send me.

    They regard him as not being a proper policeman (he has spent the past 20 years sitting mostly behind a desk or on committees) and being obsessed with ingratiating himself with his political masters. You don’t stop much crime doing that.

    But the worst crime of all is that this shocking man is still in his job. It is one the Home Secretary should solve without further delay.

    Treasury is growing fat on oil price rises

    With petrol prices now over £1 a litre – or getting on for £5 a gallon – the Treasury has reaped a huge pay-day from the taxes it levies on the sky-high price of oil.

    When a private enterprise has such good fortune there are calls from rapacious Leftists for a windfall tax to be levied – the banks have experienced this, for one – and for the money to be spread around the undeserving poor. By that logic, the reverse should now happen.

    Given that the Treasury is awash with funds it wasn’t expecting, it should cancel the recent rise in excise duty on petrol and diesel, and forswear any further rises until and unless the price of oil falls substantially.

    In truth, there is no need for us to be so viciously taxed on fuel.

    Other countries don’t do it – I was in Australia last week where petrol is around 65p a litre, and their public services hardly seem to be going under as a result. It is all about the motorist being screwed yet again by the Government to pay for the Brown terror, and it is time we protested.

    70mph motorway limit is now a nonsense

    And, on the matter of persecuting the motorist, what on earth is the point of this suggestion that the penalties for speeding drivers should be increased?

    I know there are too many people on the roads, but is disqualifying half the population really the way to rectify the problem?

    I am well aware that on single carriageway roads it is mad to drive fast, and those who do so should be severely dealt with. But does anybody seriously think that the 70mph limit on motorways is sensible?

    It dates from a time when cars had a job stopping, or even staying in one piece, if the speedo went over 65mph.

    Our cars, and our motorways, are capable of much more now: and the fact that the speed limit is widely ignored is testament to that.

    Even with the most rigorously enforced limits, idiots will still kill people on the roads. Most people who drive at 80 or even 90mph on the open road do so perfectly safely.

    Raise the limit to 80mph, and disqualify those driving over 100mph: and stop looking for ways to bleed the motorist white.

    Put out more flags? I think not

    What is all this nonsense about flying the Union flag on public buildings every day, as if we were some drivelling banana republic?

    It is, as any fule kno, about our Scottish Prime Minister desperately looking for ways to legitimate himself as “British”, and therefore having a claim to be Prime Minister of England.

    He should be in no doubt we have him, and other members of the Scottish Raj, ruling us under sufferance. We wouldn’t have minded before devolution, but since Scotland told us to sling our hook the relationship has changed.

    If the Government insists that the Union flag be flown on our public buildings all the time, I trust there will be acts of rebellion in which, in England, the Cross of St George is flown instead.

    Most of us in England, according to polls, now feel English first and British second, thanks to Labour’s policies. If the Scots are allowed their identity, we want to have one too – as English, not British.

    Why should bald guys be the butt of jokes?

    It is shortly to be an offence to make jokes about homosexuals. This may, perversely, result in homosexuals being prosecuted for laughing at themselves: the late Kenneth Williams would never have been out of jail, nor John Inman, nor Larry Grayson.

    What will become of Matt Lucas, whose hideous persona as “the only gay in the village” is hardly favourable to his fellow homosexuals?

    When can we expect laws to protect the sensibilities of the elderly, the short, the fat, the disabled, the bald, the spotty and indeed – and I feel especially strongly about this – people with red hair and/or spectacles? Where is the logical end to this insanity?

    Presumably, denying all freedom of speech: which we all know, of course, is the hidden agenda of the Brown terror.

    Radio 3 deserves a fanfare of trumpets

    There is so much to attack the BBC for, with its legions of ghastly, overpaid “stars”, militant Leftist editorialists and passion for vote-rigging. But when it does well, we should all say so.

    Almost the only part of the enterprise I am happy to pay my licence fee for – and I would happily pay even more – is Radio 3, which is almost the last manifestation of public high culture in these islands. And tomorrow night, thanks to a bold initiative by the network’s controller, Roger Wright, the BBC is mounting the first performance for 81 years of John Foulds’s massive World Requiem – written to honour the dead of the Great War – in the Albert Hall, on Armistice night.

    Foulds was a genius whose works were all but forgotten until a few years ago, as is so often the case with British composers: barely anyone alive has heard World Requiem.

    Radio 3 has played a big part in his rediscovery and in doing so has advanced our cultural life. If ever there were proof it deserves a bigger slice of cake, to promote more such great events and our heritage, this is it.

    Sarkozy has a lot to learn about money

    How amusing it was to see President Sarkozy in the White House this week and, after years of France treating America much as a dog treats a lamppost, instigating a romance again.

    Sarko daren’t be honest with his own lazy, sluggish and welfare-obsessed people, but he adores the cut and thrust of American economic life, where the strong survive and the devil takes the hindmost.

    There would be another French revolution if he tried that at home. However, Sarko has still to learn a basic lesson about free markets, which is that the value of the currencies within them can rise and fall according to the laws of supply and demand.

    America is perceived as a weak economy beset by a credit crisis and run by a clown of a president. As a result the value of its currency is in the tank.

    Sarko wants Mr Bush to change that, because it is making life rough for his and other European countries’ exporters. Sadly, only restoring the world’s confidence in the US will make that difference, and that, I fear, is still some way off.

    Bill to Oulaw ‘Voter Caging’ Introduced in U.S. Senate

    0

    Greg Palast 

    In 2004 for BBC TV the Palast team broke the story of voter caging by the Republican Party now in 2007 a Democratic congress is getting to doing something about it, led by caging victim Senator John Kerry. Read about it here ripped from our friends over at BradBlog.

    ***

    Measure, Co-Sponsored by 13 Dems, Would Prohibit ‘Voter Supression’ Tactic as Used in Florida in 2004 by Former Rove Associate, Interim US Attorney Tim Griffin…
    Brad Friedman- BradBlog

    Thirteen Democratic Senators have introduced a bill that would outlaw “voter caging,” the practice of sending mail marked “Do Not Forward” to a targeted list of voters in hopes of using the returned mailings as a basis to challenge the right of the voters to vote.

    The tactic was used by Republican operatives in both the 2000 and 2004 election, despite the Republican party having agreed in two consent decrees in 1981 and 1986 to end the practice.

    A press release from Sen. John Kerry’s (D-MA) office announcing the new bill is posted in full below.

    “The practice of ‘caging’ is reprehensible and has absolutely no place in our democracy,” Kerry says in the statement. “Here in America, every citizen, regardless of race, gender, religion or sexual orientation has the right to cast his or her vote. These are the very foundations of our democracy and this bill will ensure that we protect fundamental freedoms for millions of voters across our country.”

    The press release goes on to refer to evidence, much of it reported over the years here at The BRAD BLOG, of GOP vote caging that took place in important swing states such as Florida, Ohio, and Pennsylvania during the 2004 election. Kerry’s statement also points out the re-emergence of the topic earlier this year, after former DoJ staffer Monica Goodling testified to a Congressional panel that information concerning the involvement of former Karl Rove associate and GOP opposition researcher Tim Griffin in voter caging had not been fully disclosed during previous Congressional testimony.

    Goodling’s revelations led to Griffin’s sudden (and teary) resignation from his post as interim US Attorney in Arkansas, where he had been appointed by the DoJ under new provisions in the PATRIOT Act allowing such appointments without congressional approval.

    The controversial practice of vote caging has been used primarily to target minority voters; evidence has shown that some who ended up on the caging lists were military personnel who were unable to return the mailings because they were deployed in Iraq and Afghanistan.

    A DoJ investigation into Griffin’s, and the GOP’s, 2004 vote caging activities was then demanded by several U.S. senators last June. The American mainstream media have given little coverage to the issue of caging, despite original reporting from Greg Palast and the BBC prior to the 2004 Presidential Election.

    In addition to Kerry, the original co-sponsors of the legislation include Senators Patrick J. Leahy (D-Vt.), Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.), Russ Feingold (D-Wis.), Bill Nelson (D-Fla.), Sherrod Brown (D-Ohio), Amy Klobuchar (D-Minn.), Hillary Rodham Clinton (D-N.Y.), Sheldon Whitehouse (D-R.I.), Bob Menendez (D-N.J.), Barack Obama (D-Ill.), Charles Schumer (D-N.Y.), and Chris Dodd (D-Conn.)

    UPDATE: Here’s the actual bill. [PDF] Looks good from a quick read, though the part that allows the U.S. Elections Assistance Commission (EAC) – a four-member commission appointed by the President, and which has proven tremendously inept and compromised in all manner of things – to add new reasons why voters may be challenged is a concern. The EAC shouldn’t be entrusted with anything, much less deciding criteria for challenging voters’ right to vote. But that’s just our knee-jerk opinion.

    The press statement from Kerry’s office, announcing “The Caging Prohibition Act,” is posted in full below…

    FOR IMMEDIATE RELEASE: November 5, 2007
    CONTACT: Liz Richardson, 202-224-4159

    Kerry: ‘Voter Caging’ Should Be Outlawed
    Senate Legislation Would End Frivolous Challenges to Voter Eligibility

    Washington, D.C. — Senator John Kerry today, along with 12 other Senators, co-sponsored legislation aimed at preventing the practice of “voter caging,” a long-recognized voter suppression tactic which has often been used to target minority voters.

    “The practice of ‘caging’ is reprehensible and has absolutely no place in our democracy. Here in America, every citizen, regardless of race, gender, religion or sexual orientation has the right to cast his or her vote. These are the very foundations of our democracy and this bill will ensure that we protect fundamental freedoms for millions of voters across our country,” said Senator Kerry.

    Caging is a voter suppression tactic in which a political party, campaign, or other entity sends mail marked “do not forward” or “return to sender” to a targeted group of voters — often minorities or residents of minority neighborhoods. A list of those whose mail was returned “undelivered” is then used as the basis for challenges to the right of those citizens to vote, on the grounds that the voter does not live at the address where he or she is registered. There are many reasons that mail could be returned undelivered, however; an eligible voter could be overseas on active military service or a student registered at a parent’s address.

    There is evidence that caging lists were assembled in Florida, Ohio, and Pennsylvania during the 2004 elections, possibly intended as the basis for massive voter eligibility challenges. The Florida incident made headlines again earlier this year during Congress’s investigation into the firing of several U.S. Attorneys, when allegations resurfaced that Tim Griffin, the former RNC opposition researcher then serving as an interim U.S. Attorney in Arkansas, had been involved in an effort to cage voters in Jacksonville.

    The Caging Prohibition Act would prohibit challenges to a person’s eligibility to register to vote, or cast a vote, based solely on returned mail or a caging list. The bill would also mandate that anyone who challenges the right of another citizen to vote must set forth the specific grounds for their alleged ineligibility, under penalty of perjury.

    Senators Patrick J. Leahy (D-Vt.), Dianne Feinstein (D-Calif.), Russ Feingold (D-Wis.), Bill Nelson (D-Fla.), Sherrod Brown (D-Ohio), Amy Klobuchar (D-Minn.), Hillary Rodham Clinton (D-N.Y.), Sheldon Whitehouse (D-R.I.), Bob Menendez (D-N.J.), Barack Obama (D-Ill.), Charles Schumer (D-N.Y.), and Chris Dodd (D-Conn.) joined Kerry as cosponsors of the Caging Prohibition Act. To date, the bill has also been endorsed by the Brennan Center for Justice at the New York University School of Law, the Lawyers’ Committee for Civil Rights Under Law, and People for the American Way.

    The helmet that will give fighter pilots X-ray vision

    0

    The new helmet for pilots of the hi-tech F-35 Joint Strike Fighter

    (MoD handout)

    Arnold Schwarzenegger eat your heart out: the new Terminator-style fighter helmet 

    This is the helmet that will also the next generation of fighter jet pilots to see through their own aircraft. Honestly.

    The head gear is being developed for the F-35 Joint Strike Fighter(JSF) and is currently being tested by Ministry of Defence scientists at Boscombe Down in Wiltshire.

    An MoD spokesman said: “Unlike other jet aircraft the JSF, which is planned to replace the Harrier, does not have a traditional head-up display. Instead the computerised symbology will be displayed directly on to the pilot’s visors, providing the pilot with cues for flying, navigating and fighting the aircraft.

    “It even will superimpose infra-red imagery on to the visor to allow the pilot to look through the cockpit floor at night and see the world below – like something out of Terminator. This is absolutely the cutting edge of technology. No other helmet will be able to do this.”

    The helmet, currently at prototype stage, is being developed by Vision Systems International and Helmet Integrated Systems Limited.

    New Study On Respiratory Problems For 9/11 Workers

    1

    A new study released this month shows state employees who worked at the World Trade Center site after the toxic dust cloud cleared are suffering from the same respiratory problems as workers who were there during the actual September 11th terrorist attacks — just to a lower degree.

    The study by the New York State Department of Health looked at more than 1,400 state police, National Guard members, and state Department of Transportation workers, including 110 who were in the dust cloud when the Twin Towers fell.

    Of those studied, one-third arrived during the first two days after the attacks and 57 percent arrived before Sept. 16, 2001.

    The study found nearly 47 percent of workers not caught in the dust cloud reported lower respiratory problems, compared with a little more than 57 percent of those caught in the dust cloud.

    Of those not caught in the cloud, 33 percent said they suffered from psychological symptoms — compared to just over 36 percent of those directly exposed to the cloud.

    The report was published in the November issue of the Journal of Occupational and Environmental Medicine.

    http://www.ny1.com/ny1/content/index.jsp?stid=203&aid=75491

    MoD accused over spy plane deaths

    1

    Internal report into explosion above Afghanistan supports claims that safety fears were ignored

    Mark Townsend
    The Observer

    A dozen major deficiencies in the repair and maintenance of the RAF’s Nimrod spy planes were identified shortly before one of the aircraft exploded above Afghanistan, causing the biggest loss of life suffered by Britain’s armed forces since the Falklands war.An internal defence report, seen by The Observer, highlights a catalogue of ‘critical’ failings found during an investigation into the recurrent problem of fuel leaks within the Nimrod fleet.

    It found that deep-rooted concerns relating to a ‘low standard of workmanship’ and ‘inadequate’ training of mechanics working on the Nimrod fuel system were first identified eight years ago. Investigators found no evidence to suggest such issues had been rectified.

    The official inquiry into the explosion above Afghanistan that killed 14 people – to be published this month – is expected to pinpoint a fuel leak in the Nimrod MR2 as the cause of the tragedy. The inquiry comes days after a Nimrod suffered a serious leak in mid-air, spraying fuel into an empty bomb bay while refuelling over southern Afghanistan. Last night families of the crew who died in the explosion over Kandahar province claimed it was the fourth such incident since the tragedy.

    Last night the father of one of the servicemen killed accused the RAF of ‘wasting’ the life of his 25-year-old son Ben. Graham Knight, from Bridgwater, Somerset, said the report proved that safety fears over fuel leaks had been repeatedly ignored by defence officials.

    ‘I was speaking to one of the widows involved in the crash recently and she agreed that her husband’s life has been thrown away,’ he said. ‘This report shows that mechanics were not using the proper equipment, there were problems with training and also with the sealants.’

    In addition to the 12 areas of concern found by experts, the report detected a further six factors that appear to have compounded problems relating to the aircraft’s fuel tank system, including the age of the fleet and the Nimrod’s design.

    The 36-page report adds that the age of the plane that exploded over Afghanistan 14 months ago was ‘considerably beyond the initial design requirement for the aircraft’. The report by Qinetiq, a private defence firm, also found that mechanics could not detect fuel leaks reported in Iraq and Afghanistan once the planes had returned to Britain for service.

    The 12 deficiencies mentioned in the Qinetiq report, published in March 2006, focus on mechanics’ working practices. They cite staff using out-of-date generic manuals that did not relate to the specifics of the spy plane and the lack of an ‘adhesion promoter’ to properly carry out repairs to the aircraft’s fuel tanks. So alarmed were the authors of the report that they recommend that a team of specialists should review the findings and make urgent improvements.

    ‘The overall control and quality of the [mechanics’] work was not helped by the loss of venting equipment, inadequate tooling and poor upkeep,’ said the report. Experts highlighted a ‘critical need to improve the training’ of Nimrod mechanics, a ‘deficiency of appropriate tooling for sealant stripping’, and a ‘lack of expertise and critical loss of experienced personnel that has had a major impact on the efficiency of RAMS [mechanics] in carrying out fuel tank repair work’.

    The lack of suitably skilled mechanics was serious enough, the report adds, to have ‘diminished the consistency of fuel tank repair work with a possible impact on the reliability of those repairs’ and may have compromised the ‘effective sealing of leaks’.

    Investigators also expressed concern that they could not find who had performed earlier repairs or when they had been concluded. Details relating to prospective repairs on the plane that exploded over Afghanistan could not be traced by those examining the fuel tank system of the plane. Defence officials have previously admitted that the fleet of Nimrods has a history of fuel leaks.

    An MoD spokesman said: ‘The safety of our aircrews is paramount. We have regular checks and we have now taken the action of suspending air-to-air refuelling as a precaution.’

    Iraqi fighters ‘grilled for evidence on Iran’

    0

    David Smith in Baghdad
    The Observer

    Micah Brose, privately contracted interrogator working for US forces in Iraq
    Micah Brose, privately contracted interrogator working for US forces in Iraq. Photograph: David Smith
     

    US military officials are putting huge pressure on interrogators who question Iraqi insurgents to find incriminating evidence pointing to Iran, it was claimed last night.Micah Brose, a privately contracted interrogator working for American forces in Iraq, near the Iranian border, told The Observer that information on Iran is ‘gold’. The claim comes after Washington imposed sanctions on Iran last month, citing both its nuclear ambitions and its Revolutionary Guards’ alleged support of Shia insurgents in Iraq. Last week the US military freed nine Iranians held in Iraq, including two it had accused of links to the Revolutionary Guards’ Qods Force.

    Brose, 30, who extracts information from detainees in Iraq, said: ‘They push a lot for us to establish a link with Iran. They have pre-categories for us to go through, and by the sheer volume of categories there’s clearly a lot more for Iran than there is for other stuff. Of all the recent requests I’ve had, I’d say 60 to 70 per cent are about Iran.

    ‘It feels a lot like, if you get something and Iran’s not involved, it’s a let down.’ He added: ‘I’ve had people say to me, “They’re really pushing the Iran thing. It’s like, shit, you know.” ‘

    Brose said that reports about Washington’s increasingly hawkish stance towards Tehran, including possible military action, chimed with his experience. ‘My impression is they’re just trying to get every little bit of ammunition possible. If we get something here it fits the overall picture. The engine needs impetus and they’re looking for us to find the fuel – a particular type of fuel.

    ‘It now really depends on who gets elected President in the US. If nothing changes in the current course, I’d say military action is inevitable. But we have to hope there will be a change of course.’

    He denied ever being asked to fabricate evidence, adding: ‘We’re not asked to manufacture information, we’re asked to find it. But if a detainee wants to tell me what I want to hear so he can get out of jail… you know what I’m saying.’

    Other military intelligence officials in Iraq refused to comment, but one said: ‘The message is, “Got to find a link with Iran, got to find a link with Iran.” It’s sickening.’

    Last week in Baghdad the US military showed journalists a recently discovered cache of mortars, rocket-propelled grenades and bomb-making materials it claims are of Iranian origin. Rear Admiral Gregory Smith, spokesman for Multi-National Force Iraq, said it was possible they crossed the border before a recent promise by Iran to stop the flow of munitions into Iraq.

    He said: ‘Iran has had a historic malign influence here in Iraq. They have financed many of the activities of Shia extremist groups. In many cases they have done training, they have actually deployed some of their personnel here in theatre. The Qods Force (Iranian Revolutionary Guards) have come here – we know that, we’ve got some in detention. They have said in many cases they were not here and intend to support a more peaceful outcome in Iraq and we look for their excellence in achieving that.’

    Among the weapons Washington has accused Iran of supplying to Iraqi insurgents are EFPs, or explosively formed projectiles, which fire a slug of molten metal capable of penetrating even the most heavily armoured military vehicle. The number two US commander in Iraq, Lt Gen Ray Odierno, said there has been a sharp decline in the number of EFPs found in Iraq in the last three months.

    BBC on brink of internal war

    0

    Staff accuse ‘arrogant’ new trustees of standing in the way of radical reform

    By Tim Luckhurst

     

    The cuts endorsed by the BBC’s controversial new governing body, the BBC Trust, have started to bite. On Monday management briefed unions on planned cuts in news coverage, intensifying fears about the future of flagship shows including BBC 1’s one and six o’clock bulletins.

    With mass redundancies looming, the pressure on director-general Mark Thompson is intense, but senior colleagues say the structure of the corporation has never been less able to support its leader.

    “No sitting director-general of the BBC has been sacked by the chairman who appointed him,” said one of Mr Thompson’s closest allies. “But Michael Grade has gone, and Mark is worried that he might not be in the post this time next year. Sir Michael Lyons intervenes constantly and intensely. It is very different from the days of the old board of governors.”

    Sir Michael, the one-time Bennite Labour councillor and former chief executive of Birmingham City Council, accepted the chairmanship of the trust in April. BBC managers describe trustees’ behaviour in recent months as arrogant. An executive complained: “They are strutting around asserting themselves in that awful way people do when they are trying to work out what they are for.”

    Supporters of the director-general fear tension between management and regulators will destroy the united front the BBC needs to survive its travails. They warn that the corporation is too fragile for a big clash between trustees and management, but fear confrontation is looming.

    “The BBC is going through some of the biggest challenges it has ever faced,” said John Whittingdale, chairman of the House of Commons Media Select Committee. “You have the crisis of trust over issues such as the Queen documentary and Blue Peter and at the same time Mr Thompson is setting out his strategic plan. It is inevitable that the BBC Trust will take an active interest, but it should not intervene before management decisions are made.”

    Under the old system managers managed and governors defended their decisions. The trustees are less docile. They have views and they are constitutionally entitled to express them on behalf of the licence-payer. Thompson supporters fear he may carry the can for decisions he did not make.

    Observers were surprised by the “salami-slicing” strategy Mr Thompson calls “Delivering Creative Future”. The joke inside the BBC is that it is not creative and there is no future. But such humour disguises concern that the DG’s freedom has been curtailed. His supporters blame the trust for insisting that the BBC must continue making programmes for every taste despite a huge funding shortfall.

    “It is an unsustainable position in the digital era,” said a top BBC journalist. “If there is no market segment from which the BBC can legitimately withdraw, then we are condemned to spread resources too thinly. Mark’s instinct was to be radical. The trust made that impossible.”

    Adrian Sanders MP, Liberal Democrat member of the select committee, agreed that something appeared to have diluted Mr Thompson’s radical instincts. “Members of the committee from all parties were very surprised that the BBC did not come up with a proposal to dispose of some channels. There was a real expectation that it would.”

    Mr Thompson had encouraged that expectation. In March he said that the BBC would “stop doing certain things” and emphatically rejected salami-slicing departmental budgets. Why did he retreat? Insiders blame the trust, which, they say, is intensely conservative and determined to preserve all the corporation’s services, no matter how limited its budget.

    But it should surprise nobody that the trust is actively interventionist. A trust spokeswoman said that was not how the programme of cuts was devised. “Trustees tested and challenged what the BBC management put forward. The trust has been very independent in its thinking. It starts from a different perspective from its predecessor. The trust represents a different interest from the governors: the licence-payers.”

    Journalists must challenge government

    0

    By Keith Robinson

    Journalists must continue to aggressively challenge authority in government even though the public does not hold the news media in such high regard as it once did, the editor of USA Today said Thursday.

    Ken Paulson said the framers of the Constitution guaranteed a free press “that would take a stand for liberty and justice, and that mission has not changed.”

    “They gave us this job,” Paulson said Thursday at a conference on the importance of an open government. “People often talk about the press, and they say ‘Who appointed you?’ Well, Jefferson, Madison and the boys, really. Is that good enough?”

    Paulson spoke to an audience of journalists, lawyers and other members of the public at the forum sponsored by the Indiana Coalition of Open Government, the Hoosier State Press Association and the Indiana State Bar Association.

    He said monitoring government officials requires journalists to ask “tough questions, sometimes rude questions, sometimes leading questions.”

    “And we have that attitude whether you’re Republican, Libertarian, Democrat — whatever you happen to be,” he said. “We’ll ask you the same tough questions because that’s our job.”

    Paulson said journalists are no longer depicted in a heroic way, as they were in comic books and movies decades ago, when Superman had a secret identity as a newspaper reporter, Spider-Man as a photographer and the Green Hornet as a newspaper publisher.

    He said he often seeks inspiration from the 1952 movie “Deadline U.S.A.,” in which Humphrey Bogart plays the managing editor of a New York newspaper who takes on the mob. He also has a poster of the movie on his wall at work.

    “The real heroes of American journalism are, of course, not fictional,” he said. “They are the men and women who use freedom of the press to make a real difference in American society and make a difference for democracy.”

    Paulson said recent surveys indicate erosion of the public’s support of free speech, especially that which could be considered offensive to some.

    “That boggles my mind because clearly these people forget who Martin Luther King was and what he did,” Paulson said. “In this country, you do not accomplish meaningful social change by engaging in pleasantries with those you disagree with or just talking to people who agree with you. Sometimes you’ve got to get in the face of people and say ‘This is wrong; this has got to stop.’

    “And yet somehow Americans think it’s much better for us all to … scale back at bit on free speech.”

    Home Office reveals first projects for ID Scheme

    0

    Ian Grant

    The Home Office will call for bids for the first two pieces of work on the National Identity Scheme in May 2008.

    The mini projects are for the biometric database and application and enrolment operation. The call will come out as soon as the Home Office finalises the participants in its framework procurement agreement, which is expected by May, a Home Office spokesman said.On 19 October the IPS shortlisted eight firms for a framework agreement to supply the NIS infrastructure: Accenture, BAE Systems, Computer Sciences Corporation, EDS, Fujitsu, IBM, Steria, and Thales. The spokesman said the Home Office might trim this list in December.
     
    Identity and Passport Service accounts to March show the government spent £31m on the NIS last year. Estimates of the 10-year cost of the national identity system and electronic ID card, to be phased in from 2009, rose £65m in six months, due mainly to VAT that the project owner cannot claim back from the government.

    The government’s estimate of the cost of the system was £5.56bn in May 2007. This was later revised to £5.37bn. According to figures presented to Parliament on Thursday the estimated cost has risen to £5.43bn. However, the London School of Economics has put the cost closer to £14.5bn.

    Responding to the latest estimates, the LSE said the reported figures differed from previous cost estimates in three ways:

    – An apparent reduction in the forecast for future passport volumes

    – A reduction in the operating cost of producing and delivering passports and identity cards containing fingerprint biometrics

    – Adjustments to the total cost of the scheme arising from a different reporting period (October 2007-October 2017 rather than April 2007-April 2017)

    The money spent on the NIS will come from the Home Office budget which will rise to £9.8bn for 2008/9, to £9.941bn for 2009 to 2010, and to £10.315bn for 2010 to 2011, the spokesman said. However, actual amounts and budgets are not set until it awards contracts to preserve the government’s ability to extract maximum value, he said.

    The NIS estimates include all set-up and operational costs, amortised capital costs, a charge for “completeness”, and £70m of VAT that is “unrecoverable to IPS but retained by HM Treasury”.

    They exclude costs to other organisations for using ID cards to verify identities and the costs of issuing passports abroad, which consulates recover directly through fees.

    Currently, the government spends around £384m to produce passports, which it gets back in fees, now £72 per adult passport. However, these are expected to rise to close to £100 for both passport and e-ID card.

    The Commons Public Accounts Committee said recently it did not understand why the government needed both documents as the documents share most of their data.

    Last year the IPS issued 4.8 million passports. It has still to produce a fee strategy to cover the costs of the NIS.

    The IPS has to present update cost estimates to parliament every six months.

    Gangster Giuliani: The GOP’s Worst

    0

    By Margaret Kimberley

    If a potential Giuliani presidency in any way resembles a Giuliani mayoralty, then the country would be in for a truly awful time.

    It is a supreme irony that Rudolph Giuliani became mayor of New York City because his opponent and predecessor, David Dinkins, is a black man. The myth of the always liberal white New Yorker was proven to be just that on election day in 1993. White voters deserted Dinkins in droves and elected a Republican mayor for the first time in 30 years.

    Giuliani, a former prosecutor, took office and immediately began treating New Yorkers, particularly black New Yorkers, like criminals. He specialized in pleasing white people by beating up black people. Under his leadership the police were unleashed and given the right to arrest for petty offenses and even to kill when they felt the urge to do so.

    When Haitian immigrant Patrick Dorismond was killed by a police officer, Giuliani illegally released his juvenile justice records to police. Adding insult to injury, he smeared the dead man by stating that he was “no altar boy.” The Dorismond case was one of the tipping points that made even some white New Yorkers long for the day that Giuliani would be their former mayor.

    His public actions involving his private life also took the bloom off of the Rudy rose. In 2000 Giuliani informed his wife he was leaving her for another woman. He brought her that news via press conference. New York sophistication should not be confused with moral laissez faire. The tacky behavior was never forgotten.

    On September 11, 2001 New Yorkers were giving collective thanks because term limits legislation insured that Rudy would soon be gone for good. Only a small number of dead enders were still in his thrall. But the terror attacks on the twin towers put him back in the spotlight. He was dubbed “America’s mayor,” and made a Knight of British Empire. He then made a bundle by forming Giuliani Partners and making up to $200,000 for a single speaking engagement, marketing himself as a terrorism expert because he managed to look calm for a few days.

    Now Giuliani is running for the Republican presidential nomination and he is the very worst of a bad lot. He unabashedly supports the occupation of Iraq and a military attack on Iran. He doesn’t think simulating drowning via water boarding is torture and agrees wholeheartedly with the Bush destruction of civil liberties.

    If a potential Giuliani presidency in any way resembles a Giuliani mayoralty then the country would be in for a truly awful time. As mayor Giuliani promoted the worst, least competent people to high positions in New York City government. Bernard Kerik, an undercover cop, had the shrewdness to put himself in the right place at the right time when he volunteered to drive Rudy around during his mayoral campaign. Despite the lack of any other credential, his rise to power was swift. First he was made a Deputy Commissioner at the Department of Corrections, then Commissioner.

    Kerik was nothing but a crook. Fully aware that Kerik was under investigation for taking money from a construction company with organized crime connections, Giuliani nonetheless appointed him Police Commissioner. While others insist that they informed Giuliani of Kerik’s mob ties, Rudy claims not to remember. He certainly didn’t remember when he recommended his pal for a cabinet level position as Secretary of Homeland Security. When Kerik imploded under an avalanche of bad publicity Rudy just shrugged his shoulders, confident that he would continue to get away with doing whatever he wants.

    Giuliani has credibility with most Republican voters because of his warmongering and inclination to inflict physical pain on dark people. He is still in trouble with conservative Christians for his pro-choice position as mayor of New York City and for publicly treating his wife and children like dirt. He plans to make up for that by being more overtly racist.

    He will remind white Republicans of the good old days when he cut the welfare roles. He did so by breaking the law and denying benefits to eligible people, but no matter. He knows his audience. When they hear the word welfare they will salivate like Pavlovian dogs and decide that Rudy is their man.

    There is every reason to believe that Giuliani will act out his every sick fantasy if he were to occupy the oval office. There is no reason to believe that Democrats would finally behave like an opposition. A Giuliani presidency is a nightmarish scenario. We will all be Patrick Dorismond, assumed to be guilty of something and therefore worthy of punishment. It is hard to imagine a worse president than George W. Bush, but Rudolph Giuliani fits that description perfectly.

    Mukasey Confirmed as Bush’s Third Attorney General

    0

    By James Rowley

    Michael Mukasey, whose statements on torture and interrogation of suspected terrorists touched off a partisan Senate fight, has won confirmation to be the next U.S. attorney general.

    Mukasey overcame opposition from Democrats who said he should have taken a less ambiguous position on torture. The late- night vote yesterday was 53-40 with six Democrats and Joseph Lieberman of Connecticut, an independent, supporting the nomination. Four Democratic presidential candidates and one Republican, John McCain of Arizona, didn’t vote.

    The new attorney general, the third to serve under President George W. Bush, will assume leadership of a Justice Department that has been damaged by charges of partisan politics. Supporters of Mukasey said he would restore morale at the department.

    “Judge Mukasey’s confirmation comes at a critical moment for the Justice Department and for our nation,” Bush said in a statement released after the Senate vote. “Judge Mukasey is a man of strong character and integrity, with exceptional legal judgment.”

    Mukasey, 66, a retired federal judge, is set to be sworn in at the Justice Department’s Washington headquarters later today, said White House spokesman Tony Fratto.

    “He’ll begin meeting with staff right away,” Fratto said.

    Mukasey succeeds Alberto Gonzales, who resigned in August after his inability to explain the ouster of nine U.S. attorneys cost him support among Republicans and Democrats in Congress. Congressional committees are still pressing Bush to let presidential aides testify about their involvement in the firings.

    `Chance for Change’

    “This is our chance for change,” said California Democrat Dianne Feinstein, whose complaints about the U.S. attorney dismissals triggered the probes that drove Gonzales from office. Mukasey “will be a non-political, non-partisan attorney general.”

    During confirmation hearings, Mukasey pledged to keep politics out of criminal prosecution and vowed to resign if Bush were to ignore his advice that an important initiative would be unconstitutional. These statements drew praise from most Democrats on the Senate Judiciary Committee.

    Mukasey’s nomination encountered trouble when he refused to say whether waterboarding, an interrogation technique that simulates drowning, was illegal torture.

    That and other harsh interrogation techniques became an issue following reports that the Central Intelligence Agency used waterboarding to extract information from three al-Qaeda operatives after the Sept. 11, 2001, terrorist attacks.

    `Repugnant’ Practice

    Judiciary Committee Chairman Patrick Leahy of Vermont and seven other Democrats on the panel opposed Mukasey. His nomination cleared the panel with the votes of just two Democrats, Feinstein and Charles Schumer of New York, and nine Republicans.

    Mukasey said he found waterboarding “repugnant” yet refused to say whether it was illegal torture.

    “If waterboarding is torture, torture is unconstitutional,” he said at the hearings last month. In a written response to a letter by senators seeking a fuller explanation, Mukasey refused to give a legal opinion based on “hypotheticals” instead of “the actual facts and circumstances.”

    Illinois Senator Dick Durbin, the Senate’s No. 2 Democrat, said “Judge Mukasey’s position on waterboarding is troubling” because “he wouldn’t answer direct questions about other torture techniques” even though military officials consider them to be torture. “Sadly, he said time and again that his answers would depend on the facts and circumstances.”

    `Put People at Risk’

    Republicans defended Mukasey’s refusal to render a legal opinion about the legality of interrogation techniques that are classified.

    “Judge Mukasey found himself in a situation where an expression of opinion by him would put people at risk” of prosecution or a civil suit, said Pennsylvania Republican Arlen Specter.

    The Bush administration hasn’t said whether intelligence agents ever engaged in waterboarding, which is outlawed as a military technique. Still, Bush has insisted that the government has never used torture.

    Schumer recommended fellow New Yorker Mukasey to replace Gonzales. He and Feinstein argued that new leadership was needed at the Justice Department to restore the agency’s political independence and boost low morale caused by the controversies that led to the resignations of Gonzales and other top officials involved in firing the U.S. attorneys.

    “The Department of Justice, one of the crown jewels among our government institutions, is now adrift and rudderless,” Schumer said. “Politics had been allowed to infect all manner of decision-making” and now the agency “desperately needs a strong and independent leader at the helm. I believe Judge Mukasey is that person.”

    Gonzales, who was White House counsel during Bush’s first term as president, succeeded John Ashcroft as attorney general in 2005.

    I Witnessed ‘Waterboarding’ — And, Yes, It is Torture

    0

    Memo to Media: I Witnessed ‘Waterboarding’ — And, Yes, It is Torture
    Four decades ago, as a reporter in Vietnam, I saw what it was like. When you hog-tie a human being, tilt him head down, stuff a rag in his mouth and over his nostrils and pour water onto the rag slowly and steadily to the point where his lungs start to fill with water, that is torture.

    By Joseph L. Galloway

    (November 08, 2007) — Did Bill Clinton have sex with that woman? Is Elvis Presley really dead? Is the Pope Catholic? Does a bear do his ablutions in the woods? Is waterboarding torture? The answer to all of these questions, put simply, is yes.

    All of Judge Michael Mukasey’s artful dodging and word play to avoid acknowledging the obvious to the august members of Senate Judiciary Committee does nothing to change the fact.

    When you hog-tie a human being, tilt him head down, stuff a rag in his mouth and over his nostrils and pour water onto the rag slowly and steadily to the point where his lungs start to fill with water and he’s suffocating and drowning, that is torture.

    Four decades ago in the field in Vietnam, I saw a suspected Viet Cong waterboarded by South Vietnamese Army troops. The American Army advisers who were attached to the Vietnamese unit turned their backs and walked away before the torture began. It was then a Vietnamese affair and something they couldn’t be associated with.

    The victim was taken to the edge of death. His body was wracked with spasms as he fought for air. The soldier holding the five-gallon kerosene tin filled with muddy water from a nearby stream kept pouring it slowly onto the rag, and the victim desperately sucking for even a little air kept inhaling that water instead.

    It seemed to go on forever. Did the suspect talk? I’m sure he did. I’m sure he told his torturers whatever he thought they wanted to hear, whether it was true or not. But I didn’t see the end of it because one of the American advisers came to me and told me I had to leave; that I couldn’t watch this interrogation, if that’s what it was, any longer.

    That adviser knew that water torture was torture; he knew that it was outlawed by the Geneva Convention; he knew that he couldn’t be a party to it; and he knew that he didn’t want me to witness such brutality.

    Every member of the Senate Judiciary Committee knows that waterboarding is torture, even the majority who voted to send Judge Mukasey’s nomination to be attorney general, America’s chief law enforcement official, to the floor for a vote.

    Waterboarding was torture when it was used during the Spanish Inquisition; it was torture when it was used on Filipino rebels during the 1890s; it was torture when the Japanese Army used it on prisoners in World War II; it was torture when it was used by the Khmer Rouge in Cambodia; and it’s torture when CIA officers or others use it on terrorists.

    When George W. Bush was the governor of Texas, the state investigated, indicted, convicted and sentenced to prison for 10 years a county sheriff who, with his deputies, had waterboarded a criminal suspect. That sheriff got no pardon from Gov. Bush.

    Waterboarding is torture in the eyes of all civilized peoples, no matter how desperately President George W. Bush tries to rewrite the English language, with which he has only a passing familiarity, anyway. No matter how desperately his entire administration tries to redefine the word “torture” to cover the fact that not only have they acquiesced in its use, but they also have ordered its use.

    The president, Vice President Dick Cheney, and their cronies and legal mouthpieces such as David Addington, John Yoo and Alberto Gonzales are doing all they can to avoid one day facing the bar of justice, at home or in The Hague, and being called to account for crimes against humanity.

    They want a blank check pardon, and they’ll continue searching for attorneys general and judges and justices and senators and members of Congress who’ll hand them their stay-out-of-jail-free cards.

    As they squirm and wriggle and lie and quibble and cut deals with senators, they claim that “harsh interrogation methods” are necessary to prevent another 9/11. But as terrified as they are by terrorists, they also fear that one day they may be treated no better than some fallen South American dictator or Cambodian despot or hapless Texas sheriff; that they might not be able to leave a guarded, gated compounds in Dallas or Crawford, a ranch in New Mexico or the shores of Chesapeake Bay for fear of arrest and extradition.

    No more shopping trips to Paris. No vacations on the Costa Brava. No interludes on some billionaire buddy’s yacht in the Caribbean. No jetting around the world making speeches to fat cats at $1 million a pop like other former presidents. Even Canada would be off-limits.

    Now the Democrats, or some of them, are conspiring with them to seat an attorney general who will help facilitate the ever more frantic search for ex post facto immunity for their crimes. Shame on them! There’s such a thing as too loyal an opposition; too cowardly an opposition; too craven an opposition.

    Waterboarding is torture. Decent people have acknowledged that for centuries. We sent Japanese war criminals to the gallows for using it. We sent a Texas sheriff to prison for using it. One day, an ex-president and those who helped him and those he ordered to torture fellow human beings may have to plea bargain for their lives and their freedom.


    £240,000 for Tony Blair’s not so great speech

    0

    The banquet was readied, the Château Lafite was at room temperature and the 700 guests were in their chairs and eager to listen to a veteran of the world stage deliver a speech entitled From Great to Outstanding.

    No one could accuse Tony Blair of selling himself short when he arrived by private jet at Dongguan, near Hong Kong, on Tuesday for the latest leg on his debut tour of the lecture circuit.

    He had been invited by the Guangda Group, the biggest property developer in the boom town in southern China, to visit its luxury housing estate and speak at a VIP banquet.

    Three hours later, as Mr Blair left with his post-tax takings of an estimated £156,000, Dongguan reflected on whether it had, indeed, been witness to whatever lies beyond greatness.

    For Deng Qingbo, a commentator in the China Youth Daily, the answer was a resounding “no”. “To be honest, Mr Blair’s speech sounds so familiar. It’s just like the report of any Chinese county level official and contains no novelty. If the local political and business circles paid such a high price for a speech they could have made themselves, was it worth it?”

    The former Prime Minister’s oratory on the importance of enhancing mutual understanding, boosting co-operation and of ensuring that environmental awareness accompanied economic growth offered little more than platitudes, Mr Deng complained. “In the future, more foreign celebrities will come to give speeches in China and we should be less ostentatious and vain and more modest and realistic. We should ask for more fresh knowledge and real knowledge – especially when we are touching even a few cents of taxpayers’ money.”

    Not all the coverage was negative. The Guangzhou Daily recorded that female guests, won over by Mr Blair’s smile and his “English gentleman” look, cooed: “He’s so cute.” His hosts were evidently pleased enough to offer Mr Blair one of their villas. It is not known whether he accepted the show home, “equipped with five en suite bedrooms, two additional guest bathrooms, gold taps, marble floors and a spectacular garden”.

    For his part, Mr Blair expressed delight to be in Dongguan. He spoke of “the soft spot in my heart for China”, revealed that his son Leo was studying Mandarin and mused that, in another 40 years, he might return able to say more than a mere “Ni hao” — or “Hello” to his Chinese audience. His remark that “the sky’s the limit” for Dongguan drew resounding applause, according to the newspaper.

    And then it was time to go. There was no opportunity for Mr Blair to sample any of the nine bottles of Château Lafite, costing as much as £600 each, that Guangda had provided for his dinner, the Guangzhou Daily lamented.

    There was, however, just time to file his return to the Chinese tax office. The office confirmed that the amount he paid in income tax was £80,000.

    The spokesman for Mr Blair said that the tour of China had been undertaken in his capacity as a private individual and had been arranged through the Washington Speakers Bureau, the agency that organises his commercial appearances. He refused to confirm any further details of the trip or respond to the accusations that Mr Blair had not provided value for money on his tour.

    Asked how much the former Prime Minister had earned during the trip, Matthew Doyle said: “It’s none of your business.” He later added: “Mr Blair receives a large number of invitations to speak to a whole range of organisations. His speech was very well received by the audience in the hall.”

    Mr Blair signed a book-publishing contract worth about £5 million and made his debut on the lecture circuit in the United States last month. Billed by his agency as having “transformed Britain’s public services” the first paid engagement of Mr Blair was at an event in Washington organised by Goldman Sachs. Mr Blair is said to have earned about £300,000 for the tour, which included appearances in California, Arizona and Calgary in Canada.

    – Tony Blair could be received formally into the Roman Catholic Church in time to celebrate Mass at Westminster Catholic Cathedral at Christmas.

    According to a report today in The Tablet, a Catholic newspaper, Mr Blair is to be received into the Church in the next few weeks.

    Mr Blair is expected to be received by Cardinal Cormac Murphy-O’Connor in his private chapel of Archbishop’s House. There has been repeated speculation for a decade that Mr Blair, whose wife Cherie is a practising Catholic, was to convert. The Times reported this year that Mr Blair would convert after he left Downing Street.

    Catherine Pepinster, editor of The Tablet, said: “The cardinal’s involvement, as if he were Mr Blair’s parish priest, would suggest that the process of conversion did in fact begin during his tenure of No 10.”

    She said that Mr Blair, whose four children were all baptised Catholics, could have been received earlier, but was discouraged by his advisers. Alastair Campbell famously said: “We don’t do God.”

    A spokesman for the Cardinal said: “It is inappropriate for the Cardinal to comment on an individual’s faith journey. It is a private and personal issue.”
    Hot air

    £102,000 for Cherie Blair for 2005 Australasian lecture tour

    £60,000 per after-dinner engagement by Mrs Thatcher

    £25,000 paid to Prince Edward for 75-minute talk on the Royal Family in Florida in 2005

    $2million raked in by Ronald Reagan in Japan, after leaving office

    $40 million earned by Bill Clinton through public speaking engagements

    Sources: Washington Post, Agencies

    Senate overrides Bush’s veto on water projects

    0

    By TODD SPANGLER

    Among them are an electronic barrier in the Chicago Sanitary and Ship Canal to block the spread of an invasive species of Asian carp into the Great Lakes, a new shipping lock at Sault Ste. Marie and millions of dollars for sewer projects in Michigan. It also would authorize $3 million for the Detroit riverfront and $20 million for a management plan to clean up Lake St. Clair and the St. Clair River.

    “The strong bipartisan vote shows that we’ll fight to protect the Great Lakes from invasive species, and we’ll fight to help make our waters safe and clean,” said U.S. Sen. Carl Levin, who supported the bill along with his other Democratic colleague from Michigan, Sen. Debbie Stabenow.

    Bush had said the legislation cost too much, but, in fact, it doesn’t appropriate any money to the projects. That would have to come through budget bills this year and in the future, if Congress decided to include the money. But it does set a list of priorities for the Army Corps of Engineers to consider going forward.

    In both the House and Senate, supporters complained that there had not been a broad water-projects bill during the Bush term in office to date.

    Among them are an electronic barrier in the Chicago Sanitary and Ship Canal to block the spread of an invasive species of Asian carp into the Great Lakes, a new shipping lock at Sault Ste. Marie and millions of dollars for sewer projects in Michigan. It also would authorize $3 million for the Detroit riverfront and $20 million for a management plan to clean up Lake St. Clair and the St. Clair River.

    “The strong bipartisan vote shows that we’ll fight to protect the Great Lakes from invasive species, and we’ll fight to help make our waters safe and clean,” said U.S. Sen. Carl Levin, who supported the bill along with his other Democratic colleague from Michigan, Sen. Debbie Stabenow.

    Bush had said the legislation cost too much, but, in fact, it doesn’t appropriate any money to the projects. That would have to come through budget bills this year and in the future, if Congress decided to include the money. But it does set a list of priorities for the Army Corps of Engineers to consider going forward.

    In both the House and Senate, supporters complained that there had not been a broad water-projects bill during the Bush term in office to date.

    As expected, the U.S. Senate today concluded the first-ever override of one of President George W. Bush’s vetoes, easily approving a bill full of water-related projects across the nation with bipartisan support.

    The vote was 79-14 two days after the House overrode Bush’s veto of the Water Resources Development Act, which authorizes some $23 billion in projects, including many for the Great Lakes region and Michigan.

    Among them are an electronic barrier in the Chicago Sanitary and Ship Canal to block the spread of an invasive species of Asian carp into the Great Lakes, a new shipping lock at Sault Ste. Marie and millions of dollars for sewer projects in Michigan. It also would authorize $3 million for the Detroit riverfront and $20 million for a management plan to clean up Lake St. Clair and the St. Clair River.

    “The strong bipartisan vote shows that we’ll fight to protect the Great Lakes from invasive species, and we’ll fight to help make our waters safe and clean,” said U.S. Sen. Carl Levin, who supported the bill along with his other Democratic colleague from Michigan, Sen. Debbie Stabenow.

    Bush had said the legislation cost too much, but, in fact, it doesn’t appropriate any money to the projects. That would have to come through budget bills this year and in the future, if Congress decided to include the money. But it does set a list of priorities for the Army Corps of Engineers to consider going forward.

    In both the House and Senate, supporters complained that there had not been a broad water-projects bill during the Bush term in office to date.

    Congress approves military, domestic funds

    0

    By Richard Cowan

    WASHINGTON (Reuters) – The Democratic-led Congress, trying to make up for its tardiness in passing essential bills to fund the government, approved more than $1 trillion on Thursday for the military, veterans’ health care and popular domestic social programs.

    By passing a $600 billion bill that exceeds President George W. Bush’s request by about $10 billion, Democrats ignored a White House veto threat but fulfilled a campaign promise made last year to boost health, education and labor programs, many of which benefit the poor.

    Still unclear, according to the White House’s budget office, is whether Bush will sign a second measure passed on Thursday that would give the Pentagon about $460 billion for the fiscal year that began on October 1, which is $3.5 billion less than the president wanted.

    In a disappointment for the Bush administration, the military funds do not include any of the additional $196 billion Bush is seeking for the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, which Congress will consider later.

    The Pentagon bill also contains up to $2.9 billion for veterans’ health care that Bush demanded Congress approve by Sunday, the Veterans’ Day national holiday.

    In San Antonio, where he visited injured soldiers, Bush said, “Congress needs to take prompt action on measures that will send a clear signal that we support our troops in the field, and we support them when they’re coming off the field.”

    Recognizing it will be at least several more weeks before Congress and Bush settle their differences on spending for an array of programs ranging from food aid to the poor to domestic security efforts, Congress also approved a new stopgap measure.

    It will keep government running, mostly at last year’s levels, through December 14. The current temporary funds expire on November 16.

    Bush has veto threats against nine other funding bills for fiscal 2008. Altogether, the Democrats’ bills, which many Republicans have supported, would spend about $22 billion over Bush’s proposed budget.

    ‘FISCAL DISCIPLINE’

    The Republican president did not veto any spending bills during his first six years in office, drawing criticism he permitted federal deficits to soar. But since Democrats took control in January, he has been tightfisted.

    Bush sought to cut labor, health and education programs by a total of about $3 billion from last year’s levels as part of a plan to balance the budget by 2012.

    House Republican leaders said they were confident they could block any Democratic attempt to overturn a Bush veto on this bill.

    Democrats defended the $10 billion in higher spending, saying initiatives such as medical research, early childhood education and community development were essential investments that had to keep pace with inflation and a growing population.

    They also contrasted the additional domestic funding with the huge request Bush has submitted to fight the war in Iraq, now in its fifth year.

    Sen. Edward Kennedy, a Massachusetts Democrat, complained during the Senate debate: “$4.5 billion for education — that gets the veto — $158 billion for the war with Iraq gets the signature.”

    Even some Republicans, such as Sen. Arlen Specter of Pennsylvania, refuted the White House’s portrayal of the bill as “irresponsible and excessive level of spending.” Specter said the legislation, which has broad bipartisan support, contained “some very modest increases in very important programs.”

    In a warning to Congress this week, the White House said, “The president is committed to fiscal discipline” and Bush would not tolerate spending that breeches a limit he set in February.

    Those remarks came the same week U.S. government debt surpassed $9 trillion, up from the $5.6 trillion level when Bush took office in 2001.

    (Additional reporting by Tabassum Zakaria in San Antonio)

    Our Man in Islamabad

    Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    The Islamic Republic of Pakistan was established in August,1947 when its majority Muslim population separated from British-controlled India and became a sovereign state. Since then, the country has been plagued by wars, political instability, and a series of military coups as it continues stumbling unsuccessfully toward democracy.

    Nominally, Pakistan is a federal democratic republic (declared in 1956) under a semi-presidential system and bicameral legislature consisting of a 100 member Senate and larger lower house National Assembly. The President is considered head of state and armed forces commander and chief (in a civilian capacity) and is elected by the Electoral College of Pakistan comprised of both houses of Parliament and the Provincial Assemblies. The Prime Minister is Pakistan’s head of government, is elected by the National Assembly, and is usually the largest party’s leader.

    This is how government is supposed to work in Pakistan, but things are never that simple there. In its entire 60 year history, democracy has been a sham under various elected and military regimes. Musharraf is just the latest military one after he ousted elected Prime Minister Nawaz Sharif in an October, 1999 coup. At the time, few people were surprised as tensions between elements of Pakistan’s ruling classes had been building for months. Sharif had grown increasingly unpopular and had Musharraf not deposed him other opposition forces might have done it.

    Elected as a champion of democracy, Sharif soon disappointed as did his predecessor, Benazir Bhutto, who’s now trying to reinvent herself as a democrat. Massive corruption accompanied his repressive right-wing rule that made his tenure widely unpopular. He sacked thousands of workers, cut food subsidies, let utility costs skyrocket, banned state union sectors and restricted workers’ rights to demonstrate and strike. At the same time, he and his cronies siphoned off millions of state funds, amassed enormous wealth, and hid it in offshore accounts. Under his rule, state institutions were collapsing, and workers and the poor suffered most. They wanted change, and the army obliged but not the way most people wanted.

    Since taking power in 1999 and appointing himself President in June, 2001, Musharraf engaged in a precarious balancing act and ruled repressively. He tried to secure Pakistan’s traditional geopolitical and strategic South and Central Asian interests. In addition, he supported the domestic Islamic fundamentalist right against traditional political elites and popular opposition from below. He also aimed to please Washington post-9/11 under threat of being declared a hostile power if he didn’t and was summarily told by Deputy Secretary of State Armitage his punishment would be “to be bombed back to the stone age.” To avoid that, he stopped supporting the Taliban and provided the Bush administration vital logistical help in its attack and occupation of Afghanistan.

    His reward was not being bombed and over $10 billion in military and other aid ever since through a virtual unaccountable blank check and blind eye to human rights abuses under his regime. Since he came to power, Musharraf tried to silence all political dissent and did it through disappearances, arbitrary detentions, extrajudicial killings and torture on the pretext of fighting “terrorism.” And as a “war on terror” ally, he launched military assaults against tribal and Taliban forces in Waziristan and Baluchistan, but that caused internal resentment to build against his increasingly unpopular rule. He also angered elements in the military that resent his lust for power and reckless behavior to hold on to it, and that ultimately may be his undoing.

    Things came to a boil when Musharraf suspended the nation’s Chief Justice, Iftikhar Mohammad Chaudhry, last March. He accused him of “misconduct and misuse of authority” as cover to remove a key official he thought might block his plan for another five year term as President along with remaining chief of army staff (COAS) that’s constitutionally illegal. He named an interim head justice, effectively placed Chaudhry under house arrest, and ordered the judicial council to investigate corruption charges.

    The response to the move was outrage across the board from opposition parties, lawyers’ organizations and human rights groups. They called the action unconstitutional and rallied in street protests against it. At the same time, Musharraf faces other crises that led to his recent actions. The Bush administration wants more from him against the Taliban as well as assurances he’ll be a reliable ally if the US attacks Iran. In addition, Baluchistan’s insurgency has continued for the past two years, and the army has lost hundreds of troops confronting it. That’s caused mounting defections in its ranks, and public anger over it as well.

    There are also economic issues because Musharraf adopted Washington Consensus policies that allowed poverty and discontent to grow hugely under his rule. People needs are ignored, social inequity has increased, food prices have spiraled, unions are cracked down on, and over half of government spending is for the military and debt service. In addition, corruption is rampant, the military practices crony capitalism, and Musharraf gets millions from it according to Pakistani analyst, Ayesha Siddiqa, in her recently published book – Military, Inc.: Inside Pakistan’s Military Economy.” On top of that, democracy in the country is a joke and always has been.

    Nonetheless, Musharraf wants to retain power until 2012 and staged a bogus October 6 election to do it. It violated the law and was stage-managed by the military in a process neither free nor fair because the general’s allies dominate the Parliament from having rigged elections five years ago. As expected, Musharraf won easily getting all but five parliamentary votes (252 out of 257) cast and swept the Provincial Assembly balloting as well. Opposition MPs abstained or boycotted the proceeding calling it unconstitutional, and the Supreme Court said no winner could be declared until it rules if Musharraf could run in his joint COAS capacity.

    Pakistan has seen increased political upheaval for months. Musharraf wants to keep power by confronting it and intends to stay allied with the Bush administration in the process. At the time though, he said he’d step down as army chief once the Supreme Court certified his election, but the fact remains he has no intention to do it.

    Pakistan Post-November 3

    That’s how things stood before November 3 when the general staged his second coup by declaring a state of emergency and suspending constitutional rule. But that’s nothing new in Pakistan’s history. The country’s first Constitution was adopted in 1956 but was short-lived. It was abrogated in 1958 when martial law was imposed. A new Constitution emerged in 1962 and then annulled in 1969, again under martial law. A third and current Constitution came in 1973. It was suspended in 1977, restored in 1985 with major changes, suspended again in 1999, and restored in 2002 with more changes until Musharraf acted on November 3.

    Few in the country with long memories were surprised, and one analyst said it’s “back to the past again (in Pakistan.” Another put it this way: “Pakistan’s constitutional development illustrate(s)….that a constitutional morality (in the country) has not developed. The document is unable to discipline the political elite, especially the bureaucratic and military elite.” Put another way, these comments illustrate that the country is not yet ready for prime time.

    Washburn University law professor Ali Kahn explained on CounterPunch that article 232 of Pakistan’s 1973 constitution “allows the President (as a civilian) to issue a Proclamation of Emergency under grave circumstances.” Kahn also said the Constitution doesn’t allow a “wholesale termination of services of Supreme Court judges,” thus rendering Musharraf’s action an “extra-constitutional coup.” But it’s not the first time he did it. After seizing power in 1999, he ordered all judges to swear a new oath of allegiance to him as military ruler. Thirteen of them on the Supreme Court refused, were sacked, and then replaced by more complaint ones in a blatantly unconstitutional act Musharraf got away with at the time.

    Now he’s at it again with a brutal crackdown. After his November 3 action, Musharraf deployed his security forces across the capital; occupied Parliament and the Supreme Court; forced private TV stations off the air; suspended free speech and the press as well as free assembly, association and movement; disrupted mobile phone networks; and placed targeted opposition politicians, lawyers and others under “preventive detention” after empowering police to do it.

    He further annulled the Supreme Court’s authority to rule against him, the Prime Minister, or anyone acting on his behalf and made it a crime to ridicule the President, armed forces, Parliament or the courts. Last July, the full Supreme Court bench reinstated Chief Justice Choudhry to his post, but on November 3 he was removed again along with six other Supreme Court justices because they refused to endorse Musharraf’s Provisional Constitutional Order (PCO) emergency decree. They were also placed under house arrest. The president of Pakistan’s Supreme Court Bar Association (SCBA), Aitzaz Ahsan, and other influential lawyers were also arrested as the general hardens his dictatorial rule.

    Why This Measure and Why Now

    Musharraf apparently feared an imminent Choudhry Supreme Court ruling against his October 6 reelection and acted preemptively to stop him. Reports in the country were that he likely knew how the Court would rule and decided weeks ago to quash it in his COAS capacity. Benazir Bhutto apparently knew it, too, and left the country to avoid looking complicit so as not to tarnish her pretense to be democratic. She returned to Islamabad November 6, the country is under martial law with the Constitution suspended, and Musharraf, as army chief, is a de facto dictator.

    This event is front page news everywhere with Washington and western leaders feigning outrage. Condoleezza Rice calls Musharraf’s move “highly regrettable” while affirming the Bush administration’s support for his regime nonetheless. She claims it’s because he acted up to now to put Pakistan on a “path to democratic rule” that on its face is laughable.

    Washington values Musharraf in its “war on terror” because he backs the Iraq and Afghanistan wars, is apparently on board against Tehran, and he lets the Pentagon use Pakistan territory for cross-border incursions against its Iranian neighbor in preparation for something bigger ahead. To prove it means it, the administration signaled on November 4 it will keep aiding the man George Bush calls one of his most important “counterrorism” allies, and America values “stability” over democracy.

    After the coup, Tariq Ali wrote on CounterPunch and ZNet that Pakistan’s largest independent TV station, Geo TV, continues broadcasting outside the country, and one of its “sharpest journalists,” Hamid Mir, reported his sources told him “the US Embassy had green lighted the coup because they regarded (Chaudhry) as a nuisance and ‘Taliban sympathiser.’ ” He was at odds with Musharraf for months over key issues, according to Ali, such as “disappeared prisoners, harassment of women and rushed privatizations.” The greater fear, however, was that “he might (also be about to) declare a uniformed President illegal” which is likely true and an easy sell to forces opposed to an unpopular leader.

    This has been building for months and was the reason behind Washington’s wanting a power-sharing arrangement between Musharraf and Benazir Bhutto. Those plans unravelled on November 3 even though Bhutto’s criticism of the coup was muted, and reports are she’s back to negotiating a deal while, at the same time, rallying her supporters for an opposition November 9 Rawalpindi rally.

    Accomodating Musharraf is her only option to return to power (as Prime Minister) and to assure corruption charges against her are dropped. That part of the deal was sealed October 5 when Musharraf signed a “reconciliation ordinance” absolving her of all outstanding charges of looting up to $2 billion in public funds during her tenure. In her final year in office in 1996, Transparency International, an independent watchdog group, named Pakistan the second most corrupt country in the world even though its standing later improved modestly.

    Fast-Moving Events in Pakistan

    Pakistan remains in turmoil under martial law. Thousands have been arrested including hundreds of lawyers, opposition politicians, journalists and students according to independent sources although the Interior Ministry acknowledges only 1800. In addition, pitched battles are on the streets, and all George Bush can say is we’ll “continue to work with (Musharraf and hope) he will restore democracy as quickly as possible.” Military and other aid will continue, so it’s business as usual, but that’s to be expected from two nations with contempt for the law.

    Consider this New York Times November 7 quote from prominent Islamabad lawyer Babar Sattar and relate it to US conditions post-911: “How do you function as a lawyer when the law is what the general says it is?” Consider also what lawyer and former cabinet member Athar Minallah said about Pakistan’s Supreme Court: “When the (Court) started acting (independently) for the first time in 60 years, they (Musharraf) came down very hard. In the past, the Supreme Court had always connived with the establishment and the military.”

    That’s the state of things under George Bush. He unconstitutionally usurped “Unitary Executive” power to claim the law is what he says it is and once told Republican colleagues the Constitution is “just a goddamned piece of paper.” In addition, federal courts, including the Supreme Court, are stacked with supportive right wing justices, and the nation is about to get a new Attorney General who condones torture and approves of arbitrary executive power.

    Where this will lead in the US next year and beyond is open to debate. In Pakistan it’s anyone’s guess as well as things remain fluid and events are breaking fast. January, 2008 Parliamentary elections are scheduled but are likely to be delayed or suspended even though on November 8 Musharraf is now saying, through his state media, the original timetable will be moved back to mid-February. Maybe not according to some observers who believe the political process is on hold until he secures his position as President for the next five years and most importantly continues as army chief because that’s where the real power in the country lies. Pakistan’s Constitution allows the legislature’s tenure to be extended up to a year so it’s possible that’s the plan.

    In the meantime, the Pentagon, Bush administration, Democrats and corporate media back Musharraf even if some in his own military may not. Washington badly needs him with Afghanistan deteriorating badly and Iraq already a hopeless cause. It’s even more important given the reluctance of NATO and “coalition” defense ministers to commit more troops and a growing anxiety of some to pull out of Bush’s wars entirely. With this backdrop, Musharraf portrays himself as a rock of stability so who in Washington cares how he solidifies power or if he’ll accept Bhutto as Prime Minister. For Bush and Democrats, only the “war on terror” matters so any leader backing it is an ally. Bottom line despite muted criticism – democratic credentials are not an issue. Fact is they never are.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Mondays at noon US central time.

    Knights Templar Secrets Revealed

    1

    The Vatican has published secret archive documents about the trial of the Knights Templar, including a long-lost parchment that shows that Pope Clement V initially absolved the medieval Christian order from accusations of heresy, officials said Friday.

    The 300-page volume recently came out in a limited edition — 799 copies — each priced at $8,377, said Scrinium publishing house, which prints documents from the Vatican’s secret archives.

    The order of knights, which ultimately disappeared as a result of the heresy scandal, recently captivated the imagination of readers of the best-seller “The Da Vinci Code,” in which the author Dan Brown linked the Templars to the story of the Holy Grail.

    The work reproduces the entire documentation on the papal hearings convened after King Philip IV of France arrested and tortured Templar leaders in 1307 under charges of heresy and immorality.

    The military order of the Poor Knights of Christ and of the Temple of Solomon was founded in 1118 in Jerusalem to protect pilgrims in the Holy Land following the First Crusade.

    As their military might increased, the Templars also grew in wealth, acquiring property throughout Europe and running a primitive banking system. After the Templars left the Middle East with the collapse of the Crusader kingdoms, their power and secretive ways aroused the fear of European rulers and sparked accusations of corruption and blasphemy.

    Historians believe that Philip owed debts to the Templars and seized on the accusations to arrest their leaders and extort confessions of heresy under torture as a way to seize the order’s riches.

    The publishing house said the new book includes the “Parchment of Chinon,” a 1308 decision by Clement to save the Templars and their order. The document was misplaced for centuries in the archives and found again by researchers in 2001.

    According to the Vatican archives Web site, the parchment shows that Clement absolved the Templar leaders of the heresy charge, though he did recognize they were guilty of immorality, and he planned to reform the order.

    However, pressured by Philip, Clement later reversed his decision and suppressed the order in 1312.

    Jacques de Molay, Grand Master of the Templars, was burned at the stake in 1314 along with his aides.

    Surviving monks fled, with some absorbed by other orders, and over the centuries, some groups have claimed to have descended from the Templars.

    http://www.salfordonline.com

    $4.3 million reasons to believe in Ron Paul

    0

    An Orange County Register editorial

    If this doesn’t get the attention of the mainstream media and the Republican establishment, it’s difficult to figure out just what would — but it’s likely that even more dramatic developments in Dr. Ron Paul’s run for the presidency are yet to come.

    The big news is that Ron Paul, the 10-term Republican congressman from Texas and longtime standard-bearer for libertarian and constitutionalist ideas, raised more money — by a considerable amount — in a 24-hour period than any other Republican candidate. Some 37,000 people, 21,000 of them new donors, contributed $4.3 million to Ron Paul’s campaign Monday, Guy Fawkes Day.

    Guy Fawkes Day? Go rent the DVD of “V for Vendetta” to gain an insight into the spirit that moves the Ron Paul revolution.

    The previous single-day fundraising record for Republicans was held by Mitt Romney, who raised $3.14 million last January, when he held a “national call day.” Barack Obama on the Democratic side has raised more money in a single day, and Hillary Clinton raised $6.2 million on June 30. But Paul is the single-day champion among Republicans.

    Dr. Paul surprised the political world by raising more than $5 million in the third quarter, and his campaign set a goal of raising $12 million by the end of the year. As of Tuesday afternoon it had raised $7.396 million, so that goal, which seemed utopian a month ago, looks as if it will be surpassed easily.

    “What was striking to me,” Lew Rockwell of the Mises Institute in Auburn, Ala., who’s a longtime friend and associate of Dr. Paul, told us, “is that this was entirely a volunteer event. It was conceived, designed and run entirely by volunteers. A normal campaign that tried a one-day fundraising event would have had weeks of top-down coordination and a huge staff manning the phones. This was an example of bottom-up spontaneous order.”

    So what does it mean? We believe it shows a considerable constituency not just for ending the war in Iraq, which Dr. Paul opposed from the beginning, but for an honest candidate who says what he thinks rather than what has been poll-tested, and for the kind of constitutionalist, limited-government philosophy that many Republicans and conservatives (as well as libertarians) used to think they supported.

    In short, there’s a hunger for liberty among young and old of all races and backgrounds, and many are willing to put their money where their mouth is. Ron Paul has been the catalyst, but he has awakened a growing group of Americans whom standard-issue politicians will no longer be able to ignore.

    What are we doing to stop Britain being taken over?

    0

    What are we doing to stop our beloved Britain being taken over?

    This is too frightening and too important to ignore any longer.

    Peter Hitchens

    If we don’t want to become a neglected outstation of the European Superstate, stripped of our nationhood, powerless to decide who lives here, controlled by laws we don’t make and can’t change, ruled by a government we cannot throw out, we have rather a short time in which to do something about it.

    You may think none of this matters to you, but the trouble is that it does, whether you think so or not.

    The European Union is interested in you, your liberty and your money, even if you don’t care about it.

    Its decisions affect your life, even if you don’t realise they do.

    When I point out that local councils are changing rubbish collections because of EU laws, people don’t believe me.

    Scroll down for more…

    Ex-Europhile: Margaret Thatcher wears jumper adorned with EU member states

    They rightly think it ridiculous that such things should be affected by what is supposed to be a Free Trade partnership. But they are.

    A huge number of our laws have been drawn up in Brussels and hurried through Parliament without anybody really understanding what they were doing.

    A lot of us still don’t even grasp why it is that we can no longer have nice blue British passports.

    They also don’t grasp why they have to queue for ages to get back into the country after a holiday.

    They aren’t paying attention. That passport you have isn’t British. It’s European. It gives you no more right to enter this country than if you were a Lithuanian.

    The border you are crossing is the border of the EU, not Britain. If the Government set up a special channel for UK passport holders it would be breaking EU law. There is no longer any such thing as a British passport.

    This has another grim meaning. We cannot control two-thirds of the immigration now revolutionising this country because it comes from EU states.

    British people have a way of ignoring the Continent then finding out just in time that what happens there matters — Dunkirk being the most recent example of this complacent folly. We probably won’t get another Dunkirk to warn us.

    By the time it is clear to everyone what has happened, it will be far too late.

    Look at the row we are having, a rather lukewarm row in my view, about the European Constitution, dressed up as the Treaty of Lisbon but still what it always was — the official foundation document of the European Superstate.

    At first it looks as if there are two sides, those for a referendum, and those against.

    But what use would a referendum be? Who seriously believes that, if Britain said “No”, the EU would say: “Oh, sorry to have troubled you with our silly, over-ambitious idea. We’ll give it up for good.”?

    No, they would threaten and suborn the British Government into holding the vote again.

    Or they would have yet another summit in which the thing would be adjusted a tiny bit and presented as if it were new. Or they would say: “Very well then, if you don’t like it, why not leave?”

    Gordon Brown might hold a referendum on that very subject. At this point we would badly need a major political figure to stand up and say: “Yes, please, let’s leave.”

    He could add: “After all, if Norway and Switzerland can cope outside, we certainly can. And I defy anyone to tell me one single way in which this country has benefited from its long entanglement with this horrible organisation.”

    But this will not happen. Our entire political elite, in all parties, love the EU, not because it is good for the country, but because it is good for them.

    They love its regular service of gravy trains, carrying failed Ministers off to a life of high salaries, big expenses and huge pensions, plus an almost total absence of responsibility.

    They don’t mind at all that it deprives them of the power to do very much. They are, for the most part, short of ideas and lazy, and happy to be able to pass the buck to Brussels while enjoying their pay and perks. Note, specially, the behaviour of the Tory Party. People sometimes ask why I call them ‘useless’. Well, here’s an example. You get a lot of something called ‘Euroscepticism’ from Tories. It’s a stupid word and it describes a worthless thing.

    They act as if they are against the EU grabbing our power and money, and talk sternly about how they disapprove.

    But David Cameron, William Hague and Malcolm Rifkind are clear that, if the Lisbon Treaty is ratified, that will be that. In the (highly unlikely) event of them coming to power, they won’t hold a referendum because, oh dear, it will be too late.

    In doing this, they are part of a great tradition. Harold Macmillan first sought British entry to the Common Market in 1962. Then Ted Heath succeeded in getting it, ramming our membership through Parliament with characteristic ruthlessness and sacrificing Britain’s fisheries industry for his ambition.

    When, in 1975, Harold Wilson held a referendum on staying in, Margaret Thatcher campaigned vigorously for Britain to remain in the Market, sporting a jumper bearing the flags of member states.

    When she came to office, she pushed through the Single European Act, a huge surrender of British vetoes. Then she was bludgeoned by Cabinet colleagues into entering the Exchange Rate Mechanism.

    By the end of her premiership, she had begun to realise what was at stake. But it was precisely because of this that the Tory Party then threw her out of office.

    John Major went on to browbeat and bully his MPs into voting for the Maastricht Treaty, yet another huge surrender of independence.

    Mr Cameron represents a firm return to the Europhile days before Lady Thatcher’s rebellion.

    When it comes to action, the Tory Party will continue to support the EU because they have been committed to it since the Sixties, and cannot admit that this was a mistake.

    But they also recognise how unpopular it is, which is why they pretend to be hostile and invented ‘Euroscepticism’ to console disgruntled voters.

    The longer this goes on, the harder it will be to unscramble. My advice is not to be diverted by campaigns for a referendum that will get us nowhere.

    It is to consider, very carefully, whether you will be able to look your children and grandchildren in the face when, 20 years hence, they ask: “What did you do to stop the country being taken over by a foreign power?”

    I shall continue, week by week, to suggest ways in which you might be able to ensure that they never need to ask that question.

    Brazil discovers vast new oil reserves

    0

    Brazil has discovered huge new petroleum reserves in its south that could turn the country into one of the biggest oil producers in the world, the government and its state-controlled oil company announced Thursday.If one of the deposits turns out to be as vast as it appears, Brazil will be in the same league “as the Arab countries, Venezuela and others,” the senior minister in charge of the cabinet, Dilma Rousseff, said.

    Petrobras, Brazil’s national oil company, said in a statement that exploration of its Tupi field, offshore Sao Paulo state, revealed it could produce up to eight billion barrels of light oil and natural gas.

    It said that find, along with another potential field still being explored farther south, could propel Brazil “among the countries with the biggest oil and gas reserves in the world.”

    The head of Petrobras, Jose Sergio Gabrielli, told a media conference in Rio de Janeiro that Brazil’s total reserves could now place it “between Nigeria and Venezuela.”

    Shares in the company soared on the news, closing 14.57 percent higher at 93.40 reais on the Sao Paulo stockmarket.

    Petrobras’s previous stated reserves, given at the end of 2006, were the equivalent of 11.46 billion barrels of oil.

    The Tupi find alone could boost that by 50 percent.

    Petrobras operates the Tupi area, of which it holds 65 percent. British energy group BG holds a 25 percent share in the field and Portugal’s Petrogal-Galp Energia holds 10 percent.

    Petrobras also holds the lion’s share of interest in the other field being tested.

    The Brazilian government said no more parts of the new field would be licensed out until a full evaluation was in. It said this was in “the public interest.”

    The discoveries are a significant fillip for Brazil, coming at a time that the price of oil is sitting at a record high and heading towards 100 dollars per barrel.

    An analyst at the Brazilian Center for Infrastructure, Adriano Pires, agreed that “this is good news.”

    But he noted that the Tupi field, 250 kilometres (155 miles) offshore, lies in very deep water, which will make extraction “very expensive.”

    At best, he said, production would begin in around four or five years’ time

    “It’s only viable if oil prices stay high,” he said.

    The Brazilian state holds a 55.7 percent of the shares with voting rights in Petrobras, giving it effective control of the energy giant, which currently pumps out nearly two million barrels of oil a day.

    Via the awesome Aftermath News

    The Secret History of the Impending War with Iran

    1

    The Secret History of the Impending War with Iran That the White House Doesn’t Want You to Know

    Two former high-ranking policy experts from the Bush administration say the U.S. has been gearing up for a war with Iran for years, despite claiming otherwise. It’ll be Iraq all over again.

    Two former high-ranking policy experts from the Bush administration say the U.S. has been gearing up for a war with Iran for years, despite claiming otherwise. It'll be Iraq all over again.In the years after 9/11, Flynt Leverett and Hillary Mann worked at the highest levels of the Bush administration as Middle East policy experts for the National Security Council. Mann conducted secret negotiations with Iran. Leverett traveled with Colin Powell and advised Condoleezza Rice. They each played crucial roles in formulating policy for the region leading up to the war in Iraq. But when they left the White House, they left with a growing sense of alarm — not only was the Bush administration headed straight for war with Iran, it had been set on this course for years. That was what people didn’t realize. It was just like Iraq, when the White House was so eager for war it couldn’t wait for the UN inspectors to leave. The steps have been many and steady and all in the same direction. And now things are getting much worse. We are getting closer and closer to the tripline, they say.

    “The hard-liners are upping the pressure on the State Department,” says Leverett. “They’re basically saying, ‘You’ve been trying to engage Iran for more than a year now and what do you have to show for it? They keep building more centrifuges, they’re sending this IED stuff over into Iraq that’s killing American soldiers, the human-rights internal political situation has gotten more repressive — what the hell do you have to show for this engagement strategy?'”

    But the engagement strategy was never serious and was designed to fail, they say. Over the last year, Rice has begun saying she would talk to “anybody, anywhere, anytime,” but not to the Iranians unless they stopped enriching uranium first. That’s not a serious approach to diplomacy, Mann says. Diplomacy is about talking to your enemies. That’s how wars are averted. You work up to the big things. And when U.S. ambassador to Iraq Ryan Crocker had his much-publicized meeting with his Iranian counterpart in Baghdad this spring, he didn’t even have permission from the White House to schedule a second meeting.

    The most ominous new development is the Bush administration’s push to name the Iranian Revolutionary Guards a terrorist organization.

    “The U.S. has designated any number of states over the years as state sponsors of terrorism,” says Leverett. “But here for the first time the U.S. is saying that part of a government is itself a terrorist organization.”

    This is what Leverett and Mann fear will happen: The diplomatic effort in the United Nations will fail when it becomes clear that Russia’s and China’s geopolitical ambitions will not accommodate the inconvenience of energy sanctions against Iran. Without any meaningful incentive from the U.S. to be friendly, Iran will keep meddling in Iraq and installing nuclear centrifuges. This will trigger a response from the hard-liners in the White House, who feel that it is their moral duty to deal with Iran before the Democrats take over American foreign policy. “If you get all those elements coming together, say in the first half of ’08,” says Leverett, “what is this president going to do? I think there is a serious risk he would decide to order an attack on the Iranian nuclear installations and probably a wider target zone.”

    This would result in a dramatic increase in attacks on U.S. forces in Iraq, attacks by proxy forces like Hezbollah, and an unknown reaction from the wobbly states of Afghanistan and Pakistan, where millions admire Iran’s resistance to the Great Satan. “As disastrous as Iraq has been,” says Mann, “an attack on Iran could engulf America in a war with the entire Muslim world.”

    Mann and Leverett believe that none of this had to be.

    Flynt Lawrence Leverett grew up in Fort Worth and went to Texas Christian University. He spent the first nine years of his government career as a CIA analyst specializing in the Middle East. He voted for George Bush in 2000. On the day the assassins of Al Qaeda flew two hijacked airplanes into the World Trade Center, Colin Powell summoned him to help plan the response. Five months later, Leverett landed a plum post on the National Security Council. When Condoleezza Rice discussed the Middle East with President Bush and Donald Rumsfeld, Leverett was the man standing behind her taking notes and whispering in her ear.

    Today, he sits on the back deck of a house tucked into the curve of a leafy suburban street in McLean, Virginia, a forty-nine-year-old white American man wearing khakis and a white dress shirt and wire-rimmed glasses. Mann sits next to him, also wearing khakis. She’s thirty-nine but looks much younger, with straight brown hair and a tomboy’s open face. The polish on her toenails is pink. If you saw her around McLean, you wouldn’t hesitate:

    Soccer mom. Classic soccer mom.

    But with degrees from Brandeis and Harvard Law and stints at Tel Aviv University and the powerful Israeli lobby known as AIPAC, she has even better right-wing credentials than her husband.

    As they talk, eating grapes out of a bowl, lawn mowers hum and birds chirp. The floor is littered with toy trucks and rubber animals left behind by the youngest of their four children. But the tranquillity is misleading. When Mann and Leverett went public with the inside story behind the impending disaster with Iran, the White House dismissed them. Then it imposed prior restraint on them, an extraordinary episode of government censorship. Finally, it threatened them.

    Now they are afraid of the White House, and watching what they say. But still, they feel they have to speak out.

    Like so many things these days, this story began on the morning of September 11, 2001. On Forty-fifth Street in Manhattan, Mann had just been evacuated from the offices of the U.S. mission to the United Nations and was walking home to her apartment on Thirty-eighth Street — walking south, toward the giant plume of smoke. When her cell phone rang, she picked it up immediately because her sister worked at the World Trade Center and she was frantic for word. But it wasn’t her sister, it was a senior Iranian diplomat. To protect him from reprisals from the Iranian government, she doesn’t want to name him, but she describes him as a cultured man in his fifties with salt-and-pepper hair. Since early spring, they had been meeting secretly in a small conference room at the UN.

    “Are you all right?” he asked.

    Yes, she said, she was fine.

    The attack was a terrible tragedy, he said, doubtless the work of Al Qaeda.

    “I hope that we can still work together,” he said.

    That same day, in Washington, on the seventh floor of the State Department building, a security guard opened the door of Leverett’s office and told him they were evacuating the building. Leverett was Powell’s specialist on terrorist states like Syria and Libya, so he knew the world was about to go through a dramatic change. As he joined the people milling on the sidewalk, his mind was already racing.

    Then he got a call summoning him back to Foggy Bottom. At the entrance to a specially fortified office, he showed his badge to the guards and passed into a windowless conference room. There were about a dozen people there, Powell’s top foreign-policy planners. Powell told them that their first job was to make plans to capture or kill Osama bin Laden. The second job was to rally allies. That meant detailed strategies for approaching other nations — in some cases, Powell could make the approach, in others the president would have to make the call. Then Powell left them to work through the night.

    At 5:30 a.m. on September 12, they walked the list to the office of the deputy secretary of state, Richard Armitage. Powell took it straight to the White House.

    Mann and Leverett didn’t know each other then, but they were already traveling down parallel tracks. Months before September 11, Mann had been negotiating with the Iranian diplomat at the UN. After the attacks, the meetings continued, sometimes alone and sometimes with their Russian counterpart sitting in. Soon they traded the conference room for the Delegates’ Lounge, an airy two-story bar with ashtrays for all the foreigners who were used to smoking indoors. One day, up on the second floor where the windows overlooked the East River, the diplomat told her that Iran was ready to cooperate unconditionally, a phrase that had seismic diplomatic implications. Unconditional talks are what the U.S. had been demanding as a precondition to any official diplomatic contact between the U.S. and Iran. And it would be the first chance since the Islamic revolution for any kind of rapprochement. “It was revolutionary,” Mann says. “It could have changed the world.”

    A few weeks later, after signing on to Condoleezza Rice’s staff as the new Iran expert in the National Security Council, Mann flew to Europe with Ryan Crocker — then a deputy assistant secretary of state — to hold talks with a team of Iranian diplomats. Meeting in a light-filled conference room at the old UN building in Geneva, they hammered out plans for Iranian help in the war against the Taliban. The Iranians agreed to provide assistance if any American was shot down near their territory, agreed to let the U.S. send food in through their border, and even agreed to restrain some “really bad Afghanis,” like a rabidly anti-American warlord named Gulbuddin Hekmatyar, quietly putting him under house arrest in Tehran. These were significant concessions. At the same time, special envoy James Dobbins was having very public and warm discussions in Bonn with the Iranian deputy foreign minister as they worked together to set up a new government for Afghanistan. And the Iranians seemed eager to help in more tactical ways as well. They had intimate knowledge of Taliban strategic capabilities and they wanted to share it with the Americans.

    One day during the U.S. bombing campaign, Mann and her Iranian counterparts were sitting around the wooden conference table speculating about the future Afghani constitution. Suddenly the Iranian who knew so much about intelligence matters started pounding on the table. “Enough of that!” he shouted, unfurling a map of Afghanistan. Here was a place the Americans needed to bomb. And here, and here, he angrily jabbed his finger at the map.

    Leverett spent those days in his office at the State Department building, watching the revolution in the Middle East and coming up with plans on how to capture the lightning. Suddenly countries like Syria and Libya and Sudan and Iran were coming forward with offers of help, which raised a vital question — should they stay on the same enemies list as North Korea and Iraq, or could there be a new slot for “friendly” sponsors of terror?

    As a CIA analyst, Leverett had come to the view that Middle Eastern terrorism was more tactical than religious. Syria wanted the Golan Heights back and didn’t have the military strength to put up a serious fight against Israel, so it relied on “asymmetrical methods.” Accepting this idea meant that nations like Syria weren’t locked in a fanatic mind-set, that they could evolve to use new methods, so Leverett told Powell to seize the moment and draw up a “road map” to peace for the problem countries of the Middle East — expel your terrorist groups and stop trying to develop weapons of mass destruction, and we will take you off the sponsors-of-terrorism list and start a new era of cooperation.

    That December, just after the triumph over Afghanistan, Powell took the idea to the White House. The occasion was the regular “deputies meeting” at the Situation Room. Gathered around the table were the deputy secretary of state, the deputy secretary of defense, the deputy director of the CIA, a representative from Vice-President Cheney’s office, and also the deputy national security advisor, Stephen Hadley.

    Hadley hated the idea. So did the representatives from Rumsfeld and Cheney. They thought that it was a reward for bad behavior, that the sponsors of terrorism should stop just because it’s the right thing to do.

    After the meeting, Hadley wrote up a brief memo that came to be known as Hadley’s Rules:

    If a state like Syria or Iran offers specific assistance, we will take it without offering anything in return. We will accept it without strings or promises. We won’t try to build on it.

    Leverett thought that was simply nutty. To strike postures of moral purity, they were throwing away a chance for real progress. But just a few days later, Condoleezza Rice called him into her office, warming him up with talk of how classical music shaped their childhoods. As he told her about the year he spent studying classical piano at the Liszt Academy in Budapest, Leverett felt a real connection. Then she said she was looking for someone to take the job of senior director of Mideast affairs at the National Security Council, someone who would take a real leadership role on the Palestinian issue. Big changes were coming in 2002.

    He repeated his firm belief that the White House had to draw up a road map with real solutions to the division of Jerusalem and the problem of refugees, something with final borders. That was the only remedy to the crisis in the Middle East.

    Just after the New Year, Rice called and offered him the job.

    The bowl of grapes is empty and the plate of cheese moves to the center of the table. Leverett’s teenage son comes in with questions about a teacher. Periodically, Mann interrupts herself. “This is off the record,” she says. “This is going to have to be on background.”

    She’s not allowed to talk about confidential documents or intelligence matters, but the topic of her negotiations with the Iranians is especially touchy.

    “As far as they’re concerned, the whole idea that there were talks is something I shouldn’t even be talking about,” she says.

    All ranks and ranking are out. “They don’t want there to be anything about the level of the talks or who was involved.”

    “They won’t even let us say something like ‘senior’ or ‘important,’ ‘high-ranking,’ or ‘high-level,'” Leverett says.

    But the important thing is that the Iranians agreed to talk unconditionally, Mann says. “They specifically told me time and again that they were doing this because they understood the impact of this attack on the U.S., and they thought that if they helped us unconditionally, that would be the way to change the dynamic for the first time in twenty-five years.”

    She believed them.

    But while Leverett was still moving into the Old Executive Office Building next to the White House, Mann was wrapped up in the crisis over a ship called the Karin A that left Iran loaded with fifty tons of weapons. According to the Israeli navy, which intercepted the Karin A in the Red Sea, it was headed for the PLO. In staff meetings at the White House, Mann argued for caution. The Iranian government probably didn’t even know about the arms shipments. It was issuing official denials in the most passionate way, even sending its deputy foreign minister onto Fox News to say “categorically” that “all segments of the Iranian government” had nothing to do with the arms shipment, which meant the “total government, not simply President Khatami’s administration.”

    Bush waited. Three weeks later, it was time for his 2002 State of the Union address. Mann spent the morning in a meeting with Condoleezza Rice and the new president of Afghanistan, Hamid Karzai, who kept asking Rice for an expanded international peacekeeping force. Rice kept saying that the Afghans would have to solve their own problems. Then they went off to join the president’s motorcade and Mann headed back to her office to watch the speech on TV.

    That was the speech in which Bush linked Iran to Iraq and North Korea with a memorable phrase:

    “States like these, and their terrorist allies, constitute an axis of evil, arming to threaten the peace of the world.”

    The Iranians had been engaging in high-level diplomacy with the American government for more than a year, so the phrase was shocking and profound.

    After that, the Iranian diplomats skipped the monthly meeting in Geneva. But they came again in March. And so did Mann. “They said they had put their necks out to talk to us and they were taking big risks with their careers and their families and their lives,” Mann says.

    The secret negotiations with Iran continued, every month for another year.

    Leverett plunged right into a dramatic new peace proposal floated by Crown Prince Abdullah of Saudi Arabia. Calling for “full normalization” in exchange for “full withdrawal” from the occupied territories, Abdullah promised to rally all the Arab nations to a final settlement with Israel. In his brand-new third-floor office at the Old Executive Office Building, a tiny room with a very high ceiling, Leverett began hammering out the details with Abdullah’s foreign-policy advisor, Adel Al-Jubeir. When Ariel Sharon said that a return to the ’67 borders was unacceptable, Al-Jubeir said the Saudis didn’t want to be in the “real estate business” — if the Palestinians agreed to border modifications, the Saudis could hardly refuse them. Al-Jubeir believed he had something that might actually work.

    But the White House wasn’t interested. Sharon already rejected it, Rice told Leverett.

    At the Arab League meeting, Abdullah got every Arab state to sign his proposal in a unanimous vote.

    The White House still wasn’t interested.

    Then violence in the Palestinian territories began to increase, climaxing in an Israeli siege of Arafat’s compound. In April, Leverett accompanied Colin Powell on a tour that took them from Morocco to Egypt and Jordan and Lebanon and finally Israel. Twice they crossed the Israeli-army lines to visit Arafat under siege. Powell seemed to think he had authorization from the White House to explore what everyone was calling “political horizons,” the safely vague shorthand for a peaceful future, so on the final day Leverett holed up in a suite at the David Citadel Hotel in Jerusalem with a group of senior American officials — the U. . ambassador to Israel, the U. S. consul general to Jerusalem, assistant secretary of state for Near Eastern affairs Bill Burns — trying to hammer out Powell’s last speech.

    Then the phone rang. It was Stephen Hadley on the phone from the White House. “Tell Powell he is not authorized to talk about a political horizon,” he said. “Those are formal instructions.”

    “This is a bad idea,” Leverett remembers saying. “It’s bad policy and it’s also humiliating for Powell, who has been talking to heads of state about this very issue for the last ten days.”

    “It doesn’t matter,” Hadley said. “There’s too much resistance from Rumsfeld and the VP. Those are the instructions.”

    So Leverett went back into the suite and asked Powell to step aside.

    Powell was furious, Leverett remembers. “What is it they’re afraid of?” he demanded. “Who the hell are they afraid of?”

    “I don’t know sir,” Leverett said.

    In the spring, Crown Prince Abdullah flew to Texas to meet Bush at his ranch. The way Leverett remembers the story, Abdullah sat down and told Bush he was going to ask a direct question and wanted a direct answer. Are you going to do anything about the Palestinian issue? If you tell me no, if it’s too difficult, if you’re not going to give it that kind of priority, just tell me. I will understand and I will never say anything critical of you or your leadership in public, but I’m going to need to make my own judgments and my own decisions about Saudi interests.

    Bush tried to stall, saying he understood his concerns and would see what he could do.

    Abdullah stood up. “That’s it. This meeting is over.”

    No Arab leader had ever spoken to Bush like that before, Leverett says. But Saudi Arabia was a key ally in the war on terror, vital to the continued U.S. oil supply, so Bush and Rice and Powell excused themselves into another room for a quick huddle.

    When he came back, Bush gave Abdullah his word that he would deal seriously with the Palestinian issue.

    “Okay,” Abdullah said. “The president of the United States has given me his word.”

    So the meeting continued, ending with a famous series of photographs of Bush and Abdullah riding around the ranch in Bush’s pickup.

    In a meeting at the White House a few days later, Leverett saw Powell shaking his head over Abdullah’s threat. He called it “the near-death experience.”

    Bush rolled his eyes. “We sure don’t want to go through anything like that again.”

    Then the king of Jordan came to Washington to see Bush. There had to be a road map for peace in Palestine, the king said. Despite the previous experience with Abdullah in Crawford, Bush seemed taken by surprise, Leverett remembers, but he listened and said that the idea of a road map seemed pretty reasonable.

    So suddenly they were working on a road map. For moderate Arab states, the hope of a two-state solution would offer some political cover before Washington embarked on any invasion of Iraq. In a meeting with the king of Jordan, Leverett made a personal promise that it would be out by the end of 2002.

    But nothing happened. In Cheney’s and Rumsfeld’s offices, opposition came from men like John Hannah, Doug Feith, and Scooter Libby. In Rice’s office, there was Elliott Abrams. Again they said that negotiation was just a reward for bad behavior. First the Palestinians had to reject terrorism and practice democracy.

    Finally, it was a bitter-cold day just after Thanksgiving and Leverett was on a family trip to the Washington Zoo, standing in front of the giraffe enclosure. The White House patched through a call from the foreign minister of Jordan, Marwan Muasher, who said that Rice had just told him the road map was off. “Do you have any idea how this has pulled the rug out from under us, from under me?” Muasher said. “I’m the one that has to go into Arab League meetings and get beat up and say, ‘No, there’s going to be a plan out by the end of the year.’ How can we ever trust you again?”

    On Monday, Leverett went straight to Rice’s office for an explanation. She told him that Ariel Sharon had called early elections in Israel and asked Bush to shelve any Palestinian plan. This time Leverett couldn’t hide his exasperation. “You told the whole world you were going to put this out before Christmas,” he said. “Because one Israeli politician told you it’s going to make things politically difficult for him, you don’t put it out? Do you realize how hard that makes things for all our Arab partners?”

    Rice sat impassively behind her broad desk. “If we put the road map out,” she said, “it will interfere with Israeli elections.”

    “You are interfering with Israeli elections, just in another way.”

    “Flynt, the decision has already been made,” Rice said.

    There was also an awkward scene with the secretary of defense. They were in the Situation Room and Leverett was sitting behind Rice taking notes when suddenly Rumsfeld addressed him directly. “Why are you laughing? Did I say something funny?”

    The room went silent, and Rumsfeld asked it again.

    “Why are you laughing? Did I say something funny?”

    “I’m sorry Mr. Secretary, I don’t think I know what you’re talking about.”

    “It looks to me like you were laughing,” Rumsfeld said.

    “No sir. I’m sorry if I gave that impression. I was just listening to the meeting and taking notes. Didn’t mean to disturb you.”

    The meeting continued, message received.

    By that time, Leverett and Mann had met and fallen in love. They got married in February 2003, went to Florida on their honeymoon, and got back just in time for the Shock and Awe bombing campaign. Leverett quit his NSC job in disgust. Mann rotated back to the State Department.

    Then came the moment that would lead to an extraordinary battle with the Bush administration. It was an average morning in April, about four weeks into the war. Mann picked up her daily folder and sat down at her desk, glancing at a fax cover page. The fax was from the Swiss ambassador to Iran, which wasn’t unusual — since the U.S. had no formal relationship with Iran, the Swiss ambassador represented American interests there and often faxed over updates on what he was doing. This time he’d met with Sadeq Kharrazi, a well-connected Iranian who was the nephew of the foreign minister and son-in-law to the supreme leader. Amazingly, Kharrazi had presented the ambassador with a detailed proposal for peace in the Middle East, approved at the highest levels in Tehran.

    A two-page summary was attached. Scanning it, Mann was startled by one dramatic concession after another — “decisive action” against all terrorists in Iran, an end of support for Hamas and the Islamic Jihad, a promise to cease its nuclear program, and also an agreement to recognize Israel.

    This was huge. Mann sat down and drafted a quick memo to her boss, Richard Haass. It was important to send a swift and positive response.

    Then she heard that the White House had already made up its mind — it was going to ignore the offer. Its only response was to lodge a formal complaint with the Swiss government about their ambassador’s meddling.

    A few days after that, a terrorist attack in Saudi Arabia killed thirty-four people, including eight Americans, and an intelligence report said the bombers had been in phone contact with Al Qaeda members in Iran. Although it was unknown whether Tehran had anything to do with the bombing or if the terrorists were hiding out in the lawless areas near the border, Rumsfeld set the tone for the administration’s response at his next press conference. “There’s no question but that there have been and are today senior Al Qaeda leaders in Iran, and they are busy.”

    Colin Powell saw Mann’s memo. A couple weeks later he approached her at a State Department reception and said, “It was a very good memo. I couldn’t sell it at the White House.”

    In response to questions from Esquire, Colin Powell called Leverett “very able” and confirms much of what he says. Leverett’s account of the clash between Bush and Crown Prince Abdullah was accurate, he said. “It was a very serious moment and no one wanted to see if the Saudis were bluffing.” The same goes for the story about his speech in Israel in 2002. “I had major problems with the White House on what I wanted to say.”

    On the subject of the peace offer, though, Powell was defensive. “I talked to all of my key assistants since Flynt started talking about an Iranian grand bargain, but none of us recall seeing this initiative as a grand bargain.”

    On the general subject of negotiations with Iran, he responded with pointed politesse. “We talked to the Iranians quietly up until 2003. The president chose not to continue that channel.”

    That is putting it mildly. In May of 2003, when the U.S. was still in the triumphant “mission accomplished” phase of the Iraq war, word started filtering out of the White House about an aggressive new Iran policy that would include efforts to destabilize the Iranian government and even to promote a popular uprising. In his first public statement on Iran policy since leaving the NSC, Leverett told The Washington Post he thought the White House was making a dangerous mistake. “What it means is we will end up with an Iran that has nuclear weapons and no dialogue with the United States.”

    In the years that followed, he spoke out in dozens of newspaper editorials and a book, all making variations on the same argument — America’s approach to rogue nations was all sticks and no carrots, all economic sanctions and threats of war without any dialogue. “To bring about real change,” he argued, “we must also offer concrete benefits.” Of course states like Iran and Syria messed around in Iraq, he said. Iran was supporting the Iraqi opposition when the U.S. was still supporting Saddam Hussein. It was insane to expect them to stop when the goal of a Shiite Iraq was finally in reach. The only way to solve the underlying issues was to offer Iran a “grand bargain” that would recognize the legitimacy of Iran’s government and its right to a role in the region.

    But that was an unthinkable thought. The White House ignored him. Democrats ignored him. The Brookings Institution declined to renew his contract.

    Then he started talking about the peace offer. By then it was 2006 and the war wasn’t going well and suddenly people started to respond: You mean Iran isn’t evil? They helped fight the Taliban? They wanted to make peace? He summed it all up in a long paper for a Washington think tank that happened to be scheduled for publication last November, a vulnerable time for the White House, just after the Democrats swept the midterm elections and the Iraq Study Group released its report calling for negotiations with Syria and Iran. When he submitted the paper to the CIA for a routine review, they told him the CIA had no problem with it but someone from the NSC called to complain. “You shouldn’t have cleared this without letting the White House take a look at it,” the official said.

    Leverett told them he wasn’t going to let White House operatives judge his criticisms of White House operatives and distilled his argument into an op-ed piece for The New York Times. This time he shared a byline with his wife, who had experienced the peace offer up close. They submitted their first draft to the CIA and the State Department on a Sunday in early December, expecting to hear back the next day.

    The next morning, Leverett gave a blistering talk on Bush’s Iran policy to the influential conservatives at the Cato Institute. The speech was carried live on C-SPAN. Later that day, he flew to New York and made the same arguments at a private dinner with the UN ambassadors of Russia and Britain. He was starting to have an impact.

    By Tuesday, he still hadn’t heard from the CIA review board.

    They called on Wednesday and told him that there was nothing classified in the piece as far as the agency was concerned, but someone in the West Wing wasn’t happy with it and would be redacting large sections.

    “You’re the clearing agency,” Leverett said. “You’re the people named in my agreement.”

    They said their hands were tied.

    After consulting a lawyer, Leverett and Mann and a researcher worked through the night to assemble a list of public sources where the blacked-out material had already been published. They also took out one line that might have been based on a classified document.

    But the White House wouldn’t budge. It was a First Amendment showdown.

    On Thursday, Leverett and Mann decided to publish the piece with large sections of type blacked out, 168 words in all. Since the piece had been rendered pretty much incomprehensible, they included a list of public sources. “To make sense of our op-ed article, readers will have to look up the citations themselves.”

    As they tell their story, Mann rushes off to pick up one of their sons from a play date and Leverett takes over, telling what happened over the following months:

    Bush sent a second carrier group to the Persian Gulf.

    U.S. troops started to arrest Iranians living in Baghdad, accusing them of working with insurgents.

    Bush accused Iran of “providing material support” for attacks on U.S. forces, a formulation that suggested a legal justification for a preemptive attack.

    Senator Jim Webb of Virginia pushed through an amendment requiring Bush to get congressional authorization for an attack.

    Colin Powell broke his long silence with a pointed warning. “You can’t negotiate when you tell the other side, ‘Give us what a negotiation would produce before the negotiations start.’ ”

    Even Henry Kissinger started giving interviews on the need to “exhaust every possibility to come to an understanding with Iran.”

    From inside the White House, Leverett was hearing a scary scenario: The Russians were scheduled to ship fuel rods to the Iranian nuclear reactor in Bushehr, which meant the reactor would become operational by this November, at which point it would be impossible to bomb — the fallout alone would turn the city into an urban Chernobyl. The White House was seriously considering a preemptive attack when the Russians cooled things down by saying Iran hadn’t paid its bills, so they would hold back the Bushehr fuel rods for a while.

    That put things into a summer lull. But by August, tensions were rising again. U.S. troops in Baghdad arrested an official delegation of Iranian energy experts, leading them out of a hotel in blindfolds and handcuffs. Then Iran said that it had paid its bills and that the Russians were ready to deliver the Bushehr shipment. In Time magazine, former CIA officer and author Robert Baer quoted a highly placed White House official:

    “IEDs are a casus belli for this administration. There will be an attack on Iran.”

    Mann steps back out on the deck and starts collecting the scattered toys to prepare the house for a dinner party, the typical modern American mother multitasking her way through a busy day. “The reason I have to be so careful now is that I’m legally on notice and they will prosecute things that I say or do,” she says, picking up a plastic truck.

    “Because of that one article?”

    “Yeah.”

    Outside, it’s getting warmer. There’s a heavy haze and floating bugs and for a moment it feels a bit ominous, a gathering silence, one of those moments when giant pods start to sprout in local basements.

    “We’re tired,” Mann says. “Nobody listens.”

    It seems inconceivable to her that once again a war could be coming, and once again no one is listening. Another pair of lawn mowers joins the chorus and the spell breaks. A cab pulls in the driveway. The caterer comes to prepare for the dinner guests.

    Deadliest Year for US Troops in Iraq

    0

    BAGHDAD (AP) – The U.S. military announced six new deaths Tuesday, making 2007 the bloodiest year for American troops in Iraq despite a recent decline in casualties and a sharp drop in roadside bombings that Washington links to Iran.With nearly two months left in the year, the annual toll is now 853 – three more than the previous worst of 850 in 2004.

    But the grim milestone comes as the Pentagon points toward other encouraging signs as well – growing security in Baghdad and other former militant strongholds that could help consolidate the gains against extremists.

    A senior Navy officer, meanwhile, announced the planned release of nine Iranian prisoners and was at pains to say that a major cache of Iranian-made weapons and bombs displayed for reporters Tuesday appeared to have been shipped into Iraq before Tehran made a vow to stop the flow of armaments.

    Defense Secretary Robert Gates said last week that Iran had made such assurances to the Iraqi government. He did not reveal when the pledge was issued.

    A decline in Iranian weapons deliveries could be one of several factors for the decrease in both Iraqi and American deaths over the past two months.

    “It’s our best judgment that these particular EFPs … in recent large cache finds do not appear to have arrived here in Iraq after those pledges were made,” Rear Adm. Gregory Smith, director of the Multi-National Force-Iraq’s communications division, told reporters Tuesday.

    Among the weapons Washington has accused Iran of supplying to Iraqi Shiite militia fighters are EFPs, or explosively formed projectiles. They fire a slug of molten metal capable of penetrating even the most heavily armored military vehicles, and thus are more deadly than other roadside bombs.

    The No. 2 U.S. commander in Iraq, Lt. Gen. Ray Odierno, said last week that there had been a sharp decline in the number of EFPs found in Iraq over the last three months. At the time, he and Gates both said it was too early to tell whether the trend would hold, and whether it could be attributed to action by Iranian authorities. Iran publicly denies that it has sent weapons to Shiite militias in Iraq.

    (AP) A U.S. Army soldier from Delta Company, 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry Regiment, 4th Brigade, 1st…
    Full Image

    Two of the Iranians who will be freed “in the coming days” were among five captured in January in a U.S. raid on an Iranian government facility in Irbil, the capital of Iraq’s autonomous Kurdish region in the north of the country.

    The Americans said the five were members of Iran’s elite Quds Force, an arm of the Revolutionary Guards. Iran said the five were diplomats working in a facility that was undergoing preparations to be a consular office.

    Smith told reporters the identities of the nine Iranians would be released later. He said the decision to release the nine was made after they were determined not to be a threat to U.S. forces.

    The positive moves toward Iran on Tuesday coincided with the opening of two Iranian consulates, the facility in Irbil that was shut by American forces after the raid, and a second in Sulaimaniyah, the largest city in the Kurdish zone.

    Kurdish Prime Minister Nechirvan Barzani and Iranian Ambassador Hassan Kazemi Qomi inaugurated the building in Irbil and said both would have full diplomatic status.

    (AP) U.S. Army soldiers from Delta Company, 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry Regiment, 4th Brigade, 1st…
    Full Image

    “This is a very important step to enhance relations and facilitate the commerce between the two sides,” Barzani told reporters.

    The Iranian ambassador charged the United States ran roughshod over Iraqi sovereignty in conducting the raid in January.

    “The American forces breached Iraqi sovereignty by detaining the five Iranian diplomats at this same office in Irbil,” Qomi said.

    “Iran has strong ties with Iraqi society, and opening these consulates will strengthen these ties. It will also strengthen commerce and travel between the two sides,” Qomi said.

    The U.S.-backed Iraqi government has close ties to neighboring Iran, and Iraqi Prime Minister Nouri al-Maliki has sought to bring the antagonists together in hopes that would reduce violence.

    (AP) A U.S. Army soldier from Delta Company, 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry Regiment, 4th Brigade, 1st…
    Full Image

    Iraqi Kurds, like the country’s Shiite Arabs, maintain close ties with Shiite-dominated Iran, despite their warm relationship with the U.S.

    Also Tuesday, government spokesman Ali al-Dabbagh rejected as interference in Iraq’s affairs an Iranian offer of troops to help stabilize the country when U.S. forces leave. Iran floated the proposal at the weekend meeting in Istanbul, Turkey, of Iraq’s neighbors, the European Union and the G-8.

    “The Iraqi government rejects the plan offered by the Iranian Foreign Ministry. It (the Iraqi government) will not accept interference in Iraq’s internal affairs by any country of the region,” he said in a statement.

    The noticeable drop in U.S. and Iraqi deaths in recent months follows a 30,000-strong U.S. force buildup, along with a six-month cease-fire order by radical Shiite cleric Muqtada al-Sadr, among other factors. There were 39 deaths in October, compared to 65 in September and 84 in August.

    Five U.S. soldiers were killed Monday in two separate roadside bomb attacks, according to Smith, the military spokesman. Later the military said a sailor had died of wounds from an explosion in Salahuddin province north of Baghdad.

    (AP) U.S. Army soldiers from Delta Company, 2nd Battalion, 7th Cavalry Regiment, 4th Brigade, 1st…
    Full Image

    The previous annual record for U.S. military deaths in Iraq, in 2004, coincided with larger, more conventional battles such as the campaign to cleanse Fallujah of Sunni militants as well as U.S. clashes with Shiite militiamen in the sect’s holy city of Najaf.

    But the American military in Iraq reached its highest troop levels in Iraq this year – 165,000. Moreover, the military’s decision to send soldiers out of large bases and into Iraqi communities means more troops have seen more “contact with enemy forces” than ever before, said Maj. Winfield Danielson, a U.S. military spokesman in Baghdad.

    “It’s due to the troop surge, which allowed us to go into areas that were previously safe havens for insurgents,” Danielson told The Associated Press on Sunday. “Having more soldiers, and having them out in the communities, certainly contributes to our casualties.”

    Also Tuesday, the U.S. military said Iraqi troops had discovered 22 bodies in a mass grave northwest of Baghdad over the weekend. The bodies were found during a joint operation Saturday. It was the second mass grave found in the area in less than a month.

    After the discovery, U.S. and Iraqi forces launched an operation Sunday, including ground raids and air assaults targeting al-Qaida in the area, the U.S. statement said.

    About 30 suspects were detained, it said. Two car bomb facilities and a number of weapons caches also were found.

    Tidal surge sparks flood warning

    0

    Hilary Benn warned of severe flooding from a tidal surge

    Environment Secretary Hilary Benn has strengthened warnings of severe flooding over the next 48 hours from a tidal surge expected to hit the coast of England.

    The Environment Agency warned of a “major” tidal surge – rising from a combination of gale force winds and a high tide – to hit the east coast of England. Severe flood warnings are in place along much of the Norfolk, Suffolk and Kent coasts and across the Anglian region.

    The Dartford Creek and Thames barriers were closed to defend against the surge, the agency said.

    In a brief statement to the Commons, Mr Benn warned of potentially serious flooding over the next 48 hours.

    Police are on standby in the areas most likely to be affected to co-ordinate the emergency response – including evacuation if necessary, he said.

    Mr Benn told MPs: “A tidal surge of up to three metres is making its way down the North Sea which could coincide with peak high tides. There is a risk of flood defences being over-topped on the coast and in tidal rivers, especially in East Anglia, particularly the Norfolk Broads and the coast south of Great Yarmouth including Lowestoft, and areas south of this as far as the coast of Kent.”

    An Environment Agency spokesman said the surge had been caused by gale force winds in Scotland making their way down the coast of England combined with a high tide.

    There are eight severe flood warnings, 10 flood warnings and 24 flood watches nationally, covering North Yorkshire, Lincolnshire, Norfolk, Suffolk, Essex and the north Kent coast. The severe warnings are in place from Great Yarmouth down to the village of Shingle Street, and on parts of the River Bure and River Yare. There are also severe flood warning covering Tidal River Waveney from Ellingham to Breydon Water and Tidal Yare from Thorpe St Andrew to Breydon Water in Norfolk.

    The Environment Agency later extended its warning of possible flooding to people living along the length of the north-eastern, eastern and south coast of England.

    http://news.uk.msn.com/Article.aspx?cp-documentid=6631765

    ID card SCAM ‘to cost £5.6bn’‏

    0

    The projected cost of the identity card scheme will be £5.612bn over the next 10 years, the Home Office says. The figures, which are for October 2007 to October 2017, cover the set up and the operational expenses of the scheme.

    All foreign nationals will have to carry biometric ID cards from 2008 and from 2010 all UK passport applicants will be issued with them.

    Lib Dem spokesman Nick Clegg said it was a “vast waste of taxpayers’ money” which should be spent on more police.

    The Conservatives also oppose ID cards and say they would scrap the scheme in favour of a dedicated border police force.

    Under the Identity Card Act, the government must give figures on the costs twice a year.

    The Home Office says that “greater understanding of the work required and current experience of the Identity and Passport Service” had led to a change to the assumptions made on likely costs.

    Lower estimate

    The first change is an £85m cut because of a reduction in the forecasts for numbers of passports needed over the next decade “due to customers delaying passport renewals”.

    The second change is a cut in the estimated cost of producing and delivering “passports and identity cards containing a fingerprint biometric of £100m”.

    These reductions mean that the estimated cost of the identity card scheme for the 10 years from October is lower than the £5.75bn given in May.

    However, when those new assumptions on likely costs are applied to the figures given in May, it shows that the rolling ten year cost of the cards scheme has increased by £71m on six months earlier.

    ‘Considerable uncertainties’

    The Home Office said this was a result of the period including six more months – April to October 2017 – when there would be a fully operational ID cards scheme.

    But its report also notes that “as with any cost estimates covering a ten-year forward period, there are considerable uncertainties” and that “there is a significant probability that the estimates will change in the light of further experience”.

    Mr Clegg, the Lib Dems’ home affairs spokesman, said: “It is becoming more and more clear that identity cards are going to be a vast waste of taxpayers’ money.

    “The fact that the cost keeps changing shows how loose a grip the government has got on the finances of this ill-judged scheme.”

    He said they should be scrapped in favour of “something that will actually cut crime – more police on the street”.

    Taxpayer ‘burden’

    Phil Booth, of the anti-identity card group No2ID, said the Home Office was “keeping billions off the true cost of the scheme”.

    He said: “The conveniently sliding budget looks only to the rosiest future, and fails to acknowledge the biggest black hole of all, compulsory interrogation of the entire adult population.”

    And Mark Wallace, of campaign group the Taxpayers’ Alliance, said even without problems, the current cost estimate represented a “heavy burden” for taxpayers.

    The government says that ID cards will help protect people from identity fraud, will tackle illegal working and illegal immigration, and disrupt criminals and terrorists’ use of false identities and ensure free public services are only used by those entitled to them.

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/uk_politics/7084560.stm

    Scams funded terror in Iraq

    0

    Proceeds went to shadowy ‘Boss’ in U.K., trial reveals

    By Mike McIntyre and Bruce Owen

    A high-tech Canadian criminal organization was funding terrorism in Iraq by working under the control of a mysterious London-based leader and his group of Muslim extremists, a Winnipeg court heard Wednesday.

    Gerald Blanchard, 35, pleaded guilty to 16 charges and was given an eight-year prison term under a joint agreement between Crown and defence lawyers.

    Blanchard admitted he was the brains behind several sophisticated attacks on banks in Winnipeg, Edmonton and British Columbia that netted his group millions of dollars.

    “Cunning, clever, conniving and creative. Add some foreign intrigue and this is the stuff movies are made of,” Crown attorney Sheila Leinburd told court.

    Winnipeg police took the lead on the international investigation and started wiretap surveillance on Blanchard last fall and were stunned to overhear a conversation with a man he called “The Boss” — who was based in England and appeared to be calling the shots, she said.

    The man ordered Blanchard and his associates to fly to Cairo last November and begin stealing money from bank machines using counterfeit credit cards, said Leinburd.

    He also sent three of his own associates to meet with Blanchard in Egypt and make sure things were done right, she said.

    The group spent 10 days in Egypt and stole several hundred thousand dollars. They all wore burkas — the traditional dress for Muslim women in which they are covered head to toe — to avoid detection from surveillance cameras, said Leinburd. Blanchard stopped in England on his way home and met again with “The Boss” to give him his “cut.” Blanchard cleared C$65,000 while the man kept the rest, she said.

    Police later overheard a conversation in which Blanchard discussed what the money was being used for.

    “It was to fuel terrorism,” said Leinburd. She said Blanchard told his associates how “The Boss” was sending money to Kurdish fighters in northern Iraq, court was told.

    “And Mr. Blanchard was aware of that?” Associate Chief Justice Jeffrey Oliphant asked Wednesday.

    “Yes, he was,” said Leinburd.

    The three Muslim associates tried to come to Canada last year to meet with Blanchard but immigration officials at the airport in Montreal turned them away for not having proper paperwork, she said.

    Defence lawyer Danny Gunn said his client cut ties with “The Boss” once he learned of the terrorist connection.

    “It was at this point he realized he’d gotten himself involved in something pretty serious and with people who didn’t abide by the same code as he did,” said Gunn. Blanchard was briefly held as a “hostage” in England when one of his associates he’d brought with him stole $50,000 and 50 counterfeit credit cards and then fled to Africa.

    “I guess it proves there’s no honour among thieves,” said Oliphant.

    Police heard a frantic Blanchard making calls to get the man to return the goods. He was eventually allowed to return home to Canada unharmed.

    Oliphant asked what’s become of “The Boss,” whose identity was not disclosed in court or by lawyers outside of court.

    “I don’t know,” said Leinburd.

    “The authorities in England have identified him, but they don’t share information with us.”

    Blanchard was not charged with any terrorism-related crimes and Oliphant said it’s clear he got in over his head.

    “I’m satisfied you really weren’t aware of where the majority of money you were stealing was going. I guess this just says something about the world we now live in,” said Oliphant.

    Winnipeg police Insp. Tom Legge, who headed up the Project Kite task force that eventually caught Blanchard earlier this year, admitted they were surprised at where the case led them. “We have no evidence (Blanchard) is a terrorist. But he is an opportunist,” said Legge, adding the scope of his crimes was “something we’ve never seen before.”

    Winnipeg police first began investigating in 2004 following the theft of $510,000 from seven automatic banking machines inside a new CIBC branch on Empress Street just days before its grand opening.

    They would later learn Blanchard and associates had secretly installed a pinhole camera and two listening devices — including a baby monitor — inside the walls and roof of the bank while it was still under construction.

    That allowed him to monitor everything going on inside the branch from a remote location — and to know exactly when huge sums of money would be put inside the ABMs.

    Blanchard also admitted Wednesday to a pair of similar heists in Edmonton that netted him over $60,000 in 2002.

    He was set to try a similar robbery earlier this year in Chilliwack, B.C. and believed he would be able to get at least $800,000, court was told.

    However, Blanchard somehow became aware police were monitoring his conversations and actions and called off the planned heist at the last minute.

    The true “gem” of the police investigation involved recovering the Koechert Pearl Diamond from Blanchard’s grandmother’s house in Winnipeg earlier this year. He had told police about it, then led them directly to the basement where it was hidden in a hollowed-out piece of Styrofoam.

    The historic jewel-encrusted brooch once belonged to Elisabeth, the Empress of Austria, during the 19th century. It was stolen from a castle in Vienna during a daylight robbery in 1998. No one has been charged with the theft. Blanchard admitted to possession of stolen goods. Leinburd said the item is valued at about $10,000 but is priceless to Austrians because of its connection to royalty.

    “The police would not have been able to find the diamond if not for the co-operation of Mr. Blanchard,” said Leinburd.

    Blanchard’s other crimes included using electronic “writers” and high-tech computer hardware to copy the data from existing credit and bank cards to make duplicate, usable replicas.

    Blanchard and his associates would also steal expensive electronics, then return them to stores using fake receipts they had created and make off with the cash in what is known as “rehashing.”

    Leinburd told court “this is a true plea negotiation” as a trial would have lasted at least a year and involved more than 60,000 documents. Police also made 120,000 telephone intercepts and would have had to call witnesses from across Canada and beyond.

    “You’re no hero Mr. Blanchard but you could have made this a lot more difficult,” said Oliphant.

    Blanchard has also agreed to liquidate his assets in B.C., which will net around $500,000 and be paid to the banks he defrauded.

    “He could have been a successful and lawful entrepreneur,” said Leinburd.

    “Instead he chose this route. And now he must pay for it.” Blanchard was given two years of credit for his time already spent in custody, then sentenced to an additional six years in prison. He will be eligible for parole in two years.

    Seven co-accused remain before the courts, although Gunn hinted Wednesday that many charges may be dropped now that Blanchard has taken responsibility.
     

    A Toxic Mix of Neoliberal & Neocon

    0

    Sarko comes across as a neoconand, like Bush, driven by the concept

    of a New World Order

    Both Left and Right dislike the direction

    HyperSarko is taking France

    Neoliberalism – the role of unfettered market forces

    – is distasteful to the French


    Must Read: Shocking Revelation: Sarkozy Was an Israeli Spy

    Sarkozy heads the part of France eager to breakwith the France long known as a haven for exiles

    and immigrants and the downtrodden of the world

    Sarkozy’s friends are magnates of media chains

    Not at all embarrassed by egoism, and even betrayal,

    Sarkozy enters the club of the neo-fascist

    ex-president of Spain, Jose Maria Aznar,

    of Gianfranco Fini and Silvio Berlusconi in Italy

    He claims friendship with George Bush

    and Vladimir Putin, with whom

    he shares only the love for power

    His closest friends are France’s richest tycoons,

    the top managers of industrial and media conglomerates

    French President Nicolas Sarkozy assured a joint session of the U.S. Congress on Wednesday that his country would stand by Washington in the fight against nuclear proliferation in Iran and terrorism in Afghanistan.

    “America can count on France,” Sarkozy said in a speech that underscored his desire for warmer ties with Washington and was filled with effusive praise for American values.

    “Together we must fight to defend and promote the values and ideals of freedom and democracy that men such as Washington and Lafayette invented together,” he said, referring to the French military officer who fought along side George Washington in the American war of independence.

    Sarko is Pavlov’s dog, salivating “freedom and democracy” when Bush rings the bell.

    Sarko Represents the Rise of the Petit Bourgeoisie in France [Original]

    Hard times for the hard-nosed, hard-playing president of France, Nicolas Paul Stephane Sarkozy de Nagy-Bocsa, or more familiarly “Sarko” for both friends and foes.

    Only five months into his term, the powerful French trade unions called out a nationwide general strike on October 18 against Sarkozy’s proposed pension reforms; his beloved wife, Cecilia, signed divorce papers on October 15; and the week before France lost out miserably in the world rugby championship hosted by Sarkozy and France.

    Sarko had a dream: to become president of France. His dream came true last May 16 when he was crowned Chief of State.

    Paving the way for the electoral victory of the 52-year old leader of the French Right were the simultaneous decomposition of the French Left and Sarkozy’s successful unification of the three streams of the Right — neoliberal, national and fascist.

    His hard language, without alienating the Center, attracted the necessary voters from the extreme Right, which however tended to consider him its ally, if not hostage. The combination of Right and Center guaranteed his victory.

    Though he heads the Gaulist UMP (Union Pour un Mouvement Populaire), his Gaulist roots are today less and less evident. Sarkozy and his cohorts appear more as populists concealed behind a market oriented conservative facade.

    When Sarkozy became “Monsieur le President de la Republique,” the 23rd French chief of state, the sixth since the new Constitution of 1958 that initiated the Fifth Republic of France, his true intentions for promised new directions were still ambiguous.

    Was he a neo-Gaulist, one speculated, or truly a hostage of the extreme Right that swept him into office?

    In his first presidential speech Sarkozy emphasized the roles of his predecessors, beginning with Charles De Gaulle whose tradition he allegedly embodies, referring to the French as �a great people with a great history behind them.�

    His electoral slogan of “work more, earn more” rang appealingly at first. Now, though the love for money is strong in France, the slogan seems contradictory to his recognition of new exigences for national devlopment along social lines.

    In fact, no successful European leader can neglect the social system inherent in Europe�s DNA, which differs radically from the American spirit.

    That is especially true in France, with its reputation of listening more to ideological voices than to entrepreneurial demands.

    Therefore, the scorn for the stupid words of one Minister of Economy �to work more and think less,� which reflects the US reality.

    On the other hand, Sarkozy’s underlining of great national objectives means distancing France from the spirit of liberal free trade.

    The French Left accuses Sarkozy of being authoritarian and of unstable character.

    The Left’s electoral campaign early this year aimed at trying to rouse his ire and demonstrate his incapacity of leading la douce France.

    The crude reality is that while the French Left claims a monopoly on morality, the political Right dominates this largely conservative, extremely traditional nation.

    Patriotic voters of 2007 were in fact less interested in morality than in questions of the French image in Europe and France�s role on the international scene.

    Many French people are still attached to the dream that France still plays a universal role, even though most at the same time realize it is a fiction. Though they killed their kings, they still miss them.

    Globalization has forced France to redefine its international role, which French people expect the political class to do.

    Sarkozy responds best to that demand; he has overcome right-wing moral hang-ups vis-a-vis the Left.

    He has invaded Left territory, coupling nationalism with calls for fraternity and solidarity, those slogans the French love, a stand against inequality and abuses of capitalism and in favor of weaker classes.

    On the other hand, he immediately changed France’s position toward the USA that his predecessor Chirac had largely snubbed. He has made known his admiration for the American government model: a cabinet of only 15 ministers.

    Also, he takes the time to take off his tie and join 1’ami George for a barbecue in Maine, so that he has gained another nickname, 1’Americain.

    At the same time, he has abandoned traditional French orientation toward the Arab world in favor of closer relations with Israel.

    This despite the Socialist charge that his choice is because he is Jewish and because of the strong pre-electoral preference for him by France�s 600,000 Jews, especially among intellectuals such as Alain Finkielkraut.

    In fact, Sarkozy is Catholic, although his maternal grandfather was a converted Jew.

    The so-called “Europe skeptics” are strong in France, as in Italy. The category is widely admired by the French who voted against the European Constitution last year.

    Like many Europeans, they believe the dramatic rise in the cost of living is due to the euro currency and the stringent EU economic rules considered damaging to the national economy.

    Sarkozy reacted by calling a halt to fiscal restrictions imposed by the EU in favor of the national economy which is now marking record deficits.

    Sarkozy’s France is today more projected toward Europe than in recent years.

    On the other hand, and again in response to his electors� expectations, although Sarkozy promises good relations with the USA, France is not about to be servile to Washington.

    Who is Nicolas Sarkozy?

    Sarkozy is an outsider; for some, not truly French. The son of Hungarian political emigrants who fled Budapest after Soviet tanks crushed the Hungarian Revolution of 1956, as often happens with immigrants, he is more French than the French themselves.

    Sarkozy, who allegedly began dreaming of the presidency at age 20, is today the champion of the French “democratic” Right.

    He is known as a tough man. I happened to be in Paris during the upheaval in the banlieues in November of 2005 when Interior Minister Sarkozy, already into his electoral campaign, was seen daily storming over the streets of the northern suburb of Seine Saint-Denis and at the same time speaking of the end of the French social model in order to justify the market economy model.

    In fact, he and his conservatives were accused of fanning the fires of revolt in order to justify refocusing the state based on police repression.

    True or not, Sarko is the archtype of the man of power, a man thirsty for victory. For Sarkozy, immigrants are a plague, second class citizens, and their children are the “bastards of the Republic.”

    During the uprising of the children of immigrants in the banlieues, Sarkozy over and over labeled them “the scum of society.”

    The philosopher Michel Onfray, who interviewed him before the elections, labels him also “fragile and infantile, a lonely and unhappy child in search of love.”

    Sarkozy himself, who as the tough minister of the Interior was known as “the policeman of France,” confessed that he was in politics in order to be loved.

    Onfray claims that Sarkozy “is projected toward the future, doesn’t know the present and rejects the past. He took his victory for granted. He seemed to me more like Nero than Napoleon.”

    This unflattering image of the new French president is underscored by the image of the French president depicted by the major Moroccan-French writer, Tahar Ben Jelloun.

    In the writer’s view, Sarkozy heads the part of France eager to break with the France long known as a haven for exiles and immigrants and the downtrodden of the world.

    Sarkozy’s friends are magnates of media chains. Not at all embarrassed by egoism, and even betrayal, Sarkozy enters the club of the neo-fascist ex-president of Spain, Jose Maria Aznar, of Gianfranco Fini and Silvio Berlusconi in Italy.

    He claims friendship with George Bush and Vladimir Putin, with whom he shares only the love for power. His closest friends are France’s richest tycoons, the top managers of industrial and media conglomerates.

    Renewal

    From the start, President Sarkozy promised to change France, renew institutions, introduce more women into his cabinet, and crush extreme rightists by absorbing them.

    At the same time, he tends to back legislation to recognize the widely debated question of the benefits of French colonialization in Africa and Asia.

    Pro-Sarkozy intellectuals demand an end to �anti-white racism� and they support US wars in the Middle East.

    Meanwhile unease and discontent are surfacing among opponents, in the corridors of government, as well as in his own UMP party.

    Both Left and Right are dissatisfied, perhaps perplexed about the precise direction France under HyperSarko is taking. Ugliness is emerging from the seams.

    Neoliberalism, that is the role of unfettered market forces, is distasteful in France, as it is among the peoples in much of Western Europe.

    Sarkozy’s problem is an old one: his attempt to satisfy everyone satisfies no one. Elected by the Right, he has frequently appeared as a leftist reformer to his electors.

    All in all, Sarko comes across as a neocon driven by the concept of a UN-led One World Order, still retaining however a resistant strain of European social mentality in his DNA.

    In his recent address to the UN General Assembly filled with references to France’s past revolutionary ideals such as equitable distribution of wealth, he said also that the United Nations should be an instrument for a “new world order.”

    His direct association with the highly secretive, European-North American Bilderberg Group, one of the world’s most powerful political-economic organizations accused of wanting to determine the direction of the world behind closed doors, is unclear.

    He was invited to the annual hush-hush Bilderberger gathering held in Canada in 2006 while he was still Interior minister.

    Sarkozy’s presence on the guest list was revealed prior to the meeting and the Bilderbergers tend to disinvite those whose names are made public beforehand.

    His friend and a former French foreign minister, Michele Barnier, attended the meeting in Istanbul last June.

    Over 130 powerful people were there, including American neocons led by Richard Perle and Paul Wolfowitz, queens and kings, multinational CEOs and chairmen and adminstrators.

    Also there were NATO representatives, who most likely spoke of an invasion of Iran.

    Since it was a top secret gathering, perhaps they were planning a massive false-flag, in-house terror attack somewhere in Europe, for which Iran could be blamed.

    Searching the French web on Sarkozy�s relations with the fascist-like Bilderberg Group, I ran into an entry concerning his work tactics which in turn reflect his character.

    On his arrival in the presidential palace, Sarkozy organized his own press service manned by journalism and political science students in order to keep an eye on what is happening in the country and to react immediately, showering the media with mulitple communique

    s. A unique press service dedicated to one subject: Nicoloas Sarkozy.

    http://joswift.blogspot.com/2007/11/condemning-sarkozy-toxic-mix-of.html

    House Panel Gets Earful On Waterboarding

    0

    In Spite Of Bickering In D.C., Experts Say Interrogation Method Is Torture, Must Never Be Used

    (CBS/AP) A hearing on torture opened today on Capitol Hill, and itself launched into a protest about one witness who was gagged by the Pentagon.

    Lt. Col. V. Stuart Couch, a former Guantanamo Bay prosecutor and appellate judge of the Navy-Marine Corps Court of Criminal Appeals, was scheduled to appear before a House subcommittee today to testify about the use of waterboarding and the legality of torture and other interrogation techniques.

    In a March 31 Wall Street Journal story, Couch had said he had refused to prosecute a suspected terrorist because he believed the evidence had been tainted by torture.

    The Journal revealed today that the Pentagon gagged Couch, preventing him from appearing at today’s hearing.

    “I find it outrageous that the administration has again chosen to stonewall an investigation into some very serious charges,” Rep. Jerrold Nadler, D-N.Y., said at today’s hearing, “and the outrageous claim that torture – or whatever you want to call it – is legitimate and in our national interest.

    “The issues before this subcommittee today could not be more serious,” Nadler added. “And once again, when important questions need to be answered, we are told that no one has the right to question the administration.

    “I am very tired of the secrecy and stonewalling by this administration.”

    Yet those who did appear before the subcommittee today left no doubt that the law is clear:

    “Waterboarding is torture, period,” Malcolm Wrightson Nance, a former Navy instructor of prisoner of war and terrorist hostage survival programs, said. “I believe that we must reject the use of the waterboard for prisoners and captives and cleanse this stain from our national honor.”

    The hearing comes as Senate leaders struggled to agree on the timing of a confirmation vote for attorney general nominee Michael Mukasey, who has refused to equate waterboarding with illegal torture, or to say that a president has no right to order its use.

    The former retired judge is expected to win confirmation, but his nomination has sparked a bitter debate about the questionable legality of waterboarding and its authorization by the Bush administration on detainees.

    The interrogation procedure, which makes the subject think he’s drowning, is banned by domestic law and international treaties. It has reportedly been used by CIA interrogators on terrorism suspects, or by those to whom U.S. prisoners have been sent via rendition flights.

    Mukasey’s repeated refusal to testify that waterboarding is illegal torture cost him the votes of most Democrats on the Judiciary Committee, and there remains the threat of a filibuster when the vote comes to the full Senate.

    He won the votes of two Democrats, Sens. Charles Schumer of New York and Dianne Feinstein of California, with an assurance that he would enforce any additional ban on the practice passed by Congress. Both houses are considering legislation to ban the procedure in all circumstances.

    The debate shifted to the House Thursday, as the subcommittee, chaired by Rep. Jerrold Nadler, a Democrat, convened a hearing on how the procedure is carried out and whether it meets the legal definition of torture.

    As a former master training specialist in survival programs, Nance said that he underwent waterboarding as part of his training and that he personally led or was involved in using the procedure on hundreds of other trainees at the Navy’s Survival, Evasion, Resistance and Escape School.

    Nance described the experience as a “slow motion suffocation” that provides enough time for the subject to consider what’s happening: “water overpowering your gag reflex, and then feel(ing) your throat open and allow pint after pint of water to involuntarily fill your lungs.”

    “The victim is drowning,” Nance said in materials submitted with his testimony. The intent during training, he added, is to stop the process before death occurs.

    Training sessions are where waterboarding belongs, not as part of efforts to gain intelligence information from foreign agents, said a second witness.

    Such “coercive” interrogation techniques are not as effective as those that elicit cooperation, because false information is often elicited under harsher methods, said Col. Steven Kleinman, a senior intelligence officer and military interrogator for the U.S. Air Force Reserves.

    “Tragically, many of these same tactics have migrated into the repertoire of interrogators seeking intelligence information,” Kleinman said.

    The costs of torture are beyond the physical or emotional pain caused to the subject, or to the damage to prosecution cases against suspects, where information obtained through torture must be thrown out. Nance testified that the United States has wholly failed in its ability to influence the hearts and minds of those in the Middle East because of the abuses at Abu Ghraib prison and Guantanamo Bay, and the invasion of Iraq.

    He said many in the Middle East believe what the United States is doing comes out of pure malice, and that it will take “decades of very hard work” to turn that image around.

    Kleinman and Nance both said that the reasons such coercive techniques have been used is that those in charge of interrogations are overruled by those higher up who, they say, are wrongly influenced by media representations of torture, like the TV show “24,” and ignore the body of evidence that shows torture does not work.

    “Technically they’re doing a form of what we jokingly call ‘Tom Clancy procedures,'” Nance said. “‘It works in the book, it must work in real life.'”

    Their comments were followed up by the subcommittee’s ranking member, Rep. Trent Franks, R-Ariz., who said he is against torture but that “sometimes we have to take measures to protect the innocent that we do not like.

    “Severe interrogations are sometimes part of doing that,” added Franks, who asked the panel if a ticking bomb scenario meant that such procedures could be legitimized.

    Kleinman said such speculative questions only cloud the issue, and that coarser techniques only produce information that can’t be trusted even if some of the information were valid. “I can’t cherry pick” to determine if the subject was trustworthy, he said.

    During the hearing, Kleinman was asked if a legal definition of torture was comparable to that of obscenity – you know it when you see it.

    Kleinman said that if lawmakers were to witness the procedures enacted, “any discussion about the use of those methods would cease immediately.”

    Impeachment is on the table

    The US news is censoring it, but US Representative Dennis Kucinich has moved on the House floor to initiate impeachment proceedings against VicePresident Richard Cheney.

    In my opinion NOTHING is more important for the future of the United States than the removal from office and criminal prosecution of Cheney and others in the Bush administration.

    Please spread the word about this important and heavily censored story.

    The gauntlet has been thrown down. Kucinich makes the case brilliantly. The process has begun… Now it’s up to us to make noise about this and force the media to pay attention and make sure the rest of the country knows.

    Canada Asks: Why are we fighting in Afghanistan?

    1

    by Edward C. Corrigan

      U.S. Vice-President Dick Cheney
     

    U.S. Vice-President Dick Cheney.

    Canadian Prime Minister Stephen Harper in his government’s recent Throne Speech announced that he wants to extend Canada’s participation in the Afghan War for another two years. Many people are asking why are we in Afghanistan and for what purpose are our soldiers dying? What are the other costs to Canadians?

    The Conservative Government of Stephen Harper is attempting to portray the Afghan war as “a humanitarian mission” while continuing to fight against Afghans who are resisting what they see as “foreign invaders”. I wonder how Canadians would see American, Russian or Chinese soldiers who invaded our country, over threw an unpopular government, killed tens of thousands, wounded many thousands more, caused wanton destruction and massive environmental damage. Even if they claimed that they were bringing “democracy to Canada” I do not believe that most Canadianswould be impressed.

    The recent poll published in the Globe and Mail showed that Afghans want the fighting to end, and they support negotiations with the Taliban. The Globe and Mail reports; “Despite the enmity toward the Taliban, 74 per cent [of Afghans] said they supported negotiations between the Karzai government and Taliban representatives as a way of reducing conflict. In Kandahar, support for talks jumped to 85 per cent.”

    But what is the cost of the war in Afghanistan to Canadians? The deaths of 71 soldiers and a diplomat are fairly well known. The financial costs are less well known. According to one study published by the Canadian Centre for Policy Alternatives, the “full cost” of the Afghan war to Canada will be $7.2 billion by March 2008. This works out to more than $100 million every month. What could Canada do with $7.2 billion dollars? How could this money benefit our health care system, to help alleviate poverty, provide tax relief or be used in the fight against Global Warming?

    One aspect of the war that is rarely discussed is the impact of exposure of our own soldiers, not to mention the civilian population in Afghanistan and Iraq, to toxic substances.

    In the first Iraq War in 1991 causalities reported killed and wounded numbered less than 800. However, in 2001 the United States Veterans Affairs Department officially recognized 159,000 U.S. Desert Storm soldiers as being disabled and another 60,000 becoming disabled in Gulf service after the 1991 war. The 2001 report also noted that 8,000 Gulf War vets had already died.

    The numbers are staggering. These figures are from 2001 and the rates for cancers and other illnesses can only go up. They are the 220,000 causalities from the First Iraq War virtually no one talks about.

    At the end of December 2001 U.S. Army reports were released that suggested one cause for Gulf War illnesses was low level exposure to sarin nerve gas. The gas was released into the air when the U.S. military improperly blew up Iraqi chemical weapons sites in 1991.

    The other suspected cause for “Gulf War Syndrome” is Depleted Uranium or DU. Major Doug Rokke (Ret.) who has a Ph.D served as health physicist for the U.S. Army Depleted Uranium Assessment team in Iraq. He directed development of radiation and safety education and field procedures at the Bradley Radiological Laboratories. He now has a 40% army disability because the uranium in his urine is 5,000 times the permissible level. He also has trouble breathing.

    In 1991 his team was brought in to cleanup contamination caused when U.S. troops fired DU weapons accidentally against their fellow U.S. troops (“friendly fire” casualties). DU is basically reprocessed nuclear waste. His containment team went into smashed up tanks without radiological protective suits. Within 72 hours they were getting sick, had respiratory problems and rashes that bled. Over the years many team members died. Dr. Rokke says they were abandoned by the U.S. Defense Department. Rokke himself was fired from his job at Bradley Labs in 1996 after he wrote a report saying the US Army had huge liability for contamination at an US army base in Alabama. Pdf file LINK

    The Veterans Affairs Department has awarded disability to 60,000 soldiers who went into the Gulf countries after the war was over. Two thousand of these Gulf War “theater” veterans have died. This is very alarming. It means that the Gulf area (Iraq, Kuwait, Saudi Arabia) is still highly contaminated.

    The chief suspect again is DU, “depleted uranium” Rokke says the name is a mistake. “There’s nothing depleted about it.” He says the dangerous “alpha proportion” actually goes up in the processing. More than 900,000 DU projectiles were fired during the first Gulf War. When the weapons hit, about half of the uranium was released as tiny particles. The radioactive particles will last for billions of years.

    Looking for a quick victory and low body count the U.S. military fought the first Gulf War without regard to the long term effects of exposure to DU and other environmental hazards on its own soldiers. The U.S/ Military liked the cheapness and great penetrating power of the DU shells so it made a political decision to downplay the risk of uranium poisoning. (For much more info on DU see LINK)

    Now another generation of U.S., Canadian and British soldiers are being sent to war by politicians, most of whom who never have been in combat, into what is a toxic waste land. These soldiers are very likely going to pay a very steep price for fighting in Afghanistan and Iraq. The future health costs and law suits are going to be very expensive and the human cost in pain and suffering incalculable.

    In a more recent study it is reported that more than 73,000 U.S. Military service men have died since the First Gulf War. These figures do not include Iraqi civilian deaths estimated at more than one million in the First Iraq War and the period of sanctions and an additional 1.2 million in the current war in Iraq. Over 20,000 civilians have been killed in the War in Afghanistan.

    People of Afghanistan
     

    The United States Department of Veteran’s Affairs, in conjunction with the Joint Chiefs of Staff, in May 2007 released figures which reveal “the true cost of the War against Iraq and Afghanistan.” According to the report more Gulf War veterans have died than the number of U.S. soldiers killed in Vietnam.

    The Department of Veterans Affairs, May 2007, Gulf War Veterans Information System reported the following: Total U.S. Military Gulf War Deaths Since Gulf War One: 73,846; Deaths amongst Deployed: 17,847; Deaths amongst Non-Deployed Veterans: 55,999. Total “Undiagnosed Illness” (UDX) claims: 14,874. Total number of disability claims filed: 1,620,906. Disability Claims amongst Deployed: 407,911 Disability Claims amongst Non-Deployed Veterans: 1,212,995. Percentage of combat troops that filed Disability Claims 36%.

    Soldiers, by nature, are generally not complainers. The real impact of those who are disabled from the U.S. invasions of Iraq, Afghanistan and other nations, is not fully reflected in the official Veterans Affairs numbers. Many soldiers suffer from Post-Traumatic Stress Disorder and other psychiatric aliments due to their war time activities and many are never able to live normal lives.

    The official U.S. government numbers, as of October 25, 2007, of deaths due to the War in Iraq is 3,838 with 28,171 reported as wounded.

    Apparently the Bush administration does not want the 73,000 dead veterans to be compared to the 55,000 U.S. soldiers killed in Vietnam. What the Bush Administration is doing is counting only the soldiers that die directly in action in Iraq or Afghanistan. Injured soldiers are quickly taken out of the war zone for medical treatment. Any soldier who is shot in the war but is removed from the war zone before they die is not counted as a causality of the war.

    The 73,843 dead amongst the U.S. soldiers for this scale of operation in Iraq and using weapons of mass destruction is proportionately not that high. However, according to one source, ?they expect the great majority of U.S. soldiers who took part in the invasion of Iraq to die of uranium poisoning, which can take decades to kill. From a victors perspective, above any major war in history, the Gulf War has taken the severest toll on soldiers.?

    According to reports more than 1,820 tons of radioactive nuclear waste uranium were exploded into Iraq alone in the form of armour piercing rounds and bunker busters, representing the world’s worst man made ecological disaster ever. To compare 64 kg of uranium was used in the bomb that destroyed Hiroshima. The U.S. Iraq Nuclear contamination represents more than fourteen thousand Hiroshima’s. It has been suggested that the nuclear waste the U.S. has exploded into the Middle East will continue killing for billions of years and could possibly wipe out more than a third of life on the planet. Gulf War Veterans who have ingested the uranium will continue to die off over the next few decades from cancers and other horrific diseases.

    Birth defects are up 600% in Iraq. Being exposed to the same radioactive contamination we can expect a massive increase in birth defects in the children of U.S. veterans of the Iraq and Afghanistan wars. Our Canadian soldiers are being exposed to the same radioactive contamination and other environmental hazards.

    This information is not being addressed in the North American mainstream media. However, this information is readily available on the United States Department of Veteran’s Affairs web site: Pdf file LINK

    The financial cost of the U.S. war against Iraq and Afghanistan is also staggering. A recent U.S. Congressional study estimates the cost for U.S. war in Iraq and Afghanistan at $2.4 trillion through the next decade. The report says the United States has already spent 604 billion dollars on the so called “War on Terror”. U.S. President George W. Bush has asked for $196.4 billion for war-related operations for the 2007-2008 budget year.

    The question that needs to be asked is what is spending all of these billions of dollars accomplishing. According to Lord Ashdown, NATO has “lost in Afghanistan” and its failure to bring stability there could provoke a regional sectarian war “on a grand scale.” Lord Ashdown is the former leader of the British Liberal Democrats and a highly respected British political figure. He is also the former United Nations High Representative for Bosnia and Herzegovina. Ashdown delivered his dire prediction after being proposed as a new “super envoy” for Afghanistan.

    Lord Ashdown’s pessimistic assessment of the war in Afghanistan is shared by Great Britain’s Chief of Defence Staff, Sir Jock Stirrup. He recently has said the military cannot resolve the situation in Afghanistan alone. The Chief of Britain’s Armed Forces warned ?that British troops could remain in Afghanistan for “decades.” He also said that even then the conflict will only be resolved by a political deal – after talks with Taliban leaders.?

    Is Stephen Harper’s Afghanistan war the kind of war that Canadians want? We need to very loudly ask our political leaders why are we fighting a war in Afghanistan?

    About the writer:

    This is a slightly edited version of a speech given at London, Ontario?s “Day of Action: on October 26, 2007 to Protest the War in Afghanistan and Iraq. Edward C. Corrigan is a London lawyer certified as a Specialist in Citizenship and Immigration Law and Immigration and Refugee Protection by the Law Society of Upper Canada. He can be reached at corriganlaw@edcorrigan.ca or at (519) 439-4015.

    David Ray Griffin Interview

    1

    David Ray Griffin Interview – DRG Answers Your Questions

    RINF members had the opportunity to put questions to one of the worlds most credible and respected 9/11 researchers, Dr. David Ray Griffin.

    George Asks:
    Thank you for all of your wonderful work to expose the truth about 9/11 and to bring the perpetrators to justice.

    My question is how you see the “end game” playing out as far as obtaining justice against all of the perpetrators of 9/11. What is the best case scenario, in your mind, and what is the soonest that it could occur?

    Thank you again!

    David Ray Griffin:
    Like Yogi Berra, I don’t make predictions, especially about the future. Seriously, I have no idea about what is likely. We can only do everything we can do to get the truth exposed, knowing full well that we will probably fail. But if that is indeed the outcome, this will not mean that our efforts were in vain. If life has any meaning at all (and I think it does), then there is nothing more important than doing our best.

    Erin S. Myers Asks:
    Very curious to hear your musings on the restoration of a constitutional republic… I doubt that I’ve ever enjoyed living in one in my short lifetime… but it sounds quite nice. Also, I’ve imbibed the concept that a document “of the people” can not very well be considered sovereign, if the people who created it (or inherit it) are not first sovereigns themselves. I do not see this as problematic (such as “unrestrained individuality”) if something like the concept of the Golden Rule is deeply ingrained from early years, and held up as a measure in all questions of criminal wrongdoing and torts. Your thoughts?

    David Ray Griffin:
    The answer to the question of whether the USA is a constitutional republic is that it is a matter of degree. It has never been perfect or even close to it. It has always been a plutocracy. But there have been periods in which the US Constitution has been ignored more fully than in other periods. In a recent essay, historian Howard Zinn, after pointing out some of the great evils of US history, wrote:

    Still, there seems to be a special viciousness that accompanies the current assault on human rights, in this country and in the world. We have had repressive governments before, but none has legislated the end of habeas corpus, nor openly supported torture, nor declared the possibility of war without end. No government has so casually ignored the will of the people, affirmed the right of the President to ignore the Constitution, even to set aside laws passed by Congress. (Howard Zinn, “Impeachment by the People,” The Progressive, February 2007
    (http://www.progressive.org/node/4473.)

    9/11 has been the excuse for all this. Mark Danner, for example, has pointed to the way in which 9/11 has been used by the Bush-Cheney administration to justify a “state of exception,” in the sense discussed by Giorgio Agamben, under which the U.S. president increasingly operates without the constraint of law, whether international or constitutional. (Danner makes this point in “You Can Do Anything with a Bayonet Except Sit On It,” A TomDispatch.com
    Interview with Mark Danner, Feb. 26, 2006 [http://markdanner.com/nyt/022606_tomdispatch.htm]. On Giorgio Gamben’s ideas, see his State of Exception, trans. Kevin Attell [Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 2006].)

    So there is nothing more important today than getting the people of America and the world in general to realize that 9/11 was a false-flag operation, orchestrated in order to have a pretext for this systematic assault on the US constitution and international law.

    STELLAPENA Asks:
    I wish to tell you that I appreciate your work in exposing the lies of 9/11, and wish you all of the best to you, your family, and to us as a nation. I remember your lecture at the University of Wisconsin which was sponsored by MUJCA.NET, and at the end of the lecture, during the question and answer period you briefly alluded to some revelations and/or news from some of the victims’ families. I understand that many of them have stood behind “9/11 Press for Truth” in calling for a new investigation. Do you know how many of these families believe that the events of 9/11 were carried out by members of this administration and, if so, will they also be speaking to this anytime in the future?

    Thank you!

    David Ray Griffin:
    No, I do not how many family members believe this. Some of them clearly do. For example, Bob McIlvaine, who was featured on “9/11: Press for Truth,” has elsewhere said: “I believe 100% that the U.S. orchestrated 9/11 with the help of other agencies around the world” (“9/11: Truth, Lies, and Conspiracy: Interview: Bob McIlvaine,” August 30, 2006 (http://www.cbc.ca/sunday/911mcilvaine.html). But I have no idea how many others feel the same way. Kyle Hence, who produced that DVD, might have a better idea.

    Dachsie Asks:
    As a Christian, I believe that is God’s plan for there to be individual sovereign nation states and not a one world government. I understand that you, Dr. Griffin, desire some from of world government. I also understand the perpetration of 9-11 to be one in a long series of false flag operations for the ultimate goal of forming a one world government. Do you, Dr. Griffin, believe that having a truly independent investigation of 9-11 will and should augment and restore the sovereign Constitutional republic of the United States of America?

    David Ray Griffin:
    On the question of constitutional government, please see my answer to Erin Myers.

    On the question of global government, it’s essential to distinguish between two completely different types. One type, which you evidently have in mind, would be what is sometimes called “globalization from above.”

    This type of one-world government could be produced by one nation using its military and economic might to establish an all-inclusive empire. It would appear that those who orchestrated 9/11 thought that it would move the USA towards that goal (see the references to “Pax Americana” in “Rebuilding America’s Defenses,” put out by the Project for the New
    American Century in September 2000). This kind of top-down globalization could also be produced by the elite class from many countries.

    What I have talked about, by contrast, would be global democracy, in which the people of the planet would govern themselves through democratic processes. Legislation could be passed to reverse the growing gap between the rich and the poor, to enforce strict laws against pollution, and so on. Disputes between nations would be handled by going to court rather than going to war—think how barbaric it would be if, when a neighboring state had a dispute with California about water rights, California, being richer and more powerful, could simply send its army to settle the issue. There are, of course, lots of questions to be answered about the possibility and desirability of global government in this sense. I plan to do this in a forthcoming book on Global Democracy (which would have been out long ago if 9/11 had not occurred). In the meantime, you can look at my second chapter in Griffin et al., “The American Empire and the Commonwealth of God.” The main point to see is that global government in this sense would have nothing in common except the name with global government in the top-down sense, and it would be opposed in the strongest possible terms by the rich and powerful of the world—until, at least, they realize that if their own grandchildren are going to have a world, global democracy will need to be instituted.

    2BFree Asks:
    My question concerns the apparent lack of potential energy needed to bring

    down the twin towers. Do you know of any one who has studied all the
    energy needed to produce the type of destruction that occurred on 9/11 to
    the towers? Dr. Judy Wood contends that no available method or process
    could produce the result that happened i.e. turning the concrete to dust
    and “dissolve” the huge steel columns as we witnessed except a possible
    use of “Star Wars” type technology. Do you have any hypothesis to explain
    this “energy deficiency” that we all saw?

    Thank you for your efforts to find the truth.

    David Ray Griffin:
    There are, of course, various theories, with some scientists proposing
    thermite or thermate, others proposing mini-nukes, and still others, such
    as Judy Wood, proposing another kind of technology. I do not have the
    expertise to enter into these debates. I also suspect it’s a mistake for
    proponents to become too wedded to any one theory of what really happened.
    We, of course, want to know, and scientists should not be discouraged from
    making the case for the theories that seems most probable to them. But we
    will probably not know for sure until those who orchestrated the
    destruction of the buildings are forced to reveal how they did it.
    We should, therefore, put our emphasis, especially in our public
    presentations, on the point on which we all agree: that the official
    story, according to which the buildings were destroyed by the combination
    of fire and externally caused damage, is false.

    This is partly, as you say, because of the energy deficiency. But it is also because of all the features of the destruction of WTC 1, 2, and 7 that can be explained, and can only be explained, through the use of some sort of technology that could produce explosions sufficient to slice steel and pulverize virtually all of the concrete.

    We can show, accordingly, know that official theory is false without
    knowing what the true theory is. And that is all we need to show in order
    to demonstrate that the destruction of the WTC was an inside job.

    Andrew Lowe Watson Asks:
    Dear Dr Griffin,

    I would like to take this opportunity to thank you sincerely for your work
    in exposing the truth about the events of September 11th, 2001.

    I am troubled by the theories recently propounded concerning the possible
    use of Directed Energy Weapons in the demolitions of WTC 1 and 2. Can you
    re-assure me that there is, to your knowledge, absolutely no validity in
    these suggestions?

    Thank you.

    David Ray Griffin:
    There may be people who could assure you of this, but I cannot. Please see my answer to 2Bfree.

    Adam Asks:
    Why didn’t you go into detail in your books about Jamie S. Gorelick? Such
    as her connections between United Technologies and the Carlyle Group?

    Dear Adam,
    I did mention that most of the Commissioners had at least potential
    conflicts of interest. There is reason to be extra-suspicious of Jamie
    Gorelick, moreover, because she was the only one, aside from Phillip
    Zelikow, who was allowed to see certain White House documents. Also, as
    Peter Lance points out in “Cover Up,” she was evidently involved in the
    cover-up of the truth about TWA 800.
    I do not know, however, whether she and other Commissioners all knew the
    truth about 9/11 and consciously participated in covering up this crime.
    She at times seemed genuinely interested in forcing witnesses to tell
    truths they wanted to conceal, such as with her refusal to accept the
    nonsense being uttered by General Richard Myers. Likewise Richard
    Ben-Veniste, about whom there are good reasons to be suspicious, asked
    some of the toughest questions. It could be, of course, that they were
    simply establishing their credibility, especially with fellow Democrats.
    That this was indeed the case is suggested by the fact that they never
    forced the revelation of anything truly damning. But although I have my
    suspicions about this, I cannot claim to have knowledge.
    So, I do not say or even imply that these Commissioners were deliberately
    concealing the truth, because I do not know this. (If you want to see my
    reflections about epistemology–the study of what and how we know—you
    could consult the final chapter of my “Reenchantment without
    Supernaturalism.”) I focus instead on Philip Zelikow, whose conflicts of
    interest were much more serious and whose power to shape the Commission,
    and especially its Final Report, was much greater. I have virtually no
    doubt about his conscious orchestration of the cover-up.

    Johndoraemi Asks:
    Dr. Griffin, what is your take on this?

    Cheney’s “orders” which “still stand” in the PEOC seem to be:

    1) In the context/authority of his command responsibility for military
    exercises,

    2) Related to the live fly hijacking drills,

    3) An order to not send up any MORE planes into an already crowded and
    confusing airspace in the interest of SAFETY.

    Cheney will have exercised his command authority to not intercept the
    incoming pentagon jet because that plane COULD have been a live fly
    exercise plane, and therefore he can claim he didn’t want any “accidents”
    to happen as a result of the confusion of the moment.

    Recall that on Meet the Press that Sunday, Cheney went into nonsense about
    discussing whether to “intercept”, with the idiotic definition that we
    would put a fighter jet in the “same airspace” with other jets. This
    buffoon like explanation had method to the madness. It was Cheney’s cover
    story to not scramble (non-exercise) jets against possible exercise
    aircraft because of his concern for safety. That is the only way he could
    have sold his “order” to the men under him.

    This cover story reveals the premeditation in having all those exercises
    scheduled exactly at that time on that morning.

    Other signs of premeditation were the June 1st “Air Piracy” Joint Chiefs
    of Staff memo that changed the scramble procedures so that the Secretary
    of Defense would have to give “approval.” Rumsfeld gave no “approval”
    during the attacks (more dereliction of duty/possible conspiracy).

    Another sign is that pilots were banned from bringing firearms into the
    cockpits during that same “hair on fire” period of intense warnings about
    hijackings.

    The biggest giveaway that I know of is Genoa, of course.

    Hope you continue the good fight. On that note, I’ve been trying to get
    people to protest on the opening day of the new Congress, January
    3rd. But, I can’t seem to get large numbers of people to commit. Please
    consider flying to Washington to literally BURN your copy of the 9-11
    Commission Report in front of Congress on the 3rd.

    Dear Johndoraemi,

    The scenario you lay out may be true.

    But I don’t think we could claim to know that it is true or even give it a
    sufficiently high level of probability to proclaim it in public.

    As I’ve indicated in my other answers, I think we are much better off
    sticking with those things that we can declare with certainty or at least
    a very high level of probability. There many things of this nature that
    contradict the official story, moreover, so we need not make more dubious
    claims.

    With regard to the Mineta discussion, it shows clearly that the 9/11
    Commission, in claiming that Cheney did not get down to the underground
    bunker until almost 10 AM, was lying.

    It also shows the falsity of the Commission’s claim that no one knew about
    an unidentified aircraft approaching Washington until a minute or two
    before the Pentagon was struck.

    It also strongly suggests that Mineta witnessed Cheney’s standdown order.
    Mineta, to be sure, said that he assumed that the “orders” were to shoot
    the aircraft down. But that interpretation is ruled out by the fact that
    that is NOT what happened and also by the fact that, if those had been the
    orders, the young man would not have been asking if the orders still
    stood. His question makes sense only if the orders were to do something
    that seemed counterintuitive.

    SeekerofTruth Asks:
    Dr. Griffin,

    Your work is invaluable and you are indeed regarded as a beacon of truth
    and hope. Let me first comment by saying that you, or rather anyone, is
    not obligated nor should be expected to cover every last aspect of the
    attack. Lord knows movements are made up of many for the purpose of
    ‘sharing the load’. So I feel that you don’t need to answer the questions
    of those who are asking you unfair, or in the case of one thus far,
    disingenuous questions.

    My question for you concerns the seeming brick wall of “leftist” or
    alternative media gatekeeping. I speak of those such as Noam Chomsky, Amy
    Goodman, The Nation, Infoshop.org, and all those who “redirect”, distract,
    or “bait & switch” the conversation away from the most
    lethal-to-the-establishment discussions. Although many are aware of this
    conundrum…and it is indeed that, I feel as though we are not dealing
    effectively with it, and have yet to hear you speak on the issue.

    Thank you Dr. Griffin,
    seeker of truth

    Dear SeekerOfTruth,

    Thanks for the opportunity you give me to plug my forthcoming book,
    “Debunking 9/11 Debunking: An Answer to Popular Mechanics and Other
    Defenders of the Official Story.” The body of the book contains responses
    to four substantial publications that came out in August 2006. But in the
    Introduction and the Conclusion, I respond to critiques of the 9/11 truth
    movement by several left-leaning journalists, including Alexander Cockburn
    (Counterpunch and The Nation), Matthew Rothschild (The Progressive),
    Christopher Hayes (The Nation) and Terry Allen (In These Times).

    Altruist Asks:
    Dr. Griffin:

    In your speeches and books, you do not address the many Military War Games
    and Drills that occurred before and on 9/11. Other researchers have
    pointed out that, both before and after 9/11, drills mimicking terrorist
    attacks frequently “coincide” with the actual attacks themselves (the
    implication being that the “drills” are taken “live” at some point and
    then real terrorist attacks, albeit false-flag ones, take place). Why do
    you not examine this seemingly important aspect of 9/11 and its bearing on
    the lack of, and interference in, our Air Defense on that day?

    Dear Altruist,
    Although I have read with interest what other researchers have written
    about the war games, I have myself written very little about them. I do
    point out that they show the falsity of the claim that the government and
    the military had not imagined hijacked planes being used as weapons. I
    also point out that the 9/11 Commission refused to talk about them at the
    hearings, even when people in the audience demanded that they do so. And I
    used Jamie Gorelick’s response—that the Commissioners were assured that
    they were not important—to illustrate the point that the Commissioners
    only dealt with things presented by Zelikow’s staff.
    Of coruse, this very fact—that the Commissioners were evidently steered
    away from the issue—is suspicious. I have little doubt that the war
    games played an important role. But as to just what that role was, I
    remain agnostic.
    I do not believe, as some have seemed to suggest, that the war games, by
    causing so much confusion, made a stand down unnecessary.
    My own suspicion is that the war games were scheduled for the same day as
    the attacks (or vice versa) as the ultimate excuse. That is, if all of the
    other excuses as to why the military did not intercept the planes fall
    apart, the military would be able to claim: “The war games confused us,
    but we didn’t want to admit it, so we lied. We’re sorry. We see now we
    should have told the truth from the beginning.”
    I do not claim to know that this is true. It is, as I say, only my
    suspicion.
    So, I don’t talk about the role played by the war games because I don’t
    have anything certain or even probable to say about this. Also, one need
    not talk about the war games to provide a very strong case that the
    military was involved in orchestrating the events of that day.

    Mark Roberts Asks:
    Dr. Griffin,

    Has information that has been released to the public since the publication
    of your book The 9/11 Commission Report: Omissions and Distortions caused
    you to alter your views about any of those 115 claims?

    Thank you.

    Dear Mark:
    I would not today change that essay except for adding some clarifications
    with regard to a few points:
    Number 1. What I claim with most certainty about the hijackers is that (a)
    there were credible reports that some of them were still alive after 9/11
    and (b) that the 9/11 Commission failed to address this issue. One of the
    alleged hijackers said in David Harrison’s article still to be alive
    (Ahmed al-Nami) turned out to be a case of mistaken identity. It seems
    less likely that this could be true of some of the others, such as Waleed
    al-Shehri, who came forward after seeing his photograph in the paper. I
    wish, however, that someone could do some investigative reporting that
    could settle this issue.
    Number 4: Flight manifests with names of the alleged hijackers have now
    appeared
    (http://s15.invisionfree.com/Loose_Change_Forum/index.php?showtopic=9362).
    Whether they are authentic, I cannot say. The fact that they are so late
    makes me suspicious.
    Number 18. The question of whether the Pentagon’s “entrance hole” was too
    small for a 757 turned out to be more complex than it seemed at the time.
    But the point remains that the hole, as shown in most of the photographs,
    “appears too small for a Boeing 757 to have entered,” so it is something
    that the 9/11 Commission should have discussed.
    Number 21. There have been some pictures released, but they certainly have
    not changed the situation—except to provide more evidence that there are
    no photos showing a 757 hitting the Pentagon. In any case, the point
    remains that the Commission failed to discuss this issue.
    Number 77. We have now learned—from Michael Bronner’s essay in “Vanity
    Fair” and Kean and Hamilton’s book “Without Precedent”—that at least
    some members of the 9/11 Commission accused the military officers of lying
    (even though, as I point out in “Debunking 9/11 Debunking,” this would
    have been a completely unmotivated, irrational lie).
    Number 105. I have given more evidence about bases with fighters that
    could have been used in “Debunking 9/11 Debunking.”

    John Wright Asks:
    Dr. Griffin –

    I hope that you and yours are well and that you celebrated a joyous
    Christmas with your family.

    Thank you very much for all your fine work on behalf of 9/11 Truth. I
    have given about 15 copies of your The New Pearl Harbor to people to help
    them find a way toward the truth of 9/11.

    While I have much to say I will go directly to my question:

    If, by July 4, 2007, 9/11 Truth has not broken into the mainstream
    American media as a serious issue, then would you consider running for
    President on a 9/11 Truth platform to finally push it into the MSM?

    (I’d love to put a Griffin/Kwiatkowski 2008 bumper sticker on my car)

    BTW – I work with the NorCal 9/11 Truth Alliance and live very close to KJ.

    I look forward to meeting you sometime soon in 2007.

    Love is the only way forward.

    Warm regards, John Wright

    Dear John,

    Thank you for your confidence. But no.

    Tuntang Asks:
    I have 2 questions.

    Is there ever going to be a moment of genuine mainstream revelation, a la
    Watergate? Or will the 9/11 campaign just continue asymptotically like
    many other theories?

    I am in a minority amongst my friends in being a 9/11 sceptic- what is the
    best simple fact or argument you have used to turn people around?

    Dear Tuntang,

    There is no simple answer to your question, because people differ greatly
    in terms of what kind of evidence impresses them. As I mention in the
    introduction to “Debunking 9/11 Debunking,” some people are empirically
    minded. For them, you might start with the evidence that the official
    account of the destruction of the WTC cannot be true.

    Other people are strongly paradigmatic thinkers. Such people may not even
    be willing to look at empirical evidence, because their “paradigm” of how
    things happen convinces that governmental and military leaders would not
    have done such a thing. With them, you might be most successful by showing
    evidence to the contrary. In the introduction to “Debunking 9/11
    Debunking,” for example, I point out that the Bush White House order the
    EPA to assure the public that the air at ground zero was safe to breathe.
    As a result, many people working on the clean up and rescue efforts did
    not even wear masks, let along the more extensive protection that should
    have been mandated. Consequently, more people will probably die from
    cancer and other 9/11 diseases than died on 9/11 itself.

    In any case, I gave my own statement of what I consider the strongest
    evidence in my lecture/video “9/11: The Myth and the Reality”
    (http://video.google.com/videosearch?q=david+ray+griffin).

    Kenj Asks:
    David, I hope you are well. There is a respected blogger Joseph Cannon who
    runs Cannonfire.blogspot.com He’s a nice guy and well up on all the stuff
    about 9/11 but he has totally written the controlled demolition (CD)
    theories as bunkum. He links to this site: http://www.debunking911.com

    I’m just curious to know if you have any personal views on the building
    collapses? Any particular pieces of evidence or arguments convince you one
    way or the other? What about the ideas found at the web link given?

    Thanks for your good work. Best wishes.

    Dear Kenj,

    I have given my most complete argument about the WTC buildings in chapter
    3 of “Debunking 9/11 Debunking,” entitled “The Disintegration of the World
    Trade Center: Has NIST Debunked the Theory of Controlled Demolition?”

    Firestone Asks:
    Dr Griffin:

    Do you think that any of the 19 hijackers are still alive, and if so, why
    has no one from the Truth movement tried to contact them?

    Dear Firestone:

    See my comment under “Number 1” in my response to Mark Roberts. Also,
    several people in the movement have wanted to go see if they could
    interview any of them, but members of the movement tend not to be wealthy
    and so they have had to ask for funding. Thus far no one, to my knowledge,
    has put up the needed funding. Even one well-known journalist, who has
    written some well-received books, tried to get funding but, at least the
    last I heard, had not succeeded.

    L Evans Asks:
    Mr Griffin,

    Thank you so much for taking the time to answer our questions. I hope that
    you and your family are well.

    What would you consider is the most important thing that Christians could
    do to wake other Christians up to the truth behind 9/11 (and to wake up
    non-Christians too!)?

    Thank you,
    L Evans.

    Dear Evans,
    In my book on this subject, “Christian Faith and the Truth behind 9/11: A
    Call to Reflection and Action,” I suggested that Christians should
    especially be concerned to expose the truth behind 9/11. Why? Because
    Christianity began with the message of Jesus, which was an “anti-imperial
    gospel,” as Richard Horsley calls it in “Jesus and Empire.”
    Beyond that, the most important thing for getting Christians to wake up
    seems to be the same as it is for other people: simply getting them to
    look at the evidence. The evidence is now so overwhelming that, once they
    do so, most of them will be convinced. It is at this point that their
    religious and moral concerns should motivate them to work very hard to get
    the truth exposed and thereby stop the policies that are being justified
    in the name of 9/11.
    For people who are unlikely to read my book, at least at first, you might
    suggest my lecture, “9/11, American Empire, and Christian Faith,”
    911Truth.org, April 28, 2006
    (http://www.911truth.org/article.php?story=20060501003040487), the DVD of
    which can be obtained from KenJenkins@aol.com.

    Student Asks:
    Question for David Ray Griffin,

    Wouldn’t it be good if the movement could self regulate by means of an
    agreed code of conduct which itself displays what is disinformation and
    what is honest?

    The 9-11 events displayed masterful psi-ops skills. But subsequent
    infiltration efforts which seem to be going on, of 9-11 Truth groups and
    message boards and so on, are also impressive.

    Can you provide advice for rising above the disinformation efforts and
    confusion operations that proliferate, especially on the net but also at
    live 9-11 gatherings?

    My own crude beginnings would include advice to…

    — raise questions in people’s minds, rather than giving specific theories
    — provide clear evidence that official theories cannot explain the facts
    — always use polite language
    — avoid villainizing any group, including government

    Dr. Griffin, can you add to this list, or improve upon it, from your
    experience? It does seem to me that the disinformation efforts all fail
    one or another of these tests, at least. I am hoping you can add to this
    list or otherwise improve on it, and/or comment usefully on this topic.

    And do please accept my warmest thanks and best wishes.

    BR Student

    Dear BR Student,
    You have provided a good set of ideas.
    Probably even more destructive than actual disinformation agents has been
    the tendency of some members of the movement to label those who disagree
    with them as disinformation agents.
    The logic behind these charges seems to run something like this:
    My theory is the truth.
    X rejects my theory.
    Therefore X is a disinformation agent.
    The best way to avoid this common tendency, I believe, is to focus, as you
    suggest, on (1) showing why the official story must be false, rather than
    (2) laying out an account of what really happened. Most people in the
    movement agree on a large number of facts under the first task. Most of
    the disagreements come with regard to the second effort. In our public
    statements, it would be best to stick, as much as possible, to the former,
    saving the latter for private discussions.

    Ericman Asks:
    Hello Dr. Griffin….

    What I would like to know if you can comment on.. is …
    Has anyone tried to contact the hotel workers that supposedly saw the
    video of whatever struck the Pentagon from the hotel security camera? I
    thought I read somewhere that they had seen it a number of times before
    the FBI took possession.

    Why haven’t any of them come forward with what they saw either to prove or
    disprove any particular scenario?

    Dear Ericman,
    As to why they have not come forward, you would need to ask them.
    My assumption, however, is that they have been told in no uncertain terms
    not to do this. They probably believe, probably rightly, that they would
    not only lose their jobs but would then have trouble getting another job.
    We who have education and training that give us lots of options should not
    underestimate the kind of intimidation that such threats can exert on
    people with very few options for providing for their families. (I have
    been told by people who have interviewed members of the Fire Department of
    New York, for example, that they will not talk publicly about explosions
    going off in the Twin Towers for fear of losing their jobs, pensions, and
    benefits.) Also, they probably assume, again rightly, that the mainstream
    media would ridicule or simply ignore their claims, so they would have
    lost their job for nothing.

    Oneworld Asks:
    Dear Dr. Griffin:

    You have mentioned that the current preoccupation with 9/11 and the
    resulting actions in Iraq and Afghanistan are taking attention away from
    the far more important issue of global warming and climate change. Would
    you care to enlarge on this problem?

    Sincerely, Oneworld

    Dear Oneworld,

    Just last night, by coincidence, I saw Al Gore’s movie, “An Inconvenient
    Truth,” at the Santa Barbara Film Festival, after which Gore, who was here
    in person, was interviewed. It just happened that this was at the same
    time the Intergovernmental Panel on Climate Change was issuing its dire
    report and Gore was being nominated for the Nobel Peace Prize. So I
    suspect that by now many people know a lot more about climate change than
    when you asked this question.

    In any case, I would suggest that Gore’s movie would be a good place to
    start. Then read Ross Gelbspan’s fairly recent book, “Boiling Point: How
    Politicians, Big Oil and Coal, Journalists and Activists Are Fueling the
    Climate Crisis—And What We Can Do to Avert Disaster.” Then read the last
    edition of “State of the World,” put out by the WorldWatch Institute.

    I myself wrote an essay on this issue over a decade ago (“The ‘Vision
    Thing,’ the Presidency, and the Ecological Crisis, or the Greenhouse
    Effect and the ‘White House Effect,’” in POSTMODERN POLITICS FOR A PLANET
    IN CRISIS, ed. David Ray Griffin and Richard A. Falk [Albany: State
    University of New York Press, 1993], 67-101). Already then, I pointed out,
    preventing the likelihood of runaway global warming within the 21st
    century would require the industrialized world to reduce greenhouse
    emissions by 90 percent (yes, ninety percent). But, rather than even
    stabilizing our emissions at 1990 levels, as some were recommending, we
    have all continued to increase them. Things by now are far worse than even
    the most extreme projections at that time feared. The most crucial
    indicator is the extreme rapidity of the melting of the world’s ice. Much
    of this information, moreover, become verified only after the IPCC quit
    accepting new data, so things, as Gore pointed out, are even worse than
    its report suggests.

    I conclude “Debunking 9/11 Debunking” by appealing to journalists finally
    to reveal the truth behind 9/11, so that we can overcome our single-minded
    preoccupation with “terrorism” in favor of focusing on the truly
    overwhelming threat of our age, which is the end of civilization itself.
    So do not let anyone tell you that the 9/11 truth movement is a
    distraction from the real crimes of the Bush-Cheney administration. (See
    my brief essay, “The Truly Distracting 9/11 Conspiracy Theory:
    A Reply to Alexander Cockburn,” 9/11 Truth Europe
    [http://www.911truth.eu/index.php?id=0,8,0,0,1,0]).

    JDHess Asks:
    Mr. Griffin, do you believe that there are paid disinformationalists on
    internet forums working to thwart the “911 Truth Movement”?

    Dear JDHess,

    I do not know. It’s not an issue I spend time on. Please see my answer to
    BR Student.

    Gersy gym Asks:

    dr. griffin,

    sir, why is it that you never address the obvious involvement of israeli
    intelligence in 9/11 and the dual israeli-citizenship of most of the pnac
    members? what about the aipac spying ring in the usa? the plame
    affair? these are the issues that matter, not the collapse of wtc 1, 2,
    and 7 or pentagon and shanksville anomolies. who gives israel’s war
    criminal defense department more aid than the usa’s gov’t? evangelical
    churches in america that you evidently belong to. is there any reason
    this hampers your ability to talk about these real and very important,
    relevant issues? thanks for your time. i do admire all the work that you
    have put into this movement, but feel that the focus is on the wrong
    smoking guns.
    happy new year!

    Dear Gersy Gym,

    I do not know that the involvement of Israeli intelligence in 9/11 is
    “obvious.” I would, to be sure, be quite surprised to learn that Israeli
    intelligence was itself surprised by the attacks, but that is different
    from having evidence that they were involved in orchestrating the events.
    Perhaps they were and, if so, I would not be surprised. But I have not
    seen strong evidence for this. And there is certainly no need to posit
    Israeli involvement to explain the events of 9/11. Our military and
    intelligence agencies were perfectly capable of carrying out this
    operation on their own.

    The fact that I don’t know of evidence of Israeli involvement could, of
    course, be because I have not focused on this issue, since I do not try to
    lay our a theory of what really happened, concentrating instead on
    evidence that the official account is false.

    I do not know, I must add, how you can say that the issues with which you
    are most concerned are the only ones that matter. Surely if the attacks on
    the WTC and the Pentagon were false-flag attacks, carried out to provide a
    pretext for launching wars in Muslim countries, greatly restricting civil
    rights in our country, spending hundreds of billions of dollars on the
    military-industrial complex, and so on, this matters.

    America’s support of Israel’s unjust policies is, to be sure, one of the
    most important issues of our time and one that I plan to write about.
    Indeed, I would have already published about this if I had not been
    working on 9/11 almost full time since early in 2003. In my own mind,
    however, that issue and 9/11 are distinct. I may, of course, be wrong. But
    until I am aware of strong evidence of Israeli involvement, I will, of
    course, not write about it.

    I am mystified by the view, which I read now and then, that I am a
    conservative or, as you put it, Evangelical Christian. I can only assume
    that this view is held only by people who have not read any of my books in
    philosophy of religion and theology.

    Ningen Asks:
    Dr. Griffin —

    In your book “Omissions and Distortions,” which I purchased and read in
    full, you begin by pointing out that many of the alleged hijackers were
    later reported alive.

    a. Why did you not mention many other facts that suggest there were no
    hijacked planes, such as the lack of security videotapes of the hijackers,
    the obviously planted evidence in rental cars, the lack of the alleged
    9/11 flights in a government database, and so on?

    b. Many of the topics you discuss later in your book assume that there
    were in fact planes hijacked by Arabs on 9/11, and that they were funded
    by Saudi royals whose exit from the country you emphasize in your book as
    a serious omission. Does this not contradict the first omission you
    discuss — the hijackers being reported alive? Your books seem to
    catalogue various theories without any attempt to determine whether they
    are internally consistent. Do you agree, and if so, do you think that
    this is a problem?

    Thank you for taking the time to answer my questions, and for all the work
    you have done to publicize questions about 9/11.

    Dear Ningen,

    If you read “Debunking 9/11 Debunking,” you will find that I do address
    most of the other issues about the alleged hijackers that you mention. As
    you rightly imply, these additional facts strengthen the conclusion that
    9/11 was a false-flag operation.

    I have, incidentally, also addressed some of these issues in “9/11 and
    Prior False-Flag Operations,” which is the first chapter of “Christian
    Faith and the Truth behind 9/11,” and in “False-Flag Operations, 9/11, and
    the New Rome: A Christian Perspective,” in Kevin Barrett, John B. Cobb
    Jr., and Sandra Lubarsky, eds., 9/11 and American Empire: Christians,
    Jews, and Muslims Speak Out (Northampton: Olive Branch, 2006). But I
    address them more fully in “Debunking 9/11 Debunking.”

    I assume that there were not any “hijackers” on the airliners. This
    question is distinct from the question of whether there was Saudi funding
    for the operation, and funding was needed whether the alleged hijackers
    got on the airliners or not. If they were to be blamed, then they probably
    needed to be paid to play their roles.

    Brainster Asks:
    Dr Griffin:

    1. Do you still believe, as you wrote here
    (http://www.dwfed.org/pp_objections_world%20govt_considered.htm), “only in
    a federal system of global government can real political and economic
    decentralization and autonomy be possible.”

    2. Why do you say that the fires in the World Trade Center were
    oxygen-starved? Isn’t it obvious that the holes in the towers could
    provide plenty of oxygen?

    3. Do you believe there were hijackers on the four planes that crashed on
    9-11?

    Dear Brainster,

    First, I have not changed my views about the need for global democracy, as
    I indicated in my answer to Dachsie.

    Second, the reason to say that the fires were oxygen starved is that black
    smoke was issuing forth, as even Thomas Eagar and NIST admit (see my
    discussion of NIST’s “Answers to Frequently Asked Questions” in “Debunking
    9/11 Debunking”).

    Third, see my answer to Ningen.

    ———

    Architect Says:

    A major issue for the 911 Truth movement has been the lack of any
    substantial support from the academic and professional communities best
    placed to consider the underlying causes of collapse; in particular
    architects, fire engineers, and structural engineers.

    Given the amount of qualified people in these fields, in particular
    world-wide and hence outwith the US immediate sphere of influence, it
    seems inconceivable that any serious errors in the NIST/FEMA analysis
    would not have been highlighted.

    In contrast, there are a number of papers by various groups such as Ove
    Arup, Edinburgh University, and Sheffield University which have confirmed
    (or largely confirmed) key parts of the “official” analysis.

    Why do you consider this situation has arisen, and why has the Truth
    movement been unable to respond with detailed engineering analyses?
    ——–

    Dear Architect,

    Although it may at first glance seem “inconceivable” that errors the
    analyses by FEMA and NIST would not have been highlighted in the press or
    academic journals, this becomes less inconceivable after one becomes
    familiar with various relevant factors.

    One factor is that most architects and engineers in countries allied with
    the USA evidently find it inconceivable that 9/11 could have been an
    inside job that was then covered up by agencies of the US government.
    Civilized countries, they believe, simply don’t do such things. And so,
    since pre-set explosives are ruled out, the buildings “must” have come
    down through some combination of fire and externally produced damage. So
    like NIST itself, rather than asking, “Can pigs fly?”, they simply ask:
    “Granted that these pigs flew, how did they do it?” And once that is the
    question, then NIST’s answer is about as good as one can do.

    A second factor is that architectural and engineering firms can thrive and
    even survive on the basis of their reputations, and in elite circles—the
    circles that can pay for their services—any firm that supported a
    “conspiracy theory” about 9/11 would no longer be considered reliable. Or
    at least the firms fear that this will be the case.

    A third factor is that, even if some individual engineers and architects
    produced contrary analyses, they would most likely not be published by any
    scientific journals or mentioned in any mainstream press articles. For
    example, two engineers at the ETH Swiss Federal Institute of Technology,
    which is very prestigious, have declared that WTC 7 was with the highest
    probability brought down by explosives. But you will not find reports of
    these statements in the mainstream press or academic journals in Europe or
    (especially) the United States. The moral of this discussion is that we
    have no idea how many architects and engineers have disputed the
    conclusions reached by NIST.

    Let me also add that architects and engineers are not necessarily, as you
    suggest, “best placed to consider the underlying causes of the collapse.”
    They build things; they do not destroy things. Also, to disprove the
    official theory, we not need a full-blown alternative theory. All we need
    is sufficient evidence that the official story cannot be true, and if this
    theory violates fundamental laws of physics, that is sufficient evidence.

    Another way to evaluate the official theory is simply by studying the
    collapses on videos, and among the best placed people to do this are
    experts in controlled demolition. One expert who spoke out, then evidently
    realized that this would be hazardous to the health of his lobbying
    activities, was Van Romero of New Mexico Tech (see my discussion of “The
    Van Romero Episode,” which is the epilogue to chapter 3 “Christian Faith
    and the Truth behind 9/11”). Expert testimony has also been given by a
    well-known controlled demolition expert in Holland, Danny Jowenko. After
    seeing the collapse of WTC 7, without knowing what building it was (he had
    not even known that a third building collapsed on 9/11), he said that it
    could only have been brought down by explosives. Whether he would have
    said this if he had known that it was WTC 7, we will never know. (I report
    on Jowenko’s testimony, as well as that of the two Swiss engineering
    professors, in “Debunking 9/11 Debunking.”)

    Skyking Asks:
    Dr. Griffin,

    Can you indicate to us whether your long career as a professor of the
    philosophy of religion and theology influenced you to reject reason and
    critical thinking in your very illogical writings about 9/11? In this age
    where logic, reason, and critical thinking are sneered upon as bourgeois
    and elitist, where Creationism and Intelligent Design are trotted out as a
    religious crusade against science and reason, I could understand your
    rejection of reason on those grounds. But I find your rejection of reason,
    overwhelming evidence, and the scientific method, disturbing and
    irrational.

    I also know that otherwise intelligent and non-religious people find it
    fashionable to reject reason and adopt bizarre conspiracy theories as the
    so-called 9/11 Truth Movement has; Holocaust Deniers have done so for 60
    years and also for political reasons.

    The revolt against reason is indeed strange; I just wonder why you chose
    to reject reason, especially and critically as someone whose career as an
    educator should have prevented you from ever considering doing so.

    Dear Skyking,

    If you will read my books in philosophy of religion and theology (I would
    especially suggest “Reenchantment without Supernaturalism: A Process
    Philosophy of Religion”), you will probably be able to discern that I have
    been a defender of reason against those who make the moves of which you
    are critical.

    You will probably be able to discern the same thing if you read some of my
    writings in the philosophy of science, such as “Religion and Scientific
    Naturalism” and my introductions to two edited volumes, “Physics and the
    Ultimate Significance of Time” and “The Reenchantment of Science.” You
    might in particular find interesting my critique of Intelligent Design,
    “Evolution without Tears: A Third Way beyond Neo-Darwinism and Intelligent
    Design” (Process and Faith, 1325 N. College, Claremont, CA 91711).

    You are, to be sure, not the first person to assume that, since I reject
    the official theory about 9/11, I must have rejected logic and reason.
    Alexander Cockburn has made this charge. I have replied to it in the
    introduction and conclusion of “Debunking 9/11 Debunking.”

    Part of my answer is to point out that the truly “bizarre” conspiracy
    theory, to use your term, is the official conspiracy theory about 9/11.
    From learning that you accept this theory, however, I would not
    immediately jump to the conclusion that you have rejected reason. My first
    assumption would be that you are probably unfamiliar with a wide range or
    relevant facts, including the fact that holding the official theory about
    the collapses of the WTC buildings involves holding, implicitly, that
    several basic laws of physics were violated.

    The point of my response is that to hold a reasonable theory about
    something, it is not enough simply to affirm logic and the other elements
    of rationality. There is also an empirical element. One must look at the
    relevant empirical facts. One does not have a reasonable theory unless it
    can, in a self-consistent way, take account of all the relevant facts. And
    the official theory, I argue, cannot even come close to doing that. You
    might want to look more closely at some of the facts, therefore, to make
    sure that you are not one of the people holding an unreasonable theory.

    Bgiltner Asks:

    I think Christianity in general is bunk. I am suspicious of those who
    would organize their lives around it. How do you respond to someone who
    thinks your role as a Christian Theologian is discrediting?

    Dear Bqiltner,

    If you will read some of my writings about Christian faith, you will learn
    that I do not think there is anything such thing as “Christianity in
    general.”

    You will probably also find that most of the things you consider bunk, I
    do too. That does not mean, however, that Christianity at its best is not
    full of true and enormously important ideas.

    I have not encountered many people who think my role as a Christian
    theologian is discrediting. In any case, if there are such people, I would
    simply say that my writings about 9/11 should be evaluated in terms of
    whether they successfully raise objections to the official theory. It is
    widely accepted that ad hominem arguments against authors are
    illegitimate, except where the evidence in question depends on the
    personal testimony of the author. When one is evaluating a theory argued
    on the basis of reason and evidence, one cannot legitimately refute this
    theory by making allegations about the author of that theory.

    Irving Asks:

    Dr. Griffin,

    As the backlash against the Truth movement continues, I am really looking
    forward to your Debunking the Debunkers project.

    I was wondering if you are planning to reply to the hit pieces by critics
    such a Alexander Cockburn and Alan Wisdom. Also, will you be responding to
    “debunking” websites such as 9/11myths.com?

    Thank you.

    Dear Irving,

    As I said in my response to SeekerOfTruth and Skyking, I respond to Cockburn. But until I read your question, I did not know of the piece by Alan Wisdom, so I have not responded to it in “Debunking 9/11 Debunking.”

    Also, although 9/11myths.com deserves a thoughtful response, that will have to remain a task for another time.

    heiho1 Asks:
    Dr Griffin:

    Would you please comment on the PRESENTMENT REGARDING DESTRUCTION OF WORLD TRADE CENTER EVIDENCE AND CONSEQUENT OBSTRUCTION OF JUSTICE
    (http://911affidavit.blogspot.com/2007/01/presentment-regarding-destruction-of.html)?

    Dear heihol,

    Thank you for letting me know about this “presentment.” Although at the end it says that “research assistance for this presentment was provided by David Ray Griffin,” either I “provided” this assistant only indirectly, by way of my writings, or else I have forgotten about it (which is entirely possible).

    In any case, this document presents an excellent case for the installation of a Grand Jury to investigate the evidence that officials of New York City, including then Mayor Rudy Giuliani, participated in a crime and then a cover-up with regard to the destruction of the World Trade Center.

    To all my questioners: Thank you very much for your questions, which gave me a chance to clarify many things and also to mention places where other things have been discussed. I hope my answers have been helpful.

    I am sorry for the delay in getting these answers written. I was rushing to meet the deadline for my forthcoming book. I thought that, rather than dashing off quick answers to your questions, it would be better to wait until I could devote a couple days to this task.

    Yours truly,

    David Griffin

    Eventually all DNA will be recorded

    0

    Mark Brittain

    IN the 12 years since the national DNA database was inaugurated, our four police forces have contributed to it more than 260,000 profiles, we learn, courtesy of figures obtained by the Welsh Lib Dems.

    This figure amounts to getting on for 10% of the resident population, if indeed these are the people recorded.

    So either we have a very large criminal population or a very large criminal population is offending and being caught in Wales.

    Over one fifth of these 260,000-plus bio-samples were taken by North Wales police, averaging just over 4,500 per year, not far-off 13 per day — and far more than this in recent years as the original rate increased tenfold from 620 in 1995 to 6,000 or so last year.

    Should we be worried? The figures suggest the answer is emphatically “yes”, but what exactly to be worried about is less easy to ascertain.

    Of the 55,694 DNA profiles North Wales Police has added to the database, 1,534 were from children aged under 16.

    Are they all criminals or potentially so? Emphatically “no”. Anyone arrested and detained at a police station can have their DNA taken and recorded even if they are subsequently acquitted.

    Young people, however, especially under-18s, make up a disproportionately large percentage of arrests. If they do go on to offend or re-offend they can be sure that the likelihood of their being apprehended is much greater than if their DNA had not been recorded.

    There is no doubt that a sizeable number of repellent crimes have been solved thanks to the DNA database. Historic crimes can also now be reinvestigated and miscarriages of justice righted. It is a powerful tool and could be a deterrent too.

    But as the percentage of the population being recorded inevitably grows, the government agenda remains obscure. We are approaching a state of affairs which would never have been countenanced politically, by stealth and default.

    If the government wants a complete DNA database of every person in the country, sampled at birth or at the point of immigration, it should be honest about it, make the case and be prepared to have it tested by the electorate.

    This will not happen because there is no need. Slowly but surely we will all find ourselves profiled for one reason or another, for tripping a speed camera, buying a few too many cans of beer in Calais or filing a late tax return.

    Just as surely the database will one day be abused. We have been warned.

    The FBI’s Right To Threaten Torture

    0

    James Bovard

    A federal appeals court has concluded that an FBI agent must go to trial on charges he coerced a false confession out of a prime suspect in the 9/11 attacks. But the FBI still insists that its agent did nothing wrong. And the feds swayed the court to suppress that portion of a recent decision detailing how the FBI agent used the threat of torture to break an innocent man.

    Abdallah Higazy, a 30-year-old Egyptian student, arrived in New York City to study engineering at the Polytechnic University in Brooklyn on Aug. 27, 2001. A U.S. foreign-aid program reserved and paid for his room at the Millennium Hilton Hotel, next to the World Trade Center. After the first plane crashed into the World Trade Center, Higazy hot-footed it out of the hotel. After the terrorist attack, the hotel was sealed.

    Three months later, guests were allowed to retrieve their belongings. When Higazy went to the hotel on Dec. 17, he was arrested and accused of possessing an aviation radio. (A hotel security guard reported finding the radio in a safe in his room.) Higazy denied owning the radio. He was arrested as a material witness and locked up in solitary confinement.

    Higazy wanted to clear his name, so he agreed to take a polygraph test. FBI agent Michael Templeton wired him up for the test but then proceeded to browbeat him for three hours until he finally admitted to owning the radio. Higazy said the FBI agent warned him, “If you don’t cooperate with us, the FBI will … make sure Egyptian security gives your family hell.” The FBI refused to permit Higazy’s attorney, Robert Dunn, to be in the room while he was given the polygraph. After the interrogation, Higazy was “trembling and sobbing uncontrollably,” according to Dunn.

    On Jan. 11, 2002, Higazy was indicted for lying to a federal agent. U.S. Attorney Dan Himmelfarb claimed that “the crime that was being investigated when the false statements [about the radio] were made is perhaps the most serious in the country’s history. A radio that can be used for air-to-air and air-to-ground communication is a significant part of that investigation.” The Washington Post noted that “federal officials paraded [Higazy] before the media as a terrorist.” The feds never bothered checking with the U.S. foreign-aid program to find out whether Higazy’s story about why he was staying at the hotel next to the World Trade Center was true.

    The prosecutorial celebration flopped three days later when an American pilot showed up at the Millennium Hilton Hotel and asked for the aviation radio he had left in his room when the hotel was evacuated on 9/11. It soon became apparent that the hotel security guard (a former cop who had been fired by the Newark Police Department) had lied about finding the radio in Higazy’s room. The case collapsed and, a few days later, Higazy was awarded $3 for subway fare and released from jail. The FBI conducted an internal investigation and absolved Templeton of any wrongdoing.

    In late 2002, Higazy sued, asserting that the FBI’s coercive interrogation violated his Fifth Amendment rights against self-incrimination. Federal judge Naomi Buchwald dismissed his case, declaring, “[Agent] Templeton’s conduct and threats as a matter of law cannot be classified as conscience-shocking or constitutionally oppressive.” Perhaps Buchwald believed that as long as Higazy’s mother and sister were not brutalized in front of him during the interrogation, the FBI had done nothing wrong.

    A federal appeals court overturned this decision on Oct. 19, declaring that Higazy’s case deserved to go to trial. The original version of the decision detailed the tactics Templeton purportedly used to get Higazy’s confession. Two hours later, the court removed that portion of the decision from the Internet. The redacted portion of the decision (captured by bloggers before it was taken down) noted that the FBI agent admitted to knowing that Egyptian “laws are different than ours, that they are probably allowed to do things in that country … yeah, probably about torture, sure.” Thus, Templeton was aware that his threat would terrify Higazy.

    The revised court decision replaced such key details with the following mundane notice: “For the purposes of the summary judgment motion, Templeton did not contest that Higazy’s statements were coerced.”

    The FBI has long taught its agents that subjects of their investigation have “forfeited their right to the truth,” according to the ethics study guide at the FBI Academy. Perhaps, according to federal lawmen, it is a small step from lying to suspects to threatening to have their kinfolk tortured. The agency has done nothing in the nearly six years since this case began to indicate that the methods used in the Higazy case did not receive the full approval of FBI headquarters.

    The initial Higazy arrest and release were landmarks showing how far feds would go to gin up evidence and headlines for the war on terror. The fact that the FBI approved of its agent’s methods – and the fact that a federal judge saw no problem with the interrogation – are further warning signs of constitutional decay. Keep your eyes on this case, because it could help determine how far feds can go to destroy innocent people.

    Is Israel About to Attack Hizballah?

    0

    Israeli soldiers, Rosh Hanikra border

    Israeli soldiers secure the gate at the Rosh Hanikra border crossing between Israel and Lebanon October 15, 2007.

    Gil Cohen Magen / Reuters

    Is Israel laying the ground for preemptive air strikes against targets belonging to the militant Shi’ite group Hizballah in Lebanon?

    Tensions have been building along the Lebanon-Israel border in recent days. The Israeli army was engaged last week in large-scale military exercises in northern Israel, close to the border with Lebanon, putting into practice the lessons learned from last year’s 34-day war against Hizballah. The exercises took place at the same time as Israeli jets conducted a growing number of mock air raids and overflights in Lebanese airspace. Israeli aircraft fly in Lebanese airspace on a near daily basis, but last week Lebanese army anti-aircraft units fired at the jets for the first time since the end of the war.

    Hizballah, too, is reported to have carried out over the weekend its largest ever military maneuvers in south Lebanon. According to a report Monday in Lebanon’s Al-Akhbar newspaper, Hizballah’s three-day exercise was a response to the Israeli army’s own maneuvers and was intended, according to quoted Hizballah sources, to “deter the enemy from undertaking any further Lebanese adventures.”

    Accompanying all this heightened activity has been a flurry of reports in the Israeli media about Hizballah’s rearming, with claims that the Shi’ite group today possesses rockets that can strike Tel Aviv. Last week, a United Nations report on Lebanon carried information provided by Israel that alleged Hizballah was more heavily armed than prior to the 2006 war, with hundreds of long-range rockets and three times as many anti-ship cruise missiles. “Israel has stated that the nature and number of weapons in Hizballah’s control constitutes a strategic threat to its security and the safety of its citizens,” the report said. And at a recent panel discussion in Washington, the outgoing deputy chief of staff of the Israeli army openly talked about the need to launch a preemptive strike against Hizballah targets in Lebanon sometime in the future.

    Hizballah’s leadership is playing down the prospect of renewed fighting with Israel. Sheikh Hassan Nasrallah, Hizballah’s secretary-general, said in a speech last week that “these maneuvers and mock air raids and these Israeli drum beats, threats and browbeats which we hear from time to time do not affect us at all.”

    “Today, we are stronger [than last year] in terms of will, determination, faith, morals, finances, brains, measures, presence in the field and preparations for the confrontation. Nothing intimidates us,” he said.

    Israel has been looking to restore its threat of deterrence, which was damaged by the inconclusive results of the 2006 war. The mysterious Israeli air strike in September against a suspected nuclear facility in northern Syria is seen as part of a renewed assertiveness. But could Hizballah also be in the Israeli military’s sights?

    Last month, this reporter sat on a panel to discuss Hizballah at a conference hosted by the Washington Institute for Near East Policy. The other panelist was Major General Moshe Kaplinsky, the outgoing deputy chief of staff of the Israeli army. Before discussing Israel’s role, Kaplinsky offered up a series of recommendations that he believed would help neutralize and ultimately disarm Hizballah. They included strengthening the Lebanese army and expanding the mandate of the 13,300-strong United Nations peacekeeping force, known as UNIFIL, to areas beyond the south Lebanon border strip. UNIFIL, he said, should mount patrols in Hizballah’s new stronghold in mountains north of the Litani river, the limit of UNIFIL’s area of operations. He added that UNIFIL must deploy along the border with Syria to check the flow of weapons smuggled into Lebanon by Hizballah.

    However, there is little chance of Kaplinsky’s wishes being fulfilled, analysts say. UNIFIL is under threat from groups inspired by Al-Qaeda – six members of the Spanish battalion were killed in June in a car bomb attack – and the peacekeeping force has no wish to make new enemies by deploying along the border with Syria and inside Hizballah’s military areas.

    Given those realities, perhaps it shouldn’t have come as much of a surprise that Kaplinsky also declared that Israel should preemptively attack Hizballah targets in Lebanon, such as new positions and arms convoys crossing the border from Syria. “I approve preemptive strikes against Hizballah. We have to find the exact time. This is one of the lessons I learned from before,” he said.

    Kaplinsky has many years’ experience fighting Israel’s enemies in Lebanon, from 1982 when the Israeli army invaded to drive out the Palestine Liberation Organization then dominating south Lebanon. In the early 1990s he commanded the elite Golani Brigade at a time when Hizballah was evolving into a formidable guerrilla fighting force dedicated to ousting the Israeli army from its occupation zone in south Lebanon. Hizballah’s resistance campaign led to an Israeli withdrawal from Lebanon in May 2000. Hizballah units moved in to the vacuum and five months later kidnapped three Israeli soldiers from the Shebaa Farms, an Israeli-occupied mountainside running along Lebanon’s southeast border over which Lebanon claims sovereignty. Kaplinsky and other senior Israeli officers urged then Israeli Prime Minister Ehud Barak to order a swift and punishing response to deter future attacks. Barak, however, refrained from a heavy retaliation, apparently worried about being sucked back into the Lebanese quagmire just five months after leaving it.

    That restraint encouraged Hizballah over the next six years to build up an impressive military infrastructure of secret bunkers and rocket firing positions in the hills and valleys of south Lebanon, which was put to good use in last year’s war.

    Kaplinsky and other Israeli commanders say they cannot afford to repeat the same mistake. Although Hizballah appears to have rearmed substantially, Kaplinsky believed the organization is not yet ready for another round with Israel because of its internal political battles with the U.S.-backed Lebanese government. That suggests Israel has a window of opportunity to attack Hizballah’s military assets at little cost.

    Whether Israel launches preemptive raids or not, analysts agree that a second round between Israel and Hizballah is inevitable. And Kaplinsky was confident that Israel would prevail against Hizballah in that event. “I believe that the next round will take us less time, [we will] send [into Lebanon] more quickly our ground forces. We will have to take control of the area for some weeks, some months… to [disarm] Hizballah,” he said. Hardly encouraging words for the war-weary residents of south Lebanon.

    The original version of this story misstated the month in which an Israeli air strike against a suspected nuclear facility in Syria occurred. It occurred in September.

    A Story of Surveillance

    1

    Former Technician ‘Turning In’ AT&T Over NSA Program

    By Ellen Nakashima

    His first inkling that something was amiss came in summer 2002 when he opened the door to admit a visitor from the National Security Agency to an office of AT&T in San Francisco.

    “What the heck is the NSA doing here?” Mark Klein, a former AT&T technician, said he asked himself.

    A year or so later, he stumbled upon documents that, he said, nearly caused him to fall out of his chair. The documents, he said, show that the NSA gained access to massive amounts of e-mail and search and other Internet records of more than a dozen global and regional telecommunications providers. AT&T allowed the agency to hook into its network at a facility in San Francisco and, according to Klein, many of the other telecom companies probably knew nothing about it.

    Klein is in Washington this week to share his story in the hope that it will persuade lawmakers not to grant legal immunity to telecommunications firms that helped the government in its anti-terrorism efforts.

    The plain-spoken, bespectacled Klein, 62, said he may be the only person in the country in a position to discuss firsthand knowledge of an important aspect of the Bush administration’s domestic surveillance program. He is retired, so he isn’t worried about losing his job. He did not have security clearance, and the documents in his possession were not classified, he said. He has no qualms about “turning in,” as he put it, the company where he worked for 22 years until he retired in 2004.

    “If they’ve done something massively illegal and unconstitutional — well, they should suffer the consequences,” Klein said. “It’s not my place to feel bad for them. They made their bed, they have to lie in it. The ones who did [anything wrong], you can be sure, are high up in the company. Not the average Joes, who I enjoyed working with.”

    In an interview yesterday, he alleged that the NSA set up a system that vacuumed up Internet and phone-call data from ordinary Americans with the cooperation of AT&amp;T . Contrary to the government’s depiction of its surveillance program as aimed at overseas terrorists, Klein said, much of the data sent through AT&amp;T to the NSA was purely domestic. Klein said he believes that the NSA was analyzing the records for usage patterns as well as for content.

    He said the NSA built a special room to receive data streamed through an AT&T Internet room containing “peering links,” or major connections to other telecom providers. The largest of the links delivered 2.5 gigabits of data — the equivalent of one-quarter of the Encyclopedia Britannica‘s text — per second, said Klein, whose documents and eyewitness account form the basis of one of the first lawsuits filed against the telecom giants after the government’s warrantless-surveillance program was reported in the New York Times in December 2005.

    Claudia Jones, an AT&T spokeswoman, said she had no comment on Klein’s allegations. “AT&T is fully committed to protecting our customers’ privacy. We do not comment on matters of national security,” she said.

    The NSA and the White House also declined comment on Klein’s allegations.

    Klein is urging Congress not to block Hepting v. AT&amp;T, a class-action suit pending in federal court in San Francisco, as well as 37 other lawsuits charging carriers with illegally collaborating with the NSA. He was accompanied yesterday by lawyers for the Electronic Frontier Foundation, which filed Hepting v. AT&amp;T in 2006. Together, they are urging key U.S. senators to oppose a pending White House-endorsed immunity provision that would effectively wipe out the lawsuits. The Judiciary Committee is expected to take up the measure Thursday.

    In summer 2002, Klein was working in an office responsible for Internet equipment when an NSA representative arrived to interview a management-level technician for a special job whose details were secret.

    “That’s when my antennas started to go up,” he said. He knew that the NSA was supposed to work on overseas signals intelligence.

    The job entailed building a “secret room” in an AT&T office 10 blocks away, he said. By coincidence, in October 2003, Klein was transferred to that office and assigned to the Internet room. He asked a technician there about the secret room on the 6th floor, and the technician told him it was connected to the Internet room a floor above. The technician, who was about to retire, handed him some wiring diagrams.

    “That was my ‘aha!’ moment,” Klein said. “They’re sending the entire Internet to the secret room.”

    The diagram showed splitters, glass prisms that split signals from each network into two identical copies. One fed into the secret room, the other proceeded to its destination, he said.

    “This splitter was sweeping up everything, vacuum-cleaner-style,” he said. “The NSA is getting everything. These are major pipes that carry not just AT&T’s customers but everybody’s.”

    One of Klein’s documents listed links to 16 entities, including Global Crossing, a large provider of voice and data services in the United States and abroad; UUNet, a large Internet provider in Northern Virginia now owned by Verizon; Level 3 Communications, which provides local, long-distance and data transmission in the United States and overseas; and more familiar names such as Sprint and Qwest. It also included data exchanges MAE-West and PAIX, or Palo Alto Internet Exchange, facilities where telecom carriers hand off Internet traffic to each other.

    “I flipped out,” he said. “They’re copying the whole Internet. There’s no selection going on here. Maybe they select out later, but at the point of handoff to the government, they get everything.”

    Qwest has not been sued because of media reports last year that said the company declined to participate in an NSA program to build a database of domestic phone-call records out of concern about its legality. What the documents show, Klein contends, is that the NSA apparently was collecting several carriers’ communications, probably without their consent.

    Another document showed that the NSA installed in the room a semantic traffic analyzer made by Narus, which Klein said indicated that the NSA was doing content analysis.

    Steve Bannerman, Narus’s marketing vice president, said in an interview that the NarusInsight system is “the world’s most powerful Internet traffic processing engine.” He said it is used to detect worms, as well as to capture information to help authorities stop criminal activity. He said it can track a communication’s origin and destination, as well as its content. He declined to comment on AT&T’s use of the system.

    Klein said he decided to go public after President Bush defended the NSA’s surveillance program as limited to collecting phone calls between suspected terrorists overseas and people in the United States. Klein said the documents show that the scope was much broader.

    Klein was last in Washington in 1969, to take part in an antiwar protest. Now, he said with a chuckle, he’s here in a gray suit as a lobbyist.

    Staff researcher Richard Drezen contributed to this story.

    Police to get new powers

    0

    Police could be given the power to question suspects after they have been charged, the Home Secretary has said.Although MPs are discussing the possibility of giving new powers to police to deal specifically with terror suspects, the Home Secretary has admitted that the Government is considering using the new powers with non-terror suspects too.

    Jacqui Smith has said the government was also looking at whether to bring in such a change “more widely” to deal with non-terror crimes, according to the BBC.

    She told BBC Radio 4’s Today programme: “Well, we’re looking actually, as part of our review of the Police and Criminal Evidence Act, at whether or not it is more widely appropriate, so it’s something that we’re considering more widely on a slightly slower timescale.”

    The head of MI5 has also been summoned to appear before MPs to explain the plans to detain terrorist suspects without charge for longer.

    In a highly unusual move, Jonathan Evans will be asked to give evidence about why the change may be needed in advance of a crucial Commons vote on the issue.

    terrorist bus

    Devastation: Aftermath of the July 7 bus bombing

    Members of the all-party home affairs committee are demanding to know if there have been any cases where a suspect had to be released because the current limit of 28 days proved too short.

    Jacqui Smith said that no decision has yet been made on exactly how long the Government wants to be able to hold terror suspects.

    The move came as the Commons began a week-long debate on the Queen’s Speech, with crime and terror the first areas to be discussed today.

    It was revealed last month that Gordon Brown currently favours a new 56-day period, with weekly reviews by a judge, though he is keeping his options open pending a review.

    The Queen’s Speech confirmed that the Government is intent on lengthening the limit, but Downing Street briefing notes on the Counter-Terrorism Bill avoided specifying a new limit.

    Ministers are still trying to get crossparty consensus on the issue, but Shadow Home Secretary is determined to keep up the Tories’ opposition as there is no evidence that longer detention is needed.

    It is rare for a director general of the Security Service to be interviewed by a Commons committee-on a politically-charged issue.

    Mr Evans spoke candidly to newspaper editors this week about the scale of the terrorist threat confronting Britons, posed by Islamic extremists targeting school children.

    MI5 chief Jonathan Evans

    Under scrutiny: MPs want to quiz Jonathan Evans, the head of MI5 over terror detention laws

    In a letter to Mr Evans, committee chairman Keith Vaz makes clear that the MPs expect him to be equally frank on the 28-day issue.

    The committee is offering Mr Evans the chance to speak in private session with the press and public excluded if he feels his evidence could compromise security or interfere with criminal trials.

    His responses, along with evidence from Met chief Sir Ian Blair and Home Secretary Jacqui Smith, will be used by the committee in a report that will recommend whether or not the limit should be raised.

    Mr Vaz said: “We have not had a single live case where anybody said they needed to keep a suspect beyond 27 days.”

    There was speculation that Ms Smith may settle for those elements of the counter-terrorism bill – such as postcharge questioning of terror suspects – that have Tory backing and can get through parliament.

    The Home Secretary has confirmed an increase in the detention time was on the cards to combat “a serious, sustained and growing threat”.

    “Can you imagine if there was a situation where we had to release someone and they went on to commit a terrorist act?” she asked.

    “You would be asking me why a serious policy maker had not listened to the advice that there was a growing trend of complexity in cases.”

    © 2007 Associated Newspapers Limited

    Identity cards technology under review

    0

    Gordon Brown is said to have demanded a review of the technology behind identity cards.

    The Guardian newspaper has reported that the Prime Minister has expressed concern that ID cards do not become another IT fiasco.

    Brown’s intervention comes as the government is under pressure from the Conservatives, Liberal Democrats and human rights groups such as Liberty to scrap the expensive ID cards project.

    The government has also been fighting in the courts to prevent organisations like Computer Weekly and the Guardian being granted access to Gateway Reviews undertaken on the ID cards project. It is believed they have been wholly negative and the government does not want them published for this reason.

    Reports in the Guardian claim that ministerial sources have confirmed that Brown was concerned enough about introducing such a huge multi billion pound scheme to insist that the technology must work before it is introduced. Any review could delay the roll out of the programme from its current planned date of 2008.

    Home office minister Lord West told BBC1’s The Politics Show: “Identity cards, for all the debate about other things, in a purely counter-terrorist role will be of help.”

    http://www.publicservant.co.uk/news_story.asp?id=4314

    US generals planning revolt over Iran

    2

    A group of senior US military commanders have reportedly decided to resign, should the White House order a military strike against Iran.

    The reports come as tension in the Persian Gulf region has raised fears that US President George W. Bush might order an attack on Iran before his term expires.

    “There are four or five generals and admirals we know would resign if Bush ordered an attack on Iran,” a source with close ties with British intelligence services said. “There is simply no stomach for it in the Pentagon, and a lot of people question whether such an attack would be effective or even possible.”

    A British defense source confirmed that there were deep misgivings inside the Pentagon about a military strike. “All the generals are perfectly clear that they don’t have the military capacity to take Iran on in any meaningful fashion. Nobody wants to do it and it would be a matter of conscience for them.”

    The threat of a wave of resignations coincided with a warning by Vice-President Dick Cheney that all options, including military action, remained on the table.

    According to a report in The New Yorker magazine, the Pentagon has already set up a working group to plan airstrikes on Iran. The panel initially focused on destroying Iran’s nuclear facilities.

    However, army chiefs fear an attack on Iran would lead to a rise in oil prices and a full-blown regional war.

    FF/RE

    Israel arrests West Bank activists

    0

    Israeli troops have arrested a number of Palestinians in a raid on the Balata refugee camp, east of the West Bank city of Nablus.

    Dozens of Israeli military vehicles raided the camp early on Wednesday, after a standoff between fighters in the camp and Palestinian security forces, Hassan al-Titi, Al Jazeera’s correspondent, reported.

    The Palestinian Authority had deployed his own troops to ensure security in the area, but Israel said it was maintaining overall control.

    Israeli soldiers also stormed a number of houses in the area, al-Titi said.

    Palestinian officials said at least 25 people were arrested, but Israeli forces said just eight are being held.

    Al-Titi reported that Israeli forces had bombed the house of Hani al-Kaabi, a “wanted” Palestinian activist in Balata refugee camp, and were holding wife of Nasir Abu Aziz, another “wanted” activist.

    The West Bank, governed by the Palestinian Fatah faction, has been under Israeli miltary occupation since 1967.

    Meanwhile, in the Hamas-controlled Palestinian territory of Gaza, a funeral for a dead fighter turned violent when Hamas men opened fire at supporters of the rival Islamic Jihad faction, leaving one person dead, medical officials said.

    The Hamas men began shooting after Islamic Jihad members threw stones at a Hamas police station during the funeral of the Islamic Jihad fighter, witnesses said.

    Al Jazeera

    Met chief resists new pressure to quit

    0

    James Sturcke and Vikram Dodd
    Guardian Unlimited

    Sir Ian Blair
    Metropolitan police commissioner Sir Ian Blair undergoes questioning by the London Assembly. Photograph: Daniel Berehulak/Getty Images
     

    The Metropolitan police commissioner, Sir Ian Blair, today defied fresh calls for him to quit from members of the London assembly.Sir Ian insisted he would stay and “get on with the job” unless he lost the support of the government and his senior officers.

    The demands for him to go came less than a week after his force was convicted of a series of “catastrophic errors” leading to the shooting of the innocent Brazilian Jean Charles de Menezes at Stockwell underground station, in south London.

    Sir Ian told London assembly members that the force would not be appealing against the verdict in last week’s trial.

    Holding up a copy of the Stockwell One report, to be published tomorrow, he said it did not contain any recommendations for the force.

    The commissioner added that the Met had had a copy of the report for 18 months and had already revised many of its operational, surveillance and firearms procedures accordingly.

    “I don’t think the report, when it is published, will say anything new that is not already public,” he said. “I hope it will draw a line under this and we will be able to show what we have done and can move on.”

    Sir Ian said the six recommendations of the Stockwell Two report into the Met’s handling of public statements following the shooting had been implemented.

    Of the 15 recommendations in the Stockwell 1B report, which dealt with the long-term repercussions, 14 were directed at a national level, Sir Ian said.

    Sir Ian was then questioned by members at the meeting, which is being broadcast online.

    The commissioner accepted “an obvious mistake” had been made in the killing of De Menezes, but insisted that “there are times when no one is culpable”.

    He again said he did not believe he should resign unless systemic and repeated failures were found in the Met. “Everybody that day was doing the best they could to save Londoners’ lives,” he said.

    Sir Ian also shed light on one of the trial’s key questions – why it had taken more than four hours for a specialist firearms team to arrive at Scotia Road, in Tulse Hill, south London, where De Menezes lived in the same block of flats as a terror suspect.

    “We have only a limited number of specialist firearms teams available [which are covert] … if we had put it in Scotia Road, it would not have been available anywhere else,” he told the assembly.

    He said the police were constantly balancing the “acceptable risks” to the public, themselves and suspects in their operations.

    The assembly’s Tory group leader, Richard Barnes, said “very grave questions” had arisen over the Met commissioner’s leadership and judgment.

    Last night senior Labour, Liberal Democrats and Conservatives all told the Guardian that he would lose a vote of confidence.

    The Liberal Democrats and Tories have decided to vote together against the commissioner. Together, they have 14 out of the 25 assembly seats, with seven being held by Labour, which backs Sir Ian.

    The assembly does not have the power to remove the commissioner, but losing the vote would be symbolic and embarrassing for the commissioner.

    Last Thursday, the Met was convicted of breaching health and safety laws and failing in its duty of care to 27-year-old De Menezes, who was shot dead in July 2005.

    Today’s assembly meeting comes just 24 hours before the publication of an official Independent Police Complaints Commission report, which is expected to be highly critical of the Met over the shooting.

    He has the public support of Downing Street and the Home Office, and close allies are watching closely to see whether that backing withstands what is expected to be another tough 48 hours for him.

    The assembly vote will put pressure on the Metropolitan police authority, which is expected to hold an emergency meeting about Sir Ian’s future within the next fortnight. It and the Home Office have the formal power to remove the commissioner.

    Despite Sir Ian’s hopes of drawing a line under the shooting after Stockwell One is published, an inquest due to take place next year will look into why the firearms officers pulled the trigger.

    The Met could also face a private prosecution by the De Menezes family.

    Inquest finds army at fault for Iraq bomb death

    0

    David Batty and agencies
    Guardian Unlimited

    Fusilier Gordon Gentle
    Fusilier Gordon Gentle, who was killed on patrol in Basra on June 28, 2004. Photograph: MoD Crown Copyright/PA Wire
     

    A coroner today condemned the Ministry of Defence for obstructing inquests into the deaths of British soldiers in Iraq.The damning criticism by Selena Lynch, assistant deputy coroner for Oxfordshire, came as she ruled that army logistics failures led to the unlawful killing of 19-year-old soldier Gordon Gentle in a roadside bomb attack in Iraq.

    Ms Lynch said it had taken three years to conclude her investigation due to the MoD’s “illogical” policy of disclosure in investigations of soldiers’ deaths in Iraq.

    Ms Lynch said bomb-disabling equipment that could have saved Gentle’s life when his Land Rover was attacked had not been supplied to his regiment, the Royal Highland Fusiliers (RHF).

    She said: “It is more likely than not that the bomb would not have detonated had Element B [a bomb jamming kit] been fitted.”

    Electronic counter-measures (ECMs), to be fitted to vehicles, were available for collection by the Royal Fusiliers on June 16, two weeks before Gentle’s death on June 28 2004.

    But a communications breakdown meant the kit was not collected until after he was killed.

    The coroner said the army’s in-theatre supply chain “appeared chaotic and lacking in clarity”.

    Ms Lynch said she had been obstructed in her efforts to tackle a backlog of military inquests, including Gentle’s, because of problems getting information from the military.

    She said: “The MoD have a policy of disclosure that I would argue is both illogical and based on faulty points of law.”

    The coroner said her investigation into Gentle’s death had been one of her first priorities when she was appointed but it had taken three years to complete due to the MoD’s attitude.

    “Disclosure to the family has been unnecessarily limited,” said Ms Lynch.

    She complained that all the names of people mentioned in documents provided by the MoD had been blacked out and replaced with a code. But a key to the code was not provided until a week before the inquest.

    She said: “This caused an enormous amount of wasted effort and money.”

    Following the verdict, the dead soldier’s mother, Rose, said: “Justice has been done. The truth has come out.

    “I fought for that. I said I wouldn’t give up and I didn’t. My son should be here today. They have deprived me of a beautiful son and deprived two sisters of their brother.

    “I’m proud of Gordon but I am disgusted at the way he was treated.

    “They say when you join the army, it’s a brilliant career. At the same time, you should be looked after.”

    An MoD spokesman said: “Our thoughts and sympathies remain with the family, friends and colleagues of Fusilier Gordon Gentle at this difficult time.

    “We were immensely saddened at his loss through an attack by insurgents in Basra in June 2004 and we deeply regret the series of events that contributed to it.”

    VIDEO: Brian Haw – In his own words

    By Mick Meaney
    RINF Alternative News

    Brian Haw is an international symbol of peace. Since 2nd June 2001 Brian has been protesting in Parliament Square, London.

    We present a rare look at Brian Haw, in his own words as he speaks about the criminal attacks on the innocent for profit including the world wide illegal wars, 9/11, his spirituality and his personal life before the 24/7 protest began.

    Initially he was campaigning against the economic sanctions on Iraq and the bombing of the country by the US and UK. After 11 September 2001, he widened his focus, directing his messages of peace against the ‘war on terror’, the terror that the US and UK have inflicted on Afghanistan and Iraq. He protests on behalf of those innocent people who suffer and die in other countries, as our governments seek to further their own economic, military, political and strategic interests around the world.

    Please support Brian http://www.parliament-square.org.uk/donate.htm (his campaign is dependant on our support and without it he cannot continue).

    Punishing Gaza

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    On September 20, Haaretz reported: “The security cabinet voted unanimously yesterday to increase sanctions against the Hamas-run Gaza Strip (and declare) the region a ‘hostile entity.’ ” A further statement read: “We will reduce the amount of megawattage we provide to the Strip, and Hamas will have to decide whether to provide electricity to hospitals or weapons lathes.” Israeli officials also decided to punish Gazans by restricting:

    — fuel as well as electricity from Israel to Gaza;

    — the passage of goods and people through border crossings that are already severely restricted; and

    — visits to prisoners even further than how limited they are already.

    An increased monitoring of funds was also announced as well as stating border crossings would be closed for up to 48 hours in response to (crude small homemade) Qassam rocket fire, and that Israel would supply nothing further to Gaza residents “except for (whatever Israel considers) humanitarian needs.” Hamas’ response was swift and sharp. Spokesman Fawzi Barhoum called the cabinet’s decision and sanctions a “declaration of war” and said “we must unite the ranks to come together in the conflict with the cruel enemy….This is another attempt to force us to surrender (our sovereignty).”

    At first, the world community hardly blinked with UN Secretary-General Ban Ki-Moon acting as irresponsibly as his predecessor. He urged Israel to reconsider its decision but denounced Hamas for its “continued indiscriminate rocket fire….into Israel (and that he) understand(s) Israel’s security concerns over this matter.” Nothing in his statement mentioned Israel’s daily attacks and killings of Palestinians or the deepening humanitarian crisis in Gaza after Israel closed its borders last June, isolated the Territory from the outside world, and cut off most essential supplies and services to its people.

    Karen Koning-Abu Zayd is the UN Relief and Works Agency (UNRWA) Commissioner-General for Palestine Refugees. On October 30, she showed more concern than her boss by saying Israel’s decision to cut fuel and electricity to Gaza violates international law. She noted Israel’s concern, but stressed “how can you want to punish people, all of them in Gaza (as) most of them….are not behind these activities….if you don’t have electricity, you don’t have water, you probably don’t have food.” This action will have a “very serious” effect on the population.

    Two other UN officials also went public with their criticisms. UN Special Rapporteur on the Right to Food, Jean Ziegler was one of them. He called on the European Commission to suspend commercial relations with Israel until it stops preventing Palestinians from receiving food without restrictions. He reported to the General Assembly that 22% of Palestinian children already suffer from malnutrition because they lack access to food.

    UN Special Rapporteur on the Occupied Palestinian Territories, John Dugard, also weighed in. He called on State Members in their capacity as High Contracting Parties to the Fourth Geneva Convention. He asked them to ensure Israel complies with its provisions regarding the protection of civilians in times of war. One of them under article 54 states: “Starvation of civilians as a method of warfare is prohibited,” as well as “attack(ing), remov(ing), or render(ing) useless objects indispensable to the survival of the civilian population such as foodstuffs, agricultural areas (for their production), crops, livestock, drinking water installations and supplies and irrigation works…. ” Article 55 then obligates an occupying power to ensure “the food and medical supplies of the population.”

    Swiss Agency for Development and Cooperation (SDC) chief Walter Fust also expressed alarm after a recent Gaza visit. He called conditions “untenable” and “shocking” with 30% of children (in his judgment) malnourished and hospitals and health centers in a precarious state.

    Things then changed on October 30. Haaretz reported Israel’s “High Court of Justice ordered the state to respond within five days to a petition submitted by dozens of human rights groups (10 of them according to other reports) to halt its (Gaza fuel and electricity) cutoff,” but it stopped short of banning the action. Justices may have been concerned after the European Union (EU) criticized Israel’s move on October 29 calling it an act of “collective punishment.” EU commissioner for external relations, Benita Ferraro-Waldner, said she was “very concerned” about the decision, that it’s not a solution, and that the EU doesn’t “want the population to suffer.”

    It’s hard knowing if this signals change or whether to take the commissioner’s concern seriously. The European community, along with Israel and the US, denounced Hamas’ democratic election in January, 2006 as the legitimate Palestinian government. It’s response ever since was to end all outside aid and impose crushing sanctions and an economic embargo on the Territories as well as politically isolate the new Hamas government.

    The results were devastating. Even before the latest crisis, Gaza’s industrial production had fallen 90% and its agricultural output was half its pre-2007 level. In addition, nearly all construction had stopped, unemployment is around 80%, and the level of poverty is shocking based on World Bank data showing over 80% of Gazans live on less than $2.40 a day. Further, the Palestinian Al Huq association of jurists called Israel’s summer, 2005 Gaza disengagement fraudulent as “Israel retains full control of the Gaza Strip’s land borders, population registry, airspace and territorial sea,” and the IDF invades the Territory at will.

    The EU was silent about this and Israel’s overall repressive rule, land expropriations, daily incursions, and regular attacks and killings in the Territories. It was unconcerned about the internal violence on Gaza streets last spring and gave tacit support to anti-Hamas US and Israeli-armed Fatah (Protective Security Force) paramilitary death squads led by warlord Mohammed Dahlan. It ignored Hamas’ months-long unilateral cease-fire, its ending all suicide bombings, its call for peace, and its willingness to recognize the Jewish state if Israel accepts and recognizes a Palestinian one.

    Its founder, Sheikh Ahmed Yassin said at the time Hamas would end its struggle “if the Zionists ended its occupation of Palestinian territories and stopped killing Palestinian women, children and innocent civilians.” Israel and the West rejected the offer and all good faith efforts. They opted instead to punish Palestinians collectively and deny them their legitimate rights.

    After Hamas defeated Fatah paramilitaries, the EU backed Mahmoud Abbas’ quisling West Bank government. It ignored Gaza’s punishing isolation and Oxfam Great Britain’s grim warning of the “increasing desperation of Gazans as shortages of fuel, water and food are reported.” It failed to denounce Israel and the US for creating the crisis affecting 1.5 million people. It stood allied instead with Washington and the Olmert government and did so ever since. The same is true of the UN. It’s hard thinking that’s changed, and it’ll take more than occasional high-sounding comments from a few officials to prove it.

    In the meantime, Israel began reducing fuel supplies on October 28, and Gaza’s deputy Petroleum Authority director, Ahmed Ali, said diesel fuel and gasoline deliveries were 30% lower than usual. He then added: “This is a serious warning (and) the people of Gaza….are now in danger. The hospitals, water pumping station and sewage will be affected by the lack of fuel.” Israel’s Dor Alon energy company confirmed the reduction, and the Defense Ministry said the Sufa crossing used for transporting fuel to Gaza was closed.

    On October 25, Defense Minister Ehud Barak ordered the phased cutoff, and his deputy, Matan Vilnai, said “We will dramatically reduce the flow of electricity (by about two-thirds) from Israel over several weeks” to let Gaza supply its own electricity that’s impossible as Israel knows. He added this measure is part of Israel’s “deeper, broader disengagement.” He neglected to say it’s an illegal act of collective punishment as Gaza relies on Israel for all its fuel (that includes diesel, gasoline and natural gas) and most of its electricity.

    The Palestinian Center for Human Rights reported Gaza needs over 220 megawatts of electricity and consumes about 200 megawatts, 60% of which is bought from Israel. The Gaza Electricity Generation Plant supplies 65 megawatts and another 17 megawatts are bought from Egypt. When Israel directly controlled the Strip, it let Gazans establish enough electrical capacity for only 38% of their needs. Then during “Operation Summer Rain” in June, 2006, the IDF assaulted the Territory, bombed its only electrical power plant, and destroyed its main transformers with missiles. Months of rebuilding restored less than two-thirds of its original 100 megawatt capacity and made the area mostly dependent on Israel for supply.

    After declaring Gaza a “hostile entity” on September 19, that’s now in jeopardy unless Israel reverses its stance and reconsiders other collective punishment measures as well. Currently, its authority allows only nine basic materials to enter the Territory. That hit local markets hard, and most ran out of many items causing sharp price rises up to 500% in some cases. Items banned include some medicines, furniture, electrical appliances, cows and cigarettes while others restricted are fruits, milk and other dairy products.

    Then there’s the energy plan. It’s to begin cutting electricity for 15 minutes, then a half hour with daily increases as long as the punitive measure remains in effect that doesn’t apply to hospitals and other “vital installations,” Vilnai said. Things are now on hold, however, after Attorney General Menachem Mazuz temporarily halted the electricity cutoff following a “debate” in his office on October 29. He was apparently acting on UN and EU comments as well as his own High Court’s order to respond to a petition by 10 human rights organizations in five days to stop this punitive action. Mazuz said Israel had a right to sever economic and commercial ties with Gaza, but its government is responsible for the Territory and more “research” was needed before cutting off electricity. What he meant, of course, is he’ll await a High Court ruling and then act.

    Haaretz reported on November 3 that “State Prosecution on (November 2) defended the government’s decision (to cut fuel and electricity in a letter to the High Court) claiming it is not a form of collective punishment.” It said that the decision was appropriate and gave the same tired reasons it often uses to justify its harshest actions. Defense Minister Ehud Barak agreed. In a November 4 Jerusalem meeting with Condoleezza Rice, he assured the Secretary that “The sanctions (won’t) cause a humanitarian crisis” without further elaboration.

    Israel’s infrastructure minister, Binyamin Ben-Eliezer, agrees as well and feels these measures are needed and are a final attempt to avoid a military action some observers see coming. Israel’s Gaza commander, General Moshe Tamir, already admits to almost nightly incursions into the Territory and practically signaled a planned assault.

    Haaretz also reported on October 30 that Israel’s Defense Forces (IDF) conducted their largest military drill in the north Galilee region since the 2006 Lebanon war. It ran four days and involved ground, air and naval forces as well as intelligence and S4 units. The paper noted a similar exercise preceded the Lebanon war so it happening now is ominous.

    The Jerusalem Post echoed that sentiment on October 31. It quoted Defense Minister Ehud Barak saying a large-scale IDF operation against “Palestinian rocket squads” was drawing near, and “the time is approaching when we’ll have to undertake a broad operation in Gaza.” The report mentioned Gaza commander Tamir saying Hamas was “building an army” and had smuggled in unprecedented capabilities. Israeli Shin Bet Security Agency chief Yuval Diskin claimed Hamas had accumulated over 112 tons of explosives, and Tamir signaled Israel is prepared to act as a result. The Jerusalem Post earlier quoted IDF Southern Command chief General Yoav Galant saying he’s been “pushing for a massive operation for the past year” and now may be close to getting one.

    Hamas responded to this growing threat on November 1. It called on all Palestinian resistance factions to declare a high state of alert in anticipation of a large-scale Israeli incursion into the Territory. It issued a statement saying: “Hamas is well-prepared to engage in a battle with the Israeli army, once (Gaza) is invaded, as Hamas is confident of victory, given its strong trust in God.”

    A major IDF assault may be imminent as Israel continues attacking civilians in Gaza and the West Bank daily. The Palestinian Centre for Human Rights report for the last week of October said 15 Palestinians were killed, 29 others wounded, and 78 more arrested. In addition, during the seven day period, IDF forces made 49 hostile incursions into the Territories, and for the past 16 months maintained a devastating siege on the population.

    Washington’s Upcoming Annapolis Peace Offensive

    Middle East observers know what most honest ones will admit. The intermittent, now revived “peace process” is merely pretense head fake. It’s more theater than substance or a serious effort to resolve this long-running conflict, and look at the proof:

    — daily IDF incursions, attacks and killings in the Territories;

    — continued land expropriations;

    — crop destruction and agricultural restrictions;

    — home demolitions;

    — restricted movement through hundreds of checkpoints as well as curfews and border and other closures any time for any reason;

    — building permit restrictions and construction prohibitions;

    — denial of essential services; and

    — other politically motivated daily repression and “matrix of control” harassment.

    This all continues without letup with the full acquiescence and support of the West plus billions in annual aid from Washington.

    Furthermore, Hamas is barred from the peace process, and without its participation there can be none. Its exclusion and the desperate conditions in the Territories expose the glaring hypocrisy overhanging the staged affair. Just like the fraudulent “road map,” this latest incarnation is going nowhere with more proof on November 4 from Israeli Foreign Minister Tzipi Livni. She told Secretary Rice Israel’s security comes first, and “only then (can there be) a Palestinian state.”

    Electronic Intifada editor Ali Abunimah compares the process to “one of those big budget Broadway extravaganzas; they go on for years (and) with each revival the cast changes,” but the outcome is always the same as intended.

    Abunimah notes the “latest revival” has Condoleezza Rice in a lead role play-acting to end the long-running conflict. George Bush is on stage as well trying to cast off his image as a warmonger and enabler of “Israeli colonization” and now pretends to want peace “with an eye on his legacy.”

    And so it goes with the other key actors in this melodrama pretending the process is real – quisling Palestinian president Mahmoud Abbas who agreed to let Washington act as a “neutral arbitrator,” Israeli prime minister Ehud Olmert who jumped on the idea, and “special guest star” and reinvented war criminal Tony Blair in his new role as Middle East peace envoy. Last June he ended a failed 10 year run as UK prime minister when his audience booed him off the stage. He’s been practically invisible since but will resurface in Annapolis later in November once a firm date is announced.

    Abunimah notes how reality at times intervenes. It did in mid-October after Abbas’ representatives met with Israeli counterparts to arrange a “declaration of principles” for the Annapolis meeting that are still unresolved. The IDF expropriated 300 more acres of Palestinian land near “occupied East Jerusalem (to expand the huge) Jewish-only settlements (bisecting) the West Bank (that) render a contiguous Palestinian state impossible.”

    Land seizures have been continuous since the 1993 Oslo Accords. For the past 14 years, Israel expropriated an area the size of Washington, DC for Jewish-only development knowing none of the “peace process” participants would object. It’s been so extreme that noted Israeli historian Ilan Pappe believes the settlements, army bases, roads and separation wall will let Israel annex almost half the West Bank by 2010 and dispossess Palestinians now living there.

    And now Abunimah explains “Rice feigns (gallingly hypocritical) frustration saying: “Frankly it is time for the establishment of a Palestinian state.” She knows Israel won’t allow one nor will Palestinians accept it under the current bantustan configuration and the condition Pappe describes.

    Nor is one possible given the power of extremist elements in the Israeli government led by proto-fascist Deputy Prime Minister Avigdor Lieberman. Haaretz reported he insists any Israeli-Palestinian conflict resolution “include Israel’s Arab citizens (on) the basis (of) a land swap and population transfer.” He means no peace is possible unless 1.4 million Israeli Arab citizens are ethnically cleansed from the country. Nor will he allow core Palestinian issues to be discussed in Annapolis (or elsewhere) like “borders, settlements and the (right of return for) Palestinian refugees expelled by Israel.”

    And the beat goes on. Life in occupied Palestine is intolerable and worsening as the latest sham peace extravaganza is heading to Annapolis once its “opening night” is announced with fanfare and phoniness.

    A different sort of event will take place in London November 17 and 18 hosted by the London Middle East Institute and organized by the London One State Group and SOAS Palestine Society at London University. It’s called “Challenging the Boundaries: A Single State in Palestine/Israel.” It will include panel discussions and individual speakers featuring noted participants like author and Middle East expert Gilbert Achcar, Electronic Intifada editor Ali Abunimah, noted author Nur Masalha, and Israeli historian and expert on Israel and Zionism Ilan Pappe who’s now teaching at the UK University of
    Exeter. The conference is about alternatives to a two-state paradigm and will advance ideas of a one-state vision that can become a workable political agenda for what seems to be the only credible way forward.

    In another development, Al-Ahram Weekly reports Hamas will air its views at a “national conference” in Damascus that will coincide with Annapolis. Other Palestinian factions will also attend including the Popular Front for the Liberation of Palestine (PFLP) in a significant break with Fatah. Participating as well are the Damascas-based PFLP-General Command, the Islamic Jihad organization and senior Fatah members Farouk Al-Qaddumi and Hani Al-Hassan in a show of protest against “Abbas’ line” and “his subservience to America and Israel.” In addition to organized groups, hundreds of Palestinian and Arab intellectuals may attend that will add credibility to the event.

    Conference organizers state they wish to reassert their opposition to “the attempted liquidation of the Palestinian cause” with special emphasis on “the right of return of five million (or more) Palestinian refugees.” They also intend “not to give political cover to US-Israeli schemes to terminate the Palestinian cause in Annapolis (that is) hypocritical (and) insincere.” And they further state: “The PLO leadership in Ramallah no longer represents the Palestinian people (because) it is a prisoner of the Israeli occupation and has lost whatever semblance of independence and free will it may once have had.” In addition, “the PLO leadership (lacks legitimacy as it’s) unelected, undemocratic and anachronistic.”

    Hamas also revealed plans to follow Damascus with meetings in Gaza and the West Bank to further highlight what Hamas and others call “this mockery” of a US-Israeli-Abbas effort to compromise or scrap issues vital to the Palestinian people like the right of return and status of Jerusalem. Ideas to be discussed include selecting “alternative and parallel national bodies” to counter Fatah’s disregard for “the Palestinian national consensus.” Under consideration is a new National Council and Executive Committee in direct opposition to Abbas who (along with Secretary Rice) tried unsuccessfully to abort Hamas’ initiative. Little is expected from Annapolis, and some believe that may trigger a third Intifada and swing momentum to Hamas.

    Shin Bet’s Yuval Diskin thinks not but others disagree. Oslo came out of the first Intifada, and Israel’s Gaza disengagement followed the second one. Nothing is off the table this time. Stay closely tuned.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Mondays at noon US central time.

    War Profiteering Hitting New Records

    Arms makers winning war on terrorism

    Frank Walker

    ARMS manufacturers are making record profits from the war on terrorism and unprecedented spending on weapons programs.

    The massive earnings have drawn condemnation from Australian defence experts, who say expensive weapons such as jet fighters, warships and satellites are not the way to combat terrorism.

    The world’s biggest arms maker, Lockheed Martin in the US, maker of fighter jets including the F-35 Joint Strike Fighter, which Australia is buying, announced last week it had increased third-quarter profits by 22 per cent to $US11.1 billion ($12.1 billion).

    Northrop Grumman, maker of aircraft carriers, submarines and bombers, increased profits 62 per cent to $US489 million.

    At General Dynamics, maker of the Abrams tank, which Australia has just bought, profits climbed 24 per cent to $US544 million.

    Britain’s BAE said its profits were up 27 per cent to £657 million ($1.23 billion).

    In Australia profits for the Government-owned naval ship and submarine builder ASC rose 60 per cent last year to $30 million. The company was set up to build the Collins class submarines and is involved in the $8 billion air warfare destroyer project.

    Hugh White, professor of strategic studies at the Australian National University, said the big-ticket weapons were designed to contain China, not combat terrorism.

    “They don’t admit to it. They sell it to the people as a response to terrorism, but that is not what they are doing,” Professor White said.

    Professor White said Australia’s multibillion-dollar defence purchases such as the Abrams tanks, warships, and Globemaster transport planes would be part of any US military operation in the Middle East or against China.

    Professor Kevin Clements, director of the Australian Centre for Peace and Conflict Studies at the University of Queensland, said the war on terrorism was a front to keep up arms spending to maintain the US’s ability to fight a wars on three fronts – Asia, the Middle East and Europe.

    This is one dangerous man: it’s George Bush with brains

    0

    New York’s former mayor Rudy Giuliani is living up to his reputation as someone who will do and say anything for power

    Michael Tomasky in Washington
    The Guardian

    People of Britain: congratulations are in order. You have now joined ferret owners, sidewalk artists, hot dog vendors, publicly funded attorneys for poor people, low-income community college students, museum curators, a couple of innocent black men shot dead by the police, the sections of the New York City charter governing rules of succession to the mayoralty and, of course, Hillary Clinton, as objects of Rudy Giuliani’s demagoguery and wrath.

    You may by now have heard the story. In a radio ad that his campaign prepared for New Hampshire voters, Giuliani tells listeners that he was diagnosed with prostate cancer in 2000 and goes on to say: “My chance of surviving cancer – and thank God I was cured of it – in the United States: 82%. My chances of surviving prostate cancer in England: only 44% under socialised medicine.”

    The numbers are false. The actual five-year survival rate in Britain is 74%, which is still lower than America’s, but obviously high enough for the figure not to have constituted fodder for a campaign commercial. (Even the remaining, much smaller difference, is largely explained by more widespread screening in the US, which catches many more incidents of prostate cancer that are non-lethal).

    It turned out that Giuliani’s numbers were from a seven-year-old article in a conservative policy journal. The article was written by his own healthcare policy adviser, who admitted that his comparison was a “crude” interpretation of a study by a respected health policy group. The group, in turn, said the article’s author had grossly misused its numbers.

    That’s about as red-handed as anyone in politics gets caught these days. But when asked if the campaign would continue to use the figure, a Giuliani spokeswoman said, “Yes, we will.”

    I know the form all too well. I covered Giuliani for a dozen years in New York (note to angry American rightwingers preparing to email me a warning to keep my foreign nose out of their business: I’m as American as a Ford F-150).

    The man lies with staggering impunity. But here’s the thing: he does it with such conviction and such seeming authority that people who are not inclined to study the matter will believe him – will in fact be utterly convinced that Giuliani is speaking the gospel truth, and they will prove almost impossible to shake from this conviction.

    Giuliani’s hypocrisy with regard to this ad doesn’t end with the fake statistics. As Joe Conason noted on www.Salon.com, Giuliani was at the time of his treatment the mayor of New York and enrolled in a nonprofit health maintenance organisation for government employees – that is, mini-socialised medicine. And as Ezra Klein noted on Comment is free, the treatment that saved Giuliani was developed in Denmark – which, as Klein drolly notes, “is both in Europe and has a universal healthcare system”.

    But none of this will stop Giuliani. He will say and do anything he feels he needs to say and do to get power.

    Newspapers write that he was “liberal” on social issues in his mayoral days, as if his positions on abortion and immigration were matters of conviction. Nonsense. He took the positions he needed to take to be elected in an overwhelmingly Democratic city. (Although to grant him a speck of humanity, I’d guess that his pro-gay rights views were more or less genuine: anyone living in the city gets to know many gay people.)

    And now he is saying and doing whatever he needs to say and do to get millions of rightwing Americans to support him. He recently told a meeting of social conservatives that his reliance on God “is at the core of who I am”. As mayor he was known to attend mass almost never, he obviously cheated serially on the wife (wife No 2) he married in the Catholic church, and the only occasions on which I can remember him invoking God when he was mayor were the two times he was forced to say “so help me God” in taking the oath of office.

    But forward he will charge, telling more lies with even more impunity. And immunity, because in a culture where a sense of history is largely limited to remembering certain stirring television images, he will for the most part get away with it, confident in the knowledge that the main thing most Americans will ever recall about him is the film clip of him running from the rubble of the World Trade Centre on September 11. A far smaller percentage will know that the reason he had run was because he had catastrophically decided to place his emergency command centre in the tower complex – the only building in New York that had previously been the target of a major terrorist attack.

    And by the way: shame on Gordon Brown for inviting him to No 10 in September. Yes, there’s a long tradition of presidents and prime ministers welcoming party standard-bearers from across the pond. But Giuliani isn’t yet that. Brown had no business giving him the kind of special benefit that an audience with a prime minister bestows.

    Brown and all of Britain will be better off the sooner they figure this out: Giuliani is a dangerous man. George Bush with brains. Dick Cheney with better aim. Consider yourself warned.

    · Michael Tomasky is the editor of Guardian America michael.tomasky@guardian.co.uk

    Brown moots register for terrorists, DNA rights for MI5

    0

    By John Lettice

    Anti-terrorism proposals outlined by the Government today will include a sex-offenders style register for those convicted of terrorism offences, and will allow MI5 to access the UK’s large and fast-growing DNA database. These measures come on top of the anticipated bid to increase the length of pre-charge questioning time for terror suspects, which will also be included in the Counter-terrorism Bill.

    This is as yet to be published, and backgrounders so far fail to specify what the Government intends to increase questioning time to, from its current already-bracing 28 days. Details of other aspects of the Bill are similarly hazy.

    The MI5 access to the DNA database is described as a “minor legislative amendment”, intended to allow MI5 to check DNA samples it collects against the national database, but the change adds a potentially powerful weapon to the arsenal of an organisation engaged in extensive surveillance activities.

    And exponentially growing ones at that. In one of those coincidences we’ve come to expect from the current regime, the new Number Two of MI5, Jonathan Evans,* made his first public speech yesterday, to the Society of Editors. Evans upped his predecessor’s estimate of there being 1,600 terrorist threats in the UK to 2,000, then doubled it to 4,000 for good measure. He only suspects there’s a total of 4,000, which must mean the 2,000 are merely suspected of being suspects, or just suspected of being.

    The ‘terror-offenders register’ is meanwhile to be populated by “notification orders”. Those convicted of terrorist offences would be required to keep police informed of their current address, and of addresses where he or she is to stay for five nights or over. Offences now classed as terrorism-related include incitement, encouragement, possession of information and providing instruction, with linking to sites and/or possession of widely-available files being sufficient to prove these. So the numbers on the terror register could potentially grow quite rapidly, albeit not for another six years or more.

    This register could possibly also be applied to the subjects of control orders; these have been subject to repeated legal challenge, and have also proved embarrassingly unenforceable whenever any of the victims actually decides to escape. Look ma, no tags. That would of course mean the register covering suspects alongside the convicted, but that’s what control orders currently cover anyway. Details of what precisely the Government intends to do will however have to wait until the Bill is published. ®

    Spookwatch: We think it worth pointing out that despite the claims in Evans’ speech of an extensive and pervasive al-Qaeda directed campaign against the UK, not a single one of the terrorism prosecutions (Evans claims 200 scalps here) has produced one single proven and public link to a single controlling al-Qaeda intelligence, even a quite minor one. We accept that MI5 could have information that it is unable to disclose, but all of the time? That is suspicious, and becomes more so as the trials roll on.

    And we shouldn’t let an alleged Evans’ biographical update pass unnoticed. Effectively, it’s a denial. Former IRA informer Kevin Fulton claims that Evans was “Bob”, his controller. Bob, says Fulton, helped him go to the US in order to buy infra-red controllers for IRA bombs. These would be sabotaged so that the IRA’s bombs wouldn’t go off. So long as the IRA didn’t fix them first. According to the Times, however, the bio update is intended to rule this out, and the paper reports that although security sources confirm he worked on Irish counter-terrorism, he has “never lived or served in Northern Ireland.” The text of the bio currently on the MI5 site still leaves plenty of space for unorthodox covert activities to be fitted in, but we trust it will be updated.

    Rights group says U.S. trial rules unfair

    0

    Human Rights Watch said Tuesday it considers the U.S. military commission rules for the trial of a Canadian youth to be grossly unfair.

    The rights group said ad hoc rules for the trial of Omar Ahmed Khadr, 21, who has been held in the U.S. prison in Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, since he was 15, are unfair and the Canadian’s trial should be in federal court.

    “Once again, the military commissions are concocting rules that are fundamentally unfair,” said Jennifer Daskal, senior counter-terrorism counsel at Human Rights Watch. “It’s time for the Bush administration to recognize that its legal experiment has failed.”

    A military judge is set to rule Thursday on whether Khadr, who is charged with killing a U.S. soldier during an Afghanistan firefight in 2002, qualifies as an “unlawful enemy combatant” who can be tried via military commissions. The judge has barred Khadr from citing international, constitutional or criminal law in challenging the designation.

    “The possibility that a judge would try to determine combatant status without any reference to international law is shocking,” said Daskal. “Even the military commissions appeals court recognized the importance of consulting the Geneva Conventions and other international law.”

    Government dismisses reports of ID cards review

    0

    By Tash Shifrin

    Downing Street has denied reports that the prime minister is planning a technical review of the controversial £5.4bn ID cards scheme.

    report in the Guardian newspaper said “a number of ministerial sources” had confirmed that Gordon Brown was concerned about the technology behind the ID cards scheme and had demanded a review — a move that could delay the programme.

    But a Number 10 spokesperson denied the reports, saying: “There is no change in our policy.”

    Last month, the Identity and Passport Service announced a shortlist of eight key suppliers for the scheme. It has now entered a period of competitive dialogue, which as the next stage of selecting a supplier.

    IPS commercial director Bill Crothers has said potential bidders would be expected to raise critical points about the technical feasibility of the scheme during the dialogue process.

    But the government has consistently refused to release details of gateway reviews of the ID cards scheme carried out by the Office of Government Commerce. Information commissioner Richard Thomas ordered the release of the documents — and was backed by the information tribunal — but the government has filed a High Court appeal against the tribunal’s ruling.

    Gordon Brown did announce a review of data sharing by public and private sector bodies in a speech focusing on civil liberties last month that acknowledged the “continuing debate about ID cards”.

    Loose Change Final Cut — UK Preview

    0

    By Mick Meaney
    RINF Alternative News

    Saturday, 3rd November, 2007, saw the British preview screening of the much anticipated 9/11 truth blockbuster, ‘Loose Change Final Cut’.

    Before the screening began, Tim Sparke, executive producer of Loose Change 3, gave us a brief thank you and intro, he welcomed us by saying: “By the end of this, you’re going to be knackered!”.

    And he wasn’t wrong. Mr Sparke also stayed around afterwards to answer questions.

    He clearly stated that all sources in the film were taken from mainstream media, which makes it all the more unbelievable that the propitiators are able to get away with such a crime. When asked how much the film cost to produce, he said “close to $1 million dollars”, but added “we could have made it more cinematic”.

    Mr Sparke also said: “Obviously we would like to cover our costs but we plan to donate some of the profit to those suffering with health problems as a result of working at Ground Zero”. A noble gesture indeed.

    David Ray Griffin had his part to play in the latest and possibly last offering from the Loose Change team. Professor Griffin ‘fact checked’ the film. It also appears that David Ray Griffin is being considered for a Nobel Peace Prize nomination.

    However, Charlie Sheen, as reported earlier this year, did not provide narration.

    A pleasant surprise was the amount of new footage contained in the film; they have created an entirely new production from the ground up and resisted the temptation to regurgitate clips from Loose Change 1 and 2.

    Staying solely in reality and using only credible information, ‘Loose Change Final Cut’ does not speculate or make wild accusations. It’s a very balanced and fair look at the horrific events of September 11th 2001. It does not attempt to answer all the questions and does not provide some of the more obvious testimonies which would have been expected, but it leaves plenty of room for people to do their own research and uncover many facts not presented in the film. It is not a guide to 9/11 truth and does not claim to be.

    What it does provide is a highly engaging 2 hours that works for both 9/11 truth novices and the more experienced who have studied the evidence for years.

    Lasting around 2 hours and 20 minutes, ‘Loose Change Final Cut’ opens with scenes of 9/11 truth protesters in New York City and features many mainstream news clips of Jeremy Paxman and the like.

    Next we are informed of the truth about Bin Laden, his family connections to the Bush family, how he has never claimed responsibility for the attacks, how he was in fact reported dead before 9/11 and the propaganda war waged against him.

    Then the hijackers are called into question, how their passports and IDs survived the wreckage when little else did.

    The ISI, Able Danger, Cynthia McKinney, the intelligence failures, war games, drills etc all feature in the first half of this marathon truth production.

    The information in this film is comprehensive. It would be impossible for me to go through point by point each part of the film without creating pages and pages worth of text.

    Obviously the Pentagon attack is called into question, the lack of video evidence and eyewitness statements are touched upon. How Flight 77 was unusually only 30% full and most of the passengers were government employees. We also see some of the flight recorder data which proves without a doubt, there has been a cover up.

    Next we look at the Twin Towers, the structure which was designed to withstand multiple plane crashes, the eyewitness who saw and heard explosions, steal projectiles embedded into surrounding buildings — only made possible with a great amount of force. We see the fires of WTC 7 and the “will full ignorance” of NIST.

    We see the aftermath of 9/11, the health affected by those working on Ground Zero and how the White House censored and changed EPA warnings, resulting in more needless deaths.

    Then Shanksville is the focus, the lack of debris and the possibility of a shoot down.

    Next we go back to WTC 7 and the BBC’s claim that it fell 20 minutes before it did. Then the film begins to round things up with a look at the 9/11 Commission, who was involved in compiling the report, their wider roles and their interest in and profiteering from an attack on America such as 9/11.

    Lastly the national debt is covered and how it has dramatically increased for no apparent reason.

    A rapturous applause filled the room as the closing credits rolled. I took the time to speak to some of the audience afterwards, Joseph Skelton, one of the UK’s most active campaigners and webmaster of cremationofcare.com has this to say:

    “It was good that the film does not cover ‘old ground’ such as the Larry Silverstein ‘Pull it’ comments and the testimony of William Rodriguez. Anyone new to the subject will inevitably find these important pieces of the 9/11 literature in other great films that are out there. The Final Edition film sticks mainly to the factors such as Able Danger, the backgrounds to the 9/11 Commission Report, the wide debris field left at the crash site of Flight 93 and so on.

    “It was also good to see the coverage of the EPA’s lies to the rescue workers when they told them that the air was safe to breathe after the three WTC collapses. This is an issue often sidelined in other films. Loose Change Final Edition includes an interview with John Feal of the Feal Good Foundation (fealgoodfoundation.com) and many other citizens, victims of 9/11 who were betrayed by their government.”

    In all, would I recommend you to see this film? Without a doubt.

    Does it answer all our questions? Absolutely not, but it’s not designed to.

    A lot of 9/11 truth films either speak to those who are questioning the official version for the first time, or to those who have long been studying the evidence. ‘Loose Change Final Cut’ strikes a rare balance between the two and provides a highly informative film no matter what your experience level is.

    ‘Loose Change Final Cut’ is 2 hours of your time well spent.

    So, what actually is Waterboarding?

    0

    By J A Blacker MSc IMI,  Science Correspondent
    RINF Alternative News

    As any good terrorist state knows all too well, the art of torture is to extract information without actually killing the victim until they spill their guts.

    Indeed, waterboarding has been deemed legal interrogation method by the BUSH CIA and US justice department, however the US military have such practices outlawed.

    So, what actually is Waterboarding?

    A brief history of waterboarding (controlled drowning & suffocation):

    Waterboarding is a torture method – used by the Bush administration – which drowns victims in a controlled way.

    The news media calls it “simulated” drowning, but it is in fact drowning that is, hopefully, interrupted before the victim dies. This is not always the case and some victims have died.

    * It appears to have been invented during the Spanish Inquisition.

    * The Khmer Rouge who killed 1.5 million people “improved” the method by covering the victims’ faces with towels of cellophane.

    * After WWII, the US prosecuted Japanese soldiers for waterboarding US soldiers and actually court-martial a US soldier for waterboarding a Vietnamese prisoner during the Vietnam war.

    And used against *suspected* terrorists by order of war criminal and unelected military governor of the USA – George W Bush.

    Torture: The Bush Legacy

    What does waterboarding look like?

    Sorry. Video removed
    by order of Fox News and YouTube.

    This is one of the “interrogation” methods favored by the Bush administration for use on *suspected* terrorists.Note the word “suspected.”

    It’s possible for a person who is entirely innocent and has no information whatsoever to be subjected to this form of torture.

    People can and do die in the course of waterboarding. The practice is essentially to bring the victim to the edge of drowning, over and over again.

    Bush and his henchmen pointedly continue to refuse to ban this practice explicitly.

    Theoretically, thanks to George Bush “the Decider”, anyone, anywhere, any time, who is suspected of having information related to “terrorism” can be snatched off the street and tortured in this way.

    This perhaps more than his lying the US into an illegal, immoral and pointless war and ruining the US economy (a work in progress) may be his ultimate legacy.

    Indeed, as you can see from the above link, we were going to show you a video of a volunteer journalist who gave permission to be waterboarded, however, the powers that be have pulled the video due to its rather unpleasant and graphic nature of the torture process.

    And yes, in the Good old USA its all perfectly legal to Waterboard any suspected person, either a US citizen or foreign suspect, without charge, caution or legal representation – so long as you ship them to a far off place outside the jurisdiction of other US law, and law enforcement (KIDNAP).

    So, why if Waterboarding is not torture, as BUSH and his CIA henchmen claim, does the CIA ship people off US soil prior to them operating what is a BUSH legal interrogation method?

    The answer is simple folks: BUSH and his henchmen are international war criminals, who are operating outside of US & International law.

    This evidence alone proves the case for justifiable Impeachment of BUSH and his entire corrupt administration, or should we more appropriately describe – Unelected Fascist type Regime!

    Gordon Brown ‘will back air strikes on Iran’

    0
    In nuclear strategy, a first strike is an unprovoked surprise attack employing overwhelming force. First strike capability is a country’s ability to defeat another nuclear power by destroying its arsenal to the point where the attacking country can survive the weakened retaliation. The preferred methodology is to attack the opponent’s launch facilities and storage depots first. The strategy is called counterforce.

    Britain ‘on board’ for US strikes on Iran

    By Tim Shipman 08/10/2007

    British defence officials have held talks with their Pentagon counterparts about how they could help out if America chose to bomb Iran.

    Washington sources say that America has shelved plans for an all-out assault, drawn up to destroy the Iranian nuclear facilities and take out the Islamist regime. The Sunday Telegraph has learned that President Bush’s White House national security council is discussing instead a plan to launch pinpoint attacks on bases operated by the Iranian Revolutionary Guard Quds force, blamed for training Iraqi militants.

    Pentagon officials have revealed that President Bush won an understanding with Gordon Brown in July that Britain would support air strikes if they could be justified as a counter-terrorist operation. Since then discussions about what Britain might contribute militarily, to combat Iranian retaliation that would follow US air strikes, have been held between ministers and officials in the Pentagon and the Ministry of Defence.

    Vincent Cannistraro – who served as intelligence chief on Ronald Reagan’s National Security Council and then as head of operations for the CIA’s counter-terrorist centre – said: “What’s on the table right now is tactical strikes.” Last night, Downing Street declined to comment on the suggestion. But Mr Cannistraro has talked about the preparations to senior Pentagon officials and with military and intelligence contacts in the UK. He said: “The British Government is in accord with plans to launch limited strikes on facilities inside Iran, on the basis of counter-terrorism.” While the US Air Force and naval jets could carry out raids without help from the RAF, the Pentagon is keen to have the Royal Navy’s cooperation in the event of an attack, to prevent Iran from sowing mines in the Gulf to block oil exports in retaliation. Mr Cannistraro said: “The British have to be a major auxiliary to this plan. It’s not just for political reasons: the US doesn’t have a lot of mine clearing capability in the Gulf. The Dutch and the British do. “There will be renewed discussions with British defence officials about what role Britain would perform in the naval sphere. If there was a retaliatory response by the Iranians, they might close the Straits of Hormuz and that would affect the entire West.”

    The White House and Downing Street would justify such an attack as a defensive move to protect allied troops in Iraq. But moderates in the US government are concerned that the counter-terrorist argument may be used by hawks as a figleaf for military action that could escalate into all out war with Iran. A US intelligence source said that Revolutionary Guard bases, supply depots and command and control facilities “have been programmed” into military computers but stressed that President Bush has not given any “execute order” for military action. Further details of the US plans for Iran were divulged to Seymour Hersh, the investigative reporter with the New Yorker magazine who has unveiled Pentagon secrets for more than three decades.

    American officials told the New Yorker: “During a secure video conference earlier this summer, the President told Ryan Crocker, the US ambassador to Iraq, that he was thinking of hitting Iranian targets across the border and that the British ‘were on board’.” The magazine added: “The bombing plan has had its most positive reception from the new government of Britain’s Prime Minister Gordon Brown.”

    A recently retired American four-star general, told the magazine last week that the bombing campaign would only attract support from the Prime Minister “if it’s in response to an Iranian attack” like the kidnapping of British sailors in March. The general said the US officials want to strike “if the Iranians stage a cross-border attack inside Iraq” of a significant kind, for example the one that produced “10 dead American soldiers and four burned trucks”.

    Britain and America have complained for months about Iranian support for Iraqi militants but Pentagon officials claim that Iran has been told that a line has now been drawn in the sand – a move that has actually helped to stabilise the situation. Details of the US plans were passed to Iranian leader Mahmoud Ahmadinejad and Iranian diplomats by Mr Crocker and Nouri al-Maliki, the Iraqi prime minister, during bilateral talks this summer. Since then, US officials say there appears to have been a reduction in some of the arms shipments and support to militia elements in Iraq.

    Some British military and intelligence figures fear that any endorsement of US plans, however hypothetical, will only embolden the White House faction, led by Vice-President Dick Cheney, which wants major bombing of Iran’s nuclear facilities.

    Zbigniew Brzezinski, the national security adviser to former President Carter, said last week the Bush plan was to depict any air strike on Iran as “responding to what is an intolerable situation. This time, unlike the attack in Iraq, we’re going to play the victim.”

    Gordon Brown ‘will back air strikes on Iran’
    By Tim Shipman

    Gordon Brown has agreed to support US air strikes against Iran if the Islamic republic orchestrates large-scale attacks by militants against British or American forces in Iraq, according to senior Pentagon officials. Washington sources say the Prime Minister has been informed of US plans to launch limited air and special forces raids against Revolutionary Guard bases.

    After talks with President George W Bush in July, Mr Brown left US officials with the belief that Britain was “on board” for a military response – but only if Iran was proved to be behind a big militant attack or another stunt similar to the kidnapping in March of British sailors. The US wants Britain’s Special Air Service Regiment to take part in special forces raids inside Iran and has requested help from the Royal Navy to combat Iranian retaliation in the Gulf. But no decisions have been made.

    Mr Brown made clear to Mr Bush that he would not support a campaign to destroy Iran’s nuclear programme and bring about regime change in Teheran. But Pentagon officials say he did indicate he would be prepared to back strikes in certain circumstances.

    Vincent Cannistraro, a former White House intelligence chief in close contact with senior Pentagon officials, said: “The British understand there’s a possible need to strike – not strategic bombing of nuclear sites but facilities in Iran in support of Iraqi elements. This understanding was reached shortly after Brown took office.” The threat of action has been passed to the Iranian government and is credited with slowing the flood of Iranian weapons into Iraq.

    The suggestion that Mr Brown has discussed air strikes will anger critics who believe Tony Blair was too quick to approve military action against Iraq. A Downing Street spokesman said: “While we won’t comment on the specifics of conversations between the Prime Minister and the President of the United States, this is not a version of events we recognise.” A source close to Mr Brown said the two had talked about Iran but “we have not had this conversation”.

    Brian Haw: “9/11 was an inside job”

    1

    Mick Meaney
    RINF Alternative News

    British anti war campaigner, Brian Haw, talks about 9/11, this is a very short clip, the full version can be seen here. Brian has been living in a peace camp in Parliament Square since 2001.

    After travelling from Lancaster to London to meet Brian, I spent the morning with him and the peace camp campaigners, I managed to film about 45 minutes before the battery went flat. Please support their efforts here.

    Preview:

    Full version can be seen here.

    Surprise Ingredients In Fast Food

    8

    John Andrews

    The movie Supersize Me has probably had more of an effect than the producers anticipated. Since then, in the fast food industry, there has been a market trend promoting menu items that appear to be healthy. But most of these menu items have ingredients that health conscious consumers would prefer to avoid.

    Most health conscious consumers consider healthy foods to be things like raw fruits and vegetables, whole grains, raw nuts and seeds, and clean meats like wild Alaskan salmon, or free-range chicken or turkey.

    Some ingredients that health conscious consumers consider unacceptable are MSG (or free glutamate, or free glutamic acid, including anything hydrolyzed or autolyzed), trans fats (hydrogenated or partially hydrogenated oils [3]), artificial colors, artificial flavors, and most preservatives.

    Many so-called healthy fast food menu items, upon closer inspection, do not live up to the health hype. Most of the meat from any of the major chains has anything but a simple ingredients list. They add emulsifiers, preservatives, MSG, artificial colors, trans fats, and hidden ingredients under generic labels such as spices, or natural and artificial flavors.

    Some of these food additives are not foods at all, but are chemicals that are generally recognized as safe. Most of these additives cannot be found at your local grocery store, probably because they aren’t food. But some can be found at your local hardware store, though in inedible products like low tox antifreeze, silicone caulk, soap, sunscreen, and play sand.

    The ingredient information in this article came straight from the various fast food restaurants’ web sites.

    McDonald’s

    The egg’s reputation is recovering, but scrambled eggs as a part of McDonald’s breakfast include much more than egg. Their pasteurized whole eggs have sodium acid pyrophosphate, citric acid, and monosodium phosphate (all added to preserve color), and nisin, a preservative. To top it off, the eggs are prepared with liquid margarine: liquid soybean oil, water, partially hydrogenated cottonseed and soybean oils (trans fats), salt, hydrogenated cottonseed oil (trans fat), soy lecithin, mono- and diglycerides, sodium benzoate, potassium sorbate (preservatives), artificial flavor, citric acid, vitamin A palmitate, and beta carotene (color). Though not all bad, these added chemicals may be the reason why homemade scrambled eggs taste so much better than McDonald’s.

    For coffee drinkers, it would seem fairly safe to just grab a quick cup of coffee at McDonalds on the way to work. But many health conscious people would object to it also including this list of ingredients: sodium phosphate, sodium polyphosphate, Di-Acetyl Tartrate Ester of Monoglyceride, sodium stearoyl lactylate, tetra sodium pyrophosphate, sodium hexametaphosphate, sodium citrate, and carrageenan. Do health nuts still drink coffee?

    Salads can usually be counted on to be a “what you see is what you get” item. But McDonald’s adds some interesting ingredients. The salads with grilled chicken also have liquid margarine.

    Several salads have either cilantro lime glaze, or orange glaze added. Along with many of McDonald’s sauces, both the cilantro lime glaze and the orange glaze contain propylene glycol alginate. While propylene glycol is considered “GRAS” for human consumption, it is not legal for use in cat food because the safety hasn’t been proven yet [10]. Proplene glycol is also used “As the killing and preserving agent in pitfall traps, usually used to capture ground beetles” [10].

    The chili lime tortilla strips that are included in the southwest salads have several ingredients used to hide MSG. They also contain two ingredients that advertise the presence of MSG: disodium inosinate, and disodium guanylate.

    The chicken has sodium phosphates (of an unspecified variety). It could be trisodium phosphate (a cleanser), monosodium phosphate (a laxative), or disodium hydrogen phosphate [11]. Why would McDonald’s add sodium phosphates (a foaming agent), and dimethylpolysiloxane added as an antifoaming agent in their crispy chicken breast filets? It isn’t dishwasher detergent.

    Burger King

    It’s interesting to note that the BK Veggie Burger has six ingredients commonly used to hide free glutamate (MSG): calcium caseinate, hydrolyzed corn, yeast extract, soy protein isolate, spices, and natural flavors. At the end of the ingredients list, it states This is NOT a vegan product. The patty is cooked in the microwave. Was that a warning statement?

    Burger King has three salads to choose from. The TENDERCRISP Garden Salad, the TENDERGRILL Garden Salad, and the Side Garden Salad.

    A salad may be a little boring without a dressing like Ken’s Fat Free Ranch Dressing which includes titanium dioxide (an artificial color, or sunscreen, depending on use), preservatives, and the ingredient seemingly mandatory in all ranch dressings: monosodium glutamate.

    Once again, as is typical with the fast food industry, they took a simple thing like chicken, and added a long list of ingredients.

    TENDERGRILL® CHICKEN BREAST FILET
    Chicken Breast with Rib Meat, Water, Seasoning (Maltodextrin, Salt, Sugar, Autolyzed Yeast Extract, Garlic Powder, Spices, Natural Flavors, Onion Powder, Modified Corn Starch, Chicken Fat, Chicken Powder, Chicken Broth, Disodium Guanylate and Disodium Inosinate, Citric Acid, Partially Hydrogenated Soybean Oil, Dehydrated Garlic, and Artificial Flavors.), Modified Corn Starch, Soybean Oil, Salt, Sodium Phosphates. Glazed with: Water, Seasoning [Maltodextrin, Salt, Sugar, Methylcellulose, Autolyzed Yeast Extract, Partially Hydrogenated Sunflower Oil, Modified Potato Starch, Fructose, Partially Hydrogenated Soybean Oil, Garlic Powder, Onion Powder, Dehydrated Garlic, Spices, Modified Corn Starch, Xanthan Gum, Natural Flavors, Disodium Guanylate and Disodium Inosinate, Chicken Fat, Carmel Color, Grill Flavor (from Partially Hydrogenated Soybean and Cottonseed Oil), Chicken Powder, Chicken Broth, Turmeric, Smoke Flavor, Annatto Extract, and Artificial Flavors], Soybean Oil. [12]

    Taco Bell

    Taco Bell’s website didn’t have much emphasis on health. Under the nutrition guide, at the bottom was a link to Keep it Balanced, a token nod to health. It had no serious information on how to really eat healthy. They recommend foods like pizza and tacos (no surprise) because they may include ingredients from several food groups at once. Including several food groups does not necessarily mean it’s a healthy food.

    The seasoned beef, carne asada steak, spicy shredded chicken, and even the rice all include autolyzed yeast extract (hidden MSG). Disodium inosinate and disodium guanylate are flavor enhancers used in synergy with MSG [7,8]. Therefore, menu items with disodium inosinate and/or disodium guanylate also contain MSG. This includes the avocado ranch dressing, southwest chicken, citrus salsa, creamy jalapeno sauce, creamy lime sauce, lime seasoned red strips, pepper jack sauce, and seasoned rice.

    According to Wikipedia, dimethylpolysiloxane is optically clear, and is generally considered to be inert, non-toxic, and non-flammable. It is used in silicone caulk, adhesives, and as an anti-foaming agent [6]. Appetizingly enough, it’s also included in Taco Bell’s rice.

    Wendy’s

    At Wendy’s, there are several tempting salads. The mandarin chicken salad seems healthy at first glance. It has diced chicken, mandarin oranges, almonds, crispy noodles, your choice of dressings, and five different varieties of lettuce. Then reality takes a bite when you check the ingredients list. The almonds are roasted and salted. The crispy noodles are not whole grain. The mandarin orange segments are not freshly peeled oranges; most likely canned. The diced chicken has added autolyzed yeast extract (MSG), disodium inosinate, disodium guanylate, sodium phosphates (soap?), salt, more salt, sugar, modified corn startch (sic)[1], and the universal umbrella ingredient list: spices, natural flavors, and artificial flavors.

    In the ingredients lists for the salad dressings, one surprise was titanium dioxide in the Low Fat Honey Mustard Dressing and the Reduced Fat Creamy Ranch Dressing. It’s a very versatile chemical. It can be used to manufacture paint, sunscreen, semiconductors, and food coloring [2].

    Wendy’s Southwest Taco Salad is a salad with Wendy’s chili. Once again, the chili has hidden MSG: autolyzed yeast extract, spices, artificial flavors, natural flavorings, disodium inosinate and disodium guanylate (MSG give-aways). It’s puzzling to try to understand why their chili would need to include an anti-caking agent such as silicon dioxide (also known as sand, or glass powder).

    See if you can spot the sunscreen, MSG, and soap in this Wendy’s ingredient:

    Seasoned Tortilla Strips
    Whole Corn, Vegetable Oil (contains one or more of the following: corn, soybean or sunflower oil), Salt, Buttermilk Solids, Spices, Tomato, Sweet Cream, Dextrose, Onion, Sugar, Cheddar Cheese (cultured milk, salt, enzymes), Corn Starch, Modified Corn Starch, Maltodextrin, Nonfat Dry Milk, Garlic, Torula Yeast, Citric Acid, Autolyzed Yeast, Natural and Artifical Flavor, Artificial Colors (including extractives of paprika, turmeric and annatto, titanium dioxide, red 40, yellow 5, blue 1), Disodium Phosphate, Lactic Acid, Soy Lecithin. CONTAINS: MILK.

    Apparently, taste really is all that matters at Wendy’s.

    Subway

    If a sandwich is advertised as healthy, one would expect that the bread would be whole grain. Not so with Subway’s wheat bread. While it does have some whole wheat flour, it’s the third ingredient, listed just before high fructose corn syrup [4]. None of Subway’s breads are whole grain. Ammonium sulfate (a fertilizer) is also added. Unfinished sandwiches may be composted. The bread also contains azodicarbonamide. From Wikipedia,

    Use of azodicarbonamide as a food additive is banned in Australia. In the UK, the Health and Safety Executive has identified azodicarbonamide as a respiratory sensitiser (a possible cause of asthma) and determined that products should be labeled with May cause sensitisation by inhalation [5].

    Most of the meats at Subway contain MSG and/or sodium nitrite.

    KFC

    The chicken, the gravy, and even the rice all have monosodium glutamate added. Not surprisingly, the chicken in the salads also has MSG. For a healthy menu item, the House Side Salad without dressing has nothing more than iceberg lettuce, romaine lettuce, and tomatoes.

    KFC claims 0g trans fat per serving for all their fried chicken. But The Extra Crispy Chicken, Colonel’s Crispy Strips, HBBQ Wings, Boneless HBBQ Wings, Fiery Buffalo Wings, and more have partially hydrogenated soybean oil listed in the ingredients. So if the trans fat content is below 0.5g per serving, they can round down to zero and claim zero grams per serving.

    In Closing

    The salad a la carte may be the only healthy thing to eat at a fast food place. The side salads offered at the fast food places are hardly a meal, and hardly what one would consider a real salad.

    Regarding MSG, it is helpful to remember this statement from Wikipedia when reading food labels.
    Under current FDA regulations, when MSG is added to a food, it must be identified as monosodium glutamate in the label’s ingredient list. If however MSG is part of a spice mix that is purchased by another company, the manufacturer does not have to list the ingredients of that spice mix and may use the words flavorings or spices. Even food that uses the no msg label may therefore have MSG that is added from a spice mix from another company under current FDA regulations.[9]

    As with most meat products in fast food restaurants, consider any meat, including on salads, to include MSG, chemical preservatives, and trans fats. Even seemingly simple items like rice can have ingredients like anti-foaming agents.
    References

    [1] http://www.wendys.com/food/Nutrition.jsp

    [2] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Titanium_dioxide

    [3] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Trans_fats

    [4] http://subway.com/subwayroot/MenuNutrition/Nutrition/frmUSIngredients.aspx

    [5] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Azodicarbonamide

    [6] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dimethylpolysiloxane

    [7] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Disodium_inosinate

    [8] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Disodium_guanylate

    [9] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Monosodium_glutamate

    [10] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Propylene_glycol

    [11] http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sodium_phosphates

    [12] http://www.bk.com/#menu=3,-1,-1

    About the author

    John Andrews is an electrical engineer currently living in Utah. He earned his bachelor’s degree in electrical engineering in 2001 at the University of Utah. John has adopted a whole foods lifestyle rich in raw fruits and vegetables. This lifestyle change has produced a noticeable improvement in physical health, appearance, and mental clarity. He savors knowledge and is eager to teach others how to be healthy.

    Momentum built for Cheney impeachment

    0

    Congressman Dennis Kucinich says he will offer a resolution to the House of Representatives to impeach Vice President Dick Cheney.

    The Democratic lawmaker who will introduce his privileged resolution next week said on Friday that the momentum is built for Cheney’s impeachment.

    “Millions of citizens across the nation are demanding Congress to stand up against the Vice President’s abuse of power,” Kucinich said.

    “The Vice President continues to use his office to advocate continued occupation of Iraq and prod our nation into a belligerent stance against Iran,” added the US presidential hopeful.

    While the American media has decided to keep Kucinich’s announcement on a low profile 54 percent of the Americans are in favor of impeaching Cheney according to an American Research Group survey conducted last July.

    Analysts believe the number of pro-impeachment Americans is on the rise due to Cheney’s hawkish policies towards the Islamic republic.

    MD/NA/RE

    Fake story may have started the Iraq war

    0

    Big News Network

    It is possible a fabricated story of biological weapons drove the U.S argument for the 2003 invasion of Iraq.

    U.S television network CBS says it has identified an Iraqi defector named Rafid Ahmed Alwan, who gave intelligence information to German and U.S investigators.

    Mr Alwan arrived at a German refugee centre in 1999, where he allegedly lied about being a chemical engineer in charge of a facility making mobile biological weapons.

    He was eventually interviewed by German intelligence and was able to provide credible descriptions of the Djerf al-Nadaf plant because he had actually worked there, albeit not as head of a biological weapons program.

    Summaries of his debriefings were sent to the CIA and then became the main platform for the U.S decision to invade Iraq.

    The information was passed to then secretary of state Colin Powell to use at the United Nations in a major speech justifying military action against Iraq.

    CBS says Mr Alwan is now believed to be living freely in Germany, probably under an assumed name.

    Named, the defector who misled US over Iraq

    0

    Philip Sherwell and Tim Shipman

    The Iraqi defector whose fabricated account of Baghdad’s biological weapons programme was crucial to the US case for war will be identified today on American TV as an accused thief and failed chemical engineering student.

    Known as Curveball by Western intelligence agencies, the man is named for the first time on CBS’s 60 Minutes show as Rafid Ahmed Alwan.

    After escaping Iraq and reaching Germany in 1999, he claimed to be an engineer who had run a biological weapon plant for Saddam.

    But according to the programme, he earned low marks in chemical engineering at university and was accused of theft at an Iraqi TV station where he worked.

    Alwan, who is understood to be living in Germany under an assumed name, was briefly employed at the biological weapon site, allowing him to embellish his story.

    The revelations come as a new book on the case shows how MI6 warned the CIA in April 2002 that Curveball had probably been fabricating his accounts – five months before the same claims appeared in Tony Blair’s “dodgy dossier”.

    The book also shows that it was a British intelligence analyst who exposed Curveball’s lies by using satellite imagery to show that he could not have watched bio-war trucks leaving a facility because a high wall was in the way.

    Thought Crime Prevention Bill

    0

    Big Brother: House passes the “Violent Radicalization and Homegrown Terrorism Prevention Act”

    The U.S. House of Representatives recently passed HR 1955 titled the Violent Radicalization and Homegrown Terrorism Prevention Act of 2007. This bill is one of the most blatant attacks against the Constitution yet and actually defines thought crimes as homegrown terrorism. If passed into law, it will also establish a commission and a Center of Excellence to study and defeat so called thought criminals. Unlike previous anti-terror legislation, this bill specifically targets the civilian population of the United States and uses vague language to define homegrown terrorism. Amazingly, 404 of our elected representatives from both the Democrat and Republican parties voted in favor of this bill. There is little doubt that this bill is specifically targeting the growing patriot community that is demanding the restoration of the Constitution.

    First let’s take a look at the definitions of violent radicalization and homegrown terrorism as defined in Section 899A of the bill.

    The definition of violent radicalization uses vague language to define this term of promoting any belief system that the government considers to be an extremist agenda. Since the bill doesn’t specifically define what an extremist belief system is, it is entirely up to the interpretation of the government. Considering how much the government has done to destroy the Constitution they could even define Ron Paul supporters as promoting an extremist belief system. Literally, the government according to this definition can define whatever they want as an extremist belief system. Essentially they have defined violent radicalization as thought crime. The definition as defined in the bill is shown below.

    `(2) VIOLENT RADICALIZATION- The term `violent radicalization’ means the process of adopting or promoting an extremist belief system for the purpose of facilitating ideologically based violence to advance political, religious, or social change.

    The definition of homegrown terrorism uses equally vague language to further define thought crime. The bill includes the planned use of force or violence as homegrown terrorism which could be interpreted as thinking about using force or violence. Not only that but the definition is so vaguely defined, that petty crimes could even fall into the category of homegrown terrorism. The definition as defined in the bill is shown below.

    `(3) HOMEGROWN TERRORISM- The term `homegrown terrorism’ means the use, planned use, or threatened use, of force or violence by a group or individual born, raised, or based and operating primarily within the United States or any possession of the United States to intimidate or coerce the United States government, the civilian population of the United States, or any segment thereof, in furtherance of political or social objectives.

    Section 899B of the bill goes over the findings of Congress as it pertains to homegrown terrorism. Particularly alarming is that the bill mentions the Internet as a main source for terrorist propaganda. The bill even mentions streams in obvious reference to many of the patriot and pro-constitution Internet radio networks that have been formed. It also mentions that homegrown terrorists span all ages and races indicating that the Congress is stating that everyone is a potential terrorist. Even worse is that Congress states in their findings that they should look at draconian police states like Canada, Australia and the United Kingdom as models to defeat homegrown terrorists. Literally, these findings of Congress fall right in line with the growing patriot community.

    The biggest joke of all is that this section also says that any measure to prevent violent radicalization and homegrown terrorism should not violate the constitutional rights of citizens. However, the definition of violent radicalization and homegrown terrorism as they are defined in section 899A are themselves unconstitutional. The Constitution does not allow the government to arrest people for thought crimes, so any promises not to violate the constitutional rights of citizens are already broken by their own definitions.

    `SEC. 899B. FINDINGS.

    `The Congress finds the following:

    `(1) The development and implementation of methods and processes that can be utilized to prevent violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence in the United States is critical to combating domestic terrorism.

    `(2) The promotion of violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence exists in the United States and poses a threat to homeland security.

    `(3) The Internet has aided in facilitating violent radicalization, ideologically based violence, and the homegrown terrorism process in the United States by providing access to broad and constant streams of terrorist-related propaganda to United States citizens.

    `(4) While the United States must continue its vigilant efforts to combat international terrorism, it must also strengthen efforts to combat the threat posed by homegrown terrorists based and operating within the United States.

    `(5) Understanding the motivational factors that lead to violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence is a vital step toward eradicating these threats in the United States.

    `(6) The potential rise of self radicalized, unaffiliated terrorists domestically cannot be easily prevented through traditional Federal intelligence or law enforcement efforts, and requires the incorporation of State and local solutions.

    `(7) Individuals prone to violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence span all races, ethnicities, and religious beliefs, and individuals should not be targeted based solely on race, ethnicity, or religion.

    `(8) Any measure taken to prevent violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence and homegrown terrorism in the United States should not violate the constitutional rights, civil rights and civil liberties of United States citizens and lawful permanent residents.

    `(9) Certain governments, including the United Kingdom, Canada, and Australia have significant experience with homegrown terrorism and the United States can benefit from lessons learned by those nations.

    Section 899C calls for a commission on the prevention of violent radicalization and ideologically based violence. The commission will consist of ten members appointed by various individuals that hold different positions in government. Essentially, this is a commission that will examine and report on how they are going to deal with violent radicalization and homegrown terrorism. So basically, the commission is being formed specifically on how to deal with thought criminals in the United States. The bill requires that the commission submit their final report 18 months following the commission’s first meeting as well as submit interim reports every 6 months leading up to the final report. Below is the bill’s defined purpose of the commission. Amazingly they even define one of the purposes of the commission to determine the causes of lone wolf violent radicalization.

    (b) Purpose- The purposes of the Commission are the following:

    `(1) Examine and report upon the facts and causes of violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence in the United States, including United States connections to non-United States persons and networks, violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence in prison, individual or `lone wolf’ violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence, and other faces of the phenomena of violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence that the Commission considers important.

    `(2) Build upon and bring together the work of other entities and avoid unnecessary duplication, by reviewing the findings, conclusions, and recommendations of–

    `(A) the Center of Excellence established or designated under section 899D, and other academic work, as appropriate;

    `(B) Federal, State, local, or tribal studies of, reviews of, and experiences with violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence; and

    `(C) foreign government studies of, reviews of, and experiences with violent radicalization, homegrown terrorism, and ideologically based violence.

    Section 899D of the bill establishes a Center of Excellence for the Study of Violent Radicalization and Homegrown Terrorism in the United States. Essentially, this will be a Department of Homeland Security affiliated institution that will study and determine how to defeat thought criminals.

    Section 899E of the bill discusses how the government is going to defeat violent radicalization and homegrown terrorism through international cooperation. As stated in the findings section earlier in the legislation, they will unquestionably seek the advice of countries with draconian police states like the United Kingdom to determine how to deal with this growing threat of thought crime.

    Possibly the most ridiculous section of the bill is Section 899F which states how they plan on protecting civil rights and civil liberties while preventing ideologically based violence and homegrown terrorism. Here is what the section says.

    `SEC. 899F. PROTECTING CIVIL RIGHTS AND CIVIL LIBERTIES WHILE PREVENTING IDEOLOGICALLY-BASED VIOLENCE AND HOMEGROWN TERRORISM.

    `(a) In General- The Department of Homeland Security’s efforts to prevent ideologically-based violence and homegrown terrorism as described herein shall not violate the constitutional rights, civil rights, and civil liberties of United States citizens and lawful permanent residents.

    `(b) Commitment to Racial Neutrality- The Secretary shall ensure that the activities and operations of the entities created by this subtitle are in compliance with the Department of Homeland Security’s commitment to racial neutrality.

    `(c) Auditing Mechanism- The Civil Rights and Civil Liberties Officer of the Department of Homeland Security will develop and implement an auditing mechanism to ensure that compliance with this subtitle does not result in a disproportionate impact, without a rational basis, on any particular race, ethnicity, or religion and include the results of its audit in its annual report to Congress required under section 705.’.

    (b) Clerical Amendment- The table of contents in section 1(b) of such Act is amended by inserting at the end of the items relating to title VIII the following:

    It states in the first subsection that in general the efforts to defeat thought crime shall not violate the constitutional rights, civil rights and civil liberties of the United States citizens and lawful permanent residents. How does this protect constitutional rights if they use vague language such as in general that prefaces the statement? This means that the Department of Homeland Security does not have to abide by the Constitution in their attempts to prevent so called homegrown terrorism.

    This bill is completely insane. It literally allows the government to define any and all crimes including thought crime as violent radicalization and homegrown terrorism. Obviously, this legislation is unconstitutional on a number of levels and it is clear that all 404 representatives who voted in favor of this bill are traitors and should be removed from office immediately. The treason spans both political parties and it shows us all that there is no difference between them. The bill will go on to the Senate and will likely be passed and signed into the law by George W. Bush. Considering that draconian legislation like the Patriot Act and the Military Commissions Act have already been passed, there seems little question that this one will get passed as well. This is more proof that our country has been completely sold out by a group of traitors at all levels of government.

    ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤ ¤

    © 2007 Lee Rogers

    UK Muslim Leader Speaks out on False Flags

    1

    UK Muslim Leader Speaks out on 9/11, 7/7, Trilateral Commission and “Common Purpose”

    Andrew Johnson

    UK – Birmingham Central Mosque, 30th Oct 2007 – Elias Davidsson, Icelandic Scholar and Human Rights Activist had been giving a short series of talks in the UK regarding the lack of evidence for the official story of events on 9/11 being true. Following Mr Davidsson’s talk, Dr Mohammed Naseem, chairman of the Birmingham Central Mosque, addressed the audience regarding the context of 9/11 from both a Muslim and a wider perspective, saying that the official story of 9/11 and 7/7 was an “insult” to his intelligence.

    In 2002, Mr Davidsson started research into the events of September 11, 2001 and founded the Icelandic chapter of the 9/11 truth movement. In October 2007, Mr Davidsson came to the UK and gave several talks regarding the basic lack of evidence which is available to support the official story of the 9/11 tragedy.

    Mr Davidsson cited a number of examples, such as the lack of verified passenger lists for any of the planes, the lack of any CCTV footage of any of the accused hijackers in the airport terminal or boarding the flights. He additionally pointed out the lack of testimony from any airport personnel that they saw either passengers or hijackers boarding the planes. He also discussed how no boarding passes from the hijackers have been presented as evidence. Mr Davidsson discussed the issue of World Trade Centre Building 7, fell to the ground in 6.6 seconds even though there was no prior impact on the building. This was ignored by the 9/11 Commission and omitted from its 500-page report. Another issue he raised was the lack of any parts of planes being brought forward as evidence, apart from those shown in the trial of Zacarias Moussaoui in 2006 (However, Moussaoui was in prison on 9/11)

    Following Mr Davidsson’s lecture, Dr Mohammed Naseem, chairman of the Birmingham Central Mosque, was invited to comment on the subject of the 9/11 Story. He responded, “The whole saga and story of 7th July and 9/11 is totally astonishing — it doesn’t make any sense. I do not question it because I am against America or England; I question it because it was an insult to my intelligence. I could not digest the information I was given — it did not make any sense.”

    Dr Naseem then referred to a think tank report that had stated “Researchers found radical or hate-filled books and pamphlets at a quarter of the 100 Islamic religious institutions they visited.” Dr Naseem then posed the question “Who is the author of this literature?” and he pointed out that Mosques are public places, where anyone can walk in and leave material. He referred to a previous incident at his own Mosque where a woman had left some CDs on the table and that these were found to contain inflammatory material. When the material was viewed, it was found that an organisation was mentioned and so this information was promptly passed to the Police, but no action was taken.

    He went on to express his concern that the media was allowing these sorts of stories to be promulgated and that there were “4 organisations running the world” — the Bilderberg group, the Trilateral Commission, McKenzie and Co Public Relations, and Common Purpose.

    He stated that the Bilderberg group was a secret organisation, which holds secret “invitation only” meetings. He stated that the job of Trilateral Commission was to identify those people in power in a given country who would be willing to accept the Bilderberg’s agenda for their own country. He stated that the job of the McKenzie organisation was to facilitate the policies of a leader such as Tony Blair.

    Dr Naseem stated the fourth organisation — Common Purpose was “seeping through society like branches of cancer” and that to attend one of their seminars would cost £3000. He also stated that taxpayers’ money was going “into the wrong pockets”. He added that one of the activities which took place in the Common Purpose seminars is “brain-washing,” and that Common Purpose was seeking to identify “the leaders of the future” so that they would eventually “sing from the same hymn book” – which was prepared by Bilderberg, The Trilateral Commission, McKenzie and Co. and Common Purpose”. Dr Naseem said to the audience that he was mentioning these matters to “awaken” them rather than frighten them, so that “the network” of these organisations “can be broken”. He said, “We have to challenge at every step of the way. We have to be vocal. We have to be articulate.” He appealed to people to pass this message on to non-Muslim friends.

    He also stated how he felt that Muslims, though they were affected, weren’t the real target of curtailments of Civil Liberties — as they number only about 1.5 million in the UK. He pointed out some examples of non-Muslim people who had been arrested under anti-terrorism laws, such as labour party member Walter Wolfgang who was 82 years old.

    In a 2nd shorter address to audience, following a question, he called again for an independent Public Enquiry into the 7th of July (2005) London Bombings, stating that if the authorities were confident of their facts, then having such an enquiry could “restore harmony to the community”. 

    For a short video of segments from the event, use this link (note, the caption in the video has an incorrect date):

    http://video.google.co.uk/videoplay?docid=-8159647372881714960

    For a shorter segment of Dr Naseem’s initial response to Mr Davidsson’s talk, use this link

    http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=j1fflAo_8dg

    Dr Naseem was openly critical of the official story of 7/7 days after it happened:

    http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/england/west_midlands/4126688.stm

    For more information about Elias Davidsson

    http://www.aldeilis.net/english/index.php?option=com_content&task=view&id=23&Itemid=89

    VIDEO: How the markets really work

    0

    Yes, it really is this bad

    Another example of humor that is deadly accurate.

    I worked on Wall Street for a few years, elbow to elbow with “top” investment bankers.

    It was one big casino with the saps in pensions funds and savings and loans (and us) being used to finance the game and cover the losses.

    http://www.brasschecktv.com/page/187.html

    Guantanamo Torture Sanctioned by Bush & Rumsfeld

    0

    LISA THOMPSON

    When military investigators questioned Erie County Judge Michael E. Dunlavey about reported prisoner abuse during his tenure at the Guantanamo Bay camp for suspected terrorists, Dunlavey told them he got his “marching orders” from President Bush, according to a new book about U.S. policies regarding torture.

    The book, “Administration of Torture: A Documentary Record from Washington to Abu Ghraib and Beyond,” relies on government documents obtained through the Freedom of Information Act to trace the development of what the authors claim was prisoner abuse and torture that emerged in the wake of the Sept. 11, 2001, terrorist attacks.

    The book uses Dunlavey’s words to place him, a retired two-star general in the U.S. Army Reserve, at the advent of the development of what have become disputed interrogation policies.

    In a statement Dunlavey provided to a U.S. Air Force lieutenant general investigating FBI reports of detainee abuses at Guantanamo Bay, Dunlavey explains that as leader of interrogations at Guantanamo, he reported directly to President Bush and then-Defense Secretary Donald Rumsfeld.

    He acknowledged the use of loud music and dogs and shackling prisoners in the fetal position during interrogations, but stressed repeatedly that the standard was to treat detainees humanely. The military investigation into the claims of abuse at Guantanamo Bay found no reason to reprimand Dunlavey.

    Source document: http://www.goerie.com/graphics/dunlavey

    In the statement to U.S. Air Force Lt. General Randall Schmidt, as summarized and sworn to by Schmidt, Dunlavey said:

    *** Rumsfeld summoned him to a meeting on Feb. 21 or 22, 2002, attended by Rumsfeld, then-Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz and others. The date was two weeks after Bush had issued a directive denying al-Qaida and Taliban prisoners protections under the Geneva Conventions.

    *** Dunlavey said at the meeting, Rumsfeld told him that the Department of Defense had “accumulated a number of bad guys.”

    Rumsfeld wanted these prisoners interrogated to identify senior Taliban leaders and other operatives and obtain information about future plans, Dunlavey said.

    “Our mission was to stop Americans from being killed,” Dunlavey said, according to the report.

    *** Dunlavey, an intelligence specialist, said he had interrogation experience dating back to the Vietnam War and had conducted more than 3,000 interrogations. Rumsfeld needed a “common sense way to do business,” Dunlavey said.

    “The SECDEF (Secretary of Defense) said he wanted a product and he wanted intelligence now. He told me what he wanted; not how to do it.”

    *** Dunlavey said he was first directed to report to military officials, but then ordered to work more closely with President Bush. “The directions changed and I got my marching orders from the President of the United States,” Dunlavey said. “I was told by the SECDEF that he wanted me back in Washington, D.C., every week to brief him.”

    The new book also includes the now well-known October 2002 memo in which Dunlavey asked for permission to use more-aggressive interrogation tactics at the camp, including the use of dogs and extreme cold.

    ACLU’s role in book
    Dunlavey Timeline
    * Feb. 7, 2002: President Bush issues order that denies al-Qaida and Taliban prisoners protections of the Geneva Conventions.

    * Feb. 21 or 22, 2002: Erie County Judge Michael E. Dunlavey is summoned to a meeting with then-Secretary of Defense Donald Rumsfeld. Dunlavey said Rumsfeld tells him the Department of Defense has accumulated “bad guys.” He wants the suspected Taliban and al-Qaida operatives questioned to learn their future plans.

    * Rumsfeld turns to Dunlavey because he had more than 30 years of intelligence experience and had conducted more than 3,000 interrogations, Dunlavey said. Dunlavey said Rumsfeld needed a “common sense” way to do business.

    * Dunlavey said Rumsfeld wanted “intelligence now.”

    * Dunlavey said he is told to report to Rumsfeld and the military, but was later told to report directly to Bush.

    * March 2002: Dunlavey takes over command of interrogations at Guantanamo Bay, Cuba, detention center for suspected terrorists.

    * October 2002: Dunlavey issues a request for permission to pursue more aggressive interrogation tactics, including threats of imminent death, cold temperatures and scaring detainees with dogs.

    * Rumsfeld approved most of the requests in late 2002, but permission was later rescinded in early 2003.

    * November 2002: Dunlavey steps down from his post at Guantanamo, but continues to serve elsewhere.

    * August 2003 until March 2004: Dunlavey works as associate director of the Terrorist Threat Integration Center.

    * March 2004: Dunlavey returns to the bench in Erie County Family Court.

    Authors Jameel Jaffer and Amrit Singh, lawyers with the American Civil Liberties Union, seek to link official military and civilian policies to the emergence of alleged prisoner abuse, torture and death in places such as the Guantanamo Bay camp in Cuba, the Abu Ghraib prison in Iraq and elsewhere.

    They base their argument on documents the ACLU obtained from the government through a Freedom of Information Act request.

    “The Bush administration has professed a commitment to democracy and human rights and claimed solidarity with those who struggle against tyranny. But these documents show unambiguously that the administration has adopted some of the methods of the most tyrannical regimes,” the authors write.

    The Erie Times-News currently has an appeal pending over the Department of Defense’s refusal to release to the newspaper documents relating to Dunlavey’s tenure at Guantanamo.

    The summary of Dunlavey’s statement about practices at Guantanamo in the new book provides the first detailed account from Dunlavey, who has repeatedly said policy prevented him from commenting.

    Dunlavey, an Erie County Court judge, agreed Thursday through a spokesperson in his chambers to review questions about the book from the Erie Times-News and answer them if he felt they were “appropriate.”

    He had not yet responded Thursday night.

    He previously told the Erie Times-News that detainees at Guantanamo were “not prisoners of war the way we were trained for, or the (kind the) Geneva Conventions envisions.” However, he has said he believes the tactics developed for their interrogations were “consistent with the Geneva Conventions.”

    ‘I treated them as human beings’

    Rumsfeld called Dunlavey from his seat on the Erie County Family Court bench in February 2002 and placed him in charge of interrogations at Guantanamo in March 2002.

    Dunlavey, 61, was elected judge in November 1999.

    Portions of Dunlavey’s role in the development of interrogation practices after 9/11 have been well-publicized.

    After the images of abuse and torture of prisoners emerged from the Abu Ghraib prison in Iraq, the government released a series of documents to explain the development of interrogation policy in the wake of the Sept. 11, 2001, attacks.

    The government maintained, and many refuted, that what happened at Abu Ghraib was not the result of government policy.

    The Department of Defense released documents in June 2004 showing that while Dunlavey was commander at Guantanamo, he sought permission from Southern Command to use more extreme interrogation tactics, including convincing detainees that they and/or their families faced imminent death, scaring them with dogs, and exposing them to cold temperatures or water.

    Most of Dunlavey’s proposed methods, excluding the most severe, were approved by Rumsfeld in late 2002, but then retracted in early 2003. Dunlavey stepped down from his post at Guantanamo in early November 2002.

    For the first time in the new book, “Administration of Torture,” military documents that purport to show Dunlavey’s view of the mission at Guantanamo have been released.

    In the statement, as summarized by Schmidt, Dunlavey said the camp was in disarray when he arrived.

    “The facility consisted of literally a dangling fence,” he said.

    The detainees were not in control, he said.

    “They were shaking out their blankets and throwing food,” he said.

    Some threw feces on guards, fashioned weapons, even urinated on female interrogators, he said.

    The guards, he said, were living no better than the detainees were.

    Dunlavey also said most of the interrogators had little experience.

    “The linguists were worthless. They came out of school and could order coffee, but they were getting smoked by the detainees,” he said.

    Dunlavey acknowledged loud music, shouting, dogs, and shackling were used to intimidate or control detainees. But he denied they denied the prisoners food or water or allowed female interrogators to taunt the detainees with their bodies.

    He said he clearly communicated his task force rules.

    “The Geneva Conventions applied. I treated them as human beings, but not like soldiers. They had significant culture. The rugs and beads were significant to me. I let them practice religion,” he said.

    LISA THOMPSON can be reached at 870-1802 or by e-mail.

    The Book
    “Administration of Torture” (2007, Columbia University Press), is not available in local bookstores. It is listed for $29.95 on Amazon.com.

    ORIGINALLY PUBLISHED
    http://www.goerie.com/apps/pbcs.dll/article?AID=/20071102/NEWS02/711020374/-1/NEWS

    Lib Dems warn on DNA records

    0

     The Liberal Democrats have described as “disturbing and illiberal” the policy of keeping the DNA profiles of children who have not been convicted of any offence.

    Home affairs spokesman Nick Clegg was speaking after a parliamentary written answer revealed that there are almost 150,000 under-16s on the national database.

    “These figures underline the shocking extent to which this database has intruded, often without parental consent, into the lives of our children,” he said.

    “Thousands of these children will have been found guilty of no crime, yet samples of their DNA will remain on file for life.

    “The disturbing and illiberal policy of adding a child’s most personal information to a massive government computer system, simply on the grounds of an accusation, must stop immediately.”

    Under the current system, the DNA of a suspect remains on the database even if the individual is not convicted of any crime.

    And urging the government to “come up with a proportionate and sensible way of using this technology”, Clegg warned against the “unfair scatter-gun approach that currently prevails”.

    Bush defense spending highest since WWII

    0

     Hey, $1 billion here, $1 billion there, who’s counting? Not the State Department, which admitted this week that it can’t say “specifically what it received” for the $1.2 billion it paid DynCorp, ostensibly to train the Iraqi police – other than that somebody got an Olympic-size swimming pool out of the deal.On Monday, President Bush demanded that Congress fork over another $46 billion to pay for his wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, insisting that it be approved by the end of the year. That brings the total requested this year in “supplementary funds” for his foreign adventures to $196.4 billion. The prez said Congress had best pony up, or the members would be betraying the family of the dead Marine that he was using as prop for this particular White House photo-op.

    Of course the Democrats, after some pussyfooting, will sign off, as they have for the rest of the more than $800 billion that will have been allotted to Iraq and Afghanistan by year’s end, lest they be accused of failing the troops that Bush has put in harm’s way. “Our men and women on the front lines should not be caught in the middle of partisan disagreements in Washington, D.C.,” Bush warned darkly, while edging ever closer to the family of the fallen Marine. “I often hear that war critics oppose my decisions, but still support the troops,” he said. “Well, I’ll take them at their word – and this is the chance to show it.”

    I half-expected some leading Democrat to respond, “Hey, you want support for the troops, I’ll see your $46 billion and raise you another $46 billion.” But then again, Joe Lieberman is no longer running the party. Instead, the Democrats tried to show that $46 billion is not loose change and that, as Speaker Nancy Pelosi, D-San Francisco, put it, a mere 40 days of the cost of the Iraq war could provided annual health insurance coverage for 10 million American children. Senate Majority Leader Harry Reid, D-Nev., added that the money might be better spent for law enforcement, homeland security and fixing the nation’s sagging infrastructure, but his argument wasn’t going to get any better traction than Pelosi’s. As Reid pointed out, “this intractable civil war in Iraq … is being paid for by borrowed money.”

    Sure, some day the Chinese communists and others holding our debt will have to be paid back with compounded interest, but for now the war has been successfully marketed as a financial freebie. Leave it to the next generation to wake up and discover that this war, which in constant dollars has already cost more than the Korean or Vietnam wars, prevents Congress from implementing any of the needed domestic programs, even those advocated by both parties, as was the children’s health insurance bill vetoed by Bush last week. But even if you think none of that domestic spending is needed, even for fixing Medicare and Social Security, the cost of this war will require a substantial increase in taxes over coming decades.

    The Congressional Budget Office estimates the future additional costs of these wars over the next 10 years at between at between $481 billion to $1.01 trillion, depending on how fast the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan are wound down. Those are extremely optimistic projections that assume these wars will wind down and that the United States will be able to finally climb out of the quagmire. Much more likely is the spread of those wars to neighboring battle theaters in Pakistan and Iran. And that’s without conjuring up the prospect of WWIII, as Bush did last week.

    Understand further that all of the numbers referenced above refer only to that part of the defense budget directly attributable to the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan. Post-9/11 defense spending, excluding the costs of the wars in Iraq and Afghanistan, has increased 40 percent to build high-tech Cold War-era weapons in a charade that assumes that stateless terrorists present a military challenge even greater than the once mighty Soviet Union’s armed forces. The $686 billion overall 2008 defense budget is the highest since World War II.

    There was a time when responsible politicians would sharply decry this looting of the public treasury, but not now, when we are in the midst of a never-ending “war on terror.” Not now, when a Marine dies a needless death in Iraq, a country that had nothing whatsoever to do with 9/11 or in any substantiated way presented a threat to the United States, and his family can be produced as cover for a president determined to morally and financially bankrupt the nation.

    Robert Scheer

    Green groups shine light on safety of Apple iPhone

    0

    The British launch of the Apple iPhone is set to be overshadowed by pressure from environmentalists who want the gadget to be made greener.

    Green groups are demanding that the UK version of the phone, which goes on sale on Friday, should be free of the toxic chemicals, such as brominated flame retardants, that Greenpeace alleges are contained in its American counterpart.

    Zeina Alhajj, campaign co-ordinator for Greenpeace, said: “The iPhone is a unique product and for us it is a missed opportunity for Apple to combine the innovation of the product with a green performance.”

    The campaign was announced as Apple and its UK partners, O2 and Carphone Warehouse, outlined ambitious sales targets for the iPhone, which is Apple’s first foray into the mobile market. Carphone hopes to sell 10,000 of the phones on launch day, and O2 has ordered “several hundred thousand” units for sale over the next couple of months. Apple insists that the iPhone complies with the European Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive. The company points out that it has already pledged to eliminate the use of PVC and brominated flame retardants in its products by the end of next year.

    But the phone — the year’s most eagerly awaited gadget — is fast becoming the focal point for a wider assault on the multibillion-pound mobile sector and its alleged lack of eco-credentials. Green lobbyists say that the sector — which accounts for about 5 per cent of the global stock market — is a significant polluter and that mobile companies must work to address the problem.

    “Over the life cycle of a phone there is massive pollution,” Ms Alhajj said. “The phone companies are making big changes — transparency and reporting is far ahead of what it was four years ago, for example — but it is still far away from being a really green industry.”

    In a report this year, Greenpeace claimed to have found evidence of widespread contamination of rivers and underground wells with hazardous chemicals in the countries in which electronics goods are produced. The increasing ease with which Western consumers discard their old phones for the latest model is another concern. Only a small proportion of old phones are recycled. Nokia, the world’s biggest mobile handset manufacturer, says that about 48 per cent of old handsets are left forgotten in a drawer.

    Another problem is encouraging the mobile phone giants to be accountable for the practices of their suppliers. Although five companies may help in the manufacturing of a phone, the firm with its brand name on the final product must take responsibility for what is going on in the entire chain, green groups say.

    Aware that its practices are being scrutinised ever more closely, the mobile industry has made moves towards becoming more eco-friendly. Its interest has been fuelled in part by directives such as RoHS and WEEE, which pertains to the waste of electrical and electronic equipment.

    The fashionability of the green cause — and the keenness of consumers to embrace businesses they deem to be environmentally sound — has proved motivational, too. Nokia asserts that up to 80 per cent of its handsets are recyclable. It publicly identifies all the materials in its handsets, and last year it cut the packaging it uses by 54 per cent — enabling it to put about 1,200 fewer lorries on the road, it says.

    Vodafone, the biggest European mobile operator, boasts that renewable energy accounted for 17 per cent of its network energy use last year, an increase of 28 per cent on the previous year. Most of Britain’s big operators are signed up with companies such as Fonebak, which operate recycling schemes.

    Many manufacturers acknowledge that greenness can be good for business. Markus Terho, the director of environmental affairs for Nokia, said: “Companies that care for the environment are viewed as better employers.”

    World of waste

    —— In the Western world, phones made to last ten years typically are discarded after 18 months
    —— 105 million phones are thrown out in Europe every year. In Britain alone, about 15 million mobile phones are replaced each year
    —— There are nearly 50,000 network base stations in the UK
    —— The mobile industry in Britain accounts for about 0.7 per cent of CO2 emissions
    —— Each mobile subscriber is responsible for about 55 kg (120lb) of CO2 emissions a year
    —— To source the gold in a single phone circuit board, about 100kg of mine waste is generated
    —— Nokia, the world’s biggest mobile handset maker, says that up to 80 per cent of the materials in its devices can be recycled Nearly 50 per cent of old phones are sitting in a drawer
    —— Two thirds of the power consumed by a mobile phone during its use is lost when the battery is full but the phone is left attached to a charger still plugged into the mains

    Source: Forum for the Future, Earth Calling report, Fonebak, Nokia

    What the media isn’t telling you about the Democrats

    0

    IN A MATCH UP with Giuliani there is no more than a 3 point difference between Clinton, Obama or Gore in our three poll moving average. What this means is that people are making their choices based on party rather than individual.

    One thing could change this dramatically: if one candidate became an easier target for the Republicans than the others. And only one candidate is a logical contender for this dismal role: Hillary Clinton. Clinton is currently in a bubble of protection created by a media that steadfastly refuses to mention her sordid past. But if the bubble is burst – as it likely will be – by the Republicans after her nomination, it will be a whole different ball game.

    There is simply no comparison between Obama and Edwards on the one hand and Clinton on the other when it comes to personal integrity. The former are far from perfect but it is likely that we have heard the worst about each. This is not the case with Clinton, witness the Chinatown funny money scandal that much of the media is choosing to ignore.

    De Menezes killing: what the witnesses saw

    0

    As the Met chief fights to keep his job, the hidden story of the Stockwell shooting is about to be told. Andrew Johnson reports

    Graphic eye-witness accounts of the last seconds of the life of Jean Charles de Menezes, the Brazilian mistakenly shot by the police in July 2005, will be released to the public for the first time this week.

    The release of the Independent Police Complaints Commission (IPCC) report is one of three hurdles the head of the Metropolitan Police, Sir Ian Blair, will have to clear in the next 12 days in order to keep his job.

    Britain’s most senior policeman is so far defying calls for his resignation since the Met was found guilty on Thursday of “fundamental failures” in the anti-terror operation that led to the 24-year-old Brazilian’s death in a Tube carriage at Stockwell station the day after a failed bomb attack on London.

    However, it appeared last night that Sir Ian could escape personal censure in the report, although it will criticise Commanders John McDowell and Cressida Dick, who ran the operation that led to the death of Mr de Menezes, according to a the News of the World.

    The IPCC is believed to have suggested that prosecutors must consider if Commander Dick was “grossly negligent”. It also reportedly concluded that Commander McDowell failed to brief colleagues properly.

    Sir Ian could also face a vote of no confidence this week by the Met’s political watchdog, the Metropolitan Police Authority. He must also appear before the Greater London Assembly.

    The IPCC will tomorrow decide when to make its report into the incident public. Kept secret while legal action over the shooting took place, the report contains evidence that has not yet entered the public realm, an IPCC spokesman said.

    “The report will fill in a lot of the gaps,” he said. “The trial did not give a full picture in that certain witnesses were not called. It will give a clear idea of what happened on the Tube train itself.”

    The report sets out the law and will make recommendations for the future. It has already been considered by the Crown Prosecution Service, which decided there was insufficient evidence to charge individual officers. But details of Mr de Menezes’ last moments — he is believed to have been shot seven times in the face — will reignite debate over the Met’s handling of the case and make clear whether or not the 27-year-old electrician acted aggressively towards the police.

    A key defence of the Met is that in the immediate aftermath of the 7 July bombings and the failed bomb plot of 21 July, the armed officers had to make a split-second life-or-death decision on whether Mr de Menezes — mistaken for a terrorist — was carrying a bomb.

    The Met was fined £175,000 on Thursday, plus £385,000 costs, after it was convicted at the Old Bailey of exposing the public to unnecessary risk under health and safety law. Critics of Sir Ian Blair say he should take responsibility for the force’s failings and what were described as 19 ” catastrophic errors”.

    One former senior officer alleged that Sir Ian, 54, has lost all support among rank-and-file police and some senior officers. “He should quit,” he said. “Blair is out of his depth… A member [of] the selection panel [when Sir Ian was chosen] said if you’re faced with three lemons and a raspberry you go for the raspberry.”

    Sir Ian does have important backers, however. The Mayor of London, Ken Livingstone, is unswerving in his support, as is the Home Secretary, Jacqui Smith.

    His supporters point out that the jury found that no individual should be held responsible for Mr de Menezes’ death and that the failings were not ” systemic”.

    Glen Smyth, Metropolitan Police Federation chief, said: “Sir Ian has not been treated fairly. It is nothing but naked political opportunism to seek his resignation.”

    Next in line? Contenders for Met’s top job

    Sir Hugh Orde

    Chief Constable of Police Service of Northern Ireland. Former Met officer who helped develop race relations strategy. Has spent five years in Belfast.

    Ian Johnston

    Head of the British Transport Police and former Assistant Commissioner of the Met.

    Sir Ronnie Flanagan

    Her Majesty’s Chief Inspector of Constabulary who advised on reforms to Iraqi police. Former Chief Constable of Royal Ulster Constabulary and its successor, the Police Service of Northern Ireland.

    Mike Todd

    Chief Constable of Greater Manchester and former Met Assistant Commissioner, where he was in charge of policing the Notting Hill Carnival. A skilled media operator.

    http://news.independent.co.uk/uk/legal/article3127412.ece

    GUILTY, but Blair refuses to go

    0

    · Met convicted for failings that led to De Menezes death
    · Tories and Lib Dems demand resignation
    · Commissioner says shooting was an isolated tragedy

    Vikram Dodd, crime correspondent
    The Guardian

    Jean Charles De Menezes
    Jean Charles de Menezes in a family picture. Photograph: EPA
     

    Sir Ian Blair vowed yesterday to stay on as Britain’s top police officer, despite sustained calls for his resignation, after his force was found guilty of “catastrophic” failings that led to the shooting dead of Jean Charles de Menezes.An Old Bailey jury found the Metropolitan police guilty of breaking health and safety law in July 2005 when De Menezes was killed after being mistaken for a suicide bomber. Fining the force £175,000 and ordering it to pay £385,000 in costs, judge Mr Justice Henriques called on the force to learn lessons.

    He said: “Every single failure here has been disputed. Some of these failings have been simply beyond explanation. There has been no single admission to any one of the alleged 19 failings.”

    The Conservatives and Liberal Democrats demanded Sir Ian resign as commissioner of the Met. But he was given public backing by home secretary, Jacqui Smith, and prime minister, Gordon Brown.

    Within the police service, the Guardian has learned that senior figures argued the force should plead guilty, but Sir Ian decided to fight the case. The unprecedented trial came after prosecutors said no individual officer could be held responsible for the electrician’s death, but that the force should be tried for failing to protect the public from risk.

    At the heart of the trial was the Met’s failure to follow its own plan on the morning of July 22 2005, thereby placing the public at risk. The force was hunting suicide bombers who had launched failed attacks on the capital’s transport system the previous day.

    Evidence led detectives to a block of flats in south London, and at 5am a senior commander ordered surveillance officers to be posted outside with support from elite firearms officers to stop and question anyone who emerged.

    But the firearms officers were not in place for more than four hours, so when De Menezes left the flats he was allowed to travel on two buses and then on to a tube train at Stockwell. It was only there that firearms officers caught up with him and he was shot seven times.

    Delivering their guilty verdict, the jury made clear that Cressida Dick, who led the operation, bore “no personal culpability”. Mr Justice Henriques said a “corporate failure” lay behind the tragedy. “This was very much an isolated breach brought about by quite extraordinary circumstances,” he said.

    But he said the failure to have firearms officers in place had led to the killing of the 27-year-old Brazilian. If the strategy had been followed, he said, it “would have prevented any suspect boarding the public transportation system and would … have avoided this terrible tragedy”.

    The prosecution had outlined 19 separate failures. Sentencing the Met, the judge highlighted particular shortcomings including commanding officers’ mistaken belief that surveillance officers following De Menezes had “positively” identified him as a terrorist. The control room at Scotland Yard was noisy, making communications difficult, said the judge, who added that the briefing firearms officers received was inaccurate and “unbalanced”.

    The judge praised the bravery of individual officers but said the force should learn lessons and questioned its tactics in the trial. He said the bill to the taxpayer could “very easily have been minimised”.

    After the verdict Sir Ian refused to consider resigning, saying the failings were not systemic: “The difficulties shown in this trial were those of an organisation struggling, on a single day, to get to grips with a simply extraordinary situation.”

    One of Britain’s most senior officers told the Guardian: “The Met should have pleaded guilty. The stuff that comes out is embarrassing for the Met even if it’s found not guilty.” He added: “Stockwell will damage him in the end. It’s his millstone and will be with him to the end.”

    The furore over the shooting will continue. The Independent Police Complaints Commission is considering the release of a report into the failings within days. A full inquest into the killing will take place next year, and the De Menezes family will also issue civil proceedings.

    Later this month Sir Ian will face a meeting of his police authority where he will be questioned about the guilty verdict.

    The shadow home secretary, David Davis, said the commissioner’s position was “untenable” and the Lib Dem home affairs spokesman, Nick Clegg, said his resignation was unavoidable.

    The Met is under fire for its trial tactics. The closing speech of its barrister Ronald Thwaites QC angered De Menezes’s family, who said it was a “smear”. They demanded Sir Ian resign.

    De Menezes murder: Police guilty of errors

    0

    By Cahal Milmo

    Some 831 days after Jean Charles de Menezes was shot dead by police with seven bullets to the head, the first public declaration of blame was made when the Metropolitan Police was found guilty yesterday of making 19 catastrophic errors in the operation which led to his death.

    The conviction of Britain’s biggest police force at the Old Bailey for failing in its duty to ensure the safety of the public brought immediate calls for Sir Ian Blair, the Commissioner of the Metropolitan Police, to resign.

    Mr de Menezes, a 27-year-old Brazilian electrician, was killed by armed officers on 22 July 2005, after he was mistaken for one of the men behind the failed suicide attacks on London Transport the day before. Despite two inquiries by the Independent Police Complaints Commission, no charges or disciplinary action has yet been brought against any of the officers involved.

    At the dramatic conclusion of an unprecedented four-week trial, the force was convicted of committing a succession of mistakes during a surveillance operation on the block of flats in south London where Mr de Menezes lived.

    The failed operation resulted in the Brazilian being allowed to board two buses and a Tube train despite pursuing officers believing that he could be Hussain Osman, one of four fugitive bombers who had lived in the same apartment block.

    The court heard that during a six-hour period on 22 July, 19 key failings took place that included an “inexplicable” four-hour delay in sending a team from the CO19 firearms unit to support the surveillance team and a critical breakdown in communication in the “noisy and chaotic” control room which led to senior officers, led by “Gold Commander” Cressida Dick, wrongly believing that Mr de Menezes had been identified five times as Osman.

    Mr Justice Henriques, the trial judge, said he accepted the botched operation was “very much an isolated breach brought about by quite extraordinary circumstances”. In an unusual move, the jury added a rider to its verdict saying that Ms Dick, now a deputy assistant commissioner, bore “no personal culpability” for the failings that led to Mr de Menezes’s death.

    But the judge underlined that the Yard had fallen short to a “significant and meaningful extent” and significant aspects of its conduct remained unjustified: “One person died and many others placed in potential danger … There was a serious failure of accurate communication which has not been explained.”

    The force was fined £175,000 and ordered to pay costs of £385,000 after it was found unanimously guilty of a single charge of breaching section 3(i) of the 1974 Health and Safety at Work Act, which requires all employers to do everything reasonable to protect the public from harm during their activities. The jury took less than five hours to reach its verdict.

    The family of Mr de Menezes expressed fury at the conduct of the Yard and its lawyers during the trial, accusing the police of a “sickening” attempt to smear the Brazilian by suggesting his behaviour and personal life could have contributed to his death. The jury was told a post-mortem examination showed Mr de Menezes had taken cocaine — although it was highly unlikely the drug could have still been affecting him on the day of his death — and had a forged immigration stamp in his passport.

    Ronald Thwaites QC, for the defence, said it was possible these factors explained why the Brazilian had allegedly behaved in an “aggressive and threatening manner” as armed police approached him in a London Underground train carriage. Police were also accused of manipulating a composite photograph of Mr de Menezes and Osman to make the two men look more alike. The claim was strongly denied.

    Harriet Wistrich, the solicitor for the de Menezes family, called for a “full and fearless” inquest now to be held into the events of 22 July, insisting that evidence presented in the trial and available elsewhere justified the bringing of manslaughter charges against individual officers.

    The 19 failings outlined by the prosecution

    1. Failing adequately to communicate Commander McDowell’s strategy to the officers who took over the running of the operation on 22 July

    2. Failing adequately to plan for or carry out his strategy for controlling the premises

    3. A ‘confused and inconsistent’ understanding among the Scotland Yard control room officers and the surveillance officers of what the strategy was for Scotia Road

    4. Failure to deploy officers to stop and question people emerging from Scotia Road

    5. Failure to ensure that a CO19 firearms team was there when Mr de Menezes emerged from the communal doorway

    6. A failure to have a contingency plan to deal with people emerging from the flats before CO19 arrived

    7. Failure to stop and question people emerging from the flats

    8. Failure to identify a “safe and appropriate” area where those leaving could be stopped and questioned

    9. “Inaccurate and unbalanced” briefings given to firearms officers at Leman Street and Nightingale Lane, gave them “inadequate and inaccurate information”

    10. Information about the identification of Mr de Menezes, his clothing, demeanour and “likely level of threat” was not properly or accurately told to officers, particularly firearms officers;

    11. Failure to ensure that doubts about the correctness of the identification of Mr de Menezes were communicated to officers in the control room in Scotland Yard

    12. Failure by control room officers to satisfy themselves that a positive identification of Mr de Menezes as the suspect had been made by the surveillance officers

    13. Failure to deploy firearms officers at relevant locations in time to stop Mr de Menezes getting on to the bus and in the Tube station

    14. Failure by firearms officers to satisfy themselves that a positive identification of Mr de Menezes as the suspect had been made by surveillance officers

    15. Failure to take effective steps to stop Tube trains or buses or take other “travel management steps” to minimise the risk to thetravelling public

    16. That Mr de Menezes was allowed twice to get on to a bus and to go into the Tube station despite being a suspected suicide bomber and emerging from an address linked to a suspected suicide bomber

    17. Failure to give a “clear or timely order” that Mr de Menezes must be stopped or arrested before entering Stockwell Tube station

    18. Failure to give accurate information to Commander Dick about where CO19 officers were when she was deciding if they or Special Branch officers should stop the suspect

    19. Failure to minimise the risk inherent in arresting Mr de Menezes by armed officers “whether in relation to the location, timing or manner of his arrest”

    Calls mount for Ian Blair to quit

    0

    By Jonathan Brown

    Sir Ian Blair, the Metropolitan Police commissioner, defiantly rejected opposition calls for his resignation yesterday, insisting that the shooting of Jean Charles de Menezes had occurred in the midst of the force’s “greatest operational challenge in a generation”.

    Sir Ian, who had been in the job only five months when the fatal shooting took place, justified his decision to stay, highlighting the trial judge’s comments that the failures which led to the tragedy “were not sustained or repeated”. He said it would now be his “personal task” to ensure the lessons had been learnt.

    He told reporters outside the Old Bailey following the guilty verdict: “This case thus provides no evidence at all of systematic failure by the Metropolitan Police. And I therefore intend to continue to lead the Met in its increasingly successful efforts to reduce crime and deter and disrupt terrorist activities in London and elsewhere in the United Kingdom.”

    The police chief received the immediate backing of both Downing Street and the Home Secretary, Jacqui Smith, who said that Sir Ian had her “full confidence”. However, she added: “We will consider carefully the implications of the verdict with the police service.”

    But the shadow Home Secretary, David Davis, said the commissioner’s position was now “untenable” and he should stand down to restore public confidence in the police.

    Mr Davis added: “The trial has shed light on the serial failures that led to the tragic death of Mr de Menezes. They include failures of organisation, command and operations. The failures were systemic, falling within the clear responsibility of the commissioner of the Metropolitan Police.”

    The Liberal Democrats’ home affairs spokesman and leadership favourite, Nick Clegg, said Sir Ian’s resignation was now “unavoidable”. He added: “While the ruling undoubtedly raises complex questions about future police operations, the simple priority today is to show that we have a police force in London which is prepared to accept full responsibility for its actions.”

    In his statement, Sir Ian defended the decision of the Metropolitan Police to plead not guilty to the charges, which will now cost the force £385,000 in legal costs, in addition to the £175,000 fine it must also pay.

    He again praised the bravery of the police on the day of the shooting, saying officers were involved in a “race against time” and “doing their best” to handle the threat posed by the failed suicide bombers the previous day. Sir Ian’s tenure as Britain’s most senior officer cop has been dogged by controversy — not least because of the events at Stockwell Tube station. Described as New Labour’s favourite policeman by his opponents, he was heavily criticised after appearing to mislead the public by declaring on the day of the shooting that Mr de Menezes was a suspect — despite later claims that a member of Sir Ian’s office had known he was innocent.

    A report by the Independent Police Complaints Commission accepted the commissioner’s assertion that he did not know a mistake had been made until 24 hours after the shots were fired. However, the IPCC found that Assistant Commissioner Andy Hayman had “misled” senior officers by failing to tell them the dead man was not a bomber.

    In his statement, Sir Ian backed Commander Cressida Dick, the officer in charge of the operation which led to the shooting. He echoed the remarks of the jury foreman, who said: “In reaching this verdict the jury attaches no personal culpability to Commander Dick.”

    VIDEO: Hilary Clinton & election fraud

    0

    Hillary! Uncensored, The Final Cut 1 Hour Documentary, will debut on www.youperview.com on November 5. Ranked as the #1 video on Google Top 100 videos in the world, the 13 minute unfinished “trailer” was leaked to the world on October 7, 2007 before it could be edited down to 3 minutes to promote the 1 hr film.

    It uses exclusive Home Videos of Hillary by her largest donor, Peter Paul, to expose the Illegalities that won her Senate Election & the Obstructions of Justice That Keep Her There- (www.hillcap.org) and (www.peterfpaul.com

    Arnie Backs Biochemical Spaying That Harms Kids

    0

    Governor Schwarzenegger Backs Aerial Biochemical Spraying That Harms Children

    Rami Nagel

    On September 9th, 2007 several planes hired by the State of California Food and Agricultural Department (CDFA) flying at an altitude of approximately 500ft sprayed the untested biochemical, CheckMate®OLR-F, on over 30,000 citizens in Monterey and other surrounding cities in California. This occurred without the permission of the citizens. The spraying continued for three nights from approximately 8pm to 5am. About 1,500 pounds of biochemical were dumped on the cities. Many citizens did not even know what was happening when the planes were buzzing overhead.

    An 11 month old child nearly died from breathing difficulties. A six year old child developed asthma as a result of the aerial spraying. Over one hundred people signed affidavits stating that they got sick from the spraying. Hundreds of people had symptoms like; shortness of breath, headaches, dizziness, burning lungs, nausea, and muscle aches.

    The excuse for aerial spraying is not a deadly disease carrying mosquito, but a moth whose larva may eat some leaves of some plants; called the Light Brown Apple Moth (LBAM). The CDFA considers the moth an invasive species since it is from Australia. Yet, evidence suggests that the moth has been in California for many years, living peacefully. In response to the moth, the CDFA set up relatively harmless sticky traps, which have captured nearly every Light Brown Apple Moth in the Northern California region.

    Governor Schwarzenegger is a strong supporter of the declared emergency; the need to spray untested biochemicals on humans to stop the LBAM from destroying crops.

    This aerial spraying violates several state, federal and international laws. It violates the right to personal safety given by the California State Constitution, the very document that creates the California government. It violates the Americans with Disabilities Act, which protects people with chemical sensitivities and other disabilities from discrimination. It violates the Federal constitutional right to personal liberty. It violates the EPA’s laws against spraying pesticides on people. It violates human rights laws that say that human experimentation without consent is unethical and immoral. It violates criminal laws that claim it is a crime to poison children, or anyone else. It violates pollution laws to spray a toxic substance over plants, animals, and waterways. It violates laws against organized crime and it violates the very tenants of our democracy; a system of government designed to represent the people, not to poison the people to represent private agri-business interests.

    Recently, in a series of rapid fire events, the CDFA declared a state of emergency relating to the LBAM claiming that the moths are about to destroy a huge portion of the state’s agricultural crops. The claim is that the LBAM will cause hundreds of millions of dollars of crop damage. Due to this supposed “emergency,” the CDFA claims it must immediately spray an untested biochemical to eliminate this threat as soon as possible despite the reported harms. Mind you, these moth’s only travel within a 20-30 yard diameter of their birth place during their entire life.

    The state of emergency is a false declaration because the CDFA cannot produce any meaningful evidence that the LBAM can or would destroy crops and the sticky traps are effective at containing the moths. In Hawaii, the LBAM has been a help to the ecosystem by destroying invasive species and there’s no evidence of crop harm for the last 100 years.

    The only emergency seems to be that the State of California, under Governor Schwarzenegger’s helm, has an urgent need to spray as many humans; men, women, children, pregnant women, people with allergies, the elderly, and the sick, with chemicals. There is no sensible explanation as to why they want to do this, nor is there any explanation as to why they think that spraying pesticides on people is a good thing to do.

    Spraying chemicals, safe or not safe, on humans against their will is illegal. It is a crime! The Nuremberg Code, established after the horrors of World War II, prohibits human experimentation without the consent of the person who is being experimented upon.

    The state does not care about the over 200 health complaints, nor the laws they are violating, but rather cares about the commercial agricultural business. Trade partners with the US may not accept shipments of plants or produce that may have the LBAM. The CDFA has given various figures of the estimated crop damage that the LBAM will cause. Their estimates range from 100 million to 2.7 billion dollars. Now, these estimates are not based on any scientific survey but rather on their opinion and fears.

    Even if the harmless moth could cause such damage, it is a dangerous precedent to place the health and safety of United States citizens, especially infants and children, secondary to money. So the CDFA and Governor Schwarzenegger has determined that 100 million dollars of possible damage gives them justification to poison children with chemicals. In this case, economic factors have been given priority over liberty and human value.

    And the question I have been asking myself is – who is going to protect the children who will be sprayed?

    So what chemicals make up Checkmate OLR-F and LBAM-F Products?

    This has been the technical question many people have been asking. The specific details of the chemicals seem to be of less importance than the simple fact that these are chemicals. Synthetic chemicals do not have a place on our bodies without our permission. And they do not have a place in our children’s bodies who have a much lower tolerance to environmental toxins!

    My understanding is that approximately 15-20% of the main biochemical is made up of a synthetically derived moth pheromone. This pheromone supposedly confuses the moths and disrupts their mating cycles. I am unaware of any scientific evidence to prove that the pheromone is effective at controlling the LBAM population. I supposed the CDFA’s plan is to see how it works after a year or more of spraying. This is essentially biochemical testing. And the problem is that they are doing it on the public on a large scale, against the people’s will. Due to the declaration of an emergency, the CDFA allow themselves to bypass the normal environmental review process meant to examine such questions.

    The concern with the Checkmate chemicals is not so much about the pheromone, but rather the pheromone distribution system. The pheromone is encapsulated in a micro-capsule (like a miniature pill) which the CDFA brags is biodegradable. What they do not tell you is that the capsule needs to dry out to biodegrade. In water environments (like your body), the pheromone stays encapsulated. The micro-capsule takes approximately 30 days to degrade. The full degradation occurring within 30 days is unlikely because Monterey and Santa Cruz Counties experience frequent rain and dampness from the Pacific Ocean. Thus, the people in the areas that are sprayed will be inhaling and touching miniature pills. Once in their bodies, the capsule will likely slowly degrade causing moth pheromone to be released directly into people’s bloodstream.

    The micro-capsule is made out of what are falsely called “inert” ingredients. Again, the EPA brags that these “inert” ingredients are mostly ionized water. However, they forget to tell you that there are also two known dangerous toxic substances in the inerts – tricaprylyl methyl ammonium chloride (TMAC) and polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate (PPI).

    The breathing problems and asthma-like conditions are known side effects of PPI. So how is the state legally able to spray it on people?

    The way they illegally avoid the law and lie to people, so that people will be lulled into a stupor, is by saying that PPI, along with other ingredients, are actually not in the pesticide. Well, this is about 5% true and 95% a lie. Say you are baking a cake; you use flour, sugar, some eggs and other ingredients, and you bake it. One could argue that, in the final cake product, there is no flour but rather a new chemical compound called cake. In the same way, when PPI and other ingredients are processed, they meld and bind together and change their chemical form. They no longer resemble exactly their original substances, just like cake does not look much like the flour it was made of. When you examine the final biochemical, you will see no PPI but rather some new toxic substance.

    Since there is no independently verifiable evidence that these new chemical compounds are toxic or not, other than 117 signed affidavits of people who got sick, and since there is a so-called “emergency”, no thorough testing needs to be done. It is a devious way to avoid the law. The end result is that we must “trust” the EPA to say the chemicals are safe. It’s hard to trust the EPA because, for example, with water fluoridation the entire employee’s union at the EPA came out to say that water fluoridation is dangerous and harmful while the official position of the EPA is that water fluoridation is a good thing. It also becomes more difficult to win a court case against the aerial spraying when you cannot get any evidence that the chemicals are dangerous because you are not allowed to independently verify anything that the EPA alleges.

    Strangely, the CDFA came out with precautions for this “non-toxic” chemical. Recommendations such as; to close all your windows during the spray, to stay inside, to hose everything off in the morning before you touch it, and to not touch anything that is covered with the chemical residue (anything outside) were encouraged. These warnings are good ideas since the micro-capsule can easily be inhaled, stays stuck on things, or remains in the air. I recently checked the CDFA website looking to quote this document and they had removed all warnings about the chemical, claiming now that it is totally safe. Perhaps this was spurred by the CDFA Secretary of Agriculture A.G. Kawamura’s concern that citizens would waste too much water following the CDFA’s instructions to wash the chemical off of things before touching them. It is eerie how A.G. Kawamura is concerned about saving water and our environment, but is totally oblivious to the fact that hundreds of people have been poisoned due to his aerial spraying efforts.

    Another concern is the Checkmate OLR-F and LBAM-F warning label from the manufacturer:

    “Keep Out of Reach of Children”

    “Caution: Harmful if absorbed through the skin. Causes moderate eye irritation. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, or clothing. Harmful if inhaled. Avoid breathing vapor or spray mist.” The criminals at the CDFA claim we should not worry about this warning label. According to the CDFA’s toxicity theory, since the biochemical is going to be inhaled and touched in smaller doses, this warning is no longer necessary as it refers only to those who handle the chemicals.”

    Due to this premise, the CDFA insists that the 117 documented complaints of illnesses are psychosomatic and are not caused by the Checkmate. They continue to spray without thoroughly investigating these health claims. Infants cannot get psychosomatic illnesses because they are too young to make things up like that. The CDFA are hypocrites because when a doctor reports that someone is sick to the CDFA, and if that person had recently ingested certified raw milk, they automatically shut down the milk business even without evidence that the milk caused the illness. (The milk, in this case, is never the source of illness because the cows are healthy.) On one hand, they overly penalize raw milk producers for things that might cause illness and on the other hand they ignore cases which definitely cause illness by their own hands.

    Spraying chemicals on people is a crime, safe or not.

    This is an outrage and this is sickening.

    It used to be easy to turn a blind eye to government corruption because we could avoid it. You can avoid vaccinations by claiming an exemption. You can avoid polluted soaps and shampoos by buying natural ones, and you can avoid pesticide ridden foods by choosing organic. (In case you are wondering, strawberries and other produce sprayed with Checkmate will still be certified organic by the State, so you won’t know you are eating pesticide ridden produce.) But the citizens of Monterey, Santa Cruz, Seaside, Los Lomas and other communities consisting of over 100,000 people who are scheduled to be spray bombed, some beginning today for up to six nights in a row, do not have the choice. Their personal boundaries have been violently violated by the CDFA.

    Now, you cannot turn a blind eye anymore to what the government does. We need to acknowledge that these things are wrong, whether we can avoid them or not. When we do not stand up against evil, we affirm it. When we say what is happening is smart, we affirm that the evil doer is good because we do nothing to stop them.

    I encourage you, in every way possible, to not sit back here. When you see someone doing wrong, whether it is a relative, a neighbor, or the local government, speak up. We need to stop this juggernaut. It is truly a terrifying experience because I have a pregnant partner and a young child and I have to move away from here to avoid being sprayed, to avoid being force vaccinated with synthetic moth hormone. The last bastion of hope is that the Santa Cruz City Council narrowly voted to sue the criminals doing this. It is unclear whether their lawsuit will be effective.

    Checkmate.

    The name for the biochemical Checkmate has two meanings. First, to check (stop) mating. Although there is no reliable evidence that it will check mating, for all we know, it could cause the moths to mutate and mate more. The second meaning of checkmate is a position in the game of Chess. This is a position when you have your opponent trapped no matter what move they do. They cannot win so they must resign and lose the game. Ironically, it is not the moths who are in the position of checkmate, but rather the citizens of Monterey, Marina, Pacific Grove, Sand City and Seaside (cities near Carmel and the famous Pebble Beach Golf course). These citizens must literally run, and escape, for the sake of their children from their own homes because a toxic cloud of government corruption is about to rain down upon them. It is these citizens who are in the position of checkmate. The difference here is that losing can mean a chronic disease, illness, and perhaps worse.

    What you can do is call your state and federal representatives and encourage them to push through laws that prohibit aerial spraying. Encourage California State Senators and Federal Representatives to engage in a criminal investigation because poisoning people, children, and the elderly is a crime. Just because the people engaged in this work for the government, it doesn’t make them immune to our laws. Support 1hope.org, and the City of Santa Cruz, to fight back.

    Tell everyone!

    Spread this news. Let’s tell the whole world the truth about civil rights in the good ole’ US of A.

    If enough people know, this cause will be greatly advanced. Also, process your feelings about this, the anger, the rage, the terror, and the hatred it brings up. Feel how you want to protect those in the aerial spray path, that inner voice speaking within you saying, “NO! this is wrong, it must stop”.

    May the criminals face the real consequences of their crimes and be brought to justice. And may the people of Northern California be protected from untested synthetic chemicals forced upon them.

    See below for more information, action items, and pesticide ingredients.

    More information:

    See 1hope.org, www.lbamspray.info, and www.stopthespray.org (You can sign the petition)

    Also California State Senator Laird has written an excellent letter, opposing the spraying, citing dozens of unawsererd questions about the CDFA’s shameful behavior. This can help you understand the issue better. (democrats.assembly.ca.gov/MEMBERS/A27/moth.htm)

    Published Pesticide Ingredients Scheduled For Human Experimentation beginning Wednesday 10/24/07 (There may be other unpublished ones)

    polymethylene polyphenyl isocyanate (Pesticide manufacturer Suterra acknowledges this ingredient is used to make Checkmate, but EPA claims ingredient is not in final product)

    (E)-11-Tetradecen-1-yl Acetate
    (E,E) -9,11 Tetradecadien-1-yl Acetate
    Crosslinked polyurea polymer
    Butylated Hydroxytoluene
    Polyvinyl Alcohol
    Tricaprylyl Methyl Ammonium Chloride
    Sodium Phosphate
    Ammonium Phosphate
    1,2-benzisothiozoli-3-one
    2-hydroxy-4-n-octyloxybenzophenone

    Action List:

    The best thing you can do is contact Governor Schwarzenegger, even if you are not a California citizen. Governor Schwarzenegger has the power to stop this. Right now, he clearly supports the program claiming such aerial spraying is necessary. Tell him you are opposed to his need to spray toxic chemicals on children to stop a harmless moth.

    GOVERNOR ARNOLD SCHWARZENEGGER
    General information: (916) 445-2841 2841 (press #1, #5, #0)
    Fax: (916) 445-4633
    Email governor@govmail.ca.gov
    Chief of Staff is Susan Kennedy

    CA DEPARTMENT OF FOOD AND AGRICULTURE
    Public Affairs Officer: (916) 654-0462 or
    (800) 491-1899 (press #1, #6)
    cdfapublicaffairs@cdfa.ca.gov
    Secretary A.G. Kawamura (he makes the final decision on spraying):
    akawamura@cdfa.ca.gov
    John Connell, the state’s expert in insect eradication: jconnell@cdfa.ca.gov
    Steve Lyle (public affairs) in charge of public communication: slyle@cdfa.ca.gov
    Nancy Lungren (spokesperson for Kawamura): nlungren@cdfa.ca.gov

    CA DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH
    General Information: (916) 558-1784
    Director, Mark B. Horton, MD, MSPH: (916) 558-1700, mark.horton@cdph.ca.gov
    Kevin Reilly, Deputy Director: Kevin.Reilly@cdph.ca.gov
    Online feedback/email:
    http://www.cdph.ca.gov/programservices/contact/Pages/default.aspx

    ASSEMBLYMAN JOHN LAIRD (strongly opposes current spray plans)
    (831) 649-2832 or (916) 319-2127
    Assemblymember.Laird@assembly.ca.gov

    SENATOR ABEL MALDONADO
    (831) 657-6315 or (916) 651-4015 or go to his web page to send him an email

    REPRESENTATIVE SAM FARR
    c/o Alec.Arago@mail.house.gov

    DIANE FEINSTEIN
    c/o daniel_chen@feinstein.senate.gov

    About the author

    Rami Nagel is a father who cares about the way we affect each other, our children, and our planet through our lifestyle choices. His health background is in hands-on energy healing, Hatha & Bhakti yoga and the Pathwork.
    Rami is author of several health resources, http://www.healingourchildren.net ,
    http://www.preconceptionhealth.org ,
    http://www.curetoothdecay.com , and
    http://www.yourreturn.org

    Japan pulls out of Afghanistan coalition

    0

    Justin McCurry in Tokyo
    Guardian Unlimited

    A Pakistani destroyer (l) is refuelled by the Japanese vessel Tokiwa in the Arabian Sea
    A Pakistani destroyer (l) is refuelled by the Japanese vessel Tokiwa in the Arabian Sea. Photograph: Japan Maritime Self-Defense Force/AP

    Japan’s government has ordered its navy to end its mission in support of coalition forces in Afghanistan after failing to win opposition backing to renew the deployment before today’s midnight deadline.

    Since 2001, Japan has provided about 126m gallons of fuel to US, British and other vessels operating in the Indian Ocean. The two Japanese ships on duty – the supply ship Tokiwa and the destroyer Kirisame – are expected back home in about three weeks.

    Opposition parties, which gained control of the upper house of Japan’s parliament in July, said the mission did not have a UN mandate and possibly violated the country’s pacifist constitution, which severely limits the military’s overseas role.

    The prime minister, Yasuko Fukuda, today vowed to pass new legislation that would enable Japan to play a smaller, but symbolically important part in the US-led war on terror.

    “To fulfill our responsibility as part of international efforts towards eradicating terrorism, we need to continue our refueling mission,” he said in a statement. “The government will do all it can to pass the special bill for the refueling mission so we can restart our mission as soon as possible.”

    Earlier this week, Mr Fukuda failed in a last-ditch attempt to persuade Ichiro Ozawa, who leads the biggest opposition party, to support the mission.

    The withdrawal was a blow to US efforts to keep the coalition together. Several senior US officials have publicly urged Mr Ozawa to think again and yesterday the ambassadors of the US, Britain and nine other countries met dozens of Japanese MPs to stress the value of the country’s contribution.

    The Australian foreign minister, Alexander Downer, said he was concerned by the withdrawal. “Defeating terrorists is one of the highest security challenges the world faces,” he said. “It is a global challenge and combating terrorism is a collective responsibility.”

    But US defence department spokesman Geoff Morrell said the decision would not have “any operational impact whatsoever”. Japan provided about one-fifth of all fuel consumed by coalition ships between December 2001 and February 2003, according to Pentagon data, but only about 7% since then.

    Officials in Washington denied that the US defence secretary, Robert Gates, would apply more pressure on Japan when he visits Tokyo next week.

    The timing of the visit was “purely coincidental”, a Pentagon official was quoted as telling Japanese reporters in Washington. “I assure you the United States has no intention of injecting itself into that legislative process.”

    The issue is expected to be on the agenda, however, when Mr Fukuda meets the US president, George Bush, later this month.

    VIDEO: Bye Bye USA – Welcome Slave State

    0

    “Re-organizing” the Americas for big business

    Not only is Bush rewriting the Constitution as he plans to invade yet another country…

    Apparently been busy signing away US sovereignty to a scheme cooked up by David
    Rockefeller.

    And, for the most part, Congress and the US news media sleeps.

    New currency, borderless borders, and a mega-highway carved right into the middle of the US to make it easier for Big Business to take the Wal-Martization of the US to a whole ‘nother level.

    Yes it’s insane and yes they’re working on it

    http://www.brasschecktv.com/page/183.html

    George Bush’s Personal Spy Drone

    0

    By Sharon Weinberger

    DARPA, the Pentagon’s far-side research agency, has a plan to send a robotic surveillance drone anywhere in the world within an hour. And it is apparently intended for one particular user: The President of the United States. Space News reports on this “Rapid Eye” unmanned aerial vehicle project:

    071031techfuturemars01_2 The idea is to give the U.S. president a first, quick look at the scene, DARPA Director Tony Tether said, following his talk at the Geoint 2007 Symposium in San Antonio.

    “We got this idea from NASA,” Tether said.

    Engineers from NASA’s Ames Research Center in California and Langley Research Center in Virginia, who are working on competing concepts for “planetary aircraft,” began speaking with DARPA officials earlier this year about adapting some of their concepts for needs on Earth.

    The concept of using rockets to deploy sensors as rapidly as possible to any hot spot throughout the world also is a goal of the U.S. Air Force’s Operationally Responsive Space initiative.

    “We didn’t have that in mind,” Tether said, noting that DARPA’s concept for Rapid Eye is to support “the president.” Nevertheless, the same concept could be used to support military personnel in the field, Tether said.

    Sounds interesting. Now, I’m hoping there’s an obvious answer to this question: How will Russia’s early warning system know — prior to reentry — that the zillion-mile-per-hour projectile is carrying a drone, and not, say, a nuclear warhead? 

    This is the debate that’s tangled up in any number of the Pentagon’s so-called “Global Strike” projects. There have been various schemes for a conventional version of either a land- or submarine-launched ballistic missile — both ideas that Congress has been reluctant to fund. The benefit is clear: The Pentagon would like to be anywhere in the world within an hour, and it seems the only way to do this is with something that looks like a ballistic missile. Rapid Eye is somewhat different, of course, because it’s supposed to drop a surveillance platform somewhere, and not a weapon. In any case, putting things on ICBMs is an idea that just doesn’t seem to go away.

    The essential problem is that you have to convince Russia that the thing on the missile is not a nuke, and calling it “Drone One” might not be enough.

    United Nations To Vastly Expand Global Police Force

    0

    SLOBODAN LEKIC

    With the world facing new security threats, the U.N. is planning for an unprecedented expansion of its police missions. U.N. officials say a shift in the nature of conflicts requires revamped peacekeeping operations.

    Traditionally, the U.N. has facilitated peace between warring states by sending its blue-helmeted soldiers to man buffer zones between their armies. But today, interventions are increasingly focused on settling civil wars.

    “In recent years the character of conflicts has changed dramatically from mainly state-to-state wars (to) intrastate conflicts which pit various factions within the boundaries of a single state,” U.N. Police Chief Andrew Hughes said.

    As a result, there is a greater need than ever for conventional police duties in post-conflict situations.

    Nowhere is this highlighted more clearly than in Darfur.

    The U.N. is recruiting nearly 7,000 police officers to assist some 20,000 U.N. peacekeeper-soldiers in trying to end the four-year conflict in western Sudan.

    Police involvement in peacekeeping dates from the inaugural 1948 mission, when first Secretary-General Trygve Lie urgently dispatched several dozen U.N. security guards from New York to Jerusalem when Jewish extremists assassinated the U.N. peace envoy Folke Bernadotte.

    In later interventions, however, the U.N. has come to rely mostly on soldiers to monitor cease-fires or interpose themselves between warring sides, as happened in the Sinai after the 1956 Egypt-Israel war, or later in disputed Kashmir, Cyprus and Lebanon.

    The Balkan wars of the 1990s put renewed focus on peacekeeping by police units.

    “In such conflicts, once peace is restored the U.N. then has a key role in re-establishing rule of law, which includes police, courts, prisons and the whole justice sector, and to ensure that they rebuild or build up from scratch their police services,” Hughes said.

    But Hughes emphasized that police and military missions have critical differences.

    Soldiers have different rules of engagement that provide for the use of lethal force and are therefore not suited for such duties such as apprehending criminals, escorting children to schools or calming rioting mobs.

    “For us the use of force is absolutely the last option,” Hughes said. “Our police are trained much more extensively to defuse the situation, and negotiations are by far and away the biggest tool we have.”

    A new Police Division was set up in October 2000 as part of the U.N. Department of Peacekeeping Operations with a staff of several dozen experienced police officers from contributing countries.

    Currently, there are about 70,000 U.N. peacekeeping troops deployed worldwide, with an additional 9,500 police officers, mostly in Africa – such as Liberia, Ivory Coast, Congo, Burundi and Western Sahara – as well as in Haiti, Kosovo and East Timor.

    With U.N. missions in Chad and Darfur coming on line in 2008, the ranks of U.N. police are to swell to nearly 17,000 officers from more than 100 countries.

    “Our duties included everything a policeman can possibly do, from breaking up domestic disturbances to chasing and arresting armed criminals,” said Irhad Campara, a Bosnian policeman who served in the U.N. mission in East Timor.

    “In addition, we recruited, vetted and trained from scratch East Timor’s new national police force.”

    Whereas military units are dispatched by governments, police officers are recruited on individual contracts from contributing nations. They continue to collect their home pay but receive an extra daily allowance of $150 and accommodation from the U.N.

    Not all operations have gone smoothly, however, and the U.N. police force has suffered several high-profile reverses over the past several years.

    In 2004, U.N. police officers failed to stem the violence in Kosovo when thousands of ethnic Albanians rioted in a backlash against the Serb minority, killing 19 people, displacing thousands, and destroying hundreds of Serb homes, churches and monasteries.

    And in East Timor, the U.N.-trained police force collapsed last year following an army mutiny, necessitating another mission to rebuild it anew.

    To hopefully prevent such calamities, the U.N. is preparing two initiatives to facilitate rapid police deployment to crisis areas and to enable them to function more effectively from the outset.

    The first is the introduction of Formed Police Units – 160-strong contingents of officers from a single country – skilled in dealing with a wide spectrum of problems, from riot control to arresting armed criminals.

    The initial unit, an all-female company of Indian officers, has recently arrived in Liberia to join the U.N. force there.

    The second initiative is to create a standing police detachment of about two dozen officers who can be deployed together with U.N. military units to a trouble spot, thus allowing the police to be present from the start of a U.N. mission.

    Previously, the slow and complicated process of recruiting volunteers from participating countries meant police recruits lagged an average of nine months behind the soldiers.

    But critics say these measures are insufficient.

    William Durch from the Henry L. Stimson Center, a think tank in Washington, proposed creating a ready reserve of about 11,000 police volunteers worldwide who would be paid retainer fees while on standby and who could be quickly mobilized for future U.N. missions.

    “The system by which the U.N. recruits its people must be completely revamped to be able to provide security personnel in the critical initial phases of a mission,” said Durch, an expert on peacekeeping operations.

    Congressional Shame and Duplicity

    By Stephen Lendman
    RINF Alternative News

    The latest October Reuters/Zogby Index shows record low approval ratings for George Bush and Congress – 24% for the president that looks almost giddy compared to the bottom-scraping 11% level for the nation’s lawmakers. It’s more evidence that the criminal class in Washington is bipartisan and hoping November, 2008 will change things is pure fantasy.

    A voter groundswell sent a message last November to end the Iraq war and occupation. Instead, the Democrat-led 110th Congress continues to fund it generously. In May, the House overwhelmingly passed HR 1585, the FY 2008 National Defense Authorization Act. It calls for $506.8 billion for DOD plus $141.8 billion (of the $150.5 billion White House request) for ongoing Iraq and Afghanistan operations. The Senate followed with a similar bill on October 1 with only three opposing votes against it. Neither bill proposed an Iraq withdrawal timeline, and final legislation has yet to be sent to the president.

    Add on further amounts like George Bush’s latest $46 billion request putting FY 2008 supplemental war-funding above $196 billion and rising. Congress will approve it and more in spite of Democrats signaling a protracted budget showdown ahead. The only showdown will be over how much pork will be added to the final appropriation and for what purpose.

    Democrats also back the administration’s push to attack Iran by echoing what the Israeli Lobby calls “The Iranian Threat.” War with Iran is AIPAC’s top priority, and key Democrats in Congress are on board hyping a non-existent threat to prepare the public for what may be coming. Earlier in March, Speaker Pelosi removed a provision from an appropriations bill that would have required George Bush to get congressional approval before attacking Iran. Then in July, the Senate unanimously (97 – 0) passed the Lieberman amendment that practically endorses war if it’s declared. It affirmed George Bush’s baseless charges that Tehran funds, trains and arms Iraqi resistance fighters “who are contributing to the destabilization of Iraq and are responsible for the murder of members of the United States Armed Forces.”

    The House added its voice on September 25 by voting 397 – 16 for the Iran Counter-Proliferation Act of 2007 that imposes sanctions on non-US companies investing in Iran’s oil sector. The next day the Senate acted again by overwhelmingly (79 – 22) passing the Kyl-Lieberman amendment that calls for US policy to “combat, contain and (stop Iran by use of) diplomatic, economic, intelligence and military instruments.” Other bellicose language in the resolution stated:

    — “the United States should designate Iran’s Islamic Revolutionary Guards Corp as a foreign terrorist organization….and place (it) on the list of Specially Designated Global Terrorists….it should be the policy of the United States to stop inside Iraq the violent activities and destabilizing influence of the Government of the Islamic Republic of Iran, its foreign facilitators such as Lebanese Hezbollah, and its indigenous Iraqi proxies.”

    This measure helped smooth the way for George Bush’s October 25 unilateral imposition of sanctions discussed below. It was an unprecendented move against another nation’s military Senator Jim Webb (voting no) said provides “a backdoor method of gaining congressional validation for military action, without one hearing (or) serious debate (and that the action) is Dick Cheney’s fondest pipe dream.”

    George Bush acted provocatively twice. At his October 17 news conference, he menacingly said he believes Iran “want(s) to have the capacity, the knowledge in order to make a nuclear weapon….it’s in the world’s interests to prevent them from doing so….If Iran had a nuclear weapon, it would be a dangerous threat to world peace….So….if you’re interested in avoiding World War III” this possibility must be prevented implying war (potentially using first-strike nuclear weapons) is the way to do it.

    On October 25 Bush acted again to counter China and Russia’s opposition to sweeping UN Security Council measures. He unilaterally imposed harsh new sanctions against Iran’s Revolutionary Guard (IRGC), its Quds Force, three state-owned banks and over 20 Iranian companies. The IRGC was named as “proliferators of weapons of mass destruction,” and the Quds Force was called a “supporter of terrorism.”

    Democrats buy this stuff and ignore IAEA chief Mohamed ElBaradei’s latest October 28 statement that repeated his earlier ones. He said he had no evidence Iran is building or seeks to build nuclear weapons and accused the Bush administration of adding “fuel to the fire” with its bellicose rhetoric. The “loyal opposition” prefers instead to accept White House press secretary Dana Perino’s October 29 charge that Iran “is a country that is enriching and reprocessing uranium and the reason one does that is to lead towards a nuclear weapon.”

    This accusation and new administration sanctions ratchet up tension further and amount to what one analyst called “a warning shot across the bow (that stops short of) a signal we’re going to war,” but it’s got other observers thinking the likelihood is greater than ever with Congress on board. The move also caught Vladimir Putin’s attention in Lisbon where he was attending an EU leader summit. “Why worsen the situation and bring it to a dead end” with sanctions or military action,” he said. He then added a pointed reference to George Bush stating: “Running around like a madman with a razor blade, waving it around, is not the best way to resolve the situation.”

    Newly imposed sanctions won’t affect US companies. They’re already barred from doing business directly in Iran, but they do target their foreign subsidiaries and other foreign-based ones with threats of penalties and exclusion from the US market. It remains to be seen how effective they’ll be as key EU countries as well as China, Russia, India and others have growing economic ties to Iran. They won’t be eager to sever them or join the US campaign for a wider Middle East war. In addition, Iran is a major oil supplier. With the price of crude touching $96 a barrel on November 1 (and December futures up to $125), any cutoff or severe reduction of supply guarantees it’ll top $100 and make a global economic slowdown or recession much more likely.

    Nonetheless, the Bush war machine presses on with congressional Democrats aboard. Presidential candidates from both parties support Bush’s move, and Democrat front runner Hillary Clinton is as hawkish as Joe Lieberman and John McCain. They both endorse attacking Iran, and McCain believes striking Iran’s nuclear sites “is a possibility that is maybe closer to reality than we are discussing tonight.”

    Clinton is just as bellicose, is close to AIPAC, and in an earlier speech said: “The security and freedom of Israel must be decisive and remain at the core of any American approach to the Middle East. (We dare not) waver from this (firm) commitment.” She was also quoted in the current issue of Foreign Affairs saying: “Iran poses a long-term strategic challenge to the United States, our NATO allies and Israel. It is the country that most practices state-sponsored terrorism, and it uses its surrogates to supply explosives that kill US troops in Iraq….(Iran) must not not be permitted to build or acquire nuclear weapons. If Iran (won’t comply with) the will of the international community, all options must remain on the table.”

    The only give in her position (that’s hardly any at all) is wanting congressional approval for any future military action. Up to now, that’s been pro forma rubber stamp. It’ll be no different if George Bush orders an attack as congressional Democrat leaders, including Hillary Clinton, have already signaled their approval.

    John Richardson wrote on October 18 in Esquire.com that two former high-ranking Bush administration National Security Council officials fear the worst. They’re Middle East experts Flynt Leverett and Hillary Mann, and they’re reacting publicly. They believe war with Iran has been in the cards for years, and we’re “getting closer and closer to the tripline.” Key for them was the unprecedented move to name Iran’s Revolutionary Guard Quds Force a terrorist organization.

    Richardson lays out what they think will happen: UN diplomacy will fail because Russia and China won’t agree to harsh sanctions. Iran’s policies won’t change without “any meaningful incentive from the US. That will trigger a….White House (response with) a serious risk (George Bush) would decide to order an attack on the Iranian nuclear installations and probably a wider target zone.” This, in turn, “would result in a dramatic increase in attacks on US (Iraq) forces, attacks by proxy forces like Hezbollah, and an unknown reaction from….Afghanistan and Pakistan, where millions admire Iran’s resistance.” Attacking Iran “could engulf America in a war with the entire Muslim world.” The article also quotes former CIA officer and author Robert Baer (from Time magazine) saying an unnamed highly placed White House official believes “IEDs are a casus belli for this administration. There will be an attack on Iran.”

    The London Times raised the betting odds further for one in its October 21 report. Columnist Michael Smith wrote: UK defense sources disclosed that “British (Special Air Service – SAS) forces have crossed into Iran several times (along with other special forces, the Australian SAS and American special-operation troops) as part of a secret border war against the Iranian Revolutionary Guard’s Al-Quds special forces.” They engaged in “at least half a dozen intense firefights” along the Iran-Iraq border in what looks like deliberate US-UK efforts to provoke Iran into providing justification for a major American attack.

    Speculation one looms has been around for some time, and if it comes, it won’t surprise observers like Iran expert Gary Sick. He was a military advisor to three US presidents and was recently quoted in Germany’s Der Spiegel magazine saying: The recent shift in US emphasis to “Iran’s support for terrorism in Iraq….is a complete change and is potentially dangerous.” That’s because it’s much easier proving (true or not) Iran supports Iraqi resistance fighters than it poses an imminent nuclear threat to the world.

    Der Spiegel also reports on a leak “by an official close to” Dick Cheney that he’s “already asked for a backroom analysis of how a war with Iran might begin (and in) the scenario concocted by (his) strategists, Washington’s first step would be to convince Israel to fire missiles at Iran’s (Natanz) uranium enrichment plant.” That would provoke Iran to retaliate and give the Bush administration the excuse it needs “to attack military targets and nuclear facilities in Iran.” That’s OK with Democrats if it comes including House Speaker Nancy Pelosi Black Agenda Report writer Margaret Kimberly calls a “Quisling” and an “absolute disaster for the Democrat Party and….the entire nation (because of her) eagerness to cooperate with the Bush regime (and) her incompetence in leading Congress.”

    Other key Democrats share those qualities and that assures extremist Attorney General nominee Michael Mukasey’s confirmation won’t be challenged. That’s in spite of reports top Senate Judiciary Committee Democrats Chairman Leahy and Majority Whip Durbin say their votes depend on his admitting waterboarding is torture. During his confirmation hearing, Mukasey was evasive and noncommittal.

    When asked during questioning, he incredulously claimed not to know what waterboarding is even though it’s been around for centuries and what it entails is common knowledge. Mukasey would only say “IF (waterboarding) is torture, it is unconstitutional.” He then repeated the White House line “We don’t torture” even though he knows DOJ legal opinions confirm the Bush administration condones the practice by endorsing “the harshest interrogation techniques ever used by the Central Intelligence Agency.”

    He should also know about the ACLU’s new “Administration of Torture” book based on FOIA requested evidence. It documents that “marching orders” for torture came from Donald Rumsfeld so the White House had to be involved as well. That includes George Bush and Alberto Gonzales, who in 2002 as White House Counsel, called the Geneva Conventions “quaint” and “obsolete” and as Attorney General authorized physical and psychological brutality as official administration policy.

    Mukasey promises business as usual as AG and confirmed it by claiming “I don’t think (Guantanamo prisoners) are mistreated.” He also supports the president’s right to imprison US citizens without charge and deny “unlawful enemy combatants” their habeas rights, but that’s OK with Democrats on the Judiciary Committee with a large party majority sure to agree.

    In a follow-up letter Senator Leahy requested, Mukasey was just as evasive and noncommittal as during his confirmation hearing. He sidestepped commenting on presidential surveillance powers limits beyond what FISA allows and continued to avoid admitting waterboarding is torture. Instead he said: ….”there is a real issue (whether) the techniques presented and discussed at the hearing and in your letter are even part of any program of questioning detainees.”

    He then added if confirmed he’ll concentrate on “solving problems cooperatively with Congress,” advise George Bush appropriately on any “technique” he determines to be unlawful, and the president is bound by constitutional and treaty obligations that prohibit torture. This man and the president defile the law and practically boast about it, but Democrats will confirm him anyway as the next Attorney General.

    House Democrats Pass New Terrorism Prevention Law

    Almost without notice, the House overwhelmingly (404 – 6) passed the Violent Radicalization and Homegrown Terrorism Prevention Act of 2007 (HR 1955) on October 23 some are calling “the thought crime prevention bill.” It now moves to the Senate where if passed and signed by George Bush will establish a commission and Center of Excellence to study and act against thought criminals.

    The bill’s language hides its true intent as “violent radicalization” and “homegrown terrorism” are whatever the administration says they are. Violent radicalization is defined as “adopting or promoting an extremist belief system (to facilitate) ideologically based violence to advance political, religious or social change.” Homegrown terrorism is used to mean “the use, planned use, or threatened use, of force or violence by a group or individual born, raised, or based and operating primarily with the United States or any (US) possession to intimidate or coerce the (US) government, the civilian population….or any segment thereof (to further) political or social objectives.”

    Along with other repressive laws enacted post-9/11, HR 1955 may be used against any individual or group with unpopular views – those that differ from established state policies even when they’re illegal as are many under George Bush. Prosecutors henceforth will be able to target anti-war protesters, believers in Islam, web editors, internet bloggers and radio and TV show hosts and commentators with views the bill calls “terrorist-related propaganda.”

    If this legislation becomes law, which is virtually certain, any dissenting anti-government action or opinion may henceforth be called “violent radicalization and homegrown terrorism” with stiff penalties for anyone convicted. This bill now joins the ranks of other repressive post-9/11 laws like Patriot I and II, Military Commissions and Protect America Acts that combined with this one are grievous steps toward a full-blown national security police state everyone should fear and denounce.

    Blame it on Congress and the 110th Democrat-led one that was elected to end these practices but just made them worse….and there’s still 14 months to go to the term’s end with plenty of time left to vaporize Iran and end the republic if that’s the plan.

    Stephen Lendman lives in Chicago and can be reached at lendmanstephen@sbcglobal.net.

    Also visit his blog site at sjlendman.blogspot.com and listen to The Steve Lendman News and Information Hour on TheMicroEffect.com Mondays at noon US central time.

    The Big Lie: ‘Iran Is a Threat’

    0

    Scott Ritter

    Iran has never manifested itself as a serious threat to the national security of the United States, or by extension as a security threat to global security. At the height of Iran’s “exportation of the Islamic Revolution” phase, in the mid-1980’s, the Islamic Republic demonstrated a less-than-impressive ability to project its power beyond the immediate borders of Iran, and even then this projection was limited to war-torn Lebanon.

    Iranian military capability reached its modern peak in the late 1970’s, during the reign of Reza Shah Pahlevi. The combined effects of institutional distrust on the part of the theocrats who currently govern the Islamic Republic of Iran concerning the conventional military institutions, leading as it did to the decay of the military through inadequate funding and the creation of a competing paramilitary organization, the Iranian Revolutionary Guard Command (IRGC), and the disastrous impact of an eight-year conflict with Iraq, meant that Iran has never been able to build up conventional military power capable of significant regional power projection, let alone global power projection.

    Where Iran has demonstrated the ability for global reach is in the spread of Shi’a Islamic fundamentalism, but even in this case the results have been mixed. Other than the expansive relations between Iran (via certain elements of the IRGC) and the Hezbollah movement in Lebanon, Iranian success stories when it comes to exporting the Islamic revolution are virtually non-existent. Indeed, the efforts on the part of the IRGC to export Islamic revolution abroad, especially into Europe and other western nations, have produced the opposite effect desired. Based upon observations made by former and current IRGC officers, it appears that those operatives chosen to spread the revolution in fact more often than not returned to Iran noting that peaceful coexistence with the West was not only possible but preferable to the exportation of Islamic fundamentalism. Many of these IRGC officers began to push for moderation of the part of the ruling theocrats in Iran, both in terms of interfacing with the west and domestic policies.

    The concept of an inherent incompatibility between Iran, even when governed by a theocratic ruling class, and the United States is fundamentally flawed, especially from the perspective of Iran. The Iran of today seeks to integrate itself responsibly with the nations of the world, clumsily so in some instances, but in any case a far cry from the crude attempts to export Islamic revolution in the early 1980’s. The United States claims that Iran is a real and present danger to the security of the US and the entire world, and cites Iranian efforts to acquire nuclear technology, Iran’s continued support of Hezbollah in Lebanon, Iran’s “status” as a state supporter of terror, and Iranian interference into the internal affairs of Iraq and Afghanistan as the prime examples of how this threat manifests itself.

    On every point, the case made against Iran collapses upon closer scrutiny. The International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), mandated to investigate Iran’s nuclear programs, has concluded that there is no evidence that Iran is pursuing a nuclear weapons program. Furthermore, the IAEA has concluded that it is capable of monitoring the Iranian nuclear program to ensure that it does not deviate from the permitted nuclear energy program Iran states to be the exclusive objective of its endeavors. Iran’s support of the Hezbollah Party in Lebanon – Iranian protestors shown here supporting Hezbollah leader Sayyed Hassan Nasrallah during an anti-Israel rally – while a source of concern for the State of Israel, does not constitute a threat to American national security primarily because the support provided is primarily defensive in nature, designed to assist Hezbollah in deterring and repelling an Israeli assault of sovereign Lebanese territory. Similarly, the bulk of the data used by the United States to substantiate the claims that Iran is a state sponsor of terror is derived from the aforementioned support provided to Hezbollah. Other arguments presented are either grossly out of date (going back to the early 1980’s when Iran was in fact exporting Islamic fundamentalism) or unsubstantiated by fact.

    The US claims concerning Iranian interference in both Iraq and Afghanistan ignore the reality that both nations border Iran, both nations were invaded and occupied by the United States, not Iran, and that Iran has a history of conflict with both nations that dictates a keen interest concerning the internal domestic affairs of both nations. The United States continues to exaggerate the nature of Iranian involvement in Iraq, arresting “intelligence operatives” who later turned out to be economic and diplomatic officials invited to Iraq by the Iraqi government itself. Most if not all the claims made by the United States concerning Iranian military involvement in Iraq and Afghanistan have not been backed up with anything stronger than rhetoric, and more often than not are subsequently contradicted by other military and governmental officials, citing a lack of specific evidence.

    Iran as a nation represents absolutely no threat to the national security of the United States, or of its major allies in the region, including Israel. The media hype concerning alleged statements made by Iran’s President Ahmadinejad has created and sustained the myth that Iran seeks the destruction of the State of Israel. Two points of fact directly contradict this myth. First and foremost, Ahmadinejad never articulated an Iranian policy objective to destroy Israel, rather noting that Israel’s policies would lead to its “vanishing from the pages of time.” Second, and perhaps most important, Ahmadinejad does not make foreign policy decisions on the part of the Islamic Republic of Iran. This is the sole purview of the “Supreme Leader,” the Ayatollah Khomeini. In 2003 Khomeini initiated a diplomatic outreach to the United States inclusive of an offer to recognize Israel’s right to exist. This initiative was rejected by the United States, but nevertheless represents the clearest indication of what the true policy objective of Iran is vis-à-vis Israel.

    The fact of the matter is that the “Iranian Threat” is derived solely from the rhetoric of those who appear to seek confrontation between the United States and Iran, and largely divorced from fact-based reality. A recent request on the part of Iran to allow President Ahmadinejad to lay a wreath at “ground zero” in Manhattan was rejected by New York City officials. The resulting public outcry condemned the Iranian initiative as an affront to all Americans, citing Iran’s alleged policies of supporting terrorism. This knee-jerk reaction ignores the reality that Iran was violently opposed to al-Qaeda’s presence in Afghanistan throughout the 1990’s leading up to 2001, and that Iran was one of the first Muslim nations to condemn the terror attacks against the United States on September 11, 2001.

    A careful fact-based assessment of Iran clearly demonstrates that it poses no threat to the legitimate national security interests of the United States. However, if the United States chooses to implement its own unilateral national security objectives concerning regime change in Iran, there will most likely be a reaction from Iran which produces an exceedingly detrimental impact on the national security interests of the United States, including military, political and economic. But the notion of claiming a nation like Iran to constitute a security threat simply because it retains the intent and capability to defend its sovereign territory in the face of unprovoked military aggression is absurd. In the end, however, such absurdity is trumping fact-based reality when it comes to shaping the opinion of the American public on the issue of the Iranian “threat.”

    Scott Ritter was a Marine Corps intelligence officer from 1984 to 1991 and a United Nations weapons inspector in Iraq from 1991 to 1998. He is the author of numerous books, including “Iraq Confidential” (Nation Books, 2005) , “Target Iran” (Nation Books, 2006) and his latest, “Waging Peace: The Art of War for the Antiwar Movement” (Nation Books, April 2007).

    Ex-MI6 chief: Too much weight on Iraq intelligence

    0

    · Government ‘used details to gain support for attack’
    · Links between al-Qaida and Saddam ‘not true’

    Richard Norton-Taylor
    The Guardian

    The head of MI6 at the time of the invasion of Iraq said last night that the government placed too much weight on intelligence claims to help persuade opponents in parliament to support the war. Sir Richard Dearlove said Iraq demonstrated the dangers when “policy was built round intelligence and little else or when it was used for the primary justification for government action”.Policy was “over-dependent on intelligence particularly when it was presented to parliament”, he said. There was a fear that what he called “other factors” might otherwise “carry the day with political opponents of the war”. The episode had “highly undesirable consequences for the intelligence community”.

    Sir Richard also admitted that claims by neo-con elements in the Bush administration that there were links between al-Qaida and Saddam Hussein were not true. “You know as well as I know there was no connection between 9/11 and Iraq,” he said.

    Though Sir Richard’s admissions reflect those made by others since the invasion of Iraq, and notably in Lord Butler’s report on the use of intelligence, it is the first time he has commented publicly on the affair. He was speaking at the London School of Economics on the subject of Intelligence and the Media at a meeting sponsored by the Polis thinktank.

    Sir Richard, who retired in 2004 and rarely speaks in public, said “intelligence was expected to carry too much weight” in the formulation of policy. He described the way intelligence was used in the build-up to the war, particularly in the use the government made of its discredited Iraqi weapons dossier, as “sui generis” and “most unlikely to happen again”.

    However, he warned that governments might feel the need to publish intelligence to buttress support for any action against Iran. In the hypothesis of a pre-emptive attack on Iran, he suggested, there would have to be “proof positive” that “the right targets” were hit.

    Sir Richard insisted that MI6 did not “set out to misinform” the government or the public over Iraq. He said: “The intelligence that was released was believed to be correct at the time it was released”.

    He acknowledged that over Iraq the relationship between the intelligence agencies and the media “suffered greatly” because trust was compromised. The fundamental causes of this was “not under the control of either party”, he said.

    Leaked minutes of a meeting on Iraq chaired by Tony Blair in Downing Street on July 23 2002 reveal that Sir Richard , reporting on his talks in Washington, warned that “the intelligence and facts were being fixed around the policy”. Sir Richard is reported to have since downplayed the significance of the comment.

    DVDs are a baby brain-drain

    1

    DVDs that claim to make babies brighter are not only ineffectual, they take away vital development time with loving care-givers

    A few years ago I was asked to help to launch Baby Einstein in this country. I was put off by the name — images of overzealous parents hot-housing their small children in the vain hope of growing their IQs — and became more dubious when I looked at the content, which was mainly coloured patterns and music reminiscent of Fantasia, but nowhere near as attractive. I couldn’t see what this was doing for babies, so I declined.

    There are now a number of similar ranges, many having names that contain the same questionable promise — Brainy Baby, Baby Bright, which claims a scientific approach, and Baby IQ which has harnessed no less a mentor than the London Symphony Orchestra. Most of these titles consist of live action or simple animation and show bright patterns, other babies and basic scenes involving animals, nature, abstracts etc.

    Overall, the content of these DVDs promotes passive viewing by a baby rather than using the DVD platform as an opportunity for interactive play with a parent or carer. The majority suggest that the baby will benefit intellectually from absorbing the visual and aural content. I’m aware of no credible scientific data to back up these claims and there’s no supporting material to help to guide or reassure parents. In short, it is difficult to avoid the conclusion that these are products with no real benefit to babies and give parents a false notion that watching television can improve a child’s intelligence.

    All parents have a fervent desire to ensure that their children are given thebest possible chance to realise their full potential. Most parents, however, are unaware that babies start to develop their brain-power from the moment that they are born. They’re wired to communicate and, moments after birth, will poke out their tongues at you if you talk animatedly while making eye-contact. They’re already developing learning skills, memory and understanding.

    In their first year, babies make half a million brain connections a second. That’s why their brains triple in weight in the first 12 months.

    Brain connections grow every time that babies think and every time they move their bodies, particularly when a parent or carer is playing, talking or singing. In this nourishing environment babies’ learning opportunities are unlimited. So a baby’s brain starts to sift, sort, analyse, assess and memorise at a breath-taking pace all through the first year and nearly as rapidly during the second and third years.

    However, this ripening can’t occur in a vacuum. Caring adults are needed to help children to grow their highly receptive brains by interacting with them. Not surprisingly, parents and other care-givers are crucial components in the cognitive development of their babies. But with so much conflicting information out there, parents are often confused and don’t know where to begin.

    It’s tempting to clutch at straws which must be the reason why the mystique grew up around the fabled, though disputed, Mozart effect — a theory stating that classical music increases brain activity more effectively than other kinds.

    The Mozart effect, though first described by a Frenchman in 1991, really surfaced only in 1993 when a US psychologist and a physicist at the University of California reported that brief exposure to a Mozart piano sonata could raise an IQ score 8-9 points. A New York Times piece in 1994 extrapolated their findings to “. . . listening to Mozart actually makes you smarter”. Subsequent studies have cast doubt on this claim. But it hasn’t stopped a slew of baby products such as Baby Mozart, Mozart for Babies, with the implied claim that they will promote, among other things, the development of logical thinking and maths ability. For parents wanting to do the best for their babies it has purchase appeal, even if in reality the benefits are unproven.

    If it’s baby cognitive development you’re after, we have to look at what sights and sounds do for the brain. We can do that using a Positron Imaging Technology scan, which can map out in three dimensions what’s going on in the brain by measuring bloodflow. With this scan you can identify which activities stimulate which areas of the brain.

    Watching TV, or for our purpose, looking at changing colours and images, stimulates the occipital lobes at the back of the brain. Accompanying sounds and music stimulate the temporal lobes at the sides of the brain. So far, so good, except that the part of the brain in which we’re most interested for cognitive development is the prefrontal cortex at the very front of the brain and it’s left relatively untouched by either of these activities.

    In babies, the prefrontal cortex grows massively in the first 12 months because it’s used for learning, thinking, memorising, expressing personality and fine-tuning social behaviour. This, in turn, cannot happen without a loving, caring, interested adult. What parents should know is that it isn’t hearing Mozart or seeing coloured images that promotes brain development, it’s hearing a care-giver’s voice, seeing the face and interacting lovingly that makes all the difference.

    As it happens, in the experiments of Dr Kawashima, of Nintendo DS Brain Training fame, the prefrontal cortex lights up like a Christmas tree by reading aloud. Yes, all that early book-reading with you is what your baby really needs.

    Let’s say you are a model parent, can you make your baby more intelligent? The scientific consensus says that you can’t. Nothing can. The baby’s interaction with the care-giver is all about giving her the skills and confidence to make the most of the intelligence she has, which in fact makes all the difference to successful child development.

    A DVD in front of which you park your baby doesn’t help her to reach her full potential. Developing cognition does involve sight and sound, but only when mixed together with joyful human interaction through touching, talking, smiling and feeling. Then learning, memorising, socialising and motor skills all move forward together. In one year, a baby leaps from seeing a cat for the first time to understanding that her family’s cat, a picture of a cat and a toy cat, though very different, are all cats. She has learned that a cat is not only a thing but a concept with its own essential qualities. Huge!

    Emotional development is much neglected but crucially important in the first 18 months. Acquiring emotional control and balance will make a baby friendly, generous, outgoing and loving, but only if a parent patiently coaches her.

    And what about relationships? The relationship a child forms with her parents, and in the first instance with her mother, is the blueprint for all other relationships. Babies become social by imitating. They first imitate facial expressions, then movements, then speech, then whole patterns of behaviour. They are born longing to talk and, as I’ve said, will have a “conversation” with you from birth if you use their special language. Baby birds don’t sing if they don’t hear birdsong in their first six weeks. Human babies are much the same with speech — the more they hear and interact, the more they learn.

    In August, I was contacted again by Baby Einstein (now owned by Disney) through its PR agency, which said it was looking to acquire scientific backing with expert endorsement and would I consider possibly acting as a spokesperson. This was just after an article appeared in Newsweek, reporting research from the University of Washington that for every hour that infants of 8-16 months watch videos such as Baby Einstein and Brainy Baby they understood 6-8 fewer words than other babies who were not exposed to such videos. Researchers said that their results pointed to these DVDs being a poor substitute for warm, human, social interaction.

    Professor Fred Zimmerman, associate professor of paediatrics at Washington University, lead author of the study and interviewed by Newsweek said: “Parents are getting a very mixed message here — they are hearing loud and clear from marketers of these products that they can be very educational. But, in fact, there’s no scientific evidence.” Professor Zimmerman contends that baby videos are displacing time a child would spend with a carer. “So”, he says, “there’s a possibility that what’s on the screen is pointless, if not outright harmful. Baby videos may be undoing all the benefit of a parent’s hard work in terms of reading and story-telling.”

    In the US, Professor Zimmerman believes that a third of parents have bought into claims of the marketers who promise to build vocabulary and enhance cognitive development. The baby brain industry is now worth $20 billion (£10 billion) annually, according to Susan Gregory Thomas in her book Buy, Buy Baby.

    Those marketers will defend their share with every weapon and argument they can muster, including trying to get me onside. But I’ve declined a second time.

    www.miriamstoppard.com

    —— A spokesman for Disney says: “The company has always been committed to maintaining the highest standards of practice. Baby Einstein products are designed as interactive tools for parents — helping them to expose their little ones to the world around them in playful and enriching ways.”

    CCTV risks making life less safe

    0

    It’s not only about civil liberties. The cameras produce fallible images, encourage detachment, and corrode civic values

    Libby Brooks
    The Guardian

    The bustling high street in the Hampshire village of Stockbridge is less than a mile from end to end. Pretty red brick cottages consumed by blushing ivy face a parade of long-established local businesses: a butcher, a grocer, a ladies’ dress shop, as well as a number of newer enterprises, including two art galleries, which have sprung up to cater for the tourists tempted by the trout fishing in the nearby river Test. But this is the village that, earlier this year, prompted Hampshire’s deputy chief constable, Ian Readhead, to assert that Britain was becoming a country he no longer wanted to live in.

    There is a prominent road sign midway down the high street, alerting motorists to the possibility of wandering mallards from the duck pond. Less obvious are the three CCTV cameras which so offended Readhead. In an interview in May, he highlighted Stockbridge in a broadside against Britain’s surveillance society, bemoaning the spread of cameras to quiet rural villages with low crime rates, such as this one.

    But for the traders of Stockbridge, who matched police funds to pay for the system, their minimalist surveillance is more than welcome. Although nobody can point me to an instance where footage has been used to apprehend a criminal, all attest to an increased sense of security. And they firmly believe in the deterrence effect. As one shop owner told me: “It doesn’t make me self-conscious. If you’re doing something that you don’t want to be seen on camera, then you probably shouldn’t be doing it.”

    An alarming new report, the first official joint government and police assessment of our national CCTV strategy, has drifted into the public domain largely unnoticed. It finds that more than 80% of cameras produce images of such poor quality that they are of no use for detection purposes, and that the majority were positioned in the wrong places. The report also highlighted that there are no statutory safeguards on CCTV and that, because anyone is able to set up a network, the authorities have no accurate figure on how many are in operation.

    Perhaps the most significant thing about this report is that it exists at all. In a country with at least 4.2m cameras, one for every 14 people, estimated to comprise 20% of the world’s allocation, where the Home Office spent 78% of its crime prevention budget on installing these systems in the 1990s, and has invested £500m of public money in CCTV over the last decade, the lack of authoritative research into the efficacy of surveillance is troubling.

    If CCTV was an expensive medical treatment, the government would have demanded compelling evidence before farming it out to private companies, which rake in serious cash from its manufacture. But instead MPs clamour for more, egged on by their constituents, because CCTV has been almost unresistingly accepted as an elixir for the low-level criminality and public disorder that most concerns the public, despite the fact that the limited research available does not bear this out. Deterrence is notoriously hard to evaluate, but the most comprehensive study, carried out in 2005, found little overall impact on crime levels. A four-year study in Cardiff found no reduction in street violence, although injuries were less severe because police and ambulances were alerted more swiftly.

    Most experts agree that the only time cameras earn their keep is in clean-ups after a crime. Here I should declare an interest. When I was assaulted on a train several years ago, it was CCTV that identified my attacker and secured his conviction. But still hit rates don’t correlate with ubiquity. As the new Home Office report shows, I had only a two in 10 chance of a successful ID.

    Yet the information commissioner’s office has found in its research “a general unquestioning assumption [among the public] that CCTV works”. The myth of the silver bullet, justifying a massive infringement for dubious payback, has taken hold. Our lack of privacy has become utterly mundane. The average Londoner is caught on camera 300 times a day. Mark you, today someone is eating their sandwiches while they view you going about your honest business.

    The Stockbridge shopkeeper would say that shouldn’t matter. But it does matter because, even beyond the compelling civil liberties arguments, the explosion of CCTV fundamentally alters a population’s relationship with its public spaces. Those who are most aware of being watched respond in ways that only render them more vulnerable to sanction: teenagers hoist up their hoodies, demonstrators cover their faces on marches. Much more insidious is the way that our misplaced confidence in an omnipresent witnessing eye apparently makes us feel absolved of any responsibility to intervene ourselves.

    Britain has become a witness culture, inured to watching and being watched. Be it Big Brother or posting friends’ antics on YouTube, our leisure time has become increasingly infected with the imperative to expose ourselves and others. No activity, no individual, is deemed valid without an audience.

    So maybe acquiescence to a constant mechanical witness should not come as such a surprise. But it bears repeating that that winking eye in the corner is singularly failing to keep us safe. And it has corrupted our sense of public and private to the extent that, every evening, we can go home to help ourselves to a piece of a stranger’s life while, on the street, we feel no compunction to help at all.

    US advisor: Waterboarding is torture

    0

    By Leonard Doyle

    When the US military trains soldiers to resist interrogation, it uses a torture technique from the Middle Ages, known as “waterboarding”. Its use on terror suspects in secret US prisons around the world has come to symbolise the Bush administration’s no-nonsense enthusiasm for the harshest questioning techniques.

    Although waterboarding has been considered torture for over a century and the US military is banned from using it, controversy over its continuing use by the CIA may be about to derail the appointment of President Bush’s candidate for US Attorney-General.

    Michael Mukasey, a retired federal judge from New York and a veteran of several al-Qa’ida trials, was questioned by a Senate committee on Tuesday and refused to say whether waterboarding was illegal.

    Instead, he called the technique “repugnant to me” and promised to investigate further if he was confirmed in the job. He explained that he could not say yet whether the practice was illegal because he had not been briefed on the secret methods of US interrogators and he did not want to put the CIA officers who used it in “personal legal jeopardy”.

    Even though Congress banned waterboarding in the US military in 2005, it did not do so for the CIA. As a result, Mr Mukasey told senators, it was uncertain whether this technique or other harsh methods constituted “cruel, inhuman or degrading” treatment. His answers did not satisfy the Democrats, however, and his approval now hinges on whether he is willing to say the torture method is against US law.

    In a further embarrassment for Mr Bush yesterday, Malcolm Nance, an advisor on terrorism to the US departments of Homeland Security, Special Operations and Intelligence, publicly denounced the practice. He revealed that waterboarding is used in training at the US Navy’s Survival, Evasion, Resistance and Escape School in San Diego, and claimed to have witnessed and supervised “hundreds” of waterboarding exercises. Although these last only a few minutes and take place under medical supervision, he concluded that “waterboarding is a torture technique — period”.

    The practice involves strapping the person being interrogated on to a board as pints of water are forced into his lungs through a cloth covering his face while the victim’s mouth is forced open. Its effect, according to Mr Nance, is a process of slow-motion suffocation.

    Typically, a victim goes into hysterics on the board as water fills his lungs. “How much the victim is to drown,” Mr Nance wrote in an article for the Small Wars Journal, “depends on the desired result and the obstinacy of the subject.

    “A team doctor watches the quantity of water that is ingested and for the physiological signs which show when the drowning effect goes from painful psychological experience to horrific, suffocating punishment, to the final death spiral. For the uninitiated, it is horrifying to watch.”

    The CIA director Michael Hayden has tried to defuse the controversy. He claims that, since 2002, aggressive interrogation methods in which a prisoner believes he is about to die have been used on only about 30 of the 100 al-Qai’da suspects being held by the US. Meanwhile, a CIA official told The New York Times waterboarding had only been used three times. The Bush administration has suggested that the interrogation of al-Qai’da’s second-in-command, Khalid Sheikh Mohammed, was a success thanks to the technique, and used this to justify continued aggressive interrogations of suspects in secret CIA prisons.

    While US media reports typically state that waterboarding involves “simulated drowning”, Mr Nance explained that “since the lungs are actually filling with water”, there is nothing simulated about it. “Waterboarding,” he said, “is slow-motion suffocation with enough time to contemplate the inevitability of blackout and expiration. When done right, it is controlled death.”

    Mr Nance said US troops were trained to withstand waterboarding, watched by a doctor, a psychologist, an interrogator and a backup team. “When performed with even moderate intensity over an extended time on an unsuspecting prisoner — it is torture, without doubt,” he added. “Most people cannot stand to watch a high-intensity, kinetic interrogation. One has to overcome basic human decency to endure watching or causing the effects. The brutality would force you into a personal moral dilemma between humanity and hatred. It would leave you to question the meaning of what it is to be an American.”

    Mr Mukasey’s nomination goes before the Senate next week. Three Democratic presidential candidates, including Hillary Clinton, have already said they will not support him. However, the White House said yesterday that it did not believe his nomination was in jeopardy.

    ‘I felt I was drowning and I was in terrible agony’

    Henri Alleg, a journalist, was tortured in 1957 by French forces in Algeria. He described the ordeal of water torture in his book The Question. Soldiers strapped him over a plank, wrapped his head in cloth and positioned it beneath a running tap. He recalled: “The rag was soaked rapidly. Water flowed everywhere: in my mouth, in my nose, all over my face. But for a while I could still breathe in some small gulps of air. I tried, by contracting my throat, to take in as little water as possible and to resist suffocation by keeping air in my lungs for as long as I could. But I couldn’t hold on for more than a few moments. I had the impression of drowning, and a terrible agony, that of death itself, took possession of me. In spite of myself, all the muscles of my body struggled uselessly to save me from suffocation. In spite of myself, the fingers of both my hands shook uncontrollably. ‘That’s it! He’s going to talk,’ said a voice.

    The water stopped running and they took away the rag. I was able to breathe. In the gloom, I saw the lieutenants and the captain, who, with a cigarette between his lips, was hitting my stomach with his fist to make me throw out the water I had swallowed.”

    From: Alleg, Henri, The Question, University of Nebraska Press, Lincoln: 2006; original French edition © 1958 by Editions de Minuit

    De Menezes shooting trial jury out

    0

    A jury on Wednesday retired to consider its verdict in the trial of the Metropolitan Police over the shooting of Jean Charles de Menezes.

    The force is accused of a “catastrophic” series of errors leading to the death of the innocent Brazilian at Stockwell Tube station on July 22, 2005.

    Mr de Menezes, 27, was shot seven times by specialist firearms officers after he was mistaken for failed suicide bomber Hussain Osman.

    Mr Justice Henriques sent out the jury to begin its deliberations, in the fifth week of the Old Bailey trial.

    The Office of the Commissioner of the Metropolitan Police denies a single charge under health and safety legislation of exposing the public to risk.

    http://www.express.co.uk/posts/view/23853/De-Menezes-shooting-trial-jury-out

    CIA director defends torture

    0

    PAMELA HESS

    CIA Director Michael Hayden defended his agency’s interrogation practices Tuesday as political pressure mounted on President Bush’s attorney general nominee to reject a technique that allegedly was part of the CIA’s interrogation program.

    “Our programs are as lawful as they are valuable,” Hayden said in remarks prepared for delivery to the Chicago Council on Global Affairs. “The best sources of information on terrorists and their plans are the terrorists themselves.”

    Hayden said “the irreplaceable nature of that intelligence is the sole reason we have rendition, detention and interrogation programs.”

    Several senior Senate Democrats had vowed to vote against the president’s nominee for attorney general, Michael Mukasey, unless he stated unequivocally that the practice of “waterboarding” is torture. That would render the practice illegal. The U.S. military already forbids it.

    In a letter to Senate Judiciary Committee Democrats late Tuesday, Mukasey called waterboarding “repugnant” but said he didn’t know if it is illegal because he hasn’t been cleared to receive a classified briefing on it. If after further study he finds that it is, he would rescind any federal legal opinion that allows its use, he wrote.

    In September, ABC News reported that Hayden had banned waterboarding in CIA interrogations in 2006. Agency officials have neither confirmed nor denied waterboarding prisoners in the past, and they would not confirm the reported ban.

    It is believed that fewer than five high-value detainees have been subjected to waterboarding, and the technique has not been used since 2003.

    Waterboarding simulates drowning by immobilizing a prisoner with his head lower than his feet and pouring water over his face. Hayden said harsher interrogation techniques are used in “small, carefully run operations” that have been applied to fewer than 35 prisoners since 2002.

    Spy agency went too far, watchdog says

    0

    CSIS exceeded mandate and violated the rights of Canadian `terrorist,’ review panel reports

    The Canadian Security Intelligence Service violated the constitutional rights of a citizen and strayed beyond its security mandate into the realm of law enforcement, says a federal watchdog.

    In its annual report tabled late yesterday, the Security Intelligence Review Committee said Canada’s spy agency “arbitrarily detained” Mohammed Mansour Jabarah in contravention of the Charter of Rights.

    Jabarah, a Canadian citizen, is an admitted Al Qaeda member and leader of a terrorist cell that plotted to bomb the American and Israeli embassies in Singapore and Manila. He was apprehended in Oman in March 2002 after the plan was derailed.

    “Jabarah is a terrorist but also a Canadian citizen, and no matter how despicable his actions, the Charter conferred on him certain fundamental rights,” the review committee says in the report to Parliament.

    CSIS officials travelled to Oman and arranged for Jabarah’s return to Canada and subsequent transfer to the United States on a government-owned aircraft, since he apparently could not be charged with a crime under Canadian law.

    He pleaded guilty in the U.S. to a number of terrorism-related offences. Jabarah has not been sentenced and remains behind bars.

    The review committee, which reports to Parliament, examined CSIS’s investigation against service operational policy and procedures, ministerial direction and applicable Canadian law, including the CSIS Act and the Charter of Rights and Freedoms.

    The committee also obtained legal advice from Gerard LaForest, a former Supreme Court justice and Charter expert.

    The report found Jabarah’s decisions, made without the benefit of any independent legal advice, resulted in his self-incrimination and surrender to U.S. authorities.

    “SIRC’s review raised questions regarding CSIS’s contention that Jabarah’s decisions were made freely and voluntarily.”

    The committee said a court would also have considered various factors, including: Jabarah’s age, his emotional state, whether his fear of the alternatives influenced his return to Canada from Oman, the length of time he spent in the company of CSIS officials while in Canada, and the circumstances surrounding his decision to surrender himself to a foreign jurisdiction.

    A CSIS official told the committee Jabarah was not “read his rights” because CSIS isn’t a police service. “This response, subsequently confirmed in writing by the service, demonstrates a misunderstanding of the application of the Charter to government representatives carrying out their official duties.”

    The committee found Jabarah could not be prosecuted for any crime in Canada, since his terrorist activities pre-dated Canada’s Anti-terrorism Act. Therefore neither CSIS nor the police had any right to detain him. Based on these and other circumstances, the committee concluded Jabarah was “arbitrarily detained” by CSIS in violation of the Charter.

    In addition, his rights to silence, to legal counsel and to remain in Canada were breached, the report says.

    The review committee also concluded CSIS “strayed from its security intelligence mandate into the area of law enforcement.”

    CSIS did not immediately respond to the report.

    A spokesperson for Public Safety Minister Stockwell Day said the government fully accepts the review committee’s findings.

    Liberal Democrat MP to defy ID cards law

    0

    Patrick Wintour
    The Guardian

    Nick Clegg, the odds-on favourite to become Liberal Democrat leader, yesterday announced that he will break the law and refuse to provide details of his identity if the government presses ahead with plans to make ID cards compulsory.

    Drawing a parallel with resistance to the poll tax, he said he would also urge his fellow MPs and Lib Dem councils not to cooperate. Under the existing law, many British citizens will have their details voluntarily placed on to the ID card database when they apply for a passport or a driving licence.

    After 2010 details will be automatically placed on the database. Ministers have said at that point they will pass primary legislation so individuals still not on the database will be required to provide the Home Office with relevant details.

    Mr Clegg said last night: “If the legislation is passed I will lead a grassroots campaign of civil disobedience to thwart the identity cards programme … I, and I expect thousands of people like me, will simply refuse ever to register.”

    WITNESSES PICK OUT FIAT DRIVER IN DIANA CRASH

    0

    By Richard Palmer

    A COUPLE who saw a white Fiat car zig-zagging out of the underpass where Diana was killed yesterday identified a Vietnamese man as its probable driver.

    Georges and Sabine Dauzonne were giving evidence to the London inquest by video link from Paris.


    They independently picked out Le Van Thanh, a former security guard, from a series of photographs and said he “might well have been” the driver.


    Le Van Thanh, now a taxi driver, has refused to give evidence to the hearing.


    It was the first time Mr and Mrs Dauzonne had been asked to identify the Fiat driver, even though two police inquiries in Britain and France concluded that Diana’s chauffeur-driven Mercedes clipped a white Fiat Uno before it crashed in the Alma tunnel on August 31, 1997.


    Mohamed Al Fayed, whose son Dodi died when the car driven by Henri Paul crashed into a concrete pillar in the tunnel, believes French photographer James Andanson, allegedly an MI6 agent, was behind the wheel of the mysterious white Fiat Uno.


    But the police investigations in Britain and France have failed to find the driver, controversially ruling out Mr Andanson after hearing disputed claims that he was not in Paris at the time.


    Le Van Thanh, who was 22 at the time of the tragedy, was interviewed by French police two months after the crash because he owned a white Fiat Uno that matched paintwork found on the Mercedes wreck.


    It has been claimed he arrived home in a panic on the night of the crash and had his car re-sprayed red the next day.


    But French police decided there was insufficient evidence against him because he claimed he was at work when the crash happened.


    Also, his car showed no sign of having lost a rear light which was found in the tunnel after the crash.


    Mr and Mrs Dauzonne were separately shown two photos of the Vietnamese.


    One showed him sitting in the front of a red Fiat with Max, his pet Rottweiler, in the back, while in the second he was leaning on the bonnet, holding the dog by the lead.


    The couple were also shown a black-and-white picture of Mr Andanson with his wife in front of a white Fiat Uno and two photographs of separate groups of paparazzi who were suspects in the case.


    Nobody was identified to the couple or the jury, although the photographs have all been circulated widely.


    Mrs Dauzonne said afterwards: “Well, it is very difficult but I would say the man in the first two photographs rings clearly a bell.”


    Her husband also singled out the first two images, although he appeared less sure.


    “I saw someone who looked like the person I saw and I saw a dog behind in the car but it is far away in time,” he told the jury.


    Earlier, the couple had described seeing a man emerging in his white Fiat Uno from the tunnel at around the time of the crash, shortly before 12.30am.


    They said he had a large dog, perhaps an Alsatian, in the rear of the car and it was wearing a brightly-coloured muzzle or band.


    The car, they claimed, zig-zagged across the road and the driver seemed to be preoccupied, looking through his rear view mirror back into the tunnel.


    As Mr Dauzonne drove his Rolls-Royce from a slip road on to the riverside expressway just beyond the tunnel they nearly collided twice with the Fiat, the inquest heard, and got a good look at the driver.


    “I thought he was drunk,” Mr Dauzonne said.


    “My first impression was that it was Saturday night at half-past midnight in Paris, I thought someone drunk was driving that car.


    “Then I realised he was doing something with a mirror.”


    The hearing continues.

    Official Statement Confirms Detonations on 9/11

    1

    RINF Alternative News 

    Smoking gun testimony, demolition detonations reported by top brass in official statement

    The rank of this witness is:
    CAPTAIN KARIN DESHORE OF BATTALION 46

    CAPTAIN KARIN DESHORE QUOTE :

    “SOMEWHERE AROUND THE MIDDLE OF THE WORLD TRADE CENTER, THERE WAS THIS ORANGE AND RED FLASH COMING OUT.

    “INITIALLY IT WAS JUST ONE FLASH. THEN THIS FLASH JUST KEPT POPPING ALL THE WAY AROUND THE BUILDING AND THAT BUILDING HAD STARTED TO EXPLODE. THE POPPING SOUND, AND WITH EACH POPPING SOUND IT WAS INITIALLY AN ORANGE AND THEN RED FLASH CAME OUT OF THE BUILDING AND THEN IT WOULD JUST GO ALL AROUND THE BUILDING ON BOTH SIDES AS FAR AS I COULD SEE.

    “THESE POPPING SOUNDS AND THE EXPLOSIONS WERE GETTING BIGGER, GOING BOTH UP AND DOWN AND THEN ALL AROUND THE BUILDING. I WENT INSIDE AND TOLD EVERYBODY THAT THE OTHER BUILDING OR THERE WAS AN EXPLOSION OCCURRING UP THERE AND SAID THINK WE HAVE ANOTHER MAJOR EXPLOSION. I DONT KNOW IF WE ARE ALL GOING TO BE SAFE HERE.”

    The second building was being demolished.

    The complete interview is published below:

    Did the BBC Broadcast Fake News Reports?

    1

    David Miller

    A Spinwatch investigation has revealed that journalists working for the Services Sound and Vision Corporation (SSVC) have been commissioned to provide news reports to the BBC. The BBC has been using these reports as if they were genuine news. In fact, the SSVC is entirely funded by the Ministry of Defence as a propaganda operation, which according to its own website makes a ‘considerable contribution’ to the ‘morale’ of the armed forces.

    In the US, Washington has been rocked by the scandal of fake journalists. The Bush administration has been paying actors to produce news, paying journalists to write propaganda, and paying Republican party members to pose as journalists. In the UK this has been reported with our customary shake of the head at the bizarre nature of US politics and media. Implicitly we are relieved that, however bad things are here, at least we are not as bad as they are.

    But Spinwatch can reveal that we have our very own fake journalists operating in the UK. The government pays for their wages and they provide news as if they were normal journalists rather than paid propagandists. Normally they work in a little known outfit with the acronym BFBS, which stands for British Forces Broadcasting Service. BFBS exists to ‘entertain and inform’ British armed forces around the world and is entirely funded by the British Ministry of Defence. BFBS is run by the SSVC. But on this occasion no mention of Ministry of defence funding was made. She was introduced simply as a reporter ‘from the British Forces Broadcasting Service’ who ‘has been embedded with the Scots Guards’. As one wag inside the BBC puts it, this suggests a process of ‘double embedding’, first working for the MoD and second embedding with a regiment. The report began:

    ‘Route 6 is the main road North out of Basra. It runs through the badlands of Iraq’s marsh Arabs They make a living from crime – carjackings, smuggling and murder are common place. It’s also the scene of an age old feud between two warring tribes.’ (25 November 2004)

    Naturally enough, we are told that the regiment in which the reporter is ’embedded’ has resolved these tribal problems by negotiating ‘a ceasefire’ following which ‘ the two tribes had had their first nights sleep in several months’.

    The British Army view of the Iraqi people can be less than sympathetic. The army crackdown on looting early in the occupation was codenamed ‘Operation Ali Baba’ after the folk tale ‘Ali Baba and the forty thieves’. Issuing orders for Operation Ali Baba the commanding officer gave what the Army now acknowledges was an illegal order to ‘work them hard’. This led predictably to torture, only discovered when some brave soul in a photo developing shop reported the resulting record of abuse to the police. The view of the Iraq population as thieves is evidently shared by both torturers and propagandists.

    There were interviews with five separate British soldiers including one with a ‘master sniper’ brought in to counter resistance attacks on the Iraqi police. But there are no interviews with any Iraqis. The report concludes with a straight forward piece of propaganda for the occupation: ‘While the Scots Guards remain the ceasefire is likely to hold strong. There’s been little trouble in the area since the peace was brokered and the ceasefire has been extended to December the first. But the Iraqi police and national guard still lack confidence and credibility to keep the peace on their own and should the fighting resume, the governor of Basra has given the go ahead for the Scots Guards to use more force to make route 6 safe again.’ Even although the report has itself hinted that the fighting is targetting the occupation, we are left with the extraordinary statement that the army in illegal ocupation of Iraq is actually a ‘peacekeeping’ force.

    According to the editor of Good Morning Scotland the piece ‘was a bit a of a one-off because she happened to have been embedded with the Royal Scots. Until a few months ago Martha was a correspondent here at BBC Scotland (had been for several years) and is therefore a journalist we know and trust. ‘It was quite an unsual commission’. Unusual indeed, but not unique. Further inquiries by Spinwatch have revealed that another item from a different BFBS journalist was broadcast on Radio Scotland on Christmas day 2004. Insiders at BBC Scotland are livid about this, indeed several have contacted Spinwatch to pass on their concerns. One reports that colleagues have remarked on the ‘complete lack of balance’ of the piece and one described it as ‘an audio press release for the Army’.*

    But were the BBC right to say that the journalist concerned was one ‘we know and trust’? Certainly there has been a significant wave of journalists from the mainstream media signing up to work for the government since the election of the Blair government. Alastair Campbell is only the most famous. BBC journalists too have made the transition to propagandist as in the example of Mark Laity who became a spin doctor at NATO from whom no further work was commissioned..

    The BBC editor claimed in defence that ‘I should stress too that BFBS is not controlled by the MOD. It is funded by them in much the same way the BBC World Service is funded by the Foreign Office. Their journalists are actually employed by the SSVC, the Services Sound and Vision Corporation, which is a charitable organisation with editorial independence from the MoD.’ (email to the author, December 2004)

    This is not quite accurate. A quick visit to the website of the Services Sound and Vision Corporation (SSVC) which is the parent of the BFBS reveals that ‘Our work makes a considerable contribution to the maintenance of the efficiency and morale of the three Services. Our activities are carried out directly for the Ministry of Defence. Any profits are donated towards Forces’ welfare.’ Whatever might be said about the World Service relationship with the Foreign Office, it has not ever been accused of donating its profits to the welfare of Britain’s diplomats. The notion that the SSVC which is wholly funded by the MoD serves any other purpose than propaganda is fanciful.

    The BBC editor also noted: ‘Nonetheless we did flag up in the cue that she was embedded for the BFBS.’ They did indeed, but very few radio listeners are familiar with what the BFBS is. This is true of the whole network of propaganda agencies in the UK is little known, but anyone with an internet connection can find out about the organisations involved. The Foreign Office runs a network of fake news operations and has done for years. In recently times these have been contracted out to private production companies with the helpful effect that the government funding is further camouflaged. They have also been extended markedly to focus more cetnrally on the middle east since 2001. One such is the London Press Service which is described as follows on the government I-uk site: ‘an agency offering the latest British headline news, news round-ups, features and pictures for use by journalists overseas.’

    This is a rather coy way to describe a government propaganda service. Click on its website for an admission of the defining feature of this whole network of agencies; that the news on the site ‘is for free use by journalists’. Look in vain for an indication of who really funds this service. All you will see is a notice at the bottom of the home page : ‘The london Press Service is operated and maintained by Intelfax Ltd.’ Intelfax is in turn an independent production company but the London Press Service is funded entirely by the Foreign Office.

    Or take the example of British Satellite News (BSN) broadcast for free over the Reuters World News Service. According to its website, BSN ‘is a free television news and features service, which provides you with coverage of worldwide topical events and stories from a British perspective. Our dedicated team of experienced television journalists specialise in producing topical stories that inform and entertain a global audience. ‘ Again not much in the way of a clue that this is a fake news site. BSN is run by a company called World Television which does work for the BBC such as the live coverage of the TUC conference and also works for multinationals such as GSK and Nestle. The Foreign Office helpfully tells us that BSN has ‘a particular focus on the Arab/Islamic world.’ It also mentions that BSN ‘s fake news ‘is currently used by 35 broadcasters in the Middle East and over 440 worldwide.’ The secret of all this material is that it is not only free to use but that it is used as if it was genuine news and not British propaganda.

    The UK is awash with fake news, of which the examples here are only a taste, it is just that we don’t pay much attention to it. The American scandals over fake news are played out against the background of some pretty clear laws forbidding propaganda with a disguised source within the borders of the US. There are no laws forbidding fake news in the UK. Perhaps we needs some.

    Expert blows the cover on 9/11 inside job

    5

    Iraq war veteran and experienced demolitions expert blows the cover on 9/11 inside job

    Meet Torin Wolf. He has a broad and varied background as a US Army Combat Nurse during Operation Iraqi Freedom,…. 


        

    …building construction contractor, certified structural welder, certified asbestos and hazardous materials worker, experienced demolitions expert, teacher, radio show host, and well studied 9/11 truth activist. Torin knows how to put a building up, and bring the same building down in its own footprint. Torin’s free presentation, “Taking the Red Pill” was hosted by Brave New Books on 1904 Guadalupe in Austin last Saturday, June 23rd at 7 pm.

    Torin is proud of his native Cherokee heritage and his mother is the Band Historian of the White River Band Cherokee from the central United States. Since he received his GED at age 14, saying he is a smart guy is putting it lightly. For over 12 years he worked as a hazardous materials contractor specializing in asbestos abatement and concrete construction sampling. Add to his resume the fact that he designed and implemented well over 100 controlled demolitions. He was not just helping at a lower level in the demolitions – he was the guy responsible for calling the shots. Afterwards, he became a certified structural steel welder and worked in heavy and mega construction for over 5 years in locations around the world including several skyscrapers.

    Ironically, Torin signed his papers to join the army on September 11th, 2000. He knew something was wrong with the official 9/11 story when his army handlers took his squad into a room just in time to watch the buildings collapse. With his demolitions experience, he immediately knew those towers could not have fallen like that without explosives. He went on to serve “with honor and distinction” with the 21st Combat Support Hospital in Mosul, Iraq during the first part of Operation Iraqi Freedom and earned the Bronze Star with V device for valor in combat.

    While saving over 120 lives, Torin earned the Combat Medical Badge by providing medical care to US, allied, enemy soldiers, and civilians under combat conditions. Torin’s arms display Samoan life saving tattoos, each line and symbol representing a group of lives saved. The army would like you to think he wasn’t in Iraq, but unfortunately for them, Torin appears in a recent documentary filmed there. A true hero helping save lives in the middle east, Torin can be seen in section 4 of a PBS documentary called “Life and Death in the War Zone.”

    With Torins impressive list of qualifications, his unwavering voice holds a power that shatters the lies of 9/11 sold to us by the government and mainstream media, “The official story we’ve been told about 9/11 is absolutely, physically impossible.”

    Those words are not just backed up with his qualifications because his presentation goes through the hard physics as well. The presentation starts out with a serious warning that reminds us the state our country is in after the false flag attack and ensuing tyrannical hijacking of the government on that September morning. A hijacking not by Bin Laden, not by Al Qeada, but by a group of tyrants that orchestrated and benefited from 9/11. “Unless you want to be charged as a terrorist, I suggest you leave the room now. This is technically seditious material and you can be charged under section 802 of the Patriot Act just for being here.”

    This upsets a few people near the front row. Everyone looks around to see if that will scare anyone off but luckily no one leaves and the presentation continues. The bookstore is now filled with former American citizens, now terrorists, simply because they want to learn the truth of what happened on 9/11. If you think the patriot act only applies to foreigners or dehumanized muslims with brown skin, you are very wrong. Torin rubs the effect in even more, “We [American citizens] don’t even have to be charged — foreigners do.” Then tells us that the patriot act was written prior to 9/11, “This is admitted.” Also admitted is the fact that the patriot act has been used to come after American citizens over eight hundred times.

    The presentation moves on and goes through some of the just plain crazy theories of why the towers fell, such as space beams, holograms, missiles, orbs, pterodactyls, etc., and easily debunks them. Torin then adds, “There is evidence most of these are put out by the government as disinfo.” Then explains how the White House, in violation of the law, has bought 28 billion, “Billion with a B” in fake news.

    “But the craziest, most truly unhinged conspiracy theory for the towers falling on 9/11?” Torin asks rhetorically. “Fire.” The official story cannot be recreated by any experiment. NIST is the government agency involved in attempting to model what happened to the world trade center on 9/11, and they fail horribly. NIST never models what happens after the collapse initiation, and even what they do model before that is easily debunked. NIST created 16 separate physics programs to simulate the WTC 1 & 2 collapses and only got 1 to collapse partially. Torin adds, “When they did, [in the computer model] they removed 40% of the structural support.” The cross trusses that the towers received a significant amount of their strength from had to be removed to have a collapse in the computer simulation. Torin then mocks the official story, “There’s no such thing as a ‘pancake’ collapse, but there is a progressive collapse”A few slides are shown of progressive collapses throughout the world. None of them are anything like what happened to the world trade center with its pulverized concrete 100 microns or smaller just seconds after the start of collapse, and then its complete destruction. Torin uses his expertise to explain to the audience how and why a real progressive collapse occurs and subsequently why the WTC was not a progressive collapse. “The biggest problem with the argument,” Torin explains. “Time.”

    Several slides are then presented that show the hard physics and observed time of WTC 2 falling. Worst-case scenario would require 0.5 seconds per floor for collapse. “The absolute minimum amount of time for a progressive collapse would be 43 seconds.” How long did it take for the building to fall in reality? About 8.6 Seconds.

    “For the towers to fall at so close to free fall speed, over 110,000 separate and independent structural support points had to fail simultaneously. ‘Pancake theory’ does NOT explain the failure of the cores.” Torin explains passionately, obviously upset with the lies being told to the American people. “Nothing is holding the building up – No resistance. 110,000 structural failures at the same time.”


    Torin: “Nothing is holding the building up – No resistance. 110,000 structural failures at the same time.”

    Next, we are shown an incredible bit of detective work on Torins part. He shows a sequence of 12 different pictures of the collapse initiation of the North tower, WTC 1. Torin explains that the antenna on the top of the world trade center is a perfect guide of measurement for height, as there is a standard of changing the paint color of antennas once per fifty feet. The part of the antenna on the roof of WTC 1 appears black, then white alternated every fifty feet. There is a guide wire in the bottom left of every picture that shows that the camera does not move. Why is this picture so interesting? It shows the antenna, which is held up by the core columns, fall before the rest of the building while the fire line on the 78th floor doesn’t move. Torin then goes through the hard physics of the scene we’re looking at and explains how it directly contradicts the official story, “This building is not collapsing on the 78th floor. The antenna falls 56 feet before the 78th floor falls.”

    Torin then gives his expert analysis on building 7 for about five minutes. For those that are new to this information, building 7 was the third building to collapse on 9/11. After a thirty second countdown was given by firefighters, it collapsed perfectly into its own footprint at 5:20 in the afternoon. It housed the IRS, Department of Defense, CIA, Secret Service, and the Security and Exchange Commission among many others. While I can’t cover all of the hard hitting information Torin brought up about building 7, the highlight was his analysis of the collapse, which played over and over again on the screen behind him, “There is no doubt about it, this is a controlled demolition profile” then Torin directed everyone to view the kink, which is characteristic of a controlled demolition.

    Dangerously high levels of asbestos, lead, PCB’s, mercury, radioactive materials, and powdered concrete were in the air after the towers were demolished. Much to the surprise of many audience members, we learned from Torin that by far the most dangerous on the list was the pulverized concrete. The pulverized concrete, which was thick in the air around ground zero after the collapses of WTC 1 and 2, had a pH of 12 which is “about the same as drain cleaner.” This pH level, when breathed in and gets wet in your lungs, will cause chemical burns. “Wet concrete can burn you,” Torin adds. The asbestos is bad, but that will kill you over 20 years – the powdered concrete will kill much faster. So its no surprise to learn that all of the 9/11 rescue and recovery dogs are dead.
    Torins report goes on to explain how “emissions from the WTC piles were recorded to be hundreds of times above the legal Permissible Exposure Limit as established by the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health for more than 2 weeks after 9/11.” Sheer contempt of Christine Todd Whitman, head of the EPA is expressed next by Torin. Torin is rightly angry at her for saying the air was safe to breathe and that people should return to work, even though they refused to release the data from their testing at that time to substantiate their declaration. Torin uncovers that, “The EPA didn’t begin monitoring for airborne asbestos levels until 8:00pm September 14, 2001 — a day and a half after they told everyone that it was safe to return.” Torin then cites the exact law that the EPA is violating and the number of regulatory duties that are violated as well. Torin has caught the EPA in direct violation of a federal law, punishable by up to 10 years in prison as well as a $250,000 fine for each violation. Before the EPA did the tests, independent tests were done in which the machines that do the air quality testing “were so full of junk that they couldn’t be read.” If that is the case, Torin adds, “You must, by law, throw the sample out.”

    What was in the readable air samples? “Sampling of bulk materials and dust found generally low levels of asbestos.” Since Torin has worked with hazardous materials for over 12 years specializing in asbestos abatement, he knows quite a bit about the industry. “There is no such thing as a ‘low level of asbestos’. Bulk samples, by Federal law, either are (>1%) or are not (<1%) asbestos containing materials.” Bottom line, the EPA failed to perform its duties in regards to 9/11 and actively encouraged people to enter an unsafe area containing hazardous materials. As anyone working in the asbestos industry, Torin wanted to land the contract to clean the asbestos in the World Trade Center, “We all wanted the contract — you could clean a small section, sell the contract, and retire.” It was known in the industry as basically a goldmine of an asbestos abatement job, a contract worth over 3 billion dollars. Instead, the owner of the World Trade Center complex, “Lucky” Larry Silverstein actually made billions through insurance purchased before the towers destruction.

    A critical slide in the presentation of Rudolph Giuliani is displayed next. It should be noted that Giuliani agreed with Christine Todd Whitman that the air at ground zero was safe. Giuliani was appointed U.S. attorney for the Southern District of New York in 1983. “So he knew a thing or two about criminal investigation procedures,” Torin adds. Knowing that, one has to wonder why he “sent more than 99% of the steel from the WTC to China and Korea in violation of proper chain of evidence.” Not only that, it was sent overseas at a price undercutting a New Jersey company. A company in New Jersey offered to pay $0.56 per ton, but it was sent out of the country to be smelted before experts could analyze the steel for signs of explosives for $0.50 per ton. Giuliani is clearly one of the perpetrators behind the crimes of 9/11, and he was confronted recently by a truth squad led by Luke Rudkowski. They wanted to know why his story has changed five times about his activities on the morning of 9/11.

    So what does Torin think took down the WTC buildings? Different forms of thermite, such as thermate and one called super thermite. “If I was demolishing a building as high as the WTC, I would use thermite. It does what I want, when I want.” Torin then gets into the science of thermite, and what its actual chemical composition is. The same chemical composition found in the previously molten metal microspheres found in the WTC dust, discovered by professor Steven Jones. “The WTC ‘microsphere’ samples showed the presence of aluminum (Al), magnesium (Mg), manganese (Mn), potassium (K), copper (Cu), and sulphur (S).” Torins explanation continues, “The presence of sulphur in steel makes it brittle and lowers its melting point. Sulphur is NOT used in structural steel because of this. Powdered iron oxide (Fe2O4) and aluminum in equal parts make a compound called thermite. Add sulphur to thermite and you have a compound called thermate which is used in heavy demolition.”

    Torin then explains super thermite, “Add potassium permanganate (KMnO4) and cupric sulphide (CuSO4) to thermate and you have something called ‘Super Thermite’ which is explosive and used in mega-demolition, such as WTC 1 & 2.” For obviously criminal reasons, “NIST refuses to comment on the presence of Al, Mg, S, K, or Cu in the samples.” Torin finalizes the evidence of explosives with statements made from numerous firefighters and reporters at ground zero such as Capt. Karin DeShore of the New York Fire Department, “Somewhere around the middle of the World Trade Center [WTC 1] there was this orange and red flash. Initially it was just one, then this flash just kept popping all the way around the building and that building had started to explode… These popping sounds and the explosions were getting bigger going both up and down and then all around the building.” Torin explains, “That is a controlled demolition profile she is describing.”


    Torin: “Save it why? Because its a demolition angle”

    So who isn’t wanted for the crimes of 9/11? Gasps were heard from the audience as information relating to former paid CIA operative Tim Osman having no involvement in the crimes of 9/11. Tim Osman was Osama Bin Ladens CIA codename. New evidence has been released in the past month showing how the federal government allowed planes personally chartered by none other than Osama himself to get friends and family out of the country after 9/11. A quote from Osamas FBI page shows that he is in fact, not wanted for involvement in the crimes of that day. Torin shows a quote from the FBI director at the time, Robert Mueller, saying that there is “no legal proof to prove the identities of the suicidal hijackers.” Well sourced evidence is then shown from multiple mainstream news articles proving that many of the hijackers are still alive. The official story does not add up.

    The strongest part of Torins presentation is saved for the end, the aftermath of 9/11. A bleak picture is shown of the results of the false flag attack. An invasion of Afghanistan that was on Bush’s desk two days before 9/11, over 655,000 admitted dead in the spreading war in the middle east, cheap heroin out of Afghanistan that the former Taliban government destroyed, soon to be full scale war in Iran, several thousand dead troops, and an oppressive police state at home being enforced by some of the returning aggravated felons that were doing the same in Iraq. “We are not deprogrammed after battle,” Torin explains when covering the mental aspects of war.

    Torins insight as a combat nurse reveals that the actual amount of dead troops numbers around 15,000-17,000, not the 3,500 we have been told. “If you get shot in combat — Bam! Clock goes off. If you die in transit [to a hospital out of Iraq such as Ramstein in Germany] you are not an official Iraq casualty.” The same holds true if the troops out of the country die 24 hours after they were hit in Iraq. The official troop death number is just those that have died in action on the ground.

    We are then shown that legally, “terrorist” is a term that can be branded on virtually anyone. “If you have ever thought of spanking your child, running a red light, or made someone angry then, by this definition, you are a terrorist!” And if you are charged as a terrorist, you will be tried in a military court. With the power slanted against you in a military court, the Hamdi v. Rumsfeld case showed us that you do not even have to be released if found not guilty. This is a lot to swallow when you realize that “such persons are subject to indefinite imprisonment without charges, legal representation, or any of the other protections guaranteed by the Constitution,” Torins slide explains. Then the definition of domestic terrorism is shown, and we all learn that by this definition, not wearing your seatbelt, jaywalking, speeding, or spitting on the sidewalk is a terrorist act.

    Fliers are shown next that originated out of the Department of Homeland Security and the Phoenix, Arizona FBI office. These are shown to policing agencies around the country. Torin explains how nearly all of the groups encompass normal citizens who have done no wrong such as Torins favorite, “Lone Individuals – If you don’t fit in any group, this is it.”

    After a brief question and answer, Torin ends the presentation with a fitting quote from Thomas Jefferson, “Dissent is the highest form of patriotism.” A true patriot and truth activist, Torin is dissenting to expose the lies and crimes of our government in order to get it back from the tyrannical, criminal group sitting in power now and to return to the Constitution and Bill of Rights. If you want to join Torin in this fight or ask him a question, he can be heard every Saturday and Sunday on the We The People Radio Network from 12 to 2 pm central. After his radio show, you can join him in person with an Austin 9/11 truth squad, getting the word out on the south steps of the state capital on Congress avenue every Saturday. This article is only just a few highlights of Torins presentation, so don’t miss the one next month at Brave New Books.

    Update 7/29/2007: Download Torins Full presentation in Power Point format here. 


     

    Gibbwake